Skip to main content

Full text of "ERIC ED362878: Adventuring with Books: A Booklist for Pre-K-Grade 6. Tenth Edition. NCTE Bibliography Series."

See other formats


ED  362  878 


DOCUMENT  RESUME 


CS  214  064 


AUTHOR 
TITLE 

INSTITUTION 

REPORT  NO 
PUB  DATE 
NOTE 

AVAILABLE  FROM 


PUB  TYPE 


Jensen,  Julie  M. ,  Ed.;  Roser,  Nancy  L,,  Ed. 
Adventuring  with  Books:  A  Booklist  for  Pre-K-Grade  6. 
Tenth  Edition.  NCTE  Bibliography  Series. 
National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English,  Urbana, 
111. 

ISBN-0-8141-0079-1 ;  ISSN-1051-4740 
93 

682p.;  For  the  previous  edition,  see  ED  311  453. 
National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English,  1111  W. 
Kenyon  Rd. ,  Urbana,  IL  61801-1096  (Stock  No. 
00791-0015;  $14.95  members,  $19.95  nonmembers)  . 
Reference  Materials  -  Bibliographies  (131)  —  Books 
(010) 


EDRS  PRICE 
DESCRIPTORS 


IDENTIFIERS 


MF04/PC28  Plus  Postage. 

Annotated  Bibliographies;  *Childrens  Literature; 
Elementary  Education;  Fantasy;  Fiction;  Mathematical 
Concepts;  Nonfiction;  Poetry;  Preschool  Education; 
^Reading  Material  Selection;  ^Recreational  Reading; 
Scientific  Concepts;  Social  Studies 
Historical  Fiction;  Trade  Books 


ABSTRACT 

Designed  to  help  teachers,  librarians,  and  parents 
introduce  books  of  exceptional  literary  and  artistic  merit,  accuracy, 
and  appeal  to  preschool  through  sixth  grade  children,  this  annotated 
bibliography  presents  nearly  1,800  annotations  of  approximately  2,000 
books  (2  or  more  books  in  a  series  appear  in  a  single  review) 
published  between  1988  and  1992.  Annotations  are  grouped  under  13 
headings:  Biography;  Books  for  Young  Children;  Celebrations; 
Classics;  Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction;  Fantasy;  Fine  Arts; 
Historical  Fiction;  Language  and  Reading;  Poetry;  Sciences  and 
Mathematics,  Social  Studies;  and  Traditional  Literature.  In  addition 
to  the  author  and  title,  each  annotation  lists  illustrators  where 
applicable  and  the  recommended  age  range  of  potential  readers.  A 
selected  list  of  literary  awards  given  to  children's  books  published 
between  1988  and  1992;  a  description  of  popular  booklists;  author, 
illustrator,  subject,  and  title  indexes;  and  a  directory  of 
publishers  are  attached.  (RS) 


ft*********************************************^ 

*        Reproductions  supplied  by  EDRS  are  the  best  that  can  be  made 

Vf  from  the  original  document.  * 

******  t******************* ********************************************* 


Adventuring  with  Books 

V 

,    -       I v  ill  1 1  IaIiIioii 


I  u  I  ii»  \  1 .  I  en  -.e  n  .nnl  \  nn  \  I    K t 1  -m-  i   I  d  i  I  i  u  s 


Adventuring  with  Books 


Committee  to  Revise  the  Elementary  School  Booklist 


Julie  M.  Jensen,  Cochair,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Nancy  L.  Roser,  Co-chair,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Judy  Abbott,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Rasma  Barbee,  Austin,  Texas  Independent  School  District 

Jennifer  Battle,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Lowell  J.  Bethel,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Anne  Bustard,  Toad  Hall  Children's  Book  Store,  Austin,  Texas 

Mark  Dressman,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Bonnie  M.  Elliott,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Colleen  M.  Fairbanks,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Cynthia  Farest,  Texas  Tech  University 

Edmund  J.  Farrell,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Angela  Ferree,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Carolyn  Foote,  Eanes  Independent  School  District,  Austin,  Texas 

Cyndy  Hoffman,  Eanes  Independent  School  District,  Austin,  Texas 

Barbara  Immroth,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Kenneth  Kidd,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Shirley  Lukenbill,  Round  Rock,  Texas  Independent  School  District 

Jane  Manaster,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Miriam  Martinez,  The  University  of  Texas  at  San  Antonio 

Sarah  McCarthey,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Priscilla  Myers,  California  State  University 

Tim  Myers,  Bakersfield,  California 

Connie  Nutt,  Eanes  Independent  School  District,  Austin,  Texas 

Sharon  O'Neal,  Texas  Education  Agency,  Austin 

Sheila  Pederson,  Austin,  Texas 

Stuart  Reif el,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

Joan  M.  Shiring,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

William  Teale,  The  University  of  Texas  at  San  Antonio 

Barbara  Thomas,  Toad  Hall  Children's  Book  Store,  Austin,  Texas 

Jane  Townsend,  University  of  Florida 

Georgene  Wilson,  Austin,  Texas  Independent  School  District 

Michael  Spooner,  NCTE  Staff  Liaison 


ERLC 


4 

i 


Adventuring  with  Books 


\ 

A  Booklist  for  Pre-K-Grade  6 


Tenth  Edition 


Edited  by 
Julie  M.  Jensen 

The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 
Nancy  L.  Roser 

The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 


National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English 

1111  W.  Kenyon  Road,  Urbana,  Illinois  61801-1096 


5 


NCTE  Editorial  Board:  Keith  Gilyard,  Ronald  Jobe,  Joyce  Kinkead,  Louise  Phelps, 
Gladys  Veidemanis,  Charles  Suhor,  Chair,  ex  officio,  Michael  Spooner,  ex  officio 

Manuscript  Editor:  Jane  M.  Curran 
Production  Editor:  Rona  S.  Smith 
Interior  Design:  Doug  Burnett 
Cover  Design:  R  Maul 

Cover  Illustration:  Wayne  Anderson.  From  Dragon  ©  1992  by  Wayne  Anderson.  Used 
by  permission  of  Green  Tiger  Press,  an  imprint  of  the  Simon  &  Schuster  Ch  Lidren's  Book 
Division. 

NCTE  Stock  Number  00791-3050 

©  1993  by  the  National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English.  All  rights  reserved.  Printed  in 
the  United  States  of  America. 

Permissions  acknowledgements  for  photographs  appear  on  p.  594. 

Eve  Merriam  quote,  p.  339,  excerpted  from  "  T  Says  the  Poem"  from  A  Sky  Full  of  Poems 
by  Eve  Merriam.  ©  1964,  1970,  1973  by  Eve  Merriam.  Reprinted  by  permission  of 
Marian  Reiner. 

It  is  the  policy  of  NCTE  in  its  journals  and  other  publications  to  provide  a  forum  for  the 
open  discussion  of  ideas  concerning  the  content  and  the  teaching  of  English  and  the 
language  arts.  Publicity  accorded  to  any  particular  point  of  view  does  not  imply 
endorsement  by  the  Executive  Committee,  the  Board  of  Directors,  or  the  membership  at 
large,  except  in  announcements  of  policy,  where  such  endorsement  is  clearly  specified. 

Library  of  Congress  Cataloging-in-Publication  Data 

National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English.  Committee  to  Revise  the 
Elementary  School  Booklist. 

Adventuring  with  books :  a  booklist  for  pre-K-grade  6  /  National 
Council  of  Teachers  of  English,  Committee  to  Revise  the  Elementary 
School  Booklist ;  edited  by  Julie  M.  Jensen,  Nancy  L.  Roser.  —  10th 
ed. 

p.     cm.  —  (NCTE  bibliography  series,  ISSN  1051-4740) 
Rev.  ed.  of:  Adventuring  with  books  /  Mary  Jett-Simpson,  editor, 

and  the  Committee  on  the  Elementary  School  Booklist  of  the  National 

Council  of  Teachers  of  English.  9th  ed.  cl989. 
Includes  index. 
ISBN  0-8141-0079-1 :  $19.95 

1.  Bibliography— United  States— Best  books— Children's  literature. 
2.  Children's  literature— Bibliography.  I.  Jensen,  Julie  M.  n.  Roser,  Nancy, 
in.  National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English.  Committee  on  the  Elementary 
School  Booklist.  Adventuring  with  books  (9th  »d.  c  1989).  IV.  Title  V.  Series 
Z1037.N346  1993 
[PN1009.A1] 

011.62— dc20  93-30112 

CIP 


ERIC 


6 


Contents 


Acknowledgments 

xi 

Introduction 

xiii 

1.  Biography 

i 

2.  Books  for  Young  Children 

23 

Alohabet  Books 

X   ilk/1                    k  I/WIW 

24 

Color  Books 

32 

Concept  Books 

33 

Counting  Books 

48 

Nursery  Rhymes 

56 

Paper  Engineering 

6U 

Lift-the-Flap 

60 

Pop-ups 

63 

Pull-Tabs 

65 

Songs  and  Music 

65 

Wordless  Books 

68 

3.  Celebrations 

73 

Birthdays 

74 

Christmas 

76 

Easter 

86 

Halloween 

87 

Jewish  Holidays 

91 

Kwanzaa 

93 

Multiple  Holidays 

93 

St.  Patrick's  Day 

95 

er|c 


7 


vi  Contents 


Thanksgiving  95 

Valentine's  Day  96 

4.  Classics  97 

5.  Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction  103 

Adventure  Stories  104 

Animal  Stories  106 

Ethnic,  Racial,  and  Religious  Groups  113 

Human  Relationships  115 

Everyday  Life  115 

Family  Life  121 

Friendship                          *  144 

Illness  or  Death  154 

School  Life  and  Day  Care  160 

Humorous  Stories  164 

Mystery  Stories  173 

Respect  for  Nature  176 

Social  Issues  183 

Stories  about  Other  Lands  and  People  1 87 

Survival  192 

6.  Fantasy  193 

Adventure  and  Magic  194 

Animal  Fantasy  200 

Folk  Literature  238 

Humorous  Fantasy  247 

Imagination  and  Dreams  255 

Other  Worlds  266 

Science  Fiction  267 

Supernatural  Tales  268 


8 


Contents  vii 


Time  Fantasy  273 

Toys  and  Dolls  275 

Unique  Beings  277 

Humans  with  Special  Powers  277 

Make-Believe  Characters  279 

7.  Fine  Arts  285 

Performing  Arts  286 

Visual  Arts  288 

8*  Historical  Fiction  293 

Prehistoric  Times  294 

Medieval  limes  294 

Fifteenth  and  Sixteenth  Centuries  294 

Seventeenth  and  Eighteenth  Centuries  297 

United  States  297 

World  299 

Nineteenth  Century  300 

United  States  300 

World  307 

Twentieth  Century  309 

United  States:  Early  in  the  Century  309 

United  States:  World  War  I  and  Next  Two  Decades  313 

United  States:  World  War  II  and  Later  314 

World:  World  War  I  and  Next  Two  Decades  319 

World:  World  War  II  and  Later  319 

9*  Language  and  Reading  323 

Easy-Reading  Books  324 

Jokes,  Riddles,  and  Puns  329 

Language  Play  333 


ERIC 


9 


Contents 


10.  Poetry  339 

Anthologies  340 

Collections  by  a  Single  Poet  352 

Individual  Poems  362 

Poetry  Writing  370 

11.  Sciences  and  Mathematics  371 

Aeronautics  and  Space  372 

Animal  Kingdom  376 

Animal  Behaviors  376 

Birds  382 

Domesticated  Animals  385 

Insects  and  Spiders  386 

Ocean  Life  387 

Pets  390 

Reptiles  and  Amphibians  391 

Wild  Animals  392 

Archeology  396 

Conservation  and  Ecology  396 

Earth  Science,  Meteorology,  and  Oceanography  401 

Energy  405 

General  Science  Concepts  406 

Geography  407 

Human  Body,  Health,  and  Development  408 

Machines  411 

Mathematics  411 

Plants  412 

Prehistoric  Life  414 


ERLC 


Contents 


ix 


12.  Social  Studies  419 

Careers  420 

Communication  421 

Community  Life  422 

Crafts  and  Hobbies  424 

Ethnic,  Racial  and  Religious  Groups  428 

Food,  Clothing,  and  Shelter  432 

Geography  433 

Government  435 

History  436 

United  States  436 

World  442 

Human  Relationships  448 

Religion  449 

Social  Issues  and  Family  Relationships  451 

Sports  and  Games  452 

Transportation  455 

13.  Traditional  Literature  459 

Fables    -  460 

Folk  Songs  and  Ballads  463 

Folktales  and  Fairy  Tales  468 

Myths  and  Legends  503 

Tall  Tales  513 

Prizes  and  Lists  515 

Directory  of  Publishers  527 

Author  Index  533 


X 


Contents 


Illustrator  Index  546 

Subject  Index  556 

Title  Index  571 

Photo  Credits  594 

Editors  603 


ERiC 


12 


Acknowledgments 


We  are  grateful  to  the  College  of  Education  at  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 
and  to  Dr.  JoAnn  Sweeney  for  the  allocation  of  space,  equipment,  and  supplies, 
and  for  providing  the  assistance  of  five  exceedingly  competent  and  pleasant 
people:  Nona  Brown,  our  secretary,  and  graduate  student  assistants  Cynthia 
Farest,  Priscilla  Myers,  Rasma  Strautmanis,  and  Judy  Abbott. 

Were  it  not  for  the  cooperation  of  publishers,  we  would  have  had  nei- 
ther books  to  review  nor  incentives  for  reviewers  to  persevere. 

Thirty  Austin,  Texas,  area  teachers,  librarians,  bookstore  owners,  college 
faculty,  and  graduate  students  helped  us  to  compose  reviews.  Collectively  they 
are  known  as  the  Committee  to  Revise  the  Elementary  School  Booklist:  Judy 
Abbott,  Rasma  Barbee,  Jennifer  Battle,  Lowell  J.  3ethel,  Anne  Bustard,  Mark 
Dressman,  Bonnie  M.  Elliott,  Colleen  to.  Fairbanks,  Cynthia  Farest,  Edmund  J. 
Farrell,  Angela  Ferree,  Carolyn  Foote,  C  yndy  Hoffman,  Barbara  Immroth,  Ken- 
neth Kidd,  Shirley  Lukenbill,  Jane  Manaster,  Miriam  Martinez,  Sarah 
McCarthey,  Priscilla  Myers,  Tim  Myers,  Connie  Nutt,  Sharon  O'Neal,  Sheila 
Pederson,  Stuart  Reifel,  Joan  M.  Shiring,  William  Teale,  Barbara  Thomas,  Jane 
Townsend,  and  Georgene  Wilson. 

To  a  publisher  who  shipped  a  last-minute  book  overnight  in  order  to 
avoid  a  glaring  omission,  and  to  a  committee  member  who  on  deadline  day 
arrived  in  the  rain  with  a  review  of  a  book  too  good  to  overlook,  and  to  a 
graduate  student  who  never  measured  her  time,  and  Thank  you  for  caring. 


13 


Introduction 


The  purpose  of  the  tenth  edition  of  Adventuring  with  Books  is  exactly  that 
of  its  nine  predecessors:  to  help  teachers,  librarians,  parents,  and  others 
introduce  books  of  exceptional  literary  and  artistic  merit,  accuracy,  and 
appeal  to  preschoolers  through  sixth  graders.  As  children's  books  in- 
crease in  numbers  and  as  their  significance  grows  in  homes  and  schools, 
so  too  does  the  importance  of  informed  adult  guides  who  can  bring 
together  books  and  children.  Literature  for  children  is  emerging  as  not 
only  the  heart  of  the  language  arts  curriculum,  but  as  a  singularly 
important  contributor  to  learning  in  all  subject  areas.  We  hope  the 
larger,  illustrated  format  of  this  edition  attracts  the  attention  of  an  audi- 
ence of  book  selectors  that  is  as  numerous  anH  diverse  as  the  literature 
itself. 

Because  the  editorship  of  Adventuring  with  Books  offers  a  vantage 
point  on  the  state  of  the  literary  art,  we  begin  with  a  few  observations, 
each  offered  with  due  regard  for  certain  limitations.  First,  we  did  not 
receive  books  from  all  publishers  of  books  for  children,  particularly 
small  presses,  and  we  received  only  those  titles  that  publishers  chose  to 
send.  Second,  even  if  we  had  received  all  the  books  published  between 
1988  and  1992,  time  and  space  would  have  set  limitations.  Of  20,000  or 
so  books  that  might  have  been  reviewed,  we  have  included  nearly  1,800 
annotations  of  approximately  2,000  books  (two  or  more  books  in  a  series 
appear  in  a  single  review).  Some  of  the  following  observations  derive 
from  the  books  that  we  have  reviewed  here,  others  from  the  thousands 
of  other  books  that  complete  the  set. 

The  Children's  Literary  Art,  1988-1992: 
A  Few  Observations 

A  future  audience  of  historians  could  use  Adventuring  as  a  window  on 
the  times.  Such  an  audience  might  conclude  that  American  society  and 
the  world  of  children's  books  in  the  late  1980s  and  early  1990s  was 
profoundly  affected  by  emerging  high  technologies,  showed  interest  in 
and  concern  for  the  environment,  demonstrated  the  effects  of  economic 
stress,  liked  the  sameness  of  rented  books,  was  more  than  a  little  nos- 
talgic, took  a  great  interest  in  the  preschool  child,  honored  poetry,  strug- 
gled to  acknowledge  diversity  within  society,  and  tried  to  give  children 
the  best  possible  reading  materials  in  their  schools. 


ERIC 


14 


xiv 


Introduction 


Technology,  The  imaginations  of  today's  authors  and  illustrators 
are  less  constrained  than  previously  by  the  processes  of  book  produc- 
tion. Books  come  in  all  sizes:  miniature  versions  of  timeless  tales  and 
"big  books/'  which  are  proving  to  be  valuable  resources  in  classrooms 
and  libraries.  Books  today  are  not  just  a  feast  for  the  eyes,  but  sometimes 
for  the  nose,  ears,  and  fingertips  as  well.  Thanks  to  microchips,  books 
make  sounds  and  play  music.  They  can  be  scratched  and  sniffed. 
They  glow  in  the  dark.  Their  parts  pop  up  by  themselves  or  can  be 
pushed  and  pulled,  removed  and  replaced.  They  may  reflect  the 
shape  of  their  subject  matter,  or  through  a  series  of  overlays  may  reveal 
layers  of  an  object  or  living  thing.  The  formerly  functional,  such  as  an 
endpaper,  is  often  an  interest-capturing  contributor  to  a  book's  total 
effect.  Variations  in  format  are  wide  and  accomplished  in  their  so- 
phistication. 

As  with  innovations  in  format,  light  years  have  passed  since 
printing  with  woodcuts  was  the  means  of  reproducing  art.  Joining 
woodcuts  today  is  a  vast  array  of  media,  not  just  wood  and  linoleum 
prints,  or  watercolor,  oil,  and  acrylic  paintings,  or  pencil  and  ink  draw- 
ings, but  paper  collages,  cloth  tapestries,  photographs,  clay  and  paper 
sculptures,  mosaics,  crayons,  detraction  foil,  and  holograms.  Further- 
more, these  media,  alone  and  in  combination,  are  used  in  the  full  range 
of  styles  seen  in  art  for  any  audience.  Technological  advancements  have 
reduced  many  of  the  tedious  aspects  of  creating  book  illustrations,  such 
as  preparing  color  separations  for  a  printer  by  hand.  New  equipment 
can  reproduce  art  in  any  medium.  Because  technology  invites  and  al- 
lows experimentation,  the  result  is  ever  more  varied  and  interesting 
visual  experiences  for  children. 

Interest  in  the  Environment  Books  related  to  environmental 
issues  are  but  one  small  slice  of  the  world  of  nonfiction  literature  now 
available  to  young  readers.  This  edition  of  Adventuring  features  a  large 
selection  of  books  pertaining  to  sciences  and  mathematics,  including 
aeronautics  and  space,  the  animal  kingdom,  archeology,  conservation 
and  ecology,  earth  science,  meteorology,  oceanography,  energy,  human 
health  and  development,  machines,  plants,  prehistoric  life,  and  other 
subjects.  An  equally  lengthy  section  relates  to  aspects  of  the  social 
sciences:  careers;  communication;  community  life;  ethnic,  racial,  and 
religious  groups;  food,  clothing,  and  shelter;  geography;  government; 
history;  human  relationships;  religion;  social  issues  and  family  relation- 
ships; transportation;  and  more.  The  opportunity  both  to  learn  about 
and  to  enjoy  a  great  range  of  subject-matter  fields  is  provided  by  numer- 
ous prominent  authors:  Patricia  Lauber,  Millicent  Selsam,  Seymour 


15 


The  Children's  Literary  Art,  1988-1992:  A  Few  Observations 


xv 


Simon,  Brent  Ashabranner,  Aliki,  Mitsumasa  Anno,  Franklyn  Branley, 
Milton  Meltzer,  Alice  Provensen,  Laurence  Pringle,  and  others. 

Yet,  one  unmistakable  observation  within  that  world  of  nonfic- 
tion  is  that  children  in  the  late  eighties  and  early  nineties  are  growing 
up  with  a  concern  for  the  future  of  the  Earth.  Perhaps  triggered  by 
events  like  the  1989  Alaskan  oil  spill  and  the  1990  celebration  of  the 
twentieth  anniversary  of  Earth  Day,  a  wave  of  books  was  published 
which  promote  environmental  causes  like  recycling,  forest  preserva- 
tion, and  pesticide-free  food.  Some  of  these  books  are  subtle  in  their 
messages,  some  are  overt.  Selected  titles,  such  as  those  involving  oil 
slicks,  threatened  wildlife,  and  sanctions  on  whaling  and  logging,  have 
encountered  industry  claims  of  manipulation  and  one-sidedness.  Even 
the  Teenage  Mutant  Ninja  Turtles  got  into  the  environmental  act  with 
an  ABC  book,  featuring  Acid  rain,  Global  warming,  and  Ozone  deple- 
tion. Books  about  the  environment  are  not  only  a  way  to  influence 
young  minds;  they  are  also  a  way  to  make  money  The  fact  that  750,000 
copies  of  the  1990  book  50  Simple  Things  Kids  Can  Do  to  Save  the  Planet 
were  sold  was  not  lost  on  publishers,  our  next  topic. 

The  Economics  of  Publishing  Children's  Books.  Within  today's 
publishing  world,  children's  books  are  a  notable  success  story.  Sales 
now  top  a  billion  dollars  a  year  for  the  first  time  in  history.  The  chil- 
dren's literature  business  is  financially  healthy,  and,  more  than  ever,  it 
is  market-driven.  A  couple  of  facts:  Few  independently  owned  publish- 
ing companies  remain;  most  have  merged  with  big  business  conglom- 
erates. Library  sales  have  shrunk,  so  publishers  are  placing  their  focus 
on  marketing  directly  to  consumers.  Shoppers  with  limited  time  and 
limited  knowledge  make  different  kinds  of  selection  decisions  than  do 
professionals.  Author  Kathryn  Lasky  has  sounded  a  warning: 

There  is  a  dark  side  to  the  current  boom  in  juvenile  publishing 
that  has  me  concerned.  The  dark  side  is  that  trade  publishers  are 
starring  to  behave  like  business  people — in  the  worst  sense  of  the 

word  What  does  the  market  want?  You  never  heard  that 

question  ten  years  ago.  You  only  heard  people  speaking  in  terms 
of  criteria  for  excellence  In  the  past,  the  children's  book  in- 
dustry has  been  very  tolerant  of  risk  takers.  It  is  not  so  now.  They 
have  found  some  formulas  that  work — The  Baby-sitters  Club  and 
Waldo,  for  instance — that  have  had  a  huge  impact  on  juvenile 
publishing.  (Lasky  1991) 

We  have  noticed  several  additional  formulas  for  catching  the 
buyer's  eye,  among  them  a)  "celebrity  authors/'  including  Fergie,  Carly 
Simon,  Judy  Collins,  Dom  Deluise,  Jimmy  Buffett,  Leontyne  Price,  Mar- 
got  Fonteyn,  and  Paul  Simon;  b)  best-selling  adult  authors  as  authors  of 


ERIC 


IB 


xvi 


Introduction 


books  for  children,  including  Mark  Helprin,  Ken  Follett,  Danielle  Steel, 
Ken  Kesey,  James  Herriot,  and  James  Michener;  c)  lavishly  illustrated 
reissues  of  books,  especially  those  likely  read  during  the  childhoods  of 
current  buyers;  d)  eyecatching  toy  books  and  book-toy  combinations, 
including  inflatable  globes,  banks,  stuffed  animals,  lapel  buttons,  foot- 
ball cards,  lockets,  skateboard  stickers,  and  lunch  bags;  e)  spin-offs 
from  other  media,  including  Nintendo,  Garfield,  Indiana  Jones,  and 
others;  and  f)  spin-offs  from  just-published  successful  books,  most 
prominently  series  books.  The  Baby-sitters  Club,  for  example,  had  sold 
over  forty-one  million  copies  by  1991.  Indeed,  if  child  appeal  were  our 
only  criterion  for  book  selection,  this  volume  would  be  overflowing 
with  reviews  of  series  books.  We  do  include  numerous  reviews  of  reil- 
lustrated  editions  of  older  works.  Flashy  books  were  as  irresistible  to 
our  committee  members  as  they  are  to  the  buying  public,  and  flash  does 
not  necessarily  preclude  enduring  literary  and  artistic  merit. 

Series  Books.  Perhaps  one-third  of  the  books  that  we  received 
from  publishers  were  sets  of  two  or  more  titles  with  a  unifying  charac- 
teristic: the  same  characters  or  similar  subject  matter.  Paperbacks  in 
which  readers  meet  the  same  characters  in  book  after  book — sometimes 
a  new  book  every  month— are  a  phenomenon  of  the  times.  Their  suc- 
cess, from  the  standpoint  of  sales,  is  testimony  that  many  young  readers 
enjoy  contemporary  realistic  fiction  in  which  they  can  find  comfort  and 
security  in  sameness.  Although  none  is  reviewed  here,  familiar  series 
like  The  Bobbsey  Twins  ("revised  and  reissued")  and  The  Hardy  Boys 
and  Nancy  Drew  ("with  new  modernized  characters'')  are  ubiquitous, 
as  are  series  that  have  become  popular  in  recent  years.  Here  are  just  a 
dozen:  The  Saddle  Chib,  Sweet  Valley  Kids,  Sweet  Valley  Twins,  Fifth  Grade 
Stars,  The  Treehouse  Times,  Camp  Sunnyside  Friends,  Sleepover  Friends, 
Ballet  One,  The  Baby-sitters  Club,  The  Gymnasts,  Bad  News  Ballet,  and  New 
Kids  on  the  Block. 

Nonfiction  series,  unified  by  topic  and  format,  are  remarkable  for 
their  numbers  and  for  their  range  in  quality.  Several  series  are  reviewed 
here,  with  a  single  review  pertaining  to  the  series  as  a  whole,  classified 
by  topic,  usually  social  studies,  or  sciences  and  mathematics.  Rest  as- 
sured that  even  if  it  is  not  included  here,  a  series  of  books  can  be  found 
on  almost  any  topic  imaginable.  These  we  know  for  sure:  sports  figures, 
sports,  holidays,  natural  disasters,  insects,  mammals,  reptiles,  cities, 
states,  countries,  planets,  occupations,  famous  writers,  presidents,  an- 
cient civilizations,  breeds  of  dogs,  explorers,  women  artists,  and  thir- 
teen books  about  thirteen  different  types  of  beans. 


17 


The  Children's  Literary  Art,  1988-1992:  A  Few  Observations 


xvii 


Nostalgia.  Although  contemporary  issues  and  efforts  toward  so- 
cial relevance — nontraditional  families,  family  violence,  homelessness, 
chemical  dependence,  AIDS— figure  prominently  in  today's  books,  in- 
terest in  the  past  is  substantial.  One  can  look  backward  (or  homeward) 
through  retellings,  reissues,  and  new  issues  in  a  variety  of  genres — 
historical  fiction,  poetry,  biography,  and  information  books.  Those  who 
contend  that  the  route  to  learning  and  loving  history  is  to  make  it  come 
alive  can  feel  encouraged  by  the  range  of  choices. 

Authors  seem  eager  to  celebrate  anniversaries  through  children's 
books.  Most  prominently  and  voluminously  celebrated  during  this  pe- 
riod was  the  500th  anniversary  of  Columbus's  voyage  of  1492.  From  the 
numerous  reviews  of  books  about  Columbus,  readers  will  immediately 
recognize  diverse  historical  perspectives  and  viewpoints,  some  celebra- 
tory and  some  calling  into  question  the  humanity  of  the  "discoverers." 

Titles  published  between  1988  and  1992  reflect  not  only  a  looking 
back  to  earlier  times,  but  to  earlier  books.  A  fierce  devotion  to  the 
tried-and-true  may  be  nostalgia  or  simply  good  business.  Whether  it's 
revolving  pictures  from  another  century  or  reissues  with  or  without 
new  illustrations,  many  of  today's  new  books  are  old  books.  They  speak 
to  buyers  dependent  on  the  familiar.  So  many  elaborately  illustrated  old 
tales  have  appeared  in  recent  years  that  children  can  enjoy  comparing 
multiple  versions  of  the  same  tale;  for  example,  Gail  Haley's,  Fred 
Marcellino's,  and  Alain  Vaes's  versions  of  Perrault's  Puss  in  Boots,  or  Jan 
Brett's,  Helen  Cooper's,  and  Louise  Voce's  renditions  of  Lear's  The  Owl 
and  the  Pussycat. 

Books  for  the  Early  Years.  As  evidence  mounts  about  the  value 
of  reading  aloud  to  children  during  the  preschool  years,  publishers 
have  responded  to  parent  and  educator  interest  in  securing  children's 
futures.  Joining  Good  Night  Moon  and  Pat  the  Bunny  are  books  in  abun- 
dance for  looking  at  and  handling  by  the  three-and-under  set,  especially 
concept  books  and  toy  books  in  cloth  or  glossy  board  format.  Also 
reviewed  in  the  chapter  entitled  "Books  for  Young  Children"  is  a  large 
variety  of  counting  books,  alphabet  books,  nursery  rhyme  collections, 
color  books,  song  books,  and  concept  books  through  which  young 
children  can  solve  a  puzzle,  have  an  adventure,  learn,  and  enjoy. 

Poetry  in  Abundance.  Anthologies,  collections  by  a  single  poet, 
and  individual  poems  in  picture-book  form  are  liberally  represented  in 
this  edition,  often  with  illustrations  attractive  enough  to  challenge  the 
words  for  attention.  Familiar  names  from  present  and  past  appear  in  the 
Author  Index:  Prelutsky,  Schwartz,  Adoff,  Ciardi,  de  la  Mare,  Dickin- 
son, Fisher,  Kennedy,  Lear,  Merriarn,  Nash,  Stafford,  Whittier.  Both  new 


18 


xviii 


Introduction 


collections  and  reissues  address  a  range  of  topics  and  feelings,  and  they 
do  so  in  a  range  of  forms.  Just  two  of  the  ways  in  which  the  importance 
of  poetry  for  children  was  affirmed  during  this  period  were  through  the 
ongoing  NCTE  Award  for  Excellence  in  Poetry  for  Children  and  by 
bestowing  the  1989  John  Newbery  Medal  on  Paul  Fleischman  for  Joyful 
Noise:  Poems  for  Two  Voices.  Because  poetry  is  flourishing,  those  who 
wish  to  share  it  with  children  have  more  to  choose  from;  today  it  is  easy 
to  build  a  collection  of  old  and  new  poems,  to  demonstrate  the  variety 
of  poetry,  and  to  share  poetry  that  children  are  likely  to  enjoy. 

Quest  to  Reflect  Cultural  Diversity.  The  availability  of  books  that 
authentically  portray  a  range  of  cultures  remains  low,  although  one  can 
find  between  these  covers  an  outstanding  collection  of  books  written  or 
illustrated  by  or  about  members  of  varied  cultures.  The  annotations  re- 
flect not  only  African  Americans,  Hispanics,  Asians,  Native  Americans, 
and  other  cultural  groups  within  American  society,  but  also  describe 
books  from  and  about  other  countries,  some  in  translation.  Writers  of 
great  promise  from  several  cultures  have  emerged  during  the  past  few 
years,  who,  with  nurturing,  may  allow  the  editor  of  the  next  edition  of 
Adventuring  a  greater  representation  of  multicultural  titles. 

Literature  in  the  Classroom.  Consensus  continues  to  grow  that 
literature  plays  a  critical  role  in  children's  literacy  and  subject-matter 
learning,  as  does  support  for  teachers  who  believe  that  children  should 
not  only  learn  how  to  read,  but  should  become  readers.  One  notable 
example  is  the  Teachers  as  Readers  project  of  the  Association  of  Ameri- 
can Publishers,  which  helps  classroom  teachers  establish  teacher  read- 
ing groups  on  the  theory  that  teachers  who  read  and  talk  about  books 
with  their  peers  create  rich  literate  environments  in  their  classrooms. 
Evidence  that  literature  is  coming  to  classrooms  can  be  seen  in  the  many 
classroom  trade-book  collections  which  now  augment  central  school 
libraries.  It  can  also  be  seen  in  instructional  materials,  some  of  which  are 
drawing  heavily  on  trade  books.  A  question  to  be  answered  by  in- 
formed teachers  is  whether  a  particular  resource  preserves  literature  as 
an  aesthetic  and  imaginative  experience  or  diminishes  it. 

Users  of  Adventuring  will  find  it  easy  to  bring  literature  into  the 
school  curriculum.  Books  are  classified  into  subject-matter  fields  like 
sciences  and  mathematics,  social  studies,  and  fine  arts.  For  those  who 
know  the  pleasure  and  learning  associated  with  reading  aloud,  some 
especially  fine  choices  are  included:  Morning  Girl  (Dorris),  Monkey  Is- 
land (Fox),  Nothing  but  the  Truth  (Avi),  Flight:  The  Journey  of  Charles 
Lindbergh  (Burleigh),  Chicken  Sunday  (Polacco),  Shiloh  (Naylor),  Amazing 
Grace  (Hoffman),  Seven  Blind  Mice  (Young),  and  The  Stinky  Cheese  Man, 
and  Other  Fairly  Stupid  Tales  (Scieszka),  among  dozens  of  others.  Still 


19 


How  to  Read  an  Annotation 


xix 


other  books  ease  the  transition  to  independence  in  reading  because  of 
their  predictable  elements.  Finally,  many  books  are  about  school  itself, 
about  reading  and  writing,  and  about  authors  and  illustrators. 

The  children's  literary  art  from  1988  to  1992  is  flourishing.  Those 
who  select  books  for  children  have  more  titles  from  which  to  choose 
with  each  passing  year;  examples  of  excellence  exist  in  goodly  numbers; 
and  children's  literature  is  being  accorded  ever  greater  importance  by 
those  who  find  themselves  in  the  company  of  preschoolers  through 
sixth  graders.  Our  excitement  about  new  and  talented  faces  who  have 
burst  upon  the  scene  is  tempered,  however,  by  the  loss  during  these 
years  of  Isaac  Asimov,  Patricia  Beatty,  Roald  Dahl,  Carolyn  Haywood, 
Arnold  Lobel,  James  Marshall,  Eve  Merriam,  Scott  O'Dell,  Peggy  Par- 
rish,  Alvin  Schwartz,  Theodor  Seuss  Geisel,  and  Isaac  Bashevis  Singer. 
Children's  reading  experiences  will  be  enriched  forever  by  their  gifts. 

How  to  Read  an  Annotation 

Bringing  order  to  thousands  of  books  is  a  daunting  task.  In  the  end  we 
sorted  them  into  thirteen  imperfect  categories,  most  with  numerous 
subcategories,  then  subcategories  of  subcategories.  The  thirteen  appear 
as  "chapter"  divisions,  each  one  introduced  with  a  quote  from  a  distin- 
guished contributor  to  that  particular  facet  of  literature  for  children. 
Some  divisions  are  based  on  the  age  of  the  reader  ("Books  for  Young 
Children"),  some  on  genre  ("Fantasy"),  and  some  on  content  ("Fine 
Arts").  So  much  for  parallelism.  Classifying  books  is  fraught  with  prob- 
lems; solid  arguments  can  be  made  for  assigning  a  number  of  books  to 
many  different  places.  To  illustrate,  Joanna  Cole  and  Bruce  Degen's  The 
Magic  School  Bus  inside  the  Human  Body,  a  field  trip  through  the  circula- 
tory system,  is  a  fantasy  filled  with  scientific  information.  It  is  intriguing 
fiction  and  also  a  fine  content-area  resource  which  provokes  discussion 
and  makes  learning  memorable. 

Each  annotation  has  been  assigned  an  interest  level.  The  "interest 
age  range"  uses  the  publishers'  designations  of  the  youngest  to  oldest 
children  who  might  be  interested  in  either  hearing  the  book  read  aloud 
or  reading  it  on  their  own.  Estimates  are  given  in  the  absence  of  pub- 
lisher information.  We  supply  this  designation  with  all  due  caution  that 
for  some  books  and  some  children  it  may  be  unduly  restrictive. 

We  have  tried  to  inform  book-selection  decisions  by  indicating 
honors  and  awards  bestowed  upon  single  books.  We  do  this  in  two 
ways:  as  part  of  the  annotation  itself,  and  in  an  appendix  which  de- 
scribes major  awards  and  honor  lists  and  which  compiles  the  names  of 
1988-92  winners.  Because  of  the  proliferation  of  ways  to  honor  books, 


ERIC 


20 


XX 


Introduction 


we  have  generally  not  noted  runners-up  for  awards,  state  awards,  or 
foreign  awards. 

Except  for  the  series  books  reviewed  collectively,  each  bibliog- 
raphical entry  includes  the  International  Standard  Book  Number  (ISBN) 
for  the  library  edition. 

The  annotations  themselves  range  in  length.  Each  includes  a  story 
summary  or  content  statement  and,  when  relevant,  commentary  on  art 
and  design.  Occasionally  the  annotations  suggest  topically  related  books, 
books  by  the  same  author,  or  suggestions  for  responding  to  the  book, 
such  as  storytelling,  drama,  reading  aloud,  readers'  theatre,  writing  and 
art  experiences,  and  possible  connections  with  subject-matter  units. 

Adventuring  closes  with  a  Directory  of  Publishers  for  ordering 
purposes,  the  appendix  of  award-winning  books,  and  four  indexes: 
author,  illustrator,  subject,  and  title. 

As  we  emerge  from  four  years  of  floating  on  a  sea  of  books,  we 
have  regrets,  the  major  one  being  that  we  weren't  able  to  include  anno- 
tations for  hundreds  of  additional  titles  as  meritorious  as  many  of  those 
included  here.  We  weren't  finished;  we  simply  had  to  quit.  We  hope  that 
we  have  organized  this  collection  in  a  way  that  is  useful,  but  we  learned 
in  the  process  that  the  work  of  imaginative  minds  defies  categorization. 
We  have  had  the  opportunity  to  see  a  great  range  of  books — a  range  in 
quality,  in  subject  matter,  in  format,  and  in  artistic  medium  and  style. 
Those  who  select  books  for  children  have  an  enviable  "problem":  choos- 
ing from  among  so  many  and  varied  literary  offerings  that  can  be 
recommended  with  enthusiasm  and  that  will  be  read  with  pleasure. 

In  1990,  midway  through  our  work  on  this  project,  Publishers 
Weekly  reported  on  the  ten  best-selling  paperback  books  for  children. 
Eight  of  the  ten  featured  Teenage  Mutant  Ninja  Turtles,  accounting  for 
the  sale  of  eight  million  copies.  One  of  the  two  remaining  best-sellers 
was  about  the  New  Kids  on  the  Block,  and  the  other  was  a  selection 
from  The  Baby-sitters  Club  series.  How  to  read  an  annotation?  Read  it 
voraciously  and  conscientiously,  here  and  wherever  book-selection  ad- 
vice can  be  found.  The  guidance  of  a  teacher  or  librarian,  parent  or 
friend  who  is  informed  about  the  children's  literary  world  is  critical 
beyond  question. 

Work  Cited 

Lasky,  ^athryn.  1991.  ''Creativity  in  a  Boom  Industry,"  The  Horn  Book  Maga- 
zine, November/December. 


ERIC 


21 


Biography 


Children  look  for  clues  to  life. 

They  want  the  truth, 

They  need  the  truth, 

and  they  deserve  it 

So  I  try  to  present  characters  honestly 

with  their  paradoxes  and  their  complexities, 

their  strengths  and  their  weaknesses. 

Jean  Fritz,  "Making  It  Real/' 
Children's  Literature  in  Education 


ERIC 


22 


2 


1  Biography 


1.1  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  Benjamin  Franklin.  Illus- 
trated by  John  and  Alexandra  Wallner.  Holiday  House,  1990. 
ISBN  0-8234-0792-6.  29p.  7-10  (est.). 

A  writer,  an  inventor,  a  scientist,  a  statesman — Benjamin  Frank- 
lin was  all  of  these  and  more.  David  Adler 's  historical  account, 
a  volume  in  the  Picture  Book  Biography  series,  chronicles  this 
founding  father's  life  and  accomplishments.  Double-page  illus- 
trations colorfully  depict  the  life  and  times  of  early  America. 
This  biography  would  complement  other  books  about  Franklin, 
such  as  Jean  Fritz's  What's  the  Big  Idea,  Ben  Franklin? 

1.2  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  Christopher  Columbus. 
Illustrated  by  John  and  Alexandra  Wallner.  Holiday  House, 
1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0857-4.  32p.  6-12  (est). 

Another  in  David  Adler 's  Picture  Book  Biographies  series,  this 
account  of  Columbus's  life  from  boyl">od  to  death  is  told 
through  simple,  informative  text  and  fu:i-page  illustrations. 

1.3  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  Eleanor  Roosevelt.  Illus- 
trated by  Robert  Casilla.  Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234- 
0856-6.  29p.  8-12  (est.). 

A  shy  child  who  learned  to  be  independent  at  an  early  age, 
Eleanor  Roosevelt  grew  up  to  become  "first  lady  of  the  world." 
This  easy-to-read  Picture  Book  Biography  offers  a  brief  history 
of  the  life  and  accomplishments  of  this  remarkable  woman.  Full- 
page  watercolor  paintings  complement  the  text  and  capture  the 
memorable  events  in  her  life. 

1.4  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  Harriet  Tubman.  Illustrated 
by  Samuel  Byrd.  Holiday  House,  1992.  ISBN  0-8234-0926-0. 28p. 
6-9. 

The  eleventh  book  in  David  Adler's  Picture  Book  Biography 
series  depicts  the  life  of  a  prominent  African  American  woman 
in  American  history.  In  her  more  than  ninety  years,  Harriet  Tub- 
man escaped  slavery,  used  earnings  from  odd  jobs  to  lead  other 
slaves  to  freedom  on  the  Underground  Railroad,  served  as  a 
nurse  and  a  spy,  fought  for  women's  right  to  vote,  and  opened 
a  home  for  the  elderly  poor.  Dark,  expressive  watercolors  por- 


ERLC 


23 


Biography 


3 


tray  the  sorrow,  mystery,  and  unfailing  courage  that  marked 
her  life. 

1.5  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  Helen  Keller.  Illustrated  by 
John  and  Alexandra  Wallner.  Holiday  House,  1990.  ISBN  0-8234- 
0818-3.  30p.  7-10  (est). 

Left  deaf  and  blind  by  a  childhood  illness,  Helen  Keller  grew  to 
become  an  inspiration  to  others  all  over  the  world.  This  easy-to- 
understand  book  in  the  Picture  Book  Biography  series  chronicles 
the  life  story  of  this  courageous  woman  and  highlights  the  im- 
portant aspects  of  her  life,  including  her  education  with  Anne 
Sullivan  and  her  dedication  to  the  American  Federation  for  the 
Blind.  Full-page,  soft-colored  illustrations  help  to  explain  the 
struggles  and  triumphs  of  a  remarkable  woman. 

1.6  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  Jesse  Owens.  Illustrated  by 
Robert  Casilla.  Holiday  House,  1992.  ISBN  0-8234-0966-X.  32p. 
6-9  (est). 

Son  of  sharecroppers  and  grandson  of  slaves,  Jesse  Owens  set 
three  world  records  and  tied  a  fourth  at  the  1936  Olympics. 
David  Adler's  Picture  Book  Biography  of  the  child  who  could 
run  and  jump  primarily  traces  Owens's  development  as  an  ath- 
lete, but  it  does  not  skirt  the  prejudice  that  he  faced  both  at  home 
and  at  the  games.  Hitler,  for  example,  snubbed  Owens  at  the 
Olympic  Games  in  Berlin.  Illustrations  are  reminiscent  of  softly 
tinted  photographs. 

1.7  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  John  F.  Kennedy.  Illustrated 
by  Robert  Casilla.  Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0884-1. 
29p.  8-12  (est). 

Born  into  a  rich  and  powerful  family,  John  F.  Kennedy  carved  his 
own  identity  through  his  achievements  and  career  in  govern- 
ment. This  Picture  Book  Biography  profiles  Kennedy's  life.  Full- 
page,  watercolor  paintings,  many  from  actual  photographs,  il- 
lustrate the  significant  events  in  his  life,  from  his  childhood  to 
his  assassination. 

1.8  Adler,  David  A.  A  Picture  Book  of  Thomas  Jefferson.  Illus- 
trated by  John  and  Alexandra  Wallner.  Holiday  House,  1990. 
ISBN  0-8234-0791-8.  29p.  7-10  (est.). 

He  was  eager  to  learn,  loved  to  read  and  invent,  and  had  ideas 
of  his  own — he  was  Thomas  Jefferson.  This  Picture  Book  Biog- 
raphy presents  a  simple  chronological  account  of  Jefferson's 


24 


4 


Biography 


1.10 


1.11 


1.12 


private  life  as  colonist  and  father,  as  well  as  his  public  life  as 
legislator,  statesman,  and  president — ''father  of  our  democracy/' 
Colorful  double-page  watercolors  illustrate  the  informative  and 
straightforward  text. 

Aliki.  The  King's  Day:  Louis  XIV  of  France.  Illustrated  by  Aliki. 
Thomas  Y.  Crowell,  1989.  ISBN  0-690-04590-5.  28p.  7-11. 

King  Louis  XIV  of  France  lived  in  the  grandest  of  styles.  His 
palaces  were  magnificent:;  his  wigs,  robes,  and  jewels  were  the 
finest;  and  his  days  were  filled  with  ceremonial  rituals  and  spec- 
tacular events.  Detailed  information  can  be  gained  both  from  the 
drawings  and  their  captions,  which  together  depict  a  day  in  the 
life  of  one  of  France's  most  extravagant  and  yet  most  brilliant 
kings. 

Alper,  Ann  Fitzpatrick.  Forgotten  Voyager:  The  Story  of 
Amerigo  Vespucci.  Carolrhoda  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-87614-442- 
3.  80p.  8-12. 

Amerigo  Vespucci's  accomplishments — and  the  slanders  that 
contributed  to  his  relative  obscurity — are  fleshed  out  in  this 
readable  account  From  his  Florentine  childhood  to  his  serious 
geographical  scholarship  and  exploration,  Vespucci  is  presented 
as  an  energetic,  intelligent,  and  ambitious  European  discoverer. 
Historical  illustrations  and  primary  source  material  add  power 
to  the  narrative. 

Anderson,  Joan.  Christopher  Columbus:  From  Vision  to  Voy- 
age. Photographs  by  George  Ancona.  Dial  Books  for  Young 
Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-1042-9.  48p.  7-10  (est.). 

Joan  Anderson  portrays  Columbus  as  a  man  of  "vivid  imagina- 
tion, great  curiosity,  tremendous  energy,  the  courage  to  stand  by 
his  beliefs,  and  a  willingness  to  take  risks"  in  this  account  of  the 
of  the  "inner"  journey — the  years  1459-92— that  led  to  his  first 
sailing.  George  Ancona 's  color  photographs,  set  in  Spain,  feature 
members  of  the  Spanish  National  Opera  dressed  in  period 
costumes. 

Banish,  Roslyn,  with  Jennifer  Jordan-Wong.  A  Forever  Family. 
Photographs  by  Roslyn  Banish.  HarperCollins,  1992.  ISBN  0-06- 
021674-3.  44p.  5-8. 

After  spending  half  of  her  life  in  foster  homes,  eight-year-old 
Jennifer  Jordan-Wong  tells  the  story  of  her  adoption  by  a  "for- 


ERLC 


25 


Biography 


5 


ever  family."  With  the  help  of  black-and-white  photographs  of 
parents,  extended  family,  foster  parents,  social  workers,  friends, 
pets,  and  important  places  and  activities,  a  heartwarming  and 
informative  account  emerges. 

1.13  Bernheim,  Mark.  Father  of  the  Orphans:  The  Story  of  Janusz 
Korczak.  Lodestar  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-525-67265-6.  160p.  11 
and  up  (est.). 

In  this  volume  in  the  Jewish  Biography  series,  Mark  Bernheim 
weaves  a  poignant  tale  of  dignity  and  love  in  Warsaw  during  the 
Nazi  occupation.  Janusz  Korczak's  story  begins  with  his  privi- 
leged childhood  and  moves  through  his  adult  life  of  poverty  and 
sacrifice.  Korczak  was  one  of  the  first  physicians  in  Europe  to 
dedicate  his  career  to  the  care  of  children,  and  his  devotion  to 
his  orphanage  resulted  in  the  ultimate  sacrifice  of  his  life  for 
these  Jewish  children.  Middle-grade  students  will  come  away 
wanting  to  know  more  about  how  such  atrocities  could  have 
occurred. 

1.14  Bernstein,  Joanne  E.,  and  Rose  Blue,  with  Alan  Jay  Gerber.  Ju- 
dith Resnik:  Challenger  Astronaut  Lodestar  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-525-67305-9.  lOOp.  10  and  up  (est). 

This  biography  traces  Judith  Resnik's  life  from  young  girl  to 
engineer/ scientist  to  space-shuttle  astronaut.  Although  much  of 
the  book  focuses  on  the  Discovery  mission  and  the  Challenger 
tragedy  that  took  Resnik's  life,  the  authors  also  explore  her 
reactions  to  her  parents'  bitter  divorce,  the  influence  of  Judaism 
on  her  life,  the  breakup  of  her  own  marriage,  and  her  struggle 
to  become  an  astronaut.  Black-and-white  photos,  a  reading  list, 
and  an  index  complement  the  text. 

1.15  Black,  Sheila.  Sitting  Bull  and  the  Battle  of  the  Little  Bighorn. 
Cwiklik,  Robert.  King  Philip  and  the  War  with  the  Colonists. 
Sequoyah  and  the  Cherokee  Alphabet  McClard,  Megan,  and 
George  Ypsilantis.  Hiawatha  and  the  Iroquois  League.  Shorto, 
Russell.  Geronimo  and  the  Struggle  for  Apache  Freedom. 
Tecumseh  and  the  Dream  of  an  American  Indian  Nation.  Illus- 
trated by  L.  L.  Cundiff;  Ed  Lee;  T.  Lewis;  Frank  Riccio;  Tim  Sisco; 
Robert  L.  Smith.  Silver  Burdett  Press,  1989.  Approx.  120p.  10-13. 

Alvin  Josephy's  Biography  Series  of  American  Indians  is  charac- 
terized by  its  thoroughness,  its  accuracy,  its  sense  of  drama,  and 
its  emphasis  on  Native  American  perspectives.  Each  volume 


2B 

ERIC 


6 


Biography 


tells  the  story  of  a  great  Native  American,  with  subjects  ranging 
from  Sitting  Bull  to  Sequoyah  to  Hiawatha.  The  writing  is  clear 
and  rich  with  historical  detail,  explanation,  analysis,  and  narra- 
tive excitement.  Line  drawings  and  historical  photographs  ac- 
company each  text,  along  with  a  list  of  suggested  readings. 

1.16  Bios,  Joan  W.  The  Heroine  of  the  Titanic:  A  Tale  Both  True  and 
Otherwise  of  the  Life  of  Molly  Brown.  Illustrated  by  Tennessee 
Dixon.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-07547-  9.  40p.  6 
and  up. 

Joan  Bios  pieces  together  the  facts  and  legends  surrounding  the 
exuberant  life  of  Margaret  (Molly)  Tobin  Brown,  focusing  on  her 
adventure-seeking  derring-do  and  her  courageous  spirit  as  an 
"unsinkable"  survivor  of  the  Titanic.  Brown's  feats  and  foibles 
are  recounted  in  lyrical  prose,  with  text  embedded  in  paintings 
that  capture  wistful  hues  of  bygone  elegance,  but  that  give  Molly 
Brown  a  vivacity  undiminished  by  advancing  age.  As  an  added 
touch,  a  sprinkle  of  verse  in  Victorian  frames  works  like  a  Greek 
chorus  to  comment  on  the  saga. 

1.17  Brighton,  Catherine.  Nijinsky:  Scenes  from  the  Childhood  of 
the  Great  Dancer.  Illustrated  by  Catherine  Brighton.  Doubleday, 
1989.  ISBN  0-385-24926-8.  26p.  4^8. 

As  a  little  boy,  future  great  ballet  dancer  Vaslav  Nijinsky  trav- 
eled through  Russia  with  his  brother,  sister,  and  theatrical  par- 
ents and  learned  to  dance.  When  the  family  fortunes  changed 
and  his  father  walked  out,  his  mother  taught  dance,  and  Vaslav 
won  a  place  at  the  Imperial  Ballet  School  in  St.  Petersburg,  pro- 
pelling his  legendary  success.  Bordered  in  dark  green,  evocative 
watercolor  illustrations  reveal  not  only  the  Nijinsky  family,  but 
a  portrait  of  turn-of-the-century  Russia  as  well. 

1.18  Byars,  Betsy.  The  Moon  and  I.  Julian  Messner,  1992.  ISBN  0-671- 
74165-9.  96p.  10  and  up  (est). 

In  lighthearted  anecdotes  woven  together  by  a  snake  that  she 
calls  Moon,  Betsy  Byars  describes  her  life  and  discusses  her 
approach  to  writing  in  this  slim,  delightful  memoir.  Readers  will 
learn  how  she  associates  her  villains  with  the  horrific  Bubba  of 
her  youth,  how  she  begins  with  title  pages  and  keeps  them  long 
after  she's  forgotten  their  stories,  and  how  she  believes  in  the 
importance  of  characters  and  the  need  for  authority  in  author- 
ing. Black-and-white  photographs  show  Byars  with  Moon 
throughout  her  life. 


27 


Biography 


7 


1.19  Carpenter,  Angelica  Shirley,  and  Jean  Shirley.  L.  Frank  Baum: 
Royal  Historian  of  Oz.  Lerner,  1992.  ISBN  0-8225-4910-7. 144p. 
10  and  up. 

Lyman  Frank  Baum  was  a  fanciful  child,  imagining  that  scare- 
crows could  run  across  the  fields  that  they  protected.  Later,  he 
dressed  the  window  of  his  general  store  with  pots  and  pans 
assembled  to  look  like  a  man.  Thus  originated  two  of  his  char- 
acters in  The  Wonderful  Wizard  ofOz.  Frank  Baum's  enterprises, 
his  family  life,  and  his  determination  to  write  despite  ill  health 
provide  the  framework  for  this  responsible  biography  of  an 
author  who  wrote  his  life  into  his  stories  for  children. 

1.20  Collins,  David  R.  Malcolm  X:  Black  Rage.  Dillon  Press,  1992. 
ISBN  0-87518-498-7. 104p.  10  and  up. 

Solutions  to  racial  prejudice  are  complex  and  never  easily  dis- 
cussed in  the  classroom.  David  Collins,  however,  portrays  more 
than  anger  in  this  sensitive  biography  of  Malcolm  X,  one  of 
twenty-two  books  in  the  People  in  Focus  series.  Facts  are  pre- 
sented, with  the  judgment  of  Malcolm's  life  left  to  the  reader. 
Teachers  and  students  alike  will  find  the  text,  black-and-white 
photographs,  bibliography,  and  index  useful  and  informative. 

1.21  Conrad,  Pam.  Prairie  Visions:  The  Life  and  Times  of  Solomon 
Butcher.  Photographs  by  Solomon  Butcher.  HarperCollins,  1991. 
ISBN  0-06-021375-2.  85p.  11  and  up. 

Solomon  Butcher,  an  early  Nebraska  settler,  was  a  man  unable 
to  decide  which  of  his  many  talents  and  interests  to  pursue.  He 
decided  to  record  the  settlement  history  of  Custer  County  in 
photographs,  a  remarkably  innovative  project  for  the  times. 
Captivated  by  his  photographs  while  researching  her  novel  Prai- 
rie Songs,  Pam  Conrad  created  a  pictorial  account  of  Butcher's 
eclectic  life  and  of  the  courageous  pioneer  families  that  he  im- 
mortalized more  than  a  hundred  years  ago.  Notable  1991  Chil- 
dren's Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

1.22  Crews,  Donald.  Bigmama's.  Illustrated  by  Donald  Crews. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09951-3.  32p.  4-7  (est.). 

Bigmama  once  told  grandson  Donald  Crews,  "Boy,  you  going  to 
amount  to  something/7  This  autobiographical  picture  book  of 
author/ illustrator  Crews  is  further  testimony  to  her  faith.  Re- 
calling long-ago  family  train  trips  back  to  the  farm  in  Cotton- 
dale,  Florida,  to  see  Bigmama  and  Bigpapa,  Crews  uses  water- 
color  and  color  dyes  to  reassure  that,  in  memory  at  least,  nothing 


ERLC 


28 


8 


Biography 


changes.  From  fishing  hole  to  deep  well  to  the  peddle  sewing 
machine  in  the  hall  and  to  the  reunion  with  family,  "everything 
is  as  it  should  be." 

1.23  Darby,  Jean.  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.  Lerner,  1990.  ISBN  0-8225- 
4902-6. 144p.  10  and  up. 

This  highly  readable,  concise  biography  of  Martin  Luther  King, 
Jr.,  explores  the  charismatic  man's  life  as  a  small  child  in  segre- 
gated Atlanta,  his  early  career  as  a  Baptist  minister  in 
Montgomery,  Alabama,  and  his  subsequent  emergence  as  leader 
of  the  American  civil  rights  movement  of  the  1950s  and  1960s. 
Accompanying  the  text  are  striking  black-and-white  photo- 
graphs depicting  King's  family,  the  Montgomery  bus  boycott, 
Freedom  Riders,  and  the  famous  March  on  Washington.  Jean 
Darby  concludes  the  book  with  a  helpful  bibliography,  glossary, 
and  index.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

1.24  dePaola,  Tomie.  Patrick:  Patron  Saint  of  Ireland.  Illustrated  by 
Tomie  dePaola.  Holiday  House,  1992.  ISBN  0-8234-0924-4.  32p. 
3-8  (est). 

The  story  of  Saint  Patrick  begins  with  his  boyhood  in  Britain, 
when  he  was  kidnapped  and  enslaved  in  Ireland.  Although  he 
made  his  way  home  again,  he  returned  to  Ireland  to  found  the 
first  church  there  and  to  baptize  thousands.  Facts  about  Patrick's 
life  are  separated  from  the  legends  that  surround  him,  including 
driving  the  snakes  from  Ireland.  Tomie  dePaola  interprets  both 
life  and  legends  with  earth-tone  static  forms  that  are  uniquely 
his,  but  they  are  also  reminiscent  of  early  religious  paintings. 

1.25  Emmert,  Michelle.  I'm  the  Big  Sister  Now  Illustrated  by  Gail 
Owens.  Albert  Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075-3458-7.  28p.  7-11 
(est.). 

Even  though  nine-year-old  Michelle  Emmert  is  younger  chan 
her  sister  Amy,  Michelle  plays  the  role  of  big  sister  because  Amy 
has  cerebral  palsy  and  cannot  walk  or  talk  or  sit  unsupported. 
Nevertheless,  Amy  brings  unmitigated  joy  to  those  who  love 
her.  In  a  straightforward  description,  Michelle  tells  Amy's  story: 
her  needs,  her  care,  her  gifts,  and  her  responses  to  her  world.  A 
photograph  of  the  sisters  and  illustrations  in  pencil  and  water- 
color  provide  sensitive  accompaniment  to  the  narrative, 

1.26  Fleischman,  Paul.  Townsend's  Warbler.  HarperCollins/Char- 
lotte Zolotow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-064)21875-4.  52p.  9-12. 


ERIC 


29 


Biography 


9 


The  story  of  naturalist  John  Kirk  Townsend's  exploration  of  the 
American  Northwest  in  1834  is  interwoven  with  the  story  of  a 
previously  unknown  warbler's  migration  from  South  America 
to  North  America.  After  an  arduous  journey  and  encounters 
with  storms,  wild  rivers,  and  Native  American  war  parties, 
Townsend  discovered  the  warbler,  which  was  later  named  for 
him.  The  text,  which  draws  on  Townsend's  journal,  is  inter- 
spersed with  black-and-white  photos,  paintings  of  period 
scenes,  and  portraits. 

1.27  Ford,  Barbara.  Walt  Disney.  Walker,  1989.  ISBN  0-8027-6865-2. 
156p.  9-12. 

This  clearly  narrated  biography,  generously  illustrated  with 
black-and-white  photographs,  provides  fascinating  insight  into 
the  creator  of  beloved  characters  for  children.  In  spite  of  mone- 
tary hardships  and  the  negativism  of  friends  and  family,  Walt 
Disney's  determination  and  perseverance  enabled  him  to  fulfill 
his  dreams.  Although  there  are  references  to  Disney's  personal- 
ity quirks,  the  author  leaves  readers  with  an  understanding  of 
and  admiration  for  a  creative  genius  who  revolutionized  the 
entertainment  world. 

1.28  Foreman,  Michael.  War  Boy:  A  Country  Childhood.  Illustrated 
by  Michael  Foreman.  Little,  Brown/Arcade,  1990.  ISBN  1-55970- 
049-1.  92p.  8  and  up  (est.). 

In  a  memoir  of  World  War  II  from  the  perspective  of  a  very 
young  English  boy,  illustrator  Michael  Foreman  re-creates  a  time 
when  his  village  was  crowded  with  soldiers,  when  barbed  wire 
lined  the  beaches  against  invasion,  and  when  incendiary  bombs 
lit  the  night  sky,  one  just  missing  young  Michael's  bed.  But  there 
are  also  memories  of  the  respite  of  his  mother's  tea  shop,  boy- 
hood games,  and  fatherly  soldiers.  The  narration  is  dispassion- 
ate, and  Foreman's  watercolor  illustrations  are  accompanied  by 
line  drawings,  war  posters,  and  diagrams. 

1.29  Freedman,  Russell.  The  Wright  Brothers:  How  They  Invented 
the  Airplane.  Illustrated  by  Wilbur  and  Orville  Wright.  Holiday 
House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0875-2. 124p.  8  and  up. 

Amazingly,  Wilbur  and  Orville  Wright,  inventors  of  the  airplane, 
never  had  any  special  training  in  science  or  engineering.  Read- 
ers might  also  be  interested  to  learn  that  when  the  brothers 
tested  their  first  "full-size,  man-carrying  glider"  in  Kitty  Hawk, 
North  Carolina,  in  the  fall  of  1900,  they  lived  in  a  tent,  and  that 


30 

9 


10 


Biography 


when  the  Wrights  offered  their  successful  airplane  idea  to  the 
U.S.  military,  they  were  "turned  down  without  a  hearing/7  This 
photographic  account  of  the  Wrights'  most  famous  invention  is 
clearly  written  and  well  documented  by  their  own  words  and 
photographs.  Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of 
Social  Studies. 

1.30  Fritz,  Jean.  Bully  for  You,  Teddy  Roosevelt!  Illustrated  by  Mike 
Wimmer.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21769-X.  128p. 
10  and  up. 

Both  adults  and  children  will  find  this  biography  of  Theodore 
Roosevelt  by  award-winning  author  Jean  Fritz  entertaining  and 
may  encounter  some  new  facts  about  our  twenty-sixth  presi- 
dent. For  example,  Teddy  Roosevelt  once  owned  land  in  the 
Dakotas  and  wanted  to  become  a  rancher;  he  ran  for  mayor  of 
New  York  City  and  was  elected  governor  of  New  York  before 
being  nominated  as  vice-president  under  William  McKinley; 
and  he  was  the  first  person  inaugurated  to  the  Conservation 
Hall  of  Fame.  Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of 
Social  Studies. 

1.31  Fritz,  Jean.  George  Washington's  Mother.  Illustrated  by  Dy- 
Anne  DiSalvo-Ryan.  Grosset  and  Dunlap,  1992.  ISBN  0-448- 
40385-4.  48p.  7-9. 

Not  a  great  deal  is  known  about  George  Washington's  mother, 
Mary  Ball  Washington.  But  in  her  impeccable  research  style,  Jean 
Fritz  must  have  ferreted  deeds,  ledgers,  and  letters  to  add  to 
published  accounts.  In  the  seamless  result  for  beginning  readers, 
Mary  Washington  is  revealed  as  both  strong  and  weak,  depend- 
ent and  independent,  and  always  a  bit  impecunious.  On  tinted 
paper,  the  illustrations  have  both  colonial  flair  and  humor. 

1.32  Fritz,  Jean.  The  Great  Little  Madison.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989. 
ISBN  0-399-21768-1. 160p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Just  as  Jean  Fritz  skillfully  sculpts  the  dimensions  of  "a  pale, 
sickly  boy  with  a  weak  voice"  who  became  the  fourth  U.S.  presi- 
dent, so  does  she  tell  of  his  times.  Madison  is  revealed  as  a  quiet 
but  articulate  spokesman  and  meticulous  recordkeeper  at  the 
constitutional  convention,  as  a  student  of  government,  as  a 
friend  and  admirer  of  Jefferson,  and,  finally  as  a  president  pas- 
sionately devoted  to  the  preservation  of  the  union.  Political 
crossfire  is  made  comprehensible  and  intriguing.  Dolley  Madi- 


ERLC 


31 


Biography 


11 


son's  humor,  courage,  and  vanity  also  shine  through.  Boston 
Globe-Horn  Book  Nonfiction  Award,  1990. 

1.33  Golenbock,  Peter.  Teammates*  Illustrated  by  Paul  Bacon.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-15- 
200603-6.  32p.  5-12  (est.). 

Drawings,  photographs,  and  baseball  cards  help  tell  an  impor- 
tant story  in  baseball  history.  When  Jackie  Robinson  joined  the 
Brooklyn  Dodgers  in  1947,  he  became  the  first  African  American 
to  play  on  a  major-league  baseball  team,  and  also  became  a 
victim  of  slurs,  slights,  affronts,  and  threats  from  his  teammates 
and  others.  The  focal  event  of  this  account  is  when  Pee  Wee 
Reese  crossed  the  field  in  Cincinnati,  stood  next  to  Robinson,  put 
an  arm  around  him,  and  silenced  the  taunting  crowds  by  stating, 
"This  man  is  my  teammate/'  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books 
in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

1.34  Harrison,  Barbara,  and  Daniel  Terris.  A  Twilight  Struggle:  The 
Life  of  John  Fitzgerald  Kennedy.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-08830-9. 159p.  10  and  up. 

This  balanced  portrait  of  John  F.  Kennedy  incorporates  current 
historical  information,  family  influences,  and  a  cogent  analysis 
of  President  Kennedy's  political  life.  Based  upon  the  Home  Box 
Office  documentary  JFK:  In  His  Own  Words,  the  biography  de- 
tails both  the  president's  personal  life  and  his  political  career, 
revealing  the  president  as  a  complex,  even  flawed,  political 
leader.  Photographs,  a  selected  bibliography,  a  chronology  of 
important  events,  and  an  index  provide  useful  resources  for  the 
reader. 

1.35  Haskins,  Jim.  Outward  Dreams:  Black  Inventors  and  Their 
Inventions.  Walker,  1991.  ISBN  0-8027-6999-2. 128p.  12  and  up. 

If  history  is  the  living  record  of  a  society,  its  ideas,  codes,  laws, 
and  achievements,  then  significant  groups  of  people  have  been 
omitted  from  the  record.  Nowhere  is  this  more  true  than  with 
African  American  inventors  and  their  inventions.  Now  the 
reader  can  learn  who  built  the  first  steam  engine,  the  first  shoe- 
making  machine,  the  first  clock  in  the  United  States  and  the  first 
traffic  light.  Jim  Haskins  offers  a  refreshing  look  at  the  contribu- 
tions of  African  Americans,  thus  helping  to  correct  some  signifi- 
cant oversights.  A  comprehensive  index  of  black  inventors  be- 
tween 1834  and  1900  is  included. 


er|c 


32 


12 


Biography 


1.36  Houston,  Gloria.  My  Great-Aunt  Arizona*  Illustrated  by  Susan 
Condie  Lamb.  HarperCollins,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-022607-2.  32p. 
6-10  (est). 

Arizona  Houston  Hughes  was  a  singer,  a  reader,  a  dancer,  a 
dreamer,  and,  most  of  all,  a  teacher.  In  this  realistic  yet  fictional 
account  of  her  life,  Arizona  touches  generations  of  her  Appala- 
chian fourth-grade  students  and  helps  them  aspire  to  visit  those 
faraway  places  that  she  had  only  visited  in  her  mind,  through 
her  voracious  reading  of  books.  Young  teachers-to-be  will  de- 
light in  Susan  Condie  Lamb's  expressive  illustrations  of  a 
woman  who  perservered  to  achieve  her  dream  and  to  help 
dreams  emerge  for  others. 

1.37  Hurwitz,  Johanna.  Astrid  Lindgren:  Storyteller  to  the  World. 
Illustrated  by  Michael  Dooling.  Puffin  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-14- 
032692-8.  54p.  7-11. 

Astrid  Lindgren  enjoyed  childhood  on  a  farm  in  southern  Swe- 
den before  moving  to  Stockholm,  marrying,  and  raising  a  family. 
Her  memories  and  adventures,  some  of  which  she  told  to  her 
own  children,  were  woven  into  more  than  forty  books  and  were 
delightfully  exaggerated  in  the  tales  of  Pippi  Longstocking.  This 
affectionate  biography  in  the  Women  of  Our  Time  series  attrib- 
utes Lindgren's  international  success  to  her  appealing  interpre- 
tation of  family  life.  Although  the  book  is  aimed  toward  seven- 
to  eleven-year-old  readers,  it  is  sufficiently  researched  and  de- 
tailed to  appeal  to  teenagers. 

138  Ireland,  Karin.  Albert  Einstein.  Silver  Burdett  Press,  1989.  ISBN 
0-382-09523-5. 144p.  10  and  up. 

The  details  of  Einstein's  daily  life  and  personality  presented  in 
this  biography  help  the  reader  appreciate  him  as  a  man  rather 
than  a  superman.  Einstein  is  portrayed  as  a  single-minded,  very 
private  individual  who  was  first  considered  a  slow  learner  and 
who  came  to  define  the  word  scientist  Consistent  with  the  for- 
mat of  the  Pioneers  in  Change  series,  black-and-white  photo- 
graphs clarify  the  meaty  text,  and  a  time-line  chronicles  the 
scientist's  major  accomplishments. 

139  Jaspersohn,  William.  Senator  A  Profile  of  Bill  Bradley  in  the 
U.S.  Senate.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15- 
272880-5.  224p.  12  and  up. 

Richly  illustrated  with  both  black-and-white  and  colored  photo- 
graphs, this  lucid  biography,  somewhat  breezy  in  tone,  first 


33 


Biography 


13 


sketches  Bill  Bradley's  days  as  an  AU-American  basketball 
player  at  Princeton,  Rhodes  scholar,  and  star  with  the  New  York 
Knickerbockers.  Concentrating  thereafter  on  Bradley's  life  as 
U.S.  Senator  from  New  Jersey,  the  volume  presents  the  legislator 
in  a  variety  of  roles — author  of  major  bills,  envoy  to  the  Soviet 
Union,  campaigner  for  reelection.  Bradley  emerges  throughout 
as  industrious,  highly  intelligent,  sensitive,  and  sensible. 

1.40  Johnson,  Rick  L.  Bo  Jackson:  Baseball/Football  Superstar,  Dil- 
lon Press,  1991.  ISBN  0-87518-489-8.  64p.  7-10  (est.). 

Superstar  sports  figure  Bo  Jackson  was  already  a  football,  track, 
and  baseball  star  back  home  in  McAdory  High  School  in 
McCalla,  Alabama.  At  Auburn  University,  he  won  the  Heisman 
Trophy  as  the  best  college  football  athlete  in  the  nation,  and  after 
college  he  became  both  a  professional  baseball  and  football 
player.  Yet,  this  Taking  Part  biography  for  younger  readers,  illus- 
trated with  photographs,  makes  Jackson  a  real  person,  an  Afri- 
can American  child  of  poverty  with  imperfect  school  behavior 
and  serious  youthful  offenses,  and  in  need  of  help  in  growing 
up. 

1.41  Levinson,  Nancy  Smiler.  Christopher  Columbus:  Voyager  to 
the  Unknown,  Lodestar  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-67292-3.  128p. 
9-12. 

This  well-documented  discussion  of  Columbus's  voyages  in- 
cludes archival  documents,  black-and-white  reproductions  of 
portraits,  and  photographs  of  artifacts,  charts,  and  maps.  In 
chapter  format,  Nancy  Smiler  Levinson's  oversize  volume  sets 
the  historical  stage,  describes  each  of  the  voyages,  and  addresses 
the  place  of  Christopher  Columbus  in  history.  In  large  print  with 
lots  of  white  space,  information  is  presented  in  a  straightfor- 
ward way,  without  dodging  the  admiral's  frailties.  A  chronology 
of  events  and  even  the  crew  list  for  the  first  voyage  are  included. 

1.42  Little,  Jean.  Stars  Come  Out  Within.  Viking  Penguin,  1990.  ISBN 
0-670-82965-X.  263p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Award-winning  Canadian  children's  author  Jean  Little  contin- 
ues her  memoirs  first  begun  in  Little  by  Little,  this  time  focusing 
on  her  adult  life.  Little  recounts  episodes  about  her  own  writing, 
her  short  but  meaningful  teaching  career,  her  remarkable 
mother,  her  significant  friends,  her  Seeing-Eye  dog,  Zephyr,  and 
SAM,  her  talking  computer.  Candid  about  her  experiences  with 
depression  and  the  adjustments  that  she  makes  as  her  sight 


34 


14 


Biography 


decreases,  this  determined  woman  of  strength  tells  a  moving 
story.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1992. 

1.43  Livingston,  Myra  Cohn.  Let  Freedom  Ring:  A  Ballad  of  Martin 
Luther  King,  Jr.  Illustrated  by  Samuel  Byrd.  Holiday  House, 
1992.  ISBN  0-8234-0957-0.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

The  life  work  and  mission  of  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.,  are  told  in 
ballad  form,  borrowing  words  and  phrases  from  King's  own 
sermons  and  speeches  and  embedding  them  within  rhythmic 
text.  Paintings  are  large,  powerful,  color  interpretations  of  actual 
photographs  and  scenes  from  King's  life.  A  reference  page  iden- 
tifies the  scenes  and  sources  of  quotations.  The  ballad  concludes 
with  a  variation  on  its  repeated  chorus:  "From  every  mountain- 
side, let  freedom  ring.  /  Your  dream  is  our  dream,  Martin  Luther 
King." 

1.44  Marrin,  Albert.  Napoleon  and  the  Napoleonic  Wars.  Viking 
Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-83480-7.  276p.  10  and  up. 

This  biography  thoughtfully  presents  the  turmoil  and  tri- 
umphs of  the  Napoleonic  era  of  the  late  seventeenth  and  early 
eighteenth  centuries.  Historian  Albert  Marrin  traces  Napo- 
leon's life  from  his  birth  on  Corsica  to  his  early  military  suc- 
cesses as  the  "Little  Corporal"  to  his  victorious  coronation  as 
European  Emperor  to  his  ultimate  defeat  at  Waterloo  and  im- 
prisonment on  Elba.  Black-and-white  illustrations  (paintings, 
portraits,  cartoons)  and  a  helpful  bibliography  supplement 
the  text.  National  Council  of  Social  Studies  Notable  Children's 
Trade  Books,  1992. 

1.45  McKissack,  Patricia  C.  Jesse  Jackson:  A  Biography.  Scholastic, 
1989.  ISBN  0-590-43181-1. 108p.  8-12. 

Patricia  McKissack's  biography  of  African  American  leader  Jesse 
Louis  Jackson  follows  his  many  trails:  from  the  dusty  roads  of 
Greenville,  South  Carolina,  in  1941  to  the  difficult  campaigns  for 
the  presidency  in  1984  and  1988;  from  his  leadership  of  SCLC's 
Operation  Breadbasket  in  Chicago  to  his  organization  of  the 
Rainbow  Coalition  in  Washington,  D.C.;  from  "country 
preacher"  to  eloquent  orator;  from  commitment  to  America's 
poor  to  audiences  with  foreign  dignitaries.  Whatever  Jackson's 
path,  McKissack's  words,  along  with  dozens  of  black-and-white 
photographs,  make  clear  Jackson's  impact  upon  the  course  of 
history.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 


35 


Biography 


15 


1.46  Neimark,  Anne  E.  Diego  Rivera:  Artist  of  the  People,  Harper- 
Collins, 1992.  ISBN  0-06-021784-7. 116p.  8-12. 

In  a  fictionalized  biography  based  partly  on  Diego  Rivera's  own 
autobiography  and  writings,  Anne  Neimark  first  creates  a  por- 
trait of  the  Mexican  artist  as  boy,  round  and  curious  and  full  of 
mischief  and  art.  Then,  against  the  political  turmoil  of  his  times, 
Rivera  becomes  a  man,  determined  to  record  the  stories  around 
him  and  to  be  a  participant  as  well.  His  records  are  his  famous 
murals,  testifying  to  his  people  in  the  places  where  his  people 
would  see  them.  Neimark  includes  reproductions  of  the  artist's 
work,  beginning  with  a  drawing  by  three-year-old  Diego. 

1.47  Nichols,  Janet.  American  Music  Makers:  An  Introduction  to 
American  Composers.  Walker,  1990.  ISBN  0-8027-6958-6.  209p. 
12  and  up. 

Janet  Nichols  offers  ten  fascinating  portraits  of  talented  Ameri- 
can composers,  from  the  nineteenth-century  pianist  Louis 
Gottschalk  to  the  internationally  acclaimed  George  Gershwin  to 
the  contemporary  innovator  Philip  Glass.  Presented  in  chrono-" 
logical  order,  the  mini-biographies  explore  the  musicians'  per- 
sonal lives,  professional  successes  and  failures,  and  specific  con- 
tributions to  the  musical  field.  Black-and-white  photos  of  the 
nine  men  and  one  woman  accompany  the  text,  along  with  bibli- 
ographies of  recommended  books  and  recordings,  a  glossary, 
and  an  index. 

1.48  Osborne,  Mary  Pope.  The  Many  Lives  of  Benjamin  Franklin. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0680-4.  144p. 
9-12. 

A  scientist,  statesman,  diplomat,  and  inventor — Benjamin 
Franklin  was  all  of  these  and  more.  The  "many  lives"  of  one  of 
America's  founding  fathers  are  sequentially  explored  in  Mary 
Pope  Osborne's  account  of  Franklin's  life  from  childhood  until 
death.  A  list  of  his  accomplishments  and  a  time-line  of  important 
events  in  his  life  help  to  organize  the  information  presented  in 
this  book.  Historical  black-and-white  photographs  of  early 
America  further  authenticate  a  well-researched  biography.  Nota- 
ble 1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

1.49  Parks,  Rosa,  with  Jim  Haskins.  Rosa  Parks:  My  Story.  Dial 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-0673-1. 192p.  12  and  up  (est.). 

Rosa  Parks's  quiet  defiance  on  a  bus  in  Montgomery,  Alabama, 
in  1955  is  often  cited  as  a  pivotal  moment  in  the  struggle  for  civil 


ERLC 


38 


16 


Biography 


rights  in  the  United  States.  Here,  with  family  photos  and  great 
modesty,  Parks  tells  the  story  of  her  ancestry,  her  marriage,  and 
the  events  that  led  to  and  affected  her  decision  not  to  abandon 
her  seat  that  day  Her  arrest  and  her  life  subsequent  to  the 
ensuing  societal  changes  are  also  documented. 

1.50  Peet,  Bill  Bill  Peet:  An  Autobiography.  Illustrated  by  Bill  Peet 
Houghton  Mifflin,  1989.  ISBN  0-395-50932-7.  90p.  6-12  (est.). 

In  a  book  filled  with  charcoal  drawings  of  his  beloved  characters 
and  true-life  experiences  on  every  page,  popular  and  prolific 
author/illustrator  Bill  Peet  tells  the  story  of  his  life.  As  a  young 
boy,  he  loved  to  draw.  Hired  at  Walt  Disney  Studios  upon  gradu- 
ation from  art  school,  he  remained  for  nearly  thirty  years  and 
became  one  of  Disney's  top  artists.  At  the  same  time,  Peet  began 
to  write  and  illustrate  the  stories  that  he  originally  told  to  his 
own  children.  Now  he  works  full-time  creating  books.  Caldecott 
Honor  Medal  1990. 

1.51  Porter,  A.  P.  Jump  at  de  Sun:  The  Story  of  Zora  Neale  Hurston. 
Carolrhoda  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-87614-667-1.  96p.  8-12. 

Folklorist/novelist  Zora  Neale  Hurston  celebrated  a  distinc- 
tively African  cultural  point  of  view  at  a  time  when  the  Ameri- 
can part  of  her  heritage  was  celebrated  by  many  of  her  contem- 
poraries. Her  unorthodox  views  and  eccentric  personality 
prevented  her  from  achieving  in  her  lifetime  the  recognition  or 
financial  stability  that  she  deserved.  Author  A.  P  Porter  recounts 
Hurston's  triumphs  and  failures  in  honest  and  engaging  terms; 
abundant  photographs  and  clear  prose  combine  to  make  an 
entertaining  biography  of  this  African  American  writer. 

1.52  Rappaport,  Doreen.  Living  Dangerously:  American  Women 
Who  Risked  Their  Lives  for  Adventure.  HarperCollins,  1991. 
ISBN  0-06-025109-3. 117p.  9-13. 

Riding  over  Niagara  Falls  in  a  barrel,  heading  out  on  safari,  and 
scaling  Mount  Huascar&n  in  Peru  are  but  three  of  the  adventures 
recounted  in  this  text.  The  reader  learns  about  six  women  who, 
like  their  male  counterparts  Charles  Lindbergh  and  Robert 
Perry,  sought  to  accomplish  feats  of  daring.  Each  portrayal  in- 
cludes black-and-white  photographs  and  biographical  data.  The 
bibliography  and  list  of  other  women  adventurers  provide  sug- 
gestions for  further  reading. 


ERIC 


37 


A.  Dear  Dr.  Bell . . .  Your  friend,  Helen  Keller  by  Judith  St.  George;  cover  illustration 
by  Ellen  Thompson  (see  1 .58).  B.  The  King's  Day:  Louis  XIV  of  France  by  Aliki  (see 
1 .9).  C.  Jump  at  de  Sun:  The  Story  ofZora  Neale  Hurston  by  A.  P.  Porter  (see  1 .51 ). 
D.  Bard  of  Avon:  The  Story  of  William  Shakespeare  by  Diane  Stanley  and  Peter 
Vennema;  illustrated  by  Diane  Stanley  (see  1.61). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


A.  8/7/  Peet:  An  Autobiography  by  Bill  Peet  (see  1.50).  B.  Bully  for  You,  Teddy 
Roosevelt!  by  Jean  Fritz;  illustrations  by  Mike  Wimmer  (see  1.30).  C.  Celia's  Island 
Journal  by  Celia  Thaxter;  adapted  and  illustrated  by  Loretta  Krupinski  (see  1.66). 
D.  Townsend's  Warblerby  Paul  Fleischman  (see  1.26). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Biography 


17 


1.53  Richmond,  Robin.  Introducing  Michelangelo.  Little,  Brown, 
1991.  ISBN  0-316-74440-9.  32p.  10-12. 

This  visually  captivating  account  conveys  both  the  sensory 
power  of  Michelangelo's  work  and  the  fascination  of  his  life  and 
era.  Reproductions  of  the  artist's  friezes,  statues,  and  portraits  cf 
Christian  and  mythic  figures  are  augmented  with  works  by  his 
contemporaries,  offered  as  further  explanation  of  the  historical 
period.  For  example,  paintings  of  Florence,  of  Medici  merchant 
princes,  and  of  an  artist's  studio  are  included.  Insets  add  practi- 
cal information  about  how  Michelangelo  painted  the  Sistine 
Chapel  and  how  its  original  luminescence  has  been  restored. 

1.54  Roth,  Susan  L.  Marco  Polo:  His  Notebook.  Doubleday,  1991. 
ISBN  0-385-26555-7.  32p.  8-12  (est.). 

This  fictionalized  version  of  Marco  Polo's  notebook,  written  on 
"parchment,"  records  the  thirteenth-century  travels  originally 
described  in  Polo's  own  Travels  of  Marco  Polo.  Maps,  paintings, 
and  drawings  help  to  tell  the  tale  of  visiting  Mount  Ararat, 
Persian  fire-eaters,  the  Great  Khan,  and  China  with  its  coal, 
postal  service,  and  paper  money  Visually  splendid,  the  format 
invites  close  examination. 

1.55  Rowland,  Delia.  The  Story  of  Sacajawea,  Guide  to  Lewis  and 
Clark.  Illustrated  by  Richard  Leonard.  Dell/Yearling  Books, 
1989.  ISBN  0-440-40215-8.  92p.  8-11. 

Delia  Rowland  dramatically  relates  the  harrowing,  exciting  ex- 
ploits of  Sacajawea,  the  Shoshone  guide  to  Lewis  and  Clark  as 
they  explored  America's  Northwest  Territory.  Stolen  from  her 
family  as  a  young  girl,  enslaved  by  a  rival  Indian  tribe,  and  then 
sold  to  a  rough  fur  trapper,  this  young  woman  nevertheless 
revealed  courage  and  wisdom  far  beyond  her  years.  Boys  and 
girls  alike  will  enjoy  reading  about  the  expedition's  encounters 
with  hostile  Native  Americans,  wild  animals,  and  nature's  harsh 
elements. 

1.56  Ryan,  Nolan,  and  Harvey  Frommer.  Throwing  Heat:  The  Auto- 
biography of  Nolan  Ryan.  Avon  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-380- 
70826-4.  249p.  12  and  up  (est.). 

Nolan  Ryan  tells  his  story  of  growing  up  in  a  small  Texas  town, 
being  drafted  into  the  major  leagues  after  high  school,  marrying 


ERJC 


40 


18 


Biography 


his  childhood  sweetheart,  and  ultimately  becoming  the  greatest 
pitcher  in  basebrU  history.  Interspersed  throughout  the  narra- 
tive are  the  vokes  of  family,  scouts,  coaches,  teammates,  and 
competitors  who  have  known  Ryan  over  the  years.  The  highly 
readable,  interesting  prose  is  complemented  by  black-and-white 
photographs  of  Ryan  at  different  stages  of  his  life. 

1.57  Rylant,  Cynthia.  But  I'll  Be  Back  Again:  An  Album,  Orchard 
Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08406-X.  80p. 
10-12. 

When  Cynthia  Rylant  was  a  little  girl  in  West  Virginia,  her  father 
left  her  mother,  and  then  her  mother  left  her  to  go  to  nursing 
school.  So  Rylant  lived  with  her  grandparents  and  sought  solace 
in  music  and  her  friends.  Supplemented  with  quotes  from 
Beatles  songs  and  black-and-white  photographs  that  create  the 
appearance  of  a  personal  album,  this  honest,  introspective  auto- 
biography documents  Rylant's  childhood  and  adolescence  and 
includes  her  memories  of  thoughts  and  boyfriends,  with  which 
early  adolescents  can  identify. 

1.58  St.  George,  Judith.  Dear  Dr.  Bell . . .  Your  friend,  Helen  Keller. 
G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-2237-1.  96p.  10-12  (est.). 

The  lives  of  two  inspirational  contemporaries,  Alexander  Gra- 
ham Bell  and  Helen  Keller,  crossed  repeatedly  It  was  Bell  who 
recommended  to  Keller's  father  that  a  tutor  be  secured  for  the 
girl,  and  so  Annie  Sullivan  came  into  Keller's  life.  From  the  age 
of  seven  and  for  almost  thirty-five  years,  Helen  Keller  corre- 
sponded with  Dr.  Bell  Judith  St.  George  explains  the  inventor's 
early  work  for  the  deaf,  but  she  primarily  chronicles  Keller's  life 
and  Keller  and  Bell's  correspondence  and  meetings.  Numerous 
black-and-white  photographs  accompany  the  text. 

1.59  Senna,  Carl.  Colin  Powell:  A  Man  of  War  and  Peace.  Walker, 
1992.  ISBN  0-8027-8181-0. 176p.  8-12. 

Of  eleven  chapters,  Carl  Senna  devotes  nine  to  Colin  Powell's 
military  career,  tracing  Powell's  early  service  in  Vietnam,  where 
the  young  officer  served  two  tours  and  was  wounded,  to  his 
recent  service  as  the  first  African  American  chair  of  the  Joint 
Chiefs  of  Staff.  Although  Powell  is  presented  as  beloved  son, 
able  student,  and  caring  husband  and  father,  the  author  concen- 
trates on  the  general's  exceptional  abilities  as  military  tactician 
and  diplomat.  Clustered  black-and-white  photographs  show 
Powell  in  various  roles. 


er|c 


41 


Biography 


19 


1.60  Simon,  Sheridan.  Stephen  Hawking:  Unlocking  the  Universe. 
Dillon  Press,  1991.  ISBN  0-87518-455-3. 115p.  10-12  (est.). 

The  personal  and  professional  life  of  Stephen  W.  Hawking,  who 
is  sometimes  called  the  greatest  scientific  thinker  of  the  twenti- 
eth century,  is  described  in  this  People  in  Focus  book,  from  his 
early  childhood  and  schooling  to  his  scientific  work.  Hawking's 
contributions  to  cosmology — the  study  of  the  origin,  evolution, 
and  fate  of  the  universe — are  made  comprehensible  without  loss 
of  his  moving  personal  story,  for  Hawking  is  a  victim  of  ALS,  or 
motor  neuron  disease,  and  is  unable  to  walk  or  talk. 

1.61  Stanley,  Diane,  and  Peter  Vennema.  Bard  of  Avon:  The  Story  of 
William  Shakespeare.  Illustrated  by  Diane  Stanley.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09109-1. 48p.  7  and  up. 

The  team  of  Diane  Stanley  and  Peter  Vennema  has  produced  the 
backdrop  for  William  Shakespeare's  time  and  brought  cohesion 
to  the  skimpy  bits  of  information,  documentation,  and  transac- 
tions still  in  existence.  The  narrative  is  storylike,  with  the 
authors  cautious  about  filling  in  details  for  which  there  is  no 
evidence.  Full-page  paintings  offer  brilliantly  colored  portrayals 
of  sixteenth-century  England,  executed  in  blended  gouache  wa- 
tercolors  that  yield,  according  to  Stanley,  "a  somewhat  naive, 
folk-art  style." 

1.62  Stanley,  Fay.  The  Last  Princess:  The  Story  of  Princess  Ka'iulani 
of  Hawai'i.  Illustrated  by  Diane  Stanley.  Four  Winds  Press,  1991. 
ISBN  0-02-786785-4.  40p.  6-12  (est.). 

Radiant  gouache  paintings  illustrate  the  story  of  Princess  Ka'iu- 
lani, born  into  the  Hawaiian  royal  family  but  destined  never  to 
reign.  While  the  princess  attended  school  in  England,  American 
traders  wrested  political  power  from  her  aunt,  the  queen.  De- 
spite her  courageous  protests,  and  appeals  to  President  Cleve- 
land, Princess  Ka'iulani  won  only  the  hearts  of  her  people,  not 
the  return  of  her  kingdom.  She  died  at  age  twenty-three,  many 
say  of  despair.  An  explanation  of  the  Hawaiian  language  and  a 
bibliography  are  included. 

1.63  Stevens,  Bryna.  Handel  and  the  Famous  Sword  Swallower  of 
Halle.  Illustrated  by  Ruth  Tietjen  Councell.  Philomel  Books, 
1990.  ISBN  0-399-21548-4.  32p.  4-8. 

George  Handel,  Senior,  the  rich  barber-surgeon  of  Halle,  hated 
music.  In  fact,  if  it  had  not  been  for  Aunt  Anna,  young  George 
Frederick  Handel  might  not  have  learned  to  play  the  clavichord 


42 


20 


Biography 


at  all,  for  some  say  that  she  kept  a  clavichord  hidden  in  the  attic. 
When  a  boy  swallowed  a  knife,  it  was  George  the  Elder's  surgi- 
cal talents  that  got  him  summoned  to  court,  where  the  duke 
recognized  George  Frederick's  musical  gifts  and  pressured  the 
father  to  let  the  boy  study  music.  The  dusty-toned  pencil  draw- 
ings are  as  spirited  as  the  tellings;  the  author's  notes  offer 
sources  for  the  anecdotal  history. 

1.64  Stevenson,  James.  Don't  You  Know  There's  a  War  On?  Illus- 
trated by  James  Stevenson.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
688-11384-2.  32p.  5  and  up. 

In  1942  the  war  was  on,  and  the  ten-year-old  child  narrator 
recalls  daily  efforts  made  on  the  home  front  while  his  father  was 
away:  ration  books,  blackouts,  Spam,  victory  gardens,  war 
stamps,  stalking  a  suspected  spy,  collecting  tinfoil,  and  waiting. 
The  blend  of  child  perspective  and  humor  opens  an  important 
topic  for  discussion.  Imaginative  and  minimal  watercolor  im- 
ages capture  the  rarifed  spirit  of  memory. 

1.65  Teeters,  Peggy.  Jules  Verne:  The  Man  Who  Invented  Tomorrow. 
Walker,  1992.  ISBN  0-8027-8191-8. 128p.  10  and  up. 

Author  Peggy  Teeters  clearly  presents  the  scope  of  Jules  Verne's 
career,  which  was  highly  diverse  before  he  fathered  what  is  now 
known  as  science  fiction.  Of  the  nearly  one  hundred  books  that 
Verne  wrote,  sixty-five  featured  extraordinary  voyages  on,  into, 
around,  above,  and  below  the  earth.  Teeters  rightfully  pays  trib- 
ute to  her  subject's  remarkable  prescience:  technological  and 
scientific  wonders  that  he  foretold  over  a  century  ago  have  be- 
come or  are  emerging  as  today's  commonplaces.  Black-and- 
white  photographs  and  sketches  complement  the  text. 

1.66  Thaxter,  Celia  (adapted  by  Loretta  Krupinski).  Celia's  Island 
Journal.  Illustrated  by  Loretta  Krupinski.  Little,  Brown,  1992. 
ISBN  0-316-83921-3.  32p.  6-8  (est). 

When  nineteenth-century  poet  Celia  Thaxter  was  a  child,  she 
lived  on  an  island  off  the  coast  of  New  Hampshire,  where  her 
father  was  the  lighthouse  keeper.  There,  with  her  young  brother, 
she  explored  the  rocky  surfaces,  watched  the  tidal  pools,  rel- 
ished the  seasons,  and  became  an  astute  observer  of  nature. 
Thaxter  kept  her  childhood  impressions  in  a  journal,  describing 
her  days  so  keenly  that  other  children  can  share  them  today.  The 
journal  excerpts  are  bordered  by  island  birds  and  plants;  facing 
pages  interpret  the  isolation  and  beauty  in  the  family's  life. 


43 


with  Jim  Haskins  « . 

A. 


C. 


A.  Rosa  Parks:  MyStoryby  Rosa  Parks  with  Jim  Haskins  (see  1 .49).  B.  Michelangelo's 
World  by  Piero  Ventura  (see  1 .69).  C.  Prairie  Visions:  The  Life  and  Times  of  Solomon 
Butcher  by  Pam  Conrad;  jacket  design  by  David  Saylor  (see  1.21). 


44  BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


>VA  N  !  \V  flA  VVl 


I 


m   RYAN    W  H  1  1  E 


xsh  ANN  MARIE  CUNNINGHAM 


B. 


A.  Handel  and  the  Famous  Sword  Swallower  of  Halle  by  Bryna  Stevens;  illustrated  by 
Ruth  Tietjen  Councell  (see  1 .63).  B.  Ryan  White:  My  Own  Story  by  Ryan  White  and 
Ann  Marie  Cunningham  (see  1 .71).  C.  Teammates  by  Peter  Golenbock;  illustrated  by 
Paul  Bacon  (see  1.33). 


ER?C 


45 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Biography 


21 


1.67  Turner,  Robyn  Montana.  Georgia  O'Keeffe.  Mary  Cassatt.  Rosa 
Bonheur.  Little,  Brown,  1991-92. 32p.  6-10. 

Women  who  became  accomplished  artists  against  the  obstacles 
of  little  encouragement  or  praise  for  their  efforts  are  the  subjects 
of  these  picture-book  biographies  in  the  Portraits  of  Women 
Artists  for  Children  series.  Portraits  of  the  artists  and  important 
landmarks  in  their  lives  are  included,  but  most  important  are  the 
radiant,  full-color,  captioned  reproductions  of  their  artwork  that 
spill  across  the  pages,  subordinating  the  significance  of  gender 
to  the  supremacy  of  their  art.  Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books 
in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

1.68  Ventura,  Piero.  Great  Composers,  Illustrated  by  Piero  Ventura. 
G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21746-0. 124p.  All  ages. 

From  prehistoric  cultures  to  the  Beatles,  Great  Composers  pre- 
sents information  on  the  role  of  music  over  the  centuries.  The 
book's  profiles  of  selected  composers  present  the  history  behind 
some  of  the  world's  most  celebrated  pieces  of  music.  Piero  Ven- 
tura's artwork  includes  lifelike  portraits  of  composers  and  col- 
orful sketches  of  their  stages,  theaters,  and  communities.  Black- 
line  sketches  of  various  instruments  and  brief  biographies  of 
each  composer  can  be  used  to  supplement  the  text. 

1.69  Ventura,  Piero.  Michelangelo's  World.  Illustrated  by  Piero  Ven- 
tura. G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21593-X.  44p.  8  and 
up  (est). 

Piero  Ventura  tells  Michelangelo's  story  in  first  person,  vividly 
recounting  his  experiences,  his  times,  and  both  his  triumphs  and 
setbacks  as  painter  and  sculptor.  Ventura's  detailed  and  attrac- 
tive color  illustrations  create  the  daily  realities  of  a  distant  time. 
A  time-line  of  the  artist's  life  and  a  photographic  glossary  of  his 
greatest  works  round  out  the  text. 

1.70  Weil,  Lisl.  Wolferl:  The  First  Six  Years  in  the  Life  of  Wolfgang 
Amadeus  Mozart,  1756-1762.  Illustrated  by  Lisl  Weil.  Holiday 
House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0876-0.  30p.  6-9. 

The  early  childhood  of  Mozart  is  recounted,  from  his  birth  to  his 
first  command  performance  for  the  Empress  Maria  Theresa  of 
Austria  at  age  six.  Lisl  Weil's  cartoon-like  illustrations  in  ink, 
crayon,  and  watercolor  provide  a  charming  view  of  life  in  eight- 
eenth-century Vienna.  A  glossary  helps  explain  the  more  diffi- 
cult terms  and  place-names. 


ERIC 


48 


22 


Biography 


1.71  White,  Ryan,  and  Ann  Marie  Cunningham.  Ryan  White:  My 
Own  Story.  Dial  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0977-3.  277p.  10  and 
up  (est.). 

Ryan  White  contracted  AIDS  at  age  thirteen  from  tainted  blood 
used  to  treat  his  hemophilia.  Before  his  death  at  age  eighteen,  he 
triumphed  over  the  abuse  of  his  community  and  became  a  cul- 
tural hero  who  championed  all  victims  of  discrimination.  L^- 
spite  lifelong  illness,  White  was  a  normal  kid  from  a  working- 
class  home.  He  and  coauthor  Ann  Marie  Cunningham  write 
engagingly  in  unvarnished  terms  about  the  social  and  physical 
ravages  of  his  disease.  This  very  literate  account  will  be  an 
important  book  long  after  White's  media  celebrity  has  faded. 

1.72  Wormser,  Richard.  Pinkerton:  America's  First  Private  Eye. 
Walker,  1990.  ISBN  0-8027-6965-9. 120p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

From  humble  roots  in  the  nineteenth-century  slums  of  Glasgow, 
Scotland,  Allan  Pinkerton  struggled  against  slavery,  made  bar- 
rels, did  police  work,  and  eventually  founded  a  detective  agency 
that  developed  an  international  reputation  for  solving  difficult 
crimes.  Today  that  agency  is  a  modern  corporation  with  50,000 
employees  devoted  to  preventing,  rather  than  solving,  crimes. 
Interested  readers  will  appreciate  the  original  photographs  and 
drawings,  the  index,  and  the  list  of  related  books.  Notable  1990 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

1.73  Zheng  Zhensun  and  Alice  Low.  A  Young  Painter:  The  Life  and 
Paintings  of  Wang  Yani — China's  Extraordinary  Young  Artist. 

Photographs  by  Zheng  Zhensun.  Scholastic  Hardcover 
Books/Byron  Preiss-New  China  Pictures  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0- 
590-44906-0.  80p.  All  ages. 

Wang  Yani,  a  precocious  Chinese  painter,  began  producing 
charming,  energetic  works  at  age  three  and  soon  won  interna- 
tional attention.  Readers  will  be  fascinated  by  this  lavishly  illus- 
trated account  of  her  early  life.  Although  the  word  genius  doesn't 
appear  in  the  text,  it  is  evident  in  Wang  Yani's  free-flowing  and 
sophisticated  depictions  of  monkeys,  cranes,  cats,  trees,  and 
flowers.  The  text  recounts  her  childhood,  her  relationship  with 
her  father,  her  artistic  growth,  and  her  personal  development. 
Color  photographs  showcase  the  artist  at  work  and  reproduce 
her  paintings.  An  index,  map,  and  glossary  of  Chinese  terms 
round  out  this  introduction  to  a  still-young  artist. 


47 


Books  for  Young  Children 


The  content  of  a  children's  book  is  basically  unimportant.  The  sole 
purpose  oftJmt  book  is  to  convince  the  child  that  reading  is  great  fun. 
The  book  must  be  so  exciting  and  funny  and  wonderful  that  the  child 
falls  in  love  with  it.  Then  the  battle  is  won  and  the  realization  that 
books  are  easy  and  lovely  and  enthralling  begins  to  dawn  on  the 
young  reader.  There  need  be  no  message  in  the  book,  no  moral,  just 
sheer  entertainment. 

Roald  Dahl,  CBC  Features 


48 


2  Books  for 
Young  Children 


Alphabet  Books 

2.1  Agard,  John.  The  Calypso  Alphabet  Illustrated  by  Jennifer 
Bent.  Henry  Holt,  1989.  ISBN  0-8050-1177-3.  30p.  5-^8. 

Through  a  combination  of  scratchboard  and  bright  watercolor 
inks,  Jennifer  Bent  adds  to  the  lively  Caribbean  flavor  of  this 
rhythmic  alphabet  book.  In  calypso  beat  and  rhyming  text,  al- 
phabet letters  are  matched  with  the  island  lexicon — "h  for 
hurry-hurry.  Hurry-hurry  make  bad  curry."  Children  past  al- 
phabet learning  will  experience  cultural  snapshots  through  the 
pages.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

2.2  Argent,  Kerry.  Animal  Capers.  Illustrated  by  Kerry  Argent.  Dial 
Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-8037-0752-5. 40p.  3-7. 

With  a  bright-eyed  bird  as  "mascot,"  animals  from  anteaters  to 
kookaburras  to  wombats  and  zebras  follow  one  another  across 
the  pages  of  this  alphabet  book.  Only  on  the  final  page  does  the 
reader  discover  where  this  cheery  parade  of  animals  is  headed. 
Lively  and  humorous  animals  are  rendered  in  chalk  and  colored 
pencil,  spread  engagingly  across  white  backgrounds  and  in- 
volved in  playful  "capers"  along  the  route. 

2.3  Aylesworth,  Jim.  The  Folks  in  the  Valley:  A  Pennsylvania 
Dutch  ABC.  Illustrated  by  Stefano  Vitale.  HarperCollins,  1992. 
ISBN  0-06-021929-7.  32p.  3  and  up. 

"Alarm  clocks  ring  /  It's  almost  dawn  /  The  folks  in  the  valley 
/  Stretch  and  yawn."  From  morning  alarm-clock  yawns  to  eve- 
ning yawns  over  candlesticks,  the  Pennsylvania  Diutch  go  about 
their  busy  days — harvesting  wheat,  splitting  oaks,  plowing 
fields,  and  milking  cows — all  described  through  an  alphabet 
rhyming  book.  Stefano  Vitale's  primitive-style  folk-art  paint- 
ings, executed  on  textured  wood  and  framed  with  stencils  of 
Pennsylvania  Dutch  motifs,  reflect  the  serenity  and  order  of  the 
lives  of  these  "folks  in  the  valley." 


ERIC 


49 


A.  Alison's  Zinnia  by  Anita  Lobe!  (see  2.16).  B.  The  Folks  in  the  Valley:  A 
Pennsylvania  Dutch  ABC  by  Jim  Aylesworth;  illustrated  by  Stefano  Vitale  (see  2.3). 
C.  Aardvarks,  Disembark!  by  Ann  Jonas  (see  2.13). 


5i)        BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 

ERIC 


III 


Chickd 


A.  Chicka  Chicka  Boom  Boom  by  Bill  Martin,  Jr.  and  John  Archambault;  illustrated  by 
Lois  Ehlert  (see  2.19).  B.  Antler,  Bear,  Canoe:  A  Northwoods Alphabet  Yearby  Betsy 
Bowen  (see  2.6).  C.  Eating  the  Alphabet:  Fruits  £  Vegetables  from  A  to  Z  by  Lois 
Ehlert  (see  2.10). 


ERLC 


3EST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Alphabet  Books 


25 


2.4  Aylesworth,  Jim.  Old  Black  Fly,  Illustrated  by  Stephen  Gam- 
mell  Henry  Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1401-2. 32p.  2-£. 

In  this  exuberant,  rapping  rhyme,  Old  Black  Fly  goes  buzzing 
around  having  a  very  busy  bad  day.  With  bulging  scarlet  eyes 
and  trailing  multicolored  paint  splatters,  Old  Black  Fly  annoys 
his  way  through  the  alphabet  and  the  house:  "He  ate  on  the  crust 
/  of  the  Apple  pie.  /  He  bothered  the  Baby  and  made  her  cry. 
Shoo  fly!  /  Shoo  fly!  /  Shoo."  Stephen  Gammell's  paintings 
create  the  most  buoyant  havoc  imaginable — messy  patches  and 
splotches  of  brilliant  color — until  swat! 

2-5  Blake,  Quentin.  Quentin  Blake's  ABC,  Illustrated  by  Quentin 
Blake.  Alfred  A.  Knopf /Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-94149-7. 
32p.  4-6. 

Quentin  Blake's  energetic  and  humorous  cartoon-like  drawings 
feature  individual  alphabet  letters  in  large  print  along  with  a 
rhyming  line.  Letters  C  and  D  work  like  this:  "C  is  for  Cockatoos 
/  learning  to  scream;  D  is  for  Ducks  /  upside  down  in  a  stream." 
Screaming  cockatoos  deafen  an  old  man  and  his  grandchildren, 
but  spark  the  interest  of  an  old  woman  with  an  earhorn.  Ducks 
take  an  underwater  inspection  of  an  upside-down  diver.  The 
whole  effect  is  wacky  fun. 

2.6  Bowen,  Betsy.  Antler,  Bear,  Canoe:  A  Northwoods  Alphabet 
Yean  Illustrated  by  Betsy  Bowen.  Little,  Brown/ Joy  Street  Books, 
1991.  ISBN  0-316-10376-4.  28p.  4-8. 

This  alphabet/ seasons /information  book,  inspired  by  the  north- 
woods  of  Minnesota,  features  a  moose  Antler,  a  black  Bear,  and 
a  snow-covered  Canoe  for  January.  February  brings  a  Dogsled, 
Evenings  spent  reading  or  waxing  skis  by  a  wood  stove,  and  ice 
Fishing.  The  illustrations  were  produced  by  carving  the  designs 
and  letters  backward  into  wood  blocks,  rolling  black  ink  onto 
the  white  pine  blocks,  making  prints  of  the  designs  and  letters, 
and  then  applying  paint  to  each  print.  The  effect  is  one  of  visual 
strength  and  mood  perfection,  from  loons  on  the  lake  to  quiet  on 
the  pond. 

2.7  Brown,  Ruth.  Alphabet  Times  Four:  An  International  ABC, 
Illustrated  by  Ruth  Brown.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-525-44831-4.  32p.  4  and  up. 

This  unusual  alphabet  book  showcases  the  richly  detailed  and 
textured  paintings  of  Ruth  Brown  against  word  labels  for  the 
subjects  of  the  paintings  printed  in  English,  Spanish,  French,  and 


52 


26 


Books  for  Young  Children 


German.  Younger  children  may  have  difficulty  identifying  the 
focal  object  in  some  paintings,  so  an  older  reader  might  help 
them  relish  the  pictures  and  might  point  out  some  of  the  subtle 
details  of  the  illustrations  and  the  arched  frames  in  which  they 
are  displayed. 

2.8  Cox,  Lynn.  Crazy  Alphabet  Illustrated  by  Rodney  McRae.  Or- 
chard Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08566-X.  32p.  3-6. 

"A  is  for  Apple.  Everyone  knows  that/'  Less  obvious,  though,  is 
"B  is  for  Bird  that  ate  the  apple/'  and  "C  is  for  Cat  that  caught 
the  bird  that  ate  the  apple/'  In  cumulative  story  line,  the  alpha- 
bet sentences  build  on  this  repetitive  pattern  until,  at  last,  a  huge 
tongue-wagging  "Yowie"  eats  everything  and  bursts,  leaving 
only  "Z  for  Zero."  Each  colorful  page  offers  a  crazy-quilt  collage 
of  shapes  and  patterns  that  cohere  in  the  letter/sound  illustra- 
tions. 

2.9  Edwards,  Michelle.  Alef-Bet:  A  Hebrew  Alphabet  Book.  Illus- 
trated by  Michelle  Edwards.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-688-09725-1. 32p.  4  and  up. 

In  a  comfortably  chaotic  Israeli  household,  the  alef-bet,  or  the 
Hebrew  alphabet,  is  presented  along  with  a  selection  of  house- 
hold words,  translations,  and  pronunciations.  Illustrations  are 
so  brimming  with  life  that  one  could  forget  the  book's  mission 
and  simply  want  to  join  the  family  The  older  son  rides  in  a 
wheelchair  without  fanfare,  while  the  younger  is  a  welcome 
baby.  Gabi,  the  daughter,  dresses  in  one  costume  after  another  as 
the  pages  turn. 

2.10  Ehlert,  Lois.  Eating  the  Alphabet:  Fruits  and  Vegetables  from 
A  to  Z.  Illustrated  by  Lois  Ehlert.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich, 
1989.  ISBN  0-15-224435-2. 28p.  3-8. 

From  apples  to  zucchini,  bright  watercolor  collages  of  fruits  and 
vegetables  spread  across  the  pages  of  this  alphabet  book.  In  a 
style  that  is  unique  to  Lois  Ehlert,  familiar  and  less  familiar 
edibles  are  colorfully  displayed,  clearly  labeled,  and  served  up 
for  inspection.  Interesting  histories  of  each  of  the  fruits  and 
vegetables  appear  in  the  book's  glossary.  As  a  follow-up,  chil- 
dren might  make  collages  of  their  favorite  fruits  and  vegetables 
or  put  together  their  own  "edible"  alphabet  book. 

2.11  Elliott,  David.  An  Alphabet  of  Rotten  Kids!  Illustrated  by  Oscar 
de  Mejo.  Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-22260-X.  25p.  4-8. 


ERIC 


53 


Alphabet  Books 


27 


Ernestine,  who  painted  her  poodle  green,  is  just  one  of  the  rotten 
kids  in  this  distinctive  alphabet  book.  Each  child,  from  Agatha 
to  Zazu,  is  involved  in  mischief:  Georgina  cuts  holes  in  her 
underwear  because  "no  one  ever  saw  her  there/7  Ursula  teaches 
kids  to  curse,  and  Vincent  drinks  finger  paint.  Primitive,  elemen- 
tal illustrations,  markedly  direct,  are  reminiscent  of  early  cau- 
tionary tales  and  add  to  the  harmless  fun. 

2.12  Hepworth,  CathL  Antics:  An  Alphabetical  Anthology.  Illus- 
trated by  Cathi  Hepworth.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN 
0-399-21862-9.  32p.  All  ages. 

Here's  an  ench/mfing  alphabet  book,  with  each  letter  repre- 
sented by  a  single  word  that  contains  an  "ant."  For  A,  there's 
antique,  a  very  old  woman  ant  knitting  in  her  rocker.  For  B, 
there's  Brilli/wf,  a  mad  scientist  ant  wearing  a  laboratory  coat, 
his  legs  at  work  with  beakers  and  test  tube.  For  D,  it's  a  Deviant, 
a  punk  antenna  head  with  jam  box,  green  mohawk,  and  shades. 
The  ant  portraits  are  adult  funny  at  times  (Kant?  Nonchaknf?), 
but  may  inspire  some  classroom  fantasy  writing. 

2.13  Jonas,  Ann.  Aardvarks,  Disembark!  Illustrated  by  Ann  Jonas. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-07207-0.  40p.  4-7. 

After  forty  days  and  forty  nights  of  rain,  Noah  invites  the  animal 
refugees  to  disembark — in  alphabetical  order!  Surprisingly, 
when  Noah  gets  to  letter  Z  and  "zebras,"  the  ark  is  still  full  of 
animals — Noah  hadn't  called  the  zebus  nor  the  youyous,  the 
xerus  nor  the  wapiti.  Readers  must  rotate  the  book  to  follow  the 
trail  of  exotic  animals,  many  of  which  are  either  extinct  or  en- 
dangered, making  their  way  down  the  mountain.  A  glossary  is 
provided  describing  the  animals'  characteristics  and  habitats. 
ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  2992. 

2.14  Lear,  Edward.  A  Was  Once  an  Apple  Pie.  Illustrated  by  Julie 
Lacome.  Candlewick  Press,  1992.  ISBN  1-56402-000-2.  32p.  4-6. 

Julie  Lacome  has  given  Edward  Lear's  nineteenth-century  non- 
sense alphabet  rhyme  bright  new  images.  Admitting  the  influ- 
ence of  her  studies  of  American  folk  and  craft  design,  the  Scot- 
tish artist  has  used  torn-paper  and  cut-paper  shapes  with 
painted  details  that  sometimes  float  about  the  pages  and  that  are 
sometimes  tucked  into  frames  bordered  by  folk-art  motifs.  For 
example,  in  the  verse  for  N,  "N  was  once  a  little  needle,"  hexa- 
gons of  calico  are  stitched  together  amid  stylized  spools  and  a 
pincushion. 


54 


28 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.15  Linscott,  Jody.  Once  Upon  A  to  Z:  An  Alphabet  Odyssey.  Illus- 
trated by  Claudia  Porges  Holland.  Doubleday,  1991.  ISBN  0-385- 
41907-4.  64p.  4-8. 

"Andy  always  ate  an  astounding  amount.  Artichokes,  apples, 
avocados  and  apricots.  .  .  ."  So  begins  the  saga  of  Andy  of  the 
amazing  appetite  and  his  friend  Daisy,  who  daily  dispatched  the 
"dozens  of  delicious  delicacies"  that  Andy  required.  Each  letter 
page  signals  a  new  alliterative  pattern,  and  each  is  illustrated 
with  brightly  colored  layers  of  cut  paper,  inspired,  according  to 
the  artist,  by  the  colors  of  the  Caribbean  Islands.  Children  and 
teachers  may  want  to  try  their  own  alliterative  stories. 

2.16  Lobel,  Anita.  Alison's  Zinnia*  Illustrated  by  Anita  Lobel.  Green- 
willow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08866-X.  32p.  3  and  up. 

This  elegant  alphabet  book  is  a  garden  of  literacy.  Each  letter  is 
represented  by  an  expansive,  full-color  painting  of  a  flower  be- 
ginning with  that  initial — amaryllis  to  begonia  to  chrysanthe- 
mum to  daffodil,  and  so  on.  Each  page  also  includes  a  sentence 
linking  a  girl's  name,  a  verb,  and  a  flower's  name  in  alphabetical 
rhythms:  "Alison  acquired  an  Amaryllis  for  Beryl,"  "Beryl 
bought  a  Begonia  for  Crystal,"  and  so  on  through  the  alphabet. 
The  pleasure  of  flowers,  the  chain  of  generosity  as  one  child 
gives  to  the  next,  and  the  clever  sentences  all  make  this  a  warm 
and  delightful  work. 

2.17  Lyon,  George  Ella.  A  B  Cedar:  An  Alphabet  of  Trees.  Illustrated 
by  Tom  Parker.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08395-0.  32p. 
3-7. 

A  row  of  shadowed  alphabet  letters  bands  the  top  border  of  each 
double-page  spread  of  this  alphabet  book.  From  a  narrow  black 
foreground  strip,  the  shapes  of  trees  from  aspen  to  zebrawood 
rise  in  silhouette  against  crisp  white  pages,  given  scale  by  ant- 
sized  people.  Dramatically,  dark  and  light  adult  hands  hold 
actual-size  leaves  of  each  tree  for  close  inspection.  In  a  flurry  of 
autumn  leaves  at  the  book's  end,  readers  are  reminded  of  what 
trees  provide — including  this  alphabet  book! 

2.18  Magee,  Doug,  and  Robert  Newman.  Let's  Fly  from  A  to  Z. 
Photographs  by  Doug  Magee  and  Robert  Newman.  Cobblehill 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-525-65105-5.  32p.  8  and  up. 

Beginning  with  A  for  airplanes  that  fly  in  the  sky,  and  for  air- 
ports where  airplanes  land  and  take  off,  a  panoply  of  color 


ERJC  55 


Alphabet  Books 


29 


photographs  offers  a  range  of  perspectives  on  aircraft,  equip- 
ment, and  services.  Organized  by  letters  of  the  alphabet,  some 
pages  seem  ideally  suited:  F,  for  example,  is  for  fuselage  and 
flaps,  while  L  is  for  landing  and  landing  lights.  As  with  many 
topical  alphabet  books,  some  letters  must  stretch:  O  is  for  the 
opening  on  a  jet  engine. 

2.19  Martin,  Bill,  Jr.,  and  John  Archambault.  Chicka  Chicka  Boom 
Boom.  Illustrated  by  Lois  Ehlert  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for 
Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-617-67949-X.  32p.  2-6. 

"A  told  B  and  B  told  C,  I'll  meet  you  at  the  top  of  the  coconut 
tree/7  In  rhythmic,  chant-like  text  that  is  sure  to  encourage  chil- 
dren's instant  participation,  letters  of  the  alphabet  race  to  the  top 
of  the  coconut  tree.  "Will  there  be  enough  room?"  No!  With  a 
"Chicka  chicka  BOOM  BOOM!"  Lois  Ehlert's  bright  and  tropi- 
cal-colored letters  topple  the  tree  and  must  untangle  and  wiggle- 
jiggle  free.  ALA  Notable  Children's  BGoks,  1989;  Boston  Globe-Horn 
Book  Picture  Honor  Bock,  1990;  New  Books  of  Merit,  Winter  1990— 
The  Five  Owls. 

2.20  Merriam,  Eve.  Goodnight  to  Annie:  An  Alphabet  Lullaby.  Il- 
lustrated by  Carol  Schwartz.  Hyperion  Books  for  Children,  1992. 
ISBN  1-56282-206-3.  32p.  3-7. 

After  enjoying  twenty-six  bordered  illustrations  in  gouache,  col- 
ored pencil,  and  ink,  each  with  a  dominating  uppercase  letter, 
the  young  reader  sees  that  Annie  has  joined  in  sleep  such  objects 
as  Nightingales  "nodding  in  their  nest,"  Queens  "doffing  their 
crowns  and  drowsing  under  downy  quilts,"  and  Rainbows  "fad- 
ing from  their  rush  of  bright  colors  to  rose  and  russet  and  deep 
indigo." 

2.21  Merriam,  Eve.  Where  Is  Everybody?  An  Animal  Alphabet.  Il- 
lustrated by  Diane  de  Groat.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for 
Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-671-64964-7.  40p.  3-6. 

Where  is  everybody?  "Alligator  is  in  the  attic,"  "Bear  is  in  the 
bakery,"  . . .  and  "Zebra  is  at  the  zoo."  This  alliterative  phrase 
alphabet  book  offers  hidden  surprises  on  every  page  as  Mole  the 
photographer  tracks  down  animal  pals  from  A  to  Z.  Bustling 
watercolor  illustrations  contain  lots  of  additional  items  begin- 
ning with  the  featured  letters:  "Sheep  is  in  the  stroller,"  but  he's 
riding  past  a  store  window  displaying  a  Santa,  a  sale  sign, 
skates,  and  a  shovel. 


5B 


30 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.22  Owens,  Mary  Beth.  A  Caribou  Alphabet*  Illustrated  by  Mary 
Beth  Owens.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux/Sunburst  Books,  1990, 
ISBN  0-374-41043-7.  32p.  3-6. 

This  unique  rhyming  alphabet  book  focuses  on  caribou  and  their 
habits  from  A  to  Z.  Detailed  and  delicately  rendered  caribou 
weave  in  and  out  of  large-scaled  alphabet  letters,  while  a  single 
line  of  a  couplet  describes  the  action  in  each  scene.  For  example, 
wrapped  with  the  letter  C,  and  with  a  lowercase  c  forming  a 
crescent  moon,  a  caribou  cow  watches  over  the  calf:  "Caribou 
cows  protect  calves  as  they  grow.  . . ."  A  compendium  of  inter- 
esting caribou  facts  is  provided  at  the  book's  end. 

2-23  Phillips,  Tamara.  Day  Care  ABC  Illustrated  by  Dora  Leder  Al- 
bert Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075-1483-7. 32p.  2-7. 

Each  letter  of  the  alphabet  is  used  in  an  alliterative  sentence  that 
describes  children's  morning  preparations  for  day  care  or  pre- 
school and  the  school  activities  that  follow  ("Sam  shares  a 
swing").  Large  capital  and  lowercase  letters  mark  each  page, 
and  classroom  scenes  are  filled  with  objects  that  begin  with  the 
focus  letter  or  sound.  An  index  of  the  pictured  objects  is  in- 
cluded at  the  book's  end.  The  usefulness  of  the  book  reaches 
beyond  a  preschool/day-care  audience. 

2.24  Rubin,  Cynthia  Elyce,  selected  by.  ABC  Americana  from  the 
National  Gallery  of  Art.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-200660-5.  32p.  All  ages. 

The  National  Gallery  of  Art's  Index  of  American  Design  lists 
17,000  watercolor  paintings  which  were  commissioned  during 
the  Great  Depression.  Together  they  create  a  visual  record  of 
"representative  objects  of  American  design  and  folk  art."  For 
each  letter  of  the  alphabet,  one  object  is  featured  against  a  white 
background,  bound  by  a  color  border  and  captioned,  such  as  "W 
is  for  Weather  vane."  A  final  page  identifies  the  original  object 
and  its  artist. 

2.25  Shelby,  Anne.  Potluck.  Illustrated  by  Irene  Trivas.  Orchard 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08519-8. 32p.  3-6. 

Alpha  and  Betty  invite  all  their  friends,  from  Acton  to  Zelda,  to 
a  potluck,  and  brimming  dishes  from  around  the  world  are 
brought — alphabetically — to  the  table:  "Edmund  entered  with 

enchiladas  "  From  asparagus  soup  and  bagels  to  yogurt  and 

zucchini  casserole,  the  colorful  pages  show  a  scrumptious  feast. 


ERIC 


57 


Alphabet  Books 


31 


Beyond  the  exuberance  of  the  party,  the  book  is  a  splendid 
example  of  the  cultural  variety  that  feeds  the  American  palate. 

2.26  Simpson,  Gretchen  Dow.  Gretchen's  abc.  Illustrated  by 
Gretchen  Dow  Simpson.  HarperCollins/Laura  Geringer  Books, 
1991.  ISBN  0-06-025646-X.  27p.  3-6. 

In  this  vibrant  alphabet  book,  each  letter  is  represented  by  a 
bright,  bold,  closeup  depiction  of  a  familiar  object.  Letter  F,  for 
example,  is  a  striking  red,  white,  and  blue  furl  of  cloth;  children 
will  delight  in  identifying  it  as  "flag."  Answers  are  provided  at 
the  end  of  the  book.  Illustrations  for  several  of  the  letters  were 
taken  from  covers  of  The  New  Yorker  painted  by  illustrator 
Gretchen  Dow  Simpson. 

2.27  Snow,  Alan.  The  Monster  Book  of  A  B  C  Sounds.  Illustrated  by 
Alan  Snow.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0935.  28p.  2-10. 

In  this  unconventional  alphabet  book,  a  parade  of  comical  mon- 
sters plays  hide-and-seek  with  a  bunch  of  grinning,  goofy  rats. 
For  each  letter,  a  sound  word  beginning  with  that  letter  balloons 
across  the  oversize  pages.  For  example,  for  the  letter  U,  a  pudgy 
blue  monster  wails  "Uuugh!"  when  he  finds  the  rats  in  his 
cabinet.  And  so  it  goes  throughout  Alan  Snow's  lively  rendition 
of  letter  and  sound  correspondences.  Borders  are  filled  with 
letters  and  such  not-so-often-seen  objects  and  animals  as  emus, 
harmonicas,  javelins,  and  kimonos  in  this  visual  treat. 

2.28  Stock,  Catherine.  Alexander's  Midnight  Snack:  A  Little  Ele- 
phant's ABC.  Illustrated  by  Catherine  Stock.  Clarion  Books, 
1988.  ISBN  0-89919-512-1. 31p.  3-6. 

When  Alexander  gets  thirsty  in  the  middle  of  the  night,  he  heads 
downstairs  to  the  kitchen.  But  the  little  elephant's  midnight 
snack  turns  into  an  alphabetically  arranged  feast  that  begins 
with  apple  pie,  buns,  and  cinnamon  cookies.  In  the  end,  Alexan- 
der returns  to  bed  to  catch  some  "Z's,"  and  Alexander's  mother 
wakes  to  find  an  awful  big  mess  in  the  kitchen.  Alliterative 
captions  beneath  amusing  bordered  watercolors  feature  the  let- 
ter-of-the-page  in  bright  red. 

2.29  Wilner,  Isabel.  A  Garden  Alphabet.  Illustrated  by  Ashley  Wolff. 
Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44731-8.  28p.  4-6. 

From  planning  to  harvesting,  two  gardeners — one  an  ambitious 
black-and-white  border  collie  and  the  other  her  able  assistant,  a 


58 


32 


Books  for  Young  Children 


frog  with  a  cowboy  hat — make  a  step-by-step  production  of 
tending  and  protecting  their  backyard  plot.  Bright,  bursting- 
with-color  illustrations  interpret  each  letter's  rhyming  verse. 

Color  Books 

230  Ehlert,  Lois.  Color  Zoo*  Illustrated  by  Lois  Ehlert.  J.  B.  Lippin- 
cott,  1989.  ISBN  0-397-32260-7. 32p.  3-5. 

Lois  Ehlert's  characteristic  vivid  colors  (as  in  Growing  Vegetable 
Soup)  surround  cutout  shapes,  turning  those  shapes  into  ani- 
mals. As  each  page  is  turned,  a  new  shape  is  embellished  into  a 
different  animal.  Some  of  the  images  are  fascinating,  although  a 
few  are  far-fetched.  Color  and  shape  concepts  are  clear,  as  are 
written  labels  identifying  animals  and  shapes.  Three  glossaries 
at  the  end  review  ten  shapes,  sixteen  colors,  and  nine  animals. 
Caldecott  Honor  Book,  1990. 

2.31  Fleming,  Denise.  Lunch*  Illustrated  by  Denise  Fleming.  Henry 
Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1636-8.  32p.  2-6. 

Never  has  lunch  been  so  appreciated,  sought  out,  gobbled, 
spilled,  slurped,  or  chomped.  Created  out  of  handmade  paper,  a 
cunningly  hungry  mouse  sniffs  lunch.  Like  Eric  Carle's  The  Very 
Hungry  Caterpillar,  he  eats  through  larger-than-life-size  vegeta- 
bles and  fruits,  spewing  the  colors  of  their  juices  all  about  and 
splashing  himself  with  the  colors  of  lunch.  Minimal  text  and 
exuberant  appetite  combine  to  make  a  manageable  book  for 
beginning  readers  and  an  invitation  to  write  about  still  other 
hungry  creatures. 

2.32  Goennel,  Heidi.  Colors.  Illustrated  by  Heidi  Goennel.  Little, 
Brown,  1990.  ISBN  0-316-31843-4.  32p.  3-6. 

In  a  brightly  colored  concept  book  for  young  children,  round- 
faced,  featureless  children  compare  the  colors  of  objects  in  their 
world  with  objects  found  in  nature:  "The  bright  sun  is  the  color 
of  my  beach  bucket/7  "Cotton  candy  is  the  color  of  summer 
roses/7  Heidi  Goennel7s  simple  forms  yield  pleasing  page  de- 
signs. 

2.33  Kunhardt,  Edith.  Red  Day,  Green  Day.  Illustrated  by  Marylin 
Hafner.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09400-7.  32p.  3 
and  up. 

Kindergarten  springs  to  life  in  full  color  as  children  celebrate  the 
color  days.  Andrew  wears  his  favorite  pants  on  Red  Day,  brings 


59 


Concept  Books 


33 


orange  gelatin  for  Orange  Day,  daffodils  for  Yellow  Day,  a  toy 
tractor  for  Green  Day,  blueberries  for  Blue  Day,  and  purple  socks 
for  Purple  Day  When  the  color  days  are  over,  a  rainy  day 
stretches  a  huge  rainbow  across  the  sky,  making  "all  the  color 
days  at  once/'  Bright  rainbow  colors  border  the  cheery  school- 
day  illustrations. 

2.34  Rikys,  Bodel.  Red  Bear.  Illustrated  by  Bodel  Rikys.  Dial  Books 
for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-1048-8.  24p.  1-5. 

This  color-concept  book  offers  single  color  words  juxtaposed 
against  simple  line  drawings  of  a  bear  getting  dressed  and  then 
visiting  a  circus.  Each  color  word  is  printed  in  enlarged  type  on 
a  matching  color  page.  Red  Bear  pulls  on  blue  pants,  and  the  text 
reads  simply  "Blue."  A  yellow  shirt,  brown  shoes,  purple  socks, 
and  black  cat  all  help  to  introduce  crayon-box  colors. 

2.35  Williams,  Sue.  I  Went  Walking.  Illustrated  by  Julie  Vivas.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-15-200471- 
8.  32p.  3-7. 

"I  went  walking.  /  What  did  you  see?  /  I  saw  a  black  cat  / 
Looking  at  me."  An  assortment  of  animals  follow  a  young  boy 
on  his  walk.  Rhythmic,  instantly  readable  text  and  large,  whim- 
sical paintings  bring  this  simple  story  to  life  in  a  style  very 
similar  to  Brown  Bear,  Brown  Bear,  What  Do  You  See?  by  Bill 
Martin,  Jr.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1991. 

Concept  Books 

2.36  Anholt,  Catherine,  and  Laurence  Anholt.  All  about  You.  Illus- 
trated by  Catherine  and  Laurence  Anholt.  Viking  Penguin,  1992. 
ISBN  0-670-84488-8.  32p.  3-6. 

In  a  book  perfect  for  laptime,  the  story  rug,  or  an  "All  about  Me" 
unit,  young  children  are  invited  to  talk  about  themselves,  their 
feelings,  their  preferences,  and  their  uniqueness.  Each  spread 
poses  a  question  and  follows  it  with  small  pictures  to  stimulate 
discussion:  "When  you  wake  up  in  the  morning,  how  do  you 
feel?"  "Feeling"  words  appear  beneath  huggable  children — 
happy,  tired,  sad,  noisy,  quiet,  and  glad.  There  are  questions  about 
clothes,  toys,  family,  homes,  friends,  animals,  and  more. 

2.37  Anholt,  Catherine,  and  Laurence  Anholt.  Kids.  Illustrated  by 
Catherine  and  Laurence  Anholt.  Candlewick  Press,  1992.  ISBN 
1-56402-097-5.  32p.  4-6. 


60 


34 


Books  for  Young  Children 


In  a  book  where  kids  seem  to  speak  for  themselves,  the  Anholts 
give  them  license  to  strut.  Across  double-page  spreads,  a  bold 
"kid  question"  marches:  "What's  in  a  kid's  pocket?"  "What  do 
kids  look  like?"  or  "What  are  nasty  kids  like?"  The  answers  are 
jolly,  rhyming,  and  perfectly  matched  to  their  illustrations.  An- 
holt-drawn  kids  are  scary  and  hairy,  tall  and  small,  grumpy  and 
dumpy,  and  thoroughly  charming. 

238     Anholt,  Catherine,  and  Laurence  Anholt.  What  I  Like.  Illus- 
trated by  Catherine  and  Laurence  Anholt.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons, 

1991.  ISBN  0-399-21863-7.  32p.  3-£. 

Six  active  children  do  what  children  are  especially  good  at — 
saying  what  they  like  and  don't  like.  On  facing  pages,  the  bold, 
patterned  text  sets  the  stage:  "What  I  like  is . . ."  or  "What  I  don't 
like  is . . . ,"  while  small  pictures  aligned  on  the  facing  pages 
finish  the  sentences  with  rhyming  phrases,  such  as  "time  to 
play"  and  "a  holiday."  A  pair  of  twins  also  offers  their  likes  and 
dislikes  about  being  twins.  What  all  six  children  like  is  being 
friends.  The  book  prompts  patterned  writing  with  young  chil- 
dren. 

2.39  Anno,  Mitsumasa.  Anno's  Masks.  Illustrated  by  Mitsumasa 
Anno.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21860-2.  22p.  3-6. 

Each  page  of  Anno's  simple  picture  book  offers  a  colored  animal 
mask,  including  a  dog,  koala  bear,  lion,  and  cheetah.  Small  eye- 
holes are  punched  so  young  children  can  peek  through  the 
whole  book  or  "wear"  a  special  face.  The  only  text  is  the  label 
for  the  animal. 

2.40  Bang,  Molly  Yellow  Ball.  Illustrated  by  Molly  Bang.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-06315-2.  24p.  2  and  up. 

Cut-out  figures  with  warm-brown  skin  tones  toss  a  big  yellow 
ball.  The  text  reads  "Catch,"  "Throw,"  and  then  "Uh-oh,"  as  the 
yellow  ball  floats  out  to  the  big,  wide-rolling  sea.  Its  path  is 
under  a  high  bridge,  above  a  fish,  and  below  a  winging  gull 
"Wind  blowing  /  Storm  growing."  After  a  swirling  storm,  the 
yellow  ball  forms  a  perfect  reflection  of  the  full  moon.  And  with 
the  dawn,  the  yellow  ball  washes  ashore  and  is  found.  Minimal 
rhyming  text  and  expressive  paintings  combine  in  the  simplest 
of  story  lines. 

2.41  Bios,  Joan  W.  A  Seed,  a  Flower,  a  Minute,  an  Hour.  Illustrated 
by  Hans  Poppel.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers, 

1992.  ISBN  0-671-73214-5. 24p.  2-5. 


61 


Concept  Books 


35 


Newbery  Medal-winner  Joan  Bios  observes  changes:  a  seed 
changing  into  a  flower,  a  minute  changing  into  an  hour.  "A 
cloud,  a  storm.  A  bee,  a  swarm" — changes  affect  many  things. 
The  growth  concept  as  well  as  the  rhyming  text  should  provide 
young  children  with  ample  discussion  opportunities.  Hans  Pop- 
pel's  pastel-colored  watercolor  washes  create  a  dream-like  at- 
mosphere for  this  sparsely  worded  poem. 

2.42  Borden,  Louise.  Caps,  Hats,  Socks,  and  Mittens:  A  Book  about 
the  Four  Seasons.  Illustrated  by  Lillian  Hoban.  Scholastic  Hard- 
cover Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41257-4. 32p.  2-6. 

"Winter  is  caps,  hats,  socks,  and  mittens."  It's  also  sleds,  hot 
mugs,  and  snug  beds.  Spring  is  "grass,  grass,  grass,"  and  mud 
to  dig.  Summer  is  a  ball  game  and  a  jar  full  of  bugs.  Fall  is  soccer 
and  frost  on  the  grass.  Lillian  Hoban's  appie-cheeked  children 
frolic  across  all  four  seasons. 

2.43  Brown,  Craig.  My  Barn.  Illustrated  by  Craig  Brown.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-08786-8.  24p.  3-6. 

A  farmer  with  a  drooping  hat  and  a  large  red  barn  rejoices  in  the 
sounds  that  his  animals  make.  In  highly  repetitive  text,  the 
farmer  announces  each  love:  "I  like  the  sound  GOBBLE  GOB- 
BLE GOBBLLE  GOBBLE  GOBBLE...  the  sound  a  turkey 
makes,"  and  "I  like  the  sound  HEE  HAWWW  HEEE  HAWW 
HEE  HAW ...  the  sound  a  donkey  makes."  Each  page  substi- 
tutes only  the  animal  name  and  the  sound,  making  this  a  man- 
ageable early  text  for  an  emergent  reader.  Watercolor  paintings 
are  flecked  with  ink  dots,  giving  a  soil-like  quality  to  the  impres- 
sions. 

2.44  Brown,  Margaret  Wise.  Baby  Animals.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Jef- 
fers.  Random  House,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-92040-6.  32p.  3-6. 

Margaret  Wise  Brown's  lyrical  text,  written  in  1941,  has  been 
reissued,  this  time  partnered  with  all  new  illustrations  by  Susan 
Jeffers.  Young  children  can  once  again  follow  a  little  girl  and 
baby  animals  through  a  day  on  the  farm. 

2.45  Brown,  Margaret  Wise.  Big  Red  Barn.  Illustrated  by  Felicia 
Bond.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-020749-3.  30p.  4-6. 

A  big  red  barn  and  the  surrounding  field  are  home  for  families 
of  animals.  Told  in  rhyme,  this  story  is  a  simple  tale  of  life  on  a 
farm  from  sunrise  to  moonlight.  The  bold,  stylized  drawings 
created  for  this  newly  illustrated  edition  by  Felicia  Bond  com- 


ERIC 


62 


36 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.46 


2.47 


2.48 


2.49 


plement  the  rich  and  rhythmic  text  cherished  by  children  since 


Brown,  Margaret  Wise.  Red  Light,  Green  Light.  Illustrated  by 
Leonard  Weisgard.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
590-44558-8.  40p.  5-8. 

First  published  in  1945,  Red  Light,  Green  Light  has  been  re-created 
by  Leonard  Weisgard  to  "fix  some  of  the  things  that  bothered 
him  over  the  years/7  Using  casein,  watercolor,  crayon,  and  ink, 
Weisgard  offers  illustrations  in  nearly  primitive  style.  Farm  ve- 
hicles and  animals  in  grays,  tans,  and  olives  contrast  with 
touches  of  brilliant  red  and  green — sun,  leaves,  steeples,  and 
hydrants.  But  most  important  of  all,  the  red  and  green  of  the 
traffic  signal  regulate  the  daytime  traffic  and  work  throughout 
the  night. 

Browne,  Anthony.  Things  I  Like.  Illustrated  by  Anthony 
Browne.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/ Dragonfly  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394- 
94192-6.  32p.  3-6. 

In  this  companion  to  Anthony  Browne's  I  Like  Books,  the  same 
moppet  chimpanzee  announces  the  other  things  that  he  really 
likes — such  as  "painting/7  "riding  my  bike/'  "climbing  trees/7 
and  "kicking  a  ball."  The  minimal  text  and  background-free 
illustrations  are  edged  with  thin-line  frames,  with  an  element 
from  each  picture  giving  a  special  touch  to  each  corner. 
Throughout,  the  chimpanzee's  expressions  register  perfect  con- 
tentment with  his  favorite  pursuits.  Young  children  may  want  to 
try  their  own  "things  I  like"  book  or  list. 

Butler,  Dorothy.  My  Brown  Bear  Barney.  Illustrated  by  Elizabeth 
Fuller.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08568-7.  24p.  2-5. 

A  little  girl  may  go  many  places  and  take  many  different  things, 
but  she  must  always  take  her  most  special  friend.  In  Dorothy 
Butler's  simple  story,  the  special  friend  is  "my  brown  bear 
Barney."  The  story  is  told  in  first  person  and  accompanied  by 
framed  illustrations.  Youngsters  will  be  able  to  "read  along" 
with  the  litany  of  things  that  you  must  take  to  the  store,  to  the 
beach,  to  grandmother's,  and  to  bed.  And  they  will  readily  pre- 
dict that  no  matter  where  you  go,  you  simply  must  take  "my 
brown  bear  Barney." 

Calhoun,  Mary.  While  I  Sleep.  Illustrated  by  Ed  Young.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-08201-7.  32p.  1-6. 


1956. 


ERLC 


63 


Concept  Books 


37 


Soothing  pastels  set  the  perfect  tone  for  this  bedtime  lullaby 
conversation.  A  child  asks  where  animals  sleep;  her  parents' 
answers  are  accompanied  by  full-page  depictions  of  each  ani- 
mal, active  in  the  daylight  and  asleep  in  an  ink-dyed  insert.  The 
contrast,  for  example,  between  the  repeated  form  of  the  squirrel 
that  represents  leaping  and  the  nighttime  squirrel  curled  in  sleep 
provides  an  effective  representation  of  the  rhythms  of  night  and 
day.  The  questions  end  with  the  child  snuggling  into  her  blan- 
kets for  sleep. 

2.50  Carlstrom,  Nancy  White.  How  Do  You  Say  It  Today,  Jesse  Bear? 
Illustrated  by  Bruce  Degen.  Macmillan,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-717276- 
7.  32p.  2-8. 

Jesse  Bear,  now  the  hero  of  four  of  Nancy  White  Carlstrom's 
creations,  is  back  to  answer  a  special  question  in  every  month  of 
the  year.  In  January,  Jesse  says  it  "with  whistles  and  cheers  /  It's 
a  happy  new  year";  in  February,  Jesse  will  say  it  "with  squiggles 
and  lines  /  On  my  valentines."  All  through  the  year,  Jesse  and 
his  family  celebrate  the  months,  seasons,  and  holidays,  saying 
"it"  in  special  ways.  Bordered  paintings  are  calendar-like,  with 
the  rhyming  text  blocked  from  the  festivities. 

2.51  Caseley,  Judith.  Annie's  Potty  Illustrated  by  Judith  Caseley. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09066-4.  32p.  2  and  up. 

Annie's  new  potty  is  a  place  to  be  avoided.  She  prefers  diapers 
to  underpants,  even  if  the  underpants  have  bunnies  on  them.  "I 
know  you  want  to  be  a  big  girl,"  Mama  tells  Annie.  "No,  I  don't. 
I'm  a  baby,"  Annie  replies.  But  explanations,  demonstrations,  a 
toilet-trained  friend,  time,  and  patience  help.  Even  when  Annie 
is  so  busy  playing  that  she  forgets  to  use  the  potty,  Mama  under- 
stands, and  together  they  clean  up.  Judith  Caseley's  drawings 
rely  on  simple  lines,  bold  patterns,  and  white  backdrops. 

2.52  Cummings,  Phil.  Goodness  Gracious!  Illustrated  by  Craig 
Smith.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08567-8.  32p.  3-6. 

Take  a  look  at  every  inch  of  her — her  face,  her  hair,  her  peepers, 
and  her  toeses!  Along  with  a  group  of  imaginary  creatures,  a 
little  girl  has  fun  describing  all  the  ways  in  which  her  body  parts 
can  look  and  work — in  a  near  festival  of  adjectives.  Bold,  ener- 
getic drawings  give  high  action  to  the  rhyming  text,  which  may 
encourage  children  to  think  of  new  ways  to  describe  other  famil- 
iar things. 


er|c 


64 


38 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.53  Demi.  Find  Demi's  Baby  Animals.  Illustrated  by  Demi.  Grosset 
and  Dunlap,  1990.  ISBN  0-448-19169-5.  32p.  4-8. 

In  a  hide-and-seek  format  book,  children  are  invited  to  find  the 
animal  on  the  page  that  matches  one  in  a  small  circle.  Against 
backgrounds  that  are  like  pages  from  a  wallpaper  sample 
book— flower  sprays,  delicate  vines,  and  abstract  fronds — large 
outline  shapes  of  animals  are  sprinkled  with  smaller  pictures  of 
the  same  animal  at  play  Even  very  young  children  will  be  able 
to  find  within  the  array  the  animal  that  exactly  matches  the  one 
in  the  circle. 

2.54  Demi.  Find  Demi's  Dinosaurs:  An  Animal  Game  Book.  Illus- 
trated by  Demi.  Grosset  and  Dunlap,  1989.  ISBN  0-448-19020-6. 
39p.  4-8. 

Learning  the  names  of  dinosaurs  turns  into  a  game  with  this 
brightly  patterned  artwork  requiring  foldout  pages  to  contain  it. 
While  attending  to  the  detail  of  finding  such  creatures  as  the 
quetzalcoatlus  tucked  among  look-alikes  within  the  gigantic 
rhamphorynchus,  children  can  identify  the  names  of  their  favor- 
ite dinosaurs  at  their  fanciful  best.  Bold  colors,  finely  drawn 
details,  and  a  game  format  combine  to  provide  information  and 
entertainment  for  young  children. 

2.55  Demi.  Find  Demi's  Sea  Creatures:  An  Animal  Game  Book. 
Illustrated  by  Demi.  Putnam  and  Grosset,  1991.  ISBN  0-399- 
22122-3.  50p.  4-8. 

A  brilliantly  colored  gallery  of  sea  animals  features  a  large  draw- 
ing of  a  species — octopus,  oarfish,  lobster,  manatee — and  many 
smaller  versions  of  the  same  animal.  Children  view  the  animal 
in  detail  and  also  hunt  through  various  natural  poses  in  foldout 
pages  to  answer  questions  placed  within  superimposed  insets. 

2.56  Dodds,  Dayle  Ann.  The  Color  Box.  Illustrated  by  Giles  Laroche. 
Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-18820-4.  28p.  2-6. 

In  a  color  and  shape  concept  book,  a  cut-paper  monkey  crawls 
through  a  box  into  an  all-black  world,  totally  black  except  for 
one  yellow  oval.  The  yellow  oval  is  actually  a  cut-out  shape, 
allowing  the  monkey  a  peek-a-boo  preview  of  the  yellow  page 
beyond.  Only  cut-paper  textures  distinguish  the  yellow  objects 
on  the  next  page:  yellow  daisies,  bees,  and  bananas,  with  one 
orange  circle  to  lead  on  through  a  series  of  shapes  to  a  succession 
of  monochromatic  worlds. 


65 


A.  How  Do  You  Say  It  Today,  Jesse  Bear?  by  Nancy  White  Caristrom;  illustrated  by 
Bruce  Degen  (see  2.50).  B.  Pig  in  a  Barrow  by  Bert  Kitchen  (see  2.71).  C.  Kids 
written  and  illustrated  by  Catherine  and  Laurence  Anholt  (see  2.37). 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


B. 


WKITTtN  BY 


Sue  Williams 

ILLUSTRATtD  >V 

Julie  Vivas 


A.  Color  Farm  by  Lois  Ehlert  (see  2.57).  B.  Lunch  by  Denise  Fleming  (see  2.31). 
C.  /  Went  Walking  by  Sue  Williams;  illustrated  by  Julia  Vivas  (see  2.35). 


67 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Concept  Books 


39 


2.57  Ehlert,  Lois.  Color  Farm*  Illustrated  by  Lois  Ehlert.  J.  B.  Lippin- 
cott,  1990.  ISBN  0-397-32441-3. 15p.  3-6. 

In  this  clever  book,  cutout  shapes  surrounded  by  bright,  fluores- 
cent-colored designs  are  layered  upon  each  other  to  form  com- 
mon farm  animals.  As  the  pages  are  turned,  the  shapes  are 
peeled  away  to  reveal  each  new  animal  on  the  right  page,  with 
the  removed  shape  clearly  labeled  and  on  view  on  the  left.  Lois 
Ehlert's  Color  Zoo  follows  the  same  unique  format.  Outstanding 
Science  Trade  Books  for  Children  in  1990. 

2.58  Finzel,  Julia.  Large  as  Life.  Illustrated  by  Julia  Finzel.  Lothrop, 
Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10653-6. 32p.  3  and  up. 

Julia  Finzel  builds  the  concept  of  relative  size  by  posing  a  simple 
question  in  poetic  form:  "Ladybug,  ladybug  where  are  you  go- 
ing /  On  the  back  of  a  butterfly,  hardly  showing?"  In  this  nearly 
wordless  book,  however,  it  is  the  bold,  textured  paintings  that 
will  capture  young  children's  attention  as  they  look  for  the  tiny 
ladybug  on  the  foot  of  an  elephant,  the  ear  of  a  tiger,  the  nose  of 
an  owl,  or  the  feather  of  a  peacock.  The  paintings  have  a  post- 
modern flair,  presenting  exaggerated  parts  of  animals  in  a  kalei- 
doscope of  color  and  design. 

2.59  Florian,  Douglas.  Turtle  Day.  Illustrated  by  Douglas  Florian. 
Thomas  Y.  Crowell,  1989.  ISBN  0-690-04745-2.  32p.  3-6. 

Rich,  childlike  drawings  illustrate  the  necessary  daily  activities 
that  fill  Turtle's  life  (and  our  lives,  too):  hunger  leads  to  eating, 
friends  lead  to  play,  and  fatigue  leads  to  rest.  Each  page  offers 
the  reader  an  opportunity  to  predict  what  Turtle  may  do.  Large 
and  bold  print  will  benefit  the  youngest  readers.  Basic  informa- 
tion can  be  used  to  introduce  concepts  about  the  biological 
needs  of  turtles  and  of  all  animals.  Notable  Children's  Trade  Books 
in  Science,  1989. 

2.60  Florian,  Douglas.  A  Year  in  the  Country.  Illustrated  by  Douglas 
Florian.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08187-8. 32p.  2-6. 

A  scene  from  a  farm,  spreading  edge  to  edge  across  the  pages, 
reflects  the  seasonal  changes  that  each  month  brings  during  a 
year  in  the  country — from  melting  snow  patches  through  buds 
and  blossoms  to  golden  harvest  and  winter's  snows.  The  muted 
watercolor  illustrations  are  labeled  with  the  name  of  each  month 
in  large  bold  type. 


er|c 


63 


40 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.61  George,  Lonnie.  Star,  Little  Star,  Lewison,  Wendy.  Nighty- 
Night  Dlustrated  by  Antonella  Abbatiello;  Giulia  Orecchia. 
Grosset  and  Dunlap,  1991.  24p.  2-6. 

Each  of  these  board  books  in  the  Poke  and  Look  series  has  a 
cutout  shape  (a  star  and  crescent  moon)  on  the  cover  and  di- 
rectly beneath  on  each  right-hand  page  throughout  the  book. 
The  shape  regularly  decreases  in  size,  producing  a  textured  tun- 
nel through  the  book.  In  Star,  Little  Star,  a  rhyming  text  describes 
a  curious  baby  fox  that  wanders  out  at  night  to  assure  himself 
that  the  world  is  asleep.  In  Nighty-Night,  a  pajama-clad  reluctant 
sleeper  cavorts  in  an  imaginary  adventure  with  the  moon. 

2.62  Goennel,  Heidi.  My  Dog.  Illustrated  by  Heidi  Goennel.  Orchard 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08434-5.  32p.  3-6. 

Each  of  us  has  our  trait  preferences  for  dogs.  The  round-faced, 
featureless  children  on  each  page  of  Heidi  Goennel's  book  indi- 
cate in  spare  text  that  they  prefer  their  dogs  with  such  features 
as  floppy  ears  like  bassets,  soft  noses  like  pugs,  loud  barks  like 
German  shepherds,  or  tall,  tall  legs  like  Great  Danes.  Bright 
primary  colors,  simple  shapes,  and  flat  backgounds  lend  a  "flan- 
nel board"  feel  to  Goennel's  easily  distinguishable  style. 

2.63  Gomboli,  Mario.  What  Else  Could  It  Be?  What  Will  It  Be? 
What's  Hiding?  What's  Missing?  Illustrated  by  Mario  Gomboli. 
Boyds  Mills/Bell  Books,  1991. 12p.  2-5. 

These  riddle  and  puzzle  board  books  are  designed  to  involve  the 
youngest  listeners.  What's  Missing?  has  holes  for  little  fingers,  so 
that  children  provide  the  missing  parts — legs  for  a  crab,  a  trunk 
for  an  elephant,  or  ears  for  a  rabbit.  What's  Hiding?  camouflages 
a  cutout  shape  within  a  design;  turning  the  page  reveals  the 
answer.  What  Will  It  Be?  and  What  Else  Could  It  Be?  ask  children 
to  imagine  what  other  forms  cutout  shapes  could  represent. 
Illustrations  are  whimsical  and  warm. 

2.64  Hartman,  Gail.  For  Strawberry  Jam  or  Fireflies.  Illustrated  by 
Ellen  Weiss.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-742990-3.  22p.  1-4. 

Mason  jars  are  for  strawberry  jam  or  fireflies.  And  what  can  you 
do  with  a  wooden  spoon?  You  can  mix  cookies  or  tap  a  tune. 
This  concept  book  explores  alternative  uses  for  eleven  items, 
such  as  a  big  tire,  a  ball  of  string,  and  chewy  raisins.  Full-page 
watercolor  and  colored-pencil  illustrations  will  elicit  children's 
suggestions  for  various  uses  for  everyday  objects  around  them. 


69 


Concept  Books 


41 


2*65     Hoban,  Julia.  Amy  Loves  the  Snow*  Illustrated  by  Lillian  Ho- 
ban.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-022395-2.  20p.  2-5. 

Small  hands  will  enjoy  turning  the  pages  of  this  little  book  about 
Amy,  in  her  red  mittens  and  scarf,  who  goes  out  with  Daddy,  in 
his  blue  mittens  and  scarf,  to  play  in  the  snow.  They  have  fun 
making  footprints,  catching  snowflakes,  and  building  a  snow- 
man. After  Mommy  contributes  a  carrot  nose  for  the  snowman, 
the  three  go  inside  for  some  hot  chocolate.  Lillian  Hoban  cap- 
tures winter's  essence  in  full-page  illustrations  with  pastel 
shades  of  snowy  blues  and  violets. 

2.66  Hoban,  Tana.  All  about  Where.  Photographs  by  Tana  Hoban. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09698-0.  28p.  2-7. 

Photographer  Tana  Hoban  has  a  special  talent  for  developing 
learning  opportunities  from  everyday  situations.  Here  Hoban 
explores  how  objects  relate  to  each  other  by  providing  a  list  of 
fifteen  common  prepositions  from  which  children  can  choose 
words  to  describe  the  action  in  the  brightly  colored  photo- 
graphs: a  baby  rides  on  a  bicycle,  behind  her  mother,  her  head 
under  her  mother's  shirt,  and  her  thumb  in  her  mouth.  Hoban's 
photographs  supply  possibilities  for  many  open-ended  learning 
experiences. 

2.67  Hoban,  Tana.  Exactly  the  Opposite.  Photographs  by  Tana  Ho- 
ban. Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08862-7.  32p.  2-5. 

From  fire  and  ice  to  whole  and  broken  eggs  to  the  front  and  back 
ends  of  sheep,  a  variety  of  unconventional  subjects  illustrates 
the  concept  of  opposites  in  this  wordless  book.  Yet,  look  again — 
you  may  find  that  the  baskets  holding  the  whole  eggs  are  up- 
right, while  the  baskets  with  the  broken  eggs  are  tipped  over. 
Readers  will  discover  that  there  are  as  many  opposites  in  these 
vivid  photographs  as  there  are  in  the  world  around  us.  Outstand- 
ing Science  Trade  Books  far  Children  in  1990. 

2.68  Hoban,  Tana.  Spirals,  Curves,  Fanshapes  and  Lines.  Photo- 
graphs by  Tana  Hoban.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688- 
11229-3.  32p.  2  and  up. 

Tana  Hoban's  glorious  photographs  reveal  the  lines,  details,  and 
textures  of  the  world  around  us — fan-shaped  radiants  of  the 
cockatoo's  plume,  spiral  shadows  of  a  wire  wastebasket,  the  curl 
of  a  fossilized  nautilus  shell,  and  the  graceful  turn  of  a  ram's 
horn.  Inspired  by  this  wordless  book  of  photos  to  talk  about  and 


ERIC 


70 


42 


Books  for  Young  Children 


trace  with  fingers,  readers  will  see  their  surroundings  in  new 
ways. 

2,69  Jeunesse,  Gallimard,  and  Pascale  de  Bourgoing.  Colors.  Fruit 
The  Ladybug  and  Other  Insects.  Weather.  Illustrated  by  Sophie 
Kniffke;  Sylvaine  Perols;  P.  M  Valet.  Scholastic/Cartwheel 
Books,  1989.  24p.  3-6. 

This  colorful,  informative  series  of  First  Discovery  Books  uses 
simple  text,  big  illustrations,  and  transparencies  to  teach  basic 
topics  like  weather,  insects,  colors,  and  fruits.  Each  volume  is 
small;  the  pages  are  stiff  and  plastic-coated;  and  the  brightly 
painted,  cheery  illustrations  will  attract  children.  In  the  volume 
on  weather,  transparencies  allow  the  reader  to  superimpose  rain 
storms,  clouds,  and  rainbows  onto  various  landscapes.  In  the 
insect  book,  the  insect  transparencies  show  various  parts  of  in- 
sect anatomy;  teachers  may  want  to  pair  it  with  Eric  Carle's  The 
Grouchy  Ladybug. 

2  JO  Jonas,  Ann.  Color  Dance.  Illustrated  by  Ann  Jonas.  Greenwillow 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-05991-0.  27p.  3-7. 

Three  young  dancers  with  translucent  red,  yellow,  and  blue 
scarves  demonstrate  how  colors  combine  to  create  more  colors. 
Against  a  stark  white  background,  the  children  use  their  scarves 
to  make  fourteen  different  colors  before  a  fourth  dancer  intro- 
duces white,  gray,  and  black.  The  simple  text  complements  the 
bold  watercolor  illustrations.  Each  time  a  color  is  written  in  the 
text,  its  name  is  printed  in  ink  of  that  color.  A  color  wheel  and  a 
description  of  the  relationship  among  colors  appears  on  the  final 
pages. 

2.71  Kitchen,  Bert.  Pig  in  a  Barrow.  Illustrated  by  Bert  Kitchen.  Dial 
Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0943-9.  25p.  4-8. 

A  happy  pig  in  a  barrow,  a  puppy  crouching  on  a  scale,  and  field 
mice  in  a  parsley  pot  are  a  few  of  the  farm  animals  beautifully 
illustrated  in  this  collection  of  humorous  verses.  In  a  realistic 
style  similar  to  John  James  Audubon's  paintings,  Bert  Kitchen 
has  drawn  colorful  and  detailed  portraits  from  the  animal  king- 
dom. The  four-line  rhyming  verses  that  accompany  each  illus- 
tration offer  an  explanation  of  the  drawing  and  occasionally 
extend  readers'  understanding  of  nature. 

2.72  Koch,  Michelle.  Hoot,  Howl,  Hiss.  Illustrated  by  Michelle  Koch. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09652-2.  24p.  2-5. 


71 


Concept  Books 


43 


Woods,  ponds,  mountains,  farms,  and  jungles  have  their  own 
animals  with  their  own  special  sounds.  From  these  five  habitats, 
each  of  three  animals  fills  a  full  page  against  a  plain  white 
background.  Washes  and  light  shading  give  texture  to  the  child- 
like depictions  of  animals  that  cluck,  bleat,  or  chirp,  as  well  as 
those  that  hoot,  howl,  or  hiss. 

2.73  Kuskin,  Karla.  Roar  and  More.  Illustrated  by  Karla  Kuskin. 
Harper  and  Row/Harper  Trophy  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-06- 
023619-1.  46p.  3-6. 

Karla  Kuskin,  winner  of  the  NCTE  Award  for  Excellence  in 
Poetry  for  Children  in  1979,  first  published  Roar  and  More  in 
1956.  This  reissue  adds  bright  color  to  the  original  illustrations 
that  accompany  her  animal  rhymes.  Following  each  rhyme,  the 
animal's  sounds  blast  or  slither  or  bounce  or  roll  across  the 
pages  in  perfect  mesh  with  the  sound's  originator.  For  example, 
dog  sounds  fill  a  double-paged  spread  in  a  cacophony  of  barks, 
growls,  and  yaps,  while  the  bee's  buzz  quietly  follows  a  mean- 
dering trail. 

2.74  Leonard,  Marcia.  Alphabet  Bandits:  An  ABC  Book*  Bear's  Busy 
Yean  A  Book  about  Seasons*  Counting  Kangaroos:  A  Book 
about  Numbers*  The  Kitten  Twins:  A  Book  about  Opposites* 
Noisy  Neighbors:  A  Book  about  Animal  Sounds*  Paintbox 
Penguins:  A  Book  about  Colors*  Illustrated  by  Maryann  Cocca- 
Leffler;  Diane  Palmisciano;  Bari  Weissman.  Troll  Associates, 
1990.  24p.  2-6. 

In  a  series  of  books  covered  by  polka-dots  and  illustrated  with 
jolly  cartoons,  young  children  are  introduced  to  a  parade  of 
concepts  through  the  antics  of  busy  animals  whose  activities 
form  a  simple  story  line.  For  example,  two  kangaroo  kids  bring 
their  pouches  full  of  toys  to  Grandma's  house.  They  carefully 
count  out  their  booty,  page  by  page,  until  Grandma  announces 
that  she  can  count,  too.  Grandma  counts  one  big  mess  and  two 
little  kangaroos  to  clean  it  up. 

2*75  MacDonald,  Amy.  Let's  Do  It*  Let's  Make  a  Noise*  Lefs  Play* 
Let's  Try*  Illustrated  by  Maureen  Roffey.  Candlewick  Press,  1992. 
14p.  2-6. 

These  Let's  Explore  board  books  for  the  youngest  child  offer 
bright,  simple,  page-filling  illustrations  and  large,  high-contrast 
text.  Let's  Make  a  Noise  invites  children  to  make  pet,  train,  truck, 
and  baby  sounds.  Let's  Play  and  Let's  Do  It  ask  for  responses  to 


72 


44 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.76 


2.77 


2.78 


2.79 


simple  questions,  each  beginning  with  "Can  you . . . "  ("Can 
you  knock  down  the  blocks?").  Let's  Try  depicts  children  at- 
tempting child-manageable  skills:  "Let's  try  to  wash  your 
tummy/' 

McMillan,  Bruce.  Eating  Fractions.  Photographs  by  Bruce 
McMillan.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-590-43770- 
4.  32p.  4-8. 

First,  you  take  one  whole  pizza  pie.  Then  you  cut  it  into  four 
pieces,  making  fourths.  When  you  eat  a  piece  (1/4),  you  are 
"eating  fractions."  The  mathematical  concept  of  how  halves, 
thirds,  and  fourths  are  a  part  of  a  whole  is  illustrated  through 
full-page  color  photographs  of  nutritious  snacks  being  shared 
among  two  friends  and  a  dog.  Recipes  for  the  foods  make  it  even 
easier  to  reinforce  fractional  concepts  in  the  home  or  classroom. 

Miller,  Jane.  Farm  Noises.  Photographs  by  Jane  Miller.  Simon 
and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-671-67450- 
1.  32p.  4-^8. 

On  a  trip  around  a  country  farm,  the  reader  meets  farm  animals 
(and  farm  machinery)  in  striking  photographs.  Each  of  the  pho- 
tos is  accompanied  by  appropriate  animal  sounds.  Kindergarten 
teachers  will  find  value  for  farm  units  and  for  the  predictable 
text. 

Miller,  Margaret.  Who  Uses  This?  Photographs  by  Margaret 
Miller.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08279-3. 40p.  3-6. 

On  a  double-page  spread,  the  simple  bold  question  runs  oppo- 
site a  color  photograph  of  a  tool:  "Who  uses  this?"  Turn  the  page 
to  find  two  more  brilliant  photographs,  one  of  an  adult,  the  other 
of  a  child,  at  work  with  the  tool.  Following  the  photograph  of  a 
rolling  pin,  a  baker  rolls  dough  and  a  child  rolls  modeling  clay. 
The  word  Baker  labels  the  pages.  Tools  in  this  concept  book 
include  a  conductor's  baton,  a  barber's  scissors,  a  carpenter's 
hammer,  and  a  gardener's  watering  can. 

Morris,  Ann.  Loving.  Photographs  by  Ken  Heyman.  Lothrop, 
Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-06341-1.  32p.  3-7. 

"Mommies  and  daddies  take  care  of  you  for  a  long  time."  Paral- 
lels of  the  universality  of  human  relationships  can  easily  be 
drawn  by  young  children  when  they  read  the  simple,  but  ex- 
pressive, text  and  see  families  from  many  lands  engaged  in 
similar  nurturing  activities.  Color  photographs  depict  how  par- 


ERLC 


73 


Concept  Books 


45 


ents,  siblings,  and  even  pets  love  and  take  care  of  each  other  all 
around  the  world.  An  index  and  world  map  give,  additional 
information  about  the  traditions  and  locations  of  the  repre- 
sented cultures. 

2.80  Ormerod,  Jan.  Come  Back,  Kittens.  Come  Back,  Puppies.  Illus- 
trated by  Jan  Ormerod.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1992. 
32p.  4r4. 

Painted  on  transparent  overlays,  Jan  Ormerod's  kittens  and 
puppies  nearly  disappear  against  backgrounds  of  the  same 
color.  So,  when  their  parents  call,  "Come  back,  kittens''  or 
"Come  back,  puppies/'  wandering  babies  can  be  brought  home 
by  young  children  who  turn  the  overlay,  placing  the  little  ani- 
mals against  the  left-hand  page  and  their  parents'  protection. 
One  tiny  spotted  puppy  stays  nearly  hidden  throughout,  a  thin 
line  defining  his  shape  against  the  floor.  The  text  is  large,  repeti- 
tive, and  instantly  readable. 

2.81  Paterson,  Bettina.  In  My  House.  In  My  Yard.  My  Clothes.  My 
Toys.  Illustrated  by  Bettina  Paterson.  Henry  Holt,  1992. 12p.  1-5. 

In  a  series  of  board  books,  babies  and  toddlers  can  point  to 
favorite  toys,  articles  of  clothing,  familiar  household  items,  and 
outdoor  things.  Torn-paper  collages  in  clear  colors  make  for 
textured  effects  against  equally  bright  backgrounds.  In  addition, 
each  page  has  a  print  label.  Pictured  toddlers  are  multiracial. 

2.82  Ryder,  Joanne.  Under  the  Moon.  Illustrated  by  Cheryl  Harness. 
Random  House/Just  Right  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-91960-2. 
32p.  3-5. 

Mama  Mouse  teaches  her  young  one  "special  things,"  such  as 
where  to  find  the  fattest  seeds  and  how  to  hide  from  the  owl. 
When  it  is  time  to  go  home,  Mama  uses  gentle  questioning  to 
encourage  her  offspring  to  rely  on  memories  of  smells  and 
sounds  and  textures  to  locate  their  meadow.  Even  though  Little 
Mouse  is  sure  their  home  is  under  the  moon,  Mama  helps  to 
sharpen  the  observations.  At  times,  the  guidance  occurs  in  an 
inset  box,  wrapped  by  the  meadow  home. 

2.83  Shapiro,  Arnold.  Circles.  Squares.  Triangles.  Illustrated  by  Ban 
Weissman.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  lOp.  1-5. 

Each  double-page  spread  of  these  three  sturdy  board  books 
opens  into  a  circular-,  square-,  or  triangular-shaped  object  in 
electric  primary  colors.  The  triangle  book  opens  into  a  pine  tree, 


74 


46 


Books  for  Young  Children 


a  tent,  and  a  mountain,  while  the  circle  becomes  a  ball,  a  moon, 
and  a  clock  face.  A  natural  extension  activity  for  these  Play- 
shapes  Books  would  be  for  young  authors  to  make  similar  books 
in  the  classroom  or  at  home. 

2-84  Shapiro,  Arnold  L.  Who  Says  That?  Illustrated  by  Monica  Wel- 
lington. Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44698-2. 32p. 
2-5. 

In  simple  rhyming  text,  the  voices  of  animals  are  heard:  "Mon- 
keys chatter.  Cats  purr.  Lions  roar.  Hummingbirds  whir/'  Unlike 
animals,  "girls  and  boys  make  different  noise."  As  that  refrain 
repeats,  girls  and  boys  whisper,  giggle,  shout,  holler,  whistle, 
and  talk.  Colorful,  cartoon-like  drawings  match  each  text  line, 
accompanied  by  print  depictions  of  sounds,  ranging  from  roll- 
ing moos  to  long  purrs,  from  tiny  squeaks  to  loud  shrieks. 

2.85  Sharratt,  Nick.  The  Green  Queen*  Monday  Run-Day.  Illus- 
trated by  Nick  Sharratt.  Candlewick  Press/Toddler  Books,  1992. 
20p.  1-^6. 

Two  books  by  the  same  author  have  fun  with  language.  In  the 
first,  Nick  Sharratt  combines  color  words  with  colorful  illustra- 
tions to  provide  the  fodder  for  wordplay.  A  "green  queen"  sleeps 
in  a  "red  bed"  and  wears  "blue  shoes,"  but  she  wants  to  make 
her  "gray  day"  a  little  more  colorful.  In  the  second  book,  the 
days  of  the  week  spark  rhyming  fun  for  a  brown-and-white 
beagle  and  his  friends.  If  Monday  is  "run-day,"  then  Tuesday  is 
"snooze-day."  Each  day  makes  for  a  crazy-day  poem,  with  Sun- 
day "bun-day"  culminating  the  week. 

2.86  Singer,  Marilyn.  Nine  O'clock  Lullaby*  Illustrated  by  Frane 
Lessac.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-025648-6.  27p.  4-8. 

When  it's  9  p.m.  in  Brooklyn,  New  York,  and  Mama  reads  a 
bedtime  story,  it's  2  a.m.  in  England  and  a  little  girl  is  up  for  a 
snack.  It's  11  a.m.  in  Japan  and  a  grandfather  watches  carp 
swimming  in  a  pond,  and  it's  5  p.m.  in  Nome,  Alaska,  where 
children  play  a  circle  game.  On  this  lullaby  trip  around  the 
world  readers  view  detailed  and  colorful  folk-art  illustrations  of 
children  living  in  twenty-four  time  zones. 

2.87  Sis,  Peter.  Beach  Ball.  Illustrated  by  Peter  Sis.  Greenwillow 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09182-2.  32p.  4-6. 

A  long,  thin  stretch  of  speckled  sand  separates  sky  and  shore  on 
Peter  Sis's  title  spread,  as  Mary  and  her  mother  spread  their 


75 


Concept  Books 


blanket  on  a  seemingly  isolated  beach.  And  then . . .  "the  wind 
blew  Mary's  ball  away."  As  Mary  chases  the  beachball  down- 
wind, readers  discover  that  the  beach  was  not  isolated  at  all,  but 
rather  populated  with  all  sorts  of  fanciful  activity.  Each  busy 
spread  offers  opportunity  to  discover  colors,  numbers,  shapes, 
animals,  or  opposites,  all  the  while  following  Mary's  ball 
through  a  nearly  wordless  book. 

2.88  Voce,  Louise,  Rosalinda  Kightley,  Tony  Wells,  Charlotte  Knox, 
and  Julie  Lacome.  My  First  Book:  Words  and  Pictures  for  the 
Very  Young.  ISBN  1-56402-034-7. 62p.  2-6. 

In  an  oversize  book  that  can  be  read  in  any  direction,  stand- 
alone couplets  stretch  across  double-page  spreads  that  are  cov- 
ered with  the  bright  paintings  of  contributing  artists.  Objects  on 
the  page  are  frequently  labeled  in  bold,  black  print.  One  toy-cov- 
ered page  reads:  "Do  you  have  a  teddy  bear,  yo-yo,  or  ball?  / 
Which  is  your  favorite  toy  of  all?"  Other  pages  ask  for  interac- 
tion. Young  readers  are  to  help  baby  animals  find  their  mothers; 
count  picnic  founds;  or  name  foods  that  animals  like  to  eat. 

2.89  Weiss,  Nicki.  An  Egg  Is  an  Egg.  Illustrated  by  Nicki  Weiss.  G.  P. 
Putman's  Sons,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-22182-4.  32p.  2-6. 

"An  egg  is  an  egg  until  it  hatches.  And  then  it  is  a  chick.  A  branch 
is  a  branch  until  it  breaks.  And  then  it  is  a  stick."  Through 
rhyming  text  and  repetitive  refrain,  Nicki  Weiss's  theme  is  re- 
played: "Nothing  stays  the  same.  Everything  can  change." 
Everything  changes,  that  is,  except  love— depicted  as  constant 
between  a  mother  and  young  son.  Large,  chalky  illustrations  are 
filled  with  texture  and  pattern.  A  good  companion  book  is 
Raffi's  Everything  Grows. 

2.90  Williams,  Vera  B.  "More,  More,  More,"  Said  the  Baby:  Three 
Love  Stories.  Illustrated  by  Vera  B.  Williams.  Greenwillow 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09174-1.  30p.  3-9  (est). 

These  charming  full-page  paintings  highlight  three  stories  of 
babies  and  the  grownups  who  love  them.  All  three  babies — 
Little  Guy,  Little  Pumpkin,  and  Little  Bird — are  so  fast  that  their 
daddy,  grandma,  and  mama  can  barely  catch  them  up!  Each  of 
the  gouache  paintings  is  a  brightly  colored  depiction  of  the  love 
and  tenderness  between  baby  and  adult,  and  the  happiness  that 
they  bring  to  each  other  through  gentle  play.  Caldecott  Honor 
Book,  1991. 


48 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.91  Yorke,  Jane,  editor  My  First  Look  at  Colors.  My  First  Look  at 
Home*  My  First  Look  at  Numbers,  My  First  Look  at  Opposites. 
My  First  Look  at  Seasons.  My  First  Look  at  Shapes.  My  First 
Look  at  Sizes.  My  First  Look  at  Touch.  Random  House/Dorling 
Kindersley  Books,  1990. 16p.  2-5. 

What  enormous  fun!  Preschoolers  learn  vocabulary  and  con- 
cepts through  a  brilliant  array  of  three-dimensional  color  photo- 
graphs. Unlikely,  but  singularly  appropriate,  objects  are  chosen 
to  illustrate  the  concepts  of  home,  seasons,  sizes,  opposites, 
touch,  shapes,  colors,  and  numbers.  For  example,  in  My  First 
Look  at  Touch,  readers  are  treated  to  a  rough  pineapple,  a  soft 
powder  puff,  and  squishy  marshmallows. 

Counting  Books 

2.92  Aker,  Suzanne.  What  Comes  in  2's,  3's,  and  4's?  Illustrated  by 
Bernie  Karlin.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers, 
1990.  ISBN  0-671-67173-1.  32p.  2-5. 

This  variation  on  a  counting  book  presents  objects  that  normally 
come  in  twos,  threes,  and  fours.  Twos  are  hands  and  eyes  and 
feet,  handles  on  sinks,  and  wings  on  birds.  Threes  are  tricycle 
wheels,  meals  in  a  day,  and  leaves  on  poison  ivy.  Fours  are  legs 
on  tables,  chairs,  and  dogs,  seasons  of  the  year,  and  corners  on  a 
book.  Large  illustrations  make  for  easy  counting.  Teachers  of 
young  children  can  make  good  use  of  the  concepts. 

2.93  Archambault,  John.  Counting  Sheep.  Illustrated  by  John  Rom- 
bola.  Henry  Holt,  1989.  ISBN  0-8050-1135-8.  28p.  4-7. 

Even  after  counting  sheep,  the  narrator  of  this  counting  book 
still  can't  sleep,  so  he  begins  counting  some  rather  imaginative 
animals  to  lift  him  off  to  dreamland — cotton-candy-spinning 
cats,  orange  giraffes,  and  pink  raccoons.  Brilliant  full-page  illus- 
trations splash  blazing  colors  on  a  baby-blue  background. 

2.94  Ashton,  Elizabeth  Allen.  An  Old-Fashioned  12  3  Book.  Illus- 
trated by  Jessie  Willcox  Smith.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0- 
670-83499-8.  32p.  3-8. 

Elizabeth  Allen  Ashton  has  selected  works  of  artist  Jessie  Will- 
cox Smith  to  produce  a  Victorian  counting  book  filled  with 
cherub-like  children  at  play  and  accompanied  by  counting 
rhymes  that  retrofit  the  paintings.  The  paper  is  creamy  and 
smooth;  the  numerals  are  aswirl  with  detail;  and  the  paintings 


77 


Counting  Books 


49 


are  bordered  with  the  same  flourish  to  yield  the  intended  "old- 
fashioned"  feel.  Willcox  Smith  was  well  known  for  her  covers 
for  Good  Housekeeping  magazine  during  the  early  twentieth  cen- 
tury. 

2.95  Astley,  Judy  When  One  Cat  Woke  Up:  A  Cat  Counting  Book. 
Illustrated  by  Judy  Astley  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990. 
ISBN  0-8037-0782-7. 32p.  3-7. 

When  one  cat  wakes  up  from  its  nap,  it  begins  a  romp  through 
the  house  that  results  in  increasing  mischief.  That  one  cat  steals 
two  fish,  fights  with  three  teddy  bears,  crumples  four  shirts,  and 
on  and  on  until  ten  muddy  pawprints  mark  the  cat's  trail  back 
to  bed.  Brightly  colored  drawings  enhance  the  predictable  pro- 
gression of  a  cat  having  fun  from  one  to  ten. 

2.96  Bennett,  David.  One  Cow,  Moo,  Moo!  Illustrated  by  Andy 
Cooke.  Henry  Holt,  1990.  ISBN  0-8050-1416-0. 30p.  4-7. 

When  a  young  boy  sees  one  cow  go  running  by,  he  wonders 
why  His  curiosity  increases  as  he  sees  that  the  cow  is  chased  by 
two  horses  that  are,  in  turn,  chased  by  three  donkeys.  The  excite- 
ment grows  as  more  and  more  different  animals  (all  the  way  up 
to  ten  mice)  pass  by.  The  boy  finds  a  surprising  answer  at  the 
end  of  this  cumulative  counting  book. 

2.97  Chouinard,  Roger,  and  Mariko  Chouinard.  One  Magic  Box.  Il- 
lustrated by  Roger  Chouinard.  Doubleday,  1989.  ISBN  0-385- 
26204-3.  28p.  3-8. 

When  one  magic  box,  locked  with  two  locks,  falls  to  the  Earth 
one  night,  three  socks,  four  policemen,  and  five  monsters  come 
to  inspect  it.  The  rhyming  tale  continues  in  this  counting  pattern, 
until,  culminating  at  fifteen  magic  stars,  the  magic  box  swallows 
up  all  of  the  counting  objects  and  characters  who  had  previously 
made  an  appearance.  Roger  Chouinard  creates  a  surrealistic 
atmosphere  using  brilliant  colors  and  odd  perspectives  against 
starry,  purple,  pink,  and  black  backgrounds. 

2.98  Christelow,  Eileen,  retold  by.  Five  Little  Monkeys  Jumping  on 
the  Bed*  Illustrated  by  Eileen  Christelow.  Clarion  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-89919-769-8.  30p.  3-7. 

Once  again  those  five  little  monkeys  are  jumping  on  the  bed.  In 
this  familiar  jingle,  one  little  monkey  at  a  time  falls  off  and 
bumps  his  or  her  head.  For  each  bump,  Mama  must  call  the 
doctor.  And,  of  course,  the  doctor  said,  "No  more  monkeys 


ERIC 


78 


50 


Books  for  Young  Children 


jumping  on  the  bed!"  The  delightful  surprise  in  Eileen 
Christelow's  illustrations  is  that  once  those  monkey  children  are 
tucked  in  bed  again,  Mama  Monkey  jumps  on  her  bed!  Crayon- 
like drawings  add  whimsy  to  the  monkeys'  bedtime  prepara- 
tions. 

2.99  Clements,  Andrew.  Mother  Earth's  Counting  Book.  Illustrated 
by  Lonni  Sue  Johnson.  Picture  Book  Studio,  1992.  ISBN  0-88708- 
138-X.  44p.  3  and  up. 

One  Earth  takes  center  stage  in  this  creative  counting  book.  The 
world's  wildlife,  climate,  oceans,  deserts,  people,  and  more  are 
pictured  in  graceful  pastel  shades  as  the  countable  objects  in- 
crease to  the  number  ten,  then  return  to  one,  emphasizing  the 
Earth's  uniqueness. 

2.100  Crossley-Holland,  Kevin.  Under  the  Sun  and  over  the  Moon. 
Illustrated  by  Ian  Penney.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399- 
21946-3.  32p.  All  ages. 

A  boy  wanders  through  ten  gardens  that  serve  as  the  organizing 
framework  for  this  unconventional  counting  book.  The  first  gar- 
den contains  one  sundial,  one  folded  wing,  one  unicorn — one  of 
everything.  Pairs,  of  course,  are  found  in  the  second  garden, 
three  of  a  kind  in  the  next  garden,  and  so  on  up  to  ten.  The 
rhyming  couplets  that  accompany  each  illustration  guide  the 
viewers  in  their  search  for  sometimes-obscure  items. 

2.101  Dunrea,  Olivier.  Deep  Down  Underground*  Illustrated  by 
Olivier  Dunrea.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-732861-9.  32p.  3-7. 

Insects,  mice,  toads,  and  other  underground  creatures  "wriggle 
and  wrangle,"  "scurry  and  scamper,"  "scooch  and  scrunch," 
"dance  and  prance,"  "patter  and  chatter,"  and  "slide  and  glide" 
when  they  hear  "1  wee  moudiewort  [Scottish  for  mole]  digging, 
digging  deep  down  underground."  Regrettably,  cadence-break- 
ing ants  merely  "march  and  stamp,"  while  toads  "burrow  and 
scrape."  Earth-tone  illustrations  invite  searching  and  counting 
to  ten  and  back  in  this  tongue-tangling,  cumulative  counting 
book.  Notable  Children's  Trade  Books  in  Science,  1989. 

2.102  Fleming,  Denise.  Count!  Illustrated  by  Denise  Fleming.  Henry 
Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1595-7.  32p.  2-6. 

Okay,  you  counters,  get  ready:  Count  one  gnu  of  the  orange- 
and-yellow-speckled  variety  on  a  lavender  backdrop  that  is  bor- 
dered by  smears  from  the  gnu's  pallette.  Next,  count  two  zebras 


ERLC 


79 


Counting  Books 


51 


of  impossible  stripe  and  energy.  "Jump,  zebras!"  reads  the  big, 
bold  text.  Children  can  keep  counting  until  they  reach  ten — all 
the  while  performing  the  antics  of  bouncing  kangaroos,  wig- 
gling worms,  and  lizards  that  line  up.  Finally,  it's  counting  by 
tens  to  reach  fifty  bees.  "Count  again,  please." 

2.103  French,  Vivian.  One  Ballerina  Two,  Illustrated  by  Jan  Ormerod. 
Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10334-0. 32p. 
3-6. 

A  young  ballerina  ties  her  shoes  and  then  gracefully  checks 
those  of  her  admirer,  a  rumpled  younger  ballerina  "wannabe." 
With  perfect  form,  in  a  continuous-motion  illustration,  the  balle- 
rina performs  ten  plies.  The  words  "10  Ten  pltes"  appear  in  crisp 
print  to  match  the  crispness  of  her  leotard.  Hair  and  skirt 
akimbo,  the  child  does  nine  knee  bends,  and  the  words  are 
printed  in  her  own  ragged  crayon  script.  In  warmly  comic 
mime,  the  countdown  continues — from  pirouettes  to  gallops, 
from  pas  de  chat  to  pony  trots. 

2.104  Geisert,  Arthur.  Pigs  from  1  to  10.  Illustrated  by  Arthur  Geisert. 
Houghton  Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-58519-8.  32p.  2-6. 

During  a  bedtime  story  read  by  Mother  Pig  about  a  lost  place 
with  huge  stone  configurations,  ten  little  pigs  decide  to  go  on  a 
quest.  With  courage  and  resourcefulness,  the  pigs  bridge  an 
abyss  and  drill  through  a  mountain  to  their  goal.  They  copy  the 
"stone  configurations" — numerals  from  zero  to  nine — and  bring 
the  copies  home.  Every  intricate  black-and-white,  double-page 
etching  offers  a  quest  for  the  reader  as  well:  the  numerals  zero 
to  nine  (and  the  ten  pigs)  are  embedded  within  each  illustration 
for  young  readers  to  find. 

2.105  Giganti,  Paul,  Jr.  Each  Orange  Had  8  Slices:  A  Counting  Book. 
Illustrated  by  Donald  Crews.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-688-10429-0.  32p.  3  and  up. 

Although  it  could  be  a  counting  book  for  young  children,  this 
book  could  also  serve  as  an  introduction  to  multiplication.  On 
each  patterned  page,  an  unseen  narrator  presents  a  set  of  objects 
(with  related  subsets)  and  three  questions:  "On  my  way  to  lunch 
I  ate  2  juicy  oranges.  Each  orange  had  8  slices.  Each  slice  had  2 
small  seeds."  How  many  juicy  oranges  were  there?  How  many 
slices?  How  many  seeds?  Donald  Crews's  illustrations  are  char- 
acteristically crisp,  colorful,  and  countable. 


ERIC 


52 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2*106  Grossman,  Virginia.  Ten  Little  Rabbits*  Illustrated  by  Sylvia 
Long.  Chronicle  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-87701-552-X.  25p.  2-6. 

Vivid  and  whimsical  illustrations,  reminiscent  of  Beatrix  Potter, 
accompany  a  counting  rhyme  in  which  rabbits  portray  Native 
Americans.  Ten  two-page  paintings  depict  rabbits,  attired  in 
traditional  Native  American  garments,  who  are  engaged  in  such 
customs  as  performing  a  rain  dance  or  sending  a  smoke  signal. 
From  the  Sioux  to  the  Navajo,  each  tribe  is  described  in  a  glos- 
sary at  the  back  of  the  book.  IRA  Children's  Book  Award,  1992. 

2.107  Hayes,  Sarah.  Nine  Ducks  Nine.  Illustrated  by  Sarah  Hayes. 
Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09535-6. 32p. 
3-6. 

When  nine  ducks  go  out  for  a  stroll  in  the  meadow,  a  hungry  but 
stupid  fox  follows  closely  and  watches.  One  by  one,  the  ducks 
run  away,  "down  to  the  rickety-bridge/'  "I'm  off,"  the  departing 
duck  always  says.  Finding  one  lone  duck  in  the  nest  built  on  the 
rickety-bridge,  Mr.  Fox  pounces,  only  to  splash  into  the  pond  as 
the  rickety-bridge  gives  way.  Full-page  watercolor  paintings  hu- 
morously illustrate  this  tale  of  nine  clever  ducks  and  their  plan 
to  spoil  Mr.  Fox's  day.  Rhyming  phrases,  a  counting  sequence, 
and  repetitive  lines  are  sure  to  invite  young  children's  participa- 
tion. 

2*108  Linden,  Ann  Marie.  One  Smiling  Grandma:  A  Caribbean 
Counting  Book*  Illustrated  by  Lynne  Russell.  Dial  Books  for 
Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-1132-8.  24p.  2-6. 

Besides  "one  smiling  grandma  in  a  rocking  chair,"  the  charac- 
teristic fare  included  in  this  joyful  Caribbean  counting  rhyme  are 
the  marketplace,  hummingbirds,  flying  fish,  conch  shells,  sugar 
apples,  hairy  coconuts,  and  sleeping  mongooses.  Memories  of 
Barbados  and  a  special  grandmother  influenced  the  author's 
choice  of  set  and  characters.  One  bright-eyed  girl  experiences 
the  bounty  and  color  of  her  island  interpreted  by  the  artist  in 
sun-bathed  chalks. 

2*109  MacCarthy,  Patricia.  Ocean  Parade:  A  Counting  Book*  Illus- 
trated by  Patricia  MacCarthy.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers, 
1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0780-0.  32p.  2-6. 

In  an  ocean  parade,  one  big  glimmering  fish  and  two  little  fish 
swim  across  a  blue  silk  page — batik  gills,  scales,  and  seafloor 
edged  with  white-frosting-like  trim.  Then  come  three  flat  fish, 
four  thin  fish,  and  five  fat  fish  until  patterned  and  rainbow  fish 


er|c 


81 


J 


Counting  Books 


of  all  sizes  fill  the  pages,  swimming  among  the  sea  plants.  After 
nineteen  transparent  fish,  the  fish  parade  advances  by  tens  to 
fifty;  finally,  one  hundred  silver  fish  swim  about  a  sunken  treas- 
ure chest. 

2.110  Merriam,  Eve.  Train  Leaves  the  Station*  Illustrated  by  Dale 
Gottlieb.  Henry  Holt/Bill  Martin  Books,1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1934- 
0.  32p.  3-6. 

Dale  Gottlieb's  broad-lined,  boldly  colored  illustrations  for  Eve 
Merriam's  counting  verse  are  as  simple  in  form  as  the  predict- 
able text  that  they  accompany.  A  toy  train  chugs  past  other 
nursery  toys  to  rhythmic  announcement:  "Snake  in  the  grass, 
angel  in  heaven,  train  leaves  the  station  at  seven-o-seven." 
When  it's  time  for  the  ten-o-ten,  the  train  is  stuck  in  the  station 
again,  and  toys  are  piled  high  in  the  toy  box. 

2.111  O'Keefe,  Susan  Heyboer.  One  Hungry  Monster:  A  Counting 
Book  in  Rhyme.  Illustrated  by  Lynn  Munsinger.  Little, 
Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-316-63385-2. 32p.  3-7. 

One  by  one,  ten  hungry  monsters  appear  in  a  little  boy's  bed- 
room and  spill  out  into  his  home,  where  they  wreak  havoc  upon 
the  entire  household,  especially  the  kitchen,  in  search  of  food. 
After  politely  serving  the  ten  monsters  ten  different  foods  and 
receiving  only  tricks  and  shenanigans  in  return,  the  boy  finally 
orders  them  out  of  his  house:  "You  are  so  bad  /  it  makes  me 
mad!"  Busy  watercolored  pen-and-ink  illustrations  portray  the 
chubby,  green-eyed  monsters  as  harmless  rascals. 

2.112  Pacovska,  Kveta.  One,  Five,  Many.  Illustrated  by  Kveta  Pa- 
covskS.  Clarion  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-395-54997-3.  28p.  4h3. 

This  unique  number  book,  with  its  punch-outs,  paper  doors, 
peek  windows,  mirrors,  and  ingenious  design,  is  a  marvel  of 
learning  made  pleasurable.  It  covers  only  the  numbers  one 
through  ten,  but  presents  them  so  thoroughly  and  imaginatively 
that  young  readers  will  return  with  delight,  reinforcing  the  les- 
sons. The  illustrations  are  brilliantly  colored,  often  of  whimsical 
creatures,  and  delightful  enough  in  themselves  to  bring  readers 
to  the  book  again  and  again. 

2.113  Reiser,  Lynn.  Christmas  Counting.  Illustrated  by  Lynn  Reiser. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10677-3.  32p.  4  and  up. 

More  than  just  for  counting,  this  book,  filled  with  colorful  styl- 
ized paintings,  provides  a  wealth  of  opportunities  for  fun  and 


ERIC 


S2 


54 


Books  for  Young  Children 


learning.  Through  a  cumulative  patterned  story  about  a  young 
fir  tree  and  a  family  young  children  can  celebrate  growth,  new 
life,  and  family  traditions.  The  predictable  text  and  well- 
matched  illustrations  will  have  even  the  youngest  joining  in  the 
fun. 

2.114  Scott,  Ann  Herbert.  One  Good  Horse:  A  Cowpuncher's  Count- 
ing Book.  Illustrated  by  Lynn  Sweat.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-688-09147-4.  29p.  2  and  up. 

As  a  young  boy  accompanies  his  cowboy  father  on  his  ranch 
rounds,  they  describe  the  wide-open  landscape  numerically 
from  one  to  ten,  to  fifty,  and  to  one  hundred  before  heading  back 
home  on  their  horse.  Burnt  orange,  forest  green,  and  teal  hues 
dominate  the  realistic  pencil  and  oil  paintings  by  Lynn  Sweat. 
The  simple  text  is  framed  by  thin  orange  and  teal  borders  in 
Native  American  style. 

2.115  Sheppard,  Jeff.  The  Right  Number  of  Elephants.  Illustrated  bv 
Felicia  Bond.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-025616-8.  32p. 
4-7. 

In  a  counting  book  featuring  elephants,  a  young  girl  tells  the 
exact  number  of  elephants  needed  for  various  tasks.  For  exam- 
ple, if  you  need  to  paint  the  ceiling  "and  there  isn't  a  ladder  to 
be  found,  then  the  right  number  of  elephants  is . . .  9."  While 
nine  exuberant  elephants  slap  paint  everywhere,  causing  a  riot- 
ous mess,  there's  a  new  problem:  "When  you  go  to  the  beach  on 
a  very  warm  day,  the  right  number  of  elephants  for  shade  is . . . 
8."  Felicia  Bond's  countdown  watercolors  make  even  one  ele- 
phant special. 

2.116  Sloat,  Teri.  From  One  to  One  Hundred.  Illustrated  by  Teri  Sloat. 
Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44764-4.  32p.  3-7. 

Here's  a  counting  book  that  contextualizes  the  counting  oppor- 
tunities— even  the  numerals  are  embedded  in  the  artwork.  Ob- 
jects to  count  are  pictured  at  the  bottom  of  each  page.  Simple  to 
find  is  one  princess  roasting  one  marshmallow  on  the  breath  of 
one  dragon.  But  how  about  fifty  huskies  pulling  dogsleds  past 
fifty  spectators  and  headed  toward  a  finish  line  of  fifty  frankfurt- 
ers under  fifty  flags?  Double-page  spreads  invite  counting  from 
one  to  ten,  and  then  by  tens  to  one  hundred. 

2.117  Thaler,  Mike.  Seven  Little  Hippos.  Illustrated  by  Jerry  Smath. 
Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-671- 
72964-0.  28p.  4^8. 


9 

:RLC 


S3 


A.  Mother  Goose's  Words  of  Wit  and  Wisdom:  A  Book  of  Months  by  Tedd  Arnold 
(see  2.121).  B.  Ocean  Parade:  A  Counting  Bookby  Patricia  MacCarthy  (see  2.109). 
C.  What  Comes  in 2%  3's  &  4's?by  Suzanne  Aker;  illustrated  by  Bemie  Kariin  (see  2.92). 


ER?C 


BEST  COPy  AVAILABLE 


84 


A.  Old  Black  Fly  by  Jim  Aylesworth;  Illustration  by  Stephen  GammeN  (see  2.4). 

B.  Train  Leaves  the  Station  by  Eve  Merriam;  illustrated  by  Dale  Gottlieb  (see  2.110). 

C.  Each  Orange  Had  8  Slices:  A  Counting  Book  by  Paul  Giganti,  Jr.;  illustrated  by 
Donald  Crews  (see  2.105). 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Counting  Books 


55 


In  this  familiar  chant,  pajama-clad  hippos  (instead  of  monkeys) 
are  jumping  on  the  bed  until,  one  by  one,  each  bounces  off  and 
bumps  a  hippo  head.  Youngsters  instantly  will  be  reading  along 
with  the  hippo  doctor,  who  warns,  "No  more  little  hippos  jump- 
ing on  the  bed/'  as  he  wraps  yards  and  yards  of  bandages 
around  each  swollen  noggin.  Jerry  Smath's  hippos  are  exuber- 
ant, so  they  crack  the  walls,  shatter  the  floor,  and  burst  through 
the  ceiling,  eventually  demolishing  the  house. 

2.118  Thornhill,  Jan.  The  Wildlife  1  2  3:  A  Nature  Counting  Book, 
Illustrated  by  Jan  Thornhill.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for 
Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-671-67926-0.  32p.  4-8. 

Wild  animals  from  around  the  world  accompany  the  numerals 
1  to  20  as  well  as  25,  50,  100,  and  1,000.  Animals  in  natural 
settings  and  in  striking  compositions  are  framed  by  detailed 
designs.  Some  are  camouflaged  to  provide  readers  with  a  bit  of 
a  counting  challenge.  Readers  can  count  the  animals  in  the  illus- 
trations as  well  as  in  the  borders.  Information  about  each  animal 
appears  on  the  final  two  pages  entitled  "Nature  Notes/'  Notable 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  Science,  1989. 

2.119  Van  Fleet,  Matthew.  One  Yellow  Lion,  Illustrated  by  Matthew 
Van  Fleet.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037- 
1099-2.  24p.  2-6. 

In  a  simple  concept  book,  two  bold  words  appear  on  the  left- 
hand  side  of  the  page:  "One"  and  "Yellow."  Opposite  is  a  huge 
yellow  numeral  1.  Open  the  flap  and  half  of  that  numeral  be- 
comes the  tail  of  a  cheerful  lion  cub.  On  the  next  page,  the 
numeral  2  opens  to  become  the  neck  of  a  graceful  swan. 
After  counting  to  ten,  children  can  open  a  final  five-fold 
page  on  which  all  the  animals  reprise  their  roles  in  an  animal 
pyramid. 

2.120  Wood,  Jakki.  One  Bear  with  Bees  in  His  Hair.  Illustrated  by 
Jakki  Wood.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44695-8. 
32p.  3-6. 

In  rhyming  text  that  spreads  one  line  at  a  time  across  the  pages, 
the  story  cumulates:  One  bright  orange  honey-eating  bear 
whose  hair  is  populated  by  bees  meets  another  bear,  this  one 
with  purple  fur.  "Two  bears — that's  more  fun.  Oh,  look!  Another 
one!"  Bears  continue  to  meet  others  until  they  number  teh  and 
their  mass  crams  and  overflows  the  pages  (making  counting 
them  a  bit  difficult).  When  all  are  assembled,  they  disperse  for  a 


Books  for  Young  Children 


game  of  hide-and-seek,  laughably  spottable  by  their  incongru- 
ous fur  colors. 

Nursery  Rhymes 

2.121  Arnold,  Tedd.  Mother  Goose's  Words  of  Wit  and  Wisdom:  A 
Book  of  Months*  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990  ISBN 
0-8037-0826-2.  32p.  4  and  up. 

Many,  many  hands  "pulled  miles  and  miles  of  thread  through 
what  seemed  to  be  acres  of  cloth"  to  produce  a  year-round 
Mother  Goose  illustrated  with  samplers.  The  counted  cross- 
stitch  and  embroidered  designs  are  bordered  with  raw  linen, 
making  handsome,  framable  compositions  on  each  page.  A  final 
section  explains  the  origin  and  history  of  traditional  samplers, 
children's  role  in  producing  them,  and  a  bibliography  of  histori- 
cal needlework  sources. 

2.122  Brown,  Ruth.  The  World  That  Jack  Built  Illustrated  by  Ruth 
Brown.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44735-4.  26p. 
4-7. 

Although  based  on  the  traditional  cumulative  tale,  Ruth 
Brown's  message — that  we  must  protect  the  environment — is 
up-to-the-minute.  "This  is  the  stream  that  flows  past  the  trees 
that  grow  by  the  house  that  Jack  built."  Rich  and  sensitive  paint- 
ings portray  a  love  for  animals  and  nature's  beauty.  Each  scene 
also  shows  increasing  human  pollution  as  it  is  astutely  observed 
through  the  eyes  of  a  black  cat. 

2.123  Bullock,  Kathleen.  It  Chanced  to  Rain.  Illustrated  by  Kathleen 
Bullock.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989 
ISBN  0-671-66005-5.  32p.  4-6. 

In  a  whimsically  illustrated  adaptation  of  a  nursery  rhyme  in 
which  it  rains  on  a  variety  of  animal  friends  out  for  a  walk,  cats, 
dogs,  rats,  and  pigs  hurry  home  for  dry  clothes  and  a  hot  lunch, 
only  to  discover  that  the  ducks  are  missing.  Fearing  the  worst, 
the  friends  trek  back  out  in  the  rain  and  find  the  ducks  swim- 
ming in  the  river.  At  the  close  of  the  day,  most  of  the  animals  end 
up  in  bed  with  sniffles,  except  for  the  ducks,  who  must  wash  all 
the  lunch  dishes. 

2.124  Butterworth,  Nick.  Nick  Butterworth's  Book  of  Nursery 
Rhymes*  Illustrated  by  Nick  Butterworth.  Viking  Penguin,  1991 
ISBN  0-670-83551-X.  52p.  2-7. 


9 

ERLC 


87 


Nursery  Rhymes 


57 


Through  whimsical  illustrations,  Nick  Butterworth  creates  witty, 
literal  interpretations  of  twenty-two  nursery  rhymes.  We  see 
Mary's  lamb  eagerly  raising  its  "hoof"  from  behind  a  school 
desk  and  Jack  (the  mouse)  pole-vaulting  over  a  candlestick.  A 
few  of  the  nursery  rhymes  in  this  American  edition  of  a  book 
first  published  in  Great  Britain  are  unfamiliar,  but  the  distinctive 
illustrations  make  them  all  delightful. 

2.125  Cauley,  Lorinda  Bryan.  Three  Blind  Mice:  The  Classic  Nursery 
Rhyme.  Illustrated  by  Lorinda  Bryan  Cauley.  G.  P.  Putnam's 
Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21775-4. 28p.  4^8. 

The  complete  adventure  underlying  this  classic  nursery  rhyme 
is  revitalized  by  Lorinda  Bryan  Cauley's  uniquely  individual 
mice  in  tiny  hats,  suspenders,  or  checked  pants.  The  colorfully 
detailed  paintings  give  a  mouse's  view  of  a  treacherous  world, 
evoking  sympathy,  horror,  and  then  satisfaction  when  the  mice 
finally  recover  their  sight  and  their  tails. 

2.126  Cole,  Joanna,  and  Stephanie  Calmenson,  compilers.  Pat-a-Cake, 
and  Other  Play  Rhymes,  Illustrated  by  Alan  Tiegreen.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11039-8.  48p.  1-4. 

"For  every  mood  and  time  of  day,"  there  are  rhymes  for  babies' 
and  toddlers'  fingers,  hands,  toes,  feet,  and  faces;  there  are 
rhymes  for  tickling,  for  knee  riding,  and  for  dancing.  Text  of  the 
rhymes  appears  beneath  demonstrations  of  adults  and  children 
at  play.  A  gentle  reminder  cautions  parents  that  a  little  stimula- 
tion goes  a  long  way,  and  supports  them  as  partners  in  language 
learning.  A  bibliography  sends  the  interested  reader  to  other 
sources. 

2.127  Jones,  Carol,  compiler.  Hickory  Dickory  Dock,  and  Other  Nurs- 
ery Rhymes,  Illustrated  by  Carol  Jones.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1992. 
ISBN  0-395-60834-1.  32p.  2-8. 

Each  of  the  eleven  rhymes  in  this  collection  is  printed  on  a 
bordered  interleafed  page  with  a  cut-out  hole  that  allows  read- 
ers to  preview  a  detail  in  the  next  full-page  painting  or  to  peek 
back  at  a  portion  of  the  prior  illustration.  The  mouse  who  ran  up 
the  clock  appears  in  each  period-set  watercolor  and  ink  illustra- 
tion. 

2.128  Kemp,  Moira,  compiler.  Baa,  Baa,  Black  Sheep,  Hey  Diddle 
Diddle.  Hickory,  Dickory,  Dock,  This  Little  Piggy.  Illustrated 
by  Moira  Kemp.  Lodestar  Books,  1991. 12p.  2-6. 


ERLC 


SB 


58 


Books  for  Young  Children 


The  front  covers  of  this  nursery  rhyme  series  are  shaped  to  the 
main  character's  ears,  so  the  heads  of  a  mouse,  pig,  black  sheep, 
and  cat  with  a  fiddle  are  discernible  on  each  page  of  these  simple 
board  books.  Throughout,  the  cheerful  characters  wear  just  the 
right  clothing.  For  example,  Baa  Baa  Black  Sheep  wears  a  bright 
patchwork  shawl  and  peers  over  her  glasses  at  the  counter  of  her 
general  store  as  she  answers  requests  for  wool. 

2.129  Knight,  Joan.  Tickle-Toe  Rhymes.  Illustrated  by  John  Wallner. 
Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-05773-X.  32p.  2-5. 

A  variety  of  animals,  including  tigers,  skunks,  and  pandas,  en- 
gage in  activities  that  stimulate  counting  rhymes,  all  based  on 
"This  Little  Pig  Went  to  Market/'  Some  rhymes  are  clever  and 
use  atypical  vocabulary  in  a  fun  way.  The  watercolor  and  ink 
illustrations  are  amusing,  detailed,  and  certain  to  prompt  dis- 
cussion. The  animals  themselves,  however,  are  small  enough 
and  integral  enough  to  make  counting  a  challenge  for  the  very 
young. 

2.130  Langley,  Jonathan.  Rain,  Rain,  Go  Away!  A  Book  of  Nursery 
Rhymes.  Illustrated  by  Jonathan  Langley.  Dial  Books  for  Young 
Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0762-2. 93p.  2-6. 

With  bustling  energy  and  detail-packed  pages,  ninety-two  fa- 
vorite nursery  rhymes  are  illustrated  in  bright  colors  with  rosy- 
cheeked,  whimsical  lads  and  lasses.  Curly  Locks  has  a  sprin- 
kling of  freckles  across  her  cherubic  face;  Yankee  Doodle, 
wearing  a  cowboy  hat,  rides  a  wheeled  horse.  Page  layouts 
group  rhymes  with  common  elements.  For  example,  rainy-day 
rhymes  are  combined  into  a  two-page  spread  that  features  a 
baker  in  a  windmill,  April  showers,  the  Eency  Weency  spider, 
and  rain,  rain  that  won't  let  Johnny  go  out  to  play. 

2.131  Lawson,  Carol.  Teddy  Bear,  Teddy  Bear.  Illustrated  by  Carol 
Lawson.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0970- 
6.  32p.  2-6. 

The  familiar  jump-rope  rhyme  is  turned,  line  by  line,  into  a 
cheery  picture  book  that  invites  instant  reading  and  enactment 
of  the  movements  of  a  smiling  yellow  Teddy.  Blue-crayon  bor- 
ders wrap  Teddy  in  action — dancing  on  toes,  touching  his  nose, 
turning  around,  and  touching  the  ground.  Smears  of  paint  muss 
the  edges  of  the  pages,  as  though  touched  before  it  dried  by  a 
mischievous  Teddy. 


ERIC  M 


Nursery  Rhymes 


59 


2.132  Opie,  Iona,  and  Peter  Opie.  The  Little  Dog  Laughed*  Illustrated 
by  Lucy  Cousins.  E.  P.  Dutton,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44573-0.  64p. 
2-5. 

Sixty-four  Mother  Goose  rhymes,  printed  in  a  large,  bold  type- 
face, are  presented  with  the  characteristic  simplicity  of  Lucy 
Cousins's  art.  Heavy  black  outlines  and  crayon-box  primary 
colors  accompany  captions  that  are  primitively  scrawled  in 
paint  across  each  illustration.  The  result  is  a  joyful,  albeit  un- 
usual, interpretation  of  these  classic  rhymes.  ALA  Notable  Chil- 
dren's Books,  1991. 

2*133  Sutherland,  Zena,  compiler.  The  Orchard  Book  of  Nursery 
Rhymes*  Illustrated  by  Faith  Jaques.  Orchard  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-531-05903-0.  96p.  All  ages. 

Seventy-seven  classic  nursery  rhymes,  illustrated  with  period 
watercolors,  are  gathered  into  this  beautifully  designed  edition 
with  the  feel  and  look  of  what  a  nursery  rhyme  collection  should 
be.  Faith  Jaques  has  done  meticulous  research  on  the  houses, 
domestic  detail,  and  gardens  of  the  Georgian  period.  In  a  palette 
of  soft  pinks,  lilacs,  blues,  and  greens,  each  of  the  scenes  and 
characters  is  perfectly  matched  to  its  verse — and  each  verse  is  a 
favorite.  Zena  Sutherland  reports  the  origins  of  some  of  the 
rhymes  in  "Selector's  Notes." 

2*134  Wadsworth,  Olive  A.  Over  in  the  Meadow:  An  Old  Counting 
Rhyme*  Illustrated  by  David  A.  Carter.  Scholastic  Hardcover 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-590^4498-0.  32p.  2-6. 

This  traditional  counting  rhyme/song  is  enlivened  with 
meadow  dwellers  executed  in  cut-paper  collage.  Animal  tex- 
tures and  details  are  sponge-painted  or  stamped.  The  effect  is 
lush  springtime  color,  simplicity  of  line,  and  interesting  detail 
(such  as  eight  yellow  lizards  dotted  with  tiny  orange  stars).  The 
entire  rhyme  is  reprinted  at  the  book's  end,  with  the  number 
words  in  boldface  type. 

2*135  Watson,  Wendy.  Wendy  Watson's  Mother  Goose.  Illustrated  by 
Wendy  Watson.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-688-05708-X.  160p.  4-8. 

Wendy  Watson's  collection  of  over  two  hundred  nursery  rhymes 
is  illustrated  with  simple,  cheery  scenes  and  characters —  rang- 
ing from  tucked-in  cameos  to  two-page  spreads.  Although  only 
the  cover  flap  gives  the  clue,  the  rhymes  are  "art-organized" 
seasonally  to  cover  the  full  year. 


ERIC 


90 


60 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.136  Yolen,  Jane,  editor.  The  Lap-Time  Song  and  Play  Book.  Illus- 
trated by  Margot  Tomes.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN 
0-15-243588-3.  32p.  All  ages. 

Sixteen  nursery  games  and  rhymes  are  period-set  by  Margot 
Tomes's  gouache  paintings  and  then  offered  to  those  with  chil- 
dren in  their  care  along  with  directions  for  enacting  the  verses. 
Jane  Yolen  has  also  provided  interesting  background  informa- 
tion for  each  entry.  For  example,  the  Baker's  Man  in  "Patty- 
Cake,  Patty  Cake"  may  refer  to  Beker's  man,  an  old  Saxon  term 
for  priest.  To  "mark  it  with  T"  (as  in  older  versions)  meant  to 
make  the  sign  of  the  cross  over  the  communion  wafer.  Adam 
Stemple,  Yolen's  son  has  provided  musical  arrangements  for  the 
piano,  and  Yolen  offers  an  afterword,  "About  Lap  Songs." 

Paper  Engineering 

Lift-the-Flap 

2.137  Angel,  Marie.  Marie  Angel's  Exotic  Alphabet:  A  Lift-the-Flap 
Alphabetic  Safari.  Illustrated  by  Marie  Angel.  Dial  Books  for 
Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-1247-2.  32p.  2-6. 

Untie  a  red  ribbon  to  unfold  a  nine-foot  frieze  printed  on  stiff 
board.  Each  fold  frames  a  different  wild  animal  habitat— an 
African  coastal  jungle,  waterhole,  and  grasslands,  as  well  as 
South  and  Central  American  jungles.  Readers  can  open  small 
flaps  to  discover  an  alphabet  zoo — from  a  graceful*  antelope  to  a 
skunk-like  zorilla.  On  the  opposite  side  of  the  frieze,  the  names 
of  all  the  exotic  animals  are  printed  on  identical  habitat  back- 
grounds. 

2.138  Argent,  Kerry.  Happy  Birthday,  Wombat!  Illustrated  by  Kerry 
Argent.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-316-05097- 
0.  20p.  1-5. 

While  Wombat  searches  high  and  low  for  his  birthday  present, 
his  assorted  Australian  animal  friends — bandicoots,  kangaroos, 
and  koala  bears— sneak  past  the  lovable  lumberer  to  gather  for 
his  surprise  birthday  party.  Children  will  delight  in  lifting  flaps 
to  discover  telltale  streamers,  banners,  and  gifts  that  Wombat,  in 
his  fervor,  has  overlooked.  Charming  illustrations  offer  memo- 
rable details,  such  as  Wombat's  palm-tree  patterned  Bermuda 
shorts  and  a  multicolored  patchwork  quilt. 


91 


Paper  Engineering 


61 


2.139  Bradman,  Tony,  and  Margaret  Chamberlain.  Who's  Afraid  of 
the  Big  Bad  Wolf?  Illustrated  by  Margaret  Chamberlain. 
Macmillan/ Aladdin  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-71291-X.  20p.  3-6. 

Three  comical  pigs  and  a  big  bad  wolf  cavort  across  the  pages  of 
this  lift-the-flap  picture  book.  While  the  wolf  threatens,  bug- 
eyed  forest  animals  ask  in  speech  balloons,  "Who's  afraid  of  the 
big  bad  wolf?"  Just  lift  a  log  or  move  a  bush  to  discover  the 
answer:  "We  are!"  Readers  must  look  under  flying  house  parts 
to  find  the  first  two  pigs.  But  with  his  assault  on  the  brick  house, 
the  wolf  is  foiled  by  a  wily  girl  pig.  "Who's  afraid  of  the  boiling 
water?" 

2*140  Coleridge,  Sara.  January  Brings  the  Snow:  A  Seasonal  Hide- 
and-Seek.  Illustrated  by  Elizabeth  Falconer.  Orchard  Books, 
1989.  ISBN  0-531-05824-7.  28p.  3-8. 

The  couplets  of  Sara  Coleridge's  nineteenth-century  poem  an- 
nounce nature's  offerings  during  each  month  of  the  year  ("Janu- 
ary brings  the  snow;  /  Makes  the  toes  and  fingers  glow").  The 
lines  of  the  poem  appear  beneath  twelve  windowpane  borders 
that  focus  on  two  children  at  work  or  at  play  in  seasonal  activi- 
ties. Lift  the  tabs  to  uncover  the  activities  of  a  tiny  family  of  field 
mice  who  are  also  frolicking  through  the  seasons. 

2*141  Cousins,  Lucy.  What  Can  Rabbit  Hear?  What  Can  Rabbit  See? 
Illustrated  by  Lucy  Cousins.  Tambourine  Books,  1991. 16p.  2  and 
up. 

Sporting  a  red  and  white  striped  shirt,  bespectacled  Rabbit  sees 
and  hears  the  world  around  him:  "What  can  Rabbit  see  in  the 
pond?"  Lift  the  flap  to  find  a  large  goldfish.  "Whai  can  Rabbit 
hear  in  the  tree?"  Lift  the  flap  to  reveal  a  chirping  bird.  Young 
children  will  discover  ways  to  identify  objects  and  learn  com- 
mon sounds,  all  the  while  delighting  in  illustrations  that  are 
bold,  primary  colored,  and  childlike. 

2*142  Grindley,  Sally.  Shhh!  Illustrated  by  Peter  Utton.  Little, 
Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-32899-5.  22p.  4^8. 

Two  tiny  but  unseen  cieatures  approach  the  giant's  castle — is  it 
the  reader  and  the  listener?  Fold  out  a  door  for  an  intruder's-eye 
view  of  the  giant's  dining  room,  and  the  adventure  begins.  On 
this  tiptoe  journey,  readers  can  peek  back  through  small  doors 
to  see  if  the  cat,  the  hen,  and  then  the  wife  are  undisturbed.  At 
last — the  giant!  Peek  back.  Awake!  The  giant  is  so  menacing  that 


92 


ERLC 


62 


Books  for  Young  Children 


readers  are  warned:  "SHUT  TOE  BOOK!"  Illustrations  are  un- 
controlled strokes  of  exuberance. 

2.143  Hill,  Eric.  Spot  Goes  to  the  Park.  Spot  Sleeps  Oven  Illustrated 
by  Eric  Hill.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1990-91.  lip.  1-5. 

Spot  the  amiable  puppy  has  adventures  with  his  assorted  animal 
friends  in  this  series  of  twelve  books  for  young  children.  When 
Spot  sleeps  overnight  at  his  monkey  friend  Steve's  house,  he 
brings  a  wagonload  of  toys,  but  forgets  his  teddy  bear.  When 
Spot  is  at  the  park,  a  friendly  duck  retrieves  his  ball  from  a  pond. 
On  each  heavy  page,  the  response  to  large,  bold  text  is  hidden 
under  flaps.  Simple  line  drawings  in  primary  colors  promote  the 
elemental  mood. 

2.144  Pelham,  David.  Sam's  Sandwich.  Illustrated  by  David  Pelham 
and  Harry  Willock.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525- 
44751-2.  22p.  5  and  up. 

No  child  would  want  to  eat  Sam's  Sandwich,  but  some  may  want 
to  read  it  and  lift  its  flaps.  Within  sandwich  dimensions,  and 
between  covers  of  laminated  styrofoam  "bread,"  a  demonic 
looking  brother-sister  duo,  Sam  and  Samantha,  decide  to  make 
a  sandwich,  to  which  Samantha  adds  lettuce,  tomatoes,  cheese, 
watercress,  cucumbers,  salami,  onions,  and  ketchup,  while  Sam 
slips  in  worms,  snails,  ants,  flies,  spiders,  tadpoles,  and  centi- 
pedes. 

2.145  Potter,  Beatrix.  Beatrix  Potter's  Peter  Rabbit:  A  Lift-the-Flap 
Rebus  Book.  Illustrated  by  Colin  Twinn.  Frederick  Warne,  1991. 
ISBN  0-7232-3798-0. 16p.  4-8. 

Beatrix  Potter's  complete,  original  text  is  enlarged  in  this  reis- 
sued rebus  book.  Tiny  picture  flaps  mask  selected  story  words 
that  are  revealed  by  lifting  the  flaps.  In  addition,  there  are  some 
pop-up  features,  including  a  final  peep  into  the  underground 
rabbit  hole.  The  artwork  is  Potter's  original,  but  page  layouts 
differ  to  accommodate  the  enlarged  text. 

2.146  Smith,  Mavis.  "Fred,  Is  That  You?"  A  Lift-the-Flap  Book.  Illus- 
trated by  Mavis  Smith.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-80241-7. 
20p.  2-5. 

A  concerned  duck  follows  different  sets  of  tracks  to  find  his 
friend,  Fred,  asking  repeatedly:  "Fred,  is  that  you?"  Beneath 
each  variantly  shaped  flap  (including  a  beach  umbrella,  a  bed- 
sheet  on  the  clothesline,  and  even  a  refrigerator  door),  the  duck 


93 


Paper  Engineering 


63 


finds  the  animal  who  really  made  the  tracks  and  who  points  out 
the  mistake  in  a  rhyming  couplet:  "No,  dude,  no.  Can't  you  see 
I'm  a  crow?"  Bright  colors,  bold  lines,  and  minimal  backgrounds 
contribute  to  this  surprise-ending  book  for  beginners. 

2.147  Varekamp,  Marjolein.  Little  Sam  Takes  a  Bath,  Illustrated  by 
Marjolein  Varekamp.  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-05944-8. 
24p.  2-6. 

In  a  "special  effects"  book,  Little  Sam,  a  roly-poly  pig,  gets  dirty 
playing  in  the  mud  and  must  be  coaxed  into  the  bath  by  a 
patient  mother.  Children  can  participate  by  turning  Little  Sam 
over  in  the  mudhole,  peeking  into  cutout  windows  and  doors, 
and  sympathizing  with  Sam's  reluctance  to  bathe.  Most  fun  of 
all,  though,  is  pulling  the  tab  that  makes  Sam  jump  into  the  tub 
with  a  mighty  splash,  joining  his  pop-up  seal  and  elephant. 

Pop-ups 

2.148  Carter,  David  A.  Surprise  Party:  A  Lift-up  Pop-up  Book,  Illus- 
trated by  David  A.  Carter.  Grosset  and  Dunlap,  1990.  ISBN  0- 
488-40062-6. 16p.  4-6. 

An  alligator  couple  attends  a  surprise  party  and  encounters 
"silly  snakes,"  "beautiful  birds,"  and  "fabulous  frogs"  on  full- 
color,  pop-up  pages.  This  birthday  fun  honors  a  surprise  baby 
not  yet  hatched  from  a  red  polka-dot  egg. 

2.149  Dijs,  Carla.  Who  Sees  You?  At  the  Pond;  Who  Sees  You?  In  the 
Jungle.  Illustrated  by  Carla  Dijs.  Grosset  and  Dunlap,  1992. 12p. 
2-5. 

"Who  Sees  You?"  is  the  question  posed  in  these  two  Little  Pop- 
and-Peek  Books.  In  every  habitat,  pop-up  animals  in  vivid  col- 
ors against  stark  white  backgrounds  answer  the  question.  At  the 
Pond  features  such  creatures  as  a  kelly-green  frog  with  pop-up 
legs,  a  face-to-face  view  of  a  turtle  with  a  wrinkly  neck,  and  a 
shimmery  blue  fish  with  a  flipping  fin,  while  In  the  Jungle  fea- 
tures brightly  colored  scenes  with  jungle  animal  pop-ups.  The 
series  also  includes  animals  from  the  farm,  ocean,  zoo,  and  for- 
est. 

2.150  Fritz,  Jean.  The  Great  Adventure  of  Christopher  Columbus:  A 
Pop-up  Book.  Illustrated  by  Tomie  dePaola.  Putnam  and 
Grosset,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22113-1. 12p.  5-9. 


ERLC 


94 


64 


Books  for  Young  Children 


In  Jean  Fritz's  inimitable  clarity,  accuracy,  and  simplicity  of  style, 
the  Columbus  adventure  is  retold  along  the  side  panels  of  six 
pop-up  scenes  designed  by  Tomie  dePaola.  Columbus  bows  to 
Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  a  ship  skims  the  waves,  Columbus 
plants  the  flag  of  Spain,  the  Santa  Maria  runs  aground,  and 
Columbus  returns  at  the  head  of  a  procession.  This  is  a  pop-up 
book  that  bears  reading  aloud:  'Too  much!  Much  too  much.  The 
queen  said  no  and  sent  Christopher  Columbus  on  his  way." 

2.151  Moseley,  Keith.  It  Was  a  Dark  and  Stormy  Night:  A  Pop-Up 
Mystery  Whodunit  Illustrated  by  Linda  Birkinshaw,  Dial 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-1021-6.  14p.  8-10. 

Even  though  it  was  a  dark  and  stormy  night,  Lady  Penelope  Pig 
wasn't  going  to  let  weather  spoil  her  dinner  party,  an  evening 
for  showing  off  her  newest  diamond.  As  the  storm  rages,  Victo- 
rian-clad animal  guests  are  served  by  maid  and  butler  in  pop-up 
English  drawing-room  scenes.  Then  a  blinding  flash,  the  lights 
go  out,  and  the  diamond  is  stolen.  Inspector  Dog  and  careful 
readers  must  solve  the  crime.  A  tiny  sealed  envelope  holds  the 
solution  at  the  book's  end. 

2*152  Rojany,  Lisa.  The  Hands-on  Book  of  Big  Machines.  Illustrated 
by  Joel  Snyder.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-41904-4.  14p. 
6-10. 

On  construction  sites,  roadways,  factories,  and  farms,  big  ma- 
chines lift,  dig,  carry,  and  tear  down.  Paper  engineering  enables 
the  monster  machines  in  this  book  to  move,  scoop,  or  lift.  Read- 
ers can  even  peek  into  some  of  these  gigantic  machines.  The  final 
page  offers  a  robot  arm  in  an  auto  factory  as  well  as  a  dinosaur 
automated  by  machinery.  The  narrative  is  mindful  of  children's 
interests  ("Abackhoe  can  dig  holes  deep  enough  for  a  giraffe  to 
jtand  in")  and  not  overwhelmingly  lengthy. 

2.153  Stevenson,  Robert  Louis.  A  Child's  Garden  of  Verses:  A  Pop-up 
Book.  Illustrated  by  Jannat  Messenger.  Dutton  Children's  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-525-44997-3. 12p.  2-6. 

Jannat  Messenger  has  selected  twelve  of  Stevenson's  best-loved 
poems  and  given  six  of  them  a  pop-up  interpretation  and /or 
movable  features.  For  "The  Wind,"  a  butterfly  kite  spins  up- 
ward; by  pulling  a  tab,  two  other  kites  are  launched  skyward  on 
curly  strings.  A  small  cadre  of  neighborhood  children  in  dress- 
up  costumes  moves  to  "The  Marching  Song."  One  enthusiastic 
marcher  claps  the  cymbals;  another  beats  a  drum. 


ERLC 


95 


A.  A  Real  Nice  Clambake  by  Oscar  Hammerstein;  illustrated  by  Nadine  Bernard 
Westcott  (see  2.158).  B.  Goodnight  to  Annie:  An  Alphabet  Lullaby  by  Eve  Merriam; 
illustrated  by  Carol  Schwartz  (see  2.20).  C.  The  Pop-Up,  Pull-Tab,  Playtime  House 
That  Jack  Built  by  Nadine  Bernard  Westcott  (see  2.154). 


9G 

erJc  best  copy  availabl- 


AVOC&LV  WORLD 

BeterSis 


f "  F<^^0x%d  bJ  James  Marsna"  (see  9-12).  B.  An  Ocean  World  by  Peter  Sis 
^ee  2  174)    C. Twinkle,  Twinkle,  Little  Star  by  Jane  Taylor,  illustrated  by  Michael 

H3QUG  (S66  2.163), 


97 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Songs  and  Music 


65 


2.154  Westcott,  Nadine  Bernard.  The  Pop-Up,  Pull-Tab,  Playtime 
House  That  Jack  Built  Illustrated  by  Nadine  Bernard  Westcott. 
Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-316-93138-1.  18p. 
6-*. 

Open  the  first  flap  to  find  the  pop-up  rat  that  ate  the  cheese  in 
the  house  that  Jack  built.  In  this  action-packed  version  of  the 
best-known  cumulative  tale,  Jack  sleeps  through  it  all.  He  misses 
the  dog-cat-rat  chase,  the  cow  with  the  crumpled  horn  kicking 
over  the  milkpail,  and  even  the  wedding  officiated  by  the 
shaven  and  shorn  priest.  On  each  page,  the  rat  who  started  it  all 
keeps  popping  up  in  unusual  places,  such  as  pockets  or  trousers. 
With  all  in  disarray  Jack  wakens  to  ask,  "What  are  you  all  doing 
in  my  house?" 

Pull-Tabs 

2.155  Zelinsky,  Paul  O.  The  Wheels  on  the  Bus,  Illustrated  by  Paul  O. 
Zelinsky.  Dutton  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44644-3. 12p.  3-6. 

Vivid  colors,  unusual  typefaces,  and  double-page  layouts  make 
this  an  exuberant  rendition  of  the  familiar  children's  song.  Each 
verse  is  accompanied  not  only  by  bustling  illustrations  rich  with 
subtle  details,  but  also  with  movable  parts  related  to  the  repeti- 
tive line  (such  as  wipers  on  the  bus  that  really  go  swish,  swish, 
swish).  Though  young  readers  may  have  difficulty  manipulat- 
ing pull-tabs,  an  older  reader  can  help  them  want  to  take  this 
trip  again  and  again.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1991. 

Songs  and  Music 

2.156  Cauley,  Lorinda  Bryan,  reteller.  Old  MacDonald  Had  a  Farm, 
Illustrated  by  Lorinda  Bryan  Cauley.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989. 
ISBN  0-399-21628-6.  32p.  4-8. 

Poor  Old  MacDonald!  The  chubby,  cheerful  farmer  with  round, 
wire-rimmed  glasses  is  awakened  by  roosters  early  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  is  surrounded  by  frolicking  animals  that  follow  him 
"here,"  "there,"  and  "everywhere"  until  he  sits  down  to  have  a 
piece  of  pie  at  night.  The  animated  illustrations,  in  bright  colors 
with  comedic  details,  extend  this  simple  folk  song  by  showing 
the  many  duties  on  Old  MacDonald's  farm,  all  of  which  are 
continuously  interrupted  by  the  boisterous  animals. 


98 


66 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.157  Guthrie,  Woody,  with  Marjorie  Mazia  Guthrie.  Woody's  20 
Grow  Big  Songs*  Illustrated  by  Woody  Guthrie.  HarperCollins, 
1992.  ISBN  0-06-020283-1. 48p.  All  ages. 

Lost  for  over  forty  years,  the  manuscript  for  this  collection  of 
songs,  composed  by  the  Guthries  for  their  daughter,  has  been 
replicated  complete  with  Woody  Guthrie's  own  original 
scratchy  watercolors.  An  arrangement  and  accompanying 
chords  for  each  song  are  included,  as  well  as  the  variations 
provided  by  additional  verses.  Occasionally  readers  are  invited 
to  provide  their  own  extrapolations.  For  "Dance  Around/'  chil- 
dren wave,  tiptoe,  march,  hop,  run,  jump,  and  fly. 

2.158  Hammerstein,  Oscar,  II.  A  Real  Nice  Clambake.  Illustrated  by 
Nadine  Bernard  Westcott.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1992. 
ISBN  0-316-75422-6.  32p.  4-8. 

Baskets  and  buckets  of  ingredients  arrive  early  on  the  beach  in 
preparation  for  clam  chowder,  steamed  lobsters,  corn  on  the  cob, 
blueberrry  pie,  and  watermelon.  Both  lyrics  and  music  are  in- 
cluded for  this  song  from  Rodgers  and  Hammerstein's  Carousel, 
illustrated  here  as  a  family  celebration  on  the  beach.  Spread 
across  the  pages,  the  festivities  include  games  and  songs  and,  of 
course,  eating.  Illustrations  are  filled  with  details  for  revisiting, 
and  pages  are  bordered  in  motifs  from  each  spread. 

2.159  Jones,  Carol,  compiler.  Old  MacDonald  Had  a  Farm.  Illustrated 
by  Carol  Jones.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1989.  ISBN  0-395-49212-2. 
30p.  4-8. 

Full-page  watercolor  illustrations  in  warm  earth  tones  have 
peepholes  in  the  middle  of  the  facing  pages,  allowing  children 
to  guess  the  identity  of  the  next  animal  that  they  will  meet  on 
the  farm  and  then  to  catch  a  backward  glimpse  of  Farmer  Mac- 
Donald  at  work.  Jam-packed  details  in  the  illustrations  offer 
children  opportunities  to  notice  and  talk  about  other  animals 
and  things  of  interest  found  on  Old  MacDonald's  farm. 

2.160  Larrick,  Nancy,  compiler.  Songs  from  Mother  Goose:  With  the 
Traditional  Melody  for  Each.  Illustrated  by  Robin  Spowart. 
Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-023714-7.  60p.  2-6. 

This  hardcover  collection  features  musical  arrangements  for 
fifty-six  Mother  Goose  rhymes,  from  the  most  popular  to  the  less 
familiar.  The  arrangements  are  simple  and  based  on  traditional 
melodies.  Appendixes  include  notes  on  Mother  Goose,  notes  on 
particular  rhymes,  and  an  index  to  first  lines.  Brightly  colored 


ERIC 


99 


Songs  and  Music 


67 


illustrations — some  decorative,  some  depicting  the  action  of  the 
rhymes — add  to  the  overall  attractiveness  of  the  book. 

2-161  Medearis,  Angela  Shelf.  The  Zebra-Riding  Cowboy:  A  Folk 
Song  from  the  Old  West.  Illustrated  by  Maria  Christina  Brusca. 
Henry  Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1712-7,  32p.  4-8. 

When  a  scholarly  looking  greenhorn  shows  up  at  the  Z-Bar 
Ranch,  the  cowboys  give  him  the  zebra  dun  to  ride,  the  orneriest 
horse  of  all.  But  the  city  fellow  keeps  his  seat,  proving  his  worth 
as  a  cowhand.  In  an  afterword,  Angela  Shelf  Medearis  specu- 
lates <  about  this  cowboy  (portrayed  here  as  a  genial  African 
American  with  a  twinkle  in  his  eye),  and  documents  the  contri- 
butions of  ethnically  diverse  cowboys  in  the  Old  West.  The  mu- 
sical score  for  this  cowboy  ballad  is  also  included. 

2.162  Raffi.  Five  Little  Ducks*  Illustrated  by  Jose  Aruego  and  Ariane 
Dewey.  Crown,  1989.  ISBN  0-517-56945-0.  32p.  3-7. 

Five  little  ducks  go  out  to  play,  swimming  in  their  pond  and 
peeking  from  behind  lily  pads.  But  when  Mother  Duck  sounds 
her  "Quack,  quack,  quack,  quack, . . .  only  four  little  ducks  came 
back/'  The  text  of  this  singable  countdown  book  in  the  Raffi 
Songs  to  Read  series  follows  the  steady  disappearance  of  the 
Easter-egg-colored  ducklings,  who  play  in  dirt,  swing  off 
grasses,  and  slide  down  hills.  When  none  remain  and  the  sea- 
sons turn  round  again,  the  ducks  return,  bringing  their  own 
duck  families. 

2-163  Taylor,  Jane.  Twinkle,  Twinkle,  Little  Star.  Illustrated  by  Mi- 
chael Hague.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11168-8. 
24p.  2-6. 

This  1806  nursery  song  is  reenchanted  by  Michael  Hague's  fan- 
ciful watercolor-and-ink  illustrations.  From  an  English  nursery, 
two  young  children  view  the  nighttime  sky,  as  revealed  by  fair- 
ies releasing  a  trail  of  twinkling  stars.  The  star  path  guides  them 
upward  into  a  cloud-borne  sailing  ship  past  magical  beasts  and 
angelic  hosts.  With  the  arrival  of  the  Pegasus-like  dawn,  the 
children  return  to  the  nursery.  Readers  will  find  (before  they 
sleep)  a  fold-out  page  with  glow-in-the-dark  stars. 

2*164  litherington,  Jeanne.  Baby's  Boat.  Illustrated  by  Jeanne  Tither- 
ington.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-08556-3. 24p.  3-5. 

In  the  spirit  of  Wynken,  Blynken,  and  Nod,  a  lifelike  baby  sails 
to  dreamland  in  a  silver  moon  boat.  Jeanne  Htherington's  layers 


ERLC 


68 


Books  for  Young  Children 


of  blurred  colored  pencils  seem  to  glow  with  starlight,  creating 
a  gentle  accompaniment  to  the  simple,  comforting  lullaby:  "Sail, 
baby,  sail  /  Out  upon  that  sea,  /  Only  don't  forget  to  sail  /  Back 
again  to  me/'  A  palette  of  lavender  creates  a  quiet  mood;  the 
simple  lines  of  verse  are  each  bordered  with  a  lavender  frame. 

2.165  Young,  Ruth.  Golden  Bear.  Illustrated  by  Rachel  Isadora.  Viking 
Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670-82577-8.  28p.  2-6. 

"Golden  Bear,  Golden  Bear,  I  have  seen  him  everywhere."  In 
rhyming  text,  this  tender  book  tells  about  the  playtime  adven- 
tures of  a  stuffed  bear  and  his  nameless  African  American  friend. 
From  quiet  rocking  to  skating  and  snowman  making,  the  soft 
pastel  drawings  of  Caldecott  Honor-winner  Rachel  Isadora 
evoke  the  gentleness  of  the  relationship  between  the  boy  and  his 
bear.  Endpapers  feature  music  specially  composed  by  the  author 
for  the  book. 

Wordless  Books 

2*166  Brown,  Craig.  The  Patchwork  Fanner.  Illustrated  by  Craig 
Brown.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07736-6.  22p.  4-6. 

In  a  wordless  text,  a  cheerful  farmer  rises  with  each  dawn  and 
pulls  on  his  overalls,  ready  for  his  day.  Workaday  chores  besiege 
the  farmer's  overalls,  and  after  each  mishap,  he  must  reach  into 
his  scrapbasket  to  repair  the  damage  with  a  bright  patch.  At  last, 
the  basket  is  empty  of  patches,  the  overalls  full  of  them,  and  both 
the  farmer  and  his  sunlit  fields  are  a  patchwork  of  festive  color. 
Pastels  are  freckled  with  ink  to  give  texture  and  grit. 

2.167  Butterworth,  Nick.  Amanda's  Butterfly.  Illustrated  by  Nick  But- 
terworth.  Delacorte  Press,  1991.  ISBN  0-385-30434-X.  40p.  3-^6. 

In  a  wordless  picture  book,  perky  Amanda  goes  on  a  butterfly 
hunt.  Delayed  by  a  rain  shower,  she  ducks  into  a  storage  shed 
where  she  discovers  a  tiny  fairy  with  a  torn,  unusable  wing. 
Although  Molly  considers  using  the  tools  in  the  shed  to  make 
the  repair,  none  suits  the  delicate  fairy.  So  Molly  races  to  her 
house  for  the  tool  that  works  perfectly  on  fairy  wings — tape. 
Nick  Butterworth's  cheerful  paintings  are  framed  squares 
against  glossy-white  backgrounds. 

2.168  Day,  Alexandra.  Carl  Goes  Shopping.  Illustrated  by  Alexandra 
Day.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1989.  ISBN  0-374-31110-2.  27p. 
3-7. 


101 


Wordless  Books 


69 


Carl  the  dog  is  back,  and  this  time  he  is  instructed  to  take  care 
of  Baby  in  a  department  store  while  Mother  runs  an  errand. 
Baby  immediately  gets  out  of  the  buggy  and  onto  Carl's  back  for 
adventures  throughout  the  store.  Carl  and  Baby  make  it  back  to 
their  buggy  just  in  time  for  Mother's  praise.  This  book  of  few 
words  should  elicit  extensive  elaborations  as  readers  react  to  the 
duo's  escapades. 

2.169  Geisert,  Arthur.  Oink.  Illustrated  by  Arthur  Geisert.  Houghton 
Mifflin,  1991.  ISBN  0-395-55329-6.  32p.  All  ages. 

In  a  nearly  wordless  book,  Arthur  Geisert  achieves  maximum 
impact  with  pink-tinted  pigs,  black-and-white  backgrounds, 
and  large  and  small  "oinks."  Piglets  follow  their  mother's  oinks 
through  the  pasture  to  the  wallow  spot.  When  Mother  naps,  they 
wander  away,  tempted  by  an  apple  tree.  One  by  one,  they  make 
the  leap  from  haystack  to  tree,  with  the  letter  O's  of  their  oinks 
trailing  behind  them.  The  boisterous  oinking  wakes  the  alarmed 
sow,  who  scolds  with  the  loudest  oink  of  all,  putting  her  piggies 
back  in  a  row. 

2.170  Graham,  Alastair.  Full  Moon  Soup;  or,  The  Fall  of  the  Hotel 
Splendide.  Illustrated  by  Alastair  Graham.  Dial  Books  for 
Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-1045-3. 28p.  4-7. 

In  only  a  few  pages  of  illustrations,  and  without  a  single  word, 
Alastair  Graham  tells  a  myriad  of  detailed  and  hilarious  stories 
in  a  cartoon-like  feast.  In  a  matter  of  minutes,  the  lunatic  influ- 
ence of  the  rising  moon  reduces  a  splendid  hotel  to  rubble;  a 
series  of  progressive  cutaway  views  lets  us  watch  the  hotel's 
inhabitants — ordinary  humans,  extraterrestrials,  sixteenth-cen- 
tury ghosts,  and  a  rambunctious  gorilla — deal  with  an  untold 
number  of  zany  mishaps.  Guests  are  surprised,  bumped, 
haunted,  and  even  vacuumed. 

2*171  Hoban,  Tana.  Look  Up,  Look  Down.  Photographs  by  Tana  Ho- 
ban.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10578-5.  32p.  2-7. 

Just  because  you  have  looked  up  at  skyscrapers,  hot-air  bal- 
loons, and  tall  trees  or  looked  down  at  puddles  and  shadows 
doesn't  mean  that  you  have  seen  "ups  and  downs"  as  Tana 
Hoban  has.  In  beautiful  color  photographs,  readers  view  the 
upside  of  bleachers,  birds  perched  on  criss-cross  wires,  and  the 
rib  patterns  of  an  open  umbrella;  by  looking  down,  Hoban  offers 
perspectives  on  foraging  ants,  a  sunlit  feather,  and  the  inside  of 
a  spray  of  metal-spokes  on  a  trash  receptacle. 


Iu2 


70 


Books  for  Young  Children 


2.172  Hoban,  Tana.  Shadows  and  Reflections.  Photographs  by  Tana 
Hoban.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-07090-6.  32p.  2 
and  up. 

In  this  wordless  picture  book,  full-page  color  photographs  de- 
pict shadows  or  reflections  of  real  objects,  people,  and  animals. 
The  shadow  of  a  nearby  fence  is  reflected  on  the  side  of  a  yellow 
car.  The  upside-down  reflection  of  a  brown  bear  is  captured  in  a 
pool,  perhaps  at  the  zoo.  Some  photographs  are  easily  recogniz- 
able; others  must  be  studied  to  decipher  distortions  in  the  reflec- 
tions or  shadows.  Boston  Globe-Horn  Book  Nonfiction  Honor  Book, 
1990;  Outstanding  Science  Trade  Books  for  Children  in  1990;  ALA 
Notable  Children's  Books,  1991. 

2.173  Sara.  Across  Town,  Illustrated  by  Sara.  Orchard  Books,  1991. 
ISBN  0-531-08532-5.  32p.  3-7. 

In  this  wordless  book,  the  lone  figure  of  a  man  moves  down  a 
dark  and  ominous  city  street.  Only  when  the  man  encounters  a 
cat  that  is  clearly  his  friend  does  the  aura  of  menace  vanish.  The 
simple  but  dramatic  artwork  consists  of  torn,  cardboard-colored 
paper  shapes  against  a  black  background. 

2.174  Sis,  Peter.  An  Ocean  World,  Illustrated  by  Peter  Sis.  Greenwil- 
low Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09068-0.  24p.  3  and  up. 

This  near-wordless  book  follows  a  whale  raised  in  captivity  once 
she  is  released  into  the  ocean.  Through  watercolor  and  ink  draw- 
ings, Peter  Sis  interprets  the  whale's  search  for  companionship. 
Across  expanses  of  blue-green  sea,  she  encounters  whale-like 
shapes — a  fishing  boat,  a  blimp,  a  submarine,  even  a  littering 
garbage  scow — but  no  whale.  In  a  satisfying  conclusion,  the 
lonely  whale  takes  a  deep  dive  and  finds  a  mate. 

2.175  Tafuri,  Nancy.  Follow  Me!  Illustrated  by  Nancy  Tafuri.  Green- 
willow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08774-4.  32p  2  and  up. 

In  a  wordless  picture  book,  a  young  seal  peeks  from  beneath  the 
flipper  of  its  napping  mother  to  observe  the  movements  of  a 
bright  red  crab.  As  the  crab  moves  away,  the  baby  seal  follows, 
and  Mama  Seal  follows  her  offspring.  Up  and  over  rocks,  past 
gulls,  sea  urchins,  starfish,  prawns,  and  sea  lions,  the  seal  wan- 
ders. When  the  crab  finds  its  group  and  dances  off  into  the  sea, 
the  baby  seal  discovers  that  a  watchful  eye  was  never  far  away. 


9 

:RLC 


103 


Wordless  Books 


71 


2.176  Wouters,  Anne.  This  Book  Is  for  Us.  This  Book  Is  Too  Small. 
Illustrated  by  Anne  Wouters.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991. 
22p.  2-5. 

In  companion  wordless  books,  a  cheerful  polar  bear  and  a  tiny 
mole  experience  unusual  adventures.  In  This  Book  Is  for  Us,  Mole 
is  frightened  by  encroaching  "blueness"  on  the  pages.  Try  as  he 
might,  Bear  cannot  stave  it  off.  At  last,  frightened  Mole  and  his 
protector  spot  a  hole  in  the  blue  and  widen  it  to  provide  moon- 
light. In  This  Book  Is  Too  Small,  Bear  grows  too  big  for  the  bounda- 
ries of  the  pages.  Little  Mole  finds  a  solution  by  pulling  Bear  to 
a  double-page  spread. 


U'4 


Celebrations 


Sing,  Creatures,  sing, 

Angels  and  Men  and  Birds  and  everything, 

Christina  G.  Rossetti 


105 


3  Celebrations 


Birthdays 

3.1  Anholt,  Catherine.  The  Snow  Fairy  and  the  Spaceman.  Illus- 
trated by  Catherine  Anholt  Delacorte  Press,  1991.  ISBN  0-385- 
30422-6.  24p.  5-8.  Fiction. 

A  boisterous  little  girl  welcomes  a  lion,  a  king,  and  several  other 
costumed  guests  to  her  birthday  party.  But  her  rudeness  makes 
a  timid  and  unhappy  spaceman  wish  that  he  could  go  home.  It 
takes  a  game  of  hide-and-seek  and  a  surprise  rescue  to  prompt 
an  unlikely  friendship  between  the  shy  spaceman  and  his  snow- 
fairy  hostess.  Lively  watercolors  augment  the  text. 

3.2  Brown,  Marc.  Arthur's  Birthday.  Illustrated  by  Marc  Brown. 
Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-316-11073-6.  30p. 
4-7  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  this  thirteenth  Arthur  book,  Arthur  can't  wait  for  his  eighth 
birthday  When  he  hands  out  his  invitations  at  school  he  discov- 
ers that  his  classmate  Muffy  has  scheduled  her  birthday  party 
for  the  same  day.  The  class  divides  into  two  groups — the  boys 
decide  to  attend  Arthur's  party,  and  the  girls,  Muffy's  party.  But 
Arthur  comes  up  with  a  better  plan.  In  the  end,  everyone  arrives 
at  Arthur's  house  to  celebrate  his  birthday  and  to  give  Muffy  a 
surprise  party 

3.3  Jonas,  Ann.  The  13th  Clue.  Illustrated  by  Ann  Jonas.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09743-X.  32p.  4  and  up.  Fiction. 

An  open  diary  lies  on  the  attic  floor  with  an  unfinished  entry,  its 
unseen  writer  bemoaning  a  day  in  which  "nobody  mentioned 
anything  at  breakfast"  and  "now  no  one  is  even  home."  But 
attached  to  the  attic  light  is  a  note:  "Find  more  clues."  So  the 
diarist  does.  There  are  clues  spelled  out  by  an  extension  cord,  cut 
into  the  lawn,  and  marked  by  sticks.  Even  clues  in  pond  moss 
help  to  lead  further  toward  the  surprise  and  the  best  birthday 
ever. 

3.4  Mora,  Pat.  A  Birthday  Basket  forTia.  Illustrated  by  Cecily  Lang. 
Macmillan,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-767400-2.  32p.  3-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

It  is  Cecilia's  great-aunt's  birthday  Her  special  Tia  is  ninety 
years  old.  jNoventa  anos!  As  a  present  for  Tia,  Cecilia  fills  a 


ERJC 


Birthdays 


75 


basket  with  all  the  special  things  that  she  and  Tia  do  together. 
There's  their  favorite  book,  their  special  cookie-mixing  bowl, 
their  teacup,  the  red  ball  that  they  throw,  and  the  flowers  that 
Ha  loves.  Brightly  colored  collages  and  a  Mexican  American  girl 
with  a  childlike  knack  for  perfect  gift  giving  make  for  a  warm, 
family  book.  jFeliz  cumpleanos! 

3.5  Polacco,  Patricia.  Some  Birthday!  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Polacco. 
Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-671- 
72750-8.  32p.  4-7  (est.).  Fiction. 

Patricia's  birthday-to-remember  starts  out  looking  as  though 
Dad  has  forgotten  the  day  completely.  Instead,  that  night  he 
hatches  a  plan  to  photograph  the  monster  of  Clay  Pit  Bottoms — 
the  meanest,  ugliest  monster  of  all.  So  Patricia,  Dad,  her  brother, 
and  her  cousin  gather  supplies  and  set  out.  Suspense  builds,  and 
the  monster  they  meet  is  not  the  one  they  expect.  When  things 
settle  down  and  dry  off,  there's  a  real  birthday  The  drawings  are 
family-warm,  tousled,  and  rounded. 

3.6  Samuels,  Barbara.  Happy  Birthday,  Dolores.  Illustrated  by  Bar- 
bara Samuels.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08391-8.  32p. 

3-  6.  Fiction. 

It's  Dolores's  birthday,  and  the  whole  family,  including  Duncan 
the  cat,  is  awakened  by  her  drum  and  vocal  tribute  to  herself. 
Everyone  knows  someone  like  Dolores,  who  prefers  helmet  and 
boots  to  her  party  dress,  who  refuses  to  sit  next  to  Stevie,  and 
who  locks  the  cat  in  a  closet  because  "little  children  can  be  very 
rough  with  animals."  When  Duncan  escapes  and  splats  into  the 
cake,  it's  just  another  in  a  series  of  silly  situations  that  are  aug- 
mented by  the  understated  text  and  comical  illustrations. 

3.7  West,  Colin.  Go  Tell  It  to  the  Toucan.  Illustrated  by  Colin  West. 
Bantam/Little  Rooster  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-553-05889-4.  24p. 

4-  8  (est).  Fiction. 

When  Jumbo  the  Elephant  wants  a  jamboree  to  celebrate  his 
birthday,  he  looks  for  the  toucan  to  spread  the  word.  Not  finding 
the  colorful  bird,  Jumbo  tells  the  tiger,  who  in  turn  tells  the 
zebra.  So  begins  a  series  of  conversations  which  end  with  a 
monkey  finally  telling  "it  to  the  toucan."  Bright  watercolor  illus- 
trations complement  this  cumulative  tale  filled  with  humor  and 
surprise. 


107 


76 


Celebrations 


Christmas 

3.8  Ahlberg,  Janet,  and  Allan  Ahlberg.  The  Jolly  Christmas  Post- 
man. Illustrated  by  Janet  and  Allan  Ahlberg.  Little,  Brown,  1991. 
ISBN  0-316-02033-8. 34p.  3-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

Like  the  original  Jolly  Postman,  this  irresistible  book  describes  the 
postman's  rounds  and  includes  the  mail  he  delivers — inserted  in 
envelope-like  pages.  Its  rhymes  are  quiet  and  agreeable,  the 
illustrations  homey  and  seasonal.  But  its  greatest  charm  lies  in 
the  cards  and  letters  that  are  written  by  and  to  famous  nursery- 
rhyme  characters.  Children  will  be  attracted  by  the  story  and 
thrilled  to  examine  the  contents  of  each  envelope. 

3.9  Aliki.  Christmas  Tree  Memories.  Illustrated  by  Aliki.  Harper- 
Collins, 1991.  ISBN  0-06-020008-1.  24p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

"Tinng.  Tinng."  When  a  bell  sounds  for  Christmas  Eve,  two 
children  and  their  parents  nestle  by  their  candle-lit  tree,  drink 
hot  cocoa,  and  reminisce  about  Christmases  past.  Each  home- 
made ornament  sparks  a  family  recollection.  Aliki's  watercolor 
and  ink  illustrations  offer  full-page  memories,  rich  with  the 
warm  details  of  family  life.  This  intimate  story  will  prompt 
many  readers'  own  holiday  memories  of  relatives  and  friends. 
Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

3.10  Bassett,  Lisa.  Koala  Christmas.  Illustrated  by  Jeni  Bassett.  Cob- 
blehill  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-65065-2.  32p.  3-7  (est.).  Fiction. 

An  argument  between  Wally  Koala  and  his  sister  Carrie  causes 
a  pre-Christmas  disaster — the  destruction  of  the  family  Christ- 
mas tree  decorations.  But  through  cooperation,  determination, 
and  a  flock  of  brightly  colored  lorikeets,  not  only  is  the  day 
saved,  but  a  magically  decorated  house  becomes  the  envy  of  the 
koala  neighborhood.  Watercolor  illustrations  of  furred  and 
feathered  creatures  are  irresistible. 

3.11  Branley,  Franklyn  M.  The  Christmas  Sky,  rev.  ed.  Illustrated  by 
Stephen  Fieser.  Thomas  Y.  Crowell,  1990.  ISBN  0-690-04772-X. 
47p.  8-12.  Nonfiction. 

A  bright  star  appeared  in  the  sky  and  led  three  Wise  Men  to  a 
stable  in  Bethlehem.  Never  to  be  seen  again,this  star  has  puzzled 
astronomers  through  time.  In  this  award-winning  book  first 
published  in  1966,  noted  astronomer  and  science  writer 
Franklyn  Branley  presents  several  theories  explaining  the  mys- 
terious light.  Interwoven  with  Biblical  accounts,  a  revised,  fact- 


ERIC 


108 


Christmas 


77 


filled  text  offers  readers  a  thought-provoking  look  at  an  event 
that  has  "deep  meaning  to  people  around  the  world."  New 
full-page,  dark-shaded  illustrations  capture  the  mystery  and 
drama.  School  Library  Journal  Best  Books,  1966;  Outstanding  Science 
Trade  Books  for  Children  in  1990. 

3.12  Breathed,  Berkeley.  A  Wish  for  Wings  That  Work:  An  Opus 
Christmas  Story,  Illustrated  by  Berkeley  Breathed.  Little, 
Brown,  1991.  ISBN  0-316-10758-1. 300p.  4-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

Poor  Opus!  He  so  wants  to  fly,  but  he  can't  because  he  is  a 
penguin.  After  wistfully  watching  snow  ducks  soar,  Opus  writes 
Santa,  asking  for  "wings  that  will  go."  On  Christmas  Eve,  when 
Santa  and  his  sleigh  plunge  into  icy  waters,  it  is  Opus  who 
swims  to  the  rescue,  using  previously  unappreciated  strengths. 
Grateful,  the  snow  ducks  give  Opus  a  very  special  Christmas 
gift.  Berkeley  Breathed' s  background  as  a  cartoonist  is  apparent 
in  the  clean,  crisp  illustrations  which  extend  the  text  with  humor 
and  sensitivity. 

3.13  Brett,  Jan.  The  Wild  Christmas  Reindeer,  Illustrated  by  Jan 
Brett.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-22192-1.  29p.  4-8. 
Fiction. 

Santa  asked  Teeka,  a  young  neighbor,  to  get  his  reindeer  ready 
to  fly  for  Christmas  Eve.  As  the  days  until  Christmas  tick  by, 
marked  by  Jan  Brett's  glorious  side  panels  of  elves  at  work, 
Teeka  is  frustrated  by  her  efforts  to  manage  the  wild  reindeer. 
After  a  particularly  difficult  session  that  results  in  a  jumble  of 
antlers  and  a  new  understanding,  Teeka  finds  that  gentle  ways 
can  accomplish  what  force  and  fury  cannot. 

3.14  Bulla,  Clyde  Robert.  The  Christmas  Coat,  Illustrated  by  Sylvie 
Wickstrom.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394- 
99385-3. 36p.  6-9.  Fiction. 

Brothers  Hans  and  Otto  tire  their  widowed  mother  with  their 
persistent  quarreling  until,  in  despair,  she  draws  a  chalk  line  on 
the  cottage  floor  to  mark  exclusive  territory.  But  when  Hans 
discovers  a  wrapped  Christmas  present  on  his  side,  the  two 
brothers  fight  so  bitterly  that  the  beautiful  coat  inside  is  badly 
ripped.  The  common  plight  requires  cooperative  problem  solv- 
ing and  sacrifice  to  ensure  a  Christmas  for  the  coat's  intended 
recipient.  Smudged  line  drawings  filled  with  pastel  shades  re- 
flect the  understated  lessons  of  old-fashioned  Christmas  giving. 


ER?C 


78 


Celebrations 


3.15  Bunting,  Eve.  The  Day  before  Christmas.  Illustrated  by  Beth 
Peck.  Clarion  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-89919-866-X.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 
Fiction. 

"Seven  is  a  good  age  for  your  first  Nutcracker."  That's  what 
Grandpa  thinks,  so  as  a  special  gift  he  is  taking  Allie  to  the  city 
for  the  Christmas  Eve  performance.  Even  though  Dad  is  afraid 
that  Grandpa  may  be  saddened  by  memories  of  another  little 
girl  and  another  performance  long  ago,  Grandpa  says,  "A  loving 
memory  is  happy,  not  sad."  It  pleases  Allie  to  know  that  the 
mother  whom  she  can  barely  remember  made  the  same  trip  at 
seven  and  loved  the  snow  fairies  best,  too.  Oil  paintings  trans- 
late California  scenes  and  delicate  costumes. 

3.16  Cole,  Joanna.  A  Gift  from  Saint  Francis:  The  First  Crfeche.  Illus- 
trated by  Michele  Lemieux.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-688-06503-1.  28p.  6  and  up  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

Joanna  Cole  connects  gentle  St.  Francis  of  Assisi  with  the  first 
celebration  of  Christmas  almost  800  years  ago.  Near  Greccio, 
Italy,  as  a  gift  to  the  people,  St.  Francis  staged  a  re-creation  of  the 
scene  of  the  Christ  Child's  birth,  with  Mary,  Joseph,  shepherds, 
stable  beasts,  and  the  infant  himself.  Little  children  sang  a  lull- 
aby, perhaps  the  world's  first  Christmas  carol.  The  period  paint- 
ings are  in  Renaissance  style,  golden-toned,  and  illuminated 
with  medallions. 

3.17  Collington,  Peter.  On  Christmas  Eve.  Illustrated  by  Peter 
Collington.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-679- 
90830-7.  32p.  3-7.  Fiction. 

Peter  Collington's  On  Christinas  Eve,  dedicated  to  "chimneyless 
children  everywhere,"  will  satisfy  any  child's  curiosity  about 
how  Santa  enters  a  home  when  there  is  no  fireplace.  Story 
frames  on  each  page  depict  dainty  fairies  with  tiny  Christmas 
tree  candles  guiding  Santa  on  his  appointed  rounds. 
Collington's  use  of  earth  tones,  from  the  gray  snow  on  the  dap- 
pled endpapers  to  the  warm  gray-browns  of  the  neighborhoods 
that  Santa  visits,  creates  a  cozy  wintry  mood  that  permeates  this 
wordless  book. 

3.18  Cutting,  Michael.  The  Little  Crooked  Christmas  Tree.  Illus- 
trated by  Ron  Broda.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-590-45204-5.  24p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

A  combination  of  theme,  intricate  paper  sculptures,  and  simple 
story  line  will  likely  attract  young  readers  to  this  Christmas  tale. 


Hi) 


Christmas 


79 


A  little  tree's  sacrifice  to  shelter  a  family  of  doves  causes  its  trunk 
to  grow  crooked,  making  it  unsuitable  for  a  Christmas  tree. 
Although  the  plot  is  familiar,  the  design  and  texture  of  the  illus- 
trations— from  springtime  on  the  tree  farm  to  the  glittering  out- 
door Christmas  tree — may  inspire  responsive  paper  art  produc- 
tions. 

3.19  Delacre,  Lulu,  compiler.  Las  Navidades:  Popular  Christmas 
Songs  from  Latin  America.  Illustrated  by  Lulu  Delacre.  Scholas- 
tic Hardcover  Books/Lucas  Evans  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-590- 
43548-5.  32p.  5-11.  Nonfiction. 

In  this  collection  of  seasonal  songs,  presented  in  both  Spanish 
and  English,  the  Christmas  customs  and  celebrations  of  Latin 
America,  from  Christmas  Eve  through  Epiphany,  are  described 
and  explained.  Lulu  Delacre's  paintings  in  the  colors  of  her 
native  Puerto  Rico  illustrate  a  variety  of  holiday  activities.  De- 
tailed information  about  each  custom,  musical  scores  at  the  end 
of  the  book,  and  even  the  recipe  for  "Rosea  de  Reyes"  may  help 
other  children  participate  in  the  customs  of  Latin  America. 

3.20  dePaola,  Tomie.  Jingle  the  Christmas  Clown.  Illustrated  by  To- 
mie  dePaola.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22338-X. 
32p.  4-«.  Fiction. 

In  a  sentimental  Christmas  tale  set  in  Italy,  Jingle,  the  youngest 
clown  of  the  circus  and  keeper  of  the  baby  animals,  is  left  behind 
by  the  other  performers  in  a  village  where  the  people  are  too 
poor  for  circuses.  Jingle  appreciates  the  wisdom  and  perspec- 
tives of  the  villagers,  especially  Donna  Chiara.  His  Christmas 
gift  for  the  village  is  a  baby  animal  circus  performed  on  a  snowy 
village  street  under  diamond  stars.  In  this  large-scale  picture 
book,  Tomie  dePaola  has  painted  background  sets  edge  to  edge. 

3.21  Fleetwood,  Jenni.  While  Shepherds  Watched.  Illustrated  by  Pe- 
ter Melnyczuk.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-688-11599-3. 32p.  5  and  up.  Fiction. 

Matthias  is  eager  to  celebrate  his  eighth  birthday  by  spending 
the  night  with  the  other  shepherds.  While  watching  the  birth  of 
a  lamb,  he  barely  notices  the  brilliant  light  of  an  angel  who  has 
come  to  herald  the  birth  of  Jesus.  With  the  shepherds  and  new- 
born lamb,  he  follows  the  star  to  the  Bethlehem  stable  to  see  the 
baby.  Paintings,  scratched  for  texture  and  contrast,  glowingly 
show  the  wonder  and  serenity  of  the  dark  night. 


in 


80 


Zelebrations 


3.22  Goode,  Diane,  compiler.  Diane  Goode's  American  Christmas. 
Illustrated  by  Diane  Goode.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-525-44620-6.  80p.  All  ages.  Fiction. 

From  Laura  Ingalls  Wilder 's  "Christmas  on  the  Banks  of  Plum 
Creek"  to  Carson  McCullers's  "Christmas  Eve  Rhyme,"  this  col- 
lection of  poems,  songs,  traditional  tales,  and  short  stories  cap- 
tures the  spirit  of  Christmas.  Drawing  upon  the  richness  in 
American  culture,  Diane  Goode  has  selected  entries  from  vari- 
ous parts  of  the  country,  from  different  ethnic  groups,  and  from 
the  works  of  some  of  America's  finest  authors.  Framed  with 
decorative  designs,  the  pages  of  this  collection  hold  memorable 
and  traditional  selections  lovingly  illustrated  with  soft-colored 
paintings. 

3.23  Guback,  Georgia.  The  Carolers.  Illustrated  by  Georgia  Guback. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09773-1.  34p.  All  ages. 
Fiction. 

Five  colorful  carolers  travel  from  house  to  house  singing  eleven 
songs  of  the  Christmas  season.  As  the  villagers  hear  them,  they 
put  aside  their  holiday  preparations  and  join  the  singing,  caus- 
ing the  happy  group  to  grow  with  every  turn  of  the  page.  Lower 
borders  of  words  and  music  enable  readers  to  join  the  celebra- 
tion. Cut-paper  collage  in  vivid  colors  adds  to  the  joy  of  the 
season. 

3.24  Kneen,  Maggie,  compiler.  The  Twelve  Days  of  Christmas:  A 
Revolving  Picture  Book.  Illustrated  by  Maggie  Kneen.  Dutton 
Children's  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-525-44654-0. 12p.  4  and  up.  Non- 
fiction. 

The  verses  of  this  centuries-old  carol  are  illustrated  in  muted 
medieval  tones  within  circular  frames.  Pull  a  ribboned  tab,  and 
six  picture  segments  revolve  to  illustrate  the  next  verse.  For 
example,  seven  silky  swans  swim  in  a  clear  stream  in  sight  of  a 
distant  castle  until  the  picture  revolves  to  reveal  eight  serene 
milkmaids  gathered  in  a  woven  enclosure  where  sheep,  chick- 
ens, and  rabbits  frolic.  The  verses  themselves  are  bounded  by 
holly,  pears,  bells,  and  packages. 

3.25  Moore,  Clement  Clarke.  The  Night  before  Christmas;  or,  A 
Visit  of  St.  Nicholas:  An  Antique  Reproduction.  Philomel 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21614-6.  24p.  4-S.  Fiction. 

This  reproduction  of  an  antique  picture  book  dating  to  about 
1870  will  appeal  to  those  whose  Christmas  memories  echo  with 


112 


Christmas 


81 


the  sounds  of  Clement  Moore's  traditional  poem:  "Merry  Christ- 
mas to  all  and  to  all  a  good  night/'  The  book  is  composed  of 
ornate  full-page  illustrations  of  traditional  Christmas  scenes  in- 
terspersed with  the  text  of  the  poem.  The  illustrations,  created 
from  lithographs  in  soft  Victorian  colors,  have  been  supple- 
mented by  hand-painted  borders  and  introductory  material  con- 
sistent with  the  spirit  of  the  original. 

3.26  Neville,  Mary.  The  Christmas  Tree  Ride.  Illustrated  by  Megan 
Lloyd.  Holiday  House,  1992.  ISBN  0-8234-0956-2. 32p.  4-8  (est.). 
Fiction. 

"This  Christmas/'  Dad  says,  "will  you  help  me  cut  the  tree?" 
And  two  eager  children  bundle  into  the  station  wagon  for  a  ride 
far  into  the  country  to  Mr.  Pennyman's  Christmas  Tree  Farm. 
Over  icy  streams,  past  houses  with  silver  ribbons  of  smoke,  and 
up  a  steep,  ice-covered  hill  is  the  tree  of  choice.  Mr.  Pennyman 
chops  it  with  his  axe.  Then  it's  a  speedy  downhill  slide,  followed 
by  wonderful  paper-chain  decorations,  and  Mr.  Pennyman  him- 
self invited  to  Christmas  dinner. 

3.27  Niland,  Kilmeny.  A  Bellbird  in  a  Flame  Tree:  The  Twelve  Days 
of  Christmas.  Illustrated  by  Kilmeny  Niland.  Tambourine 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10798-2. 32p.  3  and  up.  Fiction. 

If  "The  Twelve  Days  of  Christmas"  had  originated  in  Australia, 
one's  true  love  may  have  expected  to  receive  such  delights  as 
lorikeets,  wallabies,  and  a  bellbird  in  a  flame  tree.  In  celebration, 
there  are  quokkas  cooking,  numbats  knitting,  dingoes  dancing, 
and  koalas  clowning.  The  panorama  of  Australian  fauna  seems 
a  very  merry  setting  for  the  holidays. 

3.28  Nixon,  Joan  Lowery.  Thafs  the  Spirit,  Claude.  Illustrated  by 
Tracey  Campbell  Pearson.  Viking  Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670- 
83434-3.  32p.  6-10  (est.).  Fiction. 

Claude  and  Shirley's  adopted  kids,  Bessie  and  Tom,  anticipate 
the  arrival  of  Sandy  Claus,  although  he's  never  before  been  to 
frontier  Texas.  Bessie  knits  a  Texas-sized  stocking,  writes  a  letter, 
and  waits.  So  that  the  children  won't  be  disappointed  on  Christ- 
mas Eve,  roly-poly  Claude  dons  red  flannel  underwear,  flours 
his  beard,  and  smacks  right  into  the  real  Sandy  (also  wearing 
cowboy  boots)  on  the  roof.  The  dialect  isn't  quite  Texan,  but 
the  spirit  is.  Pen  and  watercolor  are  used  for  lighthearted 
results. 


ERIC 


113 


82 


Celebrations 


3.29  Nordqvist,  Sven.  Merry  Christmas,  Festus  and  Mercury*  Illus- 
trated by  Sven  Nordqvist.  Carolrhoda  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0- 
87614-383-4.  22p.  4-6  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  the  past,  Farmer  Festus  and  his  zany  cat,  Mercury,  have  spent 
the  day  before  Christmas  Eve  trimming  the  tree,  shopping  for 
food,  and  baking  gingerbread.  This  year  Festus  injures  his  foot, 
so  they  can't  proceed  with  their  holiday  plans.  Their  Christmas 
looks  bleak  until  the  neighbors  help  out,  and  Festus  and  Mer- 
cury end  up  having  the  merriest  of  times.  Full-color  cartoon-like 
illustrations,  bursting  with  additional  story  detail  and  humor, 
enliven  each  page. 

3.30  Pilkington,  Brian.  Grandpa  Claus.  Illustrated  by  Brian  Pilk- 
ington.  Carolrhoda  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-87614-436-9.  28p.  4-8. 
Fiction. 

Grandpa  Harry  loves  to  dress  up  as  Santa  Claus;  in  fact,  he  may 
be  the  best  Santa  impersonator  in  the  world.  Harry's  beard — 
long,  white,  and  real — ensures  his  job  for  the  weeks  before 
Christmas  each  year.  But  the  worst  times  for  Harry  are  the  days 
after  Christmas,  when  there  is  nothing  to  do  but  groom  his  beard 
and  look  for  work.  How  Harry  mismanages  a  series  of  part-time 
jobs  between  Christmasses  is  the  heart  of  the  book.  Lively,  car- 
toon-like drawings  add  to  the  silliness. 

3.31  Ray,  Jane,  compiler.  The  Story  of  Christmas/La  Historia  de 
Navidad-  Illustrated  by  Jane  Ray  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991. 
ISBN  0-52544768-7  (English);  0-525-44830-6  (Spanish).  32p.  6 
and  up.  Nonfiction. 

The  story  of  Christmas— beginning  with  the  angel  Gabriel's  tid- 
ings and  ending  with  the  safe  return  of  Jesus,  Mary,  and  Joseph 
to  Nazareth — is  told  in  the  words  of  the  Gospels  of  Matthew  and 
Luke  in  the  Authorized  King  James  Version  of  the  Bible.  It  is  also 
told  through  Jane  Ray's  bordered  folk-art  paintings,  highlighted 
with  gold.  Companion  editions  are  available  in  English  and 
Spanish. 

3.32  Rogers,  Jacqueline.  The  Christmas  Pageant  Illustrated  by  Jac- 
queline Rogers.  Grosset  and  Dunlap,  1989.  ISBN  0-448-40151-7. 
32p.  3-7.  Fiction. 

As  the  children  in  a  snowy  New  England  village  prepare  for  the 
annual  Christmas  pageant  in  a  barn  by  painting  the  flats,  getting 
fitted  for  costumes,  and  rehearsing  their  roles,  the  Biblical  story 
of  Christmas  serves  as  text.  "Baby  Jesus"  squirms  in  a  snowsuit, 


114 


Christmas 


83 


awaiting  his  entrance.  Traditional  Christmas  hymns  with  piano 
arrangements  are  set  into  the  illustrations.  The  dress  rehearsal 
melts  into  the  performance,  as  the  "wise  men"  hurry  through 
snow  drifts,  carrying  their  cutout  camel.  At  the  pageant's  end, 
"Baby  Jesus,"  fast  asleep,  is  bundled  home. 

333  San  Souci,  Robert  D.  The  Christmas  Ark.  Illustrated  by  Daniel 
San  Souci.  Doubleday,  1991.  ISBN  0-385-24837-7.  30p.  6^10.  Fic- 
tion. 

Two  girls,  bound  for  San  Francisco  with  their  mother,  are  frus- 
trated when  their  clipper  ship  is  becalmed  near  the  city  on 
Christmas  Eve.  Missing  their  father  and  fearful  that  St.  Nicholas 
will  be  unable  to  find  them,  they're  reassured  when  a  flying 
ark — piloted  by  the  old  saint  himself — carries  them  around  the 
world  in  search  of  the  perfect  place  to  spend  Christmas.  Full- 
page  watercolors  resplendent  with  the  blues  of  sky  and  sea 
support  each  page  of  text,  adding  a  sense  of  dreamy  satisfaction 
to  this  warm  story  of  family  love. 

3.34  Sharmat,  Marjorie  Weinman.  I'm  Santa  Claus  and  I'm  Famous. 
Illustrated  by  Marylin  Hafner.  Holiday  House,  1990.  ISBN  0- 
8234-0826-4.  30p.  4-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

It's  Career  Day  at  school,  and  Santa  Claus  is  invited.  Santa 
indicates  that  he  will  retire  some  day  and  will  need  a  replace- 
ment. Now  everyone  wants  to  be  Santa  when  they  grow  up! 
Santa  solves  the  problem  by  asking  those  interested  in  the  posi- 
tion to  "try  out"  by  showing  love  and  by  giving  special  presents 
like  caring,  listening,  or  laughing.  Told  in  cartoon-like  blocks, 
this  story  provides  a  starting  point  for  discussion  of  intangible 
gifts. 

3.35  Slate,  Joseph.  Who  Is  Coming  to  Our  House?  Illustrated  by 
Ashley  Wolff.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons/Sandcastle  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-399-21790-8.  32p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

Stable  animals  prepare  for  the  Christ  child,  all  doing  their  part: 
'"We  must  clean,'  says  Lamb.  'Dust  the  beams,'  says  Ram." 
Woodcut-like  animals  emerge  from  heavily  bordered  stable 
scenes.  Through  rhyming  text  distributed  one  line  per  page, 
young  children  will  soon  be  reading  along.  The  repeated  chorus 
is  a  question-answer  from  a  soft-eyed  cow  and  a  tiny  mouse: 
'"Who  is  coming  to  our  house?'  'Someone,  someone,'  says 
Mouse."  In  the  well-known  final  scene,  the  refrain  varies:  "Wel- 
come, welcome  to  our  house." 


1 15 


84 


Celebrations 


3.36  Solotareff,  Gr£goire.  Noel's  Christinas  Secret.  Illustrations  by 
Gn§goire  Solotareff.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1989.  ISBN  0-374- 
35544-4.  30p.  6-8  (est).  Fiction. 

When  a  boy  named  Noel  discovers  a  huge  sack  in  the  forest  with 
written  instructions,  he  is  drawn  into  the  world  of  the  dwarf 
magician  toy  makers,  Apple,  Piggy,  and  Thumb.  If  Noel  follows 
their  instructions  and  keeps  the  secret  that  they  whisper,  who 
knows  what  he  may  become?  Bright  primary  colors  and  bold 
lines  enhance  the  simple  tale  of  the  origin  of  Santa  Claus. 

3.37  Stevenson,  James.  The  Worst  Person's  Christmas.  Illustrated  by 
James  Stevenson.  Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10211-5. 
32p.  4-10  (est.).  Fiction. 

The  "worst  person  in  the  world"  doesn't  like  anything — espe- 
cially Christmas.  Thinking  "the  worst"  just  needs  to  be  shown 
kindness,  the  neighborhood  children  leave  a  fruitcake  on  his 
front  step.  But  on  his  way  to  deposit  the  fruitcake  in  the  garbage 
can,  "the  worst"  trips,  flops  onto  a  sled,  races  through  town  out 
of  control,  and  finally  arrives  at  a  neighborhood  holiday  party,  a 
fruitcake  gift  in  hand.  In  the  face  of  genuine  welcome,  "the 
worst"  has  a  change  of  heart  (however  momentary)  and  takes  on 
a  more  "Christmas-like"  disposition. 

3.38  Taylor,  Theodore.  Maria:  A  Christmas  Story.  Harcourt  Brace 
Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-217763-9.  84p.  8-12.  Fiction. 

Without  thinking,  eleven-year-old  Maria,  tired  of  hearing  her 
two  gringo  friends  brag  about  their  families'  elaborate  floats  for 
the  San  Lazaro,  California,  Christmas  parade,  blurts  out  that  her 
family  is  entering  this  year.  With  no  money  and  no  help,  save  a 
picture  Maria  found  in  an  old  Spanish  Bible,  Father  builds  a 
simple  nativity  scene.  After  a  stubborn  ox  sits  down  on  the  job, 
twenty  Mexican  American  men  rally  to  pull  their  people's  first 
float.  The  humble  scene  silences  the  crowd  and  starts  a  tradition. 

3.39  Tyler,  Linda  Wagner.  The  After-Christmas  Tree.  Illustrated  by 
Susan  Davis.  Viking  Penguin,  1990.  ISBN  0-670-83045-3.  32p. 
4-7.  Fiction. 

Linda  Wagner  Tyler  and  Susan  Davis  help  children  transform 
their  sadness  about  the  end  of  the  holidays  into  the  joy  of  creat- 
ing the  "after-Christmas  tree."  The  tree,  which  the  narrator  and 
her  family  redecorate  as  part  of  their  after-Christmas  party,  is 
symbolic  of  life  continuing  beyond  the  holiday  season.  Davis's 
bright  watercolors,  reminiscent  of  folk  art,  capture  the  winter 


116 


A.  The  13th  Clue  by  Ann  Jonas  (see  3.3).  B.  A  Birthday  Basket  for  Tfa  by  Pat  Mora; 
illustrated  by  Cecily  Lang  (see  3.4).  C.  The  Jolly  Christmas  Postman  by  Janet  and 
Allan  Ahlberg  (see  3.8). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE  117 


B. 


Big  Pumpkin 


c. 


A.  Max's  Chocolate  Chicken  by  Rosemary  Wells  (see  3.48).  B.  How  Many  Days  to 
America?  A  Thanksgiving  Story  by  Eve  Bunting;  illustrated  by  Beth  Peck  (see  3.75). 
C.  Big  Pumpkin  by  Erica  Silverman;  illustrated  by  S.  D.  Schindler  (see  3.57). 


•       BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 

ERIC 


Christmas  85 


wonderland  of  the  outdoors.  After  reading  the  book,  many  chil- 
dren will  want  to  set  up  their  own  "after-Christmas  tree/'  The 
book  would  lend  itself  well  to  a  January  nature  lesson  in  a 
primary  classroom. 

3.40  Wildsmith,  Brian.  A  Christmas  Story.  Illustrated  by  Brian 
Wildsmith.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-679- 
90074-8.  24p.  5-10.  Fiction. 

Brian  Wildsmith  tells  the  Christmas  story  from  the  point  of  view 
of  a  little  donkey  who  sets  out  after  his  mother  on  the  road  to 
Bethlehem.  Along  the  way,  the  little  donkey  and  his  child  com- 
panion ask  travelers  to  point  the  way,  until  they  see  the  glorious 
star.  Luminous  landscapes  in  golds,  silvers,  and  royal  blues 
establish  the  union  of  the  ordinary  and  the  miraculous. 

3.41  Wilhelm,  Hans.  Schnitzel's  First  Christmas.  Illustrated  by  Hans 
Wilhelm.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989. 
ISBN  0-671-67977-5.  26p.  4-7  (est.).  Fiction. 

Schnitzel  is  a  puppy  who  has  everything.  When  Gruff  the  cat 
explains  that  Santa  is  coming,  Schnitzel  learns  that  he  must 
make  a  Christmas  wish.  But  what  is  a  pampered  puppy  to  wish 
for?  Even  as  Schnitzel  meets  Santa,  he  still  has  no  wish.  But  wise 
Santa  knows  that  a  friend  is  the  best  Christmas  present  any 
puppy  could  wish  for.  Wintery  watercolors  bring  on  smiles. 

3.42  Worth,  Valerie.  At  Christmas  Time.  Illustrated  by  Antonio  Fras- 
coni.  HarperCollins/Michael  di  Capua  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-06- 
205020-6. 32p.  All  ages  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

All  the  warmth,  sights,  sounds,  and  tastes  of  Christmas  are 
entrapped  in  this  collection  of  poems  for  an  audience  not  bound 
by  age.  In  "Wrappings,"  the  poet  declares:  "The  plainest  /  Un- 
derwear the  /  Homeliest  socks,  /  Parceled  in  /  golden  foil  and 
/  Silver  string,  /  Or  even  in  flimsy  /  Red-and-green  poinsettias, 
/  Become  the  /  Sumptuous  offerings  /  Of  a  king/'  Light  strings 
are  likened  to  "a  luminous  vine,  /  Lush  with  the  fruits  /  Of 
paradise."  Fat  woodcuts  enhanced  with  paint,  cut-paper  collage, 
and  reliefs  give  folk  flavor. 

3.43  Yolen,  Jane.  Hark!  A  Christmas  Sampler.  Illustrated  by  Tomie 
dePaola.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21853-X.  128p. 
All  ages  (est.).  Fiction/Nonfiction. 

Jane  Yolen  and  Tomi  dePaola  pair  up  to  offer  an  oversized  edi- 
tion of  stories,  history,  carols,  poems,  and  legends  of  Christmas, 


119 


86 


Celebrations 


set  apart  with  the  reverence  and  whimsy  of  dePaola's  distinctive 
illustrations  and  designs.  Beautiful  original  carols  include  the 
"Stable  Hymn"  and  "The  North  Pole  Express/'  both  with  words 
by  Yolen  and  musical  arrangement  by  her  son,  Adam  Stemple. 
Also  fun  and  sure  to  be  performed  is  "The  Foolish  Shepherd:  A 
Play  in  Verse/' 

Easter 

3.44  Easter:  The  King  James  Version*  Illustrated  by  Jan  Pienkowski. 
Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-82455-5.  32p. 
All  ages.  Nonfiction. 

In  dramatic  silhouettes  against  dappled  backgrounds,  the  story 
of  Easter  unfolds  from  selected  scripture  verses  taken  from  the 
King  James  Bible.  Illuminated  manuscript,  gilded  borders,  and 
gold-outlined  vines  reach  symbolically  across  the  spreads. 
Grape,  poppy,  ivy,  and  holly  vines  are  valiantly  spiked  with 
thorns. 

3.45  Kunhardt,  Edith.  Danny  and  the  Easter  Egg.  Illustrated  by  Edith 
Kunhardt.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08036-7.  21p. 
3-6.  Fiction. 

In  her  fourth  Danny  book,  Edith  Kunhardt  offers  childlike  draw- 
ings of  the  alligator  preparing  for  Easter  with  his  animal  friends. 
Danny  dyes  one  special  egg  with  a  D  for  Danny.  The  Easter 
morning  egg  hunt  yields  many  treats,  including  Danny's  special 
egg.  Later  that  day,  when  the  family  visits  Granny,  Danny  gives 
her  his  egg  as  an  Easter  present. 

3.46  Polacco,  Patricia.  Rechenka's  Eggs.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Po- 
lacco.  Philomel  Books,  1988.  ISBN  0-399-21501-8.  30p.  4-9  (est.). 
Fiction. 

For  many  years  Old  Babushka  has  painted  eggs  in  her  beautiful 
Ukrainian  style  to  take  to  the  Easter  Festival  to  be  judged.  One 
year,  just  before  the  festival,  she  discovers  an  injured  goose.  She 
names  the  goose  Rechenka  and  decides  to  nurse  her  back  to 
health.  When  Rechenka  accidentally  breaks  all  of  Babushka's 
wonderfully  painted  eggs,  what  happens  next  is  a  miracle:  Re- 
chenka begins  to  lay  stunningly  colored  eggs,  one  a  morning,  to 
replace  the  broken  ones.  The  bright,  detailed  paintings  authen- 
tically reproduce  the  Ukrainian  style  of  egg  painting  and  the 
spires  of  famed  Russian  cities.  IRA  Children's  Book  Award  (Illus- 
tration), 1989. 


120 


Halloween 


87 


3.47  Tarlow,  Nora.  An  Easter  Alphabet:  From  a  Poem  by  Nora  Tar- 
low.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-22194-8.  32p.  3-7 
(est.).  Fiction. 

In  an  Easter-time  rhyme,  each  letter  of  the  alphabet  is  matched 
with  a  springtime  symbol  or  action  and  is  accompanied  by  a 
sentimental  painting  dating  from  the  late  nineteenth  through  the 
early  twentieth  centuries.  Twenty-six  artists  are  represented, 
their  works  selected  predominately  from  German,  English,  and 
American  postcards.  Although  many  artists  are  anonymous, 
some  classic  Kate  Greenaway  is  included. 

3.48  Wells,  Rosemary.  Max's  Chocolate  Chicken.  Illustrated  by  Rose- 
mary Wells.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0586-7.  32p.  3-7.  Fiction. 

On  Easter  morning  Max  is  delighted  to  find  a  chocolate  chicken 
in  the  birdbath,  but  his  bossy  sister  Ruby  insists  that  the  one  who 
finds  the  most  Easter  eggs  is  the  one  who  gets  the  chicken.  While 
Ruby  finds  a  basketful  of  eggs,  Max  finds  mud,  acorns,  a  spoon, 
and  ants,  but  no  eggs.  Yet  despite  his  inability  to  stick  to  the  task, 
Max  scuttles  away  with  the  prize  chicken,  leaving  Ruby  ranting, 
bargaining,  and  bluffing.  Luckily,  the  Easter  Bunny  drops  a 
chocolate  duck  into  the  birdbath,  leaving  Ruby  puzzled  and  the 
ending  open  for  speculation. 

Halloween 

3.49  Bauer,  Caroline  Feller,  editor.  Halloween:  Stories  and  Poems. 
Illustrated  by  Peter  Sis.  J.  B.  Lippincott,  1989.  ISBN  0-397-32301- 
8.  82p.  6-12  (est.).  Fiction /Nonfiction. 

Creepy  short  stories  and  poems,  both  sprightly  and  gloomy, 
comprise  this  Halloween  collection  by  Caroline  Fetter  Bauer. 
Along  with  works  by  Lilian  Moore,  Paul  Galdone,  Eleanor  Far- 
jeon,  X.  J.  Kennedy,  Jack  Prelutsky,  and  Judith  Viorst  appear 
holiday  recipes,  a  lengthy  bibliography  of  Halloween  books, 
and  Peter  Sis's  understated  black-and-white  illustrations. 

3.50  Bunting,  Eve.  In  the  Haunted  House.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Med- 
daugh.  Clarion  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-395-51589-0.  28p.  5-8  (est.). 
Fiction. 

Large  and  small  sneakers  enter  a  house  ''where  :v.e  scary  things 
hide."  Creatures  of  all  sorts — witches,  mummies,  and  skele- 
tons— menace  the  unseen  visitors.  Finally,  big  sneakers  ahead  of 


ERLC 


L  21 


88 


Celebrations 


small,  the  visitors  race  outside,  revealing  a  small  daughter,  ready 
to  take  her  panting  father  through  the  Halloween  House  again. 
Accompanying  Eve  Bunting's  rhyming  text  are  Susan  Med- 
daugh's  scratchy  illustrations,  which  are  not-so-scary  when  ex- 
amined closely:  a  red  paint  can  sits  behind  a  "blood-stained" 
coffin,  the  skeleton  is  on  a  stick,  and  the  horned  creature  has  a 
zipper. 

3.51  Cassedy,  Sylvia.  The  Best  Cat  Suit  of  AIL  Illustrated  by  Rose- 
krans  Hoffman.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0- 
8037-0J517-4. 48p.  5-7  (est.).  Fiction. 

Matthew  is  having  a  very  bad  Halloween  day.  With  a  runny  nose 
and  in  a  heap  of  self-pity,  he  must  wear  his  cat  suit  indoors  and 
just  watch  the  parade  of  trick-or-treaters.  Back  where  I  used  to 
live,  Matthew  grumps,  Halloween  wouldn't  be  cold,  and  kids 
wouldn't  have  to  wear  snowsuits  under  their  costumes.  Even 
the  cat  suits  that  other  kids  wear  are  judged  by  their  failures — 
until  the  very  best  cat  suit  of  all  arrives.  Rosekrans  Hoffman's 
witty  pencil  and  ink  illustrations  for  this  Easy-to-Read  Book 
can't  be  contained  by  their  frames. 

3*52  Christelow,  Eileen.  Jerome  and  the  Witchcraft  Kids.  Illustrated 
by  Eileen  Christelow.  Clarion  Books,  1988.  ISBN  0-89919-742-6. 
29p.  4rS  (est).  Fiction. 

Jerome  Alligator  thinks  that  he  is  a  terrific  baby-sitter,  much 
better  than  his  sister  Winifred.  "No  job  is  too  difficult,"  his 
posters  proclaim.  "Don't  let  it  go  to  your  head,"  warns  Wini- 
fred's friend,  Lulu.  Then  Jerome  gets  a  baby-sitting  request  from 
a  Mrs.  Witchcraft  on  Halloween  night.  Not  only  do  the  Witch- 
crafts live  in  a  haunted  house,  but  their  refrigerator  is  full  of 
eyeball  sandwiches,  vampire  blood,  and  worms.  When  Jerome 
finally  discovers  that  Winifred  and  Lulu  have  played  a  joke  on 
him,  he  retaliates.  Zany  crayon  illustrations  add  to  the  silliness. 

3*53  Cohen,  Miriam.  The  Real-Skin  Rubber  Monster  Mask.  Illus- 
trated by  Lillian  Hoban.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688- 
09123-7.  28p.  6-10  (est.).  Fiction. 

From  the  author/ illustrator  team  that  produced  When  Will  I 
Read?  and  First  Grade  Takes  a  Test  comes  another  warm  and 
sensitive  portrayal  of  childhood  concerns.  Jim's  carefully  chosen 
rubber  monster  mask  is  so  frightening  that  on  Halloween  night 
it  scares  even  him.  But  second-grade  friends  rally  to  ensure  that 
Jim  gets  to  share  half  of  Willy's  spaghetti  and  meatball  costume. 


122 


Halloween 


89 


Fear  of  scary  things  is  the  natural  book  talk  that  will  emerge 
from  young  readers  and  listeners. 

3.54  Howe,  James.  Harold  and  Chester  in  Scared  Silly:  A  Hallow- 
een Treat.  Illustrated  by  Leslie  Morrill.  Morrow  Junior  Books, 
1989.  ISBN  0-688-07667-X.  42p.  4-9  (est.).  Fiction. 

The  house  is  dark  and  the  Monroe  family  absent  when  Harold, 
the  family's  shaggy  dog,  begins  his  story.  Harold  and  his  friends, 
Howie,  a  timid  puppy,  Chester,  a  bossy  cat,  and  Bunnicula,  an 
unusual  rabbit,  are  "scared  silly"  when  a  witch  enters  their 
house  and  concocts  a  witch's  brew.  Even  when  the  mystery  is 
resolved,  Harold  and  his  friends  remain  suspicious.  Boys  and 
girls  will  enjoy  speculating  about  whether  or  not  the  witch  is 
really  Grandma  in  a  costume. 

3.55  Limburg,  Peter  R.  Weird!  The  Complete  Book  of  Halloween 
Words.  Illustrated  by  Betsy  Lewin.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN 
0-02-759050-X.  122p.  8  and  up  (est).  Nonfiction. 

Here's  a  one-stop,  fun-filled  reference  book  for  Halloween,  a 
compendium  that  traces  the  history  of  the  symbols  and  the 
words  most  associated  with  the  most  shivery  of  holidays.  Read- 
ers will  learn,  for  example,  that  it  was  Shakespeare  in  Macbeth 
who  first  used  the  word  weird  and  that  souls  of  the  dead  took  the 
form  of  bats.  But  unlike  a  strict  etymological  source,  the  text  is 
stuffed  with  intriguing  facts  and  humorous  asides.  Sections  ti- 
tled "Do  You  Know"  offer  child-appealing  background  related 
to  Halloween  traditions. 

3.56  Martin,  Bill,  Jr.,  and  John  Archambault.  The  Magic  Pumpkin. 
Illustrated  by  Robert  J.  Lee.  Henry  Holt,  1989.  ISBN  0-8050-1134- 
X.  28p.  4-7  (est).  Fiction. 

Halloween  magic  and  mishap  occur  when  the  narrator  of  this 
ballad-like  story,  told  in  rhyming  prose,  chooses  the  wrong 
pumpkin  from  the  pumpkin  patch  to  guard  his  door  on  Hallow- 
een. The  seemingly  innocent  pumpkin  is  really  the  leader  of  a 
gang  of  mischief-makers.  However,  all  returns  to  normal  when 
the  jack-o'-lantern's  candle  is  extinguished.  Robert  Lee's  curly 
line  drawings  and  wispy  watercolor  washes  add  an  eerie  touch 
to  the  tale. 

3.57  Silverman.  Erica.  Big  Pumpkin.  Illustrated  by  S.  D.  Schindler. 
Macmillan,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-782683-X.  32p.  4-8  (est.).  Fiction. 


ERiC 


123 


90  Celebrations 


In  this  variant  of  "The  Great  Big  Enormous  Turnip/7  a  green- 
faced  witch  raises  a  pumpkin  that  is  too  large  to  harvest:  "It's  big 
and  it's  mine,  but  it's  stuck  on  the  vine/'  So,  a  series  of  her 
monstrous  friends — ghost,  vampire,  and  mummy — lends  a 
hand.  Even  so,  it  takes  the  wit  of  a  tiny  bat  to  propose  a  coopera- 
tive plan  that  yields  Halloween  pumpkin  pie  for  all.  Full-page, 
spirited  illustrations  for  this  cumulative  tale  are  done  in  gouache 
on  colored  papers. 

3.58  Van  Leeuwen,  Jean.  Oliver  and  Amanda's  Halloween*  Illus- 
trated by  Ann  Schweninger.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992. 
ISBN  0-8037-1238-3.  48p.  4-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  an  Easy-to-Read  Book  for  beginning  chapter-book  readers, 
Oliver  and  Amanda  Pig's  sibling  relationship  is  realistic,  but  cast 
with  just  the  right  degree  of  tolerance  to  make  for  a  warm, 
family  book.  Oliver  prefers  scary  costumes  to  Amanda's  benign 
ones;  Dad  knows  how  to  achieve  compromise  in  carving  a  jack- 
o'-lantern  to  please  both;  Mom  accepts  that  little  pigs  climb  on 
things  to  reach  donuts;  and  Amanda  spots  monsters  on  Hallow- 
een night.  Illustrations  are  done  in  watercolor-washed  colored 
pencils. 

3.59  Watson,  Wendy.  Boo!  It's  Halloween*  Illustrated  by  Wendy  Wat- 
son. Clarion  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-53628-6.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 
Fiction. 

The  whole  family  is  preparing  for  Halloween.  There  are  cos- 
tumes to  make,  jack-o'-lanterns  to  cut,  cookies  to  bake,  and  faces 
to  paint.  Then  it's  off  to  the  school's  haunted  house  for  supper 
and  games.  But  the  fun  is  not  over  yet.  The  whole  village  pours 
onto  the  winding  streets  for  trick-or-treating,  and  the  reader  is 
given  a  bat's  eye  view  of  the  festivities.  Wendy  Watson  has 
wound  riddles,  rhymes,  and  knock-knock  jokes  in  speech  bal- 
loons around  the  characters. 

3.60  Yolen,  Jane.  Best  Witches:  Poems  for  Halloween.  Illustrated  by 
Elise  Primavera.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21539. 
47p.  5-9  (est.).  Fiction. 

Did  you  know  that  the  modern  witch  does  aerobic  exercise  and 
flies  on  a  vacuum  cleaner?  Or  that  witches  participate  in 
"witchy"  game  shows  and  usually  put  a  little  extra  poison  ivy 
on  their  pizzas?  These  surprising  revelations  and  many  others 
can  be  found  in  this  collection  of  Jane  Yolen's  witch  poems.  The 


ERIC 


124 


Jewish  Holidays 


91 


humorous  verses  and  Elise  Primavera's  appealing  illustrations 
should  attract  any  Halloween  enthusiast. 

Jewish  Holidays 

3.61  Gross,  Judith,  Celebrate:  A  Book  of  Jewish  Holidays.  Dlus- 
trated  by  Bari  Weissman.  Piatt  and  Munk/AU  Aboard  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-448-40303-X.  30p.  5-8.  Nonfiction. 

Family  and  food  take  center  stage  on  Jewish  holidays,  and  Ju- 
dith Gross  emphasizes  both.  Joyous  celebrations  and  the  tradi- 
tional demands  of  each  occasion  are  colorfully  illustrated.  With 
smiling  cartoon  faces,  the  somber  Day  of  Atonement  loses  its 
bleakness.  The  legends  of  Purim,  Hanukkah,  and  Passover  are 
deftly  outlined,  blending  early  origins  and  modem  interpreta- 
tion. 

3.62  Kimmel,  Eric  A.  The  Chanukkah  Guest.  Illustrated  by  Giora 
Carmi.  Holiday  House,  1990.  ISBN  0-8234-0788-8. 26p.  4^8  (est.). 
Fiction. 

Bubba  Brayna  fixes  potato  latkes  for  Hanukkah,  with  extras  for 
the  rabbi,  who  is  expected  to  visit.  When  a  hungry,  marauding 
bear  comes  to  the  cottage  in  the  forest,  Bubba,  with  her  failing 
eyesight  and  hearing,  believes  that  he  is  her  bearded  guest,  and 
feeds  him  the  treat.  Giora  Carmi's  illustrations  capture  the  hu- 
mor of  Eric  Kimmers  mischievous  tale  so  that  children,  like 
Bubba  herself,  can  laugh  at  the  absurd  mistake. 

3.63  Kimmel,  Eric.  Hershel  and  the  Hanukkah  Goblins.  Illustrated 
by  Trina  Schart  Hyman.  Holiday  House,  1989.  ISBN  0-8234-0769- 
1.  32p.  4-9  (est.).  Fiction. 

The  old  synagogue  is  haunted  by  goblins  who  won't  let  the 
villagers  celebrate  Hanukkah,  so  Hershel  volunteers  to  trick  the 
goblins  into  lifting  their  evil  curse.  He  must  spend  eight  nighcs 
in  the  synagogue,  lighting  Hanukkah  candles  each  night  (with- 
out letting  the  goblins  blow  them  out)  and  tricking  the  goblin 
king  into  lighting  the  last  night's  candles  himself.  This  book 
includes  full-color  yet  shadow-filled  paintings  of  the  monstrous 
goblins  and  concludes  with  a  description  of  the  Jewish  tradi- 
tions detailed  in  Hershel's  adventure.  Caldecott  Honor  Book,  1990. 

3.64  Koralek,  Jenny.  Hanukkah:  The  Festival  of  Lights.  Illustrated 
.    by  Juan  Wijngaard.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1990.  ISBN 

0-888-09330-2. 32p.  All  ages.  Nonfiction. 


125 


92 


Celebrations 


When  the  Romans  sacked  Jerusalem  and  caused  havoc  in  the 
Temple,  a  vigilant  family  of  Jewish  brothers  led  the  resistance. 
Against  all  odds,  the  eternal  light  continued  to  burn  while  a  new 
supply  of  oil  was  found.  The  legend  is  celebrated  as  the  Jewish 
festival  of  Hanukkah.  This  story,  simply  told,  is  illustrated  with 
classic-style  paintings  set  off  in  Roman-arched  frames. 

3.65  Manushkin,  Fran.  Latkes  and  Applesauce:  A  Hanukkah  Story. 
Illustrated  by  Robin  Spowart.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-590-42261-8. 32p.  6-10  (est.).  Fiction. 

Through  the  voice  of  the  Jewish  storyteller  comes  the  story  of  a 
special  Hanukkah — "perhaps  a  miracle.  Maybe  yes,  maybe  no." 
The  Menashe  family  isolated  by  a  blizzard,  fears  that  there  will 
be  no  traditional  Hanukkah  feast  of  latkes  and  applesauce,  and 
perhaps  no  food  at  all.  Nevertheless,  the  family  takes  in  a  stray 
dog  and  kitten  who  come  to  their  door.  On  the  eighth  night,  the 
dog  and  cat  become  part  of  the  miracle,  ensuring  the  feast  and 
earning  new  names  for  themselves — Latke  and  Applesauce. 
Scenes  are  softly  blurred  impressions  in  muted  tones. 

3.66  Modesitt,  Jeanne,  compiler.  Songs  of  Chanukah.  Illustrated  by 
Robin  Spowart.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-57739-1.  32p. 
6-12  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

Fourteen  songs  for  the  eight-day  holiday  of  Hanukkah  are  of- 
fered in  both  Hebrew  and  English,  arranged  for  piano,  guitar, 
and  voice.  Along  with  the  musical  scores  are  descriptions  of  the 
traditions  of  the  candle  lighting  and  its  accompanying  ceremo- 
nies. Rabbits  and  mice  in  human  guise  act  out  the  religious  and 
cultural  patterns,  recounting  the  tale  of  Maccabean  heroism 
which  is  remembered  through  the  lighting  of  candles,  in  games 
and  dance,  and  through  special  recipes. 

3.67  Youdovin,  Susan  Schaalman.  Why  Does  It  Always  Rain  on 
Sukkot?  Illustrated  by  Miriam  Nerlove.  Albert  Whitman,  1990. 
ISBN  0-8075-9079-7. 30p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

The  chief  angel  is  handing  out  special  gifts  to  all  the  "Holidays." 
Among  them,  Passover,  with  a  cohort  of  boisterous  Israelites, 
receives  the  Seder  plate,  and  a  bespectacled  Simchat  Torah  is 
given  the  tvcroll  of  the  Law.  Finally,  little  Sukkot,  believing  him- 
self forgotten,  sobs  when  presented  with  a  sukkah.  His  tears  are 
remembered  each  year  when  it  rains  through  the  branches  of 
homemade  sukkahs.  Framed  ink  and  watercolor  paintings  and  a 
concluding  description  of  the  holidays  on  the  Jewish  calendar 


ERIC 


126 


Multiple  Holidays 


93 


add  charm  and  interest  to  each  annual  celebration.  Notable  1990 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

3.68  Zalben,  Jane  Breskin.  Leo  and  Blossom's  Sukkah.  Illustrated  by 
Jane  Breskin  Zalben.  Henry  Holt,  1990.  ISBN  0-8050-1226-5. 16p. 
4-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

When  brother  and  sister  bears  Leo  and  Blossom  and  their 
friends  decide  to  build  a  sukkah  to  celebrate  the  harvest  festival 
of  Sukkot,  they  get  carried  away  and  hang  too  many  fruits, 
vegetables,  popcorn,  and  paper  chains  from  the  flimsy  roof  of 
the  booth.  When  everything  starts  to  fall,  they  welcome  their 
parents'  help  and  enjoy  hearing  their  father  tell  the  story  of  the 
Jewish  festival.  One  of  Jane  Breskin  Zalben's  three  books  on 
Jewish  holidays,  this  book  might  serve  as  an  introduction  to 
celebrations  enjoyed  by  different  religions. 

Kwanzaa 

3.69  Walter,  Mildred  Pitts.  Have  a  Happy A  Novel.  Illustrated  by 
Carole  Byard.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0- 
688-06923-1. 106p.  7-10.  Fiction. 

Besides  the  confusion  of  his  birthday  falling  on  Christmas, 
eleven-year-old  Chris  knows  that  his  chances  for  getting  a  bicy- 
cle for  either  Christmas  or  his  birthday  are  slim.  His  father  has 
been  out  of  work  for  a  long  time.  Furthermore,  nobody  seems  to 
take  a  Christmas  birthday  seriously.  -'They  could  just  say,  Have 
a  happy.  Then  I  could  add  anything  I  want:  happy  birthday, 
happy  Christmas,  happy  Kwanzaa."  It  is  the  spirit  of  the  African 
American  holiday  of  Kwanzaa  that  draws  his  family  together  in 
celebration  of  their  heritage,  and  problems  find  resolution.  No- 
table  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

Multiple  Holidays 

3.70  Baker,  James  W.  April  Fools'  Day  Magic.  New  Year's  Magic. 
Thanksgiving  Magic.  Illustrated  by  George  Overlie.  Lerner, 
1989.  48p.  6-12  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

Three  in  a  series  of  Holiday  Magic  Books  offer  directions  for 
holiday  magic  tricks.  For  New  Year's,  magicians  can  tell  for- 
tunes with  a  gravity-defying  ring  or  can  make  a  selected  playing 
card  show  up  at  the  end  of  the  spelling  of  "Happy  New  Year/' 
For  Thanksgiving,  magicians  can  perform  a  trick  to  demonstrate 


127 


94 


Celebrations 


the  never-ending  nature  of  leftovers.  At  the  end  of  each  book, 
performers  are  shown  tricks  for  doing  better  magic.  Step-by-step 
directions  are  accompanied  with  two-color  illustrations. 

3.71  dePaola,  Tomie.  My  First  Chanukah.  My  First  Easter.  My  First 
Halloween.  My  First  Passover.  My  First  Thanksgiving.  Illus- 
trated by  Tomie  dePaola.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989-92. 12p.  1-5. 
Nonfiction. 

Young  children  are  introduced  to  the  basic  concepts  and  sym- 
bols of  five  holidays — Hanukkah,  Easter,  Halloween,  Passover, 
and  Thanksgiving — with  characteristic  Tomie  dePaola  simplic- 
ity and  charm  in  the  My  First  Holidays  series.  The  Halloween 
book  tells  readers  that  "Halloween  colors  are  black  and  orange," 
while  the  Hanukkah  book  informs  us  that  the  middle  candle  in 
a  menorah  is  "the  shamash,  or  'helper  candle/  We  use  it  to  light 
the  other  candles."  Watercolored  ink  drawings  depict  the  most 
important  details  of  each  holiday. 

3.72  Low,  Alice,  compiler.  The  Family  Read-Aloud  Holiday  Treas- 
ury. Illustrated  by  Marc  Brown.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books, 
1991.  ISBN  0-316-53368-8. 154p.  All  ages.  Fiction/Nonfiction. 

Suitable  as  a  resource  for  classrooms,  this  collection  offers  choice 
stories,  excerpts,  songs,  and  poems  in  celebration  of  holidays 
great  and  small.  Children  can  celebrate  Grandparents'  Day, 
Earth  Day,  Book  Week,  and  even  the  First  Day  of  School  with 
literature  read  aloud.  Included  are  works  by  Beverly  Cleary,  Jack 
Prelutsky,  Ann  Cameron,  and  Jean  Fritz.  Throughout  the  book, 
lively  illustrations  spill  from  Marc  Brown's  crayon-bordered 
frames. 

3.73  Seuss,  Dr.  (Theodor  S.  Geisel).  Oh,  the  Places  You'll  Go!  Illus- 
trated by  Dr.  Seuss.  Random  House,  1990.  ISBN  0-679-90527-8. 
32p.  6  and  up.  Fiction. 

As  a  lasting  legacy  from  Dr.  Seuss,  Oh,  the  Places  You'll  Go!  is 
destined  to  be  placed  into  the  hands  of  those  at  the  launch 
points,  crossroads,  and  milestones  of  life.  Although  the  "Seus- 
sian"  pathways  are  pleasant,  colorful  nonsense,  the  good  doctor 
acknowledges  life's  challenges,  pitfalls,  and  stumbling  blocks. 
Even  so,  the  message  is  full  of  confidence  and  reassurance  for 
the  traveler:  "Today  is  your  day!  /  Your  mountain  is  waiting.  / 
So ...  get  on  your  wayl" 


128 


Thanksgiving 


95 


St  Patrick's  Day 

3.74  Kroll,  Steven.  Mary  McLean  and  the  St,  Patrick's  Day  Parade. 
Illustrated  by  Michael  Dooling.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books, 
1991.  ISBN  0-590-43701-1.  32p.  3-10  (est.).  Fiction. 

On  the  cover,  an  exuberant  Irish- American  lass  of  the  nineteenth 
century,  wearing  a  perfect  shamrock,  rides  triumphantly  in  Mr. 
Finnegan's  green-trimmed  cart  in  the  St.  Patrick's  Day  Parade. 
The  story  tells  how  (with  a  bit  of  leprechaun  magic)  she  gets 
there.  Mary  McLean,  a  refugee  of  the  Irish  potato  famine,  lives 
with  her  family  in  a  cramped  basement  room  in  lower  Manhat- 
tan. She  is  determined  to  ride  in  the  parade,  but  Mr.  Finnegan 
insists  that  she  must  do  something  special  first— like  find  a 
perfect  shamrock  in  the  middle  of  the  winter. 

Thanksgiving 

3*75  Bunting,  Eve.  How  Many  Days  to  America?  A  Thanksgiving 
Story.  Illustrated  by  Beth  Peck.  Clarion  Books,  1988.  ISBN  0- 
89919-521-0. 30p.  5-9.  Fiction. 

"How  many  days  to  America?"  asks  the  little  girl  as  the  small, 
overcrowded  fishing  boat  pulls  away  from  all  that  is  familiar 
and  dear  to  this  Caribbean  refugee  family.  Hope  is  the  watch- 
word as  mother,  father,  son,  and  daughter,  among  others,  make 
their  way  to  a  new  life  amid  much  adversity.  This  present-day 
Thanksgiving  story  reflects  the  multiculturalism  that  was  em- 
braced at  the  original  table. 

3.76  Hoban,  Lillian.  Silly  Tilly's  Thanksgiving  Dinner.  Illustrated 
by  Lillian  Hoban.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-022423-1. 
63p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

In  another  adventure  with  Silly  Tilly  to  amuse  young  readers, 
Silly  Tilly  tackles  Thanksgiving  dinner.  Although  her  plans  go 
awry,  the  dinner  turns  out  to  be  a  success  when  her  guests  show 
up  with  the  food.  Lillian  Hoban's  characterization  of  Tilly  Mole 
in  both  word  and  illustration  adds  appeal,  as  does  the  text-to- 
illustrations  ratio  of  this  I  Can  Read  Book. 

3.77  Leedy,  Loreen.  The  Dragon  Thanksgiving  Feast:  Things  to 
Make  and  Do.  Illustrated  by  Loreen  Leedy.  Holiday  House, 
1990.  ISBN  0-8234-0828-0.  28p.  4-8.  Nonfiction. 

"The  dragons  howl  at  the  harvest  moon,  'Thanksgiving  Day  is 
coming  soon!'"  And  so,  ten  blue  dragons  with  red  scales,  purple 


129 


96 


Celebrations 


wings,  and  bulging  green  eyes  begin  their  preparations.  The 
busy  dragons  teach  readers  how  to  make  such  crafts  as  a  wild 
bird  feeder  and  an  edible  necklace  and  such  recipe  items  as 
Munch  &  Crunch  Salad.  When  the  big  day  arrives,  so  do  green 
and  purple  guests,  a  parade,  games,  a  feast,  and,  finally,  a  nap. 
Dragon  fans  will  also  enjoy  Loreen  Leedy's  A  Dragon  Christmas. 

Valentine's  Day 

3.78  Buckley,  Kate.  Love  Notes.  Illustrated  by  Kate  Buckley.  Albert 
Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075-4780-8.  32p.  7-10  (est.).  Fiction. 

Katy  gets  the  first  love  note  from  Joe.  She  writes  back  that  she 
loves  him  too,  and  tells  her  mother  that  she'll  marry  him.  But 
Katy's  note  falls  into  the  hands  of  Joe's  friends,  and  a  flurry  of 
teasing  erupts.  As  second  graders  work  from  "love"  to  "like," 
the  playground  is  filled  with  familiar  chants  and  taunts.  Strips 
of  pictures  surrounding  the  text  offer  other  playground  lore — 
jump-rope  jingles  and  clapping  games.  The  satisfactory  outcome 
is  worth  talking  about  in  classrooms. 

3.79  Hoban,  Lillian.  Arthur's  Great  Big  Valentine.  Illustrated  by  Lil- 
lian Hoban.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-022407-X.  64p. 
5-6.  Fiction. 

In  this  latest  addition  to  Lillian  Hoban's  series,  Arthur  and  his 
best  friend  Norman  have  had  a  disagreement  and  are  not  speak- 
ing to  each  other.  Arthur  even  stubbornly  refuses  to  participate 
in  Valentine's  Day  festivities.  It  takes  a  secret  from  Norman's 
little  brother  to  finally  get  the  two  friends  to  admit  that  they  miss 
each  other.  This  warm  story,  supplemented  with  animated  illus- 
trations, is  an  I  Can  Read  Book. 


ERLC 


130 


Classics 


The  classics  should  not  be  exempted  from  revaluation  by  virtue  of 
their  past  veneration.  They  should  be  able  to  compete  favorably  with 
contemporary  books.  Unimpressed  by  vintage  or  lineage,  children 
seldom  read  a  book  because  they  think  they  should.  They  read  more  for 
enjoyment  than  edification. 

Charlotte  Huck,  Children's  Literature  in  the  Elementary  School 


ERIC 


131 


98 


4  Classics 


4.1  Barrie,  J.  M.  Peter  Pan:  The  Complete  and  Unabridged  Text 
Illustrated  by  Scott  Gustafson.  Viking  Penguin/Ariel  Books, 
1991.  ISBN  0-670-83608-7. 184p.  All  ages.  Fiction. 

Richer,  darker,  and  more  moving  than  other  reissues  of  this 
classic,  Scott  Gustafson's  powerful,  lavish,  full-color  oil  paint- 
ings set  a  superb  frame  for  the  magic  and  charm  of  the  tale  and 
the  dramatic  depictions  of  pirates,  Indians,  children,  and  lost 
boys.  Worth  a  close  look  is  the  artist's  rendition  of  the  under- 
ground world  of  the  lost  boys. 

4.2  Carroll,  Lewis  (compiled  by  Cooper  Edens).  Alice's  Adventures 
in  Wonderland:  The  Ultimate  Illustrated  Edition.  Bantam 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-553-05385-X.  208p.  4  and  up  (est.).  Fiction. 

This  edition  of  Lewis  Carroll's  unabridged  text  features  selected 
illustrations  from  more  than  twenty-five  classic  "Alice"  editions, 
ranging  from  the  original  in  1865  through  editions  of  the  1930s. 
Included  in  this  visual  chronicle  are  the  artwork  of  John  Tenniel, 
Margaret  Tarrant,  Millicent  Sowerby,  Milo  Winter,  and  Harry 
Rountree,  among  others.  The  illustrations  vary  in  color,  style, 
and  line  from  shadowy,  black-and-white  sketches  to  pale,  soft- 
edged  pastels  to  vibrant,  bright-hued  plates.  This  combination 
of  strikingly  different  artistic  interpretations  will  surprise  and 
delight  readers  of  all  ages. 

4.3  Chekhov,  Anton  (translated  by  Richard  Pevear).  Kashtanka.  Il- 
lustrated by  Barry  Moser.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399- 
21905-6. 47p.  All  ages.  Fiction. 

Russian  children  love  this  story  of  the  foxlike  Kashtanka,  the  lost 
dog  who  is  found  by  a  kindly  animal  trainer.  In  his  new  home, 
Kashtanka  lives  with  a  trained  goose,  pig,  and  cat.  Eventually 
he,  too,  must  practice  to  become  part  of  their  circus  act.  But 
when  Kashtanka  makes  his  debut  at  the  circus,  he  is  recognized 
by  his  former  owners  and  races  from  the  ring.  Barry  Moser 's 
paintings  of  animals  are  formal  portraits,  while  his  street  scenes 
are  snowy  postcards. 

4.4  Dickens,  Charles.  A  Christmas  Carol.  Illustrated  by  Scott  Cook. 
Random  House,  1990.  ISBN  0-394-92239-5.  60p.  8-12.  Fiction. 


132 


Classics 


99 


Charles  Dickens's  own  abridgment  of  his  nineteenth-century 
Christmas  classic  was  created  especially  for  reading  aloud.  Scott 
Cook's  twenty-one  amber-toned  oil  paintings  manage  to  evoke 
both  the  warmth  of  the  season's  traditional  festivities  and  the 
sparse  trappings  of  the  miserly  Scrooge. 

4.5  Hale,  Lucretia  (adapted  by  Amy  Schwartz).  The  Lady  Who  Put 
Salt  in  Her  Coffee.  Illustrated  by  Amy  Schwartz.  Harcourt 
Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-243475-5.  32p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

Poor  Mrs.  Peterkin  adds  salt  instead  of  sugar  to  her  coffee.  Her 
sympathetic  family  tries  to  help  by  seeking  advice  from  the 
dotty  local  chemist,  the  village  herb  woman,  and  the  matter-of- 
fact  lady  from  Philadelphia.  In  this  adaptation  of  Lucretia  Hale's 
century-old  tales  in  "The  Peterkin  Papers/'  Amy  Schwartz's 
stylized  illustrations  allow  Mrs.  Peterkin  to  be  lovably  scatter- 
brained. 

4.6  Hodges,  Margaret,  adapter.  Don  Quixote  and  Sancho  Panza. 
Illustrated  by  Stephen  Marchesi.  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1992. 
ISBN  0-684-19235-7.  72p.  8-12  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  her  introduction,  Margaret  Hodges  quotes  the  axiom  that  Don 
Quixote  should  be  read  at  least  three  times— once  as  a  youth, 
again  in  middle  age,  and  finally  in  old  age.  If  so,  readers  might 
want  to  begin  with  this  abridged  edition.  Here,  the  Spanish 
knight  errant  sets  off  to  defend  kingdoms,  protect  damsels,  pun- 
ish the  proud,  and  reward  the  humble.  With  a  mix  of  idealism, 
slapstick,  pathos,  and  kindness,  he  tilts  at  windmills  and  ear- 
nestly displays  his  bravery.  Black-and-white  illustrations  are 
sensitive  to  the  times  and  temperaments  of  the  heroes. 

4.7  Irving,  Washington.  Rip  Van  Winkle.  Illustrations  by  Arthur 
Rackham.  Dial  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-1264-2.  124p.  All  ages 
(est.).  Fiction. 

Washington  Irving's  classic  tale  of  Rip  Van  Winkle,  the  amiable 
ne'er-do-well  who  sleeps  for  twenty  years  in  the  Catskill  Moun- 
tains and  misses  the  Revolutionary  War,  has  been  reissued  with 
celebrated  artist  Arthur  Rackham's  original  1905  illustrations. 
The  publishers  have  reproduced  the  first  edition  of  Irving's 
story  using  the  original  type  and  layout.  The  illustrations  have 
been  "enhanced  by  complementary  colored  backgrounds/'  re- 
sulting in  a  beautifully  bound  edition,  printed  on  quality  paper 
in  a  way  that  emphasizes  the  detail  and  care  of  Rackham's 
illustrations. 


133 


100 


Classics 


4.8  Irving,  Washington  (retold  by  John  Howe).  Rip  Van  Winkle. 
Illustrated  by  John  Howe.  Little,  Brown,  1988.  ISBN  0-316-37578- 
0.  30p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

This  exquisitely  illustrated  version  of  Washington  Irving's  clas- 
sic story  of  a  twenty-year  nap  in  the  Catskill  Mountains  is  a 
choice  example  of  the  role  that  children's  books  can  play  in 
introducing  young  readers  to  adult  fiction.  The  text,  adapted 
from  the  original,  retains  both  color  and  reasonable  complexity. 
John  Howe's  luminous  and  realistic  full-color  paintings  make 
the  story  easy  to  follow  and  hold  the  reader's  interest.  The 
wizened  and  gnomish  faces  of  Howe's  men  are  especially  en- 
gaging. 

4.9  Kipling,  Rudyard.  Just  So  Stories.  Illustrated  by  David  Framp- 
ton.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-023296-X.  122p.  5  and  up 
(est.).  Fiction. 

David  Frampton's  traditional  woodcuts  accompany  twelve  of 
Kipling's  most-beloved  pourquoi  tales,  including  "The  Ele- 
phant's Child,"  "How  the  Camel  Got  His  Hump,"  and  "How  the 
Leopard  Got  His  Spots."  A  full-page  woodcut  sets  off  the  open- 
ing of  each  story;  each  major  character  is  stylized  and  tinted  in 
ochres,  blues,  and  golden  tans;  and  each  story  is  dramatically 
bordered  by  black  frames  etched  with  the  story  motif. 

4.10  Melville,  Herman.  Catskill  Eagle.  Illustrated  by  Thomas  Locker. 
Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21857-2.  28p.  5  and  up.  Fic- 
tion. 

These  short,  powerful  lines  from  Moby  Dick,  set  to  sweeping 
illustrations  of  the  Hudson  Valley  by  painter  Thomas  Locker, 
make  an  excellent  children's  book.  Melville's  description  of  the 
Catskill  eagle,  which  he  compares  to  far-seeing,  deep-minded 
individuals,  is  broad  enough  to  be  accessible  to  children.  The 
paintings  portray  the  eagle  against  a  breathtaking  natural  back- 
ground; the  natural  affinity  that  children  feel  for  animals  will 
draw  them  to  these  stirring  depictions  of  eagles  in  flight,  with 
their  young  at  the  nest,  and  lifting  fish  from  icy  streams. 

4.11  Salten,  Felix.  Bambi:  A  Life  in  the  Woods.  Illustrated  by  Michael 
J.  Woods.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992. 
ISBN  0-671-73937-9. 158p.  8-12  (est.).  Fiction. 

Over  sixty-five  years  ago,  John  Galsworthy  wrote  in  the  fore- 
word to  Bambi  that  the  book  is  "delicious  not  only  for  children 
but  for  those  who  are  no  longer  so  fortunate."  For  children 


ERIC 


134 


TREASURE 
ISLAND 

FrOBERT  LOUIS  STEVENSON         ■  ■ 

ILLUSTRATED  BY  ROBERT  INGPEN  .  .  "  ■■■  ^'.^y 


the  £adywho  put  salt 
■ ,  inhercoffee 


Lucretia  Hale 


Amy  Schwartz 


B. 


A.  Treasure  Islandby  Robert  Louis  Stevenson;  illustrated  by  Robert  Ingpen  (see  4.13). 

B.  The  Lady  Who  Put  Salt  in  Her  Coffee  by  Lucretia  Hale;  adapted  and  illustrated  by 
Amy  Schwartz  (see  4.5).  C.  The  Antique  Store  Cat  by  Leslie  Baker  (see  5.12). 


ERLC 


135 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


A. 


B. 


A.  The  Wise  Woman  and  Her  Secret  by  Eve  Merriam;  illustrated  by  Linda  Graves  (see 
5.58).  B.  Appalachia:  The  Voices  of  Sleeping  Birds  by  Cynthia  Rylant  and  Barry 
Moser  (see  5.63).  C.  Amy  Elizabeth  Explores  Bloomingdale's  by  E.  L  Konigsburg 
(see  5.56).  D.  The  Leaving  by  Budge  Wilson  (see  5.64). 


°  1  IK 

ERJC  AJb       BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Classics 


101 


familiar  only  with  the  animated  film,  the  text  of  the  original 
Bambi  may  be  a  welcome  read-aloud.  Felix  Salten  knew  the 
forest  and  its  inhabitants  well.  Michael  Woods's  double-page 
watercolors  in  pale  forest  shades  capture  the  buck's  action  and 
fear  as  truthfully  as  the  fawn's  idyllic  glades. 

4.12  Spyri,  Johanna  (translated  by  Helen  B.  Dole,  with  revisions  by 
John  Githens).  Tomi  Ungerer's  Heidi.  Illustrated  by  Tomi 
Ungerer.  Delacorte  Press,  1990.  ISBN  0-385-30244-4.  310p.  8-12. 
Fiction. 

Illustrator  Tomi  Ungerer  has  added  depth  and  charm  to  the 
timeless  Heidi  by  Johanna  Spyri.  Both  black-and-white  and  color 
illustrations  feature  characters  and  incidents  that  are  at  once 
humorous  and  moving — from  the  delicate  warm  colors  depict- 
ing a  quiet  moment  shared  by  Grandmamma  and  Heidi  reading 
by  lamplight,  to  a  black-ink  sketch  of  an  indignant  Fraulein 
Rottenmeier  that  is  framed  by  shadows  and  that  emphasizes  the 
witchlike  characteristics  of  her  profile.  Ungerer's  flair  for  cap- 
turing both  sentiment  and  fancy  in  illustrations  make  this  un- 
abridged version  of  the  classic  unique. 

4.13  Stevenson,  Robert  Louis.  Treasure  Island.  Illustrated  by  Robert 
Ingpen.  Viking  Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670-84685-6.  176p.  8  and 
up.  Fiction. 

Opposite  the  list  of  color  plates  in  Robert  Ingpen's  version  of  this 
classic  tale  is  a  realistic,  carefully  inked  map  of  Treasure  Island, 
dated  1750,  ragged-edged  and  aged,  but  with  its  scale  and  let- 
tering so  perfectly  rendered  that  it  well  serves  the  upcoming 
adventure.  In  this  large-scale  edition,  chapter  openings  are  dou- 
ble-page paintings,  offering  portrait-like  character  interpreta- 
tions. Other  paintings  vary  from  a  light-bathed  view  of  Jim 
Hawkins  to  aarkly  menacing  scenes.  Penciled  details  add  rich- 
ness to  each  chapter. 

4.14  Thoreau,  Henry  David  (text  selections  by  Steve  Lowe).  Walden. 
Illustrated  by  Robert  Sabuda.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399- 
22153-0.  30p.  4  -12.  Nonfiction. 

In  1845,  Henry  David  Thoreau  spent  two  years  living  alone  in  a 
cabin  he  built  himself  on  the  banks  of  Walden  Pond  near  Con- 
cord, Massachusetts.  Selected  passages  from  Walden  focus  on 
experiences  meaningful  for  children  to  create  this  celebration  of 
Thoreau's  masterpiece  about  life  amid  nature's  quiet.  Double- 
page  linoleum-print  illustrations,  with  text  inset,  create  a  warm 


o  137 
ERIC 


102  Classics 


tone  of  nineteenth-century  America.  This  book  can  motivate 
younger  readers  to  explore  the  adult  version  of  Walden  in  later 
years.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

4.15  Thurber,  James.  Many  Moons.  Illustrated  by  Marc  Simont.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich/HBJ  Contemporary  Classics,  1990.  ISBN 
0-15-251872-X.  48p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

Originally  illustrated  by  Louis  Slobodkin  and  awarded  the  Cal- 
decott  Medal  in  1944,  James  Thurber's  story  of  the  princess  who 
wanted  the  moon — and  got  it — has  been  redesigned  and  reillus- 
trated.  Artist  Marc  Simont  uses  whimsical  watercolor  illustra- 
tions enveloped  by  areas  of  white  space  to  bring  to  life  the  antics 
of  the  spoiled  Princess  Lenore. 

4.16  Ushinsky,  Konstantin  (adapted  by  Marguerita  Rudolph).  How  a 
Shirt  Grew  in  the  Field.  Illustrations  by  Erika  Weihs.  Clarion 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-59761-7. 32p.  6-9  (est.),  miction. 

When  Vasya  was  promised  a  new  shirt  made  of  the  flax  seeds 
that  his  father  sowed,  he  wondered  how  it  was  possible.  Vasya 
observes  the  development  of  the  seeds  into  silky  grass,  sheaves, 
woven  cloth,  and  finally  an  embroidered  linen  shirt.  New  illus- 
trations of  a  hundred-year-old  tale  feature  rounded  figures 
against  a  Ukrainian  landscape. 


ERIC 


13S 


Contemporary 
Realistic  Fiction 


If  a  children's  writer  presents . . .  characters  honestly  and  is  truthful 
about  their  thoughts  and  their  feelings,  he  [or  she]  is  giving . . . 
readers  "a  means  to  gain  a  hold  on  fate"  by  showing  them  that  they 
can  trust  their  thoughts  and  their  feelings,  that  they  can  have  faith  in 
themselves.  He  lor  she]  can  also  show  them  a  bit  of  the  world,  the 
beginning  of  the  path  they  have  to  tread;  but  the  most  important 
thing  he  lor  she]  has  to  offer  is  a  little  hope,  and  courage  for  the 
journey. 

Nina  Bawden,  "Emotional  Realism  in  Books 
for  Young  People/'  The  Horn  Book  Magazine 


139 


104 


5  Contemporary 
Realistic  Fiction 

Adventure  Stories 

5.1  Albert,  Burton.  Where  Does  the  Trail  Lead?  Illustrated  by  Brian 
Pinkney.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991. 
ISBN  0-671-73409-1.  30p.  4-^8  (est). 

Detailed  scratchboard  illustrations  create  the  feel  of  Massachu- 
setts' Nantucket  Island,  ripe  for  exploration.  And  where  does  the 
trail  lead?  An  African  American  boy  follows  it  "over  hills  and 
hollows . . .  past  three  limbs  bent  by  the  wind,  and  tide-pools  of 
periwinkles.,,  Through  text  that  rises  and  falls  as  the  tides,  the 
child  moves  past  derelict  vestiges  of  the  built  landscape,  a  rail- 
road track,  shanties,  and  a  fence,  before  returning  to  picnic  with 
his  family  by  the  water's  edge  at  twilight. 

5.2  Crews,  Donald.  Shortcut.  Illustrated  by  Donald  Crews.  Gieen- 
willow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-06437-X.  32p.  4-7  (est). 

It's  getting  dark,  so  seven  children  decide  to  take  the  shortcut 
home — a  shortcut  that  follows  a  train  track  along  a  narrow 
mound,  surrounded  by  briers  and  water  "full  of  snakes."  The 
possibility  of  an  oncoming  train  is  not  a  concern  for  the  frolick- 
ing friends,  until . . .  "Whoo-whooH  Klackity-klak!  Klackity- 
klak!"  The  close  call  sends  them  diving  for  safety.  Donald  Crews 
portrays  his  frightening  memory  in  closeup  perspectives,  using 
watercolor  and  gouache  paints  in  the  shadowy  colors  of  dusk. 

5.3  George,  Jean  Craighead.  On  the  Far  Side  of  the  Mountain. 
Illustrated  by  Jean  Craighead  George.  Dutton  Children's  Books, 
1990.  ISBN  0-525-44563-3. 170p.  8-12. 

Sequel  to  the  1959  classic  My  Side  of  the  Mountain,  Jean 
Craighead  George's  novel  continues  the  adventures  of  Sam 
Gribley  as  he  carves  out  a  life  for  himself  on  his  mountain.  When 
Sam's  sister  suddenly  disappears  and  his  favorite  pet,  a  pere- 
grine falcon,  is  taken  from  him,  Sam  treks  across  the  New  York 
wilderness  to  rescue  both.  The  award-winning  author's  prose, 
maps,  and  illustrations  provide  specific  information  for  wilder- 


id 

ERLC 


Adventure  Stories 


105 


ness  survival  (such  as  the  methods  for  constructing  a  water 
pump,  twig  compass,  water  bag,  and  tree  house). 

5.4  George,  Jean  Craighead.  Shark  beneath  the  Reef.  ISBN  0-06- 
021993-9. 182p.  9  and  up  (est). 

Tomas,  a  ninth  grader  on  the  Island  of  Coronado,  dreams  of 
becoming  the  town's  hero  by  catching  the  whale  shark  that  rips 
his  family's  nets.  Equal  to  his  desire  for  helping  his  family  as  a 
great  fisherman,  though,  is  Tomas's  hope  of  becoming  a  marine 
biologist.  The  choice  is  a  difficult  one  in  this  coming-of-age 
novel  about  a  Mexican  boy.  It  is  a  good  companion  to  Scott 
O'Dell's  The  Black  Pearl  and  Hemingway's  The  Old  Man  and  the 
Sea.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.5  Helldorfer,  Mary  Claire.  Sailing  to  the  Sea.  Illustrated  by 
Loretta  Krupinski.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-83520-X. 
32p.  5-8  (est). 

A  young  narrator  describes  in  poetic  prose  his  first  sailing  trip 
down  the  river  to  the  sea:  "Straight  ahead  are  double  bridges; 
steel  spans  cut  the  sky  into  puzzle  pieces/'  Together,  the  boy  and 
his  aunt  and  uncle  swim,  pick  flowers  on  shore,  have  dinner  in 
a  waterfront  restaurant,  and  weather  a  hard  storm.  Finally,  they 
reach  the  sea  and  reunite  with  family  members  who  drive  to 
meet  them.  A  wide  range  of  sea  colors,  perspectives,  and  moods 
show  the  joyous  activities  of  sailing. 

5.6  Lyon,  George  Ella.  Come  a  Tide.  Illustrated  by  Stephen  Gam- 
mell.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531- 
08454-X.  32p.  4-7. 

Snows  in  March,  coupled  with  rain,  cause  Grandma  to  predict: 
"It'll  come  a  tide."  As  the  flood-warning  whistle  blows,  kinfolk 
and  neighbors  begin  leaving  their  homes,  checking  on  each 
other  as  they  make  their  way  to  Grandma's  house  on  higher 
ground.  The  waters  subside  and  families  begin  to  dig  in  the 
mud,  searching  for  the  buried  treasure  of  their  belongings,  feel- 
ing safe  until  next  spring.  Stephen  Gammeirs  cool-toned  paint- 
ings are  water-drenched  and  neighbor-friendly.  ALA  Notable 
Children's  Books,  1991. 

5.7  Radin,  Ruth  Yaffe.  High  in  the  Mountains.  Illustrated  by  Ed 
Young.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-775650-5.  30p.  5-10  (est.). 

A  child  describes  in  warm  and  simple  words  the  beauty  of  life 
in  the  mountains  with  Grandpa.  Ed  Young's  impressionistic 


141 


106 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


paintings  in  bright  pastels  help  evoke  the  flavor  of  life  in  the 
high  country.  A  companion  book  for  comparison  could  be  Cyn- 
thia Rylant's  When  I  Was  Young  in  the  Mountains.  Notable  Chil- 
dren's Trade  Books  in  Science,  1989. 

5.8  Rand,  Gloria.  Salty  Dog.  Illustrated  by  Ted  Rand.  Henry  Holt, 
1989.  ISBN  0-8050-0837-3.  30p.  9-11  (est.). 

Zack  is  building  a  boat  to  sail  around  the  world,  and  Salty  Dog 
intends  to  stay  by  his  side  throughout  the  entire  process.  Salty 
soon  learns  to  escape  his  snug,  fenced-in  home  and  ride  the  ferry 
to  see  Zack  at  the  boatyard.  Ted  Rand's  watercolors  are  so  filled 
with  movement  that  readers  will  think  they,  too,  feel  the  sea 
spray  when  Zack  and  Salty  finally  embark  on  their  maiden 
voyage. 

5.9  Taylor,  Theodore.  Sniper.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1989. 
ISBN  0-15-276420-8.  227p.  10-13  (est). 

Ben  Jepson's  parents  own  and  operate  a  private  big-cat  preserve 
in  Southern  California.  But  only  ten  days  after  his  parents  leave 
for  a  research  trip  to  Africa,  everything  at  Los  Coyotes  seems  to 
be  going  wrong — the  chief  animal  handler  is  hospitalized,  an 
elusive  sniper  shoots  at  the  cats  night  after  night,  and  a  fire 
threatens  the  property  The  local  authorities  are  mystified.  Un- 
able to  contact  his  parents,  fifteen-year-old  Ben  and  his  friend 
Sandy  find  clues  to  the  past  that  bring  this  adventure  story  to  a 
thrilling  conclusion.  ALA  Best  Books  for  Young  Adults,  1990. 

Animal  Stories 

5.10  Aylesworth,  Jim.  Mother  Haiverson's  New  Cat.  Illustrated  by 
Toni  Goffe.  Atheneum,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-31465-5.  26p.  5-8. 

When  Mother  Halverson  needs  a  new  mouser  for  her  pantry,  she 
sends  her  husband  to  "look  over  the  cats  in  the  barn  and  bring 
in  the  best  of  the  lot."  Yet  despite  Farmer  Haiverson's  efforts, 
none  of  the  crabby,  flabby,  nor  blabby  cats  meet  Mother  Haiver- 
son's expectations,  and  all  are  unceremoniously  deposed.  Fi- 
nally, a  shy  tabby  named  Abby  fulfills  the  job  description  to 
perfection.  Humorous  full-page  drawings  illustrate  this  cat  tale 
with  a  lesson:  "The  nice  shall  inherit  the  mice." 

5.11  Baker,  Alan.  Two  Tiny  Mice.  Illustrated  by  Alan  Baker.  Dial 
Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0973-0.  25p.  3-8 
(est.). 


142 


Animal  Stories 


107 


When  two  tiny  field  mice  investigate  the  world  around  them, 
they  discover  the  many  wonders  of  their  woodland  home.  Writ- 
ten in  rhythmic  and  descriptive  verse,  the  book  invites  children 
to  view  nature  from  a  "mouse's  point  of  view/'  Full-color  pencil 
sketches  silhouetted  against  watercolor  panoramas  capture  the 
beauty  of  various  animals  in  their  natural  habitats. 

5.12  Baker,  Leslie.  The  Antique  Store  Cat  Illustrated  by  Leslie  Baker. 
Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-07837-9.  28p.  5-8  (est.). 

On  her  birthday,  Alice,  a  calico  cat  who  lives  in  a  third-story 
apartment,  escapes  to  the  city  streets  below.  But  Alice  has 
trouble  finding  her  way  home  and  eventually  finds  shelter  and 
company  in  an  antique  store.  After  her  mischievous  nature  helps 
the  store  owner  spot  a  fake  statue,  Alice  is  reunited  with  her 
owner  and  returns  home.  Soft,  impressionistic  watercolor  paint- 
ings illustrate  this  sequel  to  Third  Story  Cat 

5.13  Barracca,  Debra,  and  Sal  Barracca.  The  Adventures  of  Taxi  Dog. 
Illustrated  by  Mark  Buehner.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers, 
1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0672-3.  32p.  4-8. 

Through  rhyming  verses,  Maxi,  a  homeless  dog,  tells  how  he 
survived  in  the  city  until  Jim  the  taxi  driver  adopts  him  and  they 
begin  to  share  the  front  seat  of  Jim's  yellow  cab.  Together,  man 
and  dog  rush  a  mother-to-be  to  the  hospital,  bring  clowns  from 
the  airport,  and  enjoy  each  other's  company.  Brightly  colored 
paintings  (such  as  one  of  Maxi  donning  a  Groucho  Marx  dis- 
guise to  entertain  passengers)  add  detail  and  wit.  A  cat  and  often 
a  rabbit  hide  on  each  spread. 

5.14  Calhoun,  Mary.  High-Wire  Henry.  Illustrated  by  Erick  Ingra- 
ham.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-08984-4. 40p.  5-10 
(est). 

When  a  new  puppy  comes  home,  Henry,  the  Siamese  cat  from 
Hot-Air  Henry  and  Cross-Country  Cat,  is  no  longer  the  center  of 
attention.  Determined  to  regain  his  place,  Henry  tries  to  impress 
his  family  by  tightrope  walking  on  branches  and  fences.  Later, 
when  the  puppy  is  stranded  on  a  window  ledge,  Henry  uses  his 
high-wire  skills  to  turn  rescuer.  Full-page,  realistic  watercolors 
complement  this  humorous  story  of  a  cat  that  saves  the  day. 

5.15  Carle,  Eric.  The  Very  Quiet  Cricket  Illustrated  by  Eric  Carle. 
Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21885-8.  24p.  3-6. 


14.1 


108 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


One  warm  day  a  tiny  cricket  is  born  and  begins  his  encounters 
with  other  insects  in  his  world.  Yet  when  trying  to  answer  their 
greetings,  the  little  cricket  can  produce  no  sound — until  he 
meets  a  female  cricket  and  discovers  his  song.  The  rhythmic  and 
repetitive  text  is  illustrated  with  brightly  colored,  tissue- 
textured  collage  paintings.  A  microchip  at  the  book's  end  treats 
readers  to  a  cricket's  chirp,  "the  most  beautiful  sound  that  she 
had  ever  heard." 

5.16  Carlstrom,  Nancy  White.  Moose  in  the  Garden.  Illustrated  by 
Lisa  Desimini.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-021014-1.  32p. 
3-8  (est.). 

When  a  hungry  moose  visits  the  garden,  Mother  and  Father  are 
none  too  pleased  to  see  the  intruder  eat  up  all  their  broccoli, 
cabbage,  and  cauliflower.  Their  son,  however,  has  a  different 
perspective  on  the  garden  visitor.  After  all,  he  maintains,  there 
are  certain  vegetables  that  no  one  should  have  to  eat — like  broc- 
coli, cabbage,  and  cauliflower.  Cumulative,  rhythmic  text  and 
vibrant  stylized  paintings  fill  the  pages  to  make  this  an  inviting 
story. 

5.17  Carter,  Margaret.  Go  Away,  William.  Illustrated  by  Carol 
Wright.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-717791-2.  25p.  4^8  (est.). 

William  the  cat  likes  to  be  near  his  family.  The  trouble  is  that  he 
gets  in  the  middle  of  things — in  the  middle  of  Granny's  sewing 
basket,  Father's  typing,  and  Rose's  garden.  The  response  of  each 
family  member  is,  "Oh,  do  go  away,  William!"  But  where  should 
a  cat  who  likes  people  go?  The  family  devises  a  delightful  solu- 
tion. Brightly  colored,  cartoon-like  illustrations  support  the 
book's  simple  and  predictable  text. 

5.18  Cleveland-Peck,  Patricia.  City  Cat,  Country  Cat.  Illustrated  by 
Gilly  Marklew.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11645-0. 
30p.  5-9  (est). 

Freckle  is  a  very  mysterious  country  cat.  His  owner,  David, 
worries  when  Freckle  leaves  the  farm  for  days  on  end,  even 
though  Freckle  always  returns.  Sarah  owns  a  city  cat  named 
Charlie,  a  cat  with  very  similar  characteristics.  Like  Freckle, 
Charlie  disappears  for  days  and  causes  Sarah  to  worry  dread- 
fully. When  Sarah  decides  to  follow  Charlie,  she  discovers  that 
this  cat  leads  a  city  life  as  "Charlie"  and  a  country  life  as 
"Freckle."  All  ends  happily  when  David  and  Sarah  negotiate 
dual  ownership  of  this  city-country  cat. 


ERIC 


144 


Animal  Stories 


5.19  George,  William  T.  Box  Turtle  at  Long  Pond.  Illustrated  by  Lind- 
say Barrett  George.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08185- 
1.  25p.  5-8. 

It  has  been  a  long  day  at  Long  Pond.  The  box  turtle  must  find 
food,  water,  and  shelter  as  well  as  defend  itself  from  a  hungry 
raccoon— all  before  the  sun  sets.  Full-page,  magnificently 
painted  illustrations  bring  out  the  details  of  animal  lives  woven 
together  in  a  simple  setting.  With  its  turtle's-eye  view  of  the 
world,  this  book  could  enrich  studies  of  turtles  and  habitat  shar- 
ing. Notable  Children's  Trade  Books  in  Science,  1989. 

5.20  Gordon,  Gaelyn.  Duckat.  Illustrated  by  Chris  Gaskin.  Scholastic 
Hardcover  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-590-45455-2.  24p.  2-6. 

Imagine  a  duck  that  says  meow,  hates  the  water,  drinks  milk  from 
a  bowl,  catches  mice,  and  chases  balls  of  yarn.  Mild  little  Mabel 
finds  such  a  duck  to  be  "Odd.  Very  odd/'  Despite  her  efforts  to 
teach  her  "duckat"  his  identity,  Mabel  is  unsuccessful  until  the 
duck  escapes  from  a  dog  by  flying  to  the  top  of  a  lamp  post.  "If 
you  are  a  cat,  you'll  just  have  to  stay  up  there,"  says  Mabel. 
"Quack,"  says  the  duck,  and  flies  down.  It  was  only  joking,  you 
see. 

5.21  Gottlieb,  Dale.  Big  Dog.  Illustrated  by  Dale  Gottlieb.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07382-4.  32p.  3-7. 

Lilly,  a  city  child,  is  afraid  of  things— of  the  dark,  of  elevators, 
and  of  walking  to  the  store.  Her  parents  think  a  dog  might  help. 
But  like  the  puppy  in  Norman  Bridwell's  Clifford  the  Big  Red  Dog, 
Lilly's  beloved  pet  grows  and  grows  and  grows  until  Lilly  must 
decide  where  her  dog  can  live  best.  She  acts  with  her  growing- 
up  head  and  heart  to  make  the  best  decision.  Stylized  illustra- 
tions emphasize  the  size  differences  between  the  little  girl  and 
the  Big  Dog,  whose  needs  she  considers  as  well  as  her  own. 

5  22  Hindley,  Judy.  Mrs.  Mary  Malarky's  Seven  Cats.  Illustrated  by 
Denise  Teasdale.  Orchard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08422-1. 32p. 
4-7. 

Each  one  is  unique  and  each  one  is  special;  all  together  they  are 
Mrs.  Mary  Malarky's  seven  cats.  A  baby-sitter  by  trade,  Mrs. 
Malarky  tells  her  own  "bedtime"  story  about  how  seven  cats 
came  to  live  with  her  and  how  all  but  one  found  a  new  home. 
Watercolor-washed  drawings  illustrate  this  humorous  tale  of 
seven  cats  and  a  special  baby-sitter. 


ERIC 


145 


110 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


5.23  Lindenbaum,  Pija  (retold  by  Gabrielle  Charbonnet).  Boodil  My 
Dog.  Illustrated  by  Pija  Lindenbaum.  Henry  Holt,  1992.  ISBN 
0-8050-2444-1.  47p.  5-9  (est.). 

In  this  English  adaptation  of  a  Swedish  story,  Boodil  is  described 
by  her  dog-loving  owner  as  brilliant,  strong,  and  brave.  How- 
ever, Pija  Lindenbaum's  whimsical  pictures  of  Boodil  the  bull- 
terrier  cause  the  reader  to  question  such  a  description.  Would  a 
brilliant  guard  dog  sleep  in  an  overstuffed  chair  with  her 
"blankee"?  Would  she  be  suspicious  of  rain  puddles?  Would  she 
think  the  vacuum  cleaner  was  a  dangerous  enemy?  Children 
and  adults  alike  will  agree  that  regardless  of  Boodil's  shortcom- 
ings, she  is  the  perfect  pet. 

5.24  MacLachlan,  Patricia.  Three  Names.  Illustrated  by  Alexander 
Pertzoff.  HarperCollins/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-06-024036-9. 32p.  5-9. 

In  Patricia  MacLachlan's  poetic  prose,  Great-grandfather  tells  of 
his  youth,  when  boys  wore  overalls  with  buckles  and  rode  to 
school  in  wagons.  He  describes  a  loyal  dog  with  three  names — 
called  something  different  by  each  member  of  the  family.  Images 
of  the  prairie  are  offered  in  full-page,  sun-kissed  watercolor 
impressions  of  life  that  "stretch  out  like  a  quilt  all  around/7 
Sensory  impressions— smells  of  harness  leather,  of  wood,  and  of 
hay— pervade.  A  likely  companion  book  is  Cynthia  Rylant's 
When  I  Was  Young  in  the  Mountains. 

5.25  McDonald,  Megan.  Is  This  a  House  for  Hermit  Crab?  Illus- 
trated by  S.  D.  Schindler.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08455-8.  26p.  3-7  (est.). 

Hermit  Crab  is  not  happy  with  his  old  house— the  shell  on  his 
back — so  he  sets  out  in  search  of  a  new  house  before  the  hungry 
pricklepine  fish  finds  him  and  eats  him.  So  he  walks  "along  the 
shore,  by  sea,  in  the  sand . . .  scritch-scratch,  scritch-scratch"  in 
search  of  a  new  home.  But  every  possible  home  that  he  finds  is 
too  dark  or  too  deep  or  has  too  many  holes  or  is  already  some- 
one else's  home.  Is  there  any  house  for  Hermit  Crab?  Pastel 
double-page  spreads  realistically  depect  the  hermit  crabs,  prick- 
lepine fish,  and  fiddler  crabs  of  the  story.  IRA  Children's  Book 
Award,  1991. 

5.26  Moore,  Inga.  Six-Dinner  Sid.  Illustrated  by  Inga  Moore.  Simon 
and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-671-73199- 
8.  28p.  6-10  (est). 


146 


Animal  Stories 


111 


Sid  the  cat  has  six  homes  and  six  owners;  consequently,  he  eats 
six  dinners  each  day.  But  when  he  comes  down  with  a  cold  and 
is  taken  to  the  vet  six  times,  Sid's  secret  is  discovered,  and  his 
six-meal-a-day  life  comes  to  an  end — that  is,  until  Sid  finds  new 
owners  who  feel  that  he  is  a  six-dinner-deserving  cat.  Full-color 
sketches  illustrate  this  humorous  tale  of  a  sociable  and  industri- 
ous cat  with  a  mind  of  his  own. 

5.27  Naylor,  Phyllis  Reynolds.  Shiloh.  Atheneum,  1991.  ISBN  0-689- 
31614-3. 144p.  8-13  (est). 

When  a  bedraggled,  uncertain  beagle  follows  eleven-year-old 
Marty  home  from  near  the  Shiloh  schoolhouse,  Marty  falls  in 
love  with  the  dog  and  calls  him  Shiloh.  Marty  learns  that  the  dog 
is  being  abused  by  its  owner,  and  he  faces  a  dilemma  between 
social  and  moral  responsibilities.  When  he  decides  to  hide  Shi- 
loh in  a  pen  beyond  his  family's  West  Virginia  home,  he  dis- 
obeys his  parents,  endangers  the  dog,  and  jeopardizes  his  fam- 
ily's trust.  Marty's  determination  and  monumental  effort  to  gain 
Shiloh's  freedom  make  for  a  lasting  story.  Nexvbery  Medal,  1992. 

5.28  Ormerod,  Jan.  Kitten  Day.  Illustrated  by  Jan  Ormerod.  Lothrop, 


Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08537-7.  32p.  3-6 
(est). 


When  a  shy  little,  clever  little,  cheeky  little  kitten  enters  a  young 
child's  life,  she  must  be  patient  and  gentle  and  calm  to  win  the 
kitten's  confidence.  And  so  she  is.  One  line  of  simple,  rhythmic 
text  runs  along  the  bottom  of  the  page  beneath  Jan  Ormerod's 
trademark  divided-page  illustrations  of  a  child  giving  loving 
attention  to  her  new  pet. 

5.29     Pedersen,  Judy  The  Tiny  Patient.  Illustrated  by  Judy  Pedersen. 


Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-90170-3.  32p. 


Simple  human  compassion  for  a  wounded  wild  bird  warms  this 
story.  The  straightforward  narrative  relates  the  way  a  young  girl 
and  her  grandmother  care  for  a  sparrow  with  a  broken  wing. 
The  nature  theme  is  carried  into  the  soft  illustrations  and  even 
the  endpapers,  colored  in  mellow  earth-tones. 

5.30     Pryor,  Bonnie.  Greenbrook  Farm.  Illustrated  by  Mark  Graham. 


Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-671- 
69205^.  26p.  6-10  (est). 


4-8. 


112 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Springtime  at  Greenbrook  Farm  means  the  smell  of  apple  blos- 
soms and  the  arrival  of  baby  animals.  Seen  through  the  eyes  of 
a  young  girl  narrator  going  about  her  morning  chores,  life  on  the 
farm  is  filled  with  the  excitement  and  activity  of  a  spring  day 
Full-page  impressionistic  paintings  help  capture  the  wonder  of 
new  beginnings  and  the  warmth  of  family  tradition. 

5.31  Ryder,  Joanne.  Catching  tne  Wind.  Lizard  in  the  Sun.  Winter 
Whale.  Illustrated  by  Michael  Rothman.  Morrow  Junior  Books, 
1989-91.  32p.  4-7. 

The  Just  for  a  Day  series  invites  readers  to  "become"  a  member 
of  a  flock  of  Canada  geese,  or  a  chameleon,  or  a  humpback 
whale  in  a  tropical  sea.  Joanne  Ryder's  lyrical  descriptions  read 
almost  like  poetry,  while  Michael  Rothman's  naturalistic,  dou- 
ble-page paintings  serve  as  background.  Additional  contribu- 
tors to  the  series  are  zoologists,  who  have  ensured  that  children 
read  accurate  portrayals  of  living  animals  at  the  same  time  as 
they  enjoy  imagining  the  world  from  alternative  points  of  view. 

5.32  Rylant,  Cynthia.  Henry  and  Mudge  Get  the  Cold  Shivers:  The 
Seventh  Book  of  Their  Adventures.  Illustrated  by  Su?ie  Steven- 
son. Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-778011-2.  48p.  5-7  (est.). 

Two  special  friends,  Henry  and  his  huge,  lovable  dog,  Mudge, 
are  both  sick.  While  Henry  is  confined  to  his  bed,  Mudge  faith- 
fully stays  at  his  side.  When  Henry  finally  recovers,  Mudge 
won't  get  up,  so  Mom  decides  Mudge  must  go  to  the  vet.  Now 
it's  Henry's  turn  to  be  the  devoted  bedside  companion  while 
Mudge  recuperates.  This  easy-to-read  chapter  book  is  the  sev- 
enth in  a  series  about  Henry  and  his  dog.  Children  who  love 
dogs  or  who  fantasize  about  owning  a  Mudge  might  try  their 
hands  at  writing  Henry  and  Mudge  stories  or  other  pet  adven- 
tures of  their  own. 

5.33  Schoenherr,  John.  Bear.  Illustrated  by  John  Schoenherr.  Philomel 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-22177-8. 28p.  4-8. 

All  alone,  a  young  bear  confronts  the  unforgiving  wilderness. 
Fearful  and  hungry,  he  faces  an  angry  moose,  an  old  bear,  and  a 
stream  of  salmon  that  elude  his  grasp.  But,  with  practice,  he 
learns  to  fish  and  to  survive  on  his  own.  Double-page  spreads  in 
realistic  watercolors  heighten  the  drama  of  the  cub's  search  for 
his  mother.  Using  browns,  blues,  and  greys,  Caldecott-winning 
artist  John  Schoenherr  invites  the  reader  into  the  Alaskan  land- 
scape. 


ERIC 


14S 


Ethnic,  Racial  and  Religious  Groups 


113 


5.34  Sharmat,  Marjorie  Weinman.  I'm  the  Best!  Illustrated  by  Will 
Hillenbrand.  Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0859-0. 29p.  6-9 
(est). 

Dudley  the  dog  is  called  Sparky,  Fluffy,  Mopsy,  Cedric,  and  Fritz 
as  he  is  shuffled  from  owner  to  owner  with  varying  degrees  of 
love  and  affection.  His  most  recent  home,  however,  may  be  the 
best  of  all.  Robert's  loss  of  his  dog,  Fritz,  who  looked  remarkably 
like  Dudley,  causes  him  to  select  Dudley  from  the  many  choices 
at  the  local  pound.  As  Robert  and  Dudley  become  acquainted, 
each  begins  to  love  the  other  for  his  own  unique  qualities.  Teach- 
ers may  wish  to  use  this  book  for  a  discussion  about  learning  to 
love  and  get  along  with  new  members  of  a  family  or  community. 

5.35  Taylor,  Theodore.  Tuck  Triumphant.  Doubleday,  1991.  ISBN  0- 
385-41480-3. 150p.  9  and  up  (est.). 

In  this  sequel  to  The  Trouble  with  Tuck,  Helen's  family  discovers 
that  Chok-Do,  the  Korean  orphan  whom  they  are  adopting,  is 
deaf.  Believing  themselves  unable  to  cope  with  his  disability, 
they  search  for  a  practical  but  loving  solution.  As  the  title  sug- 
gests, Tuck  provides  the  answer.  A  roller  coaster  of  emotions 
results  when  Tuck,  a  blind  golden  Lab,  and  her  own  guide-dog, 
Daisy,  become  the  the  thread  which  binds  this  story  into  one  of 
compassion  and  understanding  for  families  and  classrooms. 

5.36  Vyner,  Sue.  The  Stolen  Egg.  Illustrated  by  Tim  Vyner.  Viking 
Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670-84460-8.  32p.  4-6  (est.). 

"Something  was  coming  "  With  each  successive  invasion,  an 

egg  is  transported  to  the  habitat  of  the  thief,  who  compares  it 
with  her  own  eggs.  First,  an  albatross  swoops  down  upon  it,  but 
before  long  the  egg  is  carried  away,  in  turn,  by  the  snake,  the 
crocodile,  the  ostrich,  and  the  tortoise.  Finally,  the  albatross  re- 
appears to  carry  the  egg  far  across  the  seas  to  the  place  where 
she  found  it — at  the  feet  of  a  father  penguin.  In  a  patterned  tale 
with  large-scale,  realistic  animals,  the  end  is  a  joyous  family 
reunion. 

Ethnic,  Racial,  and  Religious  Groups 

5.37  Crew,  Linda.  Children  of  the  River.  Delacorte  Press,  1989.  ISBN 
0-385-29690-8.  213p.  12  and  up  (est.). 

Sundara  escapes  war-torn  Cambodia  only  one  step  ahead  of  the 
Khmer  Rouge  army,  but  as  she  flees  to  America  she  is  forced  to 


149 


114 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


leave  behind  her  family.  In  America,  she  finds  herself  struggling 
to  keep  alive  her  Cambodian  heritage— which  demands  that  she 
wait  for  her  missing  family  to  arrange  her  marriage  to  a  Cambo- 
dian boy— while  resisting  the  strong  affection  that  she  feels  for 
Jonathan,  an  American  high  school  boy  She  cannot  help  but 
wonder:  is  she  disloyal  to  her  heritage  if  she  feels  love  for  this 
American?  IRA  Children's  Book  Award,  1990. 

5.38  Dooley,  Norah.  Everybody  Cooks  Rice.  Illustrated  by  Peter  J. 
Thornton.  Carolrhoda  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-87614-412-1. 30p.  4-9. 

As  Carrie  goes  from  house  to  house  searching  for  her  brother, 
she  discovers  that  each  family  from  a  different  country  is  mak- 
ing a  rice  dish.  The  full-page  paintings  support  cultural  diver- 
sity through  the  depictions  of  realistic  family  settings  and  char- 
acters. The  use  of  solid  figures,  bright  colors,  and  specific 
cultural  characteristics  by  illustrator  Peter  Thornton  produces 
an  ideal,  culturally  diverse  neighborhood.  The  recipes  for  rice 
included  in  the  back  provide  a  useful  means  for  encouraging 
respect  for  diversity  in  the  classroom. 

5.39  Guy,  Rosa.  The  Ups  and  Downs  of  Carl  Davis  III.  Delacorte 
Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-29724-6. 115p.  10  and  up. 

For  a  New  York  boy  of  twelve  possessing  "intellectual  ability 
transcend[ing]  that  of  most  children  my  age/'  going  to  live  with 
his  grandmother  in  rural  South  Carolina  is  akin  to  exile.  Carl's 
puffery  sets  him  apart  from  the  community;  kids  at  school  con- 
sider him  a  show-off,  prattling  on  about  black  history.  Grandma 
is  patient;  she  has  lived  the  history  and  suffered  the  racism  that 
Carl  experiences  through  a  teacher.  Grandma  knows  how  to 
speak  from  the  heart.  In  a  story  told  entirely  through  letters 
home,  Carl's  frustration  and  confusion  are  replaced  by  growing 
acceptance  of  others  and  himself.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade 
Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.40  Levin,  Ellen.  I  Hate  English!  Illustrated  by  Steve  Bjorkman. 
Scholastic,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-42305-3.  32p.  6-9. 

Mei  Mei  hates  English.  In  a  heartwarming  story  of  one  child's 
determined  resistance  to  learning  English  and  her  real,  recogniz- 
able fears  that  she  will  lose  her  own  identity  in  the  midst  of  this 
new  language,  Ellen  Levine  succeeds  in  translating  an  important 
theme.  At  the  Chinatown  Learning  Center  in  New  York,  bright 
Mei  Mei,  a  newcomer  from  Hong  Kong,  works  happily — in  Chi- 
nese. But  an  inspired  teacher  with  clever  methods  makes  English 


150 


Human  Relationships 


irresistible.  Now,  Mei  Mei  speaks  in  whichever  language  she 
chooses. 

5.41  Myers,  Walter  Dean.  The  Mouse  Rap.  Harper  and  Row,  1990. 
ISBN  0-06-024344-9. 186p.  8-12  (est.). 

A  busy  summer  is  in  store  for  Mouse,  a  fourteen-year-old  boy  in 
Harlem.  Over  a  period  of  twelve  weeks,  he  battles  a  bully,  falls 
in  and  out  of  love,  learns  to  dance,  improves  his  basketball 
game,  and  grapples  with  his  father's  possible  return  to  the  fam- 
ily. Along  the  way,  he  discovers  a  gangster's  fortune.  The  award- 
winning  author's  style  includes  African  American  dialect,  play- 
ful slang,  and  a  rap-lyric  introduction  to  each  chapter. 

5.42  Polacco,  Patricia.  Just  Plain  Fancy.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Po- 
lacco.  Bantam/Little  Rooster  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-553-07062-2. 
32p.  4r3. 

Naomi  longs  to  have  something  fancy,  even  though  it's  not  the 
way  of  her  Amish  community.  So  when  she  discovers  a  fancy 
egg  while  out  gathering  hen  eggs,  Naomi  decides  to  keep  it.  She 
is  delighted  with  the  peacock  that  hatches  from  the  egg,  until  she 
discovers  that  the  Amish  shun  people  who  dress  too  fancy. 
Though  Naomi  fears  the  worst,  the  outcome  of  this  conflict  is 
rewarding  for  everyone  in  this  Amish  community. 

Human  Relationships 

Everyday  Life 

5.43  Brillhart,  Julie.  Story  Hour — Starring  Megan!  Illustrated  by 
Julie  Brillhart.  Albert  Whitman,  1992.  ISBN  0-8075-7628-X.  28p. 
4-7. 

On  days  when  the  baby-sitter  can't  come,  Megan's  mother,  a 
librarian,  takes  Megan  and  her  baby  brother  Nathan  to  work. 
Megan  is  her  mother's  assistant — watering  plants  and  decorat- 
ing the  bulletin  board.  But  best  of  all  about  the  library,  Megan 
likes  to  read  books.  She  can't  wait  to  read  them,  and  she  reads 
everyplace  she  goes — at  home,  at  school,  and  in  between.  Then 
one  day,  right  during  story  hour,  baby  Nathan  howls,  and  guess 
who  substitutes  as  story  reader? 

5.44  Bunting,  Eve.  No  Nap.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Meddaugh.  Clarion 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-89919-813-9. 32p.  2-6  (est.). 


ERLC 


151 


116 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


"Daddy  promised  Mommy  that  Susie  would  take  a  nap."  But  try 
as  he  might,  Susie  is  resistant.  Dad's  every  plan  and  indul- 
gence— snacking,  walking,  dancing,  reading  sleepy  books,  gath- 
ering favorite  toys — result  in  Susie's  refrain:  "No  nap."  Finally, 
while  coaxing  Susie  to  pretend  to  be  a  sleepy  little  mouse  who 
doesn't  talk  or  move,  Dad  falls  asleep  in  the  midst  of  the  strewn 
nap  offerings.  Light-touch  illustrations  translate  the  humor  to 
small  children. 

5.45  Byars,  Betsy.  Bingo  Brown's  Guide  to  Romance.  Viking  Pen- 
guin, 1992.  ISBN  0-670-84491-8. 115p.  10-13  (est). 

Bingo  Brown  is  writing  a  guide  to  romance,  dedicated  to  his 
baby  brother.  At  least,  Bingo  is  planning  the  guide — as  a  ques- 
tion-answer treatise,  such  as  what  if  you  send  your  true  love  a 
photocopied  love  letter  because  it  was  so  good  that  you  decided 
to  keep  a  copy?  Without  warning,  Bingo's  girlfriend  Melissa  is 
back  in  town,  acting  strangely  and  causing  Bingo  to  doubt  him- 
self and  to  behave  weirdly.  In  Bingo's  fourth  adventure,  his 
crush  is  funny,  real,  and  painful. 

5.46  Byars,  Betsy.  Wanted ...  Mud  Blossom.  Illustrated  by  Jac- 
queline Rogers.  Delacorte  Press,  1991.  ISBN  0-385-30428-5. 148p. 
8-12. 

Everything  has  turned  upside  down  at  the  Blossom  household. 
Mom's  new  beau  has  canceled  his  weekend  visit.  Mad  Mary,  a 
local  homeless  person  who  is  feared  by  some  and  loved  by 
others,  is  missing.  And  young  Junior  Blossom  has  accused  his 
grandfather's  dog,  Mud,  of  eating  the  class  hamster  that  he 
brought  home  from  school  for  the  weekend.  As  usual,  Betsy 
Byars  creatively  brings  each  story  to  a  happy  conclusion  while 
managing  to  capture  the  absurdities  of  situations  and  the  feel- 
ings of  each  member  of  the  Blossom  family. 

5.47  Carlstrom,  Nancy  White.  The  Snow  Speaks.  Illustrated  by  Jane 
Dyer.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-12861-9.  30p.  6-10. 

Alliterative  language  in  a  simple  verse-like  style  reveals  the 
sights  and  sounds  of  the  first  snow  as  two  children  watch  for  the 
snowplow,  go  down  to  the  mailbox,  make  snow  angels,  and  wait 
for  the  coming  of  Christmas.  Their  bright  snow  suits,  along  with 
the  colors  of  the  holiday,  contrast  with  soft  hues  of  the  seasonal 
snowfall. 

5.48  Coats,  Laura  Jane.  Mr.  Jordan  in  the  Park.  Illustrated  by  Laura 
Jane  Coats.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-719053-6. 27p.  4-8  (est.). 


ERiC 


152 


Human  Relationships 


117 


Mr.  Jordan  has  always  loved  the  park.  As  a  baby,  he  rode  in  his 
carriage  through  the  park,  and  as  a  toddler,  he  fed  the  birds.  Still 
later,  he  played  games  and  rode  his  bicycle  through  the  park, 
and  in  time  he  married  and  shared  activities  in  the  park  with  his 
family.  Although  Mr.  Jordan  is  now  old,  the  park  is  still  very 
much  a  part  of  his  life.  The  simple  narrative  and  pale  tints  of  the 
illustrations  reveal  the  richness  of  a  life  as  it  passes  through 
different  phases.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of 
Social  Studies. 

5.49  Cole,  Barbara  Hancock.  Texas  Star.  Illustrated  by  Barbara  Min- 
ton.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531- 
08420-5-  32p.  4-7. 

With  the  first  frost,  Mama  brings  in  the  begonias  and  the  family 
begins  preparations  for  winter — including  preparing  the  house 
for  a  quilting  party  to  finish  Mama's  Texas  star  quilt.  Even 
though  Papa  grumbles  that  no  new  quilt  is  needed,  he  partici- 
pates in  scrubbing,  polishing,  baking,  and  setting  up  the  quilt 
frame  in  the  front  room.  Illustrations  in  luminous  pastel  shades 
offer  varying  perspectives  on  the  cozy  scenes.  The  book  could  be 
grouped  with  Valerie  Flournoy's  The  Patchwork  Quilt,  Patricia 
Polacco's  The  Keeping  Quilt,  and  others. 

5.50  Downing,  Julie.  White  Snow,  Blue  Feather.  Illustrated  by  Julie 
Downing.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-732530-X.  32p.  2-6. 

A  little  boy  marvels  at  the  wonders  of  a  wintry  landscape  after 
a  deep  snow.  But  of  all  the  joys  of  nature  that  he  discovers,  it  is 
the  blue  jay's  feather,  "a  piece  of  the  sky/'  that  he  carries  home 
to  his  mother.  Pastel  winter  scenes  here  contrast  with  the  vivid 
images  in  Jack  Keats's  Snowy  Day.  But  like  Keats's  classic,  simple 
text  reflects  the  exhilaration  of  snow  play. 

5.51  Hoban,  Russell.  Monsters.  Illustrated  by  Quentin  Blake.  Scho- 
lastic Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-43422-5.  32p.  6-9. 

John  incessantly  draws  monsters.  Parents  and  teachers  of  young 
children  will  recognize  the  behavior  and  the  drawings  them- 
selves— a  child's  scrap-paper  renderings  of  toothed  and  armed 
creatures  jutting  firepower.  Urged  by  his  mother  to  draw  some- 
thing else — something  real— John  complies.  As  his  drawing  of  a 
really  big,  really  serious,  really  threatening  "something"  begins 
to  take  shape  over  several  days  and  several  papers,  a  kindly 
therapist  invites  John  to  finish  it.  But  finishing  something  real 
means  an  uncertain  future  for  the  grownups  in  John's  life. 


118 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


5.52  Jackson,  Alison.  Crane's  Rebound.  Illustrated  by  Diane  Dawson 
Hearn.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-535-44722-9. 
122p.  8  and  up. 

Away  from  home  for  the  first  time  at  basketball  camp,  Leslie 
Crane  must  learn  to  deal  with  his  attraction  to  a  girl  at  the  camp, 
a  bully  who  seems  never  to  miss  a  shot  on  the  court,  and  his  little 
brother,  who  calls  almost  every  day.  But  can  he  also  make  it 
through  his  first  double-date  movie  with  the  Girl  of  His  Dreams? 
This  is  truly  light,  fun  reading  for  kids,  with  no  message  beyond 
"Enjoy  yourself." 

5.53  Johnson,  Angela.  Do  Like  Kyla.  Illustrated  by  James  E.  Ran- 
some.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531- 
08452-3.  32p.  4-7. 

All  day  Kyla's  younger  sister  follows  her,  imitating  her  every 
move,  whether  it  is  braiding  her  hair,  putting  honey  on  all  her 
food,  or  crunching  in  the  snow.  Then  something  different  hap- 
pens between  follower  and  leader — the  roles  shift.  Full-page  oil 
paintings  in  bold  colors  depict  two  African  American  sisters  as 
they  experience  everyday  life.  Engaging  illustrations  extend  the 
simple  account  narrated  by  the  little  sister. 

5.54  Khalsa,  Dayal  Kaur.  How  Pizza  Came  to  Queens.  Illustrated  by 
Dayal  Kaur  Khalsa.  Clarkson  N.  Potter,  1989.  ISBN  0-517-57126- 
9.  32p.  6-9. 

When  Mrs.  Pelligrino  comes  to  visit  from  Italy,  she  seems  sad 
and  lonely  most  of  the  time.  It's  evident  that  she  misses  pizza, 
but  no  one  knows  who  or  what  pizza  is,  and  Mrs.  Pelligrino 
doesn't  know  enough  English  to  explain.  Then,  after  Penny  and 
May  do  their  "homework"  at  the  library,  they  buy  pizza  ingre- 
dients for  Mrs.  Pelligrino,  and  everyone  is  a  winner.  Mrs.  Pelli- 
grino is  happy  to  cook  her  favorite  food,  and  an  entire  American 
neighborhood  discovers  a  new  and  exciting  dish.  Paintings  are 
brilliantly  colored,  folk-art  simple,  and  1950s-innocent. 

5.55  Kimmelman,  Leslie.  Frannie's  Fruits.  Illustrated  by  Petra  Math- 
ers. Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-023164-5.  32p.  5-7  (est.). 

A  rural  summertime  fruit,  vegetable,  and  flower  stand  near  the 
beach  serves  as  the  setting  for  a  day-in-the-life  story  of  an  ele- 
mentary-school girl  and  her  dog.  The  girl  helps  her  family  by 
doing  chores  at  the  stand,  where  she  learns  about  a  range  of 
shoppers  and  their  preferences.  Playful,  childlike  paintings 


ERIC 


154 


Human  Relationships 


119 


match  the  story.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of 
Social  Studies. 

5.56  Konigsburg,  E.  L.  Amy  Elizabeth  Explores  Bloomingdale's.  Il- 
lustrated by  E.  L.  Konigsburg.  Atheneum/Jean  Karl  Books,  1992. 
ISBN  0-689-31766-2. 32p.  4-8  (est.). 

On  pages  as  yellow  as  New  York  taxis,  and  border-checked  to 
boot,  Amy  Elizabeth  from  Houston  visits  her  grandmother  in 
New  York.  With  straight-faced  charm,  Amy  Elizabeth  makes 
observations  on  the  Big  Apple,  comparing  its  attributes  with  her 
home  town:  "In  Houston,  people  who  have  pets  don't  have 
pooper-scoopers  because  they  have  lawns/'  All  during  their 
event-packed  visit,  Grandmother  promises  a  trip  to  Blooming- 
dale's,  but  they  never  quite  make  it.  It  was,  according  to  Amy, 
"an  excellent  time  not  getting  there." 

5.57  Maestro,  Betsy.  Snow  Day.  Illustrated  by  Giulio  Maestro.  Scho- 
lastic Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41283-3. 32p.  4-8  (est.). 

Gray  snow  skies  and  snow  smells  signal  the  approaching  storm. 
Dry  brush  strokes  spread  the  snowfall  across  the  pages.  After  the 
storm,  the  town  is  "white  and  still . . . ,  buried  in  deep  drifts  that 
cover  the  roads  and  sidewalks."  Even  though  the  children  get  to 
sled  and  build  snowpeople,  there  is  plenty  of  work  for  adults  as 
the  community  digs  out.  Snow  colors  juxtapose  against  the  or- 
ange-reds and  yellow-greens  of  snow-removal  equipment  turn- 
ing quiet  stillness  into  action. 

5.58  Merriam,  Eve.  The  Wise  Woman  and  Her  Secret.  Illustrated  by 
Linda  Graves.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers, 
1991.  ISBN  0-671-72603-X.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

When  villagers  seek  an  explanation  for  the  wisdom  of  the  old 
woman  who  lives  in  the  hills,  she  invites  them  to  discover  the 
secret  for  themselves.  They  search  her  barn,  test  her  well,  and 
pull  at  the  branches  of  her  tree — all  except  Jenny,  who  gathers 
pebbles  on  the  pathway,  delights  in  a  spider's  web,  and  exam- 
ines a  penny  drawn  from  the  well.  When  Jenny  shares  the  penny 
with  the  old  woman  and  asks  a  string  of  questions,  the  secret  of 
wisdom  is  revealed — to  be  curious,  "to  keep  on  wandering  and 
wondering." 

5.59  Miller,  Jim  Wayne.  Newfound.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-05845-X.  256p.  12  and  up. 


ERIC 


155 


120 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Newfound  chronicles  the  adolescence  of  Robert  Wells  in  rural 
Tennessee.  After  his  parents  peacefully  separate,  Robert  begins 
exploring  his  family  history  as  well  as  the  Appalachian  country- 
side. He  becomes  closer  to  both  sets  of  grandparents  (who  coex- 
ist on  the  same  farm),  watches  his  mother  become  more  inde- 
pendent, goes  coon  hunting,  and  finds  a  girlfriend.  An  honest 
account  of  the  pain  and  tension,  as  well  as  the  love,  which 
characterize  a  rather  unusual  extended  family. 

5.60  Nabb,  Magdalen.  Josie  Smith.  Illustrated  by  Pirkko  Vainio.  Mar- 
garet K.  McElderry  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-50485-3.  72p.  6^-8 
(est). 

First  published  in  England,  this  book  presents  three  misadven- 
tures of  an  enterprising  young  child,  Josie  Smith,  who  lives 
alone  with  her  mother.  In  the  first  chapter,  Josie  must  find  a  way 
to  buy  her  mother  birthday  flowers  with  no  money.  Other  story 
chapters  find  Josie  painting  a  chalkboard  but  forgetting  to  pro- 
tect her  room  from  splatters,  and  adopting  a  cat  who  doesn't 
need  a  home.  Child  characters  are  direct  with  one  another,  and 
Briticisms  add  interest  to  the  discourse. 

5.61  Paulsen,  Gary.  The  Winter  Room.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-531-08439-6. 103p.  11  and  up. 

Gary  Paulsen's  earthy  description  of  sights,  sounds,  and  smells 
guide  a  tour  through  the  seasons  on  a  remote  northern  Minne- 
sota farm  during  the  1930s.  Eldon,  the  narrator,  lives  and  works 
with  his  older  brother  Wayne,  an  eighth  grader,  his  parents,  and 
two  elderly  Norwegians,  Nels  and  Uncle  David.  Their  home's 
"winter  room"  is  the  setting  for  woodcarving,  knitting,  tobacco 
chewing,  and,  especially,  storytelling  during  bitter  cold  and  dark 
months.  Newbery  Honor  Book,  1990. 

5.62  Pfeffer,  Susan  Beth,  Dear  Dad,  Love  Laurie.  Illustrated  by  Susan 
Beth  Pfeffer.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590- 
41681-2. 120p.  8-12  (est.). 

This  book,  written  entirely  in  the  form  of  weekly  letters  from 
Laurie  to  her  divorced  father  in  Missouri,  describes  a  young 
girl's  highs  and  lows  during  sixth  grade.  In  the  course  of  one 
year,  Laurie  encounters  new  friends,  disastrous  birthday  parties, 
fights  with  her  mother,  and  loving  reconciliations.  The  book  is  a 
good  companion  piece  to  Beverly  Cleary's  Newbery  award-win- 
ning Dear  Mr  Henshaw. 


156 


THE  , 

MOON 
?  LADY 

MteibyGRETCHEN  5CH1ELDS 


B. 


The  Grandpa  Days 


bv  Joan  W.  Bios  •  illustrated  by  Emily  Arnold  McCuNy 


A.  The  Rag  Coat  by  Lauren  Mills  (see  5. 
illustrated  by  Gretchen  Schields  (see  5.140). 
5.146).  D.  The  Grandpa  Days  by  Joan  W. 
(see  5.75). 

BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 

ERJC 


123).  B.  The  Moon  Lady  by  Amy  Tan; 
C.  Weird  Parents  by  Audrey  Wood  (see 
Bios;  illustrated  by  Emily  Arnold  McCully 


15? 


A 


B. 


A  I  ittlc 
1  \ci  lenient 


A.  Go  Fish  by  Mary  Stoltz;  illustrated  by  Pat  Cummings  (see  5.139).  B.  Laura 
Charlotte  by  Kathryn  O.  Galbraith;  illustrated  by  Floyd  Cooper  (see  5.93).  C.  When 
You  Were  Just  a  Little  Girlby  B.  G.  Hennessy;  illustrated  by  Jeanne  Arnold  (see  5.102). 
D.  A  Little  Excitement  by  Marc  Harshman;  illustrated  by  Ted  Rand  (see  5.99). 


158 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Human  Relationships 


121 


5.63  Rylant,  Cynthia.  Appalachian  The  Voices  of  Sleeping  Birds. 
Illustrated  by  Barry  Moser.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1991. 
ISBN  0-15-201605-8. 32p.  5  and  up. 

Through  Cynthia  Rylant,  a  native  of  West  Virginia,  and  Barry 
Moser,  of  Tennessee,  readers  gain  "from  the  inside"  a  sense  of 
place  and  the  people  who  live  there.  Lines  from  James  Agee — 
"All  my  people  are  larger  bodies  than  mine,  quiet,  with  voices 
gentle  and  meaningless  like  the  voices  of  sleeping  birds" — in- 
spire the  title.  Broad  margins  surround  double-page  spreads, 
with  blocks  of  text  facing  transparent  watercolors.  Boston  Globe- 
Horn  Book  Nonfiction  Award,  1991. 

5.64  Wilson,  Budge.  The  Leaving,  and  Other  Stories.  Philomel 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21878-5.  207p.  11  and  up. 

In  this  collection  of  short  stories,  nine  young  women  come  of  age 
in  the  Canadian  province  of  Nova  Scotia.  Told  with  sensitivity, 
the  stories  delve  into  the  conflicts  that  help  mold  each  young 
woman.  In  the  title  story,  a  young  narrator  accompanies  her 
mother  on  a  brief  journey  to  Halifax.  The  mother's  temporary 
escape  from  husband  and  home  changes  the  relations  between 
the  girl's  parents,  making  home  life  more  palatable.  These  are 
graceful  tales  marked  by  their  subtlety.  Canadian  Library  Associa- 
tion's Young  Adult  Book  Award,  1991. 

Family  Life 

5.65  Ackerman,  Karen.  Just  like  Max.  Illustrated  by  George  Schmidt. 
Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-394-90176-2.  32p. 
4-8  (est). 

All  day  long,  Great-Uncle  Max  works  on  suits  and  dresses  "for 
the  fancy  folk,"  while  seven-year-old  Aaron  watches.  When  Max 
has  a  stroke  and  can  no  longer  work,  Aaron  brings  him  cheer  by 
making  a  dress,  using  the  skills  that  he  has  learned  from  observ- 
ing Max.  Years  later,  it  is  Uncle  Aaron,  living  in  the  same  brown- 
stone  above  his  sister's  family,  who  shows  his  nephew  his  craft — 
writing.  Soft,  pastel  illustrations  create  a  quiet  mood  for  this 
tender  story  of  an  extended  family. 

5.66  Ackerman,  Karen.  Song  and  Dance  Man.  Illustrated  by  Stephen 
Gammell.  Alfred  A.  Knopf /Dragonfly  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-679- 
81995-9. 32p.  All  ages  (est.). 

The  "good  old  days,  the  song  and  dance  days"  were  when 
Grandpa  appeared  on  the  vaudeville  stage.  But  the  present  is 


159 


122 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


good,  too,  as  Grandpa  takes  his  three  grandchildren  to  the  attic, 
opens  an  old  trunk,  dons  hat  and  cane,  and  joyfully  reenacts  his 
younger  days.  Stephen  GammelTs  award-winning  colored-pen- 
cil illustrations — a  blaze  of  light  and  color — keep  readers  mind- 
ful of  advancing  years.  Caldecott  Medal,  1989;  ALA  Notable  Chil- 
dren's Books,  1988. 

5.67  Addy,  Sharon  Hart.  A  Visit  with  Great-Grandma.  Illustrated  by 
Lydia  Halverson.  Albert  Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075-8497-5. 
32p.  4-8  (est). 

A  little  girl  visits  her  great-grandmother  who  came  to  America 
from  Czechoslovakia.  Even  though  Great-Grandma  speaks  little 
English,  her  relationship  with  Barbara  is  full  of  communica- 
tion—especially when  they  make  kolaches  together.  The  two 
agree  that  they  listen  with  their  hearts.  From  the  photographs 
and  mementos  in  her  apartment,  Great-Grandma  shares  words 
from  stories  of  long  ago.  Illustrations  are  quiet  and  loving,  trav- 
eling across  space  and  time  when  Great-Grandma  remembers.  A 
recipe  for  kolaches  is  included. 

5.68  Adler,  C.  S.  One  Sister  Too  Many.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02- 
700271-3. 162p.  10-12  (est). 

While  trying  to  adjust  to  a  new  family  and  approaching  adoles- 
cence, the  outspoken,  impulsive  twelve-year-old  Case  tries  ever- 
yone's patience.  When  a  new  sitter  begins  to  take  care  of  her 
baby  sister,  Meredith,  only  Case  is  suspicious.  Why  does  this 
sitter  let  people  believe  that  Meredith  is  her  own  baby?  Why 
does  the  sitter  insist  that  Case  can't  love  her  new  baby  sister? 
When  baby  Meredith  is  missing  one  afternoon,  the  answers 
become  clear.  Middle-grade  readers  will  cheer  when  Case  solves 
the  mystery  and  saves  the  day  in  this  sequel  to  Split  Sisters. 

5.69  Anderson,  Lena.  Stina.  Illustrated  by  Lena  Anderson.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08881-3.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 

Stina  loves  her  summer  visits  with  her  grandfather,  who  lives  by 
the  seashore.  While  Grandpa  fishes  for  perch  and  flounder,  Stina 
finds  feathers,  smooth  sticks,  and  other  cherished  collectibles. 
Then,  during  a  "real  blow,"  Stina's  curiosity  leads  her  outside  to 
see  the  storm.  Rescued  by  Grandpa,  Stina  observes  the  storm 
with  her  grandfather  and  relishes  the  treasures  that  it  brings. 
Lena  Anderson's  gentle  characters  are  softly  portrayed  in  water- 
color. 

5.70  Anderson,  Lena.  Stina's  Visit.  Illustrated  by  Lena  Anderson. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09666-2.  32p.  4-8  (est). 


160 


Human  Relationships 


123 


The  summer  that  Stina  spends  with  her  grandfather  on  his  tiny 
island  is  the  kind  that  feeds  the  warmest  of  memories.  But  the 
most  interesting  of  all  Lena's  experiences  is  a  birthday  visit  to 
meet  her  grandfather's  somewhat  eccentric  friend,  who  has  a 
wonderfully  vivid  imagination. 

5.71  Auch,  Mary  Jane.  Mom  Is  Dating  Weird  Wayne.  Bantam/Sky- 
lark Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-553-15916-X.  146p.  8-12. 

Things  haven't  been  the  same  at  Jenna's  house  since  Dad  left  and 
married  Gladys,  "the  Vanna  White  of  the  recreational  vehicle 
industry."  Jenna's  artistic,  creative  mom  can't  seem  to  keep  a 
normal  job.  And  six-year-old  Corey  has  become  fearful  and  shy. 
Jenna's  best  friend,  Molly,  is  certain  that  everything  could  be 
solved  if  Mrs.  Bartholomew  would  just  marry  the  new  math 
teacher.  Instead,  Mom  meets  the  television  weatherman — Wacky 
Wayne.  Would  things  be  in  such  a  state  if  Dad  were  home? 

5*72  Barrett,  Joyce  Durham.  Willie's  Not  the  Hugging  Kind*  Illus- 
trated by  Pat  Cummings.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06- 
020417-6. 32p.  5-8. 

Willie  liked  hugging  until  his  best  friend  told  him  that  hugging 
was  silly.  Now  it  seems  that  hugging  is  everywhere—  his  teacher 
hugs  the  children;  his  sister  hugs  her  bear;  his  daddy  hugs  his 
mother— but  no  one  hugs  Willie  anymore.  "Willie,"  says  his 
sister,  "you're  just  not  the  hugging  kind. . . ,"  but  Willie  misses 
hugs,  and  hugging  trees  and  bath  towels  doesn't  really  work 
because  those  things  don't  hug  back.  Pat  Cummings's  brightly 
colored  details  and  caramel-perfect  faces  translate  the  story's 
warmth  and  security. 

5.73  Bawden,  Nina.  The  Outside  Child.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard 
Books.  ISBN  0-688-08965-8.  232p.  9-12  (est.). 

In  this  novel  set  in  England,  thirteen-year-old  Jane  lives  with  her 
two  eccentric  and  loving  aunts,  Sophie  and  Bill,  short  for  Wil- 
hemina.  Her  mother  died  when  Jane  was  young,  and  her  father 
is  a  sailor.  After  discovering  that  her  father  remarried  ten  years 
earlier,  Jane,  with  the  help  of  her  best  friend,  Plato,  learns  more 
about  her  half-brother  and  half-sister,  who  live  only  a  bus  ride 
away.  She  wins  their  friendship  before  revealing  her  identity 
and  comes  to  the  realization  that  her  place  is  with  her  aunts. 

5.74  Blake,  Robert  J.  The  Perfect  Spot.  Illustrated  by  Robert  J.  Blake. 
Philomel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22132-8.  32p.  4  and  up. 


161 


124 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


For  the  artist  father,  the  perfect  spot  is  where  light  and  shadows, 
trees  and  rocks  inspire  a  painting.  For  the  naturalist  son,  a  per- 
fect spot  is  where  frogs,  crickets,  beetles,  and  salamanders  beg 
to  be  caught.  Together,  each  with  his  own  equipment,  father  and 
son  hike  the  woods  looking  for  the  perfect  spot.  Also  together, 
and  quite  by  accident,  they  find  the  perfect  spot  for  both  their 
pursuits.  Robert  Blake's  watercolor  paintings  capture  the  forest 
trek. 

5.75  Bios,  Joan  W.  The  Grandpa  Days.  Illustrated  by  Emily  Arnold 
McCully.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989. 
ISBN  0-671-64640-0.  22p.  3-7. 

When  Philip  visits  his  grandfather  for  a  week,  he  discovers  that 
Grandpa  once  built  a  treehouse  from  special  drawings.  Philip 
then  draws  his  own  plans,  but  learns  that  it's  not  possible  to 
make  his  requested  rocket  ships  and  racing  cars  with  Grandpa's 
carpenter  tools.  Finally,  Philip  designs  something  they  can  make, 
and  together  they  hammer,  paint,  and  drill  to  build  a  new  sled. 
Pastel  watercolors  add  warmth  and  detail  to  the  pen-and-ink 
line  drawings,  which  capture  subtle  gesture. 

5.76  Bonners,  Susan.  The  Wooden  Doll.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Bon- 
ners.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-08282- 
3.  32p.  5-S. 

Although  Stephanie  enjoys  visiting  her  grandparents,  she  is  dis- 
appointed that  her  immigrant  grandfather  keeps  his  wooden 
doll  out  of  reach.  When  the  chance  arises,  she  brings  it  down 
from  the  top  of  the  china  cabinet  and  finds  a  family  of  smaller 
dolls  nested  inside  and  the  name  "Stephania"  written  under- 
neath. Stephanie  learns  that  the  doll  belonged  to  her  great- 
grandmother  in  Poland  and  that  her  grandfather  has  been  keep- 
ing the  doll  until  Stephanie  is  old  enough  to  treasure  it  herself. 
Homey,  warm  paintings  portray  family  love. 

5.77  Booth,  Barbara  D.  Mandy.  Illustrated  by  Jim  LaMarche.  Lothrop, 
Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10339-1. 32p.  6  and  up. 

Overcoming  her  fear  of  the  dark,  Mandy  sets  out  to  find  her 
grandmother's  treasured  pin  that  was  lost  during  their  earlier 
walk.  Barbara  Booth's  text  deals  knowledgeably  and  sensitively 
with  issues  related  to  deafness,  while  portraying  Mandy  as  a 
strong,  determined  character.  The  full-page  illustrations  express 
the  deep  relationship  between  Mandy  and  her  grandmother  by 
focusing  on  the  unspoken  understanding  between  them.  Rich 


162 


Human  Relationships 


125 


pinks  and  purples  dramatize  the  events  and  show  the  world 
from  Mandy's  point  of  view. 

5.78  Bourgeois,  Paulette.  Big  Sarah's  Little  Boots*  Illustrated  by 
Brenda  Clark.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590- 
42622-2.  32p.  3-6. 

One  rainy  day  Sarah  discovers  that  her  favorite  boots  no  longer 
fit.  Her  mother  explains  that  Sarah  has  grown,  an  explanation 
that  Sarah  rejects.  Convinced  that  the  boots  have  shrunk,  Sarah 
tries  every  possible  way  to  stretch  them.  Eventually,  though, 
with  the  help  of  her  understanding  mother,  Sarah  realizes  that 
new  and  bigger  boots  may  actually  be  better  than  her  favorite 
old  ones.  Sarah's  expressions  from  total  frustration  to  pure  joy 
are  perfectly  childlike. 

5.79  Brandenberg,  Franz.  Aunt  Nina,  Good  Night  Illustrated  by 
Aliki.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07464-2.  32p.  2-6 
(est.). 

Husband  and  wife  team  Franz  Brandenberg  and  Aliki  continue 
the  Aunt  Nina  series  with  a  colorful  and  appealing  story.  Remi- 
niscent of  Frances's  antics  in  Russell  Hoban's  Bedtiinefor  Frances, 
Nina's  nephews  and  nieces  devise  a  series  of  excuses  for  not 
going  to  bed,  excuses  that  their  Aunt  Nina  handles  adeptly. 
Bright,  distinctive  watercolor  illustrations  capture  the  energy  of 
the  characters  and  make  the  book  perfect  for  younger  readers 
and  listeners. 

5.80  Brooks,  Bruce.  What  Hearts*  HarperCollins /Laura  Geringer 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-021132-6. 194p.  10  and  up. 

Bruce  Brooks  presents  a  young  boy  at  four  junctures  in  his  life, 
each  of  which  requires  that  he  be  smart  and  forgiving  in  order 
to  survive  his  changed  world.  At  age  seven,  Asa  is  suddenly 
uprooted  because  of  divorce,  moves  with  his  mother  to  a  new 
state,  and  meets  Dave,  his  mother's  future  husband.  At  age  nine, 
he  faces  difficult  decisions  at  school;  at  eleven,  challenges  in- 
volve baseball;  and  at  twelve,  love.  In  all,  he  survives  tests  of 
both  head  and  heart.  Newbery  Honor  Book,  1993;  ALA  Notable 
Children's  Books,  1993. 

5.81  Bunting,  Eve.  Sharing  Susan.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06- 
021694-8. 122p.  10-12  (est.). 

Susan  Moretti  and  her  best  friend  Clemmie  call  it  the  "Big 
Worry."  Something  is  definitely  wrong  in  Susan's  normally  se- 


163 


126 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


•  cure  home.  Her  parents  stop  talking  when  she  enters  the  room, 
her  mom  is  constantly  teary,  and  her  dad  is  strained.  The  truth, 
when  it  emerges,  is  devastating:  because  of  a  hospital  mix-up 
when  she  was  born,  Susan  may  not  be  her  parents'  child.  Eve 
Bunting  effectively  captures  Susan's  horror  and  overwhelming 
confusion  as  two  families  pick  through  emotions  to  share  the 
sole  surviving  daughter — Susan. 

5.82  Bunting,  Eve.  The  Wednesday  Surprise*  Illustrated  by  Donald 
Carrick.  Clarion  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-89919-721-3. 32p.  5-8  (est.). 

When  Grandmother  comes  to  sit  on  Wednesdays,  she  always 
brings  a  big  bag  of  books.  Then  she  and  seven-year-old  Anna 
huddle  over  the  books,  heads  together  on  the  sofa,  preparing  for 
Papa's  birthday  surprise.  Touchingly  warm,  but  unsentimental, 
the  story's  surprise  is  withheld  from  the  reader  until  the  end, 
where  it  guarantees  meaty  discussion.  Donald  Carrick's  illustra- 
tions are  softly  rendered  in  diffused  light  and  shadows. 

5.83  Carson,  Jo.  Pulling  My  Leg.  Illustrated  by  Julie  Downing.  Or- 
chard Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08417-5. 
32p.  4-8  (est.). 

When  a  little  girl's  loose  tooth  interferes  with  eating  a  pork  chop, 
Uncle  Tom  declares  it's  time  for  an  "ex-trac-tion."  As  Uncle  Tom 
sends  for  the  necessary  implements — pliers,  hammer,  screw- 
driver, crowbar — the  little  girl  isn't  sure  whether  her  uncle  is 
trying  to  pull  her  tooth  or  her  leg.  The  cheerful  colored-pencil 
drawings  add  just  the  right  touches  of  energy  and  humor  to  this 
delightful  story. 

5.84  Caseley,  Judith.  The  Cousins.  Illustrated  by  Judith  Caseley. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08434-6.  24p.  4  and  up. 

Jenny  and  Jessica  are  first  cousins.  They  don't  look  a  bit  alike, 
and  they  don't  act  a  bit  alike.  When  they  were  toddlers,  Jenny 
liked  to  finger-paint;  Jessica  liked  to  knock  down  block  houses. 
Later,  Jessica  loved  ballet  lessons;  Jenny  preferred  arts-and-craf ts 
class.  The  girls  are  as  opposite  as  can  be — chalk  and  cheese, 
night  and  day.  This  is  a  celebration  of  individuality  enriched  by 
humorously  stylized  watercolor  and  colored-pencil  art. 

5.85  Caseley,  Judith.  Dear  Annie.  Illustrated  by  Judith  Caseley. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10011-2. 32p.  4  and  up. 

In  a  book  to  inspire  classroom  correspondence,  Judith  Caseley 
tells  of  Annie,  whose  correspondence  with  her  grandpa  began 


164 


Human  Relationships 


127 


with  her  birth,  when  she  would  ride  to  the  mailbox  in  a  baby 
carrier.  Now  in  school  and  able  to  reach  the  box  herself,  Annie 
has  a  shoe  box  with  over  one  hundred  treasured  cards  and  notes 
from  Grandpa  for  show-and-tell,  all  simple  testaments  to  their 
affection.  The  text  is  composed  almost  entirely  of  Annie's  corre- 
spondence to  and  from  Grandpa,  and  the  illustrations  are  ren- 
dered in  watercolors  and  colored  pencils. 

5.86  Caseley,  Judith.  The  Noisemakers.  Illustrated  by  Judith  Caseley. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09395-7.  24p.  4  and  up. 

Young  Sam  and  Laura  love  to  growl,  roar,  and  be  boisterous.  On 
an  outing,  the  two  friends  cause  trouble  at  a  library,  a  restaurant, 
and  a  shopping  mall,  much  to  the  chagrin  of  their  mothers.  The 
outing  finally  ends  at  a  spot  where  noisemakers  can  do  what 
they  do  best,  and  their  mothers  will  think  they  are  wonderful. 
Vivid  watercolor  and  colored-pencil  illustrations  offer  interest- 
ing patterns  and  details  and  depict  quite  typical  children. 

5.87  Cohen,  Barbara.  The  Long  Way  Home.  Illustrated  by  Diane  de 
Groat.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09674- 
3. 160p.  10  and  up. 

Because  of  their  mother's  chemotherapy,  big  changes  have  oc- 
curred in  the  lives  of  ten-year-old  twins  Sally  and  Emily  Instead 
of  vacationing  at  the  beach,  they  must  attend  day  camp,  where 
they  are  separated.  Of  the  two,  Sally  has  the  most  trouble  feeling 
positive  about  anything,  until  she  gains  the  friendship  of  the 
lovable  but  flaky  bus  driver,  Claire.  With  Claire's  help,  Sally 
learns  to  confront  her  true  feelings  and  conflicting  emotions 
regarding  her  mother's  illness. 

5.88  Collier,  James  Lincoln.  The  Winchesters.  Avon/Flare  Books, 
1989.  ISBN  0-380-70808-6. 169p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Chris  Winchester  and  his  family  are  the  "poor  relatives"  in  the 
wealthy  Winchester  clan  of  New  England.  Chris's  grandfather 
owns  the  town's  major  business,  the  mill,  where  dissatisfied 
workers  are  ready  to  go  on  strike.  Chris  is  never  really  accepted 
by  either  his  rich  relatives  or  the  town's  blue-collar  families. 
Ultimately,  the  teenager  learns  that  happiness  comes  with  being 
true  to  oneself,  rather  than  trying  to  comply  with  the  dictates  of 
others.  Oklahoma  Sequoyah  Young  Adult  Book  Award. 

5.89  Collins,  Pat  Lowery.  Taking  Care  of  Tucker.  Illustrated  by  Maxie 
Chambliss.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21586-7.  26p. 
2-7. 


ERiC 


165 


128 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Millie's  aunt  and  uncle  are  taking  a  trip,  and  three-year-old 
cousin  Tucker  is  coming  to  stay  with  Millie's  family  Millie 
knows  that  she'll  do  a  great  job  caring  for  Tucker,  but  homesick 
little  Tucker  does  not  cooperate.  He  cries,  he  kicks,  he  bites,  he 
spits,  and  he  screams.  Finally,  as  Millie  begins  to  despair,  she 
discovers  just  the  way  to  handle  Tucker.  Cartoon-like  ink  draw- 
ings filled  in  with  bright  watercolors  add  to  the  delight  that 
readers  will  take  in  Tucker's  mischief. 

5.90  DeClements,  Barthe.  Breaking  Out  Delacorte  Press,  1991.  ISBN 
0-385-30503-6. 130p.  9-12. 

It's  not  easy  having  your  dad  in  prison,  and  it's  even  worse  if 
some  of  your  friends  watched  him  get  arrested.  In  this  third 
book  in  a  series,  Bart  DeClements  deals  with  thirteen-year-old 
Jerry's  simultaneous  struggles  to  be  accepted  and  to  be  true  to 
his  own  unique  strengths.  While  he  comes  to  terms  with  his 
dad's  talents  and  the  judgments  of  friends,  next-door  neighbor 
Grace  wrestles  for  her  own  kind  of  independence  in  this  sequel 
to  Five-Finger  Discount  and  Monkey  See,  Monkey  Do. 

5.91  Delaney,  Molly.  My  Sister.  Illustrated  by  Molly  Delaney. 
Atheneum,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-31460-4.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 

A  little  girl  knows  all  too  well  what  it  means  to  be  the  younger 
sister — hand-me-downs,  teasing,  and  a  chance  to  lick  the  spoon 
(only  when  it's  been  used  for  mud  pies).  But  that's  only  part  of 
the  story.  This  little  sister  also  admits  that  when  push  comes  to 
shove,  it's  mighty  nice  to  have  a  big  sister. 

5.92  Dionetti,  Michelle.  Coal  Mine  Peaches.  Illustrated  by  Anita  Rig- 
gio.  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08548-1.  32p.  4-7. 

Hard  work  was  always  part  of  Grandfather's  life,  but  so  was 
storytelling.  As  a  boy  in  the  coal  mines,  Grandfather  entertained 
his  brothers  with  stories.  As  a  young  man  in  New  York  City,  he 
told  stories  to  the  men  with  whom  he  worked  building  the 
Brooklyn  Bridge  and  to  the  young  woman  who  was  to  become 
his  wife.  As  Grandfather  moved  through  life,  in  Italy  and  in 
America,  he  continued  to  enrich  the  lives  of  his  children  and 
grandchildren  telling  his  stories  and  theirs.  Muted  watercolors 
capture  the  warmth  of  Grandfather's  storytelling  tradition. 

5.93  Galbraith,  Kathryn  O.  Laura  Charlotte.  Illustrations  by  Floyd 
Cooper.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21613-8.  32p.  4-8. 


ERLC 


166 


Human  Relationships 


129 


Laura  Charlotte  can't  sleep,  so  she  asks  her  mother  for  her  favor- 
ite bedtime  story — the  tale  of  how  Charlotte  the  elephant  came 
to  be  hers.  Long  ago  when  Laura's  mother  turned  five,  her 
grandmother  sent  her  a  gray  flannel  elephant,  stitched  from 
scraps.  Laura's  mother  lovingly  tells  of  Charlotte's  importance 
in  her  own  life  and  how  she  packed  the  elephant  away  to  await 
her  own  little  girl.  Full-color  paintings  provide  nostalgic  impres- 
sions of  the  mother's  childhood. 

5-94     Garland,  Sarah.  Polly's  Puffin.  Illustrated  by  Sarah  Garland. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08749-3.  24p.  3-6. 

Having  a  baby  brother,  one  who  tosses  everything  from  his 
stroller,  can  be  a  real  problem — especially  if  you're  the  big  sister, 
Polly,  and  the  baby  has  tossed  your  very  own  toy  puffin  into  the 
coat  hood  of  a  stranger  sitting  nearby.  But  with  an  under- 
standing mom  and  a  hectic  chase,  things  are  put  in  order.  The 
baby's  antics  in  the  cheerful  illustrations  offset  the  anxiety  of  a 
lost  favorite  possession. 

5*95     Gauch,  Patricia  Lee.  Dance,  Tanya.  Illustrated  by  Satomi 
Ichikawa.  Philomel  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21521-2.  28p.  4-8. 

The  soft  pink  and  yellow  casts  of  the  watercolors  convey  the 
warm,  loving  sentiment  of  a  little  girl's  wish  to  be  a  ballet  dancer 
like  her  sister.  Tanya's  toddler-like  dance  is  performed  in  her 
underwear,  as  she  trips  and  sprawls  in  her  attempts  to  mime 
both  her  sister's  costume  and  graceful  ballet  positions.  More 
than  anything,  Tanya  wants  to  take  ballet  lessons,  too.  After  her 
sister's  recital,  sleepy  Tanya  rouses  herself  to  dance  exuberantly 
for  the  family.  Soon,  there  are  lessons  for  Tanya,  too. 

5.96  Godden,  Rumer.  Listen  to  the  Nightingale.  Viking  Penguin, 
1992.  ISBN  0-670-84517-5. 198p.  7-11. 

The  rarified  world  of  a  London  ballet  school  surrounds  ten-year- 
old  Lottie,  an  orphan  reared  by  the  school's  costume  mistress. 
When  not  in  class,  Lottie  copes  with  an  unusually  humble  home 
life,  friends  and  adversaries,  her  adored  puppy,  Prince,  and  the 
exotic  Italian  family  who  adopt  the  dog  when  Lottie  must  give 
him  up.  Mindful  of  Noel  Streatfeild's  classic,  Ballet  Shoes,  and 
with  the  same  unhurried  detail,  the  story  winds  through  numer- 
ous challenges  before  reaching  a  comforting  finale. 

5.97  Greenwald,  Sheila.  Rosy  Cole  Discovers  America!  Illustrated  by 
Sheila  Greenwald.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-316-32721-2.  96p.  7-11  (est.). 


167 


130 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Rosy  is  ashamed  of  her  humdrum  family  background  so  she 
invents  a  more  interesting  past  for  the  Columbus  Day  class 
project  Everyone  must  dress  as  one  of  their  great-grandparents, 
and  only  last-minute  honesty  brings  the  truth  tumbling  out,  as 
Rosy  finds  pride  in  ancestors  who  boasted  neither  riches  nor 
suffering. 

5*98  Halak,  Glenn.  A  Grandmother's  Story*  Illustrated  by  Glenn  Ha- 
lak.  Simon  and  Schuster/Green  Tiger  Press,  1992.  ISBN  0-671- 
74953-6.  32p.  3-8  (est). 

"There  was  an  old  woman  who  rowed  out  to  sea.  /  Her  neigh- 
bors all  thought  she  was  mad  as  could  be/7  In  rhythmic  verse,  a 
grandmother  inexplicably  keeps  rowing  until  she  "arrived 
where  she  knew  she  must  be,"  and  rescues  her  grandson  from 
drowning.  Paintings  are  as  economical  as  the  verse,  rendered  in 
primitive  style  and  bold  colors,  with  only  the  grandmother's 
broad  back  visible  to  the  onlooker.  Testifying  to  the  bonds  of  the 
heart  and  to  miracles,  the  message  of  this  rhyming  story  may  be 
best  suited  for  late  primary  graders. 

5.99  Harshman,  Marc.  A  Little  Excitement  Illustrated  by  Ted  Rand. 
Cobblehill  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-525-65001-6.  32p.  4-S  (est.). 

In  dramatic  testimony  to  the  theme  of  being  careful  about  mak- 
ing wishes,  a  farm  family  battles  a  chimney  fire  soon  after  bored 
young  Willie  wishes  for  a  little  excitement  in  his  life.  Ted  Rand 
achieves  dramatic  contrasts  in  scenes  of  blazing  heat  against  a 
snow-covered  world.  Family  find  neighbors  band  together  to- 
ward a  common  end,  and  narrator  Willie  gains  appreciation  for 
some  new  friends — his  brave  sisters. 

5*100  Haynes,  Mary.  Catch  the  Sea.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02- 
743451-6. 172p.  9  and  up. 

Thirteen-year-old  Lily  wishes  she  had  as  much  artistic  talent  as 
either  of  her  divorced  parents.  After  her  father  is  called  away 
unexpectedly,  Lily  remains  at  their  family  beach  house  trying 
out  her  own  artwork  on  one  of  her  father's  patrons.  Learning  to 
cope  on  her  own  and  the  heady  acceptance  of  her  art  make  Lily 
more  confident  to  begin  the  next  year. 

5.101  Henkes,  Kevin.  Shhhh.  Illustrated  by  Kevin  Henkes.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07986-5.  32p.  3-6  (est.). 

Every  family  needs  an  alarm  clock.  In  this  family,  a  tousled  child 
serves  well.  When  "Everything  is  quiet.  /  Everyone  is  sleep- 


id 

ERLC 


168 


Human  Relationships 


131 


ing," — Bear,  Bunny,  cat,  dog,  baby,  and  Mama  and  Papa — then 
"SHHHH,"  it's  time  for  the  early-rising  child  to  reach  for  her 
horn  and  "WAKE  THEM  ALL  UP!"  Kevin  Henke's  acrylics  al- 
low the  canvas  to  give  texture  to  the  warm-colored,  full-paged 
scenes. 

5.102  Hennessy,  B.  G.  When  You  Were  Just  a  Little  Girl.  Dlustrated  by 
Jeanne  Arnold.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-82998-6.  32p. 
3-8. 

When  Grandma  was  a  little  girl,  birthday  cakes  were  just  as 
sweet,  the  same  moon  shone  in  the  sky  at  night,  and  Christmas 
was  the  best  time  of  the  year.  In  a  nostalgic  view  of  a  simpler 
time,  Grandma,  in  rhyming  text,  shares  her  memories  of  child- 
hood with  two  grandchildren  who  ask  that  she  sit  and  talk  for  a 
while.  Wooden  blocks,  cookie  cutters,  and  paper  chains  are  art 
elements  that  border  old-fashioned  images. 

5.103  Hoban,  Julia.  Amy  Loves  the  Rain.  Illustrated  by  Lillian  Hoban. 
Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-022358-8.  20p.  3-5  (est.). 

In  one  of  four  " Amy"  stories,  Julia  Hoban  offers  preschoolers  the 
comfort  of  the  familiar— a  ride  in  the  carseat  on  a  rainy  day  to 
pick  up  Daddy.  Amy  notices  the  sounds  and  colors  of  a  rainy 
day,  the  "swish  swak  of  the  wipers,"  the  "splash,  plash  of  pud- 
dles," and  the  "black  and  shiny  streets."  Best  of  all,  Amy  has 
brought  an  umbrella  to  share  with  Daddy,  v/ho  has  forgotten  his. 
Pastel  chalks  offer  the  muted  tones  of  a  rainy  day. 

5.104  Hughes,  Dean.  Family  Pose.  Atheneum,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-31396- 
9. 184p.  9  and  up. 

Eleven-year-old  David,  in  search  of  a  new  life  and  a  new  begin- 
ning in  the  warmth  and  promise  of  California,  abandons  his 
unhappy  home  life.  Trying  to  survive  on  the  street,  David — cold, 
hungry,  and  friendless— meets  Paul,  a  hotel  bellboy  who  risks 
his  job  by  letting  David  sleep  in  a  vacant  room.  Paul  sees  some- 
thing of  himself  in  David,  and,  in  time,  they  discover  together 
the  meaning  of  human  commitment.  Notable  1989  Children's 
Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.105  Hughes,  Shirley.  Angel  Mae:  A  Tale  of  Trotter  Street.  Illustrated 
by  Shirley  Hughes.  Mulberry  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11847-X. 
32p.  4  and  up. 

Anticipating  the  birth  of  a  new  baby  at  home,  Mae  has  another 
source  of  excitement  at  school — the  upcoming  Christmas  pag- 


ERIC 


169 


132 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


eant.  Even  though  she's  a  little  out  of  sorts  with  her  mother's 
weariness,  Mae  lands  the  part  of  the  Angel  Gabriel  (which  she 
pronounces  "Gave-you").  New  baby  and  the  pageant  occur  si- 
multaneously, but  Dad  attends  both  debuts.  Mae  is  pixie  perfect, 
with  strands  of  loose  hair  escaping  her  pig  tails,  tiny  wire 
glasses,  and  expressive  face. 

5.106  Hughes,  Shirley.  The  Big  Alfie  Out  of  Doors  Storybook.  Illus- 
trated by  Shirley  Hughes.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-688-11428-8.  64p.  3  and  up. 

In  yet  another  book  featuring  the  lively  and  inquisitive  pre- 
schooler named  Alfie,  four  stories  are  told.  Each  describes  a 
warm  and  loving  family  outing,  and  each  is  followed  by  a  poem 
about  everyday  experience.  The  book  glows  from  beginning  to 
end  with  its  irresistible  paintings  of  children  in  their  natural 
surroundings. 

5.107  Hurwitz,  Johanna.  Aldo  Peanut  Butter.  Illustrated  by  Diane  de 
Groat.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09751-0.  U3p. 
8-11  (est).  r 

In  this  sequel  to  Aldo  Applesauce,  eleven-year-old  Aldo's  new 
puppies,  Peanut  and  Butter,  are  the  catalysts  for  the  hilarious 
jams  in  which  Aldo  and  his  sisters  find  themselves:  nocturnal 
destruction  of  a  neighbor's  lawn,  lobsters  on  the  loose,  and  even 
green  hair.  Short  paragraphs,  full  of  true-to-life  dialogue,  make 
the  text  exceptionally  readable. 

5.108  Hurwitz,  Johanna.  "E"  Is  for  Elisa.  Illustrated  by  Lillian  Hoban. 
Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10440-1. 86p  8-12  (est.). 

Four-year-old  Elisa  wants  more  than  anything  else  to  be  as 
grown-up  as  her  brother,  eight-year-old  Russell.  There  are  snags 
along  the  way.  Elisa  still  cries  a  lot  and  about  a  lot  of  things,  but 
she  does  manage  some  giant  steps  toward  growing  up.  For 
instance,  she  learns  to  keep  a  secret  and  knows  that  the  letters  of 
her  name  (Elisa  M)  spell:  "A  Smile/'  Lillian  Hoban's  illustrations 
for  this  fifth  in  a  series  about  Russell,  Elisa,  and  their  family  are 
warm  and  appealing. 

5.109  Hurwitz,  Johanna.  Roz  and  Ozzie.  Illustrated  by  Eileen  McKeat- 
ing.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10945-4. 128p.  7-10 
(est). 

At  eight  going  on  nine  and  the  new  girl  in  school,  Rosalind 
Sasser  thinks  that  the  last  person  she  needs  following  her  around 


170 


Human  Relationships 


133 


is  her  second-grade  neighbor,  Ozzie.  Worse  still,  Ozzie  is  her 
uncle,  and  he  doesn't  keep  that  information  to  himself.  Al- 
though he  is  a  nuisance  and  a  bit  of  an  embarrassment  with  his 
puppy-like  traits,  Ozzie's  fierce  loyalty  and  devotion  win  Roz's 
acceptance,  and  compromise  is  achieved  in  this  chapter  book  for 
young  readers. 

5.110  Hurwitz,  Johanna.  Russell  and  Elisa.  Illustrated  by  Lillian  Ho- 
ban.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08793-0.  88p.  8-13 
(est). 

Little  sister  Elisa,  now  nearly  four  years  old,  comes  to  the  fore- 
front in  this  fourth  book  about  Russell  and  his  family  Each  of 
the  six  stand-alone  chapters,  peppered  with  Lillian  Hoban's 
doe-eyed  sketches  of  the  children's  predicaments,  makes  for  an 
effective  read-aloud.  Elisa,  for  example,  gets  trapped  under  the 
dining  table  during  a  dinner  party.  Russell  typically  meets  the 
events  of  Elisa's  day  with  "Big  deal"  and  "So  What,"  but  he 
pitches  in  like  a  pro  to  comfort  Elisa  when  her  doll  Airmail  is  left 
overnight  in  the  library. 

5.111  Hutchins,  Pat.  Hdy  Titch.  Illustrated  by  Pat  Hutchins.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09964-5.  32p.  4-7  (est.) 

Youngest  child  Titch  keeps  his  room  tidiest  of  all.  Says  Mother 
to  Peter  and  Mary,  "How  tidy  Titch's  room  is  . . .  and  how  messy 
your  rooms  are.  I  think  you  should  tidy  them  up."  So  Peter  and 
Mary  dig  in,  and  Titch  offers  to  help.  Soon  castoff  games,  toys, 
books,  costumes,  and  hats  are  adopted  by  Titch,  resulting  in  two 
tidy  rooms  and  one  very  satisfied  Titch  at  play  in  a  cascading 
jumble.  The  repetitive  phrase  for  reading  along  is,  "I'll  have 
them." 

5.112  Johnson,  Angela.  The  Leaving  Morning.  Illustrated  by  David 
Soman.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
531-08592-9.  32p.  4-7. 

"Leavings"  happen.  A  young  African  American  narrator  and  his 
sister  say  wistful  good-byes  to  the  familiar  in  their  lives  and  then 
leave  "lips"  on  the  windows  of  their  apartment  on  moving  day 
Through  one  of  childhood's  unsettling  experiences,  the  narrator 
recalls  the  comfort  and  warmth  of  his  neighborhood  and  build- 
ing, but  also  his  daddy's  promise  that  "in  a  little  while  we'd  be 
someplace  we'd  love."  David  Soman's  watercolors  are  both  bus- 
tling impressions  of  urban  life  and  reflections  of  quiet  faces. 


171 


134 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


5.113  Johnson,  Angela.  One  of  Three.  Illustrated  by  David  Soman. 
Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08555-4. 32p.  3-6. 

They  are  three  together — Eva,  Nikki,  and  "me/'  the  youngest 
sister  and  the  narrator.  They  walk  to  school  together,  sit  together 
outside  the  bakery  to  look  and  smell,  and  on  snowy  days  they 
squeeze  into  a  taxi  together  with  Mama,  Grandma,  and  Aunt 
Sara.  But  sometimes,  Nikki  and  Eva  go  alone,  and  "I'm  left 
behind.  Not  one  of  three,  just  one."  It's  then  that  the  youngest 
child  turns  to  someone  else — Daddy  and  Mama — "and  that's 
fine,  too."  David  Soman  provides  an  urban  background  for  a 
loving  African  American  family. 

5.114  Johnson,  Angela.  Tell  Me  a  Story,  Mama.  Illustrated  by  David 
Soman.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0- 
531-08394-2.  28p.  3-6. 

A  five-year-old  African  American  girl  asks  her  mother  to  tell  her 
stories  of  the  mother's  childhood.  The  girl  knows  the  stories  so 
well,  however,  that  she  actually  ends  up  telling  them  to  the 
mother.  The  words  form  a  dialogue  between  mother  and  child, 
while  the  watercolor  art  depicts  various  family  members  in- 
volved in  the  stories.  This  gentle  tale  about  parent-child  rela- 
tions illustrates  how  the  culture  and  stories  of  the  family  are 
passed  from  generation  to  generation. 

5.115  Johnson,  Angela.  When  I  Am  Old  with  You.  Illustrated  by 
David  Soman.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-531-08484-1. 32p.  4-7. 

A  young  African  American  child  spends  the  day  with  his  loving 
grandfather.  As  they  talk  and  rock  together  on  the  porch,  the  boy 
promises  that  "when  I  am  old  with  you,  Grandaddy,"  the  two  of 
them  will  do  all  their  favorite  things  together — fishing,  walking, 
playing  cards,  riding  the  tractor,  and  having  bacon,  just  bacon, 
for  breakfast.  Soft  watercolors  create  tranquil  scenes  and  quiet 
moments.  Coretta  Scott  King  Honor  Book  (Illustration),  1991. 

5.116  Kherdian,  David.  A  Song  for  Uncle  Harry.  Illustrated  by  Nonny 
Hogrogian.  Philomel  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21895-5.  76p.  8- 
12. 

To  Petey,  no  one  in  the  whole  world  is  like  Uncle  Harry.  For  as 
long  as  the  twelve-year-old  boy  can  remember,  their  relationship 
has  grown  in  mutual  love  and  respect.  Whether  enjoying  each 
other's  company  while  fishing  or  collecting  things,  the  bonds 
seem  unchangeable.  Then  Petey  discovers  that  Uncle  Harry's 


172 


Human  Relationships 


135 


heart  holds  some  unshared  plans.  David  Kherdian's  Armenian 
characters  understand  one  another  in  this  1930s  story,  and  Petey 
comes  to  understand  change  and  its  relationship  to  love. 

5.117  Lasky,  Kathryn.  I  Have  an  Aunt  on  Marlborough  Street.  Illus- 
trated by  Susan  Guevara.  Macmillan,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-751701-2. 
31p.  6-10  (est). 

Phoebe  visits  her  aunt,  who  is  also  named  Phoebe,  on  Marlbor- 
ough Street  in  Boston,  where  the  sidewalks  are  brick  and  the 
houses  touch  shoulders.  Together  they  make  the  everyday 
things  about  city  life  become  opportunities  for  fantasy  and  en- 
joyment. The  subtleties  of  the  language  and  the  softness  and 
warmth  of  the  watercolors  provide  a  glimpse  of  their  relation- 
ship as  they  experience  all  of  the  seasons  together. 

5.118  Lehrman,  Robert.  Separations.  Viking  Penguin,  1990.  ISBN  0- 
670-81646-9.  224p.  10  and  up. 

An  aspiring  tennis  player,  Kim  feels  her  comfortable  life  torn 
apart  when  her  parents'  divorce  requires  a  move  to  Manhattan. 
Changes!  New  apartment . . .  city  school .  .  Dad's  fiancee . . . 
Mom's  career . . .  even  a  new  tennis  coach!  But  it  is  the  mix  of 
anger  and  love  that  Kim  feels  toward  her  dad  that  spurs  a  series 
of  events  which  reunite  the  family  emotionally,  if  not  physically. 
All  stages  of  grief  over  this  family  crisis  are  experienced  through 
Kim's  eyes. 

5.119  Lyon,  George  Ella.  Basket.  Illustrated  by  Mary  Szilagyi.  Orchard 
Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08486-8.  32p. 
4-7. 

Grandmother's  oak  basket  holds  all  the  necessities  of  her  fam- 
ily's life,  when  it  is  not  full  of  plums  or  Christmas  holly.  But 
when  Grandmother  moves  to  the  city,  her  basket  becomes  lost. 
From  then  on,  the  basket  takes  on  the  disproportionate  capacity 
of  memory.  Whatever  is  missing,  Grandmother  is  sure  that  it  is 
in  her  basket.  Colored-pencil  and  watercolor  illustrations  create 
a  "yesterday"  feel  for  this  family  history,  told  in  a  first-person 
account  by  the  granddaughter. 

5.120  Martin,  Ann  M.  Eleven  Kids,  One  Summer.  Holiday  House, 
1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0912-0. 152p.  8-12. 

All  thirteen  members  of  the  Rosso  family— eleven  children  and 
two  parents,  plus  a  cat — rent  a  beach  house  on  Fire  Island  for  the 
summer.  Alphabetically  named,  from  fifteen-year-old  Abigail  to 


173 


136 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


baby  Keegan,  the  children  each  assume  the  central  role  in  one 
chapter.  Island  adventures  range  from  solving  mysteries  to 
meeting  new  kids  to  playing  pranks  to  becoming  movie  extras. 
Sibling  rivalry  and  birth  order  contribute  to  the  conflicts  and 
solutions. 

5.121  Mazer,  Norma  Fox.  C,  My  Name  Is  Cal.  Scholastic  Hardcover 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-590-41833-5. 160p.  9-12. 

Two  adolescent  boys,  Garo  without  a  mother  and  Cal  without  a 
father,  are  part  of  the  unique  "family"  in  this  story.  Cal's  mother 
works  as  a  housekeeper  for  Garo's  father,  whose  job  as  an  airline 
pilot  often  keeps  him  away  from  home.  Cal,  serious  and  hard- 
working, is  the  direct  opposite  of  Garo,  yet  over  the  course  of 
several  years  the  boys  forge  a  strong  friendship,  and  together 
they  unravel  some  of  the  mysteries  and  challenges  of  adoles- 
cence. 

5.122  McKay,  Hilary.  The  Exiles.  Margaret  K.  McElderry  Books,  1992. 
ISBN  0-689-50555-8.  217p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Four  sisters— Ruth,  Naomi,  Rachel,  and  Phoebe— find  them- 
selves "exiles"  when  their  parents  decide  to  use  an  inheritance 
to  remodel  the  kitchen.  The  summer  of  exile  for  the  girls,  whose 
ages  range  from  six  to  thirteen,  is  spent  with  Big  Grandma,  who 
is  as  determined  about  child  rearing  as  she  is  tall.  First,  Big 
Grandma  believes  in  discipline,  chores,  and  exercise.  Second, 
she  believes  that  the  girls  read  too  much,  so  she  locks  her  books 
away.  The  girls'  humor,  despair,  letters  home,  and  country  ad- 
ventures are  hilarious.  Guardian  Children's  Fiction  Award,  1992. 

5.123  Mills,  Lauren.  The  Rag  Coat.  Illustrated  by  Lauren  Mills.  Little, 
Brown,  1991.  ISBN  0-316-57407-4.  28p.  4r-8. 

Inspired  by  the  stories,  songs,  and  crafts  of  the  Appalachian 
region,  and  remembering  a  quilted  coat  that  she  herself  wore, 
Lauren  Mills  uses  watercolor  and  pencil  drawings  to  tell  the 
story  of  a  child  named  Minna,  daughter  of  a  miner  and  a  quilt- 
maker,  who  has  no  coat  of  her  own.  Even  though  it  was  her 
dying  father's  wish  that  Minna  go  to  school,  she  can't  go  with- 
out a  coat.  Kindly  neighbors,  scrapbags,  and  stories  of  quilt 
pieces  make  for  the  warmest  coat  of  all. 

5.124  Murphy,  Jill.  Worlds  Apart.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1988.  ISBN 
0-399-21566-2. 127p.  10-13  (est). 


174 


Human  Relationships 


137 


Although  life  in  London  with  her  mother  is  happy,  eleven-year- 
old  Susan  launches  a  daring  and  secret  quest  to  meet  her  natural 
father,  whose  life  is  "worlds  apart"  from  her  own.  The  plot  is 
almost  a  cliche,  yet  Susan's  lively  narration  and  loving  descrip- 
tion of  the  adults  in  her  life  make  the  book  enjoyable. 

5.125  Oppenheim,  Shulamith  Levey.  Waiting  for  Noah-  Illustrated  by 
Lillian  Hoban.  Harper  and  Row/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-06-024634-0.  32p.  4-7. 

Noah  loves  to  hear  Nana  tell  the  story  of  the  day  when  he  was 
bom.  On  that  day,  Noah's  daddy  called  to  say  Noah  was  about 
to  be  born,  so  Nana  spent  all  day  clipping  raspberry  bushes  and 
shining  pots,  trying  to  keep  busy  as  she  waited  for  Noah.  Bright, 
colorful  pastel  drawings  depict  Noah  and  Nana  in  their  warm 
relationship,  picking  berries  and  reminiscing  together. 

5.126  Patterson,  Nancy  Ruth.  The  Christmas  Cup,  Illustrated  by 
Leslie  Bowman.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08421-3.  80p. 
8-10. 

When  eight-year-old  Ann  Megan  McCallie  spends  her  hard- 
earned  money  to  buy  a  worthless  old  milkshake  cup,  her  grand- 
mother helps  her  understand  its  value.  Using  the  cup  as  a  bank 
during  the  year,  Megan  and  Nannie  decide  the  benefactor  of  the 
Christmas  cup  contents  should  be  someone  who  has  meant  the 
most  to  them  during  the  year.  As  Christmas  approaches,  Megan 
makes  her  decision  and  learns  the  true  meaning  of  the  season. 
Full-page  black-and-white  sketches  capture  the  mood  and  spirit 
of  this  true-to-life  story  about  family  and  giving.  Notable  1989 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.127  Polacco,  Patricia.  Thunder  Cake.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Polacco. 
Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-22231-6.  30p.  4^8. 

Patricia  Polacco  reveals  the  magical  way  in  which  her  Russian 
grandmother  helped  her  lose  her  fear  of  thunder  as  a  little  girl. 
When  a  storm  threatens  on  the  horizon,  Grandma  observes  that 
it's  "Thunder  Cake  baking  weather"  and  hastens  to  find  ingre- 
dients as  each  clap  of  thunder  and  strike  of  lightning  draws 
closer  and  closer.  By  the  time  the  storm  arrives,  a  delicious 
Thunder  Cake  is  baked  and  a  troublesome  fear  tamed.  Colorful 
folk-art  drawings  lend  the  story  an  old-world  mood. 

5.128  Porte,  Barbara  Ann.  Taxicab  Tales.  Illustrated  by  Yossi  Abolafia. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09908-4.  54p.  5  and  up. 


175 


138 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Abigail's  father  drives  a  taxi.  After  work,  he  tells  Abigail  and  her 
brother  Sam  stories  about  his  day,  and  their  mother  paints  pic- 
tures of  the  stories.  Sometimes  Abigail  thinks  the  stories  are 
really  true.  In  a  warm,  family-centered  chapter  book  for  young 
readers,  Daddy  tells  of  a  famous  actress  who  rode  in  his  cab  in 
disguise,  of  Wendell  Wertzweiler  who  brought  his  goose  for 
show-and-tell,  and  of  the  man  with  a  donkey  head.  Black-and- 
white  shaded  sketches  add  to  the  fun. 

5.129  Rice,  Eve.  Peter's  Pockets.  Illustrated  by  Nancy  Winslow  Parker. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07242-9.  30p.  3-6  (est.). 

One  Saturday  morning  Peter  and  Uncle  Nick  go  to  the  boat 
pond.  Peter  finds  numerous  things  to  collect,  but  his  brand-new 
pants  have  no  pockets,  so  the  feather,  ball,  marble,  and  other 
objects  must  go  into  Uncle  Nick's  pockets.  When  they  arrive 
home,  Peter's  mother  sews  six  colorful  pockets  onto  Peter's 
pants— one  for  each  new  treasure.  Watercolor  paints  and  colored 
pencils  illustrate  this  satisfying  story. 

5.130  Richardson,  John.  The  Hiding  Beast.  Illustrated  by  John 
Richardson.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1988.  ISBN  0-395-49213-0.  29p. 
5-^8  (est.). 

Rodney  lives  with  his  aunt  in  a  very  grand  house,  and  every 
time  poor  Rodney  tries  to  have  some  fun,  Aunt  Jacosta  is  nearby 
saying,  "Don't,  dear!"  When  Rodney  is  sent  to  the  family  library 
to  "read  a  nice  quiet  book,"  he  discovers  instead  a  "brilliant" 
book  about  wild,  hairy  things.  As  Rodney's  beast  comes  to  life, 
John  Richardson  leaves  the  reader  guessing.  Is  the  beast  real?  Is 
it  only  Rodney's  imagination?  Is  Aunt  Jocasta  playing  a  game 
with  Rodney?  Will  the  real  hiding  beast  please  stand  up? 

5.131  Roe,  Eileen.  Staying  with  Grandma.  Illustrated  by  Jacqueline 
Rogers.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-777371-X.  29p.  1-6. 

A  child  describes  a  visit  to  Grandma's  country  house  and  all  the 
fun  to  be  had  there.  Favorite  activities  include  running  in  the 
sprinkler,  catching  frogs,  and  using  Grandma's  bubble  bath.  The 
expressive  watercolor  and  colored-pencil  illustrations  dominate 
the  brief  text  and  convey  the  special  bond  that  can  exist  between 
the  very  young  and  the  elderly  This  is  a  book  to  reassure  any 
small  child  who  is  left  behind  at  Grandma's  house  when  parents 
go  out  of  town. 


176 


Human  Relationships 


139 


5*132  Russo,  Marisabina.  A  Visit  to  Oma.  Illustrated  by  Marisabina 
Russo.  Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09624-7. 32p.  4  and 
up. 

Every  Sunday  Celeste  goes  to  visit  her  great-grandmother  Oma. 
While  Oma  always  tells  Celeste  stories  in  a  language  that  she 
doesn't  understand,  this  doesn't  botixer  Celeste,  who  simply 
makes  up  a  story  to  fit  Oma's  gestures  and  expressions.  This 
Sunday  the  story  that  Celeste  makes  up  is  about  Oma's  bravery 
and  independence  in  the  face  of  an  unwanted  marriage  ar- 
ranged by  her  parents.  In  a  story  filled  with  warmth,  Celeste's 
love  for  Oma  easily  overcomes  the  language  barrier.  Bold-col- 
ored illustrations  are  in  folk-art  style. 

5.133  Russo,  Marisabina.  Waiting  for  Hannah.  Illustrated  by  Mar- 
isabina Russo.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08016-2. 
32p.  4-7  (est.). 

A  little  girl  named  Hannah  asks  her  mother  what  she  did  while 
she  waited  for  Hannah  to  be  born.  The  answer  to  that  question 
is  the  story  of  a  long  hot  summer  during  which  her  mother  went 
about  her  daily  activities  impatiently  dreaming  of  the  big  day. 
The  wait  and  the  birth  are  documented  in  bordered,  gouache 
folk-art  illustrations. 

5.134  Russo,  Marisabina.  Where  Is  Ben?  Illustrated  by  Marisabina 
Russo.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08013-8. 32p.  3  and 
up. 

Although  Ben's  mother  is  busy  rolling  dough,  peeling  apples, 
and  making  crust  for  a,  pie,  Ben  keeps  interrupting  her  work. 
''Mama,  come  find  me/'  he  says,  and  Ben's  mother  answers, 
"Where  is  Ben?"  She  then  follows  telltale  clues — an  upside- 
down  laundry  basket,  a  jumble  of  boots — to  locate  her  hiding 
son.  The  repetitive  lines  in  Mama  and  Ben's  hide-and-seek  game 
will  encourage  young  children  to  read  along.  Marisabina 
Russo's  chunky  gouache  paintings  fill  right-hand  pages;  bold 
text  appears  on  the  left. 

5.135  Rylant,  Cynthia.  Henry  and  Mudge  and  the  Forever  Sea:  The 
Sixth  Book  of  Their  Adventures.  Illustrated  by  Suqie  Steven- 
son. Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-778007-4.  48p.  6-8. 

When  Henry  and  his  father  take  Henry's  dog,  Mudge,  to  the 
beach  for  the  first  time,  they  spend  a  perfect  day  splashing  in  the 
water,  building  a  sand  castle,  eating  hot  dogs,  discovering  crabs, 


177 


140 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


and  eating  snowcones.  As  with  the  other  five  Henry  and  Mudge 
books,  beginning  readers  can  handle  this  one  on  their  own. 

5.136  Shefelman,  Janice.  Victoria  House.  Illustrated  by  Tom  Shefel- 
man.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1988.  ISBN 
0-15-200630-3.  26p.  5-8  (est.). 

When  architect  Sarah  falls  in  love  with  a  vacant  and  long- 
neglected  Victorian  house,  she  and  husband  Jess  decide  to  move 
the  house  to  the  city  to  make  it  their  family  home  and  office  and 
to  fill  it  with  "talk  and  laughter."  The  technical  aspects  of  plan- 
ning and  executing  such  a  move  are  scrupulously  described, 
right  down  to  the  architectural  blueprints.  Ink-line  and  water- 
color  illustrations  allow  for  a  detailed  depiction  of  Victoria 
House's  authentic  gazebo  and  gingerbread  trim. 

5.137  Sheldon,  Dyan.  The  Whales'  Song.  Illustrated  by  Gary  Blythe. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0972-2.  25p. 

4-  8  (est). 

Lilly's  grandmother  tells  her  about  the  whales  that  she  loved  as 
a  child  and  about  their  special  gift  of  song  to  those  who  are 
patient  and  who  briiig  something  perfect  to  the  water's  edge. 
Despite  her  great-uncle's  dismissal  of  the  whales'  songs,  Lilly 
dreams  of  hearing  the  whales  and  is  rewarded  for  both  her  gift 
of  a  perfect  flower  and  her  faith.  Gary  Bly the's  large  oil  paintings 
rely  on  texture,  light,  and  color  to  create  the  dream-like  quality 
of  Lilly's  experiences. 

5.138  Smalls-Hector,  Irene.  Jonathan  and  His  Mommy.  Illustrations 
by  Michael  Hays.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-79870-3.  32p. 

5-  8  (est.). 

When  Jonathan's  mother  ties  on  his  shoes,  it's  time  for  a  walk  in 
the  city.  Past  neighbors,  apartments,  shops,  and  construction, 
Jonathan  and  his  mother  have  special  ways  of  walking  and 
talking.  They  take  big  giant  steps  and  talk  in  giant  voices.  They 
take  bunny  hops  and  baby  steps,  running  steps  and  slow-motion 
steps,  ballet  steps  and  crazy  crisscross  steps.  When  it's  time  for 
walking  home  again,  they  take  Jonathan-and-Mommy  steps,  a 
loving  relationship  evident  on  each  sunny  page  in  this  story 
about  an  African  American  boy  and  his  mother. 

5.139  Stolz,  Mary.  Go  Fish.  Illustrated  by  Pat  Cummings.  HarperCol- 
lins, 1991.  ISBN  0-06-025822-5.  74p.  7-10  (est.). 


ERiC 


178 


Human  Relationships 


141 


Mary  Stolz  captures  a  day  in  the  life  of  Grandfather,  young 
Thomas,  and  their  ever-hungry  cat,  Ringo.  Purposeful  literacy 
events  and  an  African  American  family's  love  of  reading,  writ- 
ing, and  storytelling  are  skillfully  woven  into  the  story  The 
loving  conversations  between  Grandfather  and  Thomas  will 
sound  familiar  to  many  Pat  Cummings's  black-and-white  mul- 
tiple-perspective drawings  are  alternately  blocked  or  stretched 
across  the  pages  of  this  chapter  book  for  young  readers. 

5.140  Tan,  Amy  The  Moon  Lady.  Illustrated  by  Gretchen  Schields. 
Macmillan,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-788830-4.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

Best-selling  novelist  Amy  Tan  offers  her  first  book  for  children, 
a  story  within  a  story  told  by  Nai-nai  to  her  three  restless  grand- 
daughters held  captive  by  rain.  Nai-nai's  tale  is  of  her  childhood 
in  China,  of  her  own  restlessness,  and  of  her  desire  to  see  the 
Moon  Lady  and  to  convey  a  secret  wish  from  her  heart.  Today's 
children  will  understand  the  conflicting  emotions,  guilt,  mis- 
chief, calamities,  growing  pains,  and  resolution.  The  watercolor 
paintings  are  brilliantly  colored,  detailed,  and  engaging  Chinese 
folk  art. 

5.141  Temple,  Charles.  On  the  Riverbank.  Illustrated  by  Melanie  Hall. 
Houghton  Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-61591-7.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

Charles  Temple  says  that  the  words  and  the  rhythms  from  this 
tribute  to  "fishin'  on  the  riverbank"  came  to  him  as  he  was 
playing  his  banjo  and  daydreaming  on  the  James  River.  The 
rhythms  of  memory  plunk  out  the  tune  of  a  riverbank  song  that 
gets  feet  to  tapping  and  catfish  to  biting:  "Can't  you  hear  those 
crickets  going,  'Crick,  crick,  crick'?"  The  shades  of  June  are 
peppered  with  black,  and  the  whole  scratchy  effect  gives  a  danc- 
ing exuberance  to  this  African  American  family's  fishing  expe- 
dition. 

5.142  Thomas,  Elizabeth.  Green  Beans*  Illustrated  by  Vicki  Jo  Reden- 
baugh.  Carolrhoda  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-87614-708-2.  32p.  5-8. 

Gramma  is  the  proper  sort,  a  creature  of  habit,  and  the  kind  of 
person  whom  people  obey.  But  her  green  bean  plants  are  an- 
other story  entirely.  Despite  Gramma's  best  efforts,  they  refuse 
to  grow.  Only  when  Gramma  takes  a  trip,  leaving  Dorothea  and 
her  father  in  charge  of  the  garden,  does  a  miracle  occur,  and 
green  beans  reach  skyward.  Dorothea's  success  causes  Gramma 
to  relax  her  gardening  routines,  and  some  other  staid  rituals  as 


17,9 


142 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


well.  Vicki  Jo  Redenbaugh's  good-natured  characters  are  lanky 
as  bean  poles. 

5.143  Waddell,  Martin.  Once  There  Were  Giants.  Illustrated  by  Penny 
Dale.  Delacorte  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-29806-4. 24p.  All  ages. 

To  a  baby,  everyone  larger  seems  to  be  a  giant.  From  page  to 
page  the  gentle  first-person  narrative  and  endearing  illustra- 
tions show  how  over  time  the  baby  reaches  childhood,  then  her 
teenage  years,  and  then  college.  She  eventually  marries  and  has 
her  own  baby — who  smiles  up  at  surrounding  giants.  Notable 
1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.144  Wallace-Brodeur,  Ruth.  Home  by  Five.  Illustrations  by  Mark 
Graham.  Margaret  K.  McEIderry  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-689-50509- 
4.  32p.  5-9. 

Ruth  Wallace-Brodeur  gently  and  humorously  portrays  Rosie,  a 
child  who  takes  time  to  explore  her  city  world — even  it  if  means 
not  getting  home  on  time.  Although  Rosie  earnestly  tries  to 
avoid  distractions  when  given  a  deadline  for  being  home,  she  is 
a  child  who  notices  things.  The  author's  portrayal  of  Rosie's 
good  intentions  and  of  her  parents'  understanding  of  childhood 
adds  to  the  sweetness  of  the  story.  Mark  Graham's  repre- 
sentational artwork  relies  on  soft  grays  and  browns  to  create 
wintry  scenes  in  which  Rosie's  face  stands  out. 

5.145  Williams,  Sherley  Anne.  Working  Cotton.  Illustrated  by  Carole 
Byard.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-299624-9. 
32p.  4-8. 

In  summer,  Shelan  is  up  before  daybreak  to  pick  cotton  in  the 
fields  of  central  California  with  her  African  American  family. 
The  hard  life  and  the  transiency  of  peopk  ^een  in  one  field  but 
missing  from  the  next  is  a  rueful  pattern,  but  not  unpleasing  to 
Shelan,  who  enjoys  doing  her  share  of  work  with  the  family.  The 
simple  text  and  vibrant  acrylic  paintings  recapture  the  details  of 
the  migrant  worker  lifestyle.  Caldecott  Honor  Book,  1992. 

5.146  Wood,  Audrey.  Weird  Parents.  Illustrated  by  Audrey  Wood.  Dial 
Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0649-9.  32p.  4-8. 

"There  once  was  a  boy  who  had  weird  parents."  Just  how  weird 
are  they?  Well,  the  weird  mother  engages  in  such  embarrass- 
ments as  blowing  kisses  from  the  bus  stop,  packing  lunch  sur- 


ERLC 


160 


Human  Relationships 


143 


prises,  and  talking  about  the  boy  as  though  he  isn't  there.  The 
weird  father  shakes  hands  with  everyone,  wears  a  weird  hat, 
and  walks  like  a  chicken  in  crowds.  Both  of  them  laugh  out  loud 
in  the  movies.  There  are  days  when  the  boy  wishes  that  they 
were  like  other  parents,  but  then  again  Audrey  Wood's  flam- 
boyant, lovingly  depicted  parents  frolic  across  the  pages. 

5.147  Yarbrough,  Camille.  The  Shimmershine  Queens.  G.  P.  Putnam's 
Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21465-8. 142p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Fifth-grade  Angie  has  the  "get-up  gift."  Elderly  Cousin  Seatta 
tells  her  so.  It's  a  gift  of  spirit  traceable  to  slave  days,  a  gift  that 
gives  dreamers  the  "shimmershine  feeling" — optimism  in  the 
face  of  trouble.  And  Angie's  troubles  are  many:  her  daddy  has 
gone,  her  mother  is  sick,  and  the  kids  at  her  inner-city  school 
tease  her  about  her  dark  skin.  Then  comes  a  special  drama 
teacher  who  reaches  Angie  and  her  friend  Michelle  with  an 
African  project  in  which  they  role-play  eighteenth-century  chil- 
dren, stolen  into  slavery,  who  dance  their  defiance. 

5.148  Zolotow,  Charlotte.  The  Quiet  Mother  and  the  Noisy  Little  Boy. 
Illustrated  by  Marc  Simont.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06- 
026979-0.  28p.  4-7  (est.). 

A  little  boy  named  Sandy  loves  noise,  but  his  mother  does  not. 
Not  until  Sandy  leaves  for  a  day's  visit  with  relatives  does  his 
mother  discover  how  much  she  misses  him.  And  not  until  the 
wildest  and  noisiest  relatives  come  for  a  visit  does  Sandy  dis- 
cover how  noisy  he  has  been.  Both  realize  that  noise  and  quiet 
are  good  at  different  times  for  different  things.  The  lesson  is 
shared  through  Charlotte  Zolotow's  gentle  writing  and  Marc 
Simont's  exuberant  color. 

5.149  Zolotow,  Charlotte.  This  Quiet  Lady.  Illustrated  by  Anita  Lobel. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09306-X.  24p.  3-7  (est.). 

Quiet  text  follows  a  young  girl  as  she  inspects  photographs  and 
snapshots  of  her  mother  at  varying  stages  of  her  mother's  life: 
"This  curly-haired  little  girl  with  the  doll  drooping  from  her 
hand  is  my  mother."  Anita  Lobel's  French-set  illustrations  juxta- 
pose large  full-color  portraits  of  the  mother  against  muted-tone 
representations  of  the  child-narrator.  When  the  little  girl  turns  to 
a  picture  of  her  mother  holding  her  as  an  infant,  the  "life"  story 
comes  full  cycle  as  she  realizes  that  "here  is  where  I  begin." 


144 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Friendship 

5.150  Aamundsen,  Nina  Ring.  Two  Short  and  One  Long.  Houghton 
Mifflin,  1990.  ISBN  0-395-52434-2. 103p.  9-12  (est.). 

As  the  summer  holiday  draws  to  a  close,  twelve-year-old  Jonas 
and  his  somewhat  mysterious  best  friend  Einar  observe  a  large 
Afghan  family  moving  into  their  Oslo,  Norway,  neighborhood. 
When  Jonas  befriends  Hewad,  the  Afghan  boy,  Einar  becomes 
quiet  and  disapproving,  causing  Jonas  to  question  the  closeness 
of  their  friendship.  This  insightful  story,  translated  by  the  author 
from  the  Norwegian,  is  about  Einar  conquering  fears  brought  on 
by  a  tragic  past  and  about  all  three  boys  growing  to  understand 
each  other.  Mildred  L.  Batchelder  Award,  1990. 

5.151  Aylesworth,  Jim.  Mr.  McGill  Goes  to  Town.  Illustrated  by 
Thomas  Graham.  Henry  Holt,  1989.  ISBN  0-8050-0772-5.  30p. 
4^8  (est.). 

Mr.  McGill  is  repairing  his  mill,  but  it's  too  much  work  for  one 
person.  So  he  seeks  Mr.  McRae's  help.  Mr.  McRae  is  cutting  his 
hay,  and  the  two  friends  join  forces  on  that  task,  but  it's  too  much 
work  for  two  people.  They  must  seek  Mr.  McCall's  assistance. 
But  Mr.  McCall  is  building  a  wall,  so  the  three  friends  pitch  in 
on  that  job  only  to  discover  they  need  still  more  help.  This 
cumulative  tale,  with  embedded  rhyming  text,  culminates  with 
five  friends  working  together  to  complete  everyone's  chores  in 
no  time  at  all. 

5.152  Barbour,  Karen.  Nancy.  Illustrated  by  Karen  Barbour.  Harcourt 
Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-256675-9.  32p.  4-7  (est). 

Nancy  moves  into  a  new  neighborhood  and  is  ignored  by  four 
best  friends  who  decide  not  to  play  with  her.  However,  once 
Nancy  invites  the  girls  to  her  wild  and  wacky  birthday  party,  the 
girls  become  "five  best  friends."  Modernistic  gouache-and- 
watercolor  illustrations  are  done  with  Picasso-esque  flair. 

5.153  Brisson,  Pat.  Your  Best  Friend,  Kate.  Illustrated  by  Rick  Brown. 
Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-714350-3.  30p.  7-10  (est.). 

In  a  book  with  text  consisting  entirely  of  notes,  letters,  and 
postcards,  Kate  stays  in  touch  with  her  best  friend,  Lucy,  as  Kate 
travels  with  her  family  through  eleven  states.  The  flow  of  notes 
gives  humorous,  affectionate,  and  informative  glimpses  of  the 
sights,  as  well  as  of  the  challenges  of  traveling  with  a  smart- 
alecky  younger  brother.  Tucked  around  the  edges  of  the  pages 


ERLC 


182 


Human  Relationships 


145 


are  state  birds,  flowers,  and  trees.  Postcards  from  their  own 
particular  sites  may  inspire  young  students  of  geography. 

5.154  Bunting,  Eve.  Summer  Wheels.  Illustrated  by  Thomas  B.  Allen. 
Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-207000-1.  48p.  6-10. 

The  Bicycle  Man's  rules  are  simple:  Neighborhood  kids  can  check 
out  bicycles  every  day.  For  free.  Just  have  tfiem  back  by  four.  Fix  them 
if  they  break.  Lawrence  and  Brady  have  their  own  favorite  sum- 
mer wheels  that  they  borrow.  When  a  big  kid,  nearly  twelve, 
checks  out  Lawrence's  bike,  signing  the  book  as  "Abrehem  Lin- 
coln/7 the  boys  know  that  he  has  no  intention  of  returning  it. 
Themes  of  trust  and  second  chances  will  give  children  some- 
thing to  talk  over.  Hazy  charcoal  and  pastel  drawings  locate  this 
neighborhood  near  your  own. 

5.155  Burns,  Theresa.  You're  Not  My  Cat.  Illustrated  by  Theresa 
Burns.  J.  B.  Lippincott,  1989.  ISBN  0-397-32341-7.  32p.  6-9  (est.). 

A  little  girl  spends  her  days  with  an  alley  cat  named  Gus,  who 
she  insists  is  not  her  cat.  As  their  friendship  grows,  the  little  girl 
soon  realizes  that  Gus  is  her  pal  and  a  part  of  her  life  forever. 
Cross-hatching  and  color  pencil  give  texture  and  detail  to  this 
tale  of  an  alley  cat  that  finds  a  home. 

5.156  Cave,  Hugh  B.  Conquering  Kilmarnie.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN 
0-02-717781-5. 176p.  10  and  up. 

A  wild  pig  and  a  mutual  need  for  peer  companionship  bring 
together  American-born  Peter,  who  is  still  grieving  over  the 
death  of  his  mother  and  brother,  and  Zackie,  a  Jamaican  island 
boy.  They  grow  to  understand  each  other's  cultures  as  they  fight 
nature  and  endure  family  circumstances.  With  an  action-filled 
plot,  the  story  of  their  friendship  is  sure  to  entice  the  early 
adolescent  reader.  Set  on  a  Jamaican  coffee  plantation,  the  story 
is  also  filled  with  information  subtly  folded  into  the  plot. 

5.157  Christopher,  Matt.  Return  of  the  Home  Run  Kid.  Illustrated  by 
Paul  Casale.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-14080-5. 168p.  9  and 
up  (est.). 

In  this  sequel  to  The  Kid  Who  Only  Hit  Homers,  Sylvester 
Coddmyer  HI  experiences  a  baseball  slump,  making  him  ques- 
tion his  success  during  the  previous  season.  Helped  by  a 
stranger,  Cheeko,  Sylvester  begins  to  play  too  aggressively  and 
to  take  shortcuts.  Cheeko  bears  an  uncanny  resemblance  to  Ed- 
die Cicotte,  a  member  of  the  notorious  1919  Black  Sox  team. 


ERIC 


183 


146 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Sylvester  learns  that  giving  his  best  effort  is  the  way  to  play  the 
game.  Pencil  illustrations  realistically  depict  some  of  the  epi- 
sodes. 

5.158  Cleary,  Beverly.  Strider.  Illustrated  by  Paul  O.  Zelinsky.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09901-7. 192p.  8  and  up. 

When  Leigh  Botts  (a  character  in  Beverly  Cleary's  Dear  Mr.  Hen- 
shaw)  and  his  friend  Barry  find  an  abandoned  dog  on  the  beach, 
they  develop  a  joint  custody  agreement  for  the  dog,  whom  they 
name  Strider.  Strider 's  time  with  Leigh  is  spent  in  the  no-pets- 
allowed  cottage  that  he  shares  with  his  mother.  Exercising  the 
dog  readies  Leigh  for  the  track  team,  but  he  grows  in  other  ways 
as  well — in  his  relation  with  his  father,  in  his  problem  solving, 
and  in  his  feelings  for  a  dog  who  fills  a  need  that  children  will 
understand.  Leigh's  account  is  written  in  a  series  of  diary  en- 
tries. 

5.159  Clifton,  Lucille.  Three  Wishes.  Illustrated  by  Michael  Hays. 
Doubleday  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-385-30497-8. 
32p.  5-8. 

In  this  first-person  account  told  in  an  African  American  dialect, 
narrator  Zenobia  attests  to  the  truth  of  the  saying  that  if  you  find 
a  penny  with  your  birthdate  on  New  Year's  Day,  you  can  make 
three  wishes.  As  in  the  folktale,  Nobie  is  careless  with  her  first 
two  wishes  and  must  use  the  third  to  right  a  wrong.  Her  wise 
mother  helps  her  to  understand  that  good  friends  are  the  fulfill- 
ment of  one's  greatest  wish.  Michael  Hays's  acrylic  paintings 
show  the  texture  of  the  linen  canvas  and  seem  to  emit  warmth 
and  light. 

5.160  Corcoran,  Barbara.  The  Potato  Kid.  Atheneum/Jean  Karl  Books, 
1989.  ISBN  0-689-31589-9. 172p.  9  and  up  (est). 

Fourteen-year-old  Ellis's  plans  to  spend  the  summer  on  a  horse 
ranch  go  awry  when  her  mother  is  obliged  to  hostess  a  ten-year- 
old  girl  from  a  poverty-stricken  potato-farming  family.  Disap- 
pointed, Ellis  is  charged  with  entertaining  Lilac,  with  whom  she 
has  nothing  in  common  except  circumstance.  The  story  of  how 
they  cope  is  told  in  a  humorous,  often-poignant  narrative  in 
which  both  girls  and  the  reader  learn  to  accept  and  appreciate 
differences  in  people. 

5.161  Fosburgh,  Lisa.  Afternoon  Magic.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02- 
735431-8.  211p.  10  and  up  (est). 


ERIC 


184 


Human  Relationships 


147 


They  were  all  latchkey  kids  in  an  upscale  neighborhood  who 
took  comfort  in  meeting  each  other  after  school  at  Willie's  house, 
where  they  shared  television  and  snacks.  Amid  the  uncertainties 
of  Willie's  life,  including  busy,  bickering  parents,  an  abusive 
friend  of  the  family,  and  an  interfering  grandmother,  they  were 
a  constant,  even  if  no  one  knew  they  came.  Then,  into  these 
predictable  afternoons,  comes  new-neighbor  Harold,  who  per- 
forms magic  tricks,  but  also  threatens,  connives,  blackmails, 
dominates,  and  vandalizes. 

5.162  Gibbons,  Faye.  King  Shoes  and  Clown  Pockets.  Morrow  Junior 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-06592-9.  231p.  9  and  up  (est.). 

According  to  one  fourth-grade  reader,  this  book,  set  in  Alabama, 
is  a  "modern  Tom  Sawyer  with  everything  I  like  in  a  book:  drama, 
comedy,  and  adventure."  The  unusual  title  nicknames  the  main 
characters,  Raymond  Brock,  youngest  child  of  neglectful,  too- 
busy  parents,  and  Bruce  Manis,  son  of  a  frequently  absent  junk 
dealer  and  a  runaway  mom.  Through  a  series  of  hilarious  ad- 
ventures, King  Shoes  and  Clown  Pockets  come  to  understand 
their  unhappy  homes,  cope  with  the  unfairness  of  life,  and  ma- 
ture as  a  result. 

5.163  Gilson,  Jamie.  Sticks  and  Stones  and  Skeleton  Bones.  Illustra- 
tions by  Dee  deRosa.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991. 
ISBN  0-688-10098-8. 162p.  8-11. 

Digging  up  a  time  capsule,  falling  down  an  escalator,  and  fist 
fighting  at  school  turn  fifth  graders  Hobie  and  Nick  into  former 
best  friends.  Because  of  a  recent  flood,  their  school  meets  in  a 
shopping  mall — complete  with  Santa  Claus.  It  takes  two  student 
mediators  and  a  not-so-jolly  St.  Nick  to  help  the  boys  mend  their 
differences.  Jamie  Gilson  presents  life  in  the  fifth  grade  with 
smiles  and  hearty  laughter. 

5.164  Haywood,  Carolyn.  Eddie's  Friend  Boodles.  Illustrated  by 
Catherine  Stock.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09028- 
1.  80p.  6  and  up. 

In  Carolyn  Haywood's  last  book  for  children,  a  manuscript  com- 
pleted shortly  before  her  death,  Eddie  Wilson's  friend  Boodles 
assumes  center  stage.  Intrigued  by  the  circus  performance  that 
he  and  Eddie  attend,  Boodles  attempts  to  teach  his  dog  Poochie 
some  tricks,  with  the  usual  sorts  of  calamities  and  chuckles.  But 
Boodles  remembers  Turnip  the  Clown's  advice:  "You  have  to 


I8f> 


148 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction^ 


believe  You  have  to  love  your  dog,  and  your  dog  has  to  love 

you  back/'  And  love  does  the  trick. 

5.165  Henkes,  Kevin.  Words  of  Stone.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-688-11356-7. 152p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Ten-year-old  Blaze  Werla  lives  with  his  artist  father  and  his 
grandmother,  but  mostly  he  is  alone,  apart,  and  afraid,  trying  to 
accept  his  mother's  death.  When  brash  Joselle  Stark,  abandoned 
by  her  mother,  "the  beautiful  Vicki,"  moves  into  the  neighbor- 
hood to  live  with  her  own  grandmother,  she  learns  details  of 
Blaze's  fears  and  begins  to  leave  messages  on  the  hillside — 
"words  of  stone" — that  open  the  wounds  of  Blaze's  past.  Over 
time,  the  two  meet  and  become  friends,  and  each  fills  the  other's 
needs.  Blaze  offers  Joselle  his  sensitivity,  and  she  gives  him 
courage  to  face  his  past. 

5.166  Holmes,  Barbara  Ware.  Charlotte  Shakespeare  and  Annie  the 
Great.  Illustrated  by  John  Himmelman.  Harper  and  Row,  1989. 
ISBN  0-06-022615-3. 152p.  9-12. 

Partly  because  her  sixth-grade  teacher  believes  in  her,  Charlotte 
Cheetham  writes  a  play  for  her  class  that  is  so  funny  and  scary 
that  her  father  calls  her  Charlotte  Shakespeare.  As  director, 
Charlotte  believes  that  her  shy  friend  Annie  should  play  the 
lead,  but  brash  Tina  covets  the  part.  Through  coaching  by  Char- 
lotte's father,  Annie  wins  the  part — and  a  lot  of  attention  as  well. 
Charlotte  learns  some  things  about  jealousy,  about  being  in 
charge,  and  about  collaboration.  Bravo,  Charlotte,  for  a  witty 
and  contemporary  third-encore  performance. 

5.167  Jones,  Rebecca  C.  Matthew  and  Tilly.  Illustrated  by  Beth  Peck. 


Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44684-2.  32p.  3-6 
(est). 


Matthew  and  Tilly  are  the  best  of  friends,  boy  and  girl,  black  and 
white.  They  ride  bikes  together,  sell  lemonade  together,  and  play 
sidewalk  games  together.  But  one  day,  while  coloring  together, 
Matthew  breaks  Tilly's  purple  crayon,  and  the  friendship  crum- 
bles, too,  until  each  realizes  how  the  best  times  depend  on  a  best 
friend.  Beth  Peck's  dark-tone  paintings  are  impressions  of  her 
own  childhood  neighborhood  of  Washington  Heights  in  New 
York  City. 

5.168  Kherdian,  David.  The  Great  Fishing  Contest.  Illustrated  by 
Nonny  Hogrogian.  Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-22263-4. 
46p.  7-10  (est.). 


ERLC 


166 


Human  Relationships 


149 


Best  friends  Jason  and  Sammy  enter  the  children's  fishing  con- 
test at  the  zoo,  a  contest  which  has  as  its  grand  prize  a  complete 
spinning  outfit  Painstakingly,  the  boys  plan  their  strategies, 
their  floats,  and  their  position  on  the  banks  of  the  pond.  They 
even  plan  how  to  earn  a  second  fishing  outfit  should  one  of  them 
win.  In  a  slim  book  divided  into  chapters,  Nonny  Hogrogian 
uses  pastels  to  produce  edge-to-edge  scenes  of  boys  who  fish 
smart,  meet  challenges,  and  know  friendship. 

5.169  Lillie,  Patricia.  Jake  and  Rosie.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Lillie. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07625-4.  24p.  6-8  (est.). 

When  friends  are  friends  like  Jake  and  Rosie — exactly  the  same 
size  and  with  hair  almost  the  same  color — they  do  everything 
together.  They  play  pirates,  draw  monsters,  trade  one  shoe  to  be 
twins,  and  even  get  the  chicken  pox  together.  But  when  Rosie  is 
gone  one  day,  Jake  suffers  separation  pain  as  only  young  chil- 
dren can  until  Rosie  returns  sporting  new  shoes  just  like  Jake's. 
Simple  illustrations  show  the  warm  friendship  between  sexes 
and  races. 

5.170  Lisle,  Janet  Taylor.  Afternoon  of  the  Elves.  Orchard  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-531-08437-X.  122p.  9-11. 

Hillary  befriends  the  mysterious  Sara-Kate  because  of  the  mini- 
ature village  in  her  backyard,  which  Sara-Kate  claims  was  built 
by  elves.  Only  through  the  strength  of  their  friendship  does 
Sara-Kate  let  Hillary  know  about  her  mother's  mental  illness 
and  the  resulting  disintegration  of  her  family.  Neivbery  Honor 
Book,  1990. 

5.171  Mazer,  Norma  Fox.  Babyface.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-688-08752-3. 165p.  12  and  up. 

Award-winning  author  Norma  Fox  Mazer  recounts  the  story  of 
two  fourteen-year-old  best  friends,  Toni  and  Julie,  and  the  strug- 
gles that  envelop  their  families.  When  Julie's  family  shatters  and 
she  moves  away,  Toni  is  left  alone  to  deal  with  her  own  prob- 
lems: sibling  jealousy,  family  illness  and  dissension,  the  roller- 
coaster  ride  of  first  love,  and  the  need  to  balance  her  growing 
sense  of  independence  with  an  equally  strong  desire  for  family 
support.  Regardless  of  the  topic  (puppy  love,  pending  divorce, 
changing  relationships),  Mazer  portrays  situations  realistically 
with  clear,  easily  readable  prose. 

5.172  Mazer,  Norma  Fox.  Silver.  Avon  Books/Flare  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-380-75026-0.  202p.  10  and  up. 


ERIC 


150 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Sarabeth  Silver  and  her  mother  barely  manage  to  survive  finan- 
cially in  their  house  trailer.  When  Sarabeth  suddenly  has  the 
opportunity  to  attend  junior  high  school  in  a  wealthy  district, 
her  mother  jumps  at  this  chance  to  improve  her  daughter's 
education.  During  the  course  of  one  year,  Sarabeth  learns  that 
the  pains  and  pleasures  of  preadolescence  cross  all  economic 
levels.  Topics  sensitively  portrayed  include  the  changing  family 
unit,  single  parenting,  friendships,  first  love,  and  sexual  abuse. 
ALA  Best  Books  for  Young  Adults. 

5*173  McKenna,  Colleen  O'Shaughnessy.  Fifth  Grade:  Here  Comes 
Trouble.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41733-9. 
137p.  8-12  (est). 

Collette  Murphy,  age  ten,  wants  to  find  out  why  she's  different 
from  her  friends,  who  consider  her  a  party  pooper  and  a  fuddy 
duddy.  In  so  doing,  she  decides,  against  her  better  judgment,  to 
accept  her  friend  Marsha's  invitation  to  go  shopping  for  teenage 
things  and  to  attend  her  boy-girl  "Signpost  to  Maturity"  birth- 
day party.  Shopping  at  Boss's  in  the  mall  turns  into  a  nightmare, 
but  at  the  party  Collette  turns  her  attention  to  making  sure  that 
Marsha's  eleventh-year  celebration  is  her  greatest. 

5.174  Naylor,  Phyllis  Reynolds.  Alice  in  Rapture,  Sort  Of. 
Atheneum/Jean  Karl  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-31466-3. 166p.  10- 
12  (est). 

This  sequel  to  The  Agony  of  Alice  follows  Alice,  Elizabeth,  and 
Pamela  through  the  summer  before  they  enter  junior  high.  For 
Alice,  it  is  also  the  summer  of  her  first  boyfriend.  Her  two  best 
friends  have  boyfriends,  too,  since  rumor  has  it  that  having  a 
boyfriend  is  critical  to  seventh-grade  success.  Together  they 
struggle  through  adolescent  worries — sometimes  funny,  some- 
times poignant — and  Alice  wishes  that  she  had  a  mother  to  turn 
to.  As  fall  arrives,  Alice  decides  that  for  now  she  needs  a  "special 
friend"  more  than  a  boyfriend. 

5.175  Orgel,  Doris.  Nobodies  and  Somebodies.  ISBN  0-670-82754-1. 
152p. 8-12. 

In  Ms.  Tatum's  fifth-grade  class,  the  girls  in  the  in-group  dress 
alike  and  are  members  of  an  exclusive  Super  Stars  Club.  Almost 
anything  can  cause  their  classmates  to  feel  like  "nobodies" 
around  the  Supes — Laura,  because  she's  the  new  girl,  and  Janet, 
because  she  stutters.  Even  Vero,  who's  a  member,  feels  uncertain 
of  herself  and  of  the  constancy  of  her  family's  love.  In  chapters 


188 


Human  Relationships 


151 


titled  with  their  names,  these  three  girls  tell  their  stories,  and 
learn  about  themselves,  each  other,  and  friendship. 

5.176  Pendergraft,  Patricia.  Brushy  Mountain.  Philomel  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-399-21610-3.  207p.  10  and  up. 

Mountain  dialect,  an  engrossing  plot,  and  colorful  characters 
make  this  book  a  wonderful  read-aloud.  The  plot  is  driven  by 
thirteen-year-old  Arney's  aborted  and  humorous  attempts  to 
put  an  end  to  crotchety  old  man  Hooker.  Inevitably  his  actions 
rescue  the  ungrateful  old  man  instead.  A  pet  turkey,  fire,  storms, 
and  the  birth  of  the  old  man's  grandchild  add  excitement  and 
humor  to  this  warm  story  of  a  boy  who  learns  that  a  thorny 
exterior  frequently  hides  an  unhappy  person  inside. 

5.177  Polacco,  Patricia.  Chicken  Sunday.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Po- 
lacco.  Philomel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22133-6.  32p.  4rS. 

Patricia  Polacco's  memories  of  childhood  include  Sunday's  fried 
chicken  with  Miss  Eula  Mae  Walker  and  her  grandsons,  Stewart 
and  Winston.  Miss  Eula's  African  American  family  become  like 
Polacco's  own.  Little  wonder  that  she  wants  more  than  anything 
in  the  world  to  help  her  "brothers"  get  Miss  Eula  a  special  Easter 
bonnet.  Line  drawings  are  shaded  with  warm  skin  tones,  vibrant 
colors,  and  even  actual  photographs  tucked  into  cozy  family 
scenes.  By  painting  and  selling  Ukrainian  eggs,  the  children  earn 
money  for  the  bonnet,  and  two  cultures  are  blended. 

5.178  Polacco,  Patricia.  Picnic  at  Mudsock  Meadow.  Illustrated  by 
Patricia  Polacco.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-21811-4. 
32p.  4-8. 

William  is  sure  that  the  eerie  lights  hanging  over  Quicksand 
Bottoms  are  just  swamp  gas,  and  not  the  ghost  of  old  Titus 
Dinworthy.  "Peeeeeee  youuuuuuu,"  retorts  Hester  Bledden, 
causing  William  to  blush  as  "red  as  a  Union  City  farm-fresh 
tomato,"  and  she  beats  him  in  one  contest  after  another.  In  a  final 
attempt  to  better  Hester,  William  braves  the  swamp.  And  Hester 
Bledden  is  proud  as  punch  to  share  a  plate-o'-cream  with  the 
swamp  monster  at  Mudsock  Meadow's  annual  Halloween  pic- 
nic. 

5.179  Rodowsky,  Colby.  Dog  Days.  Illustrated  by  Kathleen  Collins 
Howell.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-36342-0. 
131p.  7-11  (est). 


152 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Rosie  Riggs's  summer  vacation  couldn't  be  worse.  Her  best 
friend  left  for  Minnesota,  her  mom  left  for  work,  and  her  favorite 
baby-sitter  left  for  Cape  Cod.  Summer  life  takes  a  turn  for  the 
better,  however,  when  "Sandy  the  Super  Dog"  and  his  owner,  a 
famous  children's  author,  move  in  next  door.  Exciting  events 
turn  the  summer  into  one  of  important  discoveries  of  both 
friendships  and  fantasies. 

5.180  Ross,  Tony.  A  Fairy  Tale.  Illustrated  by  Tony  Ross.  Little,  Brown, 
1991.  ISBN  0-316-75750-0.  32p.  4^8  (est). 

Bessie  doesn't  believe  in  fairies  or  magic.  But  her  elderly  neigh- 
bor, Mrs.  Leaf,  does.  Mrs.  Leaf  reminds  Bessie  of  the  magic  of  a 
perfect  summer  afternoon  and  the  pure  happiness  of  certain 
Christmas  Eves.  Mrs.  Leaf  admits  that  even  she  might  be  a  fairy, 
which  Bessie  scoffs  at  since  Mrs.  Leaf  is  neither  little  nor  pretty. 
As  Bessie  grows  and  changes,  so  does  her  relationship  with  Mrs. 
Leaf,  and  even  Mrs.  Leaf  herself.  Tony  Ross's  illustrations  stroke 
grays  and  blue-violets  into  milltown  skies  and  enhance  the 
transformation  of  the  characters. 

5.181  Rylant,  Cynthia.  An  Angel  for  Solomon  Singer.  Illustrated  by 
Peter  Catalanotto.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1992. 
ISBN  0-531-08578-3. 32p.  All  ages. 

Living  in  a  hotel  for  men  in  New  York  City  with  no  fireplace  for 
sitting,  no  picture  window  for  bird-watching,  and  no  cat,  Solo- 
mon Singer  "loved  where  he  lived  not  at  all."  So  Solomon  wan- 
ders the  city  as  he  wandered  the  fields  of  his  native  Indiana  in 
his  boyhood.  When  he  finds  the  Westway  Cafe,  where  a  waiter 
named  Angel  smiles  at  him,  Solomon's  perceptions  change.  Pe- 
ter Catalanotto's  paintings  capture  the  soul  of  the  book,  merging 
dreamy  visions  with  puddly  reflected  city  lights. 

5.182  Sharmat,  Marjorie  Weinman,  and  Mitchell  Sharmat.  The  Pizza 
Monster.  Illustrated  by  Denise  Brunkus.  Delacorte  Press,  1989. 
ISBN  0-385-29722-X.  48p.  5-8. 

Because  Olivia  Sharp  is  good  at  solving  problems  and  good  at 
keeping  secrets,  she  decides  to  become  a  secret  agent.  Her  first 
call  comes  from  Duncan,  an  eternal  pessimist  who  has  lost  his 
best  friend.  The  Eloise-like  Olivia  grabs  her  boa,  enlists  Willie 
her  chauffeur,  and  enthusiastically  embarks  on  her  first  assign- 
ment. Soon,  though,  she  discovers  that  even  fifty  pizzas  won't 
buy  a  friend,  and  that  Duncan's  case  will  require  serious  work 
on  the  fundamentals  of  friendship. 


ERLC 


! ,  ,  »;'■  \ '  / '  r  c 


A. 


C. 


A.  The  Exiles  by  Hilary  McKay  (see  5.122).  B.  What  Hearts  by  Bruce  Brooks  (see 
5.80).  C.  Matthew  and  Tilly  by  Rebecca  C.  Jones;  illustrated  by  Beth  Peck  (see 
5.167).  D.  Words  of  Stone  by  Kevin  Henkes  (see  5.165). 


ERIC 


191 


BFST  COPY  AVAILABIE 


A.  Chicken  Sunday  by  Patricia  Polacco  (see  5.177).  B.  Picnic  at  Mudsock  Meadow 
by  Patricia  Polacco  (*ee  5.178).  C.  Willie's  Not  the  Hugging  Kind  by  Joyce  Durham 
Barrett;  illustrated  by  Pat  Cummings  (see  5.72).  0.  Loop  the  Loop  by  Barbara  Dugan; 
illustrated  by  James  Stevenson  (see  5.297). 


BEST  COPY  WMUBtf 


Human  Relationships 


153 


5.183  Slepian,  Jan.  The  Broccoli  Tapes.  Philomel  Books,  1988.  ISBN 
0-399-21712-6. 157p.  8-12  (est.). 

When  Sara's  family  is  temporarily  relocated  from  Boston  to 
Hawaii,  she  and  her  brother  Sam  feel  cut  off  from  their  mainland 
friends  and  unaccepted  in  their  new  school.  Then  they  must 
cope  with  their  grandmother's  hospitalization  and  death. 
Lonely  Sara  maintains  ties  with  her  old  sixth-grade  classroom 
by  tape-recording  her  experiences  and  her  feelings.  Through  the 
tapes,  Sara  tells  of  their  discovery  of  a  broccoli-eating  cat, 
trapped  in  lava  rocks,  and  of  the  wary  Eddie,  as  mistrustful  as 
the  cat.  The  children's  attempts  to  win  the  trust  of  both  cat  and 
boy  move  the  story  to  a  poignant  ending.  ALA  Notable  Children's 
Books,  1989;  School  Library  Journal's  Best  Books,  1989;  ALA  Booklist 
Children's  Editors' Choices,  1989. 

5.184  Snyder,  Zilpha  Keatly.  Libby  on  Wednesday.  Dell/Yearling 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-440-40498-3. 196p.  9-13  (est.). 

Libby  McCall  feels  more  than  a  little  different  from  the  other 
students  at  Morrison  Middle  School.  Libby's  feelings  stem 
mostly  from  the  fact  that  she  is  attending  school  for  the  first 
time.  Besides  being  younger  (only  eleven),  she  is  smaller  than 
the  others,  and  initially  she  is  too  forthcoming  with  her  intellect. 
After  winning  a  writing  contest,  Libby  is  assigned  to  a  Wednes- 
day writing  workshop  with  four  other  students,  and  the  group 
members  begin  to  reveal  themselves  through  their  writing  and 
responses.  ALA  Best  Books  for  Young  Adults. 

5.185  Spinelli,  Jerry.  Fourth  Grade  Rats.  Illustrated  by  Paul  Casale. 
Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-590-44243-0. 84p.  7-9. 

"First  grade  babies!  Second  grade  cats!  Third  grade  angels! 
Fourth  grade . . .  RATS!"  Suds  liked  being  a  third-grade  angel, 
but  now  his  best  friend  Joey  is  after  him  to  become  a  true  fourth- 
grade  rat— to  push  younger  kids  off  swings,  eat  baloney  (not 
peanut  butter  and  jelly)  sandwiches,  and  defy  his  mother — in 
order  to  take  the  first  steps  toward  becoming  a  "man."  However, 
Suds  eventually  learns  that  growing  up  is  much  more  complex 
than  impressing  Joey  Peterson. 

5.186  Wallace,  Bill.  The  Biggest  Klutz  in  Fifth  Grade.  Holiday  House, 
1992.  ISBN  0-8234-0984-8. 148p.  9  and  up. 

A  bet  between  characters  reminiscent  of  Thomas  Rockwell's 
How  to  Eat  Fried  Worms  drives  the  plot  of  this  hilarious  story  Pat 
is  a  klutz,  and  everyone  knows  it.  He  proves  it  by  getting  stuck 


193 


154 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


under  a  chain-link  fence  during  the  greatest  tackle  of  his  ten- 
year-old  life.  But  can  he  remain  accident-free  long  enought  to 
win  the  bet  so  that  Neal  (and  not  he)  has  to  kiss  Kristine,  the 
Blimp,  in  front  of  the  whole  school?  Fifth-grade  jargon,  short 
chapters,  and  "don't-stop-now!"  chapter  endings  keep  the 
reader  engrossed  all  the  way  to  the  surprising  ending. 

5.187  Winthrop,  Elizabeth.  The  Best  Friends  Club:  A  Lizzie  and 
Harold  Story.  Illustrated  by  Martha  Weston.  Lothrop,  Lee  and 
Shepard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07583-5.  28p.  4-7. 

Because  Lizzie  and  Harold  are  constant  companions,  they  de- 
cide to  establish  the  Best  Friends  Club.  When  Lizzie  writes  her 
own  restrictive  club  rules,  suddenly  no  one  but  the  two  friends 
can  be  admitted.  Harold  doesn't  want  to  be  in  such  an  exclusive 
club,  and  when  he  finds  a  new  friend,  Lizzie  is  hurt.  Soon 
Harold's  diplomacy  wins  Lizzie  over,  and  a  new  club,  the  No 
Rules  Club,  is  formed.  Children  who  are  just  beginning  to  test 
social  relationships  will  find  author  Elizabeth  Winthrop's  per- 
spectives both  funny  and  informative. 

Illness  or  Death 

5.188  Ackerman,  Karen.  The  Broken  Boy.  Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-399-22254-5. 160p.  10  and  up. 

At  the  edge  of  puberty,  twelve-year-old  Solly  must  learn  the 
limits  of  his  responsibility  for  and  friendship  with  Daniel,  an 
emotionally  disturbed  boy  who  lives  next  door.  Daniel's  violent 
tantrums  and  his  belief  that  he  is  connected  spiritually  to  a  polio 
victim  who  lived  in  the  same  house  years  before  test  and  finally 
strengthen  Solly's  own  belief  in  himself  and  his  family.  Karen 
Ackerman  deftly  combines  a  strong  mystery  with  a  coming-of- 
age  tale. 

5.189  Amadeo,  Diana  M.  There's  a  Little  Bit  of  Me  in  Jamey.  Illus- 
trated by  Judith  Friedman.  Albert  Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075- 
7854-1.  29p.  6-9. 

Brian  is  confused,  afraid,  and  angry  when  his  younger  brother 
Jamey's  leukemia  becomes  worse.  Then  Jamey  comes  home 
from  the  hospital,  and  Mom,  Dad,  and  Grandma  seem  to  forget 
about  Brian,  so  consumed  are  they  with  concern  for  Jamey's 
health.  Eventually,  Brian's  anger  is  assuaged,  and  he  offers  a 
"little  bit  of  himself/'  his  own  bone  marrow,  to  help  save  his 
brother's  life.  Written  by  a  nurse,  the  book  features  characters 


ERIC 


194 


Human  Relationships 


155 


that  are  composites  of  her  patients  and  their  families  as  they 
struggle  with  childhood  cancer. 

5.190  Brooks,  Bruce.  Everywhere,  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06- 
020729-9.  70p.  9  and  up. 

It  is  eleven-year-old  Dooley  who  keeps  a  white  boy's  mind  off 
his  grandfather,  a  grandfather  who  lies  dying  upstairs,  a  victim 
of  a  weak  heart.  Dooley  is  Lucy's  nephew,  and  he  has  accompa- 
nied his  African  American  aunt  on  her  nursing  assignment. 
When  Dooley  suggests  some  soul  switching  between  a  turtle 
and  the  narrator's  grandfather,  there  is  soul  searching  about 
death,  about  life,  about  fear,  and  about  trust.  This  is  a  book 
worth  discussion  with  upper  graders. 

5.191  Bunting,  Eve.  The  Wall.  Illustrated  by  Ronald  Himler.  Clarion 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-395-51588-2. 29p.  4-8. 

This  touching  portrayal  of  a  boy  and  his  father  searching  *or  a 
name  at  the  Vietnam  Veterans  Memorial  speaks  to  both  children 
and  adults.  Through  the  young  boy's  eyes,  the  reader  meets 
other  visitors  to  "The  Wall" — a  disabled  veteran,  a  mourning 
couple,  and  young  girls  on  an  outing  with  little  understanding 
of  the  memorial's  significance.  Eve  Bunting  artfully  juxtaposes 
the  young  boy's  longing  for  his  fallen  grandfather  and  his  un- 
derstanding that  his  grandfather's  name  is  in  a  permanent  place 
of  honor.  The  paintings  are  quietly  haunting. 

5.192  Hamilton,  Virginia.  Cousins.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399- 
22164-6. 125p.  10  and  up. 

Eleven-year-old  Cammy  is  devoted  to  her  frail  ninety-four-year- 
old  grandmother,  now  in  a  care  home,  and  is  reconciled  to  her 
eventual  passing.  Too  busy  with  other  things,  her  brother  and 
cousins  rarely  visit  their  grandmother.  When  Cammy  witnesses 
the  accidental  drowning  of  Patty  Ann,  a  cousin  ner  own  age  with 
a  seemingly  perfect  life,  Cammy  leans  on  Gram  and  learns  the 
process  of  recovery  from  such  a  dramatic  event.  Notable  1990 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies;  ALA  Notable 
Children's  Books,  1991. 

5.193  Johnston,  Tony.  Grandpa's  Song.  Illustrated  by  Brad  Sneed.  Dial 
Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0802-5. 30p.  5-9. 

Exaggerated  caricatures  captured  in  bold  bright  watercolors  are 
a  joyful  addition  to  this  poignant  tale  of  a  young  girl  and  her 
aging  grandpa.  With  the  straightforward  innocence  and  love 


195 


156 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


that  only  a  child  possesses,  she  responds  to  her  grandpa's  grow- 
ing forgetfulness  by  helping  him  to  sing  their  favorite  song, 
thereby  taking  away  some  of  his  fear  and  sadness. 

5.194  Jordan,  MaryKate.  Losing  Uncle  Tim.  Illustrated  by  Judith 
Friedman.  Albert  Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075-4756-5. 32p.  7-11. 

Daniel  and  his  Uncle  Tim  enjoy  spending  time  together — they 
go  sledding,  talk,  and  play  with  toys  in  Uncle  Urn's  antique 
shop.  When  Daniel  asks  why  his  "favorite  grown-up"  has  been 
increasingly  tired  lately,  he  learns  that  Uncle  Tim  has  AIDS  and 
that  he  will  probably  die.  Watercolor  illustrations  in  subdued 
tones  portray  Daniel  as  he  goes  through  a  series  of  emotions — 
pity,  fear,  anger,  and  sadness — until  he  begins  to  cope  with  his 
uncle's  disease  and  eventual  death. 

5.195  Keller,  Holly.  The  Best  Present.  Illustrated  by  Holly  Keller. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07320-4.  28p.  4-7  (est.). 

Eight-year-old  Rosie  wants  to  visit  her  grandmother  in  the  hos- 
pital, but  the  rules  state  that  visitors  must  be  at  least  ten  years 
old.  With  the  help  of  her  friend  Kate,  Rosie  dresses  up  to  look 
older,  buys  three  carnations,  and  heads  for  the  hospital.  But  the 
hospital  guard  is  not  fooled,  and  Rosie  must  send  up  the  flowers 
for  Grandmother  with  the  elevator  man.  When  Grandmother 
comes  home,  she  shows  Rosie  all  of  her  get-well  cards  and  her 
favorite  present — three  carnations.  Notable  1989  Children's  Books 
in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.196  Laird,  Elizabeth.  Loving  Ben.  Delacorte  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-385- 
29810-2. 183p.  10  and  up  (est). 

Twelve-year-old  Anna  Peacock  experiences  troubles  and  tri- 
umphs with  girlfriends  and  boyfriends,  with  school,  and  with 
popularity,  but  central  to  this  novel  is  her  love  for  her  brother 
Ben.  When  Ben  is  born,  Anna  knows  something  is  wrong.  Anna 
and  her  family  soon  come  to  understand  that  their  new  baby  is 
hydrocephalic  and  severely  disabled.  Then  they  must  deal  with 
Ben's  death.  Author  Elizabeth  Laird  conveys  to  readers  her  un- 
derstanding of  the  gifts  that  disabled  children  have  to  offer. 

5.197  Madenski,  Melissa.  Some  of  the  Pieces.  Illustrated  by  Deborah 
Kogan  Ray.  Little,  Brown,  1991.  ISBN  0-316-54324-1.  30p.  4-8. 

With  words  perfectly  chosen,  this  bittersweet  story  carries  the 
young  reader  from  the  pain  of  losing  a  parent,  through  the 
healing  process,  and  out  of  that  bleak  tunnel  to  the  other  side, 


196 


Human  Relationships 


157 


where  memories  once  again  bring  smiles.  During  a  day  of  shar- 
ing their  memories,  Dylan  tells  his  mother,  "it's  like  when  Dad 
died,  he  split  into  a  thousand  pieces  so  he  could  be  with  all  the 
people  he  loved.  And  I'm  glad  some  of  the  pieces  are  with  me." 
Easy  and  comforting,  Deborah  Kogan  Ray's  illustrations  befit 
the  story's  mood  and  theme. 

5.198  Mayne,  William.  Gideon  Ahoy!  Delacorte  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0- 
440-50126-1. 156p.  Ages  10  and  up. 

Twelve-year-old  Eva  has  always  thought  her  family  was  a  little 
overwhelming,  especially  her  brother  Gideon,  who  is  both 
brain-damaged  and  deaf.  But  she  never  imagines  that  such  a 
horrifying  accident  as  befalls  Gideon  could  occur  in  her  family 
of  strangers.  Gideon's  first  job — opening  and  closing  bridges  on 
a  canal  barge — may  be  his  last,  but  it  may  also  bring  the  eccen- 
tric members  of  Eva's  family  closer  together  than  they've  ever 
been  before.  Boston  Globe-Horn  Book  Honor  Book,  1989. 

5.199  Polacco,  Patricia.  Uncle  Vova's  Tree.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Po- 
lacco.  Philomel  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21617-0.  30p.  4-8. 

A  Christmas  season  with  Uncle  Vova  is  rich  with  love  and  his 
Russian  homeland  traditions  of  dancing,  special  ornaments,  a 
sleigh  ride,  Russian  foods,  and  decorating  a  tree  for  the  animals. 
Then  comes  a  sad  time,  the  Christmas  when  Uncle  Vova  is  gone. 
Yet  through  memories  and  the  keeping  of  traditions,  the  chil- 
dren discover  that  their  uncle's  love  will  always  be  with  them. 
Warmly  colored  folk-art  patterns  surround  penciled  faces,  cap- 
turing a  simple,  joyous  time.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books 
in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.200  Roth,  Susan  L.  We'll  Ride  Elephants  through  Brooklyn.  Illus- 
trated by  Susan  L.  Roth.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1989.  ISBN 
0-374-38258-1.  29p.  3-6  (est.). 

A  little  girl  anticipates  the  day  when  Grandpa  will  get  better. 
That  special  day  will  feature  a  parade  through  Brooklyn  com- 
plete with  elephants,  balloons,  a  band,  dancing  and  cartwheels, 
and  root  beer  and  cupcakes.  Brightly  colored  collage  illustra- 
tions enhance  this  celebration  of  a  child's  love  for  her  grandpa. 

5.201  Rylant,  Cynthia.  Missing  May.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-531-08596-1. 89p.  11  and  up. 

When  May  dies,  life  almost  stops  for  Ob,  her  husband  of  many 
years,  and  for  twelve-year-old  Summer,  the  orphaned  niece 


L97 


158 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


whom  the  couple  has  raised  in  their  old  age.  May's  life  spirit  had 
buoyed  them,  bringing  them  strength  because  "We  had  May  to 
brag  on  us  both/'  Summer,  May  said  repeatedly,  was  the  best 
little  girl  that  she  ever  knew.  And  to  May,  arthritic  Ob  was  the 
sim  and  the  moon.  So  when  Cletus,  an  odd  neighbor  boy  with 
his  own  set  of  gifts,  brings  them  an  ad  for  a  spirtual  medium,  Ob 
grasps  at  the  chance  to  communicate  with  May  once  again. 
Cynthia  Rylant's  story,  set  in  West  Virginia,  offers  great  love  and 
achieves  great  healing.  Boston  Globe-Horn  Book  Fiction  Award, 
1992;  Newbery  Medal,  1993. 

5.202  Rylant,  Cynthia.  Mr.  Griggs'  Work.  Illustrated  by  Julie  Down- 
ing. Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531- 
08369-1.  27p.  4-7. 

With  the  sensitivity  to  which  her  readers  are  accustomed,  Cyn- 
thia Rylant  tells  the  story  of  Mr.  Griggs,  a  man  who  loves  his 
work  in  a  small-town  post  office  so  much  that  he  can't  stop 
thinking  about  it.  When  he  gets  sick  and  must  miss  work  for  the 
first  time  ever,  he  is  miserable.  Upon  recovery  and  return  to 
work,  he  relishes  being  there  even  more,  asking  his  first  cus- 
tomer, "almost  gleefully,  'First  Class  or  Parcel  Post?'"  Colorful 
pastel  illustrations  show  the  pride  and  joy  that  Mr.  Griggs  has  in 
his  work. 

5.203  Springer,  Nancy.  Colt.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN 
0-8037-1022-4. 121p.  10  and  up. 

Participating  in  a  horseback  riding  program  for  the  disabled, 
Colt  Vittorio,  at  first  reluctant,  comes  to  cherish  his  time  in  the 
saddle  and  out  of  his  wheelchair.  He  gains  needed  physical 
strength  and  confidence.  But  when  he  develops  a  physical  prob- 
lem that  prevents  him  from  riding,  his  new  stepfather  finds  the 
solution  in  a  Paso  Fino  horse — a  breed  that  does  not  trot.  This 
warm  story  concludes  with  a  harrowing  ride  that  fosters  Colt's 
inner  strength  and  resources. 

5.204  Stolz,  Mary.  King  Emmett  the  Second.  Illustrated  by  Garth  Wil- 
liams. Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09520-8. 56p.  7  and 
up. 

In  this  sequel  to  Emmett's  Pig,  Emmett  Murphy  must  deal  simul- 
taneously with  two  traumas  in  his  life:  news  of  the  death  of  his 
beloved  pet  pig,  King  Emmett,  and  a  pending  family  move  from 
New  York  to  Ohio.  Emmett's  initial  refusal  to  be  comforted  or 
cajoled  by  his  new  porch  or  garden  or  neighbors  or  even  a  new 


198 


Human  Relationships 


159 


bicycle  seems  perfectly  reasonable  and  childlike.  Eventually, 
Emmett  comes  to  love  both  Ohio  and  a  new  pet.  Garth  Wil- 
liams's intermittent  sketches  include  a  Wilbur-like  remembrance 
of  King  Emmett  the  First. 

5.205  Thomas,  Jane  Resh.  Saying  Good-bye  to  Grandma.  Illustrated 
by  Marcia  Sewall.  Clarion  Books,  1988.  ISBN  0-89919-645-4. 48p. 
6-9. 

At  age  seven,  Suzie  is  faced  with  saying  good-bye  to  Grandma. 
Suzie  and  her  mother  and  father  travel  to  Grandma's  funeral, 
where  they  gather  with  other  friends  and  relatives  to  grieve,  to 
bid  a  final  farewell,  and  to  celebrate  the  love  that  they  have  for 
one  another.  From  the  cousins'  whispered  game  of  hide-and- 
seek  in  the  casket  display  room  of  the  funeral  home  to  the  tears 
that  Grandpa  sheds,  it  is  both  a  touching  and  real  story.  Cer- 
tainly this  book  will  assist  teachers,  counselors,  and  parents  as 
they  help  children  understand  the  death  of  a  loved  one.  Joan 
Fassler  Memorial  Book  Award,  Association  for  the  Care  of  Children's 
Health,  1989. 

5.206  Thurman,  Chuck.  A  Time  for  Remembering,  Illustrated  by 
Elizabeth  Sayles.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers, 
1989.  ISBN  0-671-68573-2.  25p.  4-8  (est.). 

A  boy's  grandfather  gave  him  many  things,  good  times,  and 
opportunities  to  learn  and  grow.  After  his  grandfather's  death, 
the  boy  sits  in  front  of  a  fireplace  and  uses  a  flower  that  his 
grandfather  gave  him  on  their  last  visit  together  to  open  a  well 
of  memories  that  will  keep  his  grandfather  alive  forever.  Shad- 
owy, expressionistic  paintings  are  somber,  yet  comforting. 

5.207  Wilson,  Johnniece  Marshall.  Robin  on  His  Own.  Scholastic 
Hardcover  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-590-41813-0. 144p.  8-12. 

When  Aunt  Belle  marries  nnd  moves  out  of  town,  Robin's  wid- 
owed father  decides  that  he  and  Robin  must  move  to  a  smaller 
apartment,  which  means  that  Robin  may  lose  his  cat,  his  new 
parakeet,  and  his  friends.  Robin  is  also  trying  to  come  to  terms 
with  the  death  of  his  mother.  Left  alone  one  night,  Robin  sets  out 
to  visit  Aunt  Belle,  with  disastrous  consequences.  Johnniece  Mar- 
shall Wilson's  portrait  of  African  American  family  life  is  warm 
and  convincing. 

5.208  Woodruff,  Elvira.  Dear  Napoleon,  I  Know  You're  Dead,  But. ... 
Illustrated  by  Noah  and  Jess  Woodruff.  Holiday  House,  1992. 
ISBN  0-8234-0962-7.  220p.  10  and  up  (est.). 


160 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


When  Marty's  fourth-grade  teacher  asks  the  class  to  write  a 
letter  to  a  famous  person,  Marty  can  think  of  no  living  hero — 
none,  that  is,  except  Gramps.  For  weeks,  though,  Gramps  has 
been  confined  to  a  nursing  home,  too  ill  to  live  with  Marty  and 
his  mother.  On  a  whim,  Marty  writes  to  Napoleon.  When 
Gramps  hears  of  it,  he  hints  of  a  way  to  get  the  letter  across  time. 
In  the  end,  Gramps  has  taught  Marty  laughter,  magic,  mystery, 
and  hope. 

5.209  Ziefert,  Harriet.  When  Daddy  Had  the  Chicken  Pox.  Illustrated 
by  Lionel  Kalish.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-026907-3.  28p. 
4-8  (est.). 

Ellen  is  fearful  when  her  father  becomes  so  ill  with  the  chicken 
pox  that  he  can't  go  to  work  or  attend  her  ballet  recital.  But  after 
a  few  days,  his  lack  of  interest  in  everything  turns  to  requests  for 
food,  the  newspaper,  and  his  briefcase.  Stylized  illustrations 
chronicle  the  return  to  health  as  pox  fade  and  frowns  turn  to 
smiles. 

School  Life  and  Day  Care 

5.210  Baehr,  Patricia.  School  Isn't  Fair!  Illustrated  by  R.  W.  Alley.  Four 
Winds  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-708130-3.  30p.  4-6  (est.). 

Edward  finds  one  grumble  after  another  at  school — the  snack- 
time  carrot  with  the  stump  left  on,  Donny  who  knocks  him 
down,  Linda  who  obstructs  his  view  and  splashes  juice,  and 
Mrs.  Monroe  who  has  no  sense  of  justice.  In  the  end,  Edward's 
skill  in  zipping  jackets  brings  a  triumphant  turn  of  events.  Styl- 
ized drawings,  highlighted  with  colored  pencil  and  watercolor, 
complement  a  story  of  childhood  that  rings  true.  Notable  1989 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.211  Bunting,  Eve.  Our  Sixth-Grade  Sugar  Babies.  J.  B.  Lippincott, 
1990.  ISBN  0-397-32452-9. 146p.  9-12. 

When  Mrs.  Oda  gives  her  sixth-grade  class  an  assignment  in 
responsibility,  each  student  becomes  "parent"  to  a  five-pound 
bag  of  sugar  for  one  week.  Even  though  their  sugar  babies  are 
never  to  be  left  alone,  Vicki  becomes  distracted  by  a  seventh- 
grade  boy  and  temporarily  abandons  her  baby  on  the  lawn. 
When  she  returns,  both  "baby"  and  an  elderly  neighbor  have 
disappeared.  Vicki  must  decide  whether  to  own  up  to  her  re- 
sponsibilities or  to  take  an  easier  route. 


2u0 


Human  Relationships 


161 


5.212  Bunting,  Eve.  Our  Teacher's  Having  a  Baby.  Illustrated  by  Di- 
ane de  Groat.  Clarion  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-60470-2. 32p.  6-8 
(est). 

The  title  page  is  crayoned  in  a  child's  hand  and  thumbtacked  to 
a  bulletin  board.  Diane  de  Groat's  watercolors  bring  a  classroom 
family  to  life  as  Mrs.  Neal  explains  to  her  first  graders  that 
"Teachers  can  be  mothers,  too."  Narrator  Samantha  and  the 
other  children  engage  in  touching  baby  preparations  such  as 
putting  stickers  on  their  teacher's  shirt,  "right  on  the  stretched- 
out  part/'  writing  letters,  picking  names,  and  cutting  out  baby 
things  for  the  bulletin  board.  Their  questions  and  concerns  are 
childlike  and  honest,  their  teacher  sensitive  and  open. 

5.213  Carrick,  Carol.  Left  Behind.  Illustrated  by  Donald  Carrick.  Clar- 
ion Books,  1988.  ISBN  0-89919-535-0. 29p.  5-8. 

Manifesting  many  children's  fears,  Christopher  becomes  sepa- 
rated from  his  classmates  on  a  trip  to  the  aquarium.  When  he 
steps  from  the  subway  to  let  other  passengers  off,  the  train 
leaves  without  him.  With  all  the  worries  and  confusion  of  a  lost 
child,  Christopher  tries  to  maintain  his  bearings,  read  signs,  and 
look  for  help.  A  policeman  who  knows  what  to  do  and  an  un- 
derstanding teacher  make  for  a  comforting  conclusion.  Water- 
colors  bustle  with  city  life. 

5.214  Cleary,  Beverly.  Muggie  Maggie.  Illustrated  by  Kay  Life.  Mor- 
row Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08554-7.  70p.  8-12  (est.). 

Third-grader  Maggie  Schultz  decides  that  she  has  no  use  for 
cursive  writing,  with  its  imprecise  squiggles  so  different  from 
manuscript  printing  and  writing  with  the  computer.  Her  dispo- 
sition gets  worse  when  she  tries  writing  her  name  in  cursive  at 
school  and  it  comes  out  "Muggie,"  a  name  that  sticks.  Maggie 
stubbornly  refuses  to  back  down,  and  in  the  process  she  learns 
that  there  is  a  greater  significance  to  cursive  writing  than  just 
learning  to  close  her  loops. 

5.215  Delton,  Judy.  My  Mom  Made  Me  Go  to  School.  Illustrated  by 
Lisa  McCue.  Delacorte  Press,  1991.  ISBN  0-385-30330-0. 32p.  5-8. 

Summer  over,  Mom  announces  that  it's  time  for  preparations  for 
school.  For  the  kindergarten-bound  narrator,  Archie,  that  means 
such  things  as  new  corduroy  pants  (the  color  of  peas)  that  hang 
over  his  shoes,  won't  bend,  and  smell  awful.  It  means  new  shoes 
that  pinch,  a  dental  checkup,  booster  shots,  and  a  haircut  that 
makes  his  head  feel  like  a  toothbrush.  No  wonder  Archie  de- 


162 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


tides  that  he's  not  going  to  school.  Lisa  McCue's  cheerful  illus- 
trations are  suitably  impish. 

5.216  Hennessy,  B.  G.  School  Days*  Illustrated  by  Tracey  Campbell 
Pearson.  Viking  Penguin,  1990.  ISBN  0-670-83025-9.  32p.  3-8. 

Dedicated  to  "all  the  teachers  who  make  school  fun/'  this  book 
is  a  visual  treat— beginning  with  the  arrival  of  the  school  bus, 
through  circle  time  and  show  and  tell,  to  the  last  good-bye.  In 
watercolor  washes,  children  are  depicted  alternately  playing, 
listening  to  stories,  painting  a  huge  blue  whale,  tending  class- 
room pets,  or  making  letter  games.  Rhyming  text  is  printed  as  a 
teacher's  handwriting  on  writing  lines  along  the  bottom  bor- 
ders. The  pictures  are  worth  close  inspection  for  humorous  de- 
tails. 

5.217  Hoffman,  Phyllis.  Meatball.  Illustrated  by  Emily  Arnold 
McCully.  HarperCollins/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-06-022564-5.  32p.  2-7. 

Marilyn  is  called  Meatball  by  her  day-care  teacher,  Julia,  because 
Marilyn  is  round  and  yummy  Marilyn  relates  in  first  person  her 
day-care  routine — from  morning  drop-off  to  evening  pickup. 
Included  are  descriptions  of  work  and  play,  friends  and  centers, 
naps  and  snacks.  The  tone  is  gentle  and  comforting,  as  are  Emily 
Arnold  McCully's  warm,  multicultural  classroom  scenes. 

5.218  Hurwitz,  Johanna.  Class  President.  Illustrated  by  Sheila 
Hamanaka.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09114-8. 
85p.  7  and  up. 

As  the  fifth  grade  begins,  Julio  Sanchez  and  his  friends  are 
assigned  a  new  teacher  who  initiates  some  unusual  activities. 
One  is  the  election  of  a  class  president.  Cricket  Kaufman,  the 
smartest  girl  in  class,  and  Lucas  Cott,  the  class  clown,  appear  to 
be  the  only  choices  until  Julio's  surprising  nomination.  Unas- 
suming Julio  is  nominated  because  of  his  kindness,  generosity, 
and  leadership  abilities.  Julio's  eventual  election  is  set  against 
the  background  of  normal  fifth-grade  turmoils.  Black-and-white 
illustrations  add  to  the  story's  realism. 

5.219  Lowry,  Lois.  Your  Move,  J.  P.!  Dell/Yearling  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-440-40497-5. 122p.  9-12  (est.). 

J.  P.  Tate  is  twelve,  a  good  student,  a  champion  chess  player,  and 
in  love.  The  object  of  his  crush  is  Angela  Patricia  Galsworthy, 
newly  arrived  from  England,  with  traits  that  make  J.  P.  use 


202 


Human  Relationships 


163 


deodorant  and  think  in  trite  phrases:  her  hair  is  like  spun  gold, 
her  teeth  like  pearls,  her  eyes  like  pools.  To  gain  Angela's  affec- 
tion, J.  P.  falls  into  a  "web  of  deception"  that  involves  a  fictitious 
disease  and  rich  relatives.  True  friendship  and  gently  guided 
self-inspection  turn  things  around. 

5.220  Martin,  Ann.  Rachel  Parker,  Kindergarten  Show-Off.  Illus- 
trated by  Nancy  Poydar.  Holiday  House,  1992.  ISBN  0-8234- 
0935-X.  32p.  4-7  (est.). 

For  the  energetic,  five-year-old  African  American  narrator, 
Olivia,  who  is  "very  good  at  kindergarten,"  there  is  great  expec- 
tation that  the  new  neighbors  may  have  a  girl  just  her  age.  But 
when  Rachel  Elizabeth  Parker  moves  in  and  can  also  read  and 
write,  has  two  first  names,  a  puppet  stage,  a  granddaddy  who 
gives  candy,  and  a  baby  sister,  it  may  be  too  much  for  Olivia  to 
bear.  A  sensitive  teacher  and  a  shared  task  help  cement  friend- 
ship. 

5.221  McKenna,  Colleen  O'Shaughnessy.  Fourth  Grade  Is  a  Jinx. 
Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41735-5.  168p. 
8-12. 

To  Collette's  horror  and  embarrassment,  when  her  fourth-grade 
teacher  breaks  her  leg,  Collette's  own  mother  is  selected  as  the 
substitute!  Although  the  class  is  pleased,  Collette  is  not,  because 
the  happy  routine  of  the  Murphy's  home  life  is  destroyed  by  her 
mother's  working.  The  familiar  story  problems,  the  somewhat 
exaggerated  characters  of  snooty  Marsha  and  pesky  Roger, 
abundant  conversation,  and  short  paragraphs  make  this  a  sure 
favorite  of  intermediate  children. 

5.222  Morris,  Judy  K.  The  Kid  Who  Ran  for  Principal.  J.  B.  Lippincott, 
1989.  ISBN  0-397-32360-3. 212p.  8-12. 

Sixth  graders  have  reasons  to  work  hard  on  their  class  election 
project  to  change  Daniel  Webster  Elementary  from  a  "good  little 
school"  to  a  "great  little  school":  good  math,  good  teaching,  fair 
rules,  a  soccer  coach,  workable  equipment.  Class  member  Bon- 
nie Mann,  chosen  to  run  for  interim  principal,  learns  that  more 
than  her  shy,  "good-little-girl"  reputation  is  necessary  to  effect 
changes.  She  must  be  assertive  before  the  school  community. 
Election  night  arrives,  and  parents  are  surprised  to  learn  the 
depth  of  student  commitment  to  the  campaign. 

5.223  Roe,  Eliane  Corbeil.  Circle  of  Light.  Harper  and  Row,  1989. 
ISBN  0-06-025079-8. 248p.  10  and  up. 


164 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Lucy,  a  thirteen-year-old  French  Canadian,  reluctantly  agrees  to 
represent  her  Catholic  school  in  a  regional  scholastic  competi- 
tion. During  the  long  months  of  hard  study,  Lucy  grapples  with 
isolation,  teasing,  grief  over  the  deaths  of  her  father  and  brother, 
and  the  pains  of  first  love.  Ultimately,  her  discipline  and  matur- 
ity bring  honor  to  her  school,  pride  and  consolation  to  her  fam- 
ily, and  romance  to  her  life. 

5.224  Sharmat,  Marjorie  Weinman,  and  Mitchell  Sharmat.  The  Prin- 
cess of  the  Fillmore  Street  School.  Illustrated  by  Denise 
Brunkus.  Delacorte  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-29811-0. 44p.  5-8. 

In  her  second  adventure  as  Agent  for  Secrets,  Olivia  Sharp,  who 
is  a  cross  between  the  pampered  Eloise  of  the  Ritz  and  the 
resourceful  Encyclopedia  Brown,  is  approached  by  neat-freak 
Desiree  in  her  campaign  to  become  Princess  of  Fillmore  Street 
School.  With  chauffeur  and  boa,  Olivia  skirts  disasters  and 
wraps  up  a  happy  ending. 

5.225  Waggoner,  Karen.  The  Lemonade  Babysitter.  Illustrated  by 
Dorothy  Donohue.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-316-91711-7.  29p.  4-7  (est.). 

Molly  prefers  tagging  along  to  the  office  with  her  single  mom 
rather  than  staying  at  home  with  a  baby-sitter.  In  fact,  when 
elderly  neighbor  Mr.  Herbert  shows  up,  Molly  announces  that 
she  is  too  old  for  baby-sitters.  When  Molly  realizes  the  inevita- 
ble, she  makes  plans  to  ensure  his  resignation.  Yet  Mr.  Herbert 
remains  good-natured,  leading  Molly  to  surprise  him  with  her 
own  brand  of  homemade  lemonade.  Expressive  ink  drawings 
will  help  readers  to  speculate  on  Mr.  Herbert's  return. 

Humorous  Stories 

5.226  Blume,  Judy  Fudge-a-Mania.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-525-44672-9. 147p.  7-11  (est.). 

"Blueberry  Baby  Feet/7  "Dizzy  for  Izzy,"  and  "Turtle  the  Dog 
Meets  Skunk":  these  are  possible  titles  for  chapters  in  the  chaos 
that  results  when  the  families  of  Fudge  Hatcher  and  Sheila  Tub- 
man spend  three  weeks  together  in  the  same  vacation  home. 
And  at  the  center  of  most  escapades  is  five-year-old  Fudge.  As 
more  than  half  of  the  text  consists  of  conversation,  the  book,  or 
one  of  its  many  hilarious  episodes,  lends  itself  to  classroom 
plays  or  amusing  read-alouds. 


2f>4 


Humorous  Stories 


5*227   Brittain,  Bill.  My  Buddy,  the  King*  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN 
0-06-020725-6. 135p.  9-12. 

Tim  Quilt  just  happens  to  be  at  the  drug  store  on  Saturday 
morning  when  the  teenage  king  of  Mokobway  nearly  chokes  on 
a  hot  dog.  It's  Tim  who  saves  his  life,  so  interested  government 
agents  "encourage"  Tim  to  become  the  king's  buddy  for  the  sake 
of  rich  oil  reserves.  But  more  trouble  awaits  the  young  ruler  in  a 
tussle  for  power  among  the  people  of  Mokobway,  and  Urn's 
quick  wits  are  needed  again.  Two  friends  who  struggle  to  under- 
stand different  cultures  make  for  high-interest,  funny  episodes. 

5.228  Busselle,  Rebecca.  Bathing  Ugly.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jack- 
son Books,  1988.  ISBN  0-531-08401-9. 184p.  11  and  up  (est.). 

When  thirteen-year-old  Betsy  Sherman  discovers  that  her 
mother  sent  her  to  camp  to  lose  weight,  Betsy  is  determined  to 
turn  her  current  image  around  and  be  selected  this  year's  "Bath- 
ing Beauty."  Instead,  because  of  her  good-natured  personality 
and  chubby  figure,  she  is  chosen  to  participate  in  the  comical 
"Bathing  Ugly"  contest.  Told  in  first  person,  Betsy's  tale  of  de- 
signing and  donning  the  most  outrageous  bathing  costume  in 
contest  history  is  satisfying  and  giggle-producing. 

5.229  Byars,  Betsy.  The  Seven  Treasure  Hunts.  Illustrated  by  Jennifer 
Barrett.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-020886-4.  74p.  7-11. 

Fun  and  misadventure  follow  pals  Jackson  and  Goat  as  the  two 
boys  set  up  a  series  of  treasure  hunts,  determined  to  outsmart 
each  other.  During  one  of  the  hunts,  Jackson  inadvertently  an- 
tagonizes Goat's  bossy  older  sister,  Rachel,  by  eating  her  Popsi- 
cle,  so  Rachel  throws  a  kink  into  the  boys'  fun.  Written  by  New- 
bery  award-winning  author  Betsy  Byars,  this  humorous  book, 
enhanced  by  comical  pen-and-ink  drawings,  is  appropriate  both 
for  middle-grade  readers  or  as  a  read-aloud  book  for  primary- 
grade  children. 

5.230  Carris,  Joan.  The  Greatest  Idea  Ever.  Illustrated  by  Carol 
Newsom.  J.  B.  Lippincott,  1990.  ISBN  0-397-32379-4. 167p.  &-12. 

Enterprising  fourth-grader  Gus  Howard  and  his  great  ideas 
manage  both  to  impress  and  to  vex  almost  every  significant 
other  in  his  life — his  mother;  his  saintly,  patient  teacher,  Mr. 
Keene;  and  Nanny  Vincent,  his  female  counterpart  and  arch- 
nemesis.  This  time  Gus  tries  to  train  a  new  dog  and  to  organize 
a  school  art  show.  Joan  Carris  tells  her  innocent  story  in  simple, 


166 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


plain  English  and  weaves  plot  complications  that  are  neatly  tied 
in  this  fourth  book  about  the  Howard  boys. 

5.231  Conford,  Ellen.  Dear  Mom,  Get  Me  Out  of  Here!  Little,  Brown, 
1992.  ISBN  0-316-15370-2. 160p.  10-12  (est.). 

For  thirteen-year-old  Paul  Tanner,  the  boarding  school  that  his 
parents  chose,  Burnside,  is  a  cross  between  a  medieval  dungeon 
and  a  looney  bin.  Orson  Autrey,  Paul's  self-proclaimed  genius  of 
a  roommate  (who  tries  to  fly  in  his  spare  time),  explains  it  this 
way:  "You  have  to  understand  that  there's  something  wrong 
with  every  kid  here."  Teachers,  too,  are  unusual.  Coach 
Waldrup,  for  example,  schedules  outdoor  checkers  tournaments 
in  the  snow.  Then  there's  the  malevolent  Headmaster  Pickles — 
Paul  and  friends  suspect  that  he  has  a  dark  past  and  try  to 
uncover  his  secrets. 

5.232  Danziger,  Paula.  Earth  to  Matthew.  Delacorte  Press,  1991.  ISBN 
0-385-30453-6. 148p.  9-12. 

Matthew  Martin,  lead  character  in  two  previous  books  by  Paula 
Danziger,  begins  to  experience  some  of  the  pangs  of  growing  up: 
girls  (in  particular,  one  girl)  are  almost  worth  being  teased 
about,  some  of  his  best  retorts  are  being  left  unspoken,  and  a 
school  project  on  the  ecosystem  is  intriguing.  In  this  adventure, 
Matthew  and  his  class  take  a  field  trip  to  the  Franklin  Institute 
as  part  of  their  ecology  study,  an  event  that  meshes  story  line 
with  some  didactic  content. 

5.233  Danziger,  Pauia.  Everyone  Else's  Parents  Said  Yes.  Delacorte 
Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-29805-6. 115p.  9-12. 

Matthew  Martin  can't  wait  until  his  eleventh-birthday  sleep- 
over.  He  spends  the  time  counting  the  days,  tormenting  girls, 
including  his  sister  Amanda,  and  planning  the  list  of  junk  food 
to  serve.  But  just  before  the  birthday,  he  has  a  fight  with  his  best 
friend  Joshua,  the  girls  in  his  sixth-grade  class  organize  to  get 
their  revenge,  and  Matthew  finds  his  plans  askew.  In  Paula 
Danziger 's  breezy  style,  Matthew's  remorse,  if  not  sincere,  is  at 
least  funny  in  this  first  book  about  Matthew. 

5.234  Danziger,  Paula.  Make  like  a  Tree  and  Leave.  Delacorte  Press, 
1990.  ISBN  0-385-30151-0. 117p.  9-12. 

Matthew  Martin's  adventure  in  this  second  book  involves  sib- 
ling rivalry  and  antics  associated  with  serving  as  chair  of  the 
Mummy  Committee  on  the  Egypt  Unit  Project.  From  classmate 


206 


Humorous  Stories 


167 


Brian  Bruno's  entrapment  in  a  plaster  mummy  cast  to  a  sudsy 
pet  wash  that  is  an  altruistic  effort  to  raise  money  for  a  class- 
mate's medical  treatment,  situations  are  fast-moving,  making 
the  book  well  suited  as  a  read-aloud. 

5.235  Gilson,  Jamie.  Hobie  Hanson:  Greatest  Hero  of  the  Mall.  Illus- 
trated by  Anita  Riggio.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-688-08968-2. 149p.  8-12  (est.). 

Hobie's  dreams  of  heroic  deeds  fade  as  he,  the  child  whom  he's 
baby-sitting,  and  Fido  are  rescued  by  know-it-all  Molly  during 
a  town  flood.  Then,  when  classes  for  the  fourth  through  sixth 
grades  at  Central  School  are  forced  to  resume  at  the  defunct 
"Bob's  Togs  for  All  the  Family"  in  Wilhurst  Mall,  it  is  Molly  who 
finds  the  bag  of  valuables  that  Hobie  lost  during  his  rescue.  The 
bag  is  later  stolen,  and  Hobie's  laughable  ordeals  while  retriev- 
ing his  treasures  from  Larry  Lion  earn  him  the  long-awaited  title 
of  "Greatest  Hero  of  the  Mall." 

5.236  Goode,  Diane.  Where's  Our  Mama?  Illustrated  by  Diane  Goode. 
Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44770-9.  28p.  3-7 
(est). 

At  the  Gare  d'Orsay,  a  Paris  train  station,  Mama's  hat  blows  off, 
and  she  chases  it  out  of  sight.  With  Mama  lost,  her  children  beg 
a  gendarme's  help  in  finding  "the  most  beautiful  woman  in  the 
world."  Together,  they  search  the  city — visiting  a  school,  a  baker, 
a  theater— but  they  see  no  one  who  looks  or  acts  like  Mama. 
Meantime,  careful  readers  will  spot  Mama  flitting  in  and  out  of 
scenes  looking  for  her  children.  But  weren't  they  supposed  to 
wait  at  the  station?  Diane  Goode's  period  costumes  and  scenes 
reflect  the  cluttered,  elegant  charm  of  the  Parisian  setting  and  a 
comforting  ending  as  well 

5.237  Grossman,  Bill.  The  Guy  Who  Was  Five  Minutes  Late.  Illustra- 
tions by  Judy  Glasser.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-022269- 
7.  32p.  3-6  (est). 

When  a  baby  is  born  just  five  minutes  late,  this  sets  the  pattern 
for  his  entire  life.  Ever  after,  "by  night  or  by  day,  /  at  work  or  at 
play,"  he  is  always  five  minutes  late.  When  he  is  late  to  his  own 
wedding,  the  bride  marries  his  brother  instead.  But  things  turn 
out  just  fine  when  he  meets  the  Princess  Carrie,  who  shares  his 
late  trait.  Rhyming  text,  an  identifiable  theme,  and  stylized  illus- 
trations make  for  exaggerated  fun. 


ERIC 


168 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


5.238  Hutchins,  Pat.  Rats!  Illustrated  by  Laurence  Hutchins.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07776-5.  96p.  6-10  (est.). 

More  than  anything,  Sam  wants  a  rat.  He  wants  a  rat  so  badly 
that  he  buys  one  before  asking  his  parents'  permission.  Never- 
theless, after  a  full-tilt  public  relations  campaign,  Sam's  parents 
acquiesce,  and  Nibbles  is  his.  But  one  small  rat  wreaks  giant 
havoc.  Nibbles  scares  visitor  Veronica  into  a  faint,  creates  racket 
enough  so  that  the  police  are  notified,  and  ends  up  giving  birth 
to  nine  new  Nibbles.  Laurence  Hutchins's  black-and-white 
drawings  are  wacky  matches  for  the  text. 

5.239  Levine,  Evan.  Not  the  Piano,  Mrs.  Medley!  Illustrated  by  S.  D. 
Schindler.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-531-08556-2.  32p.  4-7. 

Despite  Max's  impatience,  his  grandmother,  Mrs.  Medley,  can't 
walk  to  the  beach  without  packing  half  her  belongings — includ- 
ing table,  chairs,  bongo  drums,  her  Monopoly  set,  and  an  accor- 
dion. But  once  there,  she's  so  smitten  by  the  sand  and  the  waves 
that  she  forgets  all  of  the  paraphernalia,  and  the  two  laugh 
together  when  they  realize  she  has  brought  everything  but  the 
swimsuits!  Illustrations  are  filled  with  the  humorous  clutter  of 
Mrs.  Medley's  possessions  and  her  infectious  glee  when  she 
recognizes  her  silliness. 

5.240  Lillie,  Patricia.  When  the  Rooster  Crowed.  Illustrated  by  Nancy 
Winslow  Parker.  Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09379-5. 
32p.  3-6. 

For  a  farmer  awakened  by  the  crow  of  the  rooster  at  ten  minutes 
to  five,  there  is  need  for  "ten  more  minutes."  When  his  cow  says 
"Mmmooo,"  and  his  rooster  goes  "Cock-a-doodle-doo"  again, 
it's  "five  more  minutes"  that  the  farmer  needs.  Other  barnyard 
animals  add  to  the  rooster's  wake-up  call,  but  it  takes  them  all 
in  chorus  to  make  the  farmer  say,  "ALL  RIGHT!"  and  begin  his 
morning  chores.  Colors  are  morning-cheerful,  shapes  are  sim- 
ple, and  scenes  are  uncluttered. 

5.241  Lowry,  Lois.  Anastasia  at  This  Address.  Houghton  Mifflin, 
1991.  ISBN  0-395-56263-5. 130p.  8-12. 

Eighth  in  the  Anastasia  series,  this  humorous  novel  explores 
Anastasia's  misadventures  in  the  world  of  romance.  Responding 
to  a  personal  ad  written  by  a  wealthy,  sophisticated,  twenty- 
eight-year-old  bachelor,  Anastasia  begins  a  correspondence  full 
of  half-truths  in  order  to  spice  up  her  lackluster  love  life.  When 


208 


Humorous  Stories 


169 


a  friend's  wedding  and  fate  intervene,  Anastasia  ends  her  "love- 
letters"  escapade  with  a  big  sigh  of  relief. 

5.242  Mahy,  Margaret.  The  Great  White  Man-Eating  Shark:  A  Cau- 
tionary Tale.  Illustrated  by  Jonathan  Allen.  Dial  Books  for  Young 
Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0749-5.  32p.  5^8. 

It  is  not  Norvin's  fault  that  he  is  an  actor  who  looks  like  a  great 
white  shark.  But  it  is  his  fault  that  he  is  such  a  greedy  boy  that 
he  doesn't  want  to  share  the  cove  with  other  swimmers. 
Through  a  combination  of  his  looks,  his  swimming  agility,  his 
acting  talent,  and  a  strapped-on  dorsal  fin,  Norvin  terrorizes  the 
summer  crowd,  sending  people  screeching  to  shore.  His  plot  is 
foiled,  however,  by  the  appearance  of  a  real  shark  who  takes  a 
fancy  to  Norvin. 

5.243  Manes,  Stephen.  Chocolate-Covered  Ants.  Scholastic  Hard- 
cover Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-590-40960-3. 103p.  8-12. 

It  all  starts  when  Max's  little  brother  Adam  gets  an  ant  farm  for 
his  birthday.  That's  when  Max  tells  Adam  about  people  eating 
chocolate-covered  ants.  Because  Adam  refuses  to  accept  that 
contention,  the  bet  is  on.  The  taste  of  ants  is  eloquently  described 
in  a  story  that  is  reminiscent  of  Thomas  Rockwell's  How  to  Eat 
Fried  Worms.  Stephen  Manes  offers  groaners  for  middle  graders 
that  include  ants  sneaked  into  ice  cream,  hidden  in  covers,  and 
exploded  in  the  microwave. 

5.244  Manes,  Stephen.  Make  Four  Million  Dollar$  by  Next 
Thur$day!  Illustrated  by  George  Ulrich.  Bantam/Skylark 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-553-07050-9. 87p.  8-12  (est.). 

Jason  Nozzle  wants  to  be  a  multimillionaire.  Lucky  for  him,  he 
finds  a  book  by  Dr.  K.  Pinkerton  Silverfish  titled  Make  Four 
Million  Dollar$  by  Next  Thur$day.  The  book's  instructions  are  to 
follow  Dr.  Silverfish's  advice  without  deviation  and  definitely 
not  to  read  ahead.  So  Jason  buries  money,  pins  thirty-seven 
dollar  signs  to  his  clothes  for  a  day,  chants  a  money  mantra,  and, 
in  general,  performs  to  code.  Readers  may  recognize  Dr.  Silver- 
fish  as  author  of  Be  a  Perfect  Person  in  Just  Three  Days. 

5.245  Paulsen,  Gary.  The  Boy  Who  Owned  the  School:  A  Comedy  of 
Love.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531- 
08465-5.  85p.  11  and  up. 

Jacob  Freisten  does  his  best  to  slip  through  high  school — and 
life — completely  unnoticed.  In  order  to  avoid  flunking  English, 


209 


170 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


he  is  forced  by  Mrs.  Hilsak  to  help  out  as  a  stage-crew  member 
for  the  school  play.  When  his  love  for  the  play's  star,  Maria 
Tesser,  goes  unrequited,  Jacob  finally  energizes  himself,  discov- 
ering both  romance  and  his  own  potential.  Gary  Paulsen's  dry 
humor  and  highly  readable  prose  make  this  an  easy  read  for  less 
motivated  students. 

5.246  Peck,  Robert  Newton.  Higbee's  Halloween.  Walker,  1990.  ISBN 
0-0827-6969-1.  lOlp.  10-12. 

Halloween  in  Clod's  Corner  is  unforgettable  the  year  that  the 
Striker  gang  moves  in  from  Siberia.  When  Canker,  Hernia,  Zitt, 
and  the  other  Strikers  erect  their  torture-chamber  fort  in  town, 
Higbee  H.  Higgenbottom  knows  he  must  counter  the  bullies.  As 
told  by  his  friend  and  reluctant  accomplice,  Quincy,  the  tale 
centers  on  revenge,  pumpkin  pies,  and  a  cannon  on  the  village 
green.  Quincy's  pompous  language  offsets  Higbee's  Huck  Finn 
nonchalance,  and  the  pieces  fall  together  for  the  "smashing" 
climax. 

5.247  Peck,  Robert  Newton.  Soup  in  Love.  Illustrated  by  Charles  Ro- 
binson. Delacorte  Press,  1992.  ISBN  0-385-30563-X.  114p.  9-12. 

Soup  and  Rob  are  up  to  new  plans  and  pranks  in  their  twelfth 
adventure  in  1920s  rural  Vermont.  This  time  the  boys  are  aiming 
to  win  the  prize  for  the  most  unusual  valentine  in  the  village  in 
order  to  impress  the  town's  prettiest  girls.  The  valentine  con- 
struction depends  on  Mrs.  Spazzatura's  new  refrigerator  box,  a 
leftover  toboggan,  a  white  horse  named  Black  Thunder,  and  a 
visitor  named  Ox.  The  results  are  as  funny  and  as  predictable  as 
readers  can  imagine. 

5.248  Pinkwater,  Daniel.  Uncle  Melvin.  Illustrated  by  Daniel  Pinkwa- 
ter.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-774675-5.  27p.  5^8. 

Charles's  Uncle  Melvin  is  different  from  other  people.  Some 
even  say  that  he's  crazy.  Uncle  Melvin  says  that  he  understands 
what  the  birds  and  animals  say  to  him.  He  says  that  his  old-fash- 
ioned derby  keeps  his  thoughts  from  bouncing  away.  He  even 
thinks  that  the  president  is  an  iguana.  But  Charles  knows  that 
Uncle  Melvin  has  a  special  perception  and  understanding  about 
the  world.  Daniel  Pinkwater's  scribbly  backgrounds,  bright  col- 
ors, and  mild  faces  give  a  lift  to  this  warm  tale  for  children. 

5.249  Remkiewicz,  Frank.  Greedyanna.  Illustrated  by  Frank 
Remkiewicz.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
688-10295-6.  32p.  4-8. 


8iii 


Humorous  Stories 


171 


Little  Anna  is  "going  through  a  phase."  For  her,  everything 
(except  lima  beans)  is  "Mine!"  Brother  Eddie  renames  her 
"Greedyanna,"  and  the  family  indulges  her  totally,  even  moving 
to  the  garage  so  the  greedy  one  does  not  have  to  share  the  house. 
But  Greedyanna  soon  learns  that  being  selfish  is  lonely  and  not 
much  fun  after  all.  Ink  drawings  painted  with  watercolor  and 
gouache  are  as  comical  as  the  words. 

5.250  Sachar,  Louis.  Wayside  School  Is  Falling  Down.  Illustrated  by 
Joel  Schick.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688- 
07868-0. 179p.  8-10. 

The  students  from  the  looney  thirty-story  Wayside  School  are 
back  in  this  sequel  to  Sideways  Stories  from  Wayside  School  Back 
is  Mrs.  Jewls,  teacher  on  the  thirtieth  floor  for  a  "class  where 
nobody  was  strange  because  nobody  was  normal."  Back  are  the 
three  Erics  (Fry,  Bacon,  and  Ovens).  Back  is  Todd,  who  always 
rides  the  kindergarten  bus  home  at  noon  because  his  name  is 
forever  on  the  board.  Back,  too,  are  all  the  other  students  who 
dread  Mrs.  Mush's  cafeteria  concoctions,  who  avoid  the  base- 
ment at  all  costs,  and  who  puzzle  over  the  absence  of  a  twenty- 
ninth  floor. 

5.251  Samuels,  Barbara.  What's  So  Great  about  Cindy  Snappleby? 
Illustrated  by  Barbara  Samuels.  Orchard  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
531-08579-1.  32p.  3-6. 

Cool  Cindy  Snappleby  is  coming  to  play  with  Dolores's  big 
sister,  Faye.  Cindy  wears  pink  hair  ribbons  and  pink-dotted 
dresses  and  thinks  little  children  are  usually  messy  and  pesty. 
Self-assured  Cindy  shares  the  secret  of  how  she  always  wins  in 
jacks  by  saying,  "steady  as  a  rock  and  cool  as  a  cucumber."  It's 
up  to  Dolores  to  shake  Cindy  Snappleby's  calm  by  sharing  some 
secrets  of  her  own — including  a  box  of  live  frogs.  Sisters  align  in 
this  Dolores  story  filled  with  bright  action. 

5.252  Spinelli,  Jerry.  The  Bathwater  Gang.  Illustrated  by  Meredith 
Johnson.  Little,  Brown/Springboard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-316- 
80720-6.  59p.  7-11  (est.). 

When  Granny  suggests  to  bored  Bertie  that  a  good  summer 
activity  may  be  to  start  a  gang,  Granny  had  in  mind  a  good 
gang — one  that  does  projects.  But  "gangs"  have  a  different  con- 
notation for  Mrs.  Pickwell,  the  mother  of  Bertie's  best  friend, 
and  she  refuses  to  let  her  daughter  join.  And  ?t  looks  as  though 
Mrs.  Pickwell  is  right:  a  boys'  gang  forms  to  combat  Bertie's,  and 


ERIC 


211 


172 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


balloon  and  egg  fights  break  out.  It  takes  Granny  starting  her 
own  gang  to  settle  the  fracas. 

5.253  Stevenson,  Su?ie.  Jessica  the  Blue  Streak.  Illustrated  by  Suqie 
Stevenson.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-531-08398-5. 29p.  5-8  (est.). 

Daddy  brings  home  an  energetic,  six-month-old  puppy  named 
Jessica.  The  family  dogs  are  not  impressed  with  this  "blue 
streak/'  and  the  children  spend  their  day  fetching  things  Jessica 
has  snatched,  keeping  Jessica  from  chewing  shoes  and  furniture, 
and  cleaning  up  after  her.  Cartoon-like  watercolors  show  ram- 
bunctious Jessica  in  action. 

5.254  Tusa,  Tricia.  Sherman  and  Pearl.  Illustrated  by  Tricia  Tusa. 
Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-789542-4. 28p.  4-8  (est.). 

Sherman  and  Pearl  like  to  sit  by  their  dirt  road  every  day  and 
wave  to  all  the  people  who  pass  by.  But  when  bulldozers  come 
to  build  a  freeway  just  beyond  the  old  dirt  road,  being  friendly 
becomes  a  lot  harder.  Unwilling  to  give  up  hope,  they  wait  and 
wait  until  the  people  finally  choose  to  leave  the  freeway  behind 
and  return  to  the  old  dirt  road.  Expressive  watercolors  make 
Sherman  and  Pearl  a  comical  pair. 

5.255  Wilson,  Sarah.  The  Day  That  Henry  Cleaned  His  Room.  Illus- 
trated by  Sarah  Wilson.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young 
Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-671-69202-X.  32p.  4-8. 

The  cartoon-like  figures  bring  an  animated  quality  to  this  hu- 
morous account  of  Henry's  room  cleaning.  Animals,  scientists, 
the  army,  and  his  family  all  help  Henry  get  rid  of  the  clutter,  the 
moss,  and  the  mismatched  socks  that  are  lurking  under  his  bed. 
But  Henry  isn't  happy  until  his  old  friends  return. 

5.256  Woodruff,  Elvira.  Show  and  Tell.  Illustrated  by  Denise  Brunkus. 
Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0883-3.  32p.  4-8. 

Andy  has  wild  red  hair,  horn-rimmed  glasses,  huge  front  teeth, 
and  the  most  boring  show-and-tell  ideas  in  the  whole  kindergar- 
ten— maybe  even  in  the  whole  world.  Once  he  brought  a  paper- 
clip, another  time  a  shoestring,  and  then  a  bent  fork.  Even  Mrs. 
Applelarney  yawned.  But  then  Andy  finds  a  bubble  jar  with  a 
warning  label  attached  and  sets  a  new  standard  in  zany  show- 
and-tell  history. 


212 


Mystery  Stories 


173 


Mystery  Stories 

5.257  Alexander,  Sue.  World  Famous  Muriel  and  the  Magic  Mystery, 
Illustrated  by  Maria  Frazee.  Thomas  Y  Crowell,  1990.  ISBN  0- 
690-04789-4.  32p.  5-8  (est.). 

When  the  Great  Hokus  Pokus  disappears  in  the  middle  of  an 
unsuccessful  rehearsal  for  his  magic  show,  Professor  Ballyhoo 
enlists  the  help  of  the  World  Famous  Muriel  in  finding  him. 
Armed  with  a  batch  of  peanut  butter  cookies  (which  help  her  do 
her  best  thinking),  Muriel  relies  on  her  extraordinary  powers  of 
deduction  to  trace  the  Great  Hokus  Pokus  to  the  place  where  a 
magician  in  difficulty  would  most  likely  go— the  public  library. 
Readers  will  find  Maria  Frazee's  detailed  illustrations  as  engag- 
ing as  the  story  line. 

5.258  Bunting,  Eve.  Coffin  on  a  Case.  HarperCollins,  1992.  ISBN  0-06- 
020274-2. 106p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Like  Sam  Spade,  Paul  Coffin's  dad  is  a  private  detective —  trench 
coat,  slouchy  hat,  and  name  on  a  frosted  glass  door.  All  Dad 
needs,  Paul  is  sure,  is  either  for  Mom  to  come  back  or  for  a  really 
gorgeous  woman  to  ask  them  to  take  her  case.  Enter  gorgeous 
Lily  Larson,  age  sixteen,  whose  mother  is  missing  and  who 
needs  a  detective.  The  case  falls  circuitously  to  Paul,  and  before 
things  settle,  the  mystery  involves  wooden  storks,  art  thieves, 
and  kidnapping. 

5.259  DeClements,  Barthe.  Wake  Me  at  Midnight  Viking  Penguin, 
1991.  ISBN  0-670-84038-6. 154p.  8-12. 

Caitlin  LeBlanc's  neighborhood  bustles  with  nocturnal  activ- 
ity—and all  of  it  seems  inexplicable.  For  example,  someone  next 
door  shovels  in  the  backyard  at  midnight.  Is  it  quiet,  skinny, 
thirteen-year-old  "Bones,"  who  Caitlin  suspects  doesn't  get 
enough  to  eat?  And  across  the  street,  the  Dorman's  house  has 
strange  comings  and  goings  at  all  hours.  With  her  new  neighbor, 
Missy,  Caitlin  is  drawn  into  crime  detection.  Her  own  home  life 
with  a  traveling  father,  work-weary  mother,  and  unexpected 
baby  brother  offers  other  problems. 

5.260  Dillon,  Eilis.  The  Island  of  Ghosts.  Charles  Sciibner's 
Sons/Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-684-19107-5. 151p. 
10  and  up. 

Dara  and  Brendan,  twelve-year-old  best  friends,  share  the  sim- 
ple traditions  of  their  Irish  island  village,  often  swimming,  sail- 


ERIC 


213 


174 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


ing,  and  storytelling  with  their  younger  sisters.  Their  lives  are 
interrupted  by  an  offer  of  tutoring  for  school  entrance  exams  by 
an  American  engineer  with  a  mysterious  past.  Under  the  guise 
of  gaining  the  boys'  friendship,  the  American  darkly  hints  of 
interest  in  a  nearby  island,  said  to  be  haunted;  then  he  kidnaps 
and  questions  the  boys.  As  a  read-aloud,  this  book  offers  much 
for  talking  over — loyalty,  family,  morality,  and  traditions. 

5.261  Giff,  Patricia  Reillyi  Garbage  Juice  for  Breakfast.  Illustrated  by 
Blanche  Sims.  Dell/Young  Yearling  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-440- 
40207-7.  69p.  6-9. 

Campers  at  Camp  Wild-in-the-Woods  agree  that  garbage  juice 
any  time  tastes  yucky,  but  solving  Miss  Perry's  mysteries  is 
definitelty  thrilling— especially  for  competitors  Dawn  Bosco,  the 
Polka  Dot  Private  Eye,  and  Lizzie  Lee,  the  Cool  Cat  Detective. 
When  the  announced  mystery  contest  is  "HELP  TO  FIND 
TREASURE,"  each  girl  is  confident  that  she  will  find  the  treasure 
first.  Searching  for  clues  in  the  bam  and  through  the  trails,  the 
two  detectives,  neck-in-neck,  unravel  the  mystery  of  "Treasure" 
and  unleash  some  of  their  personal  problems  along  the  way  Five 
other  Polka  Dot  Private  Eye  books  are  available  tc  interested 
readers. 

5.262  Roennfeldt,  Mary.  What's  That  Noise?  Illustrated  by  Robert 
Roennfeldt.  Orchard  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-531-08572-4.  32p.  3^6. 

George  hears  a  strange  noise  in  the  night  and  searches  for  its 
source.  Readers  will  spot  a  chalky  white  cat  bounding  from  page 
to  page,  but  sleepy  George  misses  it  all.  Green,  shadov/y  beasts 
announce  the  cat's  passage  in  the  briefest  of  speech  balloons: 
"screech"  or  "bray"  or  "growl."  The  next  morning,  when  a  very 
tired,  confused  George  dons  his  zookeeper  uniform,  a  fuzzy 
white  cat  peeks  from  under  his  bed.  The  zoo  animals  know  who 
made  that  noise  in  the  night.  "Do  you?" 

5.263  Sharmat,  Marjorie  Weinman.  Nate  the  Great  and  the  Halloween 
Hunt.  Nate  the  Great  and  the  Musical  Note.  Nate  the  Great  and 
the  Stolen  Base.  Nate  the  Great  Goes  Down  in  the  Dumps. 
Illustrated  by  Marc  Simont.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989-92.  48p. 
6-9. 

In  the  spirit  of  the  Encyclopedia  Brown  classics,  detective  Nate 
the  Great  hunts  down  clues  and  solves  cases  with  the  aid  of  his 
dog,  Sludge,  and  his  eccentric  friend  Rosamond.  Each  easy-to- 
read  story  in  the  Nate  the  Great  series  contains  a  mystery  com- 


ERIC 


214 


CYNTHIA  VOIGT 


and  the  0 

STOLEN  BASE 


WALL 


by  Eye  Bunting 
Ronald  Himler 


by  Marjorie 
Weinman 


B. 


A.  The  Vandemark  Mummy  by  Cynthia  Voigt  (see  5.267).  B.  Nate  the  Great  and  the 
Stolen  Base  by  Marjorie  Weinman  Sharmat;  illustrated  by  Marc  Simont  (see  5.263). 
C.  The  Waif  by  Eve  Bunting;  illustrated  by  Ronald  Himler  (see  5.191). 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE  215 


A.  Greedyanna  by  Frank  Remkiewicz  (see  5.249).  B.  Anastasia  at  This  Address  by 
Lois  Lowry  (see  5.241).  C.  The  Bathwater  Gang  by  Jerry  Spinelli;  illustrated  by 
Meredith  Johnson  (see  5.252).  D.  Fudge-a-Mania  by  Judy  Blume  (see  5.226). 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


216 


Mystery  Stories 


175 


plete  with  clues  that  the  reader  can  use  to  think  along  with  Nate. 
Simple  illustrations  in  limited  colors  portray  the  action  on  a  part 
of  nearly  every  page. 

5.264  Singer,  Marilyn.  The  Hoax  on  You*  Illustrated  by  Richard  Wil- 
liams. Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-025851-9.  59p.  8-12 
(est.). 

In  this  sixth  book  of  the  Sam  and  Dave  mystery  series,  identical 
twins  Sam  and  Dave  Bean  find  themselves  tailing  the  new  for- 
eign exchange  student  in  town.  Jewelry  has  been  stolen  from  the 
homes  that  she  has  visited,  and  the  junior  detectives  are  hot  on 
her  trail.  The  book's  relatively  short  sentences,  heavy  reliance  on 
dialogue  to  move  the  plot  along,  and  black-and-white  illustra- 
tions all  make  this  an  easy  read  for  young  mystery  fans. 

5.265  Sobol,  Donald  J.  Encyclopedia  Brown  and  the  Case  of  the  Dis- 
gusting Sneakers.  Illustrated  by  Gail  Owens.  Morrow  Junior 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09012-5.  92p.  7-12. 

Untouched  by  inflation,  ageless  Encyclopedia  Brown  still 
charges  twenty-five  cents  in  each  of  these  ten  new  cases.  Smelly 
sneakers,  pink  and  orange  canoes,  and  strangely  carved  trees 
provide  some  of  the  clues.  The  stories,  as  always,  are  full  of 
humorous  similes  and  provide  readers  with  a  chance  to  apply 
their  own  knowledge  of  science  and  deduction  to  match  wits 
with  the  boy  genius. 

5.266  Trease,  Geoffrey.  A  Flight  of  Angels.  Lerner,  1989.  ISBN  0-8225- 
0731-5. 120p.  9-13. 

A  mysteriously  marked  cellar  in  historical  Nottingham,  Eng- 
land, intrigues  Sheila  and  her  three  classmates  into  exploring 
underground  caves  and  investigating  a  400-year-old  secret. 
Aided  by  a  history-buff  librarian,  the  resourceful  detectives  use 
clues  and  deductive  reasoning  to  solve  a  mystery  that  involves 
a  religious  conflict  of  the  Middle  Ages  and  to  resolve  a  present- 
day  dilemma. 

5.267  Voigt,  Cynthia.  The  Vandemark  Mummy.  Fawcett  Juniper 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-449-70417-3.  209p.  10  and  up  (est). 

Moving  with  their  college  instructor  father  to  Maine,  Althea  Hall 
and  her  brother  Phineas  try  to  adjust  to  life  in  a  new  place 
without  Mom,  who  has  a  new  job  on  the  West  Coast.  Through 
the  terms  of  a  founder's  family  will,  Mr.  Hall  unexpectedly 
becomes  curator  of  a  bequeathed  Egyptian  collection.  Even 


217 


176 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


though  the  Halls  take  the  responsibility  seriously,  the  collec- 
tion's mummy  is  stolen.  Then  Althea  is  missing,  too,  and 
Phineas  must  do  some  clever  sleuthing  before  a  thief 's  greed 
endangers  his  sister's  life.  Characters  are  realistically  and  fully 
drawn. 

Respect  for  Nature 

5.268  Allen,  Judy.  Tiger.  Illustrated  by  Tudor  Humphries.  Candlewick 
Press,  1992.  ISBN  1-56402-083-5.  29p.  6-10  (est.). 

When  a  rumor  starts  that  there  is  a  tiger  in  the  woods,  the 
villagers  plan  to  kill  it  to  become  strong,  brave,  and  wealthy.  A 
famous  hunter  comes  to  track  the  tiger,  and  Young  Lee,  a  boy 
who  does  not  want  the  tiger  to  die,  wishes  the  hunter  bad  luck. 
Through  delicate  earth-tone  watercolors,  the  illustrator  shares 
not  only  the  secret  of  "shooting"  the  tiger  without  killing  it,  but 
the  mountainous  countryside  and  the  beauty  of  the  great  South 
Chinese  Tiger.  A  concluding  Tiger  Fact  Sheet  enlists  readers' 
help  in  tiger-saving  efforts. 

5.269  Aschenbrenner,  Gerald  (adapted  by  Joanne  Fink).  Jack,  the  Seal 
and  the  Sea.  Illustrated  by  Joanne  Fink.  Silver  Burdett  Press, 
1988.  ISBN  0-382-09735-1.  28p.  4-7  (est.). 

Jack,  a  fisherman  like  his  father,  nets  a  seal  dying  from  water 
pollution.  After  helping  the  seal,  Jack  is  rewarded  by  a  healthy 
catch  and,  through  a  dream,  is  alerted  to  the  dangers  of  polluting 
the  sea.  Now  Jack  sails  not  to  fish  but  to  deliver  his  message  that 
everyone  must  join  in  the  effort  to  clean  up  our  seas.  Both  Jack 
and  the  creatures  of  the  sea  are  endearingly  portrayed  in  realistic 
black,  white,  and  sepia  drawings. 

5.270  Baker,  Jeannie.  Window.  Illustrated  by  Jeannie  Baker.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-08918-6. 24p.  All  ages  (est.). 

In  a  series  of  wordless,  strikingly  unusual  double-page  spreads, 
a  boy's  view  through  a  windowpane  changes  from  wilderness 
to  city  as  he  changes  from  infant  to  adult.  Through  the  glass, 
readers  see  collage  constructions  depicting  environmental 
change;  on  windowsill  and  frame  they  see  objects  depicting 
advancing  age.  A  concluding  author's  note,  extrapolating  to 
humankind's  destruction  of  wilderness  and  consequent  extinc- 
tion of  species,  urges  each  individual  to  protect  the  environment. 
Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 


218 


Respect  for  Nature  177 


5.271  Bjork,  Christina  (translated  by  Joan  Sandin).  Linnea's  Almanac. 
Illustrated  by  Lena  Anderson.  R  &  S  Books,  1989.  ISBN  91-29- 
59176-7.  61p.  6-10  (est). 

An  almanac  that  Linnea  receives  for  Christmas  inspires  her  to 
keep  her  own  almanac,  in  which  she  records  all  her  activities 
and  reports  on  what's  happening  in  the  world  around  her.  When 
the  January  snows  come,  she  opens  a  bird  restaurant;  in  Febru- 
ary, she  repots  plants;  and  in  March,  Linnea  spies  the  first  spring 
flower  and  hears  the  blackbirds  sing.  From  Linnea's  month-by- 
month  accounting  of  her  discoveries,  readers  will  learn  scientifi- 
cally verified  information  about  their  natural  environment. 

5.272  Blyler,  Allison.  Finding  Foxes.  Illustrated  by  Robert  J.  Blake. 
Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-22264-2.  32p.  6-8  (est.). 

In  poetic  text  and  double-page  earth-tone  paintings,  the  move- 
ment, mystery,  and  majesty  of  the  red  fox  are  illuminated  for  the 
not-so-young  reader,  the  hunt  and  the  kill  are  urgent— "The  fox 
is  cruelly  red,  in  a  knife  of  sun."  Through  metaphor  and  a  tone 
that  is  hushed  and  respectful,  Allison  Blyler  offers  "the  ways  of 
the  fox,"  while  Robert  Blake  interprets  those  ways  in  dappled 
forest  scenes  in  which  the  foxes  are  hiding  from  the  reader.  These 
gouache  paintings  in  olives  and  browns  show  brush  strokes 
against  canvas-like  page  borders. 

5.273  Carlstrom,  Nancy  White.  Goodbye  Geese.  Illustrated  by  Ed 
Young.  Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21832-7.  34p.  4^6. 

On  an  outdoor  walk  toward  the  end  of  autumn,  a  father  poeti- 
cally describes  winter  in  answer  to  his  child's -simple  yet  com- 
plex questions.  Each  metaphoric  answer  stimulates  another 
question.  The  child  wonders  whether  winter  has  hands,  a  voice, 
a  shape.  "Does  winter  have  ears?"  the  child  asks.  "When  geese 
spread  their  wings  in  the  sky  and  fly  honking  south,  winter 
hears  and  winter  comes."  Caldecott-medalist  Ed  Young  brings  a 
glowing  stillness  to  the  change  in  seasons. 

5.274  Chall,  Martha  Wilson.  Up  North  at  the  Cabin.  Illustrated  by 
Steve  Johnson.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-688-09733-2.  32p.  5  and  up. 

A  child  recalls  her  family  trips  to  a  cabin  in  the  north,  where 
days  were  filled  with  swimming,  canoeing,  water  skiing,  and 
fishing  with  Grandpa,  using  peanut-butter-and-worm  sand- 
wiches for  bait.  As  with  Cynthia  Rylant's  When  I  Was  Young  in 
the  Mountains,  Martha  Wilson  Chall's  poetic  text  testifies  to  the 


219 


178 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


spirit  and  beauty  of  a  special  place  etched  in  dear  memories. 
Grandma's  corn-on-the-cob  is  nibbled  while  "loons  dance  down 
the  sun."  Steve  Johnson's  paintings  catch  the  light  and  mottled 
shadows  of  perfect  summer  days. 

5.275  Cotler,  Joanna.  Sky  Above,  Earth  Below.  Illustrated  by  Joanna 
Cotler.  Harper  and  Row/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-06-021366-3. 32p.  3-5. 

Patterns  of  sky  and  earth  look  beautiful  to  a  little  girl  viewing 
them  through  an  airplane  window.  Joanna  Cotter's  simple  cut- 
out pictures  of  clouds,  stars,  rivers,  trees,  houses,  and  animals 
are  set  against  vividly  contrasting  backgrounds.  Sparse  text 
adds  drama  to  the  minimalist  shapes  and  patterns  of  the  illus- 
trations. 

5.276  Cowcher,  Helen.  Antarctica.  Illustrated  by  Helen  Cowcher.  Far- 
rar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-30368-1. 36p.  4-8. 

In  this  thought-provoking  yet  gentle  tale,  Helen  Cowcher  de- 
scribes the  life  of  Antarctic  inhabitants — emperor  and  Adelie 
penguins  and  Weddell  seals.  Paralleling  predictable  hazards  of 
natural  enemies  with  the  unknown  threats  of  new  arrivals — hu- 
man beings — the  author  leaves  the  consequences  of  human  in- 
trusion upon  the  ancient  Antarctic  world  an  open-ended  ques- 
tion. Watercolor  washes  effectively  portray  a  pristine 
environment  of  mystery  and  ice.  Outstanding  Science  Trade  Books 
for  Children  in  1990. 

5.277  Ehlert,  Lois.  Feathers  for  Lunch.  Illustrated  by  Lois  Ehlert.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich,  1990.  ISBN  0-15-230550-5. 32p.  3-8. 

When  the  cat  slips  out  the  door,  he  looks  around  for  a  special 
lunch.  As  the  belled  cat  "jingles"  his  way  through  the  garden,  he 
and  young  readers  meet  twelve  backyard  birds,  including 
mourning  doves,  a  northern  cardinal,  and  an  American  robin. 
But  despite  the  cat's  best  sneaking  and  snooping,  all  this  feline 
gets  is  "feathers  for  lunch."  The  humorous  rhyming  text  is  boun- 
tifully illustrated  with  brilliant  and  clearly  labeled  collages  of 
birds  and  flowers.  An  illustrated  listing  of  the  birds  and  infor- 
mation about  their  size,  food,  and  habitat  complete  the  book. 
Outstanding  Science  Trade  Books  for  Children  in  1990. 

5.^78  Florian,  Douglas.  Nature  Walk.  Illustrated  by  Douglas  Florian. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08269-6.  29p.  3-7. 


ZZ0 


Respect  for  Nature 


179 


Two  children  and  a  guide  go  on  a  nature  trail  and  discover  pine 
cones,  hidden  lakes,  swallowtails,  and  more.  Captioned,  earth- 
tone  illustrations  along  with  a  seek-and-find  activity  help  read- 
ers to  conclude  that  discovering  nature  means  seeing  more  than 
you  expected  to  see.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Trade  Books  in  Science, 
1989. 

5*279  Hamilton,  Virginia.  Drylongso.  Illustrated  by  Jerry  Pinkney. 
Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-224241-4. 64p.  8-12. 

West  of  the  Mississippi  in  the  1970s,  dust  storms  come.  No 
matter  that  Mamalou  covers  the  cracks  with  tatter  cloths— dust 
gets  in  everyplace.  To  young  Lindy's  family  the  dust  also  brings 
Drylongso,  a  quiet  boy  of  mythic  proportions  whose  name  once 
meant  "long-time  drought."  Drylongso  knows  about  overplow- 
ing,  what  plants  hold  the  soil,  and  how  to  use  a  divining  rod. 
Virginia  Hamilton's  text  sings  as  it  teaches,  and  Jerry  Pinkney's 
illustrations  transport  readers  through  the  thirsty  storm  and  its 
aftermath. 

5*280  Heiligman,  Deborah.  Into  the  Night  Illustrated  by  Melissa 
Sweet.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-026382-2.  26p.  4-8 
(est.). 

As  a  little  boy  readies  for  bed,  he  questions  his  mother:  "Do  you 
think  our  day  is  over  too  soon?"  Together,  they  recall  their  event- 
filled  day.  Told  in  rhyming  couplets,  the  lyrical  text  recounts 
their  play,  their  walk  through  the  meadows,  and  their  discover- 
ies of  nature's  treasures.  Large  pastel  watercolor  illustrations 
capture  mother  and  son's  outdoor  adventure  and  help  to  create 
a  reassuring  story  o*  important  life  events  as  day  passes  "into 
the  night." 

5*281  Hoi,  Coby.  A  Visit  to  the  Farm.  Illustrated  by  Coby  Hoi.  North- 
South  Books,  1989.  ISBN  1-55858-000-X.  24p.  4-8  (est.). 

For  the  first  time,  Julie  and  Martin  have  permission  to  spend  a 
day  at  the  farm  on  their  own.  Visiting  old  and  new  friends,  the 
children  watch  and  feed  many  animals,  including  chickens, 
pigs,  and  rabbits.  Leaving  with  an  armload  of  farm-fresh  treats, 
Julie  and  Martin  look  forward  to  their  next  visit.  Torn-paper 
collages  against  great  white  spaces  illustrate  this  simple,  satisfy- 
ing story  of  a  day  on  the  farm. 

5*282  Ichikawa,  Satomi.  Nora's  Duck.  Illustrated  by  Satomi  Ichikawa. 
Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21 805-X.  32p.  4-8. 


ERiC 


221 


180 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


When  Nora  finds  an  injured  duckling,  she  takes  it  to  Doctor 
John.  During  her  visit,  Nora  meets  many  once-injured  animals 
that  have  come  to  live  on  this  specialized  farm  under  Doctor 
John's  care.  Watercolor  illustrations  accompany  this  story  of  the 
importance  of  all  living  creatures.  The  author's  afterword  pro- 
vides readers  with  information  about  the  real  Doctor  John  and 
his  animal  sanctuary  in  Kent,  England. 

5.283  Johnson,  Herschel.  A  Visit  to  the  Country.  Illustrated  by  Romare 
Bearden.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-022854-7.  32p.  2-8. 

Even  though  people  are  always  coming  and  going  through  the 
country  on  the  Mountain  Express,  Mike  and  his  grandparents  are 
content  to  stay  on  their  farm  caring  for  Bessie,  gathering  eggs, 
and  watching  nature  at  play.  When  Mike  finds  a  cardinal  nest- 
ling, he  and  his  grandparents  nurture  the  bird  until  it  learns  to 
fly  Then  a  decision  must  be  made  about  "comings  and  goings." 
The  paintings  by  the  late  African  American  artist  Romare  Bear- 
den, winner  of  the  1987  National  Medal  of  Arts,  add  drama  to 
this,  his  only  children's  book. 

5.284  Lyon,  George  Ella.  Who  Came  Down  That  Road?  Illustrated  by 
Peter  Catalanotto.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1992. 
ISBN  0-531-08587-2.  32p.  4-7. 

When  a  boy  asks  a  question  about  who  came  down  the  road,  the 
mother  responds  in  a  reverie.  She  leads  him  back  through  his- 
tory to  her  grandparents,  the  Civil  War,  the  Native  Americans, 
the  mastodons — back  to  the  beginning  of  time.  Brilliant,  impres- 
sionistic, full-page  watercolors  alternating  light  with  shadow 
have  a  dream-like  quality  that  hints  at  mysteries  beyond  those 
visible. 

5.285  McDonald,  Megan.  Whoo-oo  Is  It?  Illustrated  by  S.  D.  Schindler. 
Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-531-08574- 
0.  32p.  2-6. 

A  lyrical  narrative  and  soft,  dark,  naturalistic  paintings  mesh  to 
form  an  owl's  night  world.  From  her  barnloft  nest,  Mother  Owl 
hears  mysterious  noises.  She  searches  to  find  their  source,  en- 
countering a  snake,  a  dragonfly,  and  other  night  creatures,  each 
with  its  distinctive  sound.  Just  at  dawn  she  realizes  that  the  eggs 
she  has  guarded  and  warmed  have  begun  to  change.  This  book 
is  both  an  onomatopoeic  experience  and  an  evocation  of  the 
wonder  of  living  beings. 


222 


Respect  for  Nature 


181 


5.286  Murphy,  Jim.  The  Call  of  the  Wolves.  Illustrated  by  Mark  Alan 
Weatherby  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590- 
41941-2.  32p.  4-S. 

As  a  young  Arctic  wolf  and  his  pack  attack  a  herd  of  caribou,  the 
young  wolf  is  injured  by  a  rifle  shot  from  an  airplane  and  must 
fight  desperately  through  a  blizzard  to  return  to  the  safety  of  its 
pack.  This  magnificently  and  realistically  illustrated  book  is  use- 
ful in  learning  of  the  plight  of  the  Arctic  wolf,  an  endangered 
species.  The  author  has  added  a  factual  account  of  the  past, 
present,  and  future  of  the  wolf  and  a  bibliography. 

5.287  Parnall,  Peter.  Quiet.  Illustrated  by  Peter  Parnall.  Morrow  Junior 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08205-X.  28p.  5-10  (est). 

A  child  waits  in  quiet  for  a  raven,  chipmunk,  mouse,  and  chicka- 
dee to  come  close  to  him  as  he  lies  on  the  ground,  "a  quiet, 
wrinkled  thing  under  a  pile  of  seeds  and  apple  cores/'  And 
quietly,  quietly  they  come.  Peter  Parnall's  detailed  illustrations 
bring  the  forest  to  life.  Notable  Children's  Trade  Books  in  Science, 
1989. 

5.288  Rockwell,  Anne.  Apples  and  Pumpkins.  Illustrated  by  Lizzy 
Rockwell.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-777270-5.  22p.  4-S. 

Fall  brings  red  and  yellow  leaves  and  a  trip  to  Comstock  Farms, 
where  a  little  girl  and  her  family  pick  a  bushel  of  red  apples  and 
the  best  pumpkin  of  all.  On  Halloween  night,  the  pumpkin 
shines  with  its  jack-o'-lantern  light  and  the  apples  are  a  treat  for 
costumed  tricksters.  Rich  autumn-colored  paintings  help  to  il- 
lustrate one  little  girl's  enjoyment  of  the  fall  season.  ALA  Notable 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  Science,  1989. 

5.289  Rockwell,  Anne.  My  Spring  Robin.  Illustrated  by  Harlow  Rock- 
well and  Lizzy  Rockwell.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-777611-5. 
24p.  2-6. 

Harlow  and  Lizzy  Rockwell's  large  uncluttered  illustrations  fol- 
low a  young  girl's  discovery  of  signs  of  spring  as  she  searches 
for  the  special  robin  that  flew  away  last  fall.  After  such  wonders 
as  crocuses,  tiny  toads,  daffodils,  soft  rain  showers,  and  violets 
appear,  the  robin  heralds  spring's  return  with  that  special 
"Cheer-up,  cheerilee!"  song. 

5.290  Schlein,  Miriam.  The  Year  of  the  Panda.  Illustrated  by  Kam 
Mak.  Thomas  Y.  Crowell,  1990.  ISBN  0-690-04866-1.  83p.  8-12 
(est). 


223 


182 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Lu  Yi,  a  young  farm  boy  in  China,  rescues  an  orphaned  baby 
panda  that  has  moved  to  lower  slopes  in  search  of  food  because 
the  bamboo  forests  are  dying.  In  the  process  of  nursing  the 
panda  back  to  health,  Lu  Yi  learns  about  a  massive  government 
relocation  program  for  this  endangered  species.  The  boy  accom- 
panies the  cub  to  the  Panda  Rescue  Center  and  there  learns  even 
more  about  the  animals  and  how  they  are  being  protected. 

5.291  Tresselt,  Alvin.  The  Gift  of  the  Tree,  Illustrated  by  Henri  Soren- 
sen.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10685-4. 
32p.  4-8  (est.). 

First  published  in  1972  as  The  Dead  Tree,  this  book  depicts  the 
normal  life  cycle  of  an  oak  tree.  At  first  a  healthy  haven  for 
wildlife,  providing  a  "rich  rain  of  acorns/'  the  tree  is  slowly 
besieged  by  enemies.  Over  time,  carpenter  ants,  grub  beetles, 
and  termites  eat  out  "passageways  in  wondrous  patterns." 
Felled  by  a  storm,  the  oak  continues  to  provide  shelter  and  food, 
nourishing  the  earth  as  it  rots.  Oil  paintings  reflect  the  tree's 
majesty  and  the  moods  of  the  passing  seasons. 

5.292  Turner,  Ann.  Heron  Street  Illustrated  by  Lisa  Desimini.  Harper 
and  Row/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-026185^1. 
32p.  6-9. 

In  this  lyrical  story,  Ann  Turner  chronicles  the  changes  wrought 
by  human  hands  upon  a  seaside  marsh.  In  particular,  Turner's 
story  focuses  on  how  the  sounds  of  this  community  change  over 
time.  Lisa  Desimini's  vivid  illustrations  in  a  folk-art  style  create 
a  striking  complement  to  the  story.  The  book  could  be  used  in 
the  classroom  in  an  environment/ecology  unit,  or  to  illustrate 
onomatopoeia  in  writing.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in 
the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.293  Weller,  Francis  Ward.  I  Wonder  If  I'll  See  a  Whale.  Illustrated 
by  Ted  Lewin.  Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21474-7.  32p. 
4-8. 

A  young  girl  watches  expectantly,  even  reverently,  from  the  deck 
of  a  whale-watching  boat,  hoping  for  more  than  a  brief  glimpse 
of  the  humpbacks  that  migrate  in  spring  to  New  England  coasts. 
The  crew  knows  the  whales  by  their  markings  and  have  given 
them  names.  Suddenly,  "To  starboard!"  someone  calls,  and  the 
adventure  begins.  The  child's  sense  of  excitement  and  awe  as  the 
"giants"  spout,  breach,  feed,  dive,  and  simply  register  curiosity 
is  handled  expertly  both  through  Francis  Ward  Weller 's  poetic 


ERIC 


224 


Social  Issues 


183 


text  and  Ted  Lewin's  immense,  sea-splashed  mammal  "cous- 
ins. 

5.294  Wellington,  Monica.  Seasons  of  Swans.  Illustrated  by  Monica 
Wellington.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44621-4. 
32p.  3-7. 

This  realistic  story  of  two  swans  living  on  Willow  Pond  accu- 
rately describes  the  nesting  behavior  of  swans,  as  well  as  how 
they  train  their  cygnets  to  swim  and  protect  them  from  would- 
be  predators.  After  a  summer  of  feeding  on  waterweeds  and 
insects,  the  baby  swans  grow  strong  and  independent,  leaving 
their  nest  in  early  fall.  Flat  illustrations  in  dark  outlines,  showing 
a  boy  and  girl  observing  the  swans'  development,  add  to  the 
narrative  feel  of  this  informational  text. 

5.295  Williams,  David.  Walking  to  the  Creek.  Illustrated  by  Thomas 
B.  Allen.  Alfred  A.  Knopf /Borzoi  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-394-90598- 
9.  32p.  5-8. 

The  love  of  family  and  the  wonder  of  nature  are  central  themes 
of  Walking  to  the  Creek,  which  describes  twin  boys  visiting  their 
grandparents'  farm.  As  the  boys  hike  to  the  creek  near  the  farm, 
they  delight  in  the  beauty  of  the  natural  world.  Thomas  Allen's 
soft,  earth-tone,  chalk  illustrations  of  the  farm  and  creek  comple- 
ment David  Williams's  descriptive  images.  The  book  provides 
an  excellent  example  of  figurative  language. 

Social  Issues 

5.296  Avi.  Nothing  but  the  Truth:  A  Documentary  Novel.  Orchard 
Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08559-7.  177p. 
9  and  up. 

In  a  collage  of  perspectives,  accounts  emerge  of  an  incident  that 
occurs  in  Margaret  Narwin's  ninth-grade  homeroom:  track- 
team  hopeful  Philip  Mallory  hums  along  during  the  taped  play- 
ing of  "The  Star-Spangled  Banner."  Since  students  are  to  remain 
silent  during  the  anthem,  Miss  Narwin  sends  him  to  the  office. 
The  situation  escalates,  and  eventually  Philip  is  suspended. 
Through  memos,  phone  transcripts,  letters,  journals,  and  news 
accounts,  the  principles  reveal  their  views  of  the  incident  as  it 
grows,  punishes,  and  creates  a  moratorium  on  rights  and  re- 
sponsibilities. Jane  Addams  Award,  1991;  Newbery  Honor  Book, 
1992. 


225 


184 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


5.297  Dugan,  Barbara.  Loop  the  Loop,  Illustrated  by  James  Stevenson. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-096484.  32p.  5  and  up 
(est.). 

This  captivating  story  follows  the  relationship  between  a  shy 
girl  and  a  passionate,  life-loving  old  woman  fighting  the  vicissi- 
tudes of  age.  Anne  befriends  Mrs.  Simpson,  who  laughs,  wise- 
cracks, and  performs  fabulous  yo-yo  tricks — from  her  wheel- 
chair. But  Mrs.  Simpson's  declining  health  forces  their 
relationship  into  new  forms,  a  problem  that  the  author  presents 
honestly  and  resolves  gracefully.  In  the  end  we  see  how  much 
human  beings  can  give  each  other.  James  Stevenson's  whimsical 
watercolors  harmonize  perfectly  with  the  warm-hearted  realism 
of  the  story. 

5.298  Durell,  Ann,  and  Marilyn  Sachs,  editors.  The  Big  Book  for 
Peace.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44605-2. 128p. 
7-12. 

This  anthology  in  many  genres  and  graphic  forms  presents  a 
stellar  company  of  thirty-four  well-known  authors  and  illustra- 
tors, including  Nancy  Willard,  Jean  Fritz,  Lloyd  Alexander, 
Maurice  Sendak,  and  Diane  and  Leo  Dillon,  all  of  whom  speak 
eloquently  and  in  their  own  ways  for  peace.  Selections  include 
histories,  humor,  poems,  and  a  song.  Proceeds  from  the  book's 
sales  aid  five  organizations  that  work  for  peace.  lane  Addams 
Award,  1991. 

5.299  Dygard,  Thomas  J.  Forward  Pass.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-688-07961-X.  186p.  12  and  up. 

Coach  Frank  Gardner  finds  the  perfect  receiver  for  his  top-notch 
quarterback  in  a  girl  basketball  player,  Jill  Winston.  Jill  is  eager 
to  join  the  team,  her  parents  (with  reservations)  give  their  con- 
sent, and  the  rules  do  not  prohibit  a  girl  player.  But  can  Frank, 
Jill,  and  the  team  weather  public  opinion? 

5.300  Fox,  Paula.  Monkey  Island.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08562-7. 160p.  10  and  up. 

Eleven-year-old  Clay  Garrity's  father  disappeared  in  the  past, 
and  now  his  mother  has  run  away  from  their  New  York  City 
hotel  room.  As  Clay  struggles  with  abandonment,  homelessness, 
hunger,  and  threats,  there  are  counterbalancing  forces — friends 
on  the  street.  There  is  Buddy,  a  young  African  American,  com- 
plex with  hope  and  despair,  yet  constant  in  caring,  and  there  is 
philosophical  Calvin,  a  former  teacher  whose  tragedies  include 


226 


Lip  North 
u  tin  (  ahin 


VIRGINIA  HAMILTON 

SO 


Jvliriam  Scklcin 


4 


A.  Up  North  at  the  Cabin  by  Marsha  Wilson  Chall;  illustrated  by  Steve  Johnson  (see 
5.274).  B.  Drylongso  by  Virginia  Hamilton;  illustrated  by  Jerry  Pinkney  (see  5.279). 
C.  Finding  Foxes  by  Allison  Blyler;  illustrated  by  Robert  J.  Blake  (see  5.272).  D.  The 
Year  of  the  Panda  by  Miriam  Schlein;  illustrated  by  Kam  Mak  (see  5.290). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


227 


A. 


B. 


A.  The  Big  Book  for  Peace  by  various  authors  (see  5.298).  B.  Amazing  Grace  by 
Mary  Hoffman;  illustrated  by  Caroline  Binch  (see  5.301).  C.  Our  Teacher's  Having  a 
Baby  by  Eve  Bunting;  illustrated  by  Diane  de  Groat  (see  5.212).  D.  The  Lemonade 
Babysitterby  Karen  Waggoner;  illustrated  by  Dorothy  Donohue  (see  5.225). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Social  Issues 


alcoholism.  Clay  hears  their  stories,  receives  the  handouts,  and 
works  the  garbage.  The  quiet  resolution  ties  many  of  the  plot 
strings.  Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

5.301  Hoffman,  Mary.  Amazing  Grace.  Illustrated  by  Caroline  Binch. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-1040-2.  25p. 
4-8. 

Because  she  is  a  girl  who  loves  stories — from  books,  from  mov- 
ies, and  from  out  of  Nana's  head — Grace  acts  them  out.  She  is  a 
peg-leg  pirate,  Aladdin  of  the  lamp,  Joan  of  Arc,  Anansi  the 
Spider,  or  Mowgli.  But  Raj  says  Grace  can't  play  Peter  Pan  in  the 
school  play  because  Grace  is  black.  Exquisitely  detailed  paint- 
ings, rich  with  expression,  draw  readers  into  the  warmth  of  a 
female  family  in  which  Nana  knows  that  if  you  put  your  mind 
to  it,  you  can  be  anything  you  want  to  be.  Notable  1991  Children's 
Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.302  Kraus,  Joanna  Halpert.  Tall  Boy's  Journey.  Illustrated  by  Karen 
Ritz.  Carolrhoda  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-87614-746-5.  48p.  7-10. 

When  eight-year-old  Kim  Moo  Yong  is  adopted  by  kind  Ameri- 
can parents,  he  is  lonely  and  scared.  He  has  never  slept  alone  for 
fear  of  tigers,  nor  seen  long  noses,  nor  eaten  with  a  knife  and 
fork.  His  new  father's  Korean  colleague,  who  also  came  to 
America  as  a  child,  understands  how  it  feels  to  be  placed  in  a 
new  culture  and  is  able  to  help  the  family  draw  closer.  This 
gentle,  haunting  book  shows  the  universality  of  sensitivity  and 
kindness. 

5.303  Muldoon,  Kathleen  M.  Princess  Pooh.  Illustrated  by  Linda 
Shute.  Albert  Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075-6627-6.  26p.  7-10. 

Princess  Pooh  is  Patty  Jean's  nickname  for  her  older  sister,  who 
uses  a  wheelchair.  Resentful  of  the  extra  attention  the  "Princess" 
receives,  Patty  Jean  finds  out  just  how  tricky  and  nasty  the 
constraint  can  be.  With  a  new  respect  she  asks,  "How  can  you 
smile  all  the  time  when  you're  in  that  yucky  chair?"  The  illustra- 
tions capture  the  characters'  feelings  in  this  fine  launching  spot 
for  a  discussion  on  disabilities. 

5.304  Osofsky,  Audrey  My  Buddy.  Illustrated  by  Ted  Rand.  Henry 
Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1747-X.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 

Buddy  is  a  boy's  best  friend;  he's  a  golden  retriever  who  "looks 
like  the  sun  is  always  shining  on  him."  The  narrator  describes 


186 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Buddy  not  only  as  his  friend  but  also  as  his  arms  and  legs, 
helping  him  do  things  that  he  can't  do  for  himself  because  of 
muscular  dystrophy  The  description  of  Buddy's  selection,  train- 
ing, duties,  and  responsibilities  is  based  on  a  real  boy  and  his 
dog,  as  well  as  on  research  at  the  Canine  Companions  for  Inde- 
pendence in  Santa  Rosa,  California.  Ted  Rand's  illustrations 
show  the  bond  of  buddies  at  school  and  home. 

5.305  Pettepiece,  Thomas,  and  Anatoly  Aleksin,  editors.  Face  to  Face: 
A  Collection  of  Stories  by  Celebrated  Soviet  and  American 
Writers.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21951-X.  233p.  12  and 
up  (est). 

For  the  first  time,  nine  Soviet  and  nine  American  authors  for 
children  and  young  adults  share  their  insights  about  humanity 
in  a  single  volume.  Ranging  in  length  from  four  to  seventeen 
pages,  the  short  stories  delve  into  universal  themes  and  issues, 
including  taking  responsibility  for  one's  actions,  understanding 
the  importance  of  loyalty,  grappling  with  the  problem  of  evil, 
recognizing  the  value  of  family.  Authors  represented  include 
Robert  Cormier,  Katherine  Paterson,  Walter  Dean  Myers,  Jean 
Fritz,  Yuri  Yakovlev,  and  Vytaute  Zilinskaite. 

5.306  Shulevitz,  Uri.  Toddlecreek  Post  Office.  Illustrated  by  Uri 
Shulevitz.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-37635-2. 
28p.  6  and  up. 

The  village  post  office  is  the  social  hub  of  Toddlecreek.  Each 
morning  Vernon  Stamps,  the  postmaster,  shares  his  customers' 
lives  and  problems.  But  the  postal  inspector  appears  unexpect- 
edly, announcing  that  the  post  office  must  close  because  of  insuf- 
ficient business.  In  vivid  illustrations  that  are  painted  in  glowing 
orange  tempered  with  blue,  Caldecott  Medal-winner  Uri 
Shulevitz  shows  how  swiftly  the  comforting  pattern  of  life  in  a 
small  community  can  be  changed. 

5.307  Spinelli,  Jerry.  Maniac  Magee.  Harper  Trophy  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-06-440424-2.  184p.  8-12  (est.). 

Twelve-year-old  Jeffrey  Lionel  "Maniac"  Magee's  behavior  is  the 
stuff  of  legend:  he  scored  forty-nine  touchdowns  in  a  single 
game,  he  kept  an  eight-inch  cockroach  on  a  leash,  he  ran  faster 
and  farther  than  anyone  else.  What's  more,  "Maniac"  was  or- 
phaned at  age  three,  fled  uncaring  relatives  at  age  eight,  and 
now  lives  on  his  own.  What  is  known  for  certain  is  his  legacy: 
kids  from  the  East  End  and  West  End  of  Two  Mills,  Pennsylva- 


230 


Stories  about  Other  Lands  and  People 


187 


nia,  may  now  be  found  holding  opposite  ends  of  the  same  jump 

rope  chanting,  "Ma-niac,  Ma-niac  /  He's  so  cool  "  Boston 

Globe-Horn  Book  Fiction  Award,  1990;  Newbery  Medal,  1991. 

5.308  Spinelli,  Jerry.  There's  a  Girl  in  My  Hammerlock.  SL.  on  and 
Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-671-74684-7. 
199p.  9  and  up  (est.). 

When  eighth-grader  Maisie  Potter  fails  to  make  the  cheerleading 
squad,  she  just  knows  it  is  because  ''Luscious"  Liz  Lampley 
didn't  vote  for  her.  So  to  spite  Liz,  who  happens  to  be  dating 
wrestler  Eric  Delong,  athletic  Maisie  tries  out  for  the  boys'  wres- 
tling team— and  makes  it!  Fighting  the  disapproval  of  coaches, 
schoolmates,  and  almost  everyone  in  town,  Maisie  unexpectedly 
finds  strength,  heroism,  and — most  importantly — self-accep- 
tance. 

5.309  Wojciechowski,  Susan.  Patty  Dillman  of  Hot  Dog  Fame.  Or- 
chard Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08410-8. 180p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Eighth-grader  Patricia  Dillman  tells  her  humorously  moving 
story  about  how  she  develops  from  "wienie  head,"  who  gets 
into  trouble  at  school,  to  "Queen  of  the  Hot  Dogs."  Volunteering 
to  serve  meals  to  the  homeless  at  St.  Luke's  Soup  Kitchen  is 
neither  her  idea  nor  her  "cup  of  tea."  She's  more  concerned 
about  keeping  her  first  real  boyfriend,  Tim,  interested  in  her.  As 
Christmas  nears,  Patty  finds  herself  willing  to  sacrifice  fun  with 
friends  for  the  joy  of  giving. 

5.310  Zheleznikov,  Vladimir  (translated  by  Antonina  W.  Bouis).  Scare- 
crow. J.  B.  Lippincott,  1990.  ISBN  0-397-32317-4. 148p.  10  and  up. 

Twelve-year-old  Lena  comes  to  live  with  her  eccentric  grandfa- 
ther in  small  town,  present-day  Russia.  On  her  first  day  of  school 
she  is  confronted  by  unwelcoming  classmates.  A  persistent  soul, 
she  tries  to  cover  for  Dimka,  her  new  friend  and  crush,  and  takes 
the  blame  for  causing  the  cancellation  of  a  field  trip  to  Moscow. 
This  brings  out  the  worst  of  middle-school  cruelty  and  unkind- 
ness.  In  Antonina  Bouis's  splendid  translation  the  spirit  of  the 
tale  might  be  American,  but  the  absence  of  a  "happy  ever  after" 
ending  is  unfamiliar  and  unexpected. 

Stories  about  Other  Lands  and  People 

5311  Appiah,  Sonia.  Amoko  and  Efua  Bean  Illustrated  by  Carol  Eas- 
mon.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-705591-4.  28p.  4-8  (est.). 


23i 


188 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


Five-year-old  Amoko  and  her  family  live  in  Ghana  in  West  Af- 
rica. Like  many  American  children,  Amoko  goes  everywhere 
with  her  toy  bear,  Efua.  But  in  her  excitement  over  the  gift  of  a 
new  toy  drum,  Amoko  accidentally  leaves  Efua  outdoors  over- 
night. When  Amoko's  father  finds  the  damaged-but-repairable 
bear  and  returns  it,  she  is  overjoyed.  Through  text  and  full-page 
folk-art  illustrations,  readers  will  share  a  familiar  experience 
while  becoming  acquainted  with  an  unfamiliar  culture. 

5312  Carlstrom,  Nancy  White.  Light:  Stories  of  a  Small  Kindness, 
Illustrated  by  Lisa  Desimini.  Little,  Brown,  1990.  ISBN  0-316- 
12857-0. 42p.  8-12. 

Seven  stories  of  children  from  Mexico,  Haiti,  Guatemala,  and 
New  York  City  share  a  theme.  In  each,  some  act  of  kindness  or 
charity  is  extended:  a  young  boy  overcomes  his  fear  in  n  dark 
cave,  a  busload  of  Down's  syndrome  children  escape  danger,  an 
artist  explains  his  inspiration  for  the  painting  of  a  blue  parrot, 
and  disabled  children  learn  to  rejoice  in  overcoming  obstacles. 
An  author's  note  indicates  that  one  story,  "Frederico's  Fantastico 
Day,"  is  based  on  her  own  experiences  as  a  teacher.  Lisa 
Desimini's  black-and-white  illustrations  project  strong  images 
from  each  story.  Proceeds  from  the  book's  sales  aid  Mexican  and 
Haitian  schools  for  disabled  children. 

5313  Dorros,  Arthur.  Tonight  Is  Carnaval.  Illustrated  by  the  Club  de 
Madres  Virgen  del  Carmen  of  Lima,  Peru.  Dutton  Children's 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44641-9.  32p.  5-8. 

Once  a  year,  the  people  of  the  Andes  Mountains  of  South  Amer- 
ica get  together  with  their  friends  from  neighboring  villages  to 
dance,  feast,  and  sing  in  celebration  of  Carnaval.  A  typical  family 
prepares  for  the  big  event — Mama  weaves  cloth,  Papa  chops 
wood,  and  the  entire  family  gathers  potatoes.  This  book's 
unique  illustrations  are  photographs  of  arpilleras,  three-dimen- 
sional wall-hangings  that  depict  Peruvian  village  life.  An  appen- 
dix includes  labeled  pictures  showing  how  arpilleras  are  made, 
as  well  a  glossary  of  unfamiliar  terms.  Notable  1991  Children's 
Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5314  Gackenbach,  Dick.  With  Love  from  Gran,  Illustrated  by  Dick 
Gackenbach.  Clarion  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-89919-842-2.  29p.  3-6. 

When  Gran  goes  off  to  see  the  world,  her  grandson  is  the  recipi- 
ent of  gifts  from  around  the  globe,  including  a  gypsy  wagon 


ERIC  232 


Stories  about  Other  Lands  and  People 


189 


from  Budapest,  a  Cossack  suit  from  Moscow,  an  African  mask 
from  Timbuktu,  and  a  kangaroo  from  Adelaide.  The  best  gift  of 
all,  though,  is  Gran's  return.  Young  children  may  enjoy  locating 
Gran's  souvenir  stops  as  a  springboard  to  the  study  of  cultures 
and  countries  around  the  world. 

5.315  Heide,  Florence  Parry,  and  Judith  Heide  Gilliland.  The  Day  of 
Ahmed's  Secret.  Illustrated  by  Ted  Lewin.  Lothrop,  Lee  and 
Shepard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08895-3.  32p.  6-9. 

All  day  long  Ahmed  holds  tight  to  his  secret  as  he  delivers 
butagaz  (butane  gas)  from  his  donkey  cart.  The  streets  of  Cairo 
bustle  with  merchants  and  shoppers — colorful  stalls  vending 
brass,  rugs,  and  vegetables,  coops  of  chickens  and  rabbits,  and 
even  a  string  of  camels.  Despite  the  sights  and  sounds  that 
clamor  for  attention,  Ahmed  concentrates  on  the  secret  that  he 
will  share  with  his  family  at  the  close  of  the  day:  he  can  write  his 
name.  Ted  Lewin's  paintings,  both  realistic  and  instructive,  con- 
trast the  ancient  and  modern  city.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books, 
1991. 

5.316  Isadora,  Rachel.  At  the  Crossroads.  Illustrated  by  Rachel  Isa- 
dora. Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-05271-1.  32p.  4-7 
(est.). 

"Today  our  fathers  are  coming  home!"  Singing  and  dancing 
children  eagerly  await  the  homecoming  of  their  fathers,  who  for 
many  months  have  been  working  in  distant  gold,  diamond,  and 
coal  mines.  Vibrant  watercolor  illustrations  of  expectant  and 
joyous  young  faces  shine  through  the  sorrows  of  family  separa- 
tion typical  in  segregated  South  African  townships.  Notable  1991 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.317  Isadora,  Rachel.  Over  the  Green  Hills.  Illustrated  by  Rachel 
Isadora.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10510-6.  32p.  4-8 
(est.). 

It  is  the  day  for  Zolani,  his  mother,  and  his  baby  sister  to  take  a 
long  walk  to  visit  Grandmother  Zindzi  in  Transkei,  an  inde- 
pendent black  state  on  the  east  coast  of  South  Africa.  They  pack 
dried  fish  and  mielies  (ears  of  corn)  for  Grandmother,  and  Zolani 
loads  mussels  on  the  goat.  Mother  walks  with  dried  fish,  a 
pumpkin,  and  even  a  chicken  on  her  head.  The  countryside  is 
jungle-bright  with  a  blue,  washed  sky.  Along  the  way,  neighbors 
send  their  greetings,  and  Zolani  explores  his  beautiful  world. 


ERIC 


233 


190 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


5.318  Jacobs,  Shannon  K  Song  of  the  Giraffe.  Illustrated  by  Pamela 
Johnson.  Little,  Brown/Springboard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-316- 
45555-5.  55p.  7-9  (est.). 

Black-and-white  pencil  drawings  help  to  tell  the  story  of  Kisana, 
a  member  of  the  Bokuru  tribe  in  Africa.  She  has  a  universal 
problem — she  feels  ostracized  because  she  is  physically  different 
from  her  tribe.  Much  smaller  than  the  other  girls,  Kisana  has 
both  light  skin  and  light  hair.  To  gain  acceptance  from  the  dark- 
skinned  tribe,  she  journeys  to  find  a  special  gift  for  the  tribal 
feast.  The  tribulations  that  she  undergoes  to  find  her  gift  make 
for  a  warm  story  of  growing  up,  family  relationships,  and  wor- 
thiness. 

5.319  Major,  Kevin.  Blood  Red  Ochre.  Delacorte  Press,  1989.  ISBN 
0-385-29794-7. 147p.  12  and  up. 

In  alternating  chapters,  this  novel  simultaneously  offers  two 
Canadian  stories — one,  a  modern  tale  of  fifteen-year-old  David's 
relationship  with  his  family  and  new  girlfriend  in  Newfound- 
land; the  second,  a  narrative  by  Dauvoodaset,  one  of  the  last 
Beothuk  Indians,  whose  race  became  extinct  approximately  two 
hundred  years  ago.  In  the  final  chapters,  the  protagonists  of  both 
stories  meet  in  a  mystic  encounter,  blending  past  and  present, 
with  each  defending  the  land  and  people  that  he  loves. 

5.320  Mermen,  Ingrid,  and  Niki  Daly.  Somewhere  in  Africa.  Illus- 
trated by  Nicolaas  Maritz.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-525-44848-9.  32p.  3-8  (est.). 

In  the  Africa  that  Ashraf  knows,  no  lions  lie  in  the  tall  grass,  no 
crocodiles  glide  through  muddy  rivers,  and  no  zebras  race 
across  the  plains.  Instead,  Ashraf  lives  in  a  city  "in  the  very  tip 
of  the  great  African  continent/7  where  shops  and  traffic  and 
noise  and  music  fill  his  world.  The  other  Africa  is  captured 
securely  in  his  favorite  library  book — one  he  checks  out  again 
and  again.  Paintings  are  vivid,  sun-drenched,  perspective-free 
impressions  of  Cape  Town. 

5.321  Neville,  Emily  Cheney.  The  China  Year.  HarperCollins,  1991. 
ISBN  0-06-024384-8.  244p.  10  and  up. 

When  thirteen-year-old  Henrietta  Rich's  father  has  a  year's  ap- 
pointment in  Beijing,  she  and  her  mother  go  along,  too.  Living 
in  cramped  "Foreign  Expert"  quarters  on  the  university  campus, 
Henri  is  fascinated  by  her  surroundings,  but  homesick  for  New 
York  City.  A  young  Chinese  boy  befriends  her,  and  their  unex- 


Stories  about  Other  Lands  and  People 


191 


pected  cultural  differences  come  to  life  as  the  two  explore  the 
city  and  meet  each  other's  families.  This  is  a  lively,  cleverly 
veiled  introduction  to  China. 

5.322  Pomerantz,  Charlotte.  The  Chalk  Doll.  Illustrated  by  Fran£  Les- 
sac.  J.  B.  Lippincott,  1989.  ISBN  0-397-32319-0. 30p.  3-7  (est.). 

Rose  loves  the  tales  of  her  mother's  humble  Jamaican  childhood. 
She  envies  the  simple  homemade  rag  doll  that  her  mother 
would  have  traded  for  a  store-bought  "chalk  doll."  She  hears 
how  three  pennies  provided  a  wonderful  birthday  gift,  and  how 
as  a  little  barefoot  girl  her  mom  made  high  heels  with  mango 
pits  dipped  in  road  tar.  Primitive  paintings  in  bold  colors  illus- 
trate the  shared  memories.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in 
the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

5.323  Schami,  Rafik  (translated  bv  Rika  Lesser).  A  Hand  Full  of  Stars. 
Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44535-8. 195p.  12  and 
up  (est). 

As  a  young  boy  in  modern  Damascus  grows  from  a  child  to  an 
adult,  he  begins  to  see  the  world  around  him  in  a  different  light. 
From  his  simpler  observations  about  love  and  friendship,  he 
begins  to  see  the  injustices  of  his  government,  the  brutality  of  a 
system  that  is  unconcerned  about  the  poor  or  the  helpless,  and 
he  pours  his  feelings  of  anger  into  his  daily  journal.  At  length  he 
finds  a  dangerous  outlet  for  his  frustration — a  forbidden  under- 
ground newspaper.  Mildred  L.  Batchelder  Award,  1991. 

5.324  Schermbrucker,  Reviva.  Charlie's  House.  Illustrated  by  Niki 
Daly.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-84024-6.  28p.  3-8. 

Watercolor  washes  help  to  tell  the  story  of  young  Charlie,  who 
lives  in  a  corrugated  iron  and  scrap  shelter  in  Guguletu,  South 
Africa.  After  the  rains  cause  a  leaky  roof,  a  determined  Charlie 
goes  outside  to  build  his  own  dream  house  in  the  mud  beside 
the  soggy  shelter.  He  fashions  big  rooms,  with  a  bedroom  for  his 
mother  and  granny  and  another  all  for  himself.  His  imaginary 
world  encroaches  upon  his  reality,  until  one  way  or  another,  his 
dream  comes  true.  Notable  1992  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field 
of  Social  Studies. 

5.325  Staples,  Suzanne  Fisher.  Shabanu:  Daughter  of  the  Wind.  Al- 
fred A.  Knopf,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-94815-7.  240p.  12  and  up. 

Eleven-year-old  Shabanu  finds  herself  torn  between  the  tradi- 
tions of  her  Pakistani  culture — traditions  that  demand  she 


ERIC 


235 


192 


Contemporary  Realistic  Fiction 


marry  the  man  of  her  beloved  father's  choosing — and  her  inner- 
most desire  to  rebel  against  a  marriage  to  a  man  for  whom  she 
feels  nothing  but  contempt.  How  can  she  betray  her  father,  Dadi, 
and  the  centuries-old  ways  of  her  people  without  giving  up  her 
own  happiness?  Newbery  Honor  Book,  1990, 

5.326  Williams,  Karen  Lynn.  Galimoto*  Illustrated  by  Catherine  Stock. 
Mulberry  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-668-10991-8.  32p.  4-8. 

Seven-year-old  Kondi,  who  lives  in  a  village  in  Malawi,  Africa, 
treasures  all  the  belongings  that  he  keeps  in  an  old  shoebox.  One 
day,  when  he  decides  to  make  a  galimoto,  a  toy  vehicle  made 
from  wire,  Kondi  goes  about  the  village  asking,  begging,  or 
offering  to  trade  his  keepsakes  for  pieces  of  wire  for  his  project. 
Kondi's  traditional  push  toy  is  a  great  success,  and  children  will 
rejoice  in  his  ingenuity.  Watercolor  paintings  are  awash  with  the 
patterns  and  bustle  of  village  life. 

Survival 

5.327  Paulsen,  Gary.  The  Voyage  of  the  Frog.  Orchard  Books/Richard 
Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08405-1. 143p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Fourteen-year-old  David  is  caught  in  a  fierce  storm  when  he 
goes  out  on  his  sailboat  to  scatter  the  ashes  of  his  recently  de- 
ceased uncle.  For  nine  days  he  struggles  against  becalmed  seas, 
sharks,  killer  whales,  and  more  storms.  By  the  end  of  his  journey, 
David  has  learned  important  lessons  about  conquering  fear, 
grieving  for  his  uncle,  and  developing  self-reliance.  This  book  is 
a  good  companion  piece  to  the  author's  Hatchet 

5328   Wild,  Margaret.  Let  the  Celebrations  Begin!  Illustrated  by  Julie 
Vivas.  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08537-6.  32p.  3-6. 

Miriam  is  helping  the  women  with  whom  she  lives  to  stitch  a  toy 
for  each  child  so  that  they  can  celebrate  when  the  soldiers  come 
to  liberate  the  concentration  camp.  Until  then,  home  is  Hut  18, 
the  scene  of  remarkable  hope.  Heads  shaved  and  gaunt  from 
long  hunger,  the  women  transform  inch  after  inch  of  tattered 
clothes  into  toys.  Julie  Vivas's  illustrations  create  a  luminous  joy 
that  extinguishes  the  macabre  reality. 


ERIC 


Fantasy 


At  heart,  the  issues  raised  in  a  work  of  fantasy  are  tltose  we  face  in 
real  life.  In  whatever  guise — our  own  daily  nightmares  of  war, 
intolerance,  inhumanity;  or  the  struggles  of  an  Assistant  Pig-Keeper 
against  the  Lord  of  Death — the  problems  are  agonizingly  familiar. 
And  an  openness  to  compassion,  love,  and  mercy  is  as  essential  to  us 
here  and  now  as  it  is  to  any  inhabitant  of  an  imaginary  kingdom. 

Lloyd  Alexander,  Newbery  Award 
Acceptance  Speech  for  The  High  King 


237 


/ 


194 


6  Fantasy 


Adventure  and  Magic 

6.1  Alexander,  Lloyd.  The  Jedera  Adventure,  E.  P.  Dutton,  1989. 
ISBN  0-525-44481-5. 152p.  8-12  (est). 

Returning  a  library  book  may  be  routine,  but  not  when  it  in- 
volves the  adventure-loving  heroine  Vesper  Holly.  Accompanied 
by  her  beloved  guardian  Brinnie  and  with  the  help  of  several 
Jedera  inhabitants,  including  a  blue-faced  warrior,  Vesper  treks 
across  the  desert  of  Northern  Africa  to  Bel  Saaba  and  once  again 
foils  one  of  Dr.  Helvitius's  insidious  plots  to  rule  the  world. 
Tribal  feuds,  ill-tempered  camels,  romance,  and  mysterious  se- 
crets help  to  create  another  action-packed  adventure  with  Lloyd 
Alexander's  dauntless  heroine. 

6.2  Alexander,  Lloyd.  The  Philadelphia  Adventure.  Dutton  Chil- 
dren's Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44564-1. 160p.  10  and  up. 

The  year  is  1876,  and  the  Centennial  Exposition  is  about  to  open 
in  Philadelphia.  But  danger  and  political  embarrassment 
threaten  to  mar  the  opening,  and  President  Grant  must  seek  the 
help  of  the  city's  most  adventurous  citizen,  Vesper  Holly.  True  to 
her  nature,  Vesper,  with  the  help  of  her  memorable  friends,  once 
again  foils  the  evil  Dr.  Helvitius's  scheme  to  conquer  the  world. 
Woven  with  bits  of  American  history,  this  final  novel  in  Lloyd 
Alexander's  series  of  tales  about  the  daring  heroine  is  filled  with 
adventure,  humor,  and  action-packed  surprises. 

6.3  Alexander,  Lloyd.  The  Remarkable  Journey  of  Prince  Jen.  Dut- 
ton Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-545-44826-8.  273p.  10  and  up 
(est). 

Bearing  six  unusual  gifts,  Prince  Jen  begins  his  journey  to  the 
kingdom  of  T'ienkuo.  But  the  journey  is  filled  with  peril  and 
misfortune,  and  the  young  prince  must  struggle  with  evil  forces 
and  also  with  himself  to  fulfill  his  destiny  as  king.  Weaving 
details  from  the  culture  of  ancient  China,  Lloyd  Alexander  once 
again  creates  an  intriguing  and  suspenseful  fantasy  about  the 
true  meaning  of  "kingdom  on  earth." 

6.4  Balian,  Lorna.  Wilbur's  Space  Machine.  Illustrated  by  Lorna 
Balian.  Holiday  House,  1990.  ISBN  0-8234-0836-1.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 


er|c 


233 


Adventure  and  Magic 


195 


Violet  and  Wilbur  live  alone  in  the  middle  of  nowhere,  and  they 
like  it  that  way.  Gradually,  though,  people  begin  to  move  into 
their  valley,  until  they  find  themselves  with  no  room  at  all.  In 
desperation  Wilbur  builds  a  "space  machine7'  that  enables  them 
to  find  peace  and  quiet  in  a  most  unexpected  way  Expressive 
and  humorous  watercolors  show  Wilbur's  resourcefulness. 

6.5  Ballard,  Robin.  Cat  and  Alex  and  the  Magic  Flying  Carpet 
Illustrated  by  Robin  Ballard.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06- 
020390-0.  32p.  3^7. 

As  Alex  watches  the  rain  fall  outside  his  window,  he  sees  his 
friend  Cat  arrive  in  a  strange-looking  cloak.  Cat  explains  that  his 
wrap  is  a  magic  flying  carpet  and  tells  Alex  of  his  wondrous 
adventures  around  the  world.  Alex,  longing  for  a  trip  to  the 
moon,  joins  Cat  on  the  carpet.  Falling  asleep,  they  take  a  magical 
ride  together.  Stylized  watercolors  illustrate  this  story  of  friend- 
ship. 

6.6  Bentley,  Nancy.  I've  Got  Your  Nose!  Illustrated  by  Don  Madden. 
Doubleday,  1991.  ISBN  0-385-41296-7.  32p.  4-8. 

Nahzella  the  witch  conforms  to  witches'  standards  on  most 
measures,  except  that  her  nose  is  a  cute  little  button  nose  more 
suitable  for  a  princess.  No  spell  from  her  spell  book  can  produce 
a  just-right  witch's  nose.  So  Nahzella  looks  up  a  spell  for  "Steal/' 
and  tries  to  change  her  nose  another  way.  Still,  no  matter  for 
which  nose  she  "exchanges"  hers,  there  are  always  unantici- 
pated problems:  the  farmer's  nose  is  allergic,  the  dog's  too  sen- 
sitive. Eventually,  of  course,  Nahzella  settles  happily  for  her 
button  nose. 

6.7  Berger,  Barbara  Helen.  Gwinna.  Illustrated  by  Barbara  Helen 
Berger.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21738-X.  128p.  6  and 
up  (est.). 

When  a  woodcutter  and  his  wife  wish  for  a  child,  the  Mother  of 
the  Owls  gives  them  Gwinna  with  the  stipulation  that  at  the  age 
of  twelve,  she  must  return.  As  Gwinna  grows  up,  she  follows  the 
owls  back  to  their  grotto,  where  Mother  of  the  Owls  shows 
Gwinna  her  wings.  After  learning  to  fly,  Gwinna  is  drawn  to  the 
mountain  where  she  meets  a  golden  griffin  and  another  friend 
who  give  her  the  secret  of  the  wind's  song.  Luminescent,  haunt- 
ing illustrations  embellish  this  magical  tale  of  an  enchanted 
young  girl  who  fulfills  her  dream. 


196 


Fantasy 


6.8  Bradshaw,  Gillian.  The  Dragon  and  the  Thief*  Greenwillow 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10575-0. 154p.  10  and  up. 

Prahotep,  the  hapless  son  of  a  deceased  ancient  Egyptian  farmer, 
discovers  the  lair  of  a  she-dragon,  Hathor.  He  persuades  Hathor 
to  travel  with  him  up  the  Nile  to  Nubia,  where  other  dragons  are 
rumored  to  be  alive.  Their  journey  is  one  of  danger  and  excite- 
ment as  they  are  pursued  by  the  evil  priest/magician  Ne- 
fersenet.  Gillian  Bradshaw  brings  ancient  Egyptian  society  to  life 
in  this  lively,  very  original  historical  fantasy. 

6.9  Clement,  Claude  (translated  by  Lenny  Hort).  The  Voice  of  the 
Wood-  Illustrated  by  Frederic  Clement.  Dial  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-8037-0635-9. 22p.  8-12  (est.). 

This  short  and  simple  tale  expresses  powerfully  the  fundamen- 
tal mystery  of  music.  Surrealistic  illustrations  depict  a  Venetian 
craftsman  as  he  creates  a  cello  from  the  wood  of  a  beautiful  tree, 
a  tree  in  which  wind  and  birds  made  captivating  music  long  ago. 
But  the  famed  musician  who  attempts  to  play  the  cello  must  first 
learn  about  the  deeper  harmonies  of  humanity  and  nature  before 
he  can  draw  sound  from  the  instrument.  The  text  is  clear  and 
spare,  the  illustrations  quiet  and  haunting,  and  the  overall  tone 
one  of  reverence  for  the  miracle  of  music. 

6.10  Cole,  Joanna.  The  Magic  School  Bus  Inside  the  Human  Body 
Illustrated  by  Bruce  Degen.  Scholastic,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41427-5. 
38p.  8-13. 

This  is  one  in  a  series  of  books  that  takes  readers  on  magical 
science  trips  aboard  a  mysterious  school  bus.  This  time  the  class 
of  strange  Ms.  Frizzle  sets  out  on  a  field  trip  to  the  science 
museum,  but  they  end  up  on  a  journey  through  the  digestive 
and  circulatory  systems  of  a  fellow  classmate.  Taking  the  phi- 
losophy of  meaningful  student  involvement  to  its  extreme,  Ms. 
Frizzle,  in  wild  science  garb,  cleverly  teaches  both  children  and 
adults  about  the  wonderful  workings  of  the  human  body. 

6.11  Jacques,  Brian.  Mariel  of  Redwall.  Illustrated  by  Gary  Chalk. 
Philomel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22144-1. 387p.  10  and  up. 

Against  the  backdrop  of  Redwall  Abbey  and  Mossflower 
Woods,  Brian  Jacques  offers  the  fourth  in  his  series  of  medieval 
adventure  tales,  this  one  featuring  an  intrepid  heroine,  the 
mousemaid  Mariel,  in  a  mission  of  revenge  against  the  vicious 
sea-rats  of  Terramort  Island.  Jolly  hares,  badger  warriors,  brave 
mice,  and  a  host  of  moles,  hedgehogs,  and  otters  play  support- 


240 


V 


A.  The  Remarkable  Journey  of  Prince  Jen  by  Lloyd  Alexander  (see  6.3).  B.  The 
Jedera  Adventure  by  Lloyd  Alexander  (see  6.1 ).  C.  Shiloh  by  Phyllis  Reynolds  Naylor 
(see  5.27).  D.  The  Widow's  Broom  by  Chris  Van  Allsburg  (see  6.21). 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


241 


TilUe 

and 

tneWall 

Leo  L 

m 

Quentin  Blake 

COCKATOOS 


Who  Is  the  Beast? 

15  Y     IU  I  !  H     It  \  K  I"  K 


A.  Wie  and  the  Wall  by  Leo  Lionni  (see  6,88).  B.  Cockatoos  by  Quentin  Blake  (see 
6.198).  C.  Who  Is  the  Beast?  by  Keith  Baker  (see  6.26). 


ERIC 


242 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Adventure  and  Nlagic 


197 


ing  roles  in  this  swashbuckling  tale  with  enough  scheming, 
swordplay,  piracy,  violence,  and  triumph  to  pique  the  interest  of 
Redwall  fans. 

6.12  Kelleher,  Victor.  The  Red  King,  Dial  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037- 
07584. 176p.  11  and  up. 

The  people  of  Forest  Land  fear  the  evil  Red  King,  who  rules  his 
kingdom  through  fear  and  the  threat  of  a  feverish  disease.  His 
tyranny  is  unchallenged  until  a  band  of  traveling  tricksters, 
facing  danger  and  death,  puts  an  end  to  the  reign  of  the  myste- 
rious and  haunting  ruler.  Filled  with  suspense  and  intrigue, 
Victor  Kelleher 's  well-written  tale  is  sure  to  please  fans  of  the 
supernatural. 

6*13  Le  Guin,  Ursula  K.  A  Ride  on  the  Red  Mare's  Back*  Illustrated 
by  Julie  Downing.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1992. 
ISBN  0-531-08591-0.  48p.  4-7. 

In  a  northern  land  where  the  winter  days  are  short  and  snow  is 
deep,  the  troll  people  have  stolen  a  girl's  little  brother.  With  only 
her  brave  heart  and  her  carved  red  wooden  horse,  the  little  girl 
sets  out  to  rescue  him.  When  the  beloved  toy  becomes  a  real 
horse  for  one  night,  the  girl  has  a  champion  that  can  travel  over 
snow  and  distract  the  trolls.  Julie  Downing's  paintings  turn  the 
traditional  Swedish  Dalarna  Horse  into  a  spirited  steed. 

6.14  Lindbergh,  Anne.  Travel  Far,  Pay  No  Fare.  HarperCollins,  1992. 
ISBN  0-06-021776-6.  201p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Son  of  a  famous  children's  book  author,  Owen  Noonan  prefers 
TV  and  their  quiet  Boston  life  to  reading.  But  now  his  mother  is 
marrying  Uncle  Jack  in  Vermont,  and  Owen  is  about  to  become 
big  brother  to  an  avid  reader,  nine-year-old  Parsley.  Parsley's 
plans  for  putting  the  wedding  asunder  include  the  use  of  a 
magical  bookmark  that  delivers  on  its  promise  to  "Travel  far, 
pay  no  fare."  Anne  Lindbergh  interweaves  characters  and  pets 
across  literary  selections  in  thought-provoking  ways. 

6.15  Mahy,  Margaret.  The  Dragon  of  an  Ordinary  Family  Illustrated 
by  Helen  Oxenbury.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN 
0-8037-1062-3.  42p.  4-8. 

The  Belsakis  are  an  ordinary  family  who  live  in  an  ordinary 
house  on  an  ordinary  street.  Then,  to  prove  he  is  not  a  fuddy- 
duddy,  Mr.  Belsaki  buys  an  extraordinary  pet  for  his  son,  Or- 
lando. As  in  Steven  Kellogg's  The  Mysterious  Tadpole,  the  new  pet 


198 


Fantasy 


quickly  outgrows  his  surroundings.  Luckily,  though,  dragons 
can  fly,  and  so  this  pet  takes  all  the  Belsakis  for  a  lovely  vacation 
on  the  Isles  of  Magic.  Bowlers,  umbrellas,  and  British  breakfast 
fare  cue  where  the  story  was  originally  published. 

6.16  Morgan,  Helen.  The  Witch  Doll.  Viking  Penguin,  1992,  ISBN 
0-670-84285-0. 143p.  8-12. 

The  curious  work  bag  that  bounces  from  the  junkman's  cart  has 
a  doll  inside — a  wooden  doll  with  shiny  black  hair  and  a  trans- 
fixing, evil  gaze.  For  Linda,  who  finds  the  doll,  it  becomes  the 
centerpiece  of  an  unfolding  story  that  moves  between  the  pres- 
ent and  the  past  to  explain  the  origin  of  the  doll  and  its  powers 
to  transform  through  witchcraft.  Heroine  Linda  is  a  plucky  sort 
who  makes  for  effective  contrast  with  the  threats  around  her. 

6.17  PacovskS,  Kveta  (translated  by  Anthea  Bell).  The  Little  Flower 
King.  Illustrated  by  Kveta  PacovskS.  Picture  Book  Studio/Mi- 
chael Neugebauer  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-88708-221-1.  32p.  4-8 
(est.). 

Readers  peering  through  a  clear  dust  jacket  and  then  through  a 
colorfully  framed  cutout  in  the  covers  will  see  from  the  front  a 
solitary  king,  but  from  the  back  they  will  see  a  king  and  queen. 
Between  the  covers  is  the  tale  of  a  princess  who  is  found  in  a 
tulip  that  the  king  planted  in  his  own  palace  garden.  This  mod- 
ern, vibrantly  colored,  mixed-media,  playful,  humorous,  and 
sometimes-puzzling  fairy  tale  comes  from  the  imagination  of 
Czech  artist  Kveta  PacovskS,  the  1992  Hans  Christian  Andersen 
medalist. 

6.18  Pendergraft,  Patricia.  The  Legend  of  Daisy  Flowerdew.  Phi- 
lomel Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-22176-X.  190p.  10  and  up. 

After  Granny  Henry  passes  away,  Daisy  goes  to  live  with  her 
real  mother,  Jesse.  But  Daisy  is  quiet  and  perceived  as  being 
different.  She  finds  solace  in  two  magical  paper  dolls.  When 
Jesse  and  her  husband  arrange  Daisy's  marriage  to  money-seek- 
ing Elmer  Goots,  Daisy  disappears  with  the  help  of  her  two 
magical  friends.  The  town  of  Vineyard  Flats  searches  for  a  way 
to  explain  the  mysterious  events  surrounding  the  legend  of 
Daisy  Flowerdew. 

6.19  Silverman,  Maida.  The  Magic  Well.  Illustrated  by  Manuel  Boix. 
Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-617- 
67885-X.  32p.  4-8. 


244 


Adventure  and  Magic 


199 


Meeting  the  fairy  queen  at  a  magic  well,  Janet  willingly  goes 
with  her  to  the  kingdom  of  the  fairies,  leaving  behind  only  a 
single  rose  as  a  sign  to  her  mother  that  she  is  well.  When  Janet 
asks  to  return  to  her  mother,  she  finds  herself  a  captive  of  the 
fairies.  Only  through  her  own  clever  efforts  and  her  mother's 
love  is  Janet  finally  saved.  Manuel  Boix's  delicate  and  detailed 
paintings  complement  the  magic  of  a  tale  inspired  by  an  ancient 
ballad. 

6.20  Turner,  Ann.  Rosemary's  Witch.  Harper  Collins/ Charlotte  Zolo- 
tow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-026128-5. 164p.  10-12. 

When  her  family  moves  to  an  old  New  England  farmhouse, 
nine-year-old  Rosemary  looks  forward  to  making  the  house  her 
home  and  establishing  her  own  identity.  But  a  150-year-old 
witch  who  lived  in  the  house  as  a  young  girl  threatens  Rose- 
mary's plans,  and  the  Morgenthau  family  faces  the  possiblity  of 
forfeiting  their  dreams.  In  the  end,  Rosemary  gives  the  witch  the 
love  that  she  needs,  and  as  a  result,  Rosemary  brings  peace  to 
the  New  England  countryside.  Understanding  and  personal  dis- 
covery are  woven  into  this  eerie  tale  filled  with  mystery  and 
witchcraft. 

6*21  Van  Allsburg,  Chris.  The  Widow's  Broom.  Illustrated  by  Chris 
Van  Allsburg.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-64051-2.  32p. 
8  and  up  (est.). 

A  witch  makes  an  unexpected  stop  when  her  broom  loses  its 
power  to  stay  aloft  right  over  Widow  Shaw's  garden.  Under  the 
widow's  tender  care,  the  witch  recovers  from  the  fall,  but  she 
leaves  her  broom  behind.  Not  totally  worn-out,  the  broom 
proves  useful  to  the  widow.  It  chops  wood,  mops  floors,  feeds 
chickens,  and  even  plays  the  piano.  But  suspicious  neighbor 
Spivey  accuses  the  broom  of  devilment  and  says  that  it  must  go. 
Surrealistic  images  in  textured  sepia  capture  the  magic,  but  the 
action  sequence  is  never  far  from  a  smile. 

6.22  Yolen,  Jane.  The  Dragon's  Boy.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN 
0-06-026790-9. 120p.  8-13  (est.). 

In  this  original  King  Arthur  story,  the  young  orphan,  Artos,  has 
trouble  becoming  a  part  of  castle  life.  Then  he  finds  a  dark  cave, 
home  of  a  wise  old  dragon,  who  helps  him,  with  the  aid  of  a 
magical  sword,  become  friends  with  Lancelot  and  other  young 
men  at  the  castle.  As  Artos  gains  wisdom,  he  also  learns  that  his 
real  name  is  Artos  Pendragon  and  that  he  is  the  son  of  Merlin- 


ER?C 


24;" 


200 


Fantasy 


nus,  the  old  apothecary  who  is  also  the  wise  dragon  in  disguise. 
Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

Animal  Fantasy 

6.23  Anderson,  Wayne.  Dragon.  Illustrated  by  Wayne  Anderson.  Si- 
mon and  Schuster/Green  Tiger  Press,  1992.  ISBN  0-671-78397-1. 
32p.  6-10  (est.). 

When  a  precious  egg  drops  from  the  sky,  the  mother  screams, 
but  it  is  too  late.  And  so,  deep  within  the  sea,  comforted  by 
fishes,  a  newborn  creature  hatches.  "Where  is  my  mother?"  and 
"What  am  I?"  he  asks.  In  his  search  for  his  kind,  the  creature 
discovers  that  he  shares  traits  with  fish,  dragonflies,  birds, 
snakes,  and  crocodiles.  But  it  takes  a  child  who  reads  to  know 
the  creature's  identity  and  to  steer  him  safely  home.  Muted 
greens  interpret  the  wrenching  despair  of  a  lost  dragon. 

6.24  Asch,  Frank.  Dear  Brother.  Illustrated  by  Vladimir  Vagin.  Scho- 
lastic Hardcover  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-590-43107-2.  32p.  6-9. 

Joey  and  Marvin  discover  a  bundle  of  letters  in  the  attic,  illus- 
trated with  "interesting  pictures."  All  night  the  two  mice  read 
the  correspondence  between  their  great-great-uncles,  Timothy, 
who  stayed  in  the  country,  and  Henry,  who  settled  in  the  city. 
Affectionate  letters  recount  the  milestones  of  the  brothers7  years 
apart  and  memories  shared,  and  ingeniously  record  urban  and 
rural  lifestyles  of  the  past.  Paintings  in  dyes,  gouache,  and  wa- 
tercolors  neatly  frame  the  action  opposite  the  actual  letters. 

6.25  Ashabranner,  Brent.  I'm  in  the  Zoo,  Too!  Illustrated  by  Janet 
Stevens.  Cobblehill  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-525-65002-4.  28p.  4-S 
(est). 

Burl  the  squirrel  lives  at  the  the  zoo  but  not  in  the  zoo.  Curious 
about  the  difference,  which  his  mother  assures  him  is  important, 
Burl  sets  out  to  find  the  answer.  Although  all  his  animal  friends 
fail  to  explain  the  distinction,  Burl  discovers  it  when  he  unwarily 
decides  to  perform  in  a  cage.  Activity-filled,  detailed  watercolor 
paintings  make  the  book  "readable"  by  all  ages. 

6.26  Baker,  Keith.  Who  Is  the  Beast?  Illustrated  by  Keith  Baker.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich,  1990.  ISBN  0-15-296057-0.  32p.  3-7. 

"The  beast,  the  beast!"  Smaller  jungle  animals  flee  the  beastly 
tiger  whose  tiger  parts  are  revealed  one-by-one  in  lush  Henri 
Rousseau-like  paintings,  set  against  chantable,  rhyming  text. 


24o 


Animal  Fantasy 


201 


"The  beast?"  thinks  the  tiger.  "I  see  no  beast.  I  just  see  me." 
Gently,  he  matches  each  of  his  fearsome  characteristics  against 
those  of  the  jungle  creatures,  helping  everyone  to  discover  the 
commonalities  of  nature. 

6.27  Barasch,  Marc  Ian.  No  Plain  Pets.  Illustrated  by  Henrik 
Drescher.  HarperCollins,4991.  ISBN  0-06-022473-8.  36p.  4-«. 

In  vibrantly  illustrated  rhyming  text,  a  child  muses  about  the  pet 
he  wants.  "I  don't  want  one  that's  plain — /  Some  dumb  Puff  or 
Fluff  /  With  a  parakeet  brain."  Maybe  a  big,  black  gorilla,  an 
electric  eel,  or  a  jungle  snake.  But  the  main  thing  is,  as  with  all 
good  pet  owners,  the  pet  will  be  loved.  Illustrations  are  stylized, 
quirky,  and  crowded  with  figures,  doodles,  and  textures. 

6.28  Birchman,  David  F.  Brother  Billy  Bronto's  Bygone  Blues  Band. 
Illustrated  by  John  O'Brien.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-688-10424-X.  32p.  5  and  up. 

"There  was  Rex  the  King  Tyrone  /  on  the  slide  trombone  /  and 
Brother  Billy  on  the  bass.  /  There  was  a  mean  /  allosaurus 
saxophonist  /  nicknamed  Lizard  Lips  Grace."  Long  ago,  dino- 
saur Dixieland  could  be  heard  on  Basin  Street.  But  because  of 
demand  "from  throughout  the  land,"  the  beasts  take  an  ill-fated 
train  ride  which  lands  the  blues  "in  a  pool  of  ooze."  Dappled 
watercolors  on  ink  drawings  enliven  the  musical  mood. 

6.29  Blackwood,  Mary.  Derek  the  Knitting  Dinosaur.  Illustrated  by 
Kerry  Argent.  Carolrhoda  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-87614-400-8. 32p. 
3-8  (est). 

Derek  is  more  green  and  more  gentle  than  his  dinosaur  brothers, 
Fang  and  Fearless.  Although  a  part  of  Derek  wants  to  look  and 
act  more  like  a  real  dinosaur,  Derek  prefers  knitting  to  roaring 
about.  Derek's  knit  products  stockpile  until  brightly  patterned 
sweaters,  socks,  vests,  mittens,  scarves,  and  pants  overflow  his 
stone  house.  And  then  something  strange  happens.  The  world 
becomes  colder,  and  fierce  dinosaurs  need  woolly  things.  Expan- 
sive watercolored  figures  accompany  the  rhyming  text. 

6.30  Breathed,  Berkeley.  The  Last  Basselope:  One  Ferocious  Story. 
Illustrated  by  Berkeley  Breathed.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
316-10761-1.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

Cartoonist  Berkeley  Breathed  advises  in  his  second  book: 
"Best  results  will  be  obtained  when  read  in  an  open,  sunny 
meadow. . . .  Under  no  conditions  should  a  television  be  in  the 


247 


202 


Fantasy 


vicinity/'  Airbrushed  backgrounds  and  vibrant  surface  colors 
add  to  the  adventure  of  Opus,  the  Great  and  Famous  Discoverer, 
who,  with  his  team  of  'Volunteers''  (Milquetoast,  Ronald-Ann, 
and  Bill  the  Cat)  searches  for  the  Last  Great  Bassclope— of  razor 
horn  and  slobbery  fang.  But  the  Basselope  is  different  from 
expected,  and  needs  protection  from  thundering  hordes  of  me- 
dia. 

6.31  Brett,  Jan.  Berlioz  the  Bean  Illustrated  by  Jan  Brett.  G.  P.  Put- 
nam's Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-22248-0. 32p.  4^8. 

Inspiration  for  Jan  Brett's  bass-playing  bear  came  both  from  the 
nineteenth-century  composer  Hector  Berlioz  and  from  her  own 
double-bass-playing  husband  who,  like  Berlioz  the  bear,  once 
noticed  a  loud  buzz  in  his  bass.  The  buzzing  so  distracts  Berlioz 
the  bear  that  he  drives  the  orchestra's  bandwagon  into  a  large 
hole  in  the  road.  The  temperamental  mule  pulling  the  wagon 
refuses  to  budge  until  an  angry  bee  persuades  the  mule  to  get 
moving.  Elaborately  detailed  Bavarian  scenes  include  embroi- 
dered costumes,  painted  carts  and  cottages,  and  Brett's  trade- 
mark borders,  foreshadowing  the  town  in  preparation  for  the 
gala  ball  at  which  Berlioz  is  to  perform. 

6.32  Brown,  Marc.  Arthur  Babysits.  Illustrated  by  Marc  Brown.  Lit- 
tle, Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-11293-3.  32p.  4-8 
(est.). 

Good-humoredly,  Arthur  agrees  to  baby-sit  for  the  terrible  Tib- 
bie twins  while  their  grandmother  is  out.  Everyone,  especially 
his  sister  D.  W.,  warns  him  that  the  Tibbie  twins  are  trouble. 
Dressed  in  cowboy  suits  and  brandishing  firearms,  the  twins 
torment  Arthur  with  the  stereotypic  baby-sitter's  initiation  rites, 
including  tying  him  to  a  chair.  Despite  D.  W.'s  continuing  phone 
calls  with  advice,  Arthur  figures  out  for  himself  the  best  baby- 
sitting trick  of  all — a  good  storytime. 

6.33  Brown,  Marc.  Arthur  Meets  the  President  Illustrated  by  Marc 
Brown.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-316-11265- 
8. 30p.  4-8  (est.). 

When  Arthur's  class  enters  a  national  essay  contest  on  "How  I 
Can  Help  to  Make  America  Great,"  Arthur  wins,  and  his  entire 
class  is  invited  to  attend  a  special  ceremony  at  the  White  House. 
Everyone  is  excited  except  Arthur,  who  must  recite  his  speech 
from  memory  before  the  president.  In  the  Rose  Garden,  his  note- 


ERIC 


243 


Animal  Fantasy 


203 


cards  scatter;  Arthur  panics  and  forgets  his  speech.  But  resource- 
ful sister  D.  W.  comes  to  his  rescue  with  an  innovative  cue  card. 

634  Brown,  Marc.  Arthur's  Pet  Business.  Illustrated  by  Marc  Brown. 
Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-316-11262-3.  30p. 
4-8. 

Wanting  a  new  puppy,  Arthur  opens  his  own  pet  business  to 
show  his  family  his  "responsible"  side.  But  when  business 
booms,  Arthur  finds  himself  baby-sitting  a  myriad  of  animals, 
one  of  which  suddenly  disappears.  In  the  satisfying  end,  Arthur 
finds  the  missing  pet  and  is  rewarded  with  one  of  her  new 
puppies.  Fourteenth  in  the  Arthur  series,  this  adventure  humor- 
ously invites  readers  both  to  laugh  and  to  think  about  responsi- 
bility. 

6.35  Browne,  Anthony.  Bear  Goes  to  Town.  Illustrated  by  Anthony 
Browne.  Doubleday,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-26525-5. 32p.  3-6. 

Like  Harold  with  his  purple  crayon,  Bear  has  a  magic  pencil. 
Traveling  to  town,  Bear  meets  a  companionable  cat  and  imme- 
diately draws  Cat  something  to  eat.  But  when  Cat  is  captured  by 
the  animal  patrol,  Bear  draws  roller  skates  to  chase  the  van,  a 
ladder  to  reach  Cat's  "cell,"  and  a  saw  to  remove  the  bars.  Bear 
can  even  draw  a  door  to  release  all  the  animals,  banana  skins  to 
aid  their  escape,  and  a  rolling  pastoral  setting  for  their  happy 
home. 

6.36  Browne,  Anthony.  I  Like  Books.  Illustrated  by  Anthony  Browne. 
Alfred  A.  Knopf/ Dragonfly  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-94186-1. 
18p.  3-7  (est.). 

An  adorable  chimp  announces  the  fact  that  he  likes  books.  In  ten 
simple  sentences  he  lists  his  favorite  kinds  of  books.  They  range 
from  funny  books  to  books  about  dinosaurs  to  strange  books. 
With  each  declaration,  the  illustration  reflects  the  book  genre. 

6.37  Bucknall,  Caroline.  One  Bear  in  the  Hospital.  Illustrated  by 
Caroline  Bucknall.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN 
0-8037-0847-5.  30p.  3-6. 

Caroline  Bucknall's  bouncing  bears  and  the  rhyming,  rhythmic 
text  that  accompanied  them  in  two  previous  books  return  for 
more  read-along  fun.  This  time,  Ted  Bear  has  a  bicycle  accident, 
and  although  he  is  doubtful  about  a  hospital  stay,  he  receives 
tender  care  in  the  "cubs"  wing.  At  home  again,  Ted  is  back  in  the 


ERIC 


249 


204 


Fantasy 


races — this  time  in  a  wheelchair  with  his  broken  leg.  Black  ink 
and  crayon-like  shades  give  touchable  texture  to  the  bears. 

638  Carlson,  Nancy.  Take  lime  to  Relax!  Illustrated  by  Nancy 
Carlson.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-83287-1.  32p.  2-6 
(est). 

The  not-so-subtle  message  in  Nancy  Carlson's  picture  book  is 
that  families  overschedule  their  lives.  With  computer  classes, 
aerobics  classes,  cake  decorating  classes,  and  dance  classes,  the 
Beaver  family  is  always  on  the  go.  "Until  one  morning ...  it  was 
snowing  like  crazy."  While  snowbound,  the  family  tells  stories, 
sings,  builds  a  fire,  and  pops  corn.  When  the  snowplow  finally 
makes  its  way  through,  the  family  stays  put.  Paired  with  the 
rhyming  text  are  warm  home  scenes  that  show  Beavers  in  robes 
and  pajamas  taking  some  time  to  relax. 

6.39  Carlson,  Nancy.  A  Visit  to  Grandma's*  Illustrated  by  Nancy 
Carlson.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-0670-83288-X.  32p.  4-8 
(est). 

As  Tina  and  her  parents  plan  a  holiday  visit  to  Grandma's  new 
Florida  condominium,  they  imagine  her  knitting  by  the  fire  and 
baking  her  special  Thanksgiving  pies.  But  Grandma  has 
changed!  Now  she  wears  lavender  pants,  loud  jewelry,  and  pink 
sunglasses.  Grandma  drives  a  sports  car,  takes  aerobics  classes, 
plays  charades  until  midnight,  buys  her  pies,  and  makes  reser- 
vations for  Thanksgiving  dinner.  At  first  wary,  Una  and  her 
parents  begin  to  loosen  up.  Nancy  Carlson's  scenes  are  Florida- 
bright,  and  her  beaver  characters  are  amusing. 

6.40  Cazet,  Denys.  Daydreams.  Illustrated  by  Denys  Cazet.  Orchard 
Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08481-7.  32p. 
4-7. 

All  the  little  animals  in  Miss  Williams's  class  love  her  very 
dearly.  Even  so,  on  one  blustery  day,  they  can't  stop  the  invasion 
of  daydreams.  Imaginations  create  desert  heroes,  threatening 
dinosaurs,  and  even  giant  snack  foods.  Miss  Williams  under- 
stands. She  reads  a  story  that  feeds  daydreams.  ''Wishes  and 
hopes  travel  with  daydreams,"  she  says.  By  the  close  of  day, 
Miss  Williams  has  some  daydreams  of  her  own  about  the  chil- 
dren's futures.  Half-tone  watercolors  and  placid  faces  give  a 
sweet-dreams  flavor. 


ERIC 


250 


Animal  Fantasy 


205 


6.41  Cazet,  Denys.  Mother  Night  Illustrated  by  Denys  Cazet  Or- 
chard Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08430-2. 32p.  3-6. 

With  a  simple,  poetic  story  line  that  traces  a  cycle  from  dusk  to 
dawn,  animal  parents  put  their  children  to  bed  following  famil- 
iar routines,  and  then  lovingly  awaken  them  in  the  morning. 
Denys  Cazet's  watercolor  and  pencil  illustrations  in  soft  shades 
of  blue,  green,  and  pink  create  the  enchanting  world  of  animal 
dreams.  This  story  may  comfort  young  children  who  have  night- 
time fears. 

6.42  Cazet,  Denys.  Never  Spit  on  Your  Shoes.  Illustrated  by  Denys 
Cazet.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531- 
08447-7.  26p.  4-6. 

Mother  listens  as  Arnie  describes  the  hardships  that  he  encoun- 
tered during  his  first  day  in  first  grade:  sitting  at  a  desk,  finding 
the  "boys'  room,"  and  nostalgically  watching  the  kindergarten 
bus  pull  away.  But  Arnie  also  explains  the  joys  of  making  a  new 
friend,  determining  classroom  rules,  drawing  pictures  with  new 
crayons,  and  counting  to  sixteen.  Told  with  cartoon-like  style, 
this  is  a  book  for  waylaying  first-grade  fears  and  preparing  for 
the  first  day  of  school. 

6.43  Chambless,  Jane.  Tucker  and  the  Bear.  Illustrated  by  Jane  Cham- 
bless.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN 
0-671-67357-2.  36p.  4-8  (est.). 

Tucker  lives  alone  on  the  edge  of  the  woods,  reading,  drawing, 
and  enjoying  his  daydreams.  When  a  bear  joins  Tucker  for  the 
winter  in  exchange  for  helping  with  the  housework,  Tucker  soon 
finds  that  he  has  bargained  for  trouble  along  with  the  bear's 
companionship.  But  when  the  bear  leaves,  Tucker  discovers  the 
loneliness  of  a  lost  friendship,  and  he  welcomes  the  bear's  return 
with  heartfelt  gratitude.  Detail-filled  illustrations  make  this 
story  even  more  endearing. 

6.44  Charles,  Donald.  Paddy  Pig's  Poems:  A  Story  about  an  Amus- 
ing Fellow  and  His  Friends.  Illustrated  by  Donald  Charles. 
Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-671- 
67081-6. 27p.  5-10  (est). 

Paddy  Pig,  a  literary  individualist,  writes  delightful  and,  at  first 
glance,  predictable  verse.  However,  at  the  end  of  the  final  line  of 
each  poem,  Paddy  inserts  a  nonrhyming  word.  When  Paddy's 
conventional  friends  criticize  his  unusual  style,  Paddy  sends 


25 1 


206 


Fantasy 


6*45 


6*46 


6*47 


648 


them  home.  Young  readers  and  writers  may  want  to  try  some 
unconventional  writing  of  their  own. 

Cherry,  Lynne.  Archie,  Follow  Me*  Illustrated  by  Lynne  Cherry. 
Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44647-8.  32p.  4-6. 

Richly  detailed  pen-and-ink  and  watercolor  illustrations  of  an 
adventuresome  tabby  cat,  Archie,  and  his  devoted  mistress  illu- 
minate this  first-person  narrative.  According  to  his  young  mis- 
tress, Archie  is  there  at  wake-up  time,  follows  her  around  the 
house  until  she  leaves  for  school,  and  is  ready  for  their  afternoon 
adventures  in  the  woods  after  she  returns  from  school.  But  after 
dark,  the  roles  reverse,  and  Archie  is  the  leader,  offering  a  world 
where  one  can  see  the  night  "through  a  cat's  eyes." 

Chorao,  Kay.  The  Cherry  Pie  Baby*  Illustrated  by  Kay  Chorao. 
E.  P.  Dutton,  1989.  ISBN  0-525-4435-1.  27p.  4-7  (est.). 

Annie,  an  only  child,  wants  a  baby  brother  in  the  worst  way,  so 
she  strikes  a  bargain  with  a  newfound  friend.  She  offers  young 
Beau  five  pies  from  her  father's  wagon  in  exchange  for  Beau's 
baby  brother,  Claude.  After  sneaking  Claude  home,  Annie's  fan- 
tasies about  baby  brothers  begin  to  fade  as  an  inconsolable 
Claude  ruins  her  toys,  breaks  her  tea  set,  and  wails  continuously. 
When  Papa  discovers  this  unexpected  guest,  Annie  must  return 
little  Claude  to  his  family.  Kay  Chorao's  portrayal  of  an  only 
child's  desires,  told  with  dog  characters,  rings  true. 

Conly,  Jane  Leslie.  R-T,  Margaret,  and  the  Rats  of  NIMH*  Illus- 
trated by  Leonard  Lubin.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06- 
021364-7.  260p.  9-12. 

When  Margaret  and  Artie  (R-T)  get  lost  in  the  woods,  they 
stumble  upon  a  secret  colony  of  superintelligent  rats.  With  the 
help  of  Christopher  and  the  rest  of  the  famous  rats  of  NIMH, 
who  first  appeared  in  Robert  O'Brien's  Newbery  Award-win- 
ning Mrs.  Frisby  and  the  Rats  of  NIMH,  the  two  humans  survive 
and  learn  a  lot  about  life  in  the  process.  But  home  again,  the 
children  face  difficulties  in  keeping  their  promise  not  to  reveal 
the  rats'  whereabouts.  Unpredictable  events  and  disclosures  of 
secrets  help  build  to  an  exciting  climax.  The  second  sequel  of 
superb  fantasy  novels  by  the  daughter  of  the  late  O'Brien  con- 
tinues to  capture  children's  hearts  and  imaginations. 

Conover,  Chris.  Mother  Goose  and  the  Sly  Fox*  Illustrated  by 
Chris  Conover.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1989.  ISBN  0-374- 
35072-8.  28p.  4-8. 


ERLC 


252 


Animal  Fantasy 


207 


In  the  rich  Dutch  decor  of  this  retelling,  the  setting  is  detailed 
with  fine  lace,  windmills,  tulips,  and  Delft  pottery  and  tiles. 
Rather  than  a  preyed-upon  passel  of  lambs,  the  innocents  are 
adorable,  lace-ruffed  goslings  and  their  caregiver  mouse. 
Mother  Goose,  in  fine  winged  cap,  returns  home  to  discover  that 
six  of  her  children  have  been  flummoxed  by  the  fox.  But  clever 
Mrs.  Goose  knows  how  to  substitute  stones  for  children  in  a 
sack.  Chris  Conover's  version  doesn't  allow  the  goslings  to  get 
consumed,  and  the  fox  learns  his  lesson. 

6.49  Cushman,  Doug.  Camp  Big  Paw.  Illustrated  by  Doug  Cushman. 
Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-021368-X.  64p.  6-8. 

It's  summer,  and  the  campers  have  arrived  at  Camp  Big  Paw. 
When  the  contests  for  camping  badges  begin,  newcomer  Cyril 
the  Cat  and  his  cabin  mates,  Ben  and  Obie,  run  into  trouble  with 
the  camp  bully,  Nigel  Snootbutter.  In  the  end,  Cyril,  with  Nigel's 
unsuspecting  help,  "uses  his  head"  to  win  a  very  special  badge. 
Colorful  cartoon-like  illustrations  complement  this  I  Can  Read 
chapter  book  about  a  group  of  animals'  misadventures  at  sum- 
mer camp. 

6.50  Cushman,  Doug.  Possum  Stew.  Illustrated  by  Doug  Cushman. 
E.  P.  Dutton,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44566-8.  32p.  3-6. 

Possum  likes  nothing  better  than  tricking  folks.  Finally,  though, 
he  tricks  Bear  and  Gator  one  time  too  many.  Determined  to  have 
the  last  laugh,  Bear  and  Gator  invite  Possum  to  dinner,  and 
Possum  himself  almost  ends  up  in  the  stew  pot.  Both  the  text, 
written  in  the  tradition  of  the  trickster  tale,  and  the  illustrations 
will  keep  children  laughing. 

6.51  Delacre,  Lulu.  Time  for  School,  Nathan!  Illustrated  by  Lulu 
Delacre.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41942-0. 
32p.  3-7. 

Eager  to  start  school,  Nathan  the  elephant  explains  to  his  best 
friend  Nicholas  the  mouse  that  school  is  something  that  he, 
Nathan,  must  do  alone.  But  Nicholas,  not  easily  dissuaded, 
stows  away  in  Nathan's  schoolbag.  At  school,  Nicholas  makes 
mischief — singing  during  storytime,  upsetting  things,  and  dis- 
rupting Nathan's  budding  friendships.  When  Nathan  acts  glum, 
Nicholas  admits  his  fear  of  losing  his  best  friend.  Reassurances 
and  rebuilding  contribute  to  the  gentle  theme.  In  the  muted- 
toned  illustrations,  Nathan's  "elephantness"  seems  a  perfectly 
normal  classroom  occurrence. 


253 


208 


Fantasy 


6.52  dePaola,  Tomie.  Bon  jour,  Mr*  Satie.  Illustrated  by  Tomie  de- 
Paola.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21782-7.  28p.  5-9. 

Tomie  dePaola  slyly  advises  that  if  anyone  in  his  story  looks  or 
sounds  familiar,  he's  "not  the  least  bit  surprised."  The  range  of 
players  who  appear  in  Gertrude's  1920  Paris  salon  will  certainly 
be  familiar  to  adults — Zelda  Fitzgerald,  Ernest  Hemingway, 
Ezra  Pound,  and  Isadora  Duncan,  to  name  only  a  few  whose 
countenances  are  identified  by  first  name  on  the  book  jacket.  The 
debonaire  cat,  Uncle  Satie,  must  judge  an  exhibition  of  the  paint- 
ings of  Henri  (Matisse)  and  Pablo  (Picasso),  and  his  diplomacy 
ends  the  artists'  feud.  Vibrant  teal,  orange,  and  purple  illustra- 
tions dominate  the  tale. 

6.53  dePaola,  Tomie.  Haircuts  for  the  Woolseys.  Too  Many  Hopkins. 
Illustrated  by  Tomie  dePaola.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  lOp. 

2-  5. 

Spring  arrives  at  Fiddle-Dee-Dee  Farms  in  two  warm-hearted 
tales  illustrated  in  characteristic  Tomie  dePaola  style.  In  the  first 
book,  the  Woolseys,  a  family  of  sheep,  get  their  spring  haircuts. 
However,  when  a  cold  north  wind  blows  in,  leaving  the  bare- 
headed Woolseys  chilled,  Granny  saves  the  day  with  a  special 
surprise.  In  the  second  book,  when  all  fifteen  rabbit  children 
descend  upon  their  garden  to  plant  vegetables,  the  result  is  a 
muddy  mess.  So  Mommy  Hopkins  takes  charge  and  organizes 
her  brood  with  efficiency. 

6.54  dePaola,  Tomie.  Little  Grunt  and  the  Big  Egg:  A  Prehistoric 
Fairy  Tale.  Illustrated  by  Tomie  dePaola.  Holiday  House,  1990. 
ISBN  0-8234-0730-6. 30p.  4-8. 

When  Little  Grunt  finds  a  huge  egg  for  a  prehistoric  omelet,  no 
one  in  the  family  realizes  that  it  will  hatch  into  George,  a  lovable 
but  fast-growing  brontosaurus  pet.  But  growing  is  what  George 
seems  to  do  best,  and  soon  he  is  much  too  big  for  the  cave.  Little 
Grunt  is  distraught  over  turning  his  pet  out  into  the  wild.  Then 
a  powerful  volcanic  eruption  proves  how  handy  big  friends  can 
be.  Tomie  dePaola's  recognizable  flat,  jughead  characters  wear 
furs  and  winsome  expressions  against  softly  watercolored  set- 
tings. 

6.55  Donnelly,  Liza.  Dinosaur  Beach.  Illustrated  by  Liza  Donnelly. 
Scholastic/Lucas  Evans  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-42175-1,  32p. 

3-  7. 


Animal  Fantasy 


209 


Take  one  dinosaur-loving  boy  and  his  dog,  Bones,  add  the  dis- 
covery of  an  elasmosaurus  on  their  trip  to  the  beach,  and  you 
have  the  ingredients  for  an  adventure  sure  to  please  dinosaur 
fans.  Although  all  the  other  beach  visitors  rush  screeching  away, 
the  story  hero  simply  slips  onto  the  back  of  the  elasmosaurus 
and  is  whisked  away  to  Dinosaur  Beach.  There  other  friendly 
dinosaurs  jam  and  play  volleyball — and  even  build  a  sand 
sculpture  of  the  boy  and  his  dog. 

6.56  Dumbleton,  Mike.  Dial-a-Croc.  Illustrated  by  Ann  James.  Or- 
chard Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08545-7. 30p.  4-S  (est.). 

To  become  rich,  Vanessa  captures  a  crocodile  in  the  Australian 
outback.  "You  have  a  choice/'  she  tells  him.  "You  can  be  ten 
handbags  and  five  pairs  of  shoes,  or  you  can  help  me  make 
lots  of  money."  So  "Dial-a-Croc"  works  a  variety  of  jobs,  in- 
cluding Swim  Team  Scarer,  Ice  Crusher,  and  Ticket  Puncher. 
But  he  misses  home.  "You  have  a  choice,"  he  says  to  Vanessa. 
"You  can  be  my  breakfast ...  or  you  can  take  me  home."  Hu- 
morous illustrations  add  levity  to  an  exploitation  that  turns  to 
friendship. 

6.57  Dunbar,  Joyce.  Four  Fierce  Kittens.  Illustrated  by  Jakki  Wood. 
Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-590-45535-4. 32p.  2-6. 

Four  mischievous  kittens  set  out  for  some  excitement  on  the 
farm.  Pretending  to  be  tigers,  leopards,  and  lions,  the  kittens 
soon  learn  that  a  kitty  "meow"  is  not  nearly  as  frightening  as  a 
"cluck"  or  an  "oink"  or  a  "quack."  But  can  a  "meow"  scare  a 
puppy?  Indeed.  Four  fierce  kittens  make  a  puppy  "scat."  Water- 
color  paintings  illustrate  this  rhythmic,  repetitive  text. 

6.58  Ehlert,  Lois.  Circus.  Illustrated  by  Lois  Ehlert.  HarperCollins, 
1992.  ISBN  0-06-020252-1.  32p.  2-6  (est). 

A  border  of  stars  frames  the  circus-act  pages,  which  are  nar- 
rower than  the  book's  covers.  In  collages  bolder  than  even  Lois 
Ehlert  fans  have  come  to  expect,  each  vivid  circus  act  is  com- 
posed of  shapes  akin  to  a  child's  pegboard  game.  Electric-blue 
striped  Samu  the  Tiger  jumps  wildly  through  a  flaming  hoop 
against  glossy  black,  and  grass-green  goats  tumble  against 
fuschia.  Fluorescent,  geometric  graphics  make  for  an  atypical 
circus  of  marching  snakes,  leaping  lizards,  and  the  flying  Zuc- 
chinis. 


255 


210 


Fantasy 


6.59  Elzbieta.  Brave  Babette  and  Sly  Tom.  Illustrated  by  Elzbieta. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-8037-0633-2.  36p. 
4-8. 

Almost  immediately  after  the  birth  of  Babette  the  mouse  in  a 
blackbird's  nest  in  the  Luxembourg  Gardens,  her  mother  is 
chased  away  by  a  nasty  cat  named  Sly  Tom.  Fortunately,  the 
blackbird  adopts  Babette,  who  grows  up  to  be  such  a  feisty  little 
mouse  that  she  is  able  to  best  Sly  Tom.  Illustrations  are  textured 
backdrops  in  earth-gray  and  brown  overlaid  with  impressions 
of  trees  and  the  simply  drawn  animals. 

6.60  Emberley,  Michael.  Ruby.  Illustrated  by  Michael  Emberley.  Lit- 
tle, Brown,  1990.  ISBN  0-316-23643-8.  32p.  3-7  (est.). 

Ruby,  a  Red  Riding  Hood-like  mouse,  sets  off  in  her  red  cloak  to 
deliver  triple-cheese  pies  to  her  granny.  Although  Ruby's 
mother  warns  her  not  to  talk  to  strangers  (especially  cats),  Ruby 
is  defended  on  the  street  by  a  well-dressed,  whiskered  stranger 
when  a  grimy  reptile  accosts  her.  Like  the  wolf,  the  stranger 
races  ahead  to  Granny's  house — by  taxi  in  this  urban  tale.  But  a 
clever  Ruby  makes  a  quick  phone  call  to  ensure  a  satisfying, 
surprise  ending.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1991. 

6.61  Engel,  Diana.  Josephina  Hates  Her  Name.  Illustrated  by  Diana 
Engel.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07796-X.  32p.  4^8 
(est). 

Josephina  the  alligator  hates  her  name — she  thinks  it's  ugly, 
old-fashioned,  and  too  unusual.  When  she  plays  with  her 
friends,  she  even  suggests  that  they  trade  names,  but  no  one  ever 
wants  Josephina's  name.  Then,  Grandma  tells  Josephina  all 
about  the  remarkable  great-aunt  after  whom  she  is  named. 
When  Josephina  tells  the  story  to  her  friends,  they  are  more  than 
ready  to  trade  names,  but  Josephina  won't  hear  of  it. 

6.62  Ernst,  Lisa  Campbell.  When  Bluebell  Sang.  Illustrated  by  Lisa 
Campbell  Ernst.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-733561-5. 32p. 
5-7  (est). 

Farmer  Swenson  discovers  that  one  of  his  dairy  cows,  Bluebell, 
can  sing  beautifully.  After  performing  for  the  local  community, 
Bluebell  falls  victim  to  a  greedy  talent  agent,  Big  Eddie,  who 
takes  Swenson  and  Bluebell  on  tour  in  a  scheme  to  make  Blue- 
bell famous  and  himself  rich.  Dressed  in  the  latest  fashion,  Blue- 
bell is  indeed  a  success.  Although  she  is  a  trendsetter  wherever 


ERIC 


25o 


Animal  Fantasy 


211 


she  goes,  Bluebell  and  Swenson  are  homesick.  Finally,  they  de- 
vise a  clever  plan  to  return  home  to  the  farm  and  resume  a  life 
of  peace  and  anonymity. 

6.63  Geraghty,  Paul.  Over  the  Steamy  Swamp*  Illustrated  by  Paul 
Geraghty.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-15-200561-7.  32p.  3-6. 

A  steamy  swamp  is  the  setting  for  this  circular  cumulative  tale 
with  a  food  chain  theme.  A  mosquito  is  threatened  by  a  dragon- 
fly who  is  threatened  by  a  frog  who  is  threatened  by . . .  and  on 
and  on,  until  the  greatest  threat  of  all  appears— a  hunter,  who 
falls  prey  to  the  mosquito!  Exaggerated  actions  fill  the  swamp 
scenes  with  color  and  humor. 

6.64  Giffard,  Hannah.  Red  Fox.  Illustrated  by  Hannah  Giffard.  Dial 
Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0869-6.  25p.  4-8 
(est). 

Hungry  Red  Fox  sets  out  at  night  to  find  food  for  himself  and 
his  mate.  But  his  typical  hunting  routine  meets  with  unusual 
misfortune,  and  so  Red  Fox  must  brave  the  city  to  find  some- 
thing to  eat.  Returning  home  with  a  city-style  meal,  Red  Fox 
finds  that  he  now  has  a  few  more  mouths  to  feed.  Brightly 
colored  stylized  paintings,  highlighted  with  white,  illustrate  this 
nocturnal  adventure  of  a  determined  fox. 

6.65  Grossman,  Bill.  Tommy  at  the  Grocery  Store.  Illustrated  by  Vic- 
toria Chess.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-022409-6.  32p. 
3-7. 

Is  Tommy  the  Pig  a  potato?  Well,  he  does  have  eyes!  Or  maybe 
a  ruler?  After  all,  he  has  feet!  After  Tommy's  mother  inadver- 
tently leaves  him  at  the  grocery  store,  customers  mistakenly 
identify  him  as  various  grocery  items  and  whisk  him  home. 
Though  each  case  of  mistaken  identity  is  discovered  before  dis- 
asters occur,  Tommy's  predicaments  and  separation  may  be  dis- 
concerting for  very  young  children.  Victoria  Chess's  bright,  de- 
tailed watercolor  illustrations  bring  out  the  humor  of  Bill 
Grossman's  rhyming  text. 

6.66  Guarino,  Deborah.  Is  Your  Mama  a  Llama?  Illustrated  by  Steven 
Kellogg.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41387-2. 
32p.  4-7. 

In  a  rhyming  and  patterned  text,  a  curious  baby  llama  named 
Lloyd  asks  each  of  his  animal  friends  the  same  question:  "Is  your 


257 


212 


Fantasy 


mama  a  llama?"  The  friends,  in  turn,  give  Lloyd  clues  to  the 
identity  of  their  mamas.  In  the  end,  with  help  from  his  friend 
Llyn,  Lloyd  gets  the  answer  to  his  question  and  finds  his  own 
llama  mama.  Steven  Kellogg's  detail-rich  watercolor  illustra- 
tions capture  the  innocent  beauty  of  animal  mothers  and  their 
babies. 

6.67  Hawkins,  Colin,  and  Jacqui  Hawkins.  Crocodile  Creek:  The  Cry 
in  the  Night  Illustrated  by  Colin  Hawkins.  Doubleday,  1989. 
ISBN  0-385-24980-2.  30p.  3-8  (est.). 

On  his  houseboat,  Baby  Crocker  wakes  one  morning  out  of  sorts 
and  feeling  snappy.  Besides  crankiness,  his  teething  pains  make 
him  bite  off  a  table  leg  and  chew  up  a  life  preserver.  Baby  even 
chews  off  the  mooring  rope  of  the  houseboat,  and  he  and  the 
houseboat  float  off  alone  toward  Fatal  Falls.  But  it's  Gran  the 
windsurfer  to  the  rescue.  This  humorous  story  follows  Baby 
Crocker's  family  and  frenzies  in  cartoon  illustrations  and  dia- 
logue. 

6.68  Hayes,  Sarah.  This  Is  the  Bear  and  the  Scary  Night,  Illustrated 
by  Helen  Craig.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
316-35250-0.  24p.  3-6  (est.). 

"This  is  the  boy  who  forgot  his  bear  and  left  him  behind  in  the 
park  on  the  chair."  In  rhyming  text,  the  cumulative  story  un- 
folds. A  boy's  favorite  bear  is  forgotten  and  must  spend  the  night 
in  the  park.  The  poor  bear  is  swept  up  by  an  owl,  dropped  into 
a  pond,  rescued  by  a  trombone  player,  and  eventually  reunited 
with  his  young  owner.  Perky  drawings  are  shaded  with  faded- 
jeans  blues  and  park-bench  greens. 

6.69  Henkes,  Kevin.  Julius,  the  Baby  of  the  World.  Illustrated  by 
Kevin  Henkes.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08944-5. 
32p.  4-7  (est). 

Lilly's  excitement  about  the  new  baby  turns  to  jealousy  when 
her  brother  arrives  and  gets  lots  of  parental  attention.  Lilly  alter- 
nates between  ignoring  Baby  Julius  and  undermining  his  up- 
bringing. Over  his  mouse  crib,  she  scrambles  the  alphabet,  whis- 
pers "you're  ugly,"  and  tries  to  make  him  disappear.  But  when 
a  visiting  cousin  insults  Baby  Julius,  Lilly  rises  to  his  defense  and 
insists  that  Julius  is  "The  Baby  of  the  World."  Lilly's  mouse 
moods  are  hilarious,  recognizable,  and  captivating.  ALA  Notable 
Children's  Books,  1991. 


Animal  Fantasy 


213 


6.70  Himmelman,  John.  A  Guest  Is  a  Guest.  Illustrated  by  John  Him- 
melman.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44720-2. 
32p.  3-8  (est). 

"A  guest  is  a  guest  and  we  must  show  them  our  best/'  So  say  the 
Beanbucket  family  when  their  pigs  move  into  the  farmhouse 
with  them.  Because  the  pigs  are  accepted,  in  come  the  chickens. 
With  pigs  taking  over  the  kitchen,  and  hens  on  every  cushion, 
the  cows  and  horses  move  in.  Finally,  patient  Farmer  Bean- 
bucket  reaches  his  limit:  "Enough  is  enough/'  he  cries.  So — the 
animals  throw  the  Beanbuckets  out!  Charming  animals  make 
themselves  at  home  in  overstuffed  watercolor  comfort. 

6.71  Howe,  James.  Hot  Fudge.  Illustrated  by  Leslie  Morrill.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09701-4.  32p.  5  and  up. 

Harold,  the  Monroe  family's  large,  loquacious,  and  chocolate- 
loving  canine,  is  left  at  home  on  a  Saturday  morning  along  with 
a  pan  of  homemade  fudge.  But  Harold  is  not  alone.  Sharing  the 
household  are  the  Monroe's  other  pets:  Chester,  their  arrogant 
cat,  little  Howie,  the  dachshund,  and  Bunnicula,  the  vampire 
bunny  Soon  after  Chester  reads  in  the  morning  newspaper  that 
there  are  robbers  in  the  neighborhood,  the  fudge  is  missing. 
Harold,  Chester,  and  Howie  try  to  solve  the  crime. 

6.72  Hurd,  Thacher.  Blackberry  Ramble.  Illustrated  by  Thacher 
Hurd.  Crown,  1989.  ISBN  0-517-57105-6. 29p.  3-8  (est.). 

It  is  a  beautiful  day,  and  Mother  and  Father  Mouse  are  trying  to 
complete  their  spring  cleaning.  At  first,  Baby  Mouse  is  "just 
noodling  around,"  but  she  soon  gets  into  mischief.  The  patient 
parents  finally  give  up  their  cleaning  project  for  a  picnic  with 
Baby.  Mouse  antics  continue,  including  a  wild  ride  with  Baby 
Mouse  at  the  wheel,  and  a  splattering  fall  into  the  blackberry  pie. 
Thacher  Hurd's  bright  illustrations  will  make  any  reader  long 
for  a  spring  day  on  the  farm. 

6.73  Jacques,  Brian.  Mattimeo.  Illustrated  by  Gary  Chalk.  Philomel 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21741-X.  446p.  10  and  up. 

When  Slagar  the  Fox  and  his  evil  band  of  mercenaries  kidnap 
the  young  of  Redwall  Abbey  and  enslave  them  in  the  kingdom 
of  Malkariss,  warrior  mouse  Mathias  and  his  followers  must 
rescue  Redwall's  future  leaders.  Those  remaining  at  the  abbey 
face  an  equally  perilous  threat  from  General  Ironbeak  and  his 
gang  of  wicked  birds.  As  the  final  battle  begins,  the  warriors  find 


259 


214 


Fantasy 


new  strength,  and  Mattimeo,  son  of  Mathias,  fulfills  his  destiny. 
This  final  episode  in  the  Redwall  trilogy  finds  human-like  he- 
roes triumphing  over  evil 

6.74  Jorgensen,  Gail.  Crocodile  Beat.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Mullins. 
Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-748010-0.  32p.  1-6. 

Brilliant  tissue-paper  and  paint  collages  across  double-page 
spreads  display  hissing  snakes,  booming  elephants,  swishing 
birds,  chattering  monkeys,  splashing  ducks,  and  growling  bears 
"dancing  and  playing  and  stomping  their  feet/'  Roaring  King 
Lion,  shouldered  by  two  bears  on  his  bright  red  throne,  leads  the 
noisy  parade.  When  the  crowd  awakens  a  mean,  snapping 
crocodile,  King  Lion  steps  in  to  save  the  day.  Young  children  will 
enjoy  the  sing-song  text  and  the  subtle  expressions  on  the  faces 
of  the  abundant  animals. 

6.75  Joyce,  William.  Bently  and  Egg.  Illustrated  by  William  Joyce. 
HarperCollins/Laura  Geringer  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-020386- 
2. 28p.  3-8. 

Artistic  frog  Bently  Hopperton  is  entrusted  with  the  single  egg 
of  his  best  friend,  Kack  Kack,  when  the  duck  is  away.  Unlike 
Horton,  Bently  is  a  less-than-faithful  steward.  Because  the  egg  is 
bald  and  bare,  Bently  paints  it  in  dazzling  colors.  The  Easter-like 
egg  then  attracts  the  attention  of  a  boy  who  promptly  "eggnaps" 
it!  Poor  Bently  must  brave  all  sorts  of  hilarious  challenges  to 
retrieve  the  precious  egg.  Large-scale  watercolors  in  a  spring- 
green  palette  are  perfect  for  the  woodland  characters. 

6.76  Kalman,  Maira.  Ooh-La-La  (Max  in  Love).  Illustrated  by  Maira 
Kalman.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-84163-3.  32p.  8  and 
up. 

Max  Stravinsky,  the  millionaire  poet  dog,  takes  a  whirlwind  tour 
of  Paris,  where  he  loses  his  heart  to  the  beautiful  Crepes  Suzette. 
In  a  satiric  spoof  on  the  salon,  Maira  Kalman  gives  wit,  savoir 
faire,  and  a  touch  of  the  dramatic  to  his  cast:  Fritz  from  the  Ritz, 
Madame  Camembert,  Charlotte  Russe,  Peach  Melba,  and  Pierre 
Potpourri.  A  panoply  of  styles  moderne  (including  a  Blue  Suite 
in  salute  to  Picasso)  and  printing  which  flows  across  the  illustra- 
tions give  this  picture  book  for  older  readers  a  lighthearted  and 
energetic  style. 

6.77  Karlin,  Nurit.  Little  Big  Mouse.  Illustrated  by  Nurit  Karlin. 
HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-021608-5.  32p.  3-6  (est.). 


ERIC  2Fj() 


Animal  Fantasy 


215 


A  tiny  mouse  is  dissatisfied  with  his  size.  Everyone,  it  seems,  is 
bigger  than  he.  More  than  anything,  he  wants  to  be  really  BIG. 
With  knapsack  on  his  back,  he  sets  out  to  discover  how  to  get 
big.  Out  in  the  world,  he  meets  a  circus  elephant,  who  explains, 
"I  think  I  was  big  even  when  I  was  little."  Then  Mouse's  nose 
tickles,  and  a  tiny  flea  asks  how  Mouse  got  so  big.  Simple  text 
and  bold-stroke  illustrations  are  good  companions. 

6.78  Keller,  Holly.  The  New  Boy,  Illustrated  by  Holly  Keller.  Green- 
willow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-09828-2. 22p.  4-7  (est.). 

When  Milton  the  mouse  arrives  in  Miss  Higgins's  kindergarten 
class,  chaos  erupts.  He  puts  caterpillars  in  lunch  boxes,  knocks 
over  blocks,  and  eats  all  the  cherries  off  the  special  cupcakes  that 
Gregory  brings  for  a  snack.  Even  when  Milton  decides  to  be 
good,  things  don't  work  out  much  better.  When  a  new  boy 
arrives,  readers  will  enjoy  predicting  how  he  will  behave  and 
how  Milton  will  be  affected.  Holly  Keller's  simple  illustrations 
have  humor  that  will  engage  beginning  readers. 

6.79  Kettner,  Christine.  An  Ordinary  Cat.  Illustrated  by  Christine 
Kettner.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-023173-4.  26p.  6^10 
(est.). 

To  his  family,  William  is  an  ordinary  cat.  But  at  night,  William 
becomes  "extraordinary"  as  he  drives  a  cab,  delivers  important 
fares,  and  even  plays  in  a  band.  At  dawn,  William  returns  home 
and  resumes  his  ordinary  existence.  Bold-colored  cartoon-like 
drawings  illustrate  the  secret  nighttime  adventures  of  a  proper 
daytime  cat. 

6.80  King-Smith,  Dick.  Ace:  The  Very  Important  Pig.  Illustrated  by 
Lynette  Hemmant.  Crown,  1990.  ISBN  0-517-57833-6. 134p.  8-12 
(est). 

Marked  by  an  ace  of  clubs  on  his  side,  Ace  is  more  than  just  an 
average  pig.  As  Farmer  Tubbs  soon  discovers,  this  unusual 
great-grandson  of  Babe,  the  sheepherding  pig  whose  story  is 
told  in  Dick  King-Smith's  Babe:  The  Gallant  Pig,  not  only  can 
understand  human  speech,  but  he  also  likes  to  watch  television. 
After  Ace  appears  on  the  BBC,  he  becomes  a  celebrity  and  a 
"very  important  pig."  Set  in  the  English  countryside,  this  hu- 
morous animal  fantasy  is  filled  with  colorful  animal  characters 
that  children  will  enjoy  getting  to  know. 

6.81  King-Smith,  Dick.  Martin's  Mice.  Illustrated  by  Jez  Alborough. 
Crown,  1989.  ISBN  0-517-57113-7. 128p.  8-12. 


261 


216 


Fantasy 


Instead  of  hunting  mice  like  other  barn  cats,  Martin  adopts 
them.  In  a  bathtub-style  cage,  Martin  keeps  the  mouse  mother 
Drusilla  and  her  children,  caring  for  and  protecting  them.  But 
the  mice  request  their  freedom.  It  is  only  when  Martin  himself  is 
sold  and  kept  as  a  pet  in  a  city  apartment  that  he  comes  to 
understand  independence.  After  a  daring  escape,  Martin  returns 
to  the  farm  to  establish  a  true  friendship  with  Drusilla. 

6.82  King-Smith,  Dick,  compiler.  The  Animal  Parade:  A  Collection 
of  Stories  and  Poems.  Illustrated  by  Jocelyn  Wild.  Tambourine 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11375-3. 93p.  6  and  up. 

Dick  King-Smith  indicates  that  he  has  collected  his  favorite  ani- 
mal tales — some  comical,  some  dramatic,  some  frightening,  and 
some  even  tragic.  Along  with  fables  by  Aesop,  there  are  excerpts 
from  Wind  in  the  Willows,  Alice  in  Wonderland,  The  Jungle  Book,  The 
Tale  of  Jeremy  Fisher,  Black  Beauty,  and  White  Fang.  Sprinkled 
throughout  are  selections  from  the  author's  own  poems  and 
stories.  Illustrator  Jocelyn  Wild  has  given  the  animals  in  this 
collection  both  texture  and  feelings. 

6.83  Kraus,  Robert.  Phil  the  Ventriloquist  Illustrated  by  Robert 
Kraus;  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-07988-1.  32p.  3-7 
(est). 

Phil  the  rabbit  is  a  ventriloquist.  He  can  make  the  scrambled 
eggs  talk  and  the  telephone  ring.  His  parents  beg  him  to  use  a 
ventriloquist's  dummy  instead  of  making  chairs  say,  "Don't  sit 
on  me."  But  Phil  won't  listen.  He'd  rather  make  his  father's 
shoes  sing  and  his  mother's  hat  tell  jokes.  Then  one  day  a  bur- 
glar breaks  into  Phil's  house,  and  ventriloquism  saves  the  day. 
As  in  his  Spider  and  Daddy  Long  Ears  books,  Robert  Kraus's 
drawings  and  text  are  big,  bold,  and  simple. 

6.84  Kwitz,  Mary  DeBall.  Shadow  over  Mousehaven  Manor.  Illus- 
trated by  Stella  Ormai.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-590-42034-8. 128p.  7-11. 

When  Minabell  Mouse  receives  an  urgent  request  to  visit  her 
gravely  ill  Aunt  Pitty  Pat  in  their  ancestral  home,  Lvlinabell  must 
set  out  in  a  Christmas  Eve  snowstorm  to  Mousehaven  Manor. 
Despite  warnings  from  a  secret  agent  and  an  encounter  with  an 
evil  pack  of  rats,  the  courageous  mouse  continues  on  her  jour- 
ney, determined  to  rescue  her  aunt  and  her  family  home  from 
the  Prairie  Pirates,  a  dangerous  band  of  rodents.  With  the  help 
of  friends,  Minabell  and  her  aunt  foil  a  treacherous  plan  and 


ERIC 


262 


Animal  Fantasy 


217 


save  the  manor  and  the  state  of  Illinois  from  destruction.  Black- 
line  sketches  illustrate  this  animal  adventure  story. 

6.85  Kyte,  Dennis.  Zackary  Raffles.  Illustrated  by  Dennis  Kyte.  Dou- 
bleday,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-24653-6.  28p.  4-8  (est.). 

Like  all  young  mice  who  reach  the  age  of  six,  Zackary  Raffles  is 
eligible  to  join  the  Mouse  Soldiers,  Brave  and  True.  To  do  so,  he 
must  pass  three  tests:  walk  the  Rope  of  Courage,  solve  the  mys- 
terious riddle,  and  spend  the  night  standing  guard  on  Lookout 
Rock.  But  Zackary  is  afraid  of  the  dark— so  afraid  that  he  never 
sleeps  at  night  and  he  carries  a  lantern  in  the  daytime  in  case  the 
sun  goes  behind  a  cloud.  Humorous  watercolor  illustrations  will 
allow  comparisons  of  mouse-  and  human-scaled  objects.  Chil- 
dren who  share  Zackary's  fear  will  take  comfort  in  his  triumph. 

6.86  Le  Guin,  Ursula  K.  Catwings  Return.  Illustrated  by  S.  D.  Schin- 
dler.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531- 
08403-5.  48p.  6-10  (est.). 

In  this  sequel  to  Catwings,  Ursula  Le  Guin  continues  her  flying 
cat  fantasy  with  this  heartwarming  family-reunion  tale.  Now 
living  in  safety,  four  winged  tabby  cats,  perfectly  detailed  in  ink 
with  color  washes,  reminisce  about  their  mother  and  their  first 
home  in  the  city.  When  two  of  the  cats  decide  to  visit  their  alley 
birthplace,  they  discover  and  rescue  a  tiny  winged  kitten  from  a 
building  being  demolished.  Learning  the  kitten  is  their  sister, 
they  take  her  home  to  the  country. 

6.87  Lindbergh,  Reeve.  The  Day  the  Goose  Got  Loose.  Illustrated  by 
Steven  Kellogg.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0- 
8037-0409-7.  32p.  4-8. 

When  the  goose  gets  loose,  the  havoc  begins,  and  before  it's  all 
over  both  the  farm  and  the  town  are  in  for  a  comical  spree.  The 
frolicking  goose  lets  loose  the  chickens,  the  sheep,  and  the 
horses,  and  teases  the  bull  into  a  charging  mode.  What  got  into 
that  goose?  The  farm  child  dreams  an  enchanting  answer.  Reeve 
Lindbergh's  rhyming  text  includes  a  repetitive  phrase.  Steven 
Kellogg's  action-packed  illustrations  beg  to  be  examined  closely. 

6.88  Lionni,  Leo.  Tillie  and  the  Wall.  Illustrated  by  Leo  Lionni.  Al- 
fred A.  Knopf /Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-92155-0. 27p.  4^8 
(est.). 

Ullie  and  her  companion  mice  wonder  about  the  other  side  of  a 
wall  that  "had  been  there  ever  since  the  mice  could  remember/' 


ERIC 


263 


218 


Fantasy 


It  is  too  high  to  climb  over,  too  thick  to  drill  through,  and  too 
long  to  go  around,  but  Tillie  is  inspired  by  earthworms  to  bur- 
row underneath  the  wall.  On  the  other  side,  she  discovers  mice 
like  herself  who  receive  her  joyously  and  follow  her  back 
through  the  tunnel.  Leo  Lionni's  familiar  collage-style  mice  are 
in  harmony  with  the  simplicity  of  the  message.  Notable  1989 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

6.89  Marshall,  James.  Fox  Be  Nimble.  Illustrated  by  James  Marshall. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0761-4.  48p. 
4-8. 

Fox  is  busy  practicing  to  be  a  rock  star,  but  his  mom  interrupts 
his  starring  role,  sending  him  to  baby-sit  the  mischievous  Ling 
children.  Discovering  his  baby-sitting  duties  to  be  more  than  he 
expected,  Fox  climbs  new  heights  to  get  the  job  done.  In  the 
process  he  achieves  stardom,  albeit  not  the  kind  he  wanted.  This 
collection  of  three  fun-filled  stories,  all  humorously  illustrated, 
is  another  book  about  lovable  and  trouble-finding  Fox  in  the 
Easy-to-Read  Books  series.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1991. 

6.90  Maxner,  Joyce.  Lady  Bugatti.  Illustrated  by  Kevin  Hawkes. 
Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10341-3. 32p. 
5  and  up. 

In  lilting  and  clever  poetry,  this  picture  book  tells  the  story  of  a 
chic  and  urbane  ladybug  hostess  as  she  entertains  insect  guests. 
The  text  is  amusing;  the  illustrations  are  irresistible.  Lady 
Bugatti's  friends  are  sophisticated  urbanites,  and  we  see  them  in 
lushly  colored  urban  settings  in  art-deco  paintings.  Like  Joyce 
Maxner 's  Nicholas  Cricket,  this  book  will  charm  young  readers 
with  its  detailed  and  humorous  depiction  of  insects  and  animals 
as  glitterati  from  the  Roaring  Twenties. 

6.91  Maxner,  Joyce.  Nicholas  Cricket.  Illustrated  by  William  Joyce. 
HarperCollins/Harper  Trophy  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-024222-1. 
20p.  3-8  (est.). 

The  soft,  luminous  paintings  of  William  Joyce — in  which  insects 
and  small  animals  dress  and  act  like  fashionable  Americans  of 
the  1920s — give  an  entrancing  air  to  this  picture  book.  The  verse, 
clever  and  musical,  describes  the  cricket  banjo  player's  part  in 
an  all-night  fest  at  his  cabaret.  The  art-deco  illustrations  provide 
a  perfect  setting  for  the  energetic  re-creation  of  Nick's  sophisti- 
cated chums,  and  no  child  will  be  able  to  resist  this  tantalizing 
glimpse  of  their  night  life. 


ERIC  264 


Animal  Fantasy 


219 


6.92  McCully,  Emily  Arnold.  The  Evil  Spell-  Illustrated  by  Emily 
Arnold  McCully  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-024154-3. 
32p.  5-«. 

In  this  sequel  to  ZaZa's  Big  Break,  Emily  Arnold  McCully's  droll 
illustrations  tell  yet  another  humorous  tale  of  the  loving,  theat- 
rical bear  family.  When  Edwin  at  long  last  gets  a  leading  role  and 
a  chance  to  deliver  the  lines  that  break  the  evil  spell  and  save  the 
day,  he  is  overcome  with  stage  fright  and  runs  away,  too  embar- 
rassed to  face  the  theater  again.  However,  his  wise  and  loving 
parents  convince  him  to  return.  Perhaps  more  important,  Edwin 
is  able  to  break  his  own  "evil  spell"  and  to  believe  in  himself. 

6.93  McCully,  Emily  Arnold.  Speak  Up,  Blanche!  Illustrated  by 
Emily  Arnold  McCully.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-024228- 
0.  32p.  4rS  (est.). 

When  the  benefactress  of  Farm  Theater  asks  Bruno  and  the  other 
actors  to  teach  the  craft  of  acting  to  her  grandchild,  Blanche,  the 
animals  cannot  refuse.  But  Blanche  is  very  shy  and  makes  a 
challenging  pupil.  Her  tiny  lamb  voice  is  printed  in  the  smallest 
of  type.  She  can't  act,  seU  tickets,  or  collect  props.  But  she  is 
never  without  her  sketchbooks,  and  eventually  she  gains  the 
courage  to  convince  the  troupe  that  she  would  make  a  perfect 
set  designer. 

6.94  McPhail,  David.  Pig  Pig  Gets  a  Job.  Illustrated  by  David 
McPhail.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44619-2. 
24p.  4^8. 

In  Pig  Pig's  newest  adventure,  he  learns  an  elementary  lesson  of 
economics:  if  one  wants  to  buy  something,  one  must  work.  Pig 
Pig's  visions  of  what  he  can  do  to  earn  money  are  humorously 
exaggerated  in  David  McPhail's  illustrations — baker  of  mud 
pies,  builder  of  tumbledown  houses,  and  maniacal  car  me- 
chanic. All  wild  plans  are  gently  reproved  by  Mother  Pig,  who 
helps  Pig  Pig  decide  what  tasks  are  sensible  for  a  young  pig. 

6.95  Meddaugh,  Susan.  Martha  Speaks.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Med- 
daugh.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-63313-3.  32p.  4^8 
(est.). 

Martha  is  a  perfectly  ordinary  dog  until  she  eats  alphabet  soup 
and  begins  to  talk.  At  first  her  family  is  delighted  that  Martha 
can  speak,  even  though  her  words  aren't  always  appropriate, 
such  as  "Why  is  that  man  so  fat?"  Finally,  Martha  talks  so  much 
that  her  words  blanket  the  pages  and  the  family  yells,  "Martha, 


265 


220 


Fantasy 


please!  SHUT  UP!"  But  she  redeems  herself  during  a  burglary, 
and  children  will  appreciate  her  cleverness. 

6.96  Minarik,  Else  Holmelund.  Am  I  Beautiful?  Illustrated  by  Yossi 
Abolafia.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09912-2.  24p.  3 
and  up. 

As  Little  Hippo  walks  through  the  jungle,  he  overhears  parents 
exclaiming  over  their  children's  beauty  and  grace.  In  each  in- 
stance, Little  Hippo  asks  the  parent,  "Am  I  beautiful,  too?"  In  no 
case — whether  by  lioness,  heron,  or  human  mother — is  his 
beauty  confirmed.  So,  Little  Hippo  does  what  all  children  learn 
to  do — he  asks  his  own  mother,  who  answers:  ". . .  all  hippos  are 
beautiful.  And  you  are  the  most  beautiful  of  all,  because  you  are 
mine!"  Watercolor  paints  edged  in  black  ink  offer  airy  interpre- 
tations of  an  important  question. 

6.97  Minarik,  Else  Holmelund.  Percy  and  the  Five  Houses.  Illus- 
trated by  James  Stevenson.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0- 
688-08105-3. 20p.  4-10. 

Creator  of  the  Little  Bear  stories,  Else  Holmelund  Minarik  teams 
simple  text  with  James  Stevenson's  breezy  art  to  tell  the  story  of 
Percy,  a  river  beaver  who  finds  a  piece  of  real  gold.  Conned  by 
Ferd  the  Fox,  Percy  uses  the  gold  to  join  the  House  of  the  Month 
Club,  a  club  that  mails  out  new  houses  for  each  month  of  the 
year.  But  cardboard  castles,  crepe-paper  trees,  and  igloos  are  no 
match  for  a  beaver's  natural  habitat,  and  Percy  discovers  that  his 
dam  is  the  best  house  of  all. 

6.98  Modrell,  Dolores.  Tales  of  Tiddly,  Illustrated  by  Ellen  Eagle. 
Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-671- 
69204-6.  36p.  5-7  (est.). 

This  is  a  set  of  three  simple  stories  about  Tiddly,  a  small  home- 
less kitty,  Mr.  Bones,  a  very  sophisticated  and  well-organized 
cat,  and  Uncle  Meezo,  a  white  terrier  with  the  kindest  face  that 
Tiddly  has  ever  seen.  The  two  friends  generously  take  in  Tiddly, 
making  him  a  part  of  their  family  The  resulting  adventures  may 
serve  as  a  lead-in  to  classroom  discussions  about  families'  simi- 
larities and  unique  characteristics. 

6.99  Norman,  Philip  Ross.  The  Carrot  Wan  Illustrated  by  Philip  Ross 
Norman.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-61200-6. 32p.  4-7  (est.). 


266 


Animal  Fantasy 


221 


Just  before  the  Midsummer  Feast,  the  Horrible  Hares,  carrot 
thieves  of  the  first  magnitude,  pilfer  every  Rabbit  carrot,  and 
"bunnynap"  Carbuncle,  the  Rabbits7  Carrot  Expert.  In  true  Tro- 
jan style,  tiie  peaceful  Rabbits  build  a  giant  bunny-filled  carrot 
to  gain  access  to  the  Hares'  fort.  The  details  of  the  fort  and  the 
plans  for  assault  beg  to  be  inspected.  Revenge  is  funny  and 
harmless  in  its  effect.  For  example,  Black  Ear,  the  Horrible  Hare 
Emperor,  is  doused  with  a  flagon  of  carrot  wine. 

6.100  Norman,  Philip  Ross.  A  Mammoth  Imagination.  Illustrated  by 
Philip  Ross  Norman.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-61201-4. 
32p.  4rS  (est). 

Little  Bonbon,  a  wild  boar,  has  a  wild  imagination.  He  needs  it 
because  the  grownup  wild  boars  are  boring.  While  the  others 
just  eat  and  look  for  mushrooms  to  eat  again,  Bonbon  exercises 
his  imagination.  Then,  following  some  huge  footprints,  he  dis- 
covers a  herd  of  friendly  mammoths  who  have  toys  and  paints 
and  beds  for  jumping.  There  is  even  mammoth  music  for  danc- 
ing. Back  home  again,  Bonbon  is  certain  that  he  will  always  have 
a  playmate — because  of  his  "mammoth  imagination/' 

6.101  Novak,  Matt.  While  the  Shepherd  Slept.  Illustrated  by  Matt 
Novak.  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08515-5. 32p.  3-7  (est.). 

A  tired  little  shepherd  nods  off  under  a  shady  tree  while  his  fat 
white  sheep  quietly  sneak  away,  as  they  always  do.  They're  off 
to  the  theater  where  each  afternoon  they  don  costumes  and 
perform  vaudeville  routines,  songs,  and  dances.  When  the  mati- 
nee is  over,  they  nibble  their  way  back  to  the  shepherd,  ready  for 
sleep  in  their  warm  barn.  Then,  in  a  surprising  twist,  the  little 
shepherd  goes  to  the  theater,  where,  under  the  same  spotlight, 
he  dances  until  dawn. 

6.102  Numeroff,  Laura  Joffe.  If  You  Give  a  Moose  a  Muffin.  Illus- 
trated by  Felicia  Bond.  HarperCollins/Laura  Geringer  Books, 
1991.  ISBN  0-06-024406-2.  28p.  6-11  (est.). 

When  a  moose  comes  for  a  visit,  a  little  boy  tries  to  make  it  feel 
at  home  by  offering  a  muffin.  But  it  doesn't  take  long  before  the 
host  conjectures  that  a  moose  may  not  be  so  easily  satisfied,  and 
that  it  may  request  other  things  to  go  with  the  muffin— jam, 
more  muffins,  and  maybe  a  sweater.  The  moose  may  even  want 
socks,  then  make  a  puppet  show,  and  need  to  paint  scenery. 


267 


222 


Fantasy 


Laura  Joffe  Numeroff's  characters  have  just  the  right  touch  of 
whimsy  when  creating  their  jolly  havoc. 

6-103  Otto,  Carolyn.  Dinosaur  Chase*  Illustrated  by  Thacher  Hurd. 
HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-021 614-X.  32p.  2-6  (est.). 

When  only  dinosaurs  populate  the  world,  they  swim  and  surf, 
fish  and  fly  But  some  masked  dinosaurs  are  stealing  jewels! 
Over  the  bridge  they  run,  pursued  by  dinosaur  police.  Posing  as 
dinosaur  statues  in  the  park,  the  robbers  are  unable  to  fool  the 
police.  With  very  little  text  and  rhyming  phrases  ("Dinosaur 
chase,  dinosaur  race,  hiding  in  a  dinosaur  place"),  this  bedtime 
dinosaur  adventure  will  encourage  young  readers.  Edge-to- 
edge  paintings  are  in  transparent  watercolors,  shaded,  and  out- 
lined with  India  ink. 

6.104  Patz,  Nancy.  Sarah  Bear  and  Sweet  Sidney.  Illustrated  by  Nancy 
Patz.  Four  Winds  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-770270-7.  28p.  6-10. 

It  is  practically  springtime,  and  Sweet  Sidney  is  ready  to 
awaken,  but  Sarah  Bear  is  content  to  continue  hibernating  until 
spring  really  arrives.  So,  to  pass  the  time,  Sweet  Sidney  does  the 
spring  cleaning,  prepares  a  picnic,  and  finally  falls  back  to  sleep. 
When  spring  does  arrive,  both  bears  awaken  and  prance  off  to 
the  meadow  to  enjoy  honey-nut  rolls  and  laugh  in  die  sunshine. 
The  rhythmic  text,  occasionally  expressed  in  rhyme,  brings  the 
bears'  adventures  to  life.  Dynamic  illustrations,  in  pencil,  water- 
color,  and  inks,  animate  the  text  and  capture  the  passing  of 
winter. 

6.105  Pearson,  Susan.  Well,  I  Never!  Illustrated  by  James  Warhola. 
Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-671- 
69199-6. 32p.  4-S  (est). 

It  is  a  strange  Saturday  on  the  farm.  First  Pa  bales  the  sheep 
instead  of  the  hay.  Then  Ma  feeds  the  chickens  popcorn,  which 
pops  inside  their  stomachs,  causing  them  to  bounce  on  the  barn 
roof  as  Ma  runs  back  and  forth,  trying  to  catch  their  eggs  in  the 
laundry  basket.  When  the  family  finally  discovers  the  cause  of 
their  outrageous  problems,  the  challenge  is  to  find  a  solution. 
Zany  illustrations  are  the  perfect  complement  to  this  tall  tale. 

6.106  Pfister,  Marcus  (translated  by  J.  Alison  James).  Rainbow  Fish. 
Illustrated  by  Marcus  Pfister.  North-South  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
1-55858-010-7. 32p.  5-8. 


263 


VIRGINIA  WOOLF 

Nurse  Lugton's 
Gubjain 


ILLUSTRATED    BY   JULIE  VIVAS 


B. 


A.  Piggins  and  the  Royal  Wedding  by  Jane  Yolen;  illustrated  by  Jane  Dyer  (see  6.165). 

B.  Nurse  Lugton's  Curtain  by  Virginia  Woolf;  illustrated  by  Julie  Vivas  (see  6.163). 

C.  If  You  Give  a  Moose  a  Muffin  by  Laura  Joffe  Numeroff;  illustrated  by  Felicia  Bond 
(see  6.1 021.  D.  You  Silly  Goose  by  Ellen  Stoll  Walsh  (see  6. 1 48). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


26,9 


c. 


A.  Little  Mouse's  Painting  by  Diane  Wolkstein;  illustrated  by  Maryjane  Begin  (see 
6.160).  B.  Tuesday  by  David  Wiesner  (see  6.155).  C.  Frog  Odyssey  by  Juliet  and 
Charles  Snape  (see  6.125). 


ERIC 


270 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Animal  Fantasy 


223 


An  extraordinary  fish  takes  pride  in  his  shimmering  scales — 
scales  of  such  beauty  and  reflected  gleam  that  he  is  amazing  to 
other  fish.  But  pride  leaves  Rainbow  Fish  lonely  until  he  learns 
the  lesson  of  sacrifice  and  the  rewards  of  generosity.  The  world 
of  Rainbow  Fish  is  washed  in  blues,  greens,  and  lavenders.  His 
scales  are  enhanced  with  defraction  foil,  an  innovative  holo- 
graphic technique  that  creates  depth,  color  change,  and  reflected 
geometric  patterns  as  the  pages  are  shifted  in  the  light. 

6.107  Pochocki,  Ethel.  The  Attic  Mice.  Illustrated  by  David  Catrow. 
Henry  Holt,  1990.  ISBN  0-8505-1298-2. 113p.  8-10  (est.). 

Living  in  the  attic  of  an  old  doll  farmhouse  in  the  middle  of  a 
linoleum  yard,  a  family  of  mice  share  hair-raising  adventures, 
growing  pains,  understanding,  and  love.  The  story  of  their  ev- 
eryday experiences  and  their  acceptance  of  a  "good-for-noth- 
ing" horse  chestnut  into  the  family  is  colorfully  and  humorously 
told.  Pen-and-ink  drawings  detail  this  warmhearted  tale. 

6.108  Pomerantz,  Charlotte.  Flap  Your  Wings  and  Try.  Illustrated  by 
Nancy  Tafuri.  Gieenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08020-0. 
20p.  4-8. 

With  encouragement  and  patience,  a  baby  seagull  learns  to  fly. 
Once  aloft  in  the  sky,  the  bird  then  encourages  others  to  "flap 
your  wings  and  try."  Nancy  Tafuri's  full-page  illustrations, 
beautifully  created  with  watercolor  and  black  ink,  capture  the 
effort  and  the  achievement.  The  rhyme  and  predictable  pattern 
of  Charlotte  Pomerantz's  text  will  encourage  young  children  to 
try  their  own  wings  at  reading. 

6.109  Quackenbush,  Robert.  Danger  in  Tibet.  Evil  under  the  Sea.  Lost 
in  the  Amazon.  Illustrated  by  Robert  Quackenbush.  Pippin 
Press,  1989-92.  32p.  6-10. 

Unabashed  environmentalist  Miss  Mallard,  the  world  famous 
"ducktective,"  solves  ecological  mysteries  around  the  globe.  In 
Australia,  someone  or  something  is  destroying  the  Great  Barrier 
Reef.  In  the  Amazon,  the  rain  forests  are  in  danger.  And  in  Tibet, 
it  is  Mr.  Everest  that  could  be  destroyed.  Miss  Mallard  (and 
young  readers)  pick  up  clues  amid  lots  of  information,  eventu- 
ally deducing  the  solutions.  Full-page  watercolors,  humor,  and 
thin  volumes  in  the  Miss  Mallard  Mystery  series  will  invite 
young  readers. 

6.110  Ravilious,  Robin.  Two  in  a  Pocket.  Illustrated  by  Robin 
Ravilious.  Little,  Brown,  1991.  ISBN  0-316-73449-7.  24p.  4-8. 


27i 


224 


Fantasy 


With  spring's  arrival,  Snippet  the  dormouse  finds  herself  in  new 
surroundings,  sharing  a  coat-pocket  home  with  Jenny  the  wren. 
When  Jenny  is  hurt  by  a  cat,  Snippet  nurses  her  back  to  health, 
and  the  two  unlikely  housemates  develop  a  strong  friendship. 
When  summer  comes,  the  coat  is  carried  away  by  the  farmer  to 
make  a  scarecrow.  Home  again  in  her  field,  Snippet  settles  hap- 
pily into  one  pocket,  with  Jenny  in  the  other.  Softly  colored 
pencil  sketches  illustrate  this  heartwarming  story  of  friendship. 

6.111  Reeves,  Mona  Rabun.  I  Had  a  Cat  Illustrated  by  Julie  Downing. 
Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-775731-5.  30p.  4-7  (est.). 

In  this  fanciful  story  written  in  rhyme,  a  little  girl's  house  is  filled 
to  overflowing  with  a  rambunctious  menagerie.  To  deal  with  the 
problem  of  too  many  animals,  she  visits  the  zookeeper,  a  farmer, 
and  a  boy;  they  all  help  her  out  by  taking  various  animals.  Then, 
beginning  to  feel  somewhat  lonely,  the  little  girl  returns  home 
and  is  relieved  to  discover  that  she  still  has  her  cat.  Bright, 
exuberant  watercolors  create  a  chaotic  mood. 

6.112  Robertus,  Polly  M.  The  Dog  Who  Had  Kittens.  Illustrated  by 
Janet  Stevens.  Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0860-4.  28p. 
6-10  (est). 

When  Eloise  has  her  kittens,  Baxter  the  bassett  hound  feels  like 
an  outcast.  But  when  he  becomes  a  full-time  baby-sitter  for  the 
kittens,  Baxter  understands  the  joy  of  fatherhood.  Then  the  kit- 
tens are  given  away  to  new  homes,  and  Baxter  is  lonely  until  he 
discovers  a  newfound  friendship  with  Eloise.  Watercolored 
black-crayon  drawings  capture  the  emotions  of  this  heartwarm- 
ing story  about  the  need  for  companionship. 

6.113  Ross,  Christine.  Lily  and  the  Bears.  Illustrated  by  Christine 
Ross.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1991.  ISBN  0-395-55332-6.  24p.  4-8. 

Lily  wants  to  be  "something  big  and  brave  . . .  and  tough/'  So 
every  morning,  instead  of  getting  dressed  up  in  children's 
clothes,  she  puts  on  a  bear  suit  and  acts  like  a  wild  bear,  much 
to  her  mother's,  father's,  and  grandmother's  dismay.  One  day, 
Lily's  class  goes  to  the  zoo,  and  Lily  finds  herself  mistakenly 
locked  into  the  bear  cage.  There  she  discovers  what  wild  bears 
are  really  like.  Delicately  drawn  wax  pencil  and  watercolor  illus- 
trations enrich  Lily's  story  with  humorous  details. 

6.114  Ruch,  Sandi  Barrett.  Junkyard  Dog.  Illustrated  by  Marjory 


Wunsch.  Orchard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08442-6.  89p.  8-11 


(est.). 


Animal  Fantasy 


225 


The  widowed  junkman,  Zlotnick,  obtains  what  he  thinks  is  a 
fierce  guard  dog  named  Max.  But  little  Huey,  one  of  the  junk- 
man's four  children,  makes  friends  with  Max  without  Zlotnick's 
knowledge.  Zlotnick  changes  his  mind  about  Max  when  Huey 
is  accidentally  trapped  in  an  old  refrigerator,  and  Max  rescues 
him.  Max  then  becomes  a  member  of  the  family.  Sandi  Barrett 
Ruch  tells  her  black-and-white  illustrated  story  from  the  unique 
point  of  view  of  an  observant  toad,  a  longtime  resident  of  the 
junkyard. 

6.115  Ryder,  Joanne.  The  Bear  on  the  Moon.  Illustrated  by  Carol  La- 
cey.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-G8110-X.  32p.  6-10 
(est.). 

When  "there  was  nothing  at  the  top  of  the  world  but  the  sea 
where  the  white  bears  lived/'  one  observant,  curious  bear 
climbed  the  northern  lights  to  explore  the  moon.  In  a  creation 
myth  based  on  Joanne  Ryder's  own  childhood  wonderings  and 
imagination,  the  polar  bear  tosses  the  moon's  snowy,  icy  surf  ace 
to  the  bears  below,  building  the  Arctic  ice  cap  and  accounting  for 
the  waning  moon.  Carol  Lacey's  furry,  wet  polar  bears  are  real- 
istic against  expressionistic  backdrops,  her  compositions  bal- 
anced and  peaceful. 

6.116  Schotter,  Roni.  Bunny's  Night  Out.  Illustrated  by  Margot  Apple. 
Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-316-77465-0.  29p. 
4-8  (est). 

Bedtime  is  not  Bunny's  favorite  time  of  the  day.  So  one  night, 
when  the  moon  seems  to  call  him  out  to  play,  Bunny  crawls  out 
of  his  rabbit  home  and  begins  a  series  of  nighttime  adventures, 
including  sharing  a  leftover  meal  with  a  band  of  raccoons.  But 
when  the  rain  begins  to  fall,  a  cold  and  wet  Bunny  hops  home 
and  realizes  that  his  bed  is  the  best  place  to  be.  Soft,  colored- 
pencil  drawings  illustrate  this  adventurous  bedtime  story. 

6.117  Schwartz,  Henry.  How  I  Captured  a  Dinosaur.  Illustrated  by 
Amy  Schwartz.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-531-08370-5. 28p.  4-7. 

When  dinosaurs  are  sighted  along  the  Baja  Peninsula  of  Mexico, 
Liz  Bradford  is  determined  to  see  one  for  herself.  Luckily,  her 
family  is  about  to  embark  on  a  camping  vacation,  and  she  is  able 
to  convince  them  to  set  up  camp  near  the  sightings.  Liz's  first- 
person  account  of  how  she  lures  "Albert"  (short  for  Albertosau- 
rus)  with  a  hamburger  and  how  she  domesticates  him  will  stir 
the  imagination  of  any  young  dinosaur  lover. 


ERIC 


273 


226 


Fantasy 


6.118  Schwartz,  Roslyn.  Rose  and  Dorothy.  Illustrated  by  Roslyn 
Schwartz.  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08518-X.  32p.  3-7. 

Two  very  different  creatures— Dorothy  a  huge  singing  elephant, 
and  Rose,  a  tiny  mouse — transcend  size  differences  to  become 
the  best  of  friends,  in  a  story  reminiscent  of  William  Steig's  Amos 
and  Boris.  But  these  two  friends  cohabitate,  and  Dorothy's  size 
eventually  drives  delicate  Rose  to  near  collapse.  Hurt  feelings 
are  resolved  through  a  good  talk,  and  buying  the  big  house  next 
door  makes  for  a  happy  ending.  Ink  and  crayon  drawings  pro- 
vide hilarious  detail.  Watch  for  Dorothy  at  the  art  gallery! 

6.119  Seligson,  Susan,  and  Howie  Schneider  The  Amazing  Amos  and 
the  Greatest  Couch  on  Earth.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Seligson  and 
Howie  Schneider.  Little,  Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-316-78033-2.  30p.  4-8  (est.). 

Varoom!  Amos  the  dog  is  off  on  his  second  journey.  With  just  a 
flick  of  his  paw,  Amos  can  make  his  favorite  couch  move.  His 
owners,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bobson,  rarely  worry  about  him  because 
they  know  he  is  a  good  driver.  However,  the  Bobsons  are  un- 
aware that  this  time  Amos's  adventure  has  taken  him  to  a  circus 
where  he  and  his  fantastic  couch  are  a  part  of  the  show.  Again, 
Amos's  exploits  are  filled  with  fun,  imagination,  and  lively  ani- 
mation. 

6.120  Sharmat,  Andrew.  Smedge.  Illustrated  by  Chris  L.  Demarest. 
Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-782261-3.  30p.  4-9  (est.). 

What  do  pets  do  all  day  when  their  owners  go  to  work?  Well, 
one  dog,  Smedge,  the  Pettey's  perfect  pet,  dons  suit  and  brief- . 
case  to  serve  as  topdog  adviser  to  the  president  of  the  United 
States.  The  Petteys  never  suspect  that  Smedge  is  escorted  each 
day,  by  limousine,  to  a  posh  Washington  office  to  meet  with 
high-level  officials  and  to  lunch  at  clubs.  Even  as  insightful 
Smedge  manages  to  save  the  country  from  a  disastrous  trade 
agreement,  his  owners  continue  to  think  of  him  as  their  lovable, 
lazy  (but  obedient)  pet. 

6.121  Silverman,  Erica.  Warm  in  Winter.  Illustrated  by  Michael  J. 
Deraney  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-782661-9.  30p.  4-S  (est.). 

It's  summer,  and  new  friends  Rabbit  and  Badger  enjoy  lemon- 
ade, checkers,  and  each  other's  company.  When  winter  comes, 
Badger  is  lonesome  and  decides  to  accept  an  invitation  to  visit 
her  friend  Rabbit.  Trudging  through  an  icy  snowstorm,  Badger, 
thinking  that  she  will  never  be  warm  and  dry  again,  finally 


274 


Animal  Fantasy 


227 


arrives  at  Rabbit's  house.  Snuggling  up  by  the  fire  in  warm 
flannel,  the  two  friends  once  again  enjoy  each  other's  company, 
and  Badger  discovers  the  true  meaning  of  "warm  in  winter/' 
Pencil  and  watercolor  illustrations  in  earth-tone  hues  help  to  tell 
a  story  that  is  sure  to  warm  children's  hearts. 

6.122  Simon,  Carly.  Amy  the  Dancing  Bear.  Illustrated  by  Margot 
Datz.  Doubleday,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-26721-5. 36p.  5-8  (est.). 

It's  bedtime,  but  try  as  she  might,  Amy's  mother  cannot  per- 
suade her  daughter  to  stop  dancing  and  get  ready  for  bed.  Only 
when  Mother  Bear  falls  asleep  does  Amy  realize  that  it  really  is 
time  to  say  goodnight.  Though  singer  Carly  Simon's  text  is 
written  in  florid  Victorian-like  prose  that  may  be  unusual  for 
children,  Margot  Datz's  illustrations  convey  the  warmth  of  the 
mother-daughter  relationship. 

6.123  Singer,  Marilyn.  Chester  the  Out-of-Work  Dog.  Illustrated  by 
Cat  Bowman  Smith.  Henry  Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1828-X.  30p. 
5-8  (est.). 

Chester  is  a  happy,  hard-working  Border  collie  who  protects  and 
herds  his  family's  sheep.  But  when  Chester  and  his  family  move 
to  the  city,  he  feels  displaced  and  at  loose  ends.  He  tries  herding 
squirrels  and  pigeons,  but  it's  not  the  same.  Finally,  after  herding 
some  lost  children  in  costumes  to  Chester  A.  Arthur  Elementary 
School,  Chester  lands  a  job  as  the  school's  ever-so-capable  cross- 
ing guard,  Although  teachers  and  young  readers  will  have  to 
look  beyond  Marilyn  Singer's  ail-too- traditional  depiction  of 
male  and  female  roles,  Chester's  circumstances  could  stimulate 
discussions  about  change. 

6.124  Smith,  Wendy.  Think  Hippo!  Illustrated  by  Wendy  Smith.  Carol- 
rhoda  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-87614-372-9. 24p.  (est.). 

It's  time  for  school  to  begin,  and  Desirge,  the  third  of  three  hippo 
children,  nervously  thinks  about  her  first  day.  Fearing  that  she 
will  be  neither  as  smart  nor  as  tough  as  her  brother  and  sister, 
Desir6e  seeks  advice  from  her  siblings  and  timidly  swims  away 
to  school.  When  a  "hippo-sized"  problem  at  recess  is  sur- 
mounted by  a  "Desir£e-style"  solution,  she  becomes  confident 
in  herself  and  about  school.  Bright  watercolor  illustrations  com- 
plement this  humorous  story  of  courage  and  individuality. 

6.125  Snape,  Juliet,  and  Charles  Snape.  Frog  Odyssey.  Illustrated  by 
Juliet  and  Charles  Snape.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young 
Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-671-74741-X.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 


ERiC 


275 


228 


Fantasy 


Albert  and  the  other  frogs  live  in  a  polluted  pond  at  the  city's 
edge,  now  threatened  by  new  construction.  With  a  jar  for  trans- 
porting the  tadpoles  and  carrying  their  favorite  diving  post,  the 
frogs  begin  their  odyssey  to  safety,  eluding  an  alley  cat,  sewer 
rats,  and  traffic,  and  eventually  reaching  a  perfect  new  home  in 
the  city  park.  The  realism  of  these  distinctive  watercolor  frogs 
and  city  scenes  makes  a  fantasy  adventure  almost  believable. 

6.126  Stefanec-Ogren,  Cathy  Sly,  EL:  The  Case  of  the  Missing  Shoes. 
Illustrated  by  Priscilla  Posey  Circolo.  Harper  and  Row,  1989. 
ISBN  0-06-024632-4.  48p.  6-9. 

It's  opening  night  at  the  ballet,  and  Sly,  EL,  a  self-made  fox 
detective,  visits  his  old  friend  Miss  Lotta  Oink,  a  renowned 
ballerina.  When  Lotta  discovers  that  first  her  toe  shoes  and  then 
her  costumes  are  missing,  Sly  investigates  the  case  and  finally 
uncovers  the  culprit.  Simple  black-and-white  drawings  accom- 
pany this  easy-to-read  backstage  whodunit. 

6.127  Steig,  William.  Dr.  De  Soto  Goes  to  Africa.  Illustrated  by  Wil- 
liam Steig.  HarperCollins/Michael  di  Capua  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-06-205003-6.  32p.  3-8  (est.). 

More  than  a  decade  has  passed  since  Dr.  De  Soto  outfoxed  the 
fox,  so  a  whole  new  generation  of  children  is  ready  for  a  sequel. 
The  "one-in-a-million,  hum-dinger  of  a  dentist"  is  off  to  Africa 
in  response  to  the  plea  of  an  elephant  with  an  unbearable  tooth- 
ache. This  time  Dr.  De  Soto's  nemesis  is  a  rhesus  monkey  named 
Honkitonk,  who  kidnaps  the  doctor.  Mrs.  De  Soto  ably  pinch- 
hits  as  a  substitute  dentist,  and  the  happy  ending  hints  that  the 
mice  duo  may  be  bound  for  further  adventures. 

6.128  Sundgaard,  A  old.  The  Bear  Who  Loved  Puccini.  Illustrated 
by  Dominic  Catalano.  Philomel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22135- 
2.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

Robert  Remsen  "Barefoot"  Rainfield  is  an  extraordinary  north- 
ern Minnesota  bear.  First,  he  falls  in  love  with  the  music  of 
Puccini,  and  then,  encouraged  by  Chief  Shorty  John  Sundown, 
Barefoot  sets  out  to  seek  his  fortune  as  an  opera  singer  in  St. 
Paul.  When  a  famous  La  Scala  maestro  discovers  Barefoot  sing- 
ing Puccini  in  a  St.  Paul  cafe,  the  message  is  clear:  the  most 
unlikely  dreams  can  come  true.  Pastel  watercolors  are  shaded 
and  hatched  with  black. 


ERLC 


276 


Animal  Fantasy 


229 


6.129  Talbott,  Hudson,  as  told  to.  Your  Pet  Dinosaur:  An  Owner's 
Manual  by  Dr.  Rex.  Illustrated  by  Hudson  Talbott.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11338-9. 32p.  7  and  up. 

Dr.  Rex,  a  fellow  at  the  Museum  of  Relatively  Natural  History, 
produces  his  third  book  about  his  own  species — a  pet  owner's 
guide  to  choosing,  caring  for,  training,  and  living  with  one's 
own  dinosaur.  The  headings  are  right  out  of  more  traditional 
"guides"— "Bringing  the  Baby  Home,"  "Housebreaking,"  and 
"Discipline"— but  the  scenes  depict  hysteria.  Imagine,  for  exam- 
ple, housebreaking  a  brontosaurus,  or  territory  wars  between 
neighborhood  pets.  Other  features  of  the  guide  include  letters  to 
Dr.  Rex,  fashions  for  dinosaurs,  and  photos  of  Show  Dinos. 

6.130  Taylor,  Scott.  Dinosaur  James.  Illustrated  by  Scott  Taylor.  Mor- 
row Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08577-6.  32p.  5  and  up. 

This  book  describes  in  rhyme  a  little  boy  who  has  dinosaurs  on 
his  clothes,  on  his  lunchbox,  and  in  his  bedroom.  At  first  James's 
obsession  appears  excessive:  '"Will  you  come  out  to  the  play- 
ground to  play?'  'No,'  says  James,  'I'd  rather  stay,'"  as  he  builds 
a  giant  dinosaur  with  his  toys.  However,  when  a  schoolyard 
bully  picks  on  James,  it  turns  out  that  dinosaurs  can  be  quite 
helpful  after  all.  Bordered  ink  and  watercolor  illustrations  bring 
James's  passion  to  life. 

6.131  Teague,  Mark.  The  Trouble  with  the  Johnsons.  Illustrated  by 
Mark  Teague.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590- 
42394-0.  32p.  5-8. 

Elmo  and  his  cat  Leon  hate  their  new  home  in  the  city,  so  one 
night  they  hop  a  train  to  their  old  house  in  the  country.  Although 
the  current  occupants,  the  Johnsons,  are  receptive  and  kind,  they 
are  also  dinosaurs,  In  time  Elmo  realizes  that  he  misses  his 
parents,  and  he  decides  that  his  real  home  is  his  new  home. 
Alternating  richly  colored  and  black-and-white  illustrations 
lend  a  surrealistic  quality  to  this  dream-like  book. 

6.132  Thomas,  Patricia.  "Stand  Back/'  Said  the  Elephant,  "I'm  Going 
to  Sneeze!"  Illustrated  by  Wallace  Tripp.  Lothrop,  Lee  and 
Shepard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09339-6. 32p.  4-7. 

Stand  back ...  the  elephant  is  about  to  sneeze!  Creatures  remem- 
ber how  depleted  they  were  after  its  last  sneeze.  The  zebra  lost 
stripes,  the  bees  their  stings,  and  the  bear  turned  bare.  In  rhyme, 
all  the  animals  beg  the  elephant,  "Please  don't  sneeze!"  When 
the  tiny  mouse  scares  away  the  sneeze,  the  elephant's  great 


277 


230 


Fantasy 


guffaws  of  delighted  laughter  are  just  as  destructive  as  the 
sneeze!  Wonderfully  expressive  animals  draw  sympathy  as  well 
as  amusement  in  this  newly  illustrated  reissue. 

6.133  Tolhurst,  Marilyn.  Somebody  and  the  Three  Blairs-  Illustrated 
by  Simone  Abel  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08478-7.  32p. 

3-  6. 

When  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Blair  and  Baby  Blair  go  on  an  outing,  some- 
body comes  to  explore  their  home.  This  somebody  (who  hap- 
pens to  be  a  bear)  makes  himself  at  home  in  the  Blairs'  house.  He 
samples  all  the  food,  tries  out  everyone's  chair,  and  even  selects 
the  best  bed  for  a  nap.  This  variant  is  the  perfect  companion 
volume  for  the  original  Goldilocks  and  the  Three  Bears. 

6.134  Tompert,  Ann.  Grandfather  Tang's  Story.  Illustrated  by  Robert 
Andrew  Parker  Crown,  1990.  ISBN  0-517-57272-9. 32p.  4  and  up 
(est.). 

Little  Soo  listens  to  Grandpa  Tang  tell  the  story  of  the  two  fox 
fairies,  Wu  Ling  and  Chou,  and  watches  him  illustrate  his  tale 
with  seven-piece  paper  tangrams.  He  rearranges  the  pieces 
deftly  to  show  the  fox  fairies  change  from  one  animal  form  to 
another  as  they  compete  and  argue  and  chase  each  other.  The 
traditional  Chinese  puzzle  pieces  share  pages  with  watercolor 
illustrations,  and  a  final  note  describes  how  children  can  invent 
their  own  designs  and  stories. 

6.135  Turner,  Ann.  Hedgehog  for  Breakfast.  Illustrated  by  Lisa 
McCue.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-789241-7.  30p.  4-10  (est.). 

For  a  young  fox,  "having  a  hedgehog  for  breakfast"  can  only 
mean  one  thing — a  tasty  meal.  So  when  Papa  Fox  tells  George 
and  Charles  to  invite  Mrs.  Hedgehog  for  breakfast,  the  two  set 
about  their  plans  to  cook  their  guest.  Unaware  of  these  plans, 
Mrs.  Hedgehog  enjoys  her  hot  bath  and  drying  time  in  the  oven. 
When  Papa  and  Mama  return,  the  confusion  is  cleared  up  and 
all  the  foxes  sit  down  with  their  guest  to  a  breakfast  of  oatmeal 
and  cream.  Colorful  drawings,  rich  in  detail,  help  to  tell  this 
amusing  tale  of  idiomatic  confusion. 

6.136  Turner,  Charles.  The  Turtle  and  the  Moon.  Illustrated  by  Melissa 
Bay  Mathis.  Dutton  Children's  Books.  ISBN  0-525-44659-1.  32p. 

4-  8  (est.). 

A  lonely  turtle  spends  each  day  alone,  napping,  walking,  and 
swimming.  Then  one  night,  he  wakes  and  discovers  the  moon 


273 


Animal  Fantasy 


231 


for  the  first  time.  Challenging  the  moon  to  a  race  in  the  lake,  the 
turtle  finds  that  the  moon's  luminous  reflection  is  a  perfect  com- 
panion. As  she  follows  the  turtle  through  day  and  night,  Melissa 
Bay  Mathis  captures,  in  beautiful  pastels,  the  ever-changing 
lights  and  colors  of  nature. 

6.137  Van  Caster,  Nancy.  An  Alligator  Lives  in  Benjamin's  House. 
Illustrated  by  Dale  Gottlieb.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399- 
21489-5.  28p.  3-7. 

A  variety  of  animals  live  in  Benjamin's  house.  Ah  alligator  is 
hiding  under  his  bed,  waiting  to  pounce  r  a  his  mother's  feet 
when  she's  vacuuming.  A  snake  winds  down  the  stairs,  a  lion 
lurks  under  the  kitchen  table,  and  a  monkey  does  tricks  in  the 
living  room.  Rabbits,  puppies,  kittens,  whales,  and  bears  take 
their  turns  as  manifestations  of  a  young  boy's  imagination,  and 
each  shares  some  trait  with  Benjamin.  Colorful,  offbeat  paintings 
contribute  to  the  whimsy. 

6.138  Van  Laan,  Nancy.  Possum  Come  a-Knockin'.  Illustrated  by 
George  Booth.  Alfred  A.  Knopf /Borzoi  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-394- 
92206-9.  22p.  3-6  (est.). 

Cartoon-like  illustrations  accompany  the  high-spirited  rhyming 
text  in  this  cumulative  tale,  making  it  a  perfect  read-aloud.  An 
impish  little  possum  decked  out  in  a  forest  green  stovepipe  hat 
knocks  continually  at  the  door  of  a  house,  much  to  the  irritation 
of  its  occupants:  Pa,  Granny,  Pappy,  Ma,  Baby,  Sis,  Tom-cat, 
Coon-dawg,  Brother,  and  Sister.  The  possum  fools  them  all,  glee- 
fully hanging  by  his  tail  from  a  tree. 

6.139  van  Pallandt,  Nicolas.  The  Butterfly  Night  of  Old  Brown  Bear. 
Illustrated  by  Nicolas  van  Pallandt.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux, 
1992.  ISBN  0-374-31009-2.  32p.  4-6  (est.). 

Old  Brown  Bear  collects  butterflies  and  mcths,  some  with  names 
so  long  that  "they  reach  from  his  door  to  the  other  side  of  the 
rivers."  One  day,  while  lolling  about  in  his  garden,  he  is  teased 
by  a  brilliant  blue  moth — a  tantalizing  new  species.  With  butter- 
fly net  a-whizzing,  Brown  Bear  charges,  but  the  elusive  moth 
flutters  higher  and  higher  until  Brown  Bear  is  taking  bouncy 
steps  across  lunar  craters.  One  memorable  painting  shows 
Brown  Bear  teetering  perilously  from  the  topmost  twig  of  an 
ancient  elm. 


ERIC 


279 


232 


Fantasy 


6.140  Velthuijs,  Max  (translated  by  Anthea  Bell).  Frog  in  Love.  Illus- 
trated by  Max  Velthuijs.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1989.  ISBN 
0-374-32465-4.  23p.  4-10  (est.). 

There  can  be  only  one  reason  why  Frog  feels  funny  and  his  heart 
goes  "thump-thump":  Frog  is  in  love!  Setting  out  to  win  his 
beloved  Duck's  affection,  Frog  paints  pictures  and  picks  flowers. 
But  when  Frog  is  injured  as  he  attempts  to  show  Duck  his  love 
by  setting  a  high-jump  record,  it  is  Duck  who  comes  to  help.  As 
Duck  nurses  Frog  back  to  health,  the  two  discover  their  love  for 
one  another.  Bright  watercolor  paintings  illustrate  the  simple 
message:  "Love  knows  no  boundaries." 

6.141  Vincent,  Gabrielle.  Ernest  and  Celestine  at  the  Circus.  Illus- 
trated by  Gabrielle  Vincent.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0- 
688-08685-3.  24p.  3-6  (est.). 

In  softly  watercolored  browns  and  grays,  Gabrielle  Vincent  cre- 
ates a  new  "adventure"  for  her  gentle  characters:  Ernest,  the 
bear,  and  Celestine,  the  mouse.  Ernest  returns  to  his  act  as  a 
circus  clown,  enlisting  Celestine  as  his  reluctantly  shy,  but 
proud,  assistant.  Loving  and  supportive  friendship  undergirds 
the  story  told  exclusively  through  the  characters7  dialogue. 

6.142  Waddell,  Martin.  Fanner  Duck.  Illustrated  by  Helen  Oxenbury. 
Candlewick  Press,  1992.  ISBN  1-56402-009-6.  32p.  4^8  (est.). 

A  duck  works  day  after  day  for  a  lazy  old  farmer  who  lounges 
in  bed  and  calls  repeatedly,  "How  goes  the  work?"  All  day  long 
the  duck  fetches  the  cow,  gathers  the  hens,  saws  the  wood,  and 
irons  the  clothes,  eventually  growing  "so  sleepy  and  weepy  and 
tired"  that  the  farm  animals  take  pity.  They  band  together,  toss 
the  lazy  farmer  out,  take  over  the  farm,  and  happily  share  the 
chores.  Helen  Oxenbury's  animals  are  gentle  and  sympathetic, 
while  the  farmer  is  a  burly,  hairy  lummox. 

6.143  Waddell,  Martin.  Owl  Babies.  Illustrated  by  Patrick  Benson. 
Candlewick  Press,  1992.  ISBN  1-56402-101-7.  32p.  4-7  (est.). 

Three  wide-eyed  baby  owls — Sarah,  Percy,  and  Bill — stare  out 
from  their  hole  in  the  tree,  a  background  created  with  black  ink 
and  watercolor  cross-hatching.  They  have  awakened  to  find  that 
their  mother  is  missing,  so  the  babies  wait  and  wait  for  her 
return.  Although  Sarah  and  Percy  are  reassuring,  Bill's  repeated 
chorus  is  recognizable:  "I  want  my  mommy!"  As  loneliness  and 
worries  get  bigger,  the  babies  climb  onto  one  branch  for  comfort. 


ERLC 


2o0 


Animal  Fantasy 


233 


Closing  their  eyes,  they  wish  their  mother  home.  "AND  SHE 
CAME/7 

6.144  Wagener,  Gerda  (translated  by  Nina  Ignatowicz).  Leo  the  Lion. 
Illustrated  by  Reinhard  MichL  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06- 
021657-3.  32p.  5-7  (est.). 

Leo  is  the  loneliest  lion  in  the  world.  He  wants  to  be  loved  and 
petted  just  like  Mr.  Brown's  pet  cat,  Katrinka.  But  Leo  is  just  too 
big,  and  everyone  is  afraid  of  him.  So  off  goes  Leo  to  find 
someone  who  will  hold  him  on  a  lap  and  pet  him.  Leo  encoun- 
ters many  different  people  with  the  same  result:  they  don't  un- 
derstand that  Leo  is  big  "only  on  the  outside/7  so  they  run.  After 
a  runaway  locomotive  crashes  in  the  desert,  Leo  meets  a  female 
lion  who  returns  his  love. 

6.145  Wagner,  Karen.  Silly  Fred.  Illustrated  by  Normand  Chartier. 
Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-792280-4.  30p.  4r-6  (est.). 

Fred  is  a  pig  who  loves  to  sing  songs  like  "Leafity  leafity  leaf, 
loofity  loofity  loo,  loo-hoo,  loo-hoo,  loo-hoo,  loo,  loo,  loo"  and 
to  turn  somersaults  on  the  bed.  He  likes  being  silly  and,  in  fact, 
doesn't  know  how  to  act  any  other  way.  But  one  day  he  meets  a 
beaver  who  does  not  approve  of  silliness.  Fred  tries  to  be  more 
serious,  only  to  discover  that  life  is  not  much  fun  without  som- 
ersaults and  songs.  Pink-dominated  pencil  and  watercolor  illus- 
trations depict  expressive  pigs. 

6.146  Wahl,  Jan.  The  Sleepy  time  Book.  Illustrated  by  Arden  Johnson. 
Tambourine  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10276-X.  32p.  3  and  up. 

In  misty  pastels,  lovable  anthropomorphic  creatures  go  about 
their  nighttime  activities.  A  moose  with  a  soft  striped  scarf 
around  his  neck  settles  down  in  a  nest  of  tall  grasses.  Frogs  in 
neckties  croon  together  under  a  full  moon,  and  thrushes  perch 
with  closed  eyes  and  bowed  heads.  The  text  is  simple,  rhythmic, 
and  alliterative.  Everything  culminates  with  a  sleeping  baby 
snuggled  under  a  blue  and  white  flowered  quilt.  Lullaby  ca- 
dences and  the  appeal  of  familiar  animals  make  this  a  soothing 
choice  for  sleepy-time  reading. 

6.147  Wallace,  Bill.  Totally  Disgusting!  Illustrated  by  Leslie  Morrill. 
Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0873-6.  lllp.  7-11  (est.). 

Because  a  little  kitten  repeatedly  mews  and  kisses  his  new 
owner,  Jessica,  she  announces  that  his  name  will  be  "Mewkiss." 
Even  though  Mewkiss  adores  Jessica,  he  finds  such  a  name  to  be 


234 


Fantasy 


totally  disgusting!  Through  wise  advice  from  an  elderly  neigh- 
borhood cat,  Mewkiss  learns  to  see  his  name  in  a  different  light 
and  eventually  saves  Jessica  from  a  fateful  encounter  with  a  local 
rat.  As  usual,  Bill  Wallace's  fondness  for  and  knowledge  of  ani- 
mals shines  through,  complemented  by  Leslie  Morrill's  expres- 
sive black-and-white  drawings. 

6*148  Walsh,  Ellen  Stoll.  You  Silly  Goose-  Illustrated  by  Ellen  Stoll 
Walsh.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-299865-9. 
32p.  3-8. 

Cut-  and  torn-paper  collages  shape  George  the  responsible 
mouse,  his  friend  Emily  the  goose,  and  Emily's  newly  hatched 
downy  yellow  goslings.  When  George  announces  that  he  has 
seen  the  fox  "with  his  big  ears,  bright  eyes,  and  sleek,  shiny  fur/' 
nosy  neighbor  Lulu  thinks  that  George  himself  fits  that  descrip- 
tion, and  flips  him  into  the  pond.  When  the  real  fox  shows  up, 
George  must  save  Lulu,  forcing  Emily  to  ask,  "Now  who  is  the 
fox  and  who  is  the  silly  goose?" 

6.149  Waters,  Tony.  The  Sailor's  Bride.  Illustrated  by  Tony  Waters. 
Doubleday,  1991.  ISBN  0-345-41441-2.  28p.  6  and  up  (est.). 

When  Susanna  marries  Whitewhiskers,  the  sailor  mouse,  every- 
one warns  her  that  her  life  will  be  lonely,  for  "Sailors  love  only 
the  sea."  When  Whitewhiskers  is  presumably  lost  at  sea, 
Susanna  takes  the  children  and  sets  out  to  find  her  beloved 
husband.  Reunited  once  again,  the  two  mice  realize  their  special 
bend,  and  Whitewhiskers  discovers  the  special  qualities  of  his 
"sailor  bride."  Inspired  by  a  famous  painting  and  the  work  of 
Beatrix  Potter,  Tony  Waters  has  created  a  heartwarming  story  of 
love  and  adventure. 

6.150  Wellington,  Monica.  The  Sheep  Follow.  Illustrated  by  Monica 
Wellington.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-525-44837-3. 
32p.  3-6  (est). 

At  first  the  sheep  follow  the  shepherd,  but  when  the  shepherd 
falls  asleep,  the  sheep  follow  a  butterfly,  waddling  geese,  a  cat, 
and  then  some  pigs,  rabbits,  fish,  and  ducks.  Finally,  a  dog  barks 
and  chases  the  sheep  back  to  the  shepherd.  A  rested  shepherd  is 
ready  to  go,  but  the  tired  sheep  won't  follow.  Simple  text  with 
repetitive  refrain  ("And  the  sheep  follow")  ensures  immediate 
success  for  an  early  reader.  Bright,  simple  illustrations  could 
easily  become  flannelboard  retellings. 


Animal  Fantasy 


235 


6*151  Wells,  Rosemary.  Don't  Spill  It  Again,  James*  Illustrated  by 
Rosemary  Wells.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0- 
8037-2119-6.  48p.  3-7. 

Having  a  big  brother  can  sometimes  be  difficult.  But  as  James 
discovers,  older  siblings  can  also  be  loving  and  caring.  In  this 
collection  of  three  rhyming  short  stories,  Rosemary  Wells  invites 
children  to  share  in  the  special  relationship  between  James  and 
his  older  brother.  The  book's  colorful  and  endearing  drawings 
are  sure  to  elicit  laughter  and  will  encourage  children  to  offer 
their  own  ideas  about  growing  up  with  brothers  and  sisters. 

6.152  Wells,  Rosemary.  First  Tomato.  The  Island  Light.  Moss  Pillows. 
Illustrated  by  Rosemary  Wells.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers, 
1992.  32p.  3-6  (est). 

"Far  beyond  the  moon  and  stars,  /  Twenty  light-years  south  of 
Mars,  /  Spins  the  gentle  Bunny  Planet  /  And  the  Bunny  Queen 
is  Janet."  Each  little  bunny  in  Rosemary  Wells's  Voyage  to  the 
Bunny  Planet  series  needs  a  placexrf  escape  when  troubles  stack 
up.  Felix,  for  example,  gets  sick  in  front  of  his  whole  art  class  and 
has  to  take  medicine  that  tastes  like  gasoline.  Things  are  differ- 
ent on  the  Bunny  Planet,  where  Queen  Janet  shows  Felix  the  day 
that  should  have  been.  Other  books  show  other  rabbits  having  a 
bad  day.  In  gentle  rhyme,  everything  is  made  right  on  the  Bunny 
Planet. 

6.153  Wells,  Rosemary.  Fritz  and  the  Mess  Fairy.  Illustrated  by  Rose- 
mary Wells.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0983-8.  29p.  4^8  (est). 

Everyone  in  the  skunk  family  is  fed  up  with  Fritz.  Wherever  he 
goes,  he  leaves  a  big  mess.  When  his  science  experiment  goes 
awry,  Fritz  is  visited  by  the  Mess  Fairy,  who  creates  an  even 
bigger  mess  in  the  house  and  helps  Fritz  realize  the  importance 
of  being  neat.  Large  colorful  watercolors  illustrate  this  humor- 
ous look  at  responsibility. 

6.154  Wells,  Rosemary.  Max's  Dragon  Shirt.  Illustrated  by  Rosemary 
Wells.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0945-5. 

.    22p.  3-7. 

Even  though  Max  loves  his  old  blue  pants,  his  sister  Ruby  has 
the  task  of  shopping  with  Max  for  new  clothes.  But  Max  only 
wants  to  buy  a  dragon  shirt,  and  Ruby  gets  sidetracked  trying 
on  dresses.  Frantic  when  separated,  the  two  rabbits  are  comfort- 


283 


236 


Fantasy 


ingly  reunited  in  another  satisfying,  simple  story  of  attachment, 
responsibility,  and  an  ice-cream-covered  dragon  shirt. 

6.155  Wiesner,  David.  Tuesday,  Illustrated  by  David  Wiesner.  Clarion 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-395-55113-7.  32p,  4-10  (est.). 

In  David  Wiesner's  Caldecott  Medal  acceptance  speech,  he  ex- 
plained his  choice  of  title:  "  ...  the  more  I  said  T-u-e-s-d-a-y/  the 
more  I  like  the  'ooze'  quality  it  had.  It  seemed  to  go  with  frogs." 
Flying  lilly  pads  that  send  their  riders  aloft  through  the  night 
sky,  terrifying  a  turtle,  causing  a  midnight  snacker  to  mistrust 
his  eyes,  teasing  a  dog,  and  providing  a  surreal  amphibian  expe- 
rience, make  for  a  wonderful,  wordless  adventure.  Caldecott 
Medal,  1992. 

6.156  Wild,  Margaret.  My  Dearest  Dinosaur.  Illustrated  by  Donna 
Rawlins.  Orchard  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-531-08603-8.  32p.  4-7. 

Through  a  series  of  letters,  a  mother  dinosaur  lovingly  tells  her 
mate  of  the  status  and  changes  in  their  family  while  he  has  been 
away  seeking  a  safer  place  for  them  to  live.  In  sparse  but  poign- 
ant prose,  she  describes  a  Tyrannosaurus  attack,  hungry  snakes, 
and  the  antics  of  their  fearless  offspring,  The  Cheeky  One. 
Against  Cretaceous  landscapes,  the  saurolophus-like  beast  re- 
flects loneliness,  pride,  hope,  and  fear  for  her  absent  mate. 

6.157  Wilhelm,  Hans.  More  Bunny  Trouble.  Illustrated  by  Hans  Wil- 
helm.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-590-41589-1, 
32p.  4^. 

It's  the  day  before  Easter,  and  Ralph  the  bunny  is  busy  decorat- 
ing eggs  and  watching  his  baby  sister,  Emily.  But  when  Emily 
crawls  away  and  becomes  lost  in  tall  grass,  Ralph  once  again  has 
"bunny  trouble."  With  the  sun  setting  and  an  uninvited  red  fox 
in  pursuit,  Ralph  and  the  rest  of  the  rabbits  join  paws  and  locate 
the  little  lost  bunny.  This  sequel  to  Bunny  Trouble  offers  children 
not  only  another  adventure  with  Ralph,  the  soccer-playing  rab- 
bit, but  a  lesson  in  responsibility. 

6.158  Wilkon,  Piotr.  Rosie  the  Cool  Cat.  Illustrated  by  Jozef  Wilkon. 
Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-83707-5.  24p.  4^10  (est.). 

Rosie  the  cat  is  not  like  anyone  in  her  family — she  has  orange  fur 
and  she  "did  everything  differently  from  her  sisters  and  broth- 
ers." So  Rosie  sets  out  on  her  own,  becomes  a  famous  rock  star, 
and  eventually  has  her  own  kittens,  one  of  which  is  different 


28  4 


Animal  Fantasy 


237 


from  all  the  rest  Full-color  chalk  illustrations  of  hairy,  bright- 
eyed  cats  celebrate  the  importance  of  individual  differences. 

6.159  Winch,  Madeleine.  Come  by  Chance.  Illustrated  by  Madeleine 
Winch.  Crown,  1990.  ISBN  0-517-57667-8.  31p.  5-8  (est.). 

When  Bertha  discovers  a  tumble-down,  abandoned  house,  she 
sweeps,  mends,  patches,  and  scrubs  until  she  has  a  home.  One 
evening,  stormy  weather  brings  cows,  dogs,  cats,  and  birds, 
among  other  animals,  to  her  door  seeking  shelter.  Bertha  wel- 
comes these  new  friends  who  found  her  '^>y  chance."  All  but  a 
cat  depart  when  spring  arrives,  but  chances  are  that  next  win- 
ter. . . .  Colorful  double-page  spreads  display  an  irresistible  me- 
nagerie. 

6.160  Wolkstein,  Diane.  Little  Mouse's  Painting.  Illustrated  by  Mary- 
jane  Begin.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-07610-6. 32p. 
4  and  up. 

As  Little  Mouse  paints  at  her  easel,  her  friends  disagree  about 
the  subject  of  her  painting,  for  each  sees  himself  in  her  art. 
Readers  see  the  painting  only  at  the  end  of  the  book,  thereby 
understanding  the  ambiguity  of  art  and  the  possibilities  for  ex- 
pression. Maryjane  Begin's  layered  watercolor  and  acrylic  paint- 
ings are  richly  textured,  glowing  portraits. 

6.161  Wood,  Audrey.  Little  Penguin's  Tale.  Illustrated  by  Audrey 
Wood.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-246475-1. 
32p.  3-6  (est.). 

Grand  Nanny  Penguin  tells  her  seven  charges  a  tale  from  the 
past.  The  seventh  penguin  isn't  listening  and  sneaks  away  into 
the  snowy,  polar  world  to  have  some  fun,  where  his  antics  par- 
allel Nanny's  story:  he  dances  with  the  gooney  birds,  cavorts  at 
the  Walrus  Polar  Club,  and  narroWly  escapes  being  eaten  by  a 
whale.  Vivid  watercolor  and  colored-pencil  illustrations  bring 
this  rollicking  tale  to  life. 

6.162  Wood,  Audrey.  Oh  My  Baby  Bear!  Illustrated  by  Audrey  Wood. 
Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1990.  ISBN  0-15-257698-3.  32p.  2-6. 

Oversized,  pastel-colored  illustrations  follow  Mama  and  Papa 
Bear  as  they  awaken  Baby  Bear,  dress  him,  feed  him,  care  for  him 
all  day,  give  him  a  bath,  and  then  tuck  him  into  bed  with  a  story 
and  a  kiss.  When  Baby  Bear  tries  *o  perform  these  tasks  by 
himself,  he  makes  quite  a  mess,  to  which  his  parents  respond: 
"Oh  my  Baby  Bear!  Let  me  show  you  how."  Eventually  he  learns 


:RLC 


285 


238 


Fantasy 


to  do  these  tasks,  and  then  he  is  called  Little  Bear.  But . . .  there 
is  still  one  thing  he  is  not  too  big  for. 

6.163  Woolf,  Virginia.  Nurse  Lugton's  Curtain.  Illustrated  by  Julie 
Vivas.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-15-200545-5.  32p.  7  and  up. 

In  a  tale  of  fancy  that  Virginia  Woolf  probably  wrote  in  1924, 
Nurse  Lugton  dozes  over  her  stitches,  "and  on  her  knees,  cover- 
ing the  whole  of  her  apron,  was  a  large  piece  of  figured  blue 
stuff."  At  her  fifth  snore,  "the  blue  stuff"  turns  to  blue  air,  and 
the  wild  animals  on  the  drawing-room  curtains  come  to  life. 
From  elephants  to  mongooses,  an  imaginatively  painted  menag- 
erie gambol  over  the  grassy,  flower-strewn  "curtain"  to  the  lake 
near  Millamarchmantopolis  to  drink. 

6.164  Yektai,  Niki.  Hi  Bears,  Bye  Bears.  Illustrated  by  Diane  deGroat. 
Orchard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08458-2.  32p.  3-6. 

Bears  of  all  stripes — short,  long,  weak,  strong — and  in  all  sorts 
of  costumes,  roles,  and  situations  cover  the  pages  of  this  rhym- 
ing text  for  young  children.  Eventually,  readers  learn  that  all  of 
the  bears  are  for  sale,  and  that  young  Sam  must  pick  just  one. 
After  Sam  makes  his  choice,  the  text  asks,  "Which  bear  would 
you  choose?"  It  will  mean  some  turning  back,  some  thinking 
over,  and  some  talk. 

6.165  Yolen,  Jane.  Piggins  and  the  Royal  Wedding.  Illustrated  by  Jane 
Dyer  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-261687-X. 
32p.  4-8. 

It's  the  day  of  the  royal  wedding,  and  Piggins,  the  mystery-solv- 
ing porcine  butler,  is  helping  the  Reynard  family  prepare  for  the 
festivities.  When  the  royal  wedding  ring  disappears  before  the 
ceremony,  Piggins  solves  the  mystery  and  clears  young  Rexy 
Reynard,  the  ring  bearer,  of  the  crime.  Following  in  the  tradition 
of  Piggins  and  Picnic  with  Piggins,  Jane  Yolen  and  Jane  Dyer  once 
again  team  up  to  create  an  English-style  mystery  complete  with 
humor  and  suspense.  Colored  pencils  and  dyes  entertainingly 
capture  the  ceremony  of  nineteenth-century  British  aristocracy. 

Folk  Literature 

6.166  Alexander,  Lloyd.  The  Fortune-Tellers.  Illustrated  by  Trina 
Schart  Hyman.  Dutton  Children's  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-525- 
44849-7.  32p.  6-10  (est). 


ERLC 


Folk  Literature 


239 


When  a  young  carpenter  seeks  to  have  his  fortune  change,  he 
asks  a  fortune-teller  about  his  future.  "Rich  you  will  surely  be," 
the  old  man  assures  him.  "On  one  condition:  that,  you  earn  large 
sums  of  money."  Each  query  for  his  future  is  similarly  received. 
Returning  to  ask  the  fortune-teller  further  questions,  the  young 
carpenter  is  mistaken  for  the  old  man  transfigured,  and  fortunes 
foretold  come  true.  Ink,  acrylic,  and  crayon  illustrations  are  set 
in  Cameroon  in  West  Africa,  and  filled  with  the  remarkable 
colors,  patterns,  and  textures  of  marketplaces  and  villages. 

6.167  Bernatova,  Eva.  The  Wonder  Shoes.  Illustrated  by  Fiona 
Moodie.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-38476-2. 
24p.  6-8  (est.). 

Emma,  a  new  girl  in  the  village,  experiences  isolation  when  the 
other  children  will  not  play  with  her.  After  seeing  the  circus 
come  to  town,  Emma  receives  a  new  pair  of  shoes  from  a  dancer 
and  decides  to  involve  the  other  children  in  creating  their  own 
circus.  The  stylized  paintings  add  detail  to  the  simple  story, 
providing  a  medieval  backdrop  for  the  timeless  themes  of  lone- 
liness and  connection. 

6.168  Brown,  Judith  Gwyn.  The  Mask  of  the  Dancing  Princess,  Illus- 
trated by  Judith  Gwyn  Brown.  Atheneum,  1989.  ISBN  0-689- 
31427-2. 46p.  5^8. 

Petulant  Princess  Rosamond  wishes  only  one  thing  for  her  tenth 
birthday:  a  child  who  looks  exactly  like  herself.  The  kingdom  is 
searched  in  vain  for  a  child  as  beautiful  as  the  spoiled  princess 
until,  at  last,  a  child  of  wandering  troubadors  performs  a  mas- 
querade in  the  princess's  image.  Through  mistaken  identity, 
Princess  Rosamond  is  whisked  away  and  held  captive  by  the 
actors.  Over  time,  she  learns  to  dance  and  laugh  and  love.  Full- 
page  oils  and  charcoals  translate  the  French  court  and  gypsy 
fires. 

6.169  Fleischman,  Sid.  Here  Comes  McBroom!  Three  More  Tall  Tales. 
McBroom's  Wonderful  One-Acre  Farm:  Three  Tall  Tales.  Illus- 
trated by  Quentin  Blake.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  Approx.  70p. 
6  and  up. 

Newbery-winner  Sid  Fleischman  originally  wrote  these  six  tall 
tales  about  the  adventurous  McBroom  family  twenty-five  years 
ago.  The  McBrooms — narrator  Josh  McBroom,  his  "dear  wife, 
Melissa/7  and  their  eleven  (or  is  it  twelve?)  children — own  a 
farm  in  Iowa,  where  the  soil  is  so  rich  that  if  you  drop  a  nickel, 


2S7 


240 


Fantasy 


it  grows  into  a  quarter.  The  individual  stories  are  reprinted  as  an 
anniversary  edition  in  a  two-book  set  with  large-type  text  and 
action-filled  line  drawings. 

6.170  Goble,  Paul.  Beyond  the  Ridge.  Illustrated  by  Paul  Goble.  Brad- 
bury Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-736581-6.  32p.  All  ages. 

In  this  poignant  Plains  Indian  tale  of  the  spiritual  journey  of 
death,  Paul  Goble's  paintings  and  graceful  language  are  charac- 
teristically sensitive  to  tribal  traditions.  As  an  old  woman  lies 
dying,  and  the  family  prepares  her  body  for  burial,  the  woman's 
spirit  walks  in  afterlife  to  a  steep  slope  beyond  the  ridge— a 
place  "from  which  we  came  and  to  which  we  shall  return/' 
Bright  opaque  and  transparent  watercolors  are  applied  almost 
to  the  inked  outlines,  leaving  thin  white  lines  that  give  brilliance 
and  clarity. 

6.171  Gwynne,  Fred.  Pondlarken  Illustrated  by  Fred  Gwynne.  Simon 
and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-671-70846- 
5. 30p.  4-10. 

It  is  no  small  wonder  that  after  Pondlarker  the  frog  hears  his 
favorite  story  told  over  and  over,  his  greatest  ambition  is  to  be 
kissed  by  a  princess  and  become  a  handsome  prince.  When 
Pondlarker's  lifelong  dream  almost  becomes  a  reality,  he  finds 
that  his  expectations  about  the  wonderful  life  of  princes  have 
been  exaggerated.  In  the  process,  Pondlarker  discovers  that  he 
prefers  just  being  a  frog.  Fred  Gwynne's  quirky,  double-page 
illustrations  are  drawn  in  froggy  greens  and  blues. 

6.172  Hazen,  Barbara  Shook.  The  Knight  Who  Was  Afraid  of  the 
Dark.  Illustrated  by  Tony  Ross.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers, 
1989.  ISBN  0-8037-0668-5.  32p.  4^8. 

Sir  Fred  is  a  bold  and  brave  knight— except  when  he  must  face 
the  dark.  When  Melvin  the  Miffed,  the  castle  bully,  discovers  this 
"crack  in  Sir  Fred's  armor,"  Melvin  devises  a  scheme  to  expose 
Sir  Fred  and  his  fears.  At  Melvin's  urgings,  Lady  Wendylyn 
invites  Sir  Fred  to  a  midnight  rendezvous,  and  so  the  brave 
knight  faces  a  challenge  and  a  decision.  In  the  end,  the  knight 
and  his  lady  reveal  their  fears  and  find  love.  Tony  Ross's  light 
and  colorful  cartoon-like  drawings  amusingly  illustrate  this  me- 
dieval tale  that  ends  happily  ever  after. 

6.173  Kesey,  Ken.  The  Sea  Lion.  Illustrated  by  Neil  Waldman.  Viking 
Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-83916-7.  48p.  All  ages. 


Folk  Literature 


241 


On  pages  the  colors  of  sunsets  and  sea,  dramatic  graphics  inter- 
pret the  characters  and  sea-cliff  setting  of  the  text.  Eemook 
(meaning  'The  Broken  Gift"),  an  orphaned  Native  American 
boy  with  a  crooked  back  and  shriveled  leg,  is  adopted  by  the 
ancient  rootwoman  and  grows  to  be  clever  and  insightful.  Al- 
though Eemook  is  repudiated  by  the  chief  of  the  Sea  Cliff  People 
and  scorned  by  all  but  Shoola,  the  chief's  daughter,  he  alone 
recognizes  the  evil  in  a  strange  visitor,  and  his  bravery  and 
cleverness  break  the  spell  and  save  his  tribe. 

6.174  Kroll,  Steven.  Princess  Abigail  and  the  Wonderful  Hat  Illus- 
trated by  Patience  Brewster.  Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234- 
0853-1.  30p.  4r*. 

What's  a  princess  to  do?  Her  vain  father  has  promised  her  hand 
to  the  designer  of  the  most  sumptuous  hat — and  to  the  prin- 
cess's horror,  the  successful  haberdasher  is  short,  ugly,  and  long 
in  the  tooth.  She  runs  away,  only  to  encounter  a  large,  beneficent 
green  lizard,  who  helps  her  resolve  her  predicament.  In  the  end, 
innocence  triumphs,  and  vanity  is  left  powerless.  This  original 
fairy  tale  has  the  whimsy,  predictability,  and  happy  ending  of 
classic  tales,  and  is  humorous,  too.  Detail  and  expressiveness  in 
the  richly  colored  illustrations  will  intrigue  readers. 

6.175  Lattimore,  Deborah  Nourse.  The  Dragon's  Robe.  Illustrated  by 
Deborah  Nourse  Lattimore.  Harper  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06- 
023723-6. 30p.  6-11. 

This  original  tale,  an  amalgam  of  Chinese  historical  material  and 
motifs,  centers  on  an  orphaned  weaver  girl,  Kwan  Yin.  When 
two  of  the  emperor's  nobles  anger  the  rain  dragon  and  thus 
bring  drought  and  invasion  to  China,  Kwan  Yin  begins  to  weave 
a  robe  to  place  before  the  shrine  of  the  rain  dragon.  The  two 
nobles  try  to  prevent  her  from  completing  her  task,  as  does  the 
great  Khan,  leader  of  the  invading  army.  Can  she  finish  the  robe 
in  time  to  save  her  country?  Like  Deborah  Ncurse  Lattimore's 
other  picture  books  (The  Prince  and  the  Golden  Ax:  A  Minoan  Tale 
and  Why  There  Is  No  Arguing  In  Heaven:  A  Mayan  Myth),  this  book 
personalizes  a  distant  culture  through  a  young  protagonist.  It 
also  imparts  that  culture's  flavor  through  powerful,  full-color 
paintings  in  imitation  of  classical  works. 

6.176  Levitin,  Sonia.  The  Man  Who  Kept  His  Heart  in  a  Bucket. 
Illustrated  by  Jerry  Pinkney.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991. 
ISBN  0-8037-1030-5. 28p.  5  and  up  (est.). 


ERIC 


289 


242 


Fantasy 


Hurt  by  his  first  love,  Jack  carries  his  heart  in  a  bucket,  deter- 
mined never  to  lose  it  again.  When  a  lovely  maiden  steals  the 
heart  Jack  must  solve  a  riddle  to  get  it  back.  But  along  the  way, 
he  discovers  that  his  "heart  is  in  the  right  place"  after  all.  Richly 
illustrated  in  watercolors  and  colored  pencil,  Jark's  village  and 
its  citizens  are  bustling  with  life.  Cream  paper  enriches  the 
warm  earth  tones  of  these  village  scenes. 

6.177  Lobel,  Anita.  The  Dwarf  Giant  Illustrated  by  Anita  Lobel.  Holi- 
day House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0852-3.  30p.  5-8. 

Life  in  this  Japanese  kingdom  is  peaceful  until  a  strange,  magical 
dwarf — with  European  features  and  clothing — appears.  Hood- 
winking the  prince  with  his  tricks,  the  dwarf  reveals  his  pur- 
pose: to  destroy  the  prince  and  princess  and  usurp  their  power 
Anita  Lobel's  full-color  illustrations  for  this  original  Japanese 
story  are  imitations  of  Japanese  art.  Her  wise  princess  makes  an 
admirable  and  levelheaded  heroine.  Whether  meant  to  be  anti- 
imperialistic  or  not,  the  story  ends  happily — with  a  hint  of  more 
adventure  to  come.  Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field 
of  Social  Studies. 

6.178  Ludwig,  Warren.  Good  Morning,  Granny  Rose.  Illustrated  by 
Warren  Ludwig.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons/Whitebird  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-399-21950-1.  32p.  3-8  (est). 

On  a  wintry  Ozark  morning,  Granny  Rose  and  her  dog  Henry 
go  for  a  walk  to  watch  the  sunrise.  When  a  sudden  snowstorm 
hits,  the  two  seek  shelter  in  a  cave,  only  to  discover  that  the  cave 
already  has  a  furry,  sleeping  occupant  The  restless  bear  stirs, 
and  resourceful  Granny  applies  a  folk  remedy:  she  stuffs  the 
bear's  paw  right  back  into  his  mouth.  Broadface  Granny  in  tiny 
glasses  and  faithful  Henry  the  beagle  register  perfect  expres- 
sions throughout  the  story. 

6.179  Mahy,  Margaret.  The  Queen's  Goat.  Illustrated  by  Emma  Chich- 
ester Clark.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0938-2.  23p.  6-12  (est.). 

When  an  invitation  to  a  pet  show  arrives,  the  queen,  who  has  no 
pets,  decides  to  take  Carmen,  the  royal  gardener's  goat.  But 
Carmen  gets  loose  and  races  pell-mell  through  the  kingdom, 
leaving  disaster  in  her  wake  and  arriving  at  the  pet  show  deco- 
rated with  two  tambourines,  naval  flags,  a  satin  nightgown,  a 
frilly  lace  petticoat,  red  long  johns,  and  the  royal  petunias.  Thus 
adorned,  Carmen  is  awarded  the  prize  for  the  best-dressed  pet 


2SQ 


Folk  Literature 


243 


in  the  parade.  Frenetic  Carmen  provides  comic  contrast  with  the 
staid  park  scenes. 

6.180  Martin,  Jacqueline  Briggs.  Good  Times  on  Grandfather  Moun- 
tain. Illustrated  by  Susan  Gaber.  Orchard  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-531-08577-5.  30p.  6-10  (est.). 

Old  Washburn  is  an  optimist.  In  the  proportions  and  language 
of  a  folktale,  Old  Washburn  meets  his  trials  and  turns  them  into 
triumphs.  When  his  cow  runs  away,  he  just  whittles  her  milk  pail 
into  a  drum.  When  his  cabin  is  destroyed  by  a  storm,  he  whittles 
himself  a  fancy  fiddle.  The  varied  perspectives  of  illustrator 
Susan  Gaber  offer  such  surprises  as  an  eyeball-to-eyeball  inspec- 
tion of  the  cow,  the  whittler's  view  of  wood  shavings  spewing 
from  deft  strokes,  and  a  roof-top,  cabin-raising  view  of  moun- 
tain dancing. 

6.181  Paterson,  Katherine.  The  King's  Equal.  Illustrated  by  Vladimir 
Vagin.  HarperCollins,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-022497-5.  64p.  6-10  (est.). 

Katherine  Paterson  says  that  she  wrote  The  King's  Equal,  a  tale 
with  a  feminist  slant,  especially  for  the  Russian  artist  Vladimir 
Vagin's  crisp  and  elegant  paintings.  Arrogant  Prince  Raphael  is 
charged  by  his  dying  father,  the  king,  to  find  a  princess  as 
beautiful,  intelligent,  and  wealthy  as  the  prince  believes  himself 
to  be.  Although  the  prince's  advisers  search  far  and  wide,  hope 
wanes  until  a  beautiful,  wise,  and  good  shepherdess  proves  that 
she  is  not  only  the  future  king's  equal — but  his  superior. 

6.182  Paterson,  Katherine.  The  Tale  of  the  Mandarin  Ducks,  Illus- 
trated by  Leo  and  Diane  Dillon.  Lodestar  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-525-67283-4.  36p.  5-8. 

This  collaboration  between  a  respected  author  and  equally  re- 
nowned artists  has  produced  a  colorful  and  engaging  original 
Japanese  folktale.  When  a  cruel  lord  captures  a  beautiful  man- 
darin duck  for  its  plummage,  kindly  servants  take  pity  and 
release  it.  The  servants  are  then  sentenced  to  death,  but  their 
kindness  is  magically  repaid.  Flat  and  spacious  illustrations  in 
Japanese  ukiyo-e  style  match  the  mood  in  this  tale  of  compassion 
and  love.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies;  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1991;  Boston  Globe-Horn 
Book  Picture  Book  Award,  1991. 

6.183  Pattison,  Darcy.  The  River  Dragon.  Illustrated  by  Jean  and  Mou- 
Sien  Tseng.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688- 
10427-4. 32p.  4-8  (est). 


:RLC 


29i 


244 


Fantasy 


Ying-Shao  the  blacksmith  crosses  a  dragon-haunted  river  when 
he  travels  to  the  home  of  his  betrothed.  Her  father  disapproves 
of  Ying-Shao's  trade  and  tries  to  stir  up  tiv  dragon's  wrath 
against  the  young  suitor.  This  modern  tale,  inspired  by  Chinese 
folklore,  is  based  on  the  reassuring  notion  that  the  "small  can 
overcome  the  huge  through  cleverness.  The  watercolor  and  ink 
illustrations,  particularly  those  of  the  dragon  among  the  mists  of 
the  river  gorge,  are  vibrant  and  riveting. 

6.184  Polacco,  Patricia.  Boat  Ride  with  Lillian  Two  Blossom.  Illus- 
trated by  Patricia  Polacco.  Philomel  Books,  1988.  ISBN  0-399- 
21470-4.  32p.  4-7. 

On  a  quiet  summer  day,  two  children  are  out  fishing  on  the  pond 
and  wondering  what  makes  the  wind  blow,  the  rain  fall,  and  the 
sim,  the  moon,  and  the  stars  shine.  Suddenly,  old  Lillian  Two 
Blossom  appears,  offering  to  answer  the  children's  questions. 
The  three  paddle  off  together  on  a  mystical  boat  ride,  exploring 
Native  American  interpretations  of  nature's  wonders.  Patricia 
Polacco's  airy  watercolor  illustrations  and  remarkable  perspec- 
tives create  a  dream-like  effect,  pulling  the  reader  into  the  chil- 
dren's experience. 

6.185  Rosen,  Michael,  editor.  South  and  North,  East  and  West:  The 
Oxfam  Book  of  Children's  Stories.  Candlewick  Press,  1992. 
ISBN  1-56402-117-3.  95p.  6-12  (est.). 

To  honor  the  fiftieth  year  of  the  international  charity  organiza- 
tion Oxfam,  which  receives  the  book's  proceeds,  this  collection 
of  stories  was  gathered  by  Oxfam  staff  from  the  peoples  of 
Africa,  Asia,  Latin  America,  and  the  Caribbean.  To  accompany 
the  twenty-five  diverse  tales,  twenty-two  artists,  largely  from 
England,  Canada,  and  New  Zealand,  were  selected  to  represent 
the  tales'  cultural  traditions  and  flavors.  For  example,  David 
Sim's  colored  woodcuts  dramatically  interpret  a  Zimbabwe  tale 
of  a  greedy  father. 

6.186  Sanderson,  Ruth.  The  Enchanted  Wood:  An  Original  Fairy  Tale. 
Illustrated  by  Ruth  Sanderson.  Little,  Brown,  1991.  ISBN  0-316- 
77018-3. 32p.  5-8. 

This  original  fairy  tale  includes  many  traditional  elements,  in- 
cluding three  noble  princes  who  must  enter  the  Enchanted 
Wood  seeking  the  Heart  of  the  World  in  order  to  save  their 
father's  drought-stricken  kingdom.  All  who  enter  the  Enchanted 
Wood  are  bewitched  by  images  of  that  which  they  desire  most. 


92 


11 


B. 


A.  Soutf)  and  North,  East  and  West:  The  Oxfam  Book  of  Children's  Stories  edited  by 
Michael  Rosen  (see  6.185).  B.  A  Nice  Walk  in  the  Jungle  by  Nan  Bodsworth  (see 
6.200).  C.  The  Horrendous  Hullabaloo  by  Margaret  Mahy;  illustrated  by  Patricia 
MacCarthy  (see  6.211).  D.  Silly  Sally  by  Audrey  Wood  (see  6.223). 


293 


9 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


B. 


A.  Beyond  the  Ridge  written  and  illustrated  by  Paul  Goble  (see  6.1 70).  B.  The  Man 
Who  Kept  His  Heart  in  a  Bucket  by  Sonia  Levitin;  illustrated  by  Jerry  Pinkney  (see 
6.176).  C.  The  Fortune-Tellers  by  Lloyd  Alexander;  illustrated  by  Trina  Schart  Hyman 
(see  6.166). 

C  BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 

294 


Folk  Literature 


245 


In  the  end,  however,  the  good-hearted  youngest  prince  and  the 
gatekeeper's  daughter  are  kept  safe  by  the  selflessness  of  their 
desires.  Intricately  detailed,  romantic  paintings  accompany  the 
story,  combining  realism  and  a  medieval  atmosphere  in  muted 
shades. 

6.187  Scieszka,  Jon.  The  Frog  Prince,  Continued*  Illustrated  by  Steve 
Johnson.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-83421-1.  30p.  5  and 
up. 

Here's  a  story  where  they  don't  live  happily  ever  after.  After  the 
frog  has  been  soundly  kissed  by  the  princess  and  turned  into  a 
prince  physically,  his  mannerisms  remain  quite  froggish,  and  he 
and  the  princess  are  miserable  together.  So  the  prince  sets  off  to 
find  some  magic  that  will  transform  him  back  into  a  frog.  Steve 
Johnson's  illustrations  are  captivatingly  illogical  caricatures.  Al- 
though not  all  readers  will  appreciate  the  mild  satire,  modern 
children  are  sure  to  enjoy  what  eventually  becomes,  surprisingly 
enough,  a  fable  about  relationships.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books, 
1992;  ALA  Recommended  Books  for  Reluctant  Readers,  2992. 

6.188  Segal,  Jerry.  The  Place  Where  Nobody  Stopped.  Illustrated  by 
Dav  Pilkey  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-531-08497-3. 160p.  11  and  up. 

Contented  but  lonesome  in  his  isolated  Russian  hamlet,  Yosip 
the  Baker  cheerfully  grants  Mordechai  ben  Yahbahbai  and  his 
family  temporary  lodging.  The  nineteenth  century  draws  to  a 
close,  the  family  multiplies,  and  the  baker's  joy  increases  as  he 
protects  his  household  from  the  czar's  soldiers.  The  family  is 
Jewish,  but  this  is  never  mentioned,  even  though  it  is  central  to 
the  plot.  A  lively  tale  of  ethnic  compatibility,  the  book  is  appro- 
priate for  readers  and  listeners  across  a  broad  age  range. 

6.189  Sherman,  Josepha.  Child  of  Faerie,  Child  of  Earth.  Illustrated 
by  Rick  Farley.  Walker,  1992.  ISBN  0-8027-8112-8.  159p.  12  and 
up. 

Lovely  Graciosa  is  raised  by  an  unloving  father  whose  jealous 
second  wife,  a  sinister  enchantress,  punishes  her  stepdaughter 
severely.  Graciosa  is  courted  and  protected  by  the  dashing 
Prince  Percinet,  who  is  half  mortal  and  half  faerie.  Graciosa  must 
decide  whether  to  give  up  the  world  she  knows,  admit  to  the 
magical  powers  that  lie  dormant  within  her,  and  live  forever  in 
the  kingdom  of  Faerie.  Her  emotional  struggles  are  with  the 
issues  of  possessing  "powers"  and  the  potential  godlessness  of 
magic  and  those  who  possess  it. 


295 


246 


Fantasy 


6.190  Singer,  Marilyn.  The  Golden  Heart  of  Winter.  Illustrated  by 
Robert  Rayevsky.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-07718- 
8. 40p.  6  and  up. 

To  determine  his  heir,  an  aging  father  sends  his  three  sons  on  a 
quest  to  find  something  of  great  value.  It  is  his  youngest  son, 
Half,  who  recognizes  beauty  in  the  world  around  him  and  the 
value  of  living  things.  In  an  act  of  courage  that  revives  the 
Golden  Heart  of  Winter  and  prevents  Death's  triumph  in  the 
world,  Half  brings  his  father  the  object  of  greatest  value — a  good 
and  faithful  heart.  Ink,  watercolor,  and  acrylic  paintings  inter- 
pret the  tale  in  a  surrealistic  style. 

6.191  Threadgall,  Colin.  Proud  Rooster  and  the  Fox.  Illustrated  by 
Colin  Threadgall.  Tambourine  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-11124-6. 
32p.  4-8  (est.). 

A  tenacious  Fox  outwits  a  proud  Rooster  through  a  series  of  foxy 
attempts  to  invade  the  chicken  coop.  Because  old  Rooster's  vi- 
sion is  keen,  Fox's  disguises  don't  work.  So  wily  Fox  proposes  a 
game  of  hide-and-seek:  Fox  hides,  and  Rooster  must  crow  when 
he  spots  Fox.  All  day  long  the  game  goes  on  until  a  weary 
Rooster  with  laryngitis  can't  even  make  a  tiny  croak  when  Fox 
steals  the  hens.  But  no  matter — Fox  only  wanted  fresh  eggs  for 
breakfast.  Colin  Threadgall's  illustrations  are  perky. 

6.192  Watts,  Bernadette.  Tattercoats.  Illustrated  by  Bernadette  Watts. 
North-South  Books,  1989.  ISBN  1-55858-002-6.  25p.  6-10  (est.). 

When  the  children  visit  Tattercoats,  a  ragged  scarecrow,  they 
bring  companionship  as  well  as  scarves  and  gloves.  Yet  in  the 
fall  and  winter,  Tattercoats  feels  abandoned  and  lonely  because 
the  children  stay  inside  and  do  not  visit  him.  With  the  coming  of 
spring,  he  is  restored  to  a  place  of  honor,  close  by  the  house, 
looking  after  the  garden.  Full-page  impressionistic  illustrations 
enhance  the  themes  of  loneliness  and  caring.  Notable  1989  CM- 
Arm's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

6.193  Wood,  Douglas.  Old  Turtle.  Illustrated  by  Cheng-Khee  Chee. 
Pfeifer-Hamilton,  1992.  ISBN  0-93858648-3. 43p.  3-6  (est.). 

Old  Turtle  has  the  answer  that  all  the  other  creatures  do  not:  Old 
Turtle  knows  who  and  what  God  is.  Filled  with  lifelike  watercol- 
ors  depicting  nature  in  its  most  amazing  glory,  this  book  offers 
a  charming  tale  of  spiritual  renewal  and  appreciation  for  the 
world  around  us.  Old  Turtle's  message  of  hope  is  simple  yet 


298 


Humorous  Fantasy 


247 


profound:  God  is,  he  says.  And  the  beauty  of  the  Earth  is  the 
proof.  IRA  Children's  Book  Award,  2993. 

6.194  Yolen,  Jane.  Dove  Isabeau.  Illustrated  by  Dennis  Nolan.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-224131-0.  29p.  7-11 
(est.). 

Haunting  blue  and  gray  watercolors  touched  with  red  illumi- 
nate this  original  fairy  tale,  complete  with  all  of  the  traditional 
elements,  in  which  a  jealous  stepmother  turns  the  gentle  and 
lovely  Dove  Isabeau  into  a  fire-breathing  dragon.  The  evil  spell 
is  broken  by  the  king's  son,  Kemp  Owain,  with  assistance  from 
Dove's  faithful  white  cat,  but  then  Dove  and  the  cat  must  undo 
a  spell  cast  on  the  prince.  Kemp  and  Dove  marry  and  happily 
rule  the  kingdom  together.  Dennis  Nolan's  dragon  is  as  fierce 
and  ugly  as  his  Dove  is  bewitchingly  beautiful. 

6.195  Yolen,  Jane.  Sky  Dogs.  Illustrated  by  Barry  Moser.  Harcourt 
Brace  Jovanovich,  1990.  ISBN  0-15-275480-6. 32p.  4-8. 

From  Blackfoot  Indian  legends,  Jane  Yolen  creates  a  new  story 
about  a  motherless  young  boy  who  is  a  member  of  the  first  band 
of  Native  Americans  to  see  horses.  Believing  that  they  are  large 
dogs  sent  from  the  sky,  from  the  creator  of  all  things,  the  people 
call  the  them  "Sky  Dogs."  In  first-person  narration,  He-who- 
loves-horses  describes  the  strange  beasts  and  how  he  overcomes 
his  fear  of  them.  Dramatic  burnt-orange,  yellow,  and  brown 
watercolors  provide  a  reverent  backdrop.  ALA  Notable  Children's 
Books,  1991. 

Humorous  Fantasy 

6.196  Agee,  Jon.  The  Return  of  Freddy  Legrand.  Illustrated  by  Jon 
Agee.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1992.  ISBN  0-374-36249-1.  32p. 
4-7  (est.). 

"Curses!"  cries  pilot  Freddy  LeGrand,  as  his  airplane,  The  Golden 
Gull,  plummets  toward  Earth.  But  all  is  well,  and  the  famous 
pilot  parachutes  to  safety,  rescued  by  Sophie  and  Albert,  farmers 
with  a  curiosity  about  flight.  No  farmer  himself,  Freddy  returns 
to  Paris  and  a  hero's  welcome.  Even  so,  his  second  plane,  The 
Silver  Swan,  meets  disaster  in  the  Alps,  but  look ...  up  in  the  sky 
. . .  it's  Sophie  and  Albert  and  the  refurbished  Golden  Gull. 
Heavy  black  outlines  give  Jon  Agee's  comical  illustrations 
weight  and  panache. 


248 


Fantasy 


6*197  Ball,  Duncan.  Jeremy's  Tail-  Illustrated  by  Donna  Rawlins.  Or- 
chard Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08551-1. 32p.  3-6. 

Jeremy  is  determined  to  pin  the  tail  on  the  donkey.  So  with 
blindfold  in  place,  he  proceeds  straight  ahead,  all  the  time  think- 
ing that  he  is  in  the  living  room.  However,  the  reader  knows 
otherwise.  Donna  Rawlins's  humorous  illustrations  show 
Jeremy  marching  onto  a  bus,  through  the  city,  eventually  around 
the  world,  and  through  space,  as  he  perseveres  in  his  quest  to 
pin  the  tail  on  the  donkey 

6.198  Blake,  Quentin.  Cockatoos.  Illustrated  by  Quentin  Blake.  Little, 
Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-09951-1.  32p.  6-9  (est.). 

A  man  of  habit,  the  slightly  stuffy,  slightly  daft  Professor  Dupont 
greets  his  ten  prized  cockatoos  in  the  same  way  every  day: 
"Good  morning,  my  fine  feathered  friends!"  Finally,  the  cocka- 
toos, nearly  crazed  by  the  sameness  of  it  all,  escape  through  the 
conservatory  window  and  hide.  The  baffled  professor  searches 
all  about  his  house,  but  fails  to  find  a  single  cockatoo.  Yet,  there 
among  the  characteristic  scrawl  of  Quentin  Blake's  comic  art- 
istry, the  reader  can  spot  the  birds  in  absurd  camouflage  poses. 

6.199  Biundell,  Tony  Beware  of  Boys.  Illustrated  by  Tony  Blundell. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10925-X.  32p.  4  and  up. 

Readers  will  find  a  model  of  resourcefulness  in  this  zany  tale  of 
a  boy  who  is  captured  by  a  wolf.  Convincing  the  wolf  that  boys 
taste  better  cooked,  the  hero  dispatches  the  animal  hither  and 
yon  to  gather  the  unlikely  ingredients  for  boy  recipes.  The  drool- 
ing villain  lugs  barn  doors,  barrels  of  bricks,  and  a  seashore  of 
sand — as  well  as  daffodils  and  a  red  bicycle.  Finally,  the  ex- 
hausted wolf  collapses.  Poetic  justice  reigns  as  the  boy  peddles 
home  on  a  red  bicycle  bringing  flowers  for  his  mother. 

6.200  Bodsworth,  Nan.  A  Nice  Walk  in  the  Jungle.  Illustrated  by  Nan 
Bodsworth.  Viking  Penguin/Puffin  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-14- 
054127-6.  32p.  4-8  (est). 

When  Miss  Jellaby's  class  goes  on  a  nature  walk  in  the  "jungle/7 
they  spot  all  sorts  of  wildlife — spiders,  crickets,  and  lizards.  But 
only  Tim  spots  the  pink,  purple,  and  green  boa  constrictor  gob- 
bling children  at  the  back  of  the  line.  Spread  within  the  tropical 
foliage  are  plenty  of  real  jungle  inhabitants  for  readers  to  dis- 
cover. When  the  last  child  is  swallowed,  a  now-alert  teacher 
punches  out  the  boa  constrictor,  rescues  her  children,  and  takes 
everyone  to  the  Burger  Bungalow. 


293 


Humorous  Fantasy 


249 


6.201  Cecil,  Laura,  compiler.  Stuff  and  Nonsense,  Illustrated  by 
Emma  Chichester  Clark.  GreenwiUow  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688- 
08898-8. 93p.  All  ages. 

Laura  Cecil  explains  in  her  introduction  that  she  always  loved 
the  imaginative  idea  that  objects  have  lives  of  their  own.  Here, 
she  has  collected  a  set  of  stories  and  rhymes  in  which  objects 
("inanimate  stuff")  come  to  life  and  live  out  their  nonsensical 
dramas.  Included  in  the  collection  is  Joseph  Jacobs's  "Johnny- 
cake,"  a  version  of  the  gingerbread  boy,  Hans  Christian  An- 
dersen's "The  Shepherdess  and  the  Chimney  Sweep,"  and  "The 
Sorcerer's  Apprentice."  Cecil's  own  tale  of  "The  Voracious  Vac- 
uum Cleaner"  plays  on  an  early  fear  of  many  children. 

6.202  Cole,  Babette.  King  Change-a-lot.  Illustrated  by  Babette  Cole.  G. 
P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21670-7.  29p.  4-8. 

Things  in  the  land  of  Spendfortune  couldn't  be  worse,  so  baby 
Prince  Change-a-lot  decides  that  he  can  run  the  kingdom  better 
than  his  mom  and  dad.  With  the  help  of  a  genie,  the  prince 
becomes  king  and  makes  a  few  changes  that  save  the  kingdom 
from  ruin.  In  the  tradition  of  her  Princess  Smartypants  and  Prince 
Cinders,  Babette  Cole  tells  a  story  with  a  royal  touch  that  is  sure 
to  tickle  the  funny  bone. 

6.203  Cole,  Babette.  Tarzanna!  Illustrated  by  Babette  Cole.  G.  P.  Put- 
nam's Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-21837-8.  32p.  4-8. 

Tarzanna  has  yellow  straw-like  hair,  wears  skimpy  animal  skins 
and  red  lipstick,  and  swings  on  vines  with  her  friends,  the  ani- 
mals. One  day  she  captures  a  strange  animal  who  happens  to  be 
a  boy  studying  spiders  in  the  jungle.  Gerald  teaches  Tarzanna 
English  and  takes  her  home  with  him.  In  New  York,  Tarzanna 
misses  the  jungle,  sets  the  zoo  animals  free,  runs  away  with 
Gerald  and  the  animals,  and  even  saves  the  president — who 
gratefully  pays  everyone's  airfare  back  to  the  jungle. 

6.204  Coville,  Bruce.  My  Teacher  Fried  My  Brains.  Illustrated  by  John 
Pierard.  Pocket  Books/Minstrel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-671-72710- 
9. 136p.  8-12. 

In  the  sequel  to  My  Teacher  Is  an  Alien,  seventh-grader  Duncan 
Dougal  discovers  that  the  aliens  that  caused  nerdy  Peter 
Thompson's  disappearance  have  not  yet  vacated  planet  Earth. 
Since  Duncan  has  a  reputation  for  being  a  troublemaker,  no  one 
is  likely  to  believe  him.  No  one,  that  is,  except  vulnerable  Miss 
Karpou,  the  new  home  economics  teacher.  But  is  Miss  Karpou 


ERIC 


293 


250 


Fantasy 


really  who  she  seems?  Bruce  Coville  mixes  realism  with  just  the 
right  elixir  of  fantasy,  humor,  and  issues. 

6.205  Cummings,  Pat.  Petey  Moroni's  Camp  Runamok  Diary  Illus- 
trated by  Pat  Cummings.  Bradbury  Press,  1992.  ISBN  0-02- 
725513. 32p.  5-8  (est.). 

The  kids  at  Camp  Runamok  have  been  losing  their  snacks — their 
cheese  twists,  their  Puff  'n'  Stuff  pastries,  and  their  Caramel 
Crunchies.  But  the  clues  are  telling:  furry  hand,  little  footprints, 
good  climber.  Petey  Moroni  keeps  track  in  his  bright  yellow 
diary.  By  "Day  5,"  readers  get  a  good  look  at  the  robber  raccoon, 
which  continues  to  elude  the  campers.  A  final  hilarious  spread 
shows  an  overstuffed  raccoon  flat  on  its  back  awash  in  junk  food 
wrappers  and  candy  bits. 

6.206  Dahl,  Roald.  Esio  Trot  Illustrated  by  Quentin  Blake.  Viking 
Penguin,  1990.  ISBN  0-670-83451-3.  64p.  6-9  (est.). 

Mrs.  Silver  loves  her  tortoise,  Alfie.  Mr.  Hoppy,  her  neighbor, 
loves  his  garden.  But  Mr.  Hoppy  also  secretly  loves  Mrs.  Silver. 
In  this  happy  little  tale,  Mr.  Hoppy  devises  a  "magical"  scheme 
to  convince  Mrs.  Silver  that  Alfie  is  growing  swiftly,  all  in  the 
hope  of  winning  her  affection.  Mrs.  Silver  offers  to  be  his  "slave 
for  life"  if  murmuring  "Esio  Trot"  (tortoise  spelled  backward) 
will  help  Alfie  grow.  Quentin  Blake's  familiar  penned  drawings 
reflect  the  whimsical  plot. 

6.207  Gilman,  Phoebe.  Grandma  and  the  Pirates,  Illustrated  by 
Phoebe  Gilman.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-590- 
43426-8.  32p.  5-8. 

Grandma,  Melissa,  and  Oliver  the  parrot  are  kidnapped  by  pi- 
rates. At  first,  life  on  board  a  pirate  ship  isn't  so  bad.  Oliver 
learns  to  sing  pirate  songs,  Grandma  cooks  lots  of  noodle  pud- 
ding, and  Melissa  helps  sail  the  ship.  But  the  pirates  are  mean 
and  nasty,  so  Grandma,  Melissa,  and  Oliver  repeatedly,  though 
unsuccessfully,  try  to  escape  from  the  ship.  Then,  when  Melissa 
realizes  their  tactics  have  been  wrong  all  along,  the  tables  are 
finally  turned. 

6.208  Henwood,  Simon.  The  Clock  Shop.  Illustrated  by  Simon  Hen- 
wood.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux.  ISBN  0-374-31380-6.  24p.  4-7 
(est). 

The  townspeople  have  all  kinds  of  clocks,  from  the  mundane  to 
the  somewhat  fantastic,  and  the  clockmaker  is  always  ready 


ERLC 


300 


Humorous  Fantasy 


251 


with  his  took  to  fix  the  broken  ones.  Sometimes  the  clockmaker 
worries  about  what  would  happen  if  every  clock  stopped  at  the 
same  time,  but  he  knows  that  could  never  happen.  Zany,  action- 
packed  illustrations  reflect  the  action-packed  life  of  the  town's 
most  responsible  citizen. 

6.209  Lent,  Blair.  Molasses  Flood.  Illustrated  by  Blair  Lent.  Houghton 
Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-45314-3.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 

Charley  Owen  Muldoon  lives  near  a  molasses  tank  by  the  Bos- 
ton waterfront  at  the  turn  of  the  twentieth  century.  On  one  warm 
January  day,  the  molasses  tank  expands  and  explodes,  flooding 
Boston  with  a  "heavy,  sticky,  slow-moving  sea."  Exaggerating 
from  an  actual  historical  event,  the  author  has  created  a  Boston 
of  his  mother's  time,  as  well  as  an  explanation  for  its  configura- 
tion. Charley's  house,  along  with  trolleys,  carts,  and  ferries, 
floats  on  molasses  past  identifiable  landmarks. 

6.210  Mahy,  Margaret.  The  Blood-and-Thunder  Adventure  on  Hurri- 
cane Peak.  Illustrated  by  Wendy  Smith.  Margaret  K.  McElderry 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-50488-8. 132p.  8-12  (est.). 

In  a  zany  tale  of  magic,  mayhem,  and  mistaken  identities,  a 
wicked  industrialist  learns  that  crime  does  not  pay,  and  a  scien- 
tist and  magician  learn  to  respect  each  other's  crafts.  Besides  all 
that,  young  Huxley  and  Zaza  Hammond  learn  that  Hurricane 
Peak  School  is  a  perfect  place  for  writing  and  illustrating  their 
blood-and-thunder  stories — especially  since  hurricanes  are  a 
daily  occurrence,  the  head  prefect  is  a  talking  cat,  and  the  head 
mistress  has  been  missing  for  forty  years. 

6.211  Mahy,  Margaret.  The  Horrendous  Hullabaloo.  Illustrated  by 
Patricia  MacCarthy.  Viking  Penguin/Vanessa  Hamilton  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-670-84547-7. 26p.  4-8  (est.). 

Peregrine  the  Pirate  is  certain  that  his  aunt  and  his  parrot  would 
not  enjoy  the  horrendous  hullabaloos  at  the  pirate  parties  that 
he  attends,  so  he  leaves  the  two  of  them  at  home  to  cook  and  tidy 
up  while  he  enjoys  his  pirate's  life.  But  one  day  his  auntie  and 
parrot  have  had  enough  of  abandonment;  they  join  together  to 
plan  a  hullabaloo  of  their  own,  one  with  plenty  of  rumplebump- 
kins  and  alliterative  phrases.  Patricia  MacCarthy's  trademark 
white-edged  paintings  contrast  with  the  hullabaloo  colors. 

6.212  Mahy,  Margaret.  The  Pumpkin  Man  and  the  Crafty  Creeper. 
Illustrated  by  Helen  Craig.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books, 
1991.  ISBN  0-688-10348-0. 32p.  5-8. 


3'Ji 


252 


Fantasy 


When  a  talking  plant  begs  Mr.  Parkin  to  save  it  from  the  cruel 
life  that  it  leads  in  Lily  Rose  Willowherb's  garden,  he  feels  com- 
pelled to  respond  to  its  plight.  Yet  when  the  plant  shows  its  true 
colors  and  becomes  a  conniving,  demanding  creeper,  it  is  poor 
Mr.  Parkin  who  needs  rescuing.  The  plant  gains  increasing 
prominence  illustration  by  illustration  until  Mr.  Parkin's  even- 
tual rescue. 

6.213  Marshall,  James.  The  Cut-Ups  Crack  Up.  Illustrated  by  James 
Marshall.  Viking  Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670-84486-1.  32p.  3-8 
(est). 

Joe  and  Spuds,  the  cut-ups  of  all  time,  exaggerate  just  a  bit  too 
much  to  friends  Charles  Andrew  Frothingham  and  Mary 
Frances  Hooley.  This  time  the  boys  claim  that  they  have  their 
own  car.  To  prove  it,  they  intend  to  video  themselves  "just  sit- 
ting" in  Principal  Lamar  J.  Spurgle's  fancy  red  sports  car.  But 
once  in  the  car,  Joe  and  Spuds  are  off  for  a  wacky  ride.  As  in  all 
their  adventures,  the  cut-ups  are  sassy  and  sly,  but  also  good-hu- 
mored, constantly  surprised,  and  funny. 

6.214  Patron,  Susan.  Burgoo  Stew.  Illustrated  by  Mike  Shenon.  Or- 
chard Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08516-3. 
32p.  S-6. 

In  this  French  folktale,  five  quarrelsome,  rowdy  boys  set  out  to 
find  Old  Billy  Que  to  see  if  he  has  some  food  that  they  can  steal. 
The  answer  is  burgoo  stew— a  version  of  the  old  favorite,  "Stone 
Soup,"  with  its  "secret  ingredient."  The  boys  help  out  with  po- 
tatoes, carrots,  onions,  and  stew  fixings  as  Old  Billy  requests. 
Illustrations  are  humorous  watercolor  scenes  of  good  stew  and 
a  wise  cook  curing  the  crankies  and  the  hungries.  (At  least  "they 
were  never,  ever  quite  so  bad  or  quite  so  hungry  again.") 

6.215  Provensen,  Alice.  Punch  in  New  York.  Illustrated  by  Alice 
Provensen.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-82790-8.  32p.  3-8. 

When  the  bag  containing  Punch,  the  brawling  star  of  the  Punch 
and  Judy  puppet  show,  is  stolen  from  Professore  Tucci-Piccini  at 
the  smoggy  New  York  City  airport,  the  city  itself  has  much  to 
fear.  Punch  rips  off  a  hot  dog  vendor,  foils  a  band  of  muggers, 
beats  a  nasty  man,  and  becomes  chauffeur  for  the  richest  man  in 
the  world  before  reuniting  with  his  friends.  While  Punch's  noto- 
rious escapades  could  benefit  from  an  adult's  explanation,  Alice 
Provensen's  comical  oil  paintings  are  rich  with  the  characteristic 
energy  of  New  York  City.  New  York  Times  Best-Illustrated  Chil- 
dren's Books,  1991. 


3<j2 


Humorous  Fantasy 


253 


6.216  Pulver,  Robin.  Nobody's  Mother  Is  in  Second  Grade.  Illustrated 
by  G.  Brian  Karas.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN 
0-8037-1211-1. 32p.  4^8  (est.). 

Of  course  mothers  don't  go  to  second  grade.  "That  would  be 
ridiculous/'  Cassandra  says.  But  what  if  Mother  loved  second 
grade  and  desperately  wishes  she  could  go  back?  The  only  solu- 
tion is  for  Mother  to  visit  second  grade  disguised  as  a  plant  (so 
as  not  to  be  ridiculous).  "There  is  something  peculiar  about  that 
plant/'  the  children  whisper — a  plant  that  plays  on  the  play- 
ground, eats  lunch,  and  gives  hugs.  The  cartoon-like  plant  mom 
is  truly  (and  purposefully)  ridiculous. 

6.217  Remkiewicz,  Frank.  The  Last  Time  I  Saw  Harris.  Illustrated  by 
Frank  Remkiewicz.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-688-10292-1.  32p.  5  and  up. 

Little  rich  boy  Edmund  and  his  best  friend,  a  talking  parrot 
named  Harris,  like  to  play  with  color  flash  cards.  When  Harris 
gets  blown  out  the  window  in  a  windstorm,  Edmund  and  Hig- 
gins,  the  chauffeur,  set  out  to  find  him.  Traveling  in  a  long 
limousine,  they  show  color  flash  cards  to  many  different  birds 
until  they  find  the  one  that  knows  the  entire  color  wheel.  Bor- 
dered watercolor  line  drawings  supplement  the  text  with  their 
humorous  portrayal  of  the  trappings  of  wealth. 

6.218  Sabraw,  John.  I  Wouldn't  Be  Scared.  Illustrated  by  John  Sabraw. 
Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08418- 
3.  32p.  4^6. 

John  Sabraw's  first  book  humorously  explores  the  theme  of  con- 
fronting one's  fears.  A  gallant  boy  hunts  an  imaginary  beast 
through  his  neighborhood,  imagining  how  he  would  defeat  his 
foe  at  every  turn.  The  hero  is  distinctively  drawn,  with  large 
round  eyes,  pencil-thin  arms,  and  coonskin  cap.  Sabraw's  car- 
toon-like illustrations  convey  whimsy  and  humor.  Elementary 
students  could  create  their  own  drawings  of  monsters  to  defeat. 

6.219  Smith,  Lane.  Glasses  (Who  Needs  'em?).  Illustrated  by  Lane 
Smith.  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-84160-9. 30p.  5-8  (est.). 

When  the  young  narrator  finds  out  from  his  optometrist  that  he 
needs  glasses,  the  boy  indignantly  refuses.  So,  the  slightly  daffy 
doctor  points  out  that  "lots  of  folks  wear  glasses  and  love  'em." 
Beginning  with  the  boy's  mom  and  dad  and  moving  on  to  pota- 
toes, planets,  and  "short,  fuzzy  bunnies,"  the  mad  doctor  be- 
comes more  and  more  agitated  as  he  enumerates  a  bizarre  list  of 


3  J  3 


254 


Fantasy 


eyeglass  wearers.  Lane  Smith's  characteristically  surreal  illustra- 
tions provide  an  added  dimension  of  wackiness  and  fun.  ALA 
Notable  Children's  Books,  1992. 

6.220  Stevenson,  James.  National  Worm  Day.  Illustrated  by  James 
Stevenson.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08772-8. 40p.  5 
and  up. 

A  worm,  snail,  rhinoceros,  and  mole  are  the  cast  of  characters  in 
this  collection  of  three  witty  vignettes.  Together  they  celebrate 
National  Worm  Day,  friendship,  and  the  fact  that  being  different 
is  what  makes  each  one  special.  The  pithy  text  is  primarily 
dialogue,  supported  by  James  Stevenson's  watercolor  and  black- 
pen  illustrations  of  the  four  friends  in  action. 

6.221  Stevenson,  James.  Rolling  Rose.  Illustrated  by  James  Stevenson. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10675-7.  24p.  3  and  up. 

One  day  baby  Rose  rolls  unnoticed  out  of  the  kitchen  door  in  her 
baby  stroller.  She  is  soon  joined  by  eighty-four  other  babies  on 
wheels  for  a  city  tour  and  a  cioss-country  jaunt.  James  Steven- 
son's light  and  cheery  watercolors  fit  the  mood  of  the  story 
perfectly,  right  down  to  the  cows'  blank  faces  as  the  baby  parade 
rolls  past.  This  rollicking  peripatetic  adventure  introduces  a 
baby  who  knows  how  to  get  real  mileage  out  of  her  baby  stroller. 

6.222  Willis,  Val.  The  Surprise  in  the  Wardrobe.  Illustrated  by  John 
Shelley.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-37309-4. 
30p.  5-8  (est.). 

In  the  second  tale  of  Bobby  Bell's  unusual  surprises,  Bobby 
amazes  his  classmates  with  a  witch  who  lives  in  his  wardrobe. 
The  children  have  a  riotous  time  with  a  witch  who  can  do  loop- 
the-loops  on  her  broom  and  turn  cabbage  and  stew  into  french 
fries  and  hot  dogs.  But  mean-spirited  Jenny  Wood  gets  fat  green 
frogs  on  her  plate,  and  defiant  Peter  Drew  sets  off  a  spell  of  bats 
and  beetles.  Detailed  borders  surround  action-packed  scenes 
and  bear  close  inspection. 

6.223  Wood,  Audrey.  Silly  Sally.  Illustrated  by  Audrey  Wood.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-274428-2.  32p.  3-7. 

When  red-haired  Silly  Sally  goes  to  town,  she  walks  "back- 
wards, upside  down."  Along  the  way,  she  meets  a  pig,  a  loon, 
and  a  sheep,  with  whom  she  dances,  plays  leapfrog,  and  finally 
falls  asleep.  It's  forward-walking,  right-side-up  Neddy  Butter- 
cup that  tickles  Sally  and  thereby  gets  the  gang  up  and  active 


Imagination  and  Dreams 


again.  This  rhyming  tale  is  illustrated  in  big,  bright  pastel  colors 
and  contains  lively  characters  with  rosy  cheeks  and  spirited 
expressions. 

6.224  Yorinks,  Arthur.  Oh,  Brother.  Illustrated  by  Richard  Egielski. 
Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux/Michael  di  Capua  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-374-35599-1.  32p.  6-9. 

In  a  tongue-in-cheek  Horatio  Alger  story,  two  naughty  brothers 
are  shipwrecked,  washed  up  in  New  York,  and  "not  spared  the 
harshness  of  life/'  Through  all  their  depression-era  travails,  they 
never  stop  arguing.  But  fate  turns  when  Nathan,  the  old  tailor, 
makes  them  his  sons  and  apprentices.  At  Nathan's  death,  the 
two  boys  disguise  themselves  as  old  men  and  continue  to  run 
the  tailor  shop.  That,  of  course,  is  when  they  meet  Mrs.  Guggen- 
heim, who  takes  them  to  the  Queen  

6.225  Yorinks,  Arthur.  Ugh.  Illustrated  by  Richard  Egielski.  Farrar, 
Straus  and  Giroux/Michael  di  Capua  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-374- 
38028-7. 32p.  4-8  (est.). 

In  a  Cirderella-like  spoof,  a  cave  boy,  Ugh,  has  a  miserable  life. 
His  brothers  and  sisters  command  him:  "Rub  feet!"  "Get  grub!" 
"Mop  floor!"  When  cave  scientist  Oy  invents  the  wheel,  the  cave 
world  is  not  impressed  ("Wheel  stink!"  announces  the  hunter, 
Eh).  But  Ugh  uses  the  wheel  to  make  a  bicycle.  Amazed,  the  cave 
world  looks  high  and  low  for  the  one  who  can  ride  this  creation: 
"Whoever  make  this,  he  be  king!"  And  so,  with  action  aplenty, 
Ugh,  "be  big-shot  boy." 

Imagination  and  Dreams 

6.226  Alcorn,  Johnny.  Rembrandt's  Beret;  or,  The  Painter's  Crown. 
Illustrated  by  Stephen  Alcorn.  Tambourine  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-688-10207-7.  32p.  6  and  up. 

The  Alcorn  brothers,  author  and  illustrator,  tell  young  readers  to 

"seek  out  paintings  by  the  Old  Masters  They  will  speak  to 

you."  The  painter  grandfather  who  narrates  this  tale  is  recount- 
ing a  time  in  his  youth  when  he  was  locked  in  the  Uffizi  Gallery 
of  Florence,  Italy.  The  paintings  not  only  spoke  to  him  but  even 
contested  the  right  to  paint  his  portrait.  Winner  over  Rubens, 
Caravaggio,  Michelangelo,  and  Titian  was  Rembrandt,  who 
loaned  his  beret  and  brushes  to  the  painter-to-be.  Thickly  ap- 
plied oils  capture  the  Old  Masters7  styles. 


256 


Fantasy 


6.227  Allison,  Diane  Worfolk.  This  Is  the  Key  to  the  Kingdom,  Illus- 
trated by  Diane  Worfolk  Allison.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316- 
03432-0.  30p.  4-S  (est.). 

Diane  Worfolk  Allison's  full-page,  subtle  watercolors  and  famil- 
iar children's  chant  lead  readers  through  the  kingdom  to  the  city, 

to  the  town,  to  the  street,  to  the  lane  The  reader  follows  a 

young  African  American  child  leaving  a  bleak  urban  environ- 
ment behind  as  she  travels  through  a  splendid  fantasy  kingdom 
filled  with  beauty  and  love.  But  there's  more  at  work  here  than 
imagination.  In  the  end,  she  must  retrace  her  travels.  Still,  other 
lives  are  enriched  by  her  contact  with  imagined  kingdoms,  prov- 
ing love  is  the  real  key. 

6.228  Anderson,  Joan.  Harry's  Helicopter.  Photographs  by  George 
Ancona.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09187-3.  32p.  5 
and  up. 

Harry  Hopkins  likes  helicopters  better  than  anything  else.  On 
Harry's  birthday,  his  father  makes  him  a  bright  red  cardboard 
helicopter  big  enough  for  Harry  to  climb  into.  Steering  with  a 
plumber's  friend,  Harry  pretends  to  fly  his  chopper,  dreaming 
of  a  time  when  he  and  his  helicopter  will  really  fly.  And  then  it 
happens.  With  George  Ancona's  sharp  color  photographs, 
young  readers  can  fly  with  Harry  over  houses  and  steeples 
toward  Central  Park,  skyscrapers,  and  even  the  Statue  of  Liberty. 

6.229  Baillie,  Allan.  Drac  and  the  Gremlin.  Illustrated  by  Jane  Tanner. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-8037-0628-6.  32p. 

Drac,  a  sun-kissed  Warrior  Queen  of  lirnol  Two,  must  capture 
the  Gremlin  of  the  Groaning  Grotto  (sometimes  known  as  her 
brother).  There  are  really  two  stories  here — one  in  text,  the  other 
in  pictures.  The  children's  imaginations  elevate  the  text  to  high 
fantasy,  much  like  Calvin  in  his  adventures  with  Hobbes,  while 
the  realistic  paintings  are  of  two  children  playing  with  their  pets. 
Because  the  planet  is  saved,  the  White  Wizard  (sometimes  called 
Dad),  rewards  them  with  Twin  Crimson  Cones  (sometimes 
called  ice  cream). 

6.230  Bate,  Lucy.  How  Georgina  Drove  the  Car  Very  Carefully  from 
Boston  to  New  York.  Illustrated  by  Tamar  Taylor.  Crown,  1989. 
ISBN  0-517-57142-0.  32p.  3-6. 

One  day  while  bouncing  on  her  mother's  knee,  little  Georgina 
announces,  "I  drive  the  car."  So  begins  her  imaginary  family  trip 


ERLC  °  0 


Imagination  and  Dreams 


257 


to  visit  grandparents  in  New  York.  There  are  sights  to  be  seen 
along  the  way,  but  not  for  Georgina;  she  is  too  occupied  with 
driving  very  carefully;  although  she  does  have  time  for  a  real 
kid-style  meal  en  route.  Through  simple  text  and  stylized  draw- 
ings, being  responsible  is  cast  in  a  clearly  positive  light. 

6.231  Bax,  Martin.  Edmond  Went  Far  Away.  Illustrated  by  Michael 
Foreman.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-22105-7. 
48p.  4-8. 

Edmond  lives  on  a  farm  where  he  has  many  animal  friends. 
After  he  tells  each  of  his  friends  that  he  is  going  away,  he  follows 
the  path  over  the  hill  to  "far  away/'  imagining  that  he  is  accom- 
panied by  them.  When  Edmond  returns  home  the  next  morning, 
all  of  his  friends  are  happy  to  see  him,  including  the  sow  and  her 
brand  new  piglets.  Rich,  descriptive  language  and  Michael  Fore- 
man's watercolors  evoke  a  warm,  secure  feeling.  This  story  is  a 
good  example  of  the  "home-adventure-home"  pattern  in  litera- 
ture. 

6.232  Bios,  Joan  W.  Lottie's  Circus.  Illustrated  by  Irene  Trivas.  Morrow 
Junior  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-06747-6. 32p.  6-10  (est.). 

For  something  special  to  happen,  Lottie  explains  to  her  cat  and 
her  toys,  "you  make-believe/'  Storybooks  help  with  Lottie's 
imagining.  As  readers  turn  the  pages,  Lottie's  imagination  cre- 
ates the  extravaganza  of  a  circus  from  preparation  to  perform- 
ance. Irene  Trivas's  paintings  show  an  energetic  child,  her  cat 
Famous,  and  her  toys  in  their  circus  roles — as  ringmaster,  per- 
formers, and  audience.  The  imaginative  adventure  is  a  big-top 
success.  Later,  snug  on  her  father's  lap  for  story  time,  Lottie's 
adventure  tucks  itself  in. 

6.233  Burningham,  John.  Hey!  Get  Off  Our  Train.  Illustrated  by  John 
Burningham.  Crown,  1989.  ISBN  0-517-57643-0.  32p.  2-6  (est.). 

When  a  pajama-clad  boy  and  a  pajama-case  dog  are  scooted  to 
bed,  they  climb  aboard  a  toy  train  and  begin  a  dream  journey 
through  the  habitats  of  endangered  species.  One  by  one,  an 
elephant,  seal,  whooping  crane,  tiger,  and  polar  bear  board  the 
train.  Each  is  met  with  the  shout:  "Hey!  Get  off  our  train."  Each 
in  turn  explains  its  plight  and,  in  cumulative  fashion,  warns  that 
"soon  there  will  be  none  of  us  left."  Sparse  text  and  wispy  line 
drawings  of  characters  are  juxtaposed  against  full-page  impres- 
sions of  lemon  skies,  frothy  snows,  and  drenching  rains. 


er|c  3''7 


258 


Fantasy 


6.234  Carlstrom,  Nancy  White.  Who  Gets  the  Sun  out  of  Bed?  Illus- 
trated by  David  McPhail.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-12862- 
7.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

"IN  THE  COLD  DARK  WINTER,  /  who  gets  the  sun  out  of 

bed?"  Come  the  whispered  replies:  "Not  the  spruce  tree  " 

"Not  the  stars  "  As  the  turning  Earth  reveals  the  glowing 

four-poster  bed  of  the  rising  sun,  part  of  the  answer  is  revealed: 
Moon!  "Get  the  sun  out  of  bed,  Moon!"  Bunny  Midnight  has  a 
role  to  play  as  well,  as  does  the  boy,  Nicholas.  Moon  nudges 
Midnight,  who  kisses  the  boy,  who  greets  the  sun.  Peeking  from 
beneath  his  covers,  Sim  opens  one  eye. 

6.235  Cassedy,  Sylvia.  Lucie  Babbidge's  House.  Thomas  Y.  Crowell, 
1989.  ISBN  0-690-04798-3. 243p.  9-12. 

Lucie's  unhappy  life  at  the  orphanage  is  changed  when  she  finds 
a  dollhouse  with  a  family  of  dolls.  Lucie,  called  Goosey-Loosey 
by  her  classmates,  retreats  to  the  perfect  life  of  her  new  make-be- 
lieve family,  and  this  secret  life  becomes  her  reality. 

6.236  Desaix,  Frank.  Hilary  and  the  Lions.  Illustrated  by  Debbi  Dur- 
land  Desaix.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-33237- 
1.  30p.  4^8  (est). 

After  losing  her  parents  in  the  hubbub  of  New  York  City,  Hilary 
falls  asleep  against  one  of  the  two  great  stone  lions  in  front  of  the 
library  steps.  When  the  lions  come  alive  for  their  one  magic 
night  a  year,  Hilary  rides  them  through  the  streets  of  New  York. 
Debbi  Durland  Desaix's  use  of  muted  browns,  grays,  and  greens 
evokes  a  dream-like  quality  appropriate  for  the  night's  adven- 
ture and  making  new  friends. 

6.237  Dorros,  Arthur.  Abuela.  Illustrated  by  Elisa  Kleven.  Dutton 
Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44750-4. 40p.  4-8. 

Abuela  is  the  ideal  melding  of  story  and  illustration.  In  Arthur 
Dorros's  joyful,  loving  story,  a  young  girl  fantasizes  flying  over 
New  York  City  with  her  beloved  grandmother.  The  love  between 
granddaughter  and  grandmother  shines  through  the  lyrical  lan- 
guage and  rich  illustrations.  Dorros's  natural  incorporation  of 
Spanish  words  into  the  story  and  the  folk-art  style  of  Elisa 
Klevin's  mixed-media  illustrations  give  the  book  a  unique  mul- 
ticultural flavor.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1992. 

6.238  Farber,  Norma.  Return  of  the  Shadows.  Illustrated  by  Andrea 
Baruffi.  HarperCollins /Laura  Geringer  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-06- 
020519-9.  38p.  4-8. 


Imagination  and  Dreams 


259 


When  Mimi  falls  asleep,  her  shadow  slips  out,  leading  other 
shadows  to  break  free  and  roam  in  unlikely  places.  A  camel's 
shadow  rests  under  an  iceberg,  and  a  rhino's  shadow  leans  on 
the  Washington  Monument.  A  skyscraper's  shadow  creeps  into 
the  jungle,  and  a  bicycle's  shadow  rides  on  clouds  beside  a 
plane.  At  twilight,  the  shadows  become  bewildered  and  disori- 
ented, "no  longer  sure  of  what  they  were."  In  darkness,  shadows 
long  for  home  and  the  shape  that  they  know  best.  At  sunrise, 
each  rushes  to  find  the  place  it  had  been  born.  The  pictures  are 
silent  and  surreal-^like  shadows. 

6*239  Gilden,  Mel.  Harry  Newberry  and  the  Raiders  of  the  Red 
Drink,  Henry  Holt,  1989.  ISBN  0-8050-0698-2. 151p.  9-13  (est.). 

Frequently  comic-book  characters  come  alive  in  a  child's  imagi- 
nation. But  what  happens  when  the  whole  family  (except  un- 
imaginative Dad)  and  the  entire  town  start  seeing  the  comic- 
book heroes  invading  their  community?  Harry  Newberry  has 
reason  to  believe  that  his  own  mother  may  be  super  hero  Tuatara 
herself.  A  visit  to  Aunt  Agnes  provides  an  exciting  adventure 
which  helps  unravel  the  mysterious  goings-on.  Fact  is  difficult 
to  distinguish  from  fantasy  throughout  this  fun  and  farfetched 
mystery. 

6.240  Heine,  Helme  (translated  by  Ralph  Manheim).  The  Marvelous 
Journey  through  the  Night  Illustrated  by  Helme  Heine.  Farrar, 
Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-38478-9.  26p.  5-10. 

German  author /illustrator  Helme  Heine  has  created  an  evoca- 
tive and  whimsical  explanation  for  dreaming — a  "marvelous 
journey"  that  one  undertakes  without  hindrance  from  passport, 
money,  or  luggage.  The  text  is  simple  and  poetic,  describing 
irresistible  Sleep  who,  with  his  moon  lantern,  makes  your  eye- 
lids droop  and  leads  you  to  his  sister,  Dream,  who  can  guide  you 
to  the  land  of  Heart's  Desire.  Full-color  surrealistic  paintings  are 
dream-touched,  but  comforting. 

6*241  James,  Betsy.  The  Dream  Stair.  Illustrated  by  Richard  Jesse  Wat- 
son. Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-022788-5. 32p.  5-7  (est.). 

At  bedtime,  a  young  Hispanic  child  receives  a  candle  from  her 
grandmother  to  keep  her  safe.  As  she  dreams,  Granny's  candle 
leads  her  up  the  dream  stairs  to  play  in  an  attic  room,  then  down 
the  stairs  to  the  cellar  room  for  more  play,  then  to  bed.  In  the 
morning,  Granny  is  there  to  hear  about  her  dreams.  Bold  color 
splotches  of  a  aream  world  where  inanimate  things  have  life 
contrast  with  the  warm-toned  realism  of  Granny's  home. 


o  3-ja 

ERIC 


260 


Fantasy 


6.242  Jones,  Diana  Wynne.  Yes,  Dear.  Illustrated  by  Graham  Philpot. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11195-5.  28p.  4  and  up. 

Autumn  leaves  are  falling,  and  Kay  catches  a  magic  one.  Unfor- 
tunately, no  one  in  her  family  has  time  to  listen  to  stories  about 
a  golden  leaf's  wonderful  talents.  Then  Kay  approaches  Grand- 
mother, who  understands  because  she,  too,  had  a  magic  leaf  as 
a  child.  The  watercolored  pen-and-ink  drawings  add  humorous 
details  and  interesting  perspectives. 

6.243  Leverich,  Kathleen.  Hilary  and  the  Troublemakers.  Illustrated 
by  Walter  Lorraine.  Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10857- 
1. 138p.  6-9  (est). 

For  Hilary,  troublemakers  are  just  part  of  life.  A  huge,  home- 
work-eating owl  waylays  her  on  the  way  to  school.  Her  piggy 
bank  absolutely  refuses  to  yield  her  savings  when  she  truly 
intends  to  buy  her  family  gifts.  Even  innocent-looking  snow 
people,  built  when  she  was  supposed  to  be  baby-sitting  indoors, 
become  blackmailing  terrorists  at  her  bedroom  window,  de- 
manding her  crayons  and  her  baby  cousin.  With  straight-faced 
humor,  Kathleen  Leverich  sketches  Hilary's  imaginative  crea- 
tures so  that  they  feel  real  to  readers,  too. 

6.244  Lindbergh,  Reeve.  Benjamin's  Barn.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Jeffers. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037-0614-6.  24p. 
3-8. 

The  talented  author  and  illustrator  of  Midnight  Farm  team  up 
again  to  produce  in  gentle  verse  and  intricately  detailed  paint- 
ings the  warmth  and  imaginative  possibilities  that  an  ordinary 
barn  has  for  a  small  boy.  For  Benjamin's  barn  is  so  big,  tall,  wide, 
and  soft  that  it  can  shelter  such  fantasies  as  elephants,  pteradac- 
tyls,  a  pirate  ship,  an  entire  brass  band,  or  a  royal  family.  But 
since  the  barn  is  already  full  of  its  own  standard  residents,  a 
satisfied  Benjamin  decides  that  he  " won't  let  the  rest  in  after  all/7 

6.245  Martin,  Rafe.  Will's  Mammoth.  Illustrated  by  Stephen  Gammell. 
G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21627-8.  29p.  4-8  (est.). 

Even  though  no  one  else  believes  that  mammoths  exist,  a  very 
special  one  is  still  alive  and  well  in  Will's  imagination.  Stephen 
Gammeirs  beautiful  illustrations  depict  a  day  in  which  Will  has 
a  wordless  romp  in  the  snow  with  his  very  own  mammoth  and 
several  other  beasts  before  his  mother  calls  him  to  dinner.  Chil- 
dren with  an  interest  in  prehistoric  creatures  will  want  this  on 


3i0 


Imagination  and  Dreams 


261 


their  reading  lists.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1989;  School  Li- 
brary Journal  Best  Books,  1989;  Horn  Book  Fanfare,  1990. 

6.246  McLerran,  Alice.  Roxaboxen,  Illustrated  by  Barbara  Cooney. 
Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-07593-3.  30p. 
5-^8. 

To  those  who  have  not  been  to  Roxaboxen,  it  looks  like  any  hill 
in  the  desert — nothing  but  sand,  cactus,  rocks,  and  old  discarded 
boxes.  But  to  Marian  and  her  friends,  Roxaboxen  is  a  special 
place  with  buried  treasure,  ice  cream  parlors,  and  houses  of 
jewels.  Barbara  Cooney's  pastels,  shimmering  with  desert- hues, 
take  us  to  a  multidimensional  world  of  fantasy  and  play. 

6-247  McPhail,  David.  The  Party,  Illustrated  by  David  McPhail.  Little, 
Brown/Joy  Street  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-316-56330-7.  32p.  4-8. 

Beneath  his  bed  light,  a  young  boy  and  his  stuffed  animals  plan 
a  midnight  party.  When  Dad  comes  to  read  the  bedtime  story,  he 
falls  sound  asleep  on  the  bed.  But  the  party  must  go  on.  Stuffed 
friends  become  live  friends,  floating  on  balloons,  riding  the  elec- 
tric train,  dancing,  and  then  heading  to  the  kitchen  for  snacks. 
Even  sleeping  Dad  rides  the  elephant  to  the  kitchen.  David 
McPhail's  pajama-clad  host  and  his  lovable  menagerie  are  qui- 
etly raucous. 

6.248  Minarik,  Else  Holmelund.  The  Little  Girl  and  the  Dragon.  Illus- 
trated by  Martine  Gourbault.  Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN 
0-688-09914-9.  24p.  3-7  (est.). 

Once  a  little  girl  had  a  book  about  a  dragon,  and  all  was  well. 
Then  one  day,  the  dragon  gets  out  of  the  book,  swallows  the 
girl's  toys,  and  refuses  to  give  them  back.  It  takes  the  girl's  quick 
wits  and  intrepid  spirit  to  entrap  the  dragon  and  regain  what 
belongs  to  her.  Outsized  by  the  sprawling  lavender-green  mon- 
ster, the  child  is  more  than  a  match  for  the  creature's  intellect. 
The  dragon  book  is  instantly  recognizable  as  the  one  the  reader 
holds,  making  the  possibility  of  an  escaping  dragon  ongoing. 

6.249  Pfanner,  Louise.  Louise  Builds  a  House.  Illustrated  by  Louise 
Pfanner.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08396-9.  32p.  3-6. 

When  Louise  sets  out  to  build  her  dream  home,  she  imagines 
every  conceivable  detail — a  flat  roof  for  kite  flying,  big  windows 
for  reading,  a  tower  for  observing  the  stars,  and  even  a  moat  for 
her  boat.  After  seeing  Louise's  wonderful  house,  depicted  with 


311 


262 


Fantasy 


elemental  line  drawings  and  watercolor  washes,  children  may 
want  to  create  their  own  imaginary  dream  houses. 

6.250  Polacco,  Patricia.  Appelemando's  Dreams.  Illustrated  by  Patri- 
cia Polacco.  Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21800-9. 30p.  4-S. 

Appelemando  is  a  quiet,  slow  boy  who  lives  in  a  very  drab 
village  but  who  dreams  wondrously  beautiful  dreams  for  his 
friends.  One  day  his  dreams  escape,  exuding  fantastic  images 
into  the  lackluster  village.  At  first,  the  elders  don't  believe  in  the 
existence  or  worth  of  Appelemando's  special  gift,  but  after  a 
crisis,  even  the  suspicious  elders  cannot  deny  the  value  of  this 
gift.  Patricia  Polacco's  detailed  drawings  evoke  the  sentiments 
of  an  ethnic  village  and  the  magic  of  believing. 

6.251  Pringle,  Laurence.  Jesse  Builds  a  Road.  Illustrated  by  Leslie 
Holt  Morrill.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-775311-5.  30p.  3-6. 

Acclaimed  nonfiction  author  Laurence  Pringle  tries  his  hand  at 
writing  for  younger  children  in  this,  his  first  picture  book.  While 
Jesse  plays  with  his  dog  and  his  miniature  construction  machin- 
ery, his  toys  spring  to  life.  A  brief  but  factual  description  of  the 
digging,  scraping,  and  paving  required  to  build  a  road  evolves 
in  ttie  setting  of  Jesse's  playtime.  Watercolor  illustrations  are 
painted  from  perspectives  which  lend  energy  to  the  action. 

6.252  Reed,  Lynn  Rowe.  Rattlesnake  Stew.  Illustrated  by  Lynn  Rowe 
Reed.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-36190-8.  32p. 
3-7  (est.). 

A  nighttime  wind  whirls  and  swirls  Billy  out  of  his  bed;  roaring 
and  soaring,  it  transports  him  into  a  world  of  cowboys,  cacti, 
and  prairie  dogs.  Bright  oil  pastels  depict  the  dream  sequences 
in  a  closeup,  surrealistic  style,  while  lyrical  text  tells  of  Billy's 
adventures.  As  the  winds  return  Billy  to  his  own  bed,  his  mother 
is  calling  him  in  to  taste  the  rattlesnake  stew  that  she  has  made 
for  him. 

6.253  Riddell,  Chris.  The  Trouble  with  Elephants.  Illustrated  by  Chris 
Riddell.  Harper  and  Row/Harper  Trophy  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-397-32273-9.  22p.  3-7. 

According  to  one  little  girl,  the  trouble  with  elephants  is  that 
they  spill  bathwater,  leave  a  pink  elephant  ring  around  the  tub, 
and  slide  down  the  bannister  to  breakfast.  But  as  she  as  well  as 
others  who  share  this  book  soon  discover,  the  real  trouble  with 
elephants  is  that  "you  can't  help  but  love  them/'  Humorous 


312 


Imagination  and  Dreams 


263 


full-page  illustrations  that  depict  pachyderms  in  a  variety  of 
„  " troublesome"  predicaments  bring  to  life  a  little  girl's  imagina- 
tion and  adoration  for  a  much-loved  stuffed  animal. 

6.254  Ringgold,  Faith.  Tar  Beach.  Illustrated  by  Faith  Ringgold. 
Crown,  1991.  ISBN  0-517-58031-4.  32p.  4  and  up  (est). 

"Sleeping  on  Tar  Beach  was  magical.  Lying  on  the  roof  in  the 
night,  with  stars  and  skyscraper  buildings  all  around  me,  made 
me  feel  rich,  like  I  owned  all  that  I  could  see."  As  Cassie  sleeps 
on  the  rooftop  of  her  Harlem  apartment  building,  she  magically 
flies  over  the  city,  claiming  ownership  of  a  beautiful  bridge  and 
buildings  as  a  means  to  fulfill  her  dreams.  Text  appears  beneath 
each  double-page  acrylic  folk-art  painting,  as  does  a  reproduced 
segment  of  Faith  Ringgold's  story  quilt,  Tar  Beach,  one  of  five 
autobiographical  works  in  the  Women  on  the  Bridge  series 
hanging  in  New  York  City's  Guggenheim  Museum.  Caldecott 
Honor  Book,  1992;  Coretta  Scott  King  Award  (Illustration),  1992. 

6.255  Rodgers,  Frank.  Doodle  Dog.  Illustrated  by  Frank  Rodgers. 
Dutton  Children's  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-44585-4.  32p.  3-7. 

Little  Sam  wishes  hard  for  a  pet,  a  little  dog  that  can  fetch  and 
catch  and  sleep  on  his  bed.  So  Sam  and  his  mother  draw  the  dog 
that  he  wants — a  kind  of  doodle  picture  that  Sam  names  Doodle. 
Frank  Rodgers's  charming  story  captures  a  child  who  wants 
something  so  badly  that  the  dream  comes  alive.  Colorful, 
friendly  illustrations  give  Sam,  Mother,  and  Doodle  appeal. 

6.256  Rosenberg,  Liz.  Adelaide  and  the  Night  Train.  Illustrated  by 
Lisa  Desimini.  Harper  and  Row/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-06-025103-4.  30p.  3-7  (est.). 

Late  one  night,  Adelaide,  lying  wide  awake,  boards  the  whis- 
tling train  that  passes  by  her  house.  She  watches  nighttime  hap- 
penings from  its  window — a  waitress  serving  hamburgers  at  an 
all-night  diner,  an  owl  gliding  noiselessly  in  search  of  food,  and 
babies  dreaming  in  their  cribs.  After  this  extraordinary  trip, 
Adelaide  always  listens  for  the  night  train  to  lull  her  to  sleep  at 
bedtime.  Poetic,  rhythmic  prose  and  surrealistic  acrylic  paint- 
ings supply  a  dreamy  mystery  to  the  night  train's  ride. 

6.257  Rovetch,  Lissa.  Trigwater  Did  It.  Illustrated  by  Lissa  Rovetch. 
Morrow  Junior  Books /Seashore  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08058- 
8. 32p.  4-8  (est.). 


ERiC 


313 


264 


Fantasy 


Trouble  seems  to  follow  Arnie,  and  everyone  assumes  that  he  is 
the  trouble-maker.  No  one  believes  that  his  green  friend  Trigwa- 
ter  is  causing  the  difficulties;  after  all,  no  one  else  can  even  see 
Trigwater.  Finally,  when  the  principal  gives  Arnie  an  ultimatum, 
he  knows  that  he  must  teach  Trigwater  some  manners.  The  out- 
come of  Arnie's  campaign  delights  everyone.  Stylized  watercol- 
ors  contribute  to  the  mischievous  mood. 

6.258  Van  Laan,  Nancy.  A  Mouse  in  My  House.  Illustrated  by  Mar- 
jorie  Priceman.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0- 
679-90043.  32p.  3-7  (est). 

"  A  mouse  is  in  my  house— and  it  acts  like  me!"  Just  like  a  mouse, 
a  small  boy  invades  the  cookie  jar.  ("It  climbs  and  it  wriggles  as 
it  nibbles  and  it  giggles.")  In  rhyming,  rhythmic  text  ideal  for 
reading  aloud,  the  boy  becomes  other  creatures  as  well:  he's  a 
pouncing  cat,  a  toy-scattering  dog,  and  a  slippery,  bathtime  fish. 
Whatever  persona  is  adopted,  the  actions  are  guaranteed  to  be 
rambunctious.  Splashes  of  watercolor  spill  over  the  ink  line 
drawings,  giving  a  hasty  energy  to  the  animal-like  antics. 

6.259  Weir,  Alison.  Peter,  Good  Night.  Illustrated  by  Deborah  Kogan 
Ray.  E.  P.  Dutton,  1989.  ISBN  0-525-44464-5.  24p.  2-6. 

Peter  snuggles  in  bed  with  his  stuffed  animals  and  looks  out  of 
the  window.  One  by  one,  the  stars,  the  moon,  the  clouds,  the 
treetops,  the  night  bird,  the  fog,  the  breeze,  and  the  cat  wish  him 
good  night.  In  this  warm  and  gentle  book,  with  colored  pencil 
illustrations  in  muted  shades,  the  repetitive,  lyrical  prose  will 
appeal  for  bedtime  reading. 

6.260  Wiesner,  David.  Hurricane.  Illustrated  by  David  Wiesner.  Clar- 
ion Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-395-54382-7. 32p.  4-8. 

Delightful,  detailed,  and  realistic  watercolor  paintings  bring 
preparations  for  a  hurricane  to  life.  After  the  storm  passes,  two 
brothers'  imaginations  are  kindled  by  a  fallen  tree.  Their  days 
are  filled  with  forays  into  its  branches,  which  become  imaginary 
jungles,  oceans,  and  even  outer  space:  "The  tree  was  a  private 
place,  big  enough  for  secret  dreams,  small  enough  for  shared 
adventure."  The  arrival  of  men  with  a  chainsaw  is  a  disaster,  but 
the  boys  eye  the  remaining  tree  in  the  yard  with  childlike  hope. 

6.261  Willard,  Nancy.  The  High  Rise  Glorious  Skittle  Skat  Roarious 
Sky  Pie  Angel  Food  Cake.  Illustrated  by  Richard  Jesse  Watson. 
Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1990.  ISBN  0-15-234332-6. 64p.  6  and 
up. 


ERiC 


314 


Imagination  and  Dreams 


265 


To  bake  her  mother  the  best  birthday  cake  of  all,  a  young  girl . 
must  first  find  her  great-grandmother's  secret-ingredient  recipe 
for  a  High  Rise  Glorious  Skittle  Skat  Roarious  Sky  Pie  Angel 
Food  Cake.  Luckily,  Great-Grandmother  left  some  clues  in  her 
ledger  books.  Well-timed  heavenly  intervention  also  helps  to 
ensure  that  the  cake  is  baked  with  both  "evol"  and  a  golden 
thimble.  The  heavenly  "hosts''  are  a  festival  of  color  in  their 
robes,  feathers,  ribbons,  and  flowers. 

6.262  Wood,  Don,  and  Audrey  Wood.  Piggies.  Illustrated  by  Don 
Wood.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1991.  ISBN  0-15-256341-5. 
32p.  3-6  (est.). 

The  narrator,  whose  chubby,  childlike  hands  are  in  each  double- 
page  illustration  of  this  wonder-filled  book,  has  ten  little  imagi- 
nary piggies — fat  piggies  sit  on  the  thumbs,  smart  piggies  on 
the  index  fingers,  long  piggies  stretch  out  on  the  middle  fingers, 
silly  piggies  clown  on  the  ring  fingers,  and  wee  piggies  play  on 
the  little  fingers.  Together,  they  get  hot,  cold,  clean,  and  dirty — 
and  misbehave  at  bedtime.  Pink-  and-golden-toned  oil  paint- 
ings depict  the  piggies'  activities  with  closeup,  whimsical 
detail. 

6.263  Yolen,  Jane,  and  Martin  H.  Greenberg,  editors.  Things  That  Go 
Bump  in  the  Night:  A  Collection  or  Original  Stories.  Harper 
and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-026803-4.  280p.  10  and  up. 

This  collection  of  eighteen  eerie,  fantastic  stories  by  such  popu- 
lar writers  as  William  Sleator,  Dianna  Wynne  Jones,  Anne 
Crompton,  and  lone  Yolen  herself  offers  encounters  with  ghosts, 
wizards,  living  chairs,  and  talking  rabbits.  Readers  learn  that 
appearances  can  be  deceiving,  and  that  the  devils  within  their 
own  psyches  can  be  the  most  terrifying  of  all. 

6.264  Zolotow,  Charlotte.  The  Seashore  Book.  Illustrated  by  Wendell 
Minor.  HarperCollins,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-020214-9.  32p.  4-9. 

Close  your  eyes  and  imagine  as  a  mother  vividly  paints  with 
words  the  seashore  that  her  young  son  has  never  seen.  Then 
open  your  eyes  and  expand  that  vision  with  watercolored 
seascapes  that  invite  you  to  step  right  onto  the  sand  with  birds 
and  sea  creatures  among  the  lapping  waves.  The  day  ends 
with  the  satifying  feeling  that  your  imagination  can  take  you 
anywhere. 


315 


266 


Fantasy 


Other  Worlds 

6.265  Le  Guin,  Ursula  K.  Tehanu:  The  Last  Book  of  Earthsea. 
Atheneum/Jean  Karl  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-689-31595-3.  226p.  11 
and  up  (est). 

In  the  fourth  book  of  the  Earthsea  fantasy  series,  Ged  has  lost  his 
powers  as  Archmage.  Goha,  now  a  middle-aged  widow,  has 
taken  under  wing  Therm,  a  small,  severely  abused  little  girl. 
During  the  course  of  the  novel,  these  three  characters  encounter 
wicked  wizards,  good  kings,  fiery  dragons,  and  powerful  magic. 
Due  to  several  sensitive  issues  that  are  presented  (rape,  child 
abuse,  differences  between  the  sexes,  feminism),  the  novel  is 
recommended  for  advanced,  mature  readers. 

6.266  Pinkwater,  Daniel.  Guys  from  Space,  Illustrated  by  Daniel  Pink- 
water.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-774672-0.  29p.  5-8. 

If  a  spaceship  landed  in  your  yard  and  if  the  friendly  "space 
guys"  inside  asked  if  you  could  go  for  a  ride  in  space,  would 
you?  Wearing  the  dog's  dish  for  a  space  helmet,  the  hero  of 
Daniel  Pinkwater 's  farce  gets  permission  from  Mom  ("That's 
nice")  to  travel  to  a  strange  new  planet  with  talking  rocks  and 
with  "space  things"  who  serve  root  beer  floats — all  for  the  cost 
of  a  plastic  fish. 

6.267  Rodda,  Emily.  Finders  Keepers,  Illustrated  by  Noela  Young. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688-10516-5. 184p.  10  and  up. 

An  Australian  preteen,  Patrick,  is  contacted  by  computer  from  a 
parallel  world  on  the  other  side  of  a  time-space  divider  called 
the  Barrier.  When  the  Barrier  ruptures,  objects  from  each  side  fall 
through  to  the  other  side  and  are  lost  to  their  owners.  Patrick 
must  find  three  objects  on  his  side  that  individuals  on  the  other 
side  desperately  want  returned.  His  search  raises  some  interest- 
ing moral  issues  about  ownership,  loyalty,  and  trust.  This  is  a 
witty,  well-constructed  science  fantasy. 

6.268  Young,  Ruth.  A  Trip  to  Mars.  Illustrated  by  Maryann  Cocca-Lef- 
fler.  Orchard  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08492-2. 32p.  2-6. 

Want  to  know  how  to  plan  for  a  trip  to  Mars?  As  a  young  girl 
packs,  we  learn  about  appropriate  clothing  and  necessary  sup- 
plies for  the  Martian  climate  and  topography.  Four  concluding 
pages  of  facts  from  the  young  traveler's  space  journal,  along 
with  brightly  colored  and  humorous  illustrations,  round  out  this 
introduction  to  the  red  planet. 


318 


fuCP 

BY 

Nancy 
Wilkr<l 

ILLUSTRATED  BY 

LoaldDahl 

MinpinS 

I  Illustrated  by  Patrick  Benson 


A.  Piggies  by  Audrey  Wood  and  Don  Wood  (see  6.262).  B.  The  High  Rise  Glorious 
Skittle  Skat  Roarious  Sky  Pie  Angel  Food  Cake  by  Nancy  Willard;  illustrated  by  Richard 
Jesse  Watson  (see  6.261).  C.  Tehanu:  The  Last  Book  of  Earthsea  by  Ursula  K.  Le 
Guin  (see  6.265).  D.  The  Minpins  by  Roald  Dahl;  illustrated  by  Patrick  Benson  (see 
6.319). 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


317 


HM\TiN 


5iepfiEN 

GAMMOL 


A.  Will's  Mammoth  by  Rafe  Martin;  illustrated  by  Stephen  Gammeil  (see  6.245). 

B.  Tar  Beach  by  Faith  Ringgold  (see  6.254).  C.  Abuela  by  Arthur  Dorros;  illustrated 
by  Elisa  Kleven  (see  6.237).  D.  Benjamin's  Barn  by  Reeve  Lindbergh;  illustrated  by 
Susan  Jeffers  (see  6.244). 


318 


3EST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Science  Fiction 


267 


Science  Fiction 

6.269  Asimov,  Janet,  and  Isaac  Asimov.  Norby  and  Yobo's  Great  Ad- 
venture. Walker,  1989.  ISBN  0-8027-6894-6.  lOOp.  9  and  up  (est.). 

Like  its  seven  predecessors  in  the  Norby  series,  this  latest  adven- 
ture carries  space-cadet  Jeff  and  his  teaching  robot,  Norby,  into 
perilous  situations.  With  Admiral  Yobo,  the  trio  travel  back  in 
time  to  prehistoric  Earth  to  investigate  the  origins  of  a  family 
relic.  After  being  gored  by  a  woolly  mammoth  and  rescuing  a 
young  girl,  Jeff  realizes  that  they  have  altered  the  past  and 
therefore  the  future.  Danger  awaits  as  they  try  to  rectify  their 
actions  in  Ice-Age  Eurasia. 

6.270  Barron,  T.  A.  Heartlight  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399- 
22180-8.  272p.  10  and  up. 

Cosmic  forces  are  anchored  in  fundamental  human  experiences 
in  this  exciting,  well-crafted  science  fantasy.  With  the  aid  of  Pure 
Condensed  Light  (PCL),  Kate  Prancer  follows  her  astrophysicist 
grandfather  across  the  universe  to  the  great  star  Trethoniel, 
which  is  mysteriously  draining  energy  from  the  Earth's  sun.  She 
meets  some  extraordinary  creatures  from  the  planet  Nel  Sauria, 
and  through  confrontations  with  The  Darkness,  she  helps  save 
the  universe.  Elements  of  mysticism,  mystery,  and  horror  inter- 
twine in  this  tale. 

6.271  Chetwin,  Grace.  The  Starstone:  From  Tales  of  Gom  in  the  Leg- 
ends of  Ulm.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-718315-7. 240p.  10 
and  up. 

In  this  sequel  to  The  Riddle  and  the  Rune,  Gom,  the  young  boy 
from  Windy  Mountain,  serves  as  apprentice  to  a  wizard  who 
isn't  teaching  him  the  magical  arts  fast  enough.  Katak,  the  Evil 
One,  is  becoming  more  aggressive  in  his  attempts  to  climb  the 
shelter-giving  Crystal  Stairs.  Gom's  innate  senses  and  some  new 
friends  help  him  to  protect  the  Crystal  Stairs  and  recover  the  lost 
emerald  seal,  and  Gom  becomes  a  legendary  wizard  himself. 

6*272  Gilden,  Mel.  Outer  Space  and  All  That  Junk.  J.  B.  Lippincott, 
1989.  ISBN  0-397-32307-7. 167p.  10  and  up. 

This  sci-fi  mystery  would  be  a  perfect  read-aloud  during  an 
ecology  unit.  The  plot  hinges  on  the  premise  that  those  piles  of 
junk  littering  our  homes  and  countryside  are  really  outer-space 
aliens  waiting  for  the  opportunity  to  go  home.  The  main  charac- 
ters, Myron  Duberville,  eccentric  Uncle  Hugo,  Letitia  Reticuli, 


313 


268 


Fantasy 


and  Myron's  cohort,  Princess,  the  boss's  niece,  are  brought  to  life 
through  vivid  description,  abundant  dialogue,  and  a  rich  variety 
of  sentence  structures. 

6*273  Kitamura,  Satoshi.  UFO  Diary*  Illustrated  by  Satoshi  Kitamura. 
Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux,  1989.  ISBN  0-374-38026-0.  32p.  3-7 
(est). 

When  a  strange  flying  object  takes  a  wrong  turn  at  the  Milky 
Way,  the  navigator  encounters  the  big,  blue  marble  Earth.  One 
innovative  illustration  demonstrates  the  spacecraft's  approach 
through  successive  layers  of  the  atmosphere  on  multiple  strips 
across  the  page.  The  spacecraft  descends  until  the  alien/narrator 
spots  a  friendly  looking  Earth  creature.  Readers  never  see  the 
alien,  but  view  some  of  the  action  from  its  perspective.  After  a 
ride  on  the  spacecraft,  the  earthling  boy  offers  a  gift  from  his 
planet — a  growing  thing. 

Supernatural.  Tales 

6.274  Ackerman,  Karen.  The  Banshee*  Illustrated  by  David  Ray  Phi- 
lomel Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-21924-2.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 

When  night  falls,  the  banshee,  a  legendary  wailing  Irish  spirit, 
comes  to  the  village  seeking  someone  to  share  her  loneliness.  At 
each  house,  though,  the  banshee  encounters  love  and  warmth, 
which  leave  no  room  for  her  sad  song.  The  contrasts  between 
light  and  dark  found  in  the  illustrations  serve  as  the  perfect 
vehicle  for  contrasting  the  worlds  of  the  banshee  and  the  villag- 
ers. 

6.275  Brighton,  Catherine.  Dearest  Grandmama.  Illustrated  by  Cath- 
erine Brighton.  Doubleday,  1991.  ISBN  0-385-41844-2.  32p.  4-8. 

From  the  sailing  ship  Meralda,  a  young  girl  traveling  with  her 
father  writes  a  series  of  letters  to  her  grandmother,  all  dated  in 
the  closing  months  of  1830.  The  letters  are  the  only  text  of  this 
eerie  account  of  Maudie- Ann's  encounter  with  a  silent  boy  who 
climbs  from  the  sea  to  become  her  shipboard  companion.  Mys- 
teriously, the  boy  carries  a  letter  dated  forty-two  years  into  the 
future,  makes  no  reflection  in  the  mirror,  and  saves  her  life. 

6.276  Brittain,  Bill.  Professor  Popkin's  Prodigious  Polish:  A  Tale  of 
the  Coven  Tree.  Illustrated  by  Andrew  Glass.  Harper  and  Row, 
1990.  ISBN  0-06-020727-2. 152p.  8-12. 


320 


Supernatural  Tales 


269 


Fifteen-year-old  Luther  Gilpin  decides  to  become  a  salesman, 
hoping  to  make  his  fortune  and  leave  his  family's  farm.  He 
orders  a  case  of  Professor  Popkin's  Prodigious  Polish,  unaware 
that  the  polish  brings  to  life  whatever  objects  on  which  it  is 
applied.  In  this  newest  mystery  in  Bill  Brittain's  Coven  Tree 
series,  Luther's  adventures  selling  and  dealing  with  the  polish 
teach  him  lessons  about  appreciating  what  he  already  has.  An- 
drew Glass's  illustrations  add  an  eerie  feel  to  the  mystery. 

6  277  Browne,  Anthony.  The  Tunnel.  Illustrated  by  Anthony  Browne. 
Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394-94582-4.  24p. 
4-8  (est). 

Jack  and  Rose,  a  brother  and  sister  as  different  as  can  be,  are 
always  arguing.  When  they  are  sent  outside  by  their  mother, 
Jack  discovers  a  tunnel.  Rose  refuses  to  explore  it,  so  Jack  goes 
alone.  When  he  doesn't  return,  Rose  must  overcome  her  fear 
through  courage  and  love,  even  enduring  the  threatening  woods 
at  the  end  of  the  tunnel  to  save  her  brother.  Through  surreal 
images,  Anthony  Browne  manages  to  infuse  a  contemporary 
story  with  folktale  menace;  the  heroine  even  wears  a  red  cloak. 

6.278  Cecil,  Laura,  compiler.  Boo!  Stories  to  Make  You  Jump.  Illus- 
trated by  Emma  Chichester  Clark.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-688-09842-8. 93p.  4-8  (est.). 

If  not  making  readers  jump,  this  collection  of  poems,  traditional 
tales,  and  lore  could  at  least  give  them  delicious  shivers.  In- 
cluded are  funny,  scary  stories  authored  by  Margaret  Mahy  and 
Diana  Wynne  Jones,  and  spooky  rhymes  by  Ogden  Nash,  Jack 
Prelutsky,  and  Ben  Jonson.  There  are  ideal  choices  for  reading  or 
telling.  In  particular,  watch  for  those  selections  that  allow  the 
ending  to  be  shouted. 

6.279  Cole,  Joanna,  and  Stephanie  Calmenson,  compilers.  The  Scary 
Book.  Illustrated  by  Chris  Demarest,  Marilyn  Hirsh,  Arnold 
Lobel,  and  Dirk  Zimmer.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0- 
688-10654-4. 127p.  4  and  up. 

This  compilation  of  stories,  poems,  tricks,  riddles,  and  jokes 
offers  easy  reading  for  the  middle-grader,  who  will  also  be  most 
likely  to  appreciate  the  ''tricks,"  including  instructions  for  mak- 
ing "bloody  finger  in  a  box"  and  playing  the  dead  man  game. 
The  story  collection  includes  the  benign  "Strange  Bumps"  by 
Arnold  Lobel,  as  well  as  the  more  threatening  "Bony-Legs"  by 


ERIC 


321 


270 


Fantasy 


Joanna  Cole  herself,  a  tale  of  a  child-eating  witch  who  is  foiled 
by  a  young  girl.  Be  warned:  the  jokes  and  riddles  are  groaners. 

6.280  Conrad,  Pam.  Stonewords:  A  Ghost  Story.  Harper  and  Row 
1990.  ISBN  0-06-021316-7. 130p.  10  and  up.        ^  ' 

Zoe  Louise  died  in  1870  when  she  was  eleven  years  old.  Now  a 
present-day  Zoe  discovers  the  ghost  of  Zoe  Louise  when  she 
goes  down  an  unused  back  staircase  in  her  house.  Two  lives 
become  intertwined  as  the  two  Zoes  search  for  a  way  to  travel 
back  in  time  to  save  Zoe  Louise  from  the  fire  that  took  her  life 
Boston  Globe-Horn  Book  Honor  Book,  1990. 

6.281  Fleischman,  Sid.  The  Midnight  Horse.  Illustrated  by  Peter  Sis 
Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09441-4.  96p.  8  and  up. 

Recently  orphaned,  young  Touch  arrives  by  stagecoach  in  Crick- 
lewood  to  meet  his  grouchy  and  wicked  great-uncle,  Judge  Wig- 
glesforth,  the  kind  Miss  Sally  who  runs  Red  Raven  Inn,  and  The 
Great  Chaffalo,  a  ghostly  magician  who  is  said  to  turn  straw  into 
horses.  With  his  own  courage  and  a  bit  of  magic,  Touch  outwits 
his  villainous  great-uncle,  reclaims  his  rightful  inheritance,  and 
saves  the  Red  Raven  Inn  for  Miss  Sally.  Applause.  ALA  Notable 
Children 's  Books,  1991. 

6.282  Hamilton,  Virginia.  The  All  Jahdu  Storybook.  Illustrated  by 
Barry  Moser.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1991.  ISBN  0-15- 
239498-2. 128p.  8  and  up. 

From  a  world  where  Trouble  is  a  giant  with  a  barrel  for  an 
earring,  where  magic  can  make  Sweetdream  or  Nightmare, 
where  Yin  and  Yang  speak  to  a  magical  little  being  named  Jahdu, 
Virginia  Hamilton  has  fashioned  tales  in  which  folklore  and 
contemporary  life  seamlessly  coexist.  In  these  strange,  gripping 
stones,  Jahdu,  the  child-trickster,  meets  dangers  and  opportuni- 
ties, winning  out  in  the  end  and  allowing  young  readers  to 
explore  the  dark  and  light  of  the  world. 

6.283  McKissack,  Patricia  C.  The  Dark-Thirty:  Southern  Tales  of  the 
Supernatural.  Illustrated  by  Brian  Pinkney.  Alfred  A 
Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-676-91863-9. 122p.  10  and  up 
(est.).  r  v 

The  thirty  minutes  of  twilight  when  it  is  neither  day  nor  night 
are  the  best  time  to  tell  one  of  these  spine-tingling  tales  rooted 
in  African  American  history  and  its  oral  storytelling  tradition 
from  slavery  to  the  civil  rights  era.  Each  of  the  ten  original 


9 

ERJC 


322 


Supernatural  Tales 


271 


stories  is  accompanied  by  a  dramatic  black-and-white  scratch- 
board  illustration.  Coretta  Scott  King  Award  (Writing),  1993;  New- 
bery  Honor  Book,  1993. 

6.284  Naylor,  Phyllis  Reynolds.  The  Witch's  Eye.  Illustrated  by  Joe 
Burleson.  Delacorte  Press,  1990.  ISBN  0-385-30157-X.  179p.  9-12. 

In  Phyllis  Reynolds  Naylor 's  fourth  tale  of  witch  spells  and 
magic,  best  friends  Lynn  and  Mouse  are  plagued  by  a  talisman 
of  Witch  Tuggle,  who  died  in  a  fire.  After  Mrs.  Tuggle's  green 
glass  eye  is  discovered  in  the  ashes  of  the  fire,  mysterious  behav- 
ioral changes  overcome  Lynn's  family  Lynn  and  Mouse  demon- 
strate remarkable  pluck  in  their  attempts  to  triumph  over  the 
eye's  powers.  The  extraordinary  occurrences  are  set  against  an 
ordinary  family's  pursuits,  making  the  events  feel  even  more 
chilling. 

6.285  Robertson,  Joanne.  Sea  Witches.  Illustrated  by  L£szl6  G£l.  Dial 
Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-1070-4.  28p.  4-8. 

Eerie  and  riveting  full-color  depictions  of  witches  and  ship- 
wrecks, bordered  by  a  surrealistic  collage  of  sea  creatures,  pro- 
vide a  haunting  glimpse  into  Scottish  superstition.  For  example, 
a  Scottish  grandmother  warns  her  grandson  to  crush  his  egg- 
shells after  meals,  since  witches  use  unbroken  shells  as  boats  and 
then  go  to  sea  to  destroy  ships  by  sorcery.  The  rhythmic  haiku 
prose,  though  reminiscent  of  Old  English  poetry,  is  completely 
accessible  to  young  readers. 

6.286  Schertle,  Alice.  Witch  Hazel.  Illustrated  by  Margot  Tomes.  Har- 
perCollins, 1991.  ISBN  0-06-025141-7.  32p.  3-«  (est). 

Because  Johnny  is  too  little  to  help  with  the  plowing,  his  older 
brothers  give  him  a  handful  of  pumpkin  seeds  to  plant.  Because 
Johnny  needs  a  scarecrow  to  guard  his  pumpkin  vines,  his 
brothers  cut  a  witch  hazel  branch,  and  Johnny  dresses  "Witch 
Hazel"  in  a  gingham  dress.  Under  the  edge  of  her  skirt,  the 
largest  pumpkin  grows,  full  of  magical  promise  and  testimony 
to  a  young  boy's  faith.  In  earthen  browns,  grays,  and  greens, 
Margot  Tomes's  illustrations  match  the  story's  mood. 

6.287  Shecter,  Ben.  The  Big  Stew.  Illustrated  by  Ben  Shecter.  Harper- 
Collins/Charlotte Zolotow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-025610-9. 
32p.  2-6  (est). 

On  a  stew  day,  a  cheery,  rounded  couple  set  about  adding  "a 
little  of  this,  a  little  of  that"  to  their  stewpot.  Their  enthusiasm 


323 


272 


Fantasy 


for  adding  more  and  still  more  transforms  them  into  frenzied 
witches,  dumping  snakes,  toads,  rats,  and  bats  into  the  stew. 
When  the  pot  finally  erupts  into  a  scary  goblin,  the  words  "TOO 
MUCH"  cover  the  pages,  and  the  couple  returns  to  normal  to  eat 
their  stew,  learning  "enough  is  enough/' 

6.288  Shyer,  Marlene  Fanta.  Ruby,  the  Red-Hot  Witch  of  Blooming- 
dale's,  Viking  Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-83473-4. 151p.  8-12. 

Caught  in  a  rainstorm  on  their  way  to  visit  their  father,  eight- 
year-old  Thomas  and  his  older  sister  Petra  run  into  Blooming- 
dale's  department  store,  where  they  encounter  a  friendly 
"witch"  named  Ruby.  Ruby  has  cures  for  everything,  including 
Thomas's  idiosyncratic  hiccups  and  Petra's  longing  for  a  recon- 
cilliation  of  her  parents.  Marlene  Fanta  Shyer  never  admits  that 
Ruby  can  actually  work  magic,  so  the  reader  is  left  uncertain. 
This  is  a  book  for  libraries  courageous  enough  to  provide  a 
playful,  magical  story  for  middle-grade  students,  even  if  it  does 
include  a  witch's  spell  or  two. 

6.289  Wangerin,  Walter,  Jr.  Elisabeth  and  the  Water-TrolL  Illustrated 
by  Deborah  Healy.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-6-026354-7.  64p. 
7-12. 

Written  in  an  oral  style,  the  tale  of  the  water-troll  tells  of  preju- 
dicial fear.  Grieving  for  the  death  of  her  mother,  Elisabeth  weeps 
tears  into  the  well  of  a  lonely  water-troll  and  touches  his  heart. 
Intending  to  comfort  her,  he  steals  her  from  her  bed.  At  first,  the 
troll  frightens  Elisabeth,  but  soon  she  senses  his  gentleness. 
When  the  villagers  discover  her  absence,  they  set  a  blazing  fire 
around  the  troll's  well,  testing  his  allegiance  to  Elisabeth.  Styl- 
ized paintings  interpret  the  poignancy  of  the  troll's  sacrifice. 

6.290  Wyllie,  Stephen.  Ghost  Train:  A  Spooky  Hologram  Book.  Illus- 
tations  by  Brian  Lee.  Dial  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-1163-8.  24p. 
4-8  (est). 

Three  spooky  friends — Headless  Hector,  the  Gray  Lady,  and  the 
Silver  Skeleton — happily  haunt  Ravenswick  Castle  for  nearly 
four  hundred  years  until  the  castle  falls  into  ruin.  In  a  saga 
narrated  by  the  Silver  Skeleton,  the  three  friends  wander  aim- 
lessly for  a  time  until  they  find  a  perfect  new  home — the  Ghost 
Train  ride  at  the  amusement  park.  The  story  seems  secondary, 
however,  to  the  book's  execution:  shivery  holographic  images 
spring  from  the  pages,  eyes  following  the  reader,  the  skeleton 
even  opening  and  closing  its  mouth. 


324 


Time  Fantasy 


273 


6.291  Yolen,  Jane.  The  Faery  Flag:  Stories  and  Poems  of  Fantasy  and 
the  Supernatural.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08438-8. 
120p.  10  and  up. 

Award-winning  author  Jane  Yolen  creates  new  worlds  that 
blend  traditional  folktales  and  fairy  tales  with  original  modern 
fantasy.  In  these  tales  and  poems,  a  young  girl  sprouts  wings, 
unicorns  heal  abused  children,  and  maligned  storybook  wolves 
tell  their  side  of  the  story.  Fairies,  witches,  dragons,  and  prin- 
cesses abound,  providing  enjoyable  reading  for  child  and  adult 
alike. 

Time  Fantasy 

6.292  Bellairs,  John.  The  Trolley  to  Yesterday.  Illustrated  by  Edward 
Gorey.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1989.  ISBN  0-8037-0582-4. 
183p.  10  and  up. 

In  this  sixth  Johnny  Dixon  adventure  involving  Professor  Chil- 
dermass,  thirteen-year-old  Johnny  and  his  friend,  Fergie,  are 
worried  by  Professor  Childermass's  strange  behavior.  Then  the 
professor  proposes  something  even  stranger — travel  through 
time  on  a  red  and  green  trolley  with  faded  gold  paint.  The 
professor's  destination  is  Constantinople  in  1453  during  the 
Turkish  invasion  of  the  Byzantine  Empire.  Together,  the  three 
face  great  dangers  from  the  battles  and  from  trying  to  save  from 
death  or  enslavement  the  people  who  seek  refuge  in  the  Church 
of  the  Holy  Wisdom.  But  the  professor  knows  the  events  of 
history. 

6.293  Climo,  Shirley.  T.  J/s  Ghost.  Thomas  Y.  Crowell,  1989.  ISBN 
0-690-04691-X.  151p.  10  and  up  (est). 

T.  J/s  boring  vacation  with  Auntie  Onion  and  Uncle  Will  at  their 
California  beach  cabin  takes  a  mysterious  turn  when  eerie 
moans  come  from  the  foggy  ocean.  Only  T.  J.  can  hear  the  voice 
calling  her  by  name.  The  mystery  unfolds  as  she  discovers  an 
Australian  ghost  boy  who  stowed  away  on  a  ship  which 
wrecked  120  years  ago.  As  T.  J.  struggles  to  help  him,  she  also 
learns  to  love  and  appreciate  the  eccentricities  of  her  aunt  and 
uncle. 

6.294  Fleischman,  Paul.  Time  Train.  Illustrated  by  Claire  Ewart.  Har- 
perCollins/Charlotte Zolotow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-021710-3. 
32p.  5-9  (est). 


325 


274 


Fantasy 


On  a  class  trip,  a  group  of  students  from  New  York  board  the 
Rocky  Mountain  Unlimited  at  the  train  station,  and  find  them- 
selves traveling  not  only  across  the  country  to  Utah,  but  also 
back  in  time.  At  their  destination,  they  ride  a  stegosaurus  and 
eat  scrambled  pterodactyl  eggs.  The  children's  adventures  are 
boldly  depicted,  with  unusual  perspectives  and  surreal  water- 
colors. 

6.295  L'Engle,  Madeleine.  An  Acceptable  Time,  Farrar,  Straus,  and 
Giroux,  1989.  ISBN  0-374-30027-5.  343p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Continuing  the  Murry  family  saga  begun  in  A  Wrinkle  in  Time, 
Madeleine  L'Engle's  newest  novel  recounts  the  adventures  of 
Meg  Murry's  teenage  daughter,  Polly  O'Keefe.  While  staying  at 
her  grandparents'  New  England  farmhouse,  Polly  unexpectedly 
slips  through  a  "time  gate"  and  finds  herself  in  a  land  and 
society  that  existed  three  thousand  years  ago.  Thus  begins  a 
dangerous,  exciting,  time-travel  escapade  in  which  she  learns 
about  druids,  Celtic  customs,  and  the  importance  of  love  for 
every  era  and  culture. 

6.296  Lindbergh,  Anne.  Three  Lives  to  Live.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN 
0-316-52628-2. 183p.  11  and  up  (est.). 

When  Garet  Atkin's  seventh-grade  class  is  assigned  the  task  of 
writing  autobiographies,  Garet  begins  her  wry  chronicles  with 
the  previous  summer,  when  she  met  her  "twin  sister"  Daisy  for 
the  first  time.  Daisy  entered  Garet's  life  suddenly  and  unexpect- 
edly when  she  fell  down  the  laundry  chute  in  Grandmother 
Gratkin's  old  house.  Notwithstanding  her  strange  arrival,  Daisy 
seemed  different — completely  at  home  in  Grandmother's  house, 
but  fascinated  by  electronics.  Because  Grandmother  won't  an- 
swer questions,  Garet  must  untangle  the  mysterious  identity  of 
Daisy,  and  eventually  her  grandmother,  and  even  herself. 

6.297  Murphy,  Shirley  Rousseau  (with  Welch  Suggs).  Medallion  of 
the  Black  Hound.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-024369-4. 
182p.  &-12. 

Through  the  magical  powers  of  the  Medallion  of  the  Black 
Hound,  young  David  Shepard  is  transported  back  through  time 
to  the  ancient  land  of  Meryn  and  finds  himself  in  the  middle  of 
a  struggle  of  good  versus  evil.  Using  the  powers  of  his  medallion 
and  his  own  courage,  David  helps  to  defeat  the  evil  of  Balcher, 
preserving  the  kingdom  and  his  family's  legacy.  Woven  with 


326 


Toys  and  Dolls 


275 


Celtic  lore,  this  well-written  fantasy  will  cany  the  reader  into  a 
world  of  intrigue  and  suspense. 

6.298  Peck,  Richard.  Voices  after  Midnight.  Delacorte  Press,  1989. 
ISBN  0-385-29779-3. 181p.  10  and  up. 

Fourteen-year-old  Chad  looks  forward  to  his  family's  two-week 
vacation  in  New  York  City.  The  one-hundred-year-old  town- 
house  that  his  family  rents,  though,  has  an  eerie  quality  about  it. 
When  Chad  and  his  little  brother  try  to  track  down  the  ghostly 
voices  that  they  hear  at  night,  they  suddenly  find  themselves 
pulled  back  in  time  to  the  winter  of  1888.  Thus  begins  the  beys7 
adventure  as  they  frantically  work  to  save  the  lives  of  the  young 
people  who  lived  in  the  house  over  a  century  ago. 

6.299  Scieszka,  Jon.  The  Good,  the  Bad,  and  the  Goofy.  Knights  of 
the  Kitchen  Table.  The  Not-So-Jolly  Roger.  Illustrated  by  Lane 
Smith.  Viking  Penguin,  1991-92.  Approx.  57p.  7-11. 

The  three  adventurous  heroes  of  the  Time  Warp  Trio — Fred, 
Sam,  and  Joe — are  up  to  rollicking  fun  in  their  escapades  of  the 
past.  Whether  escaping  from  mean  and  ugly  pirates,  from  a 
skewer-bearing  knight,  or  from  cattle  stampedes,  finding  "The 
Book"  (a  gift  from  Joe's  magician  uncle)  in  their  new  time  zone 
is  the  only  way  to  recross  time  barriers.  Lane  Smith's  zany  black- 
and-white  drawings  are  action-packed. 

Toys  and  Dolls 

6.300  Adler,  C  S.  Help,  Pink  Pig!  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1990.  ISBN 
0-399-22183-2. 160p.  9-11  (est.). 

Moving  to  Los  Angeles  to  live  with  her  single  mother,  latchkey 
child  Amanda  escapes  boredom  and  the  torment  of  the  apart- 
ment bully  by  entering  a  fantasy  world  with  her  miniature  rose 
quartz  pig.  Robbie,  another  lonely  and  unhappy  young  neigh- 
bor, and  Amanda  enter  a  magical  world  together  and  face  a 
dragon  and  a  cruel  knight.  These  imaginary  adventures  help  the 
children  cope  with  life  and  assert  themselves  in  contemporary, 
urban  L.*a. 

6.301  Babbitt,  Natalie.  Nellie:  A  Cat  on  Her  Own.  Illustrated  by 
Natalie  Babbitt.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux/Michael  di  Capua 
Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-374-35506-1.  26p.  5-10  (est.). 

Nellie  is  a  cat  marionette  who  loves  to  dance.  When  her  mistress 
dies,  she  is  left  alone  and  fears  she  will  never  dance  again.  But 


327 


276 


Fantasy 


Nellie's  friend  Tom,  a  real  cat,  takes  her  to  a  special  gathering  of 
friends.  There,  in  the  moonlight,  Nellie  dances  again — this  time 
on  her  own. 

6.302  Baker,  Keith.  The  Magic  Fan.  Illustrated  by  Keith  Baker.  Har- 
court  Brace  Jovanovich,  1989.  ISBN  0-15-250750-7. 20p.  4-8  (est.). 

Keith  Baker's  lushly  illustrated  picture  book  tells  the  story  of 
Yoshi,  a  Japanese  boy  who  loves  to  build  things,  but  who  has  run 
out  of  ideas.  When  he  finds  a  magic  fan,  which  depicts  illustra- 
tions of  what  to  build  next,  his  inspiration  returns.  It  takes  a  near 
disaster  for  Yoshi  to  realize  that  the  magic  is  not  in  the  fan,  but 
in  himself.  Alternate  fan-shaped  pages  and  rich  jade  tones  con- 
tribute to  the  book's  uniqueness  and  appeal.  Notable  1989  Chil- 
dren's Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

6.303  Hissey,  Jane.  Little  Bear  Lost.  Illustrated  by  Jane  Hissey.  Phi- 
lomel Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-399-21743-6.  32p.  3-6. 

Soft-hued  nostalgic  drawings  accompany  the  story  of  Little  Bear, 
who  gets  lost  from  the  other  nursery  animals  during  a  game  of 
hide-and-seek.  After  a  thorough  search,  and  even  after  painting 
a  "lost  bear"  poster,  the  worried  friends  find  a  very  full,  napping 
Little  Bear  inside  the  picnic  basket.  The  polite  exchanges  among 
the  stuffed  friends  are  reminiscent  of  A.  A.  Milne's  writings. 

6.304  Polacco,  Patricia.  Babushka's  Doll.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Po- 
lacco.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN 
0-671-68343-8.  28p.  6-10  (est.). 

Natasha  is  a  very  demanding  child.  She  only  wants  to  play,  and 
she  doesn't  like  to  wait  for  anything.  When  her  grandmother, 
Babushka,  goes  to  the  store,  she  lets  Natasha  play  with  her  own 
childhood  doll.  When  the  rambunctious  and  impatient  doll 
comes  to  life,  Natasha  learns  what  being  mischievous  is  all  about 
and,  as  a  result,  becomes  a  "not  so  naughty  little  girl."  Colorful 
pencil,  marking  pen,  and  acrylic  illustrations  help  to  tell  this 
Russian  tale.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of 
Social  Studies. 

6.305  Rendal,  Justine.  The  Dancing  Cat.  Illustrated  by  Bernhard  Ober- 
dieck.  Simon  and  Schuster  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN 
0-671-72637-4.  28p.  6-10  (est.). 

A  toy  cat  believes  that  she's  made  to  dance.  But  her  dreams  are 
shattered  when  her  owner  adds  her  to  a  collection  of  stuffed 
fighting  cats.  When  the  cat  does  not  fulfill  her  owner's  needs, 


323 


Unique  Beings 


277 


she  is  given  away  to  Ben,  a  gentle  boy  who  names  her  Tasha 
because  he  too  believes  that  she  is  a  dancer.  Adorned  in  a  danc- 
ing costume  end  placed  on  a  stage,  Tasha  realizes  her  dream  and 
becomes  the  Dancing  Cat.  Soft-toned  colored  pencil  drawings 
illustrate  a  spirited  story. 

Unique  Beings 

Humans  with  Special  Powers 

6306   Ayres,  Becky.  Victoria  Flies  High.  Illustrated  by  Robin  Michal 
Koontz.  Cobblehill  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-65014-8.  32p.  4-*. 

When  her  kite  is  destroyed,  it  looks  as  though  there  is  no  way 
for  Victoria  the  pig  to  beat  her  arch-enemy  Arnold  in  the  kite- 
flying contest,  then  Mr.  Orsini,  the  magician,  transforms  Victo- 
ria herself  into  a  kite,  and  she  discovers  the  value  of  determina- 
tion, courage,  and  a  little  magic. 

6.307  Brittain,  Bill.  Wings.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-020649-7. 
137p.  9-12  (est). 

Ian's  back  wrenches  with  agonizing  pain  as  strange,  tender  pro- 
tuberances grow  larger  at  his  shoulder  blades.  Meanwhile,  he  is 
increasingly  isolated  by  family  members  who  desperately  seek 
conformity  and  acceptance.  As  in  Susan  Green's  Self-Portrait  with 
Wings,  the  images  of  sprouting  wings  are  vivid  in  Bill  Brittain's 
story.  Readers  not  only  can  sense  the  strange  awkwardness  but 
can  vicariously  experience  the  spectacular  feat  of  learning  to  fly. 
For  Ian,  flying  is  analogous  to  freeing  himself  from  percoived 
limitations,  both  physical  and  emotional.  A  strong  friendship 
develops  with  another  class  outcast. 

6.308  Bursik,  Rose.  Amelia's  Fantastic  Flight.  Illustrated  by  Rose  Bur- 
sik.  Henry  Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0-8050-1872-7.  32p.  4-6  (est.). 

"Amelia  loved  airplanes.  So  she  built  one.,/  Then  "she  took  it  for 
a  little  spin" — around  the  world.  For  each  country  Amelia  visits, 
an  alliterative  phrase  describes  her  reactions  ("She  got  a  kick  out 
of  Kenya"),  while  an  inset  map  marks  her  journey,  continent  to 
continent.  Each  sharp-lined,  detailed  painting  highlights  geo- 
graphical features,  archeological  sites,  or  natural  history  scenes. 
Then  it's  back  home  in  time  for  dinner. 

6.309  Carle,  Eric.  Draw  Me  a  Star.  Illustrated  by  Eric  Carle.  Philomel 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-1877-7.  32p.  4  and  up. 


278 


Fantasy 


"Draw  me  a  star.  And  the  artist  drew  a  star."  Eric  Carle's  crea- 
tion-like story  begins  with  a  young  boy  at  work  painting  a 
five-pointed  star.  The  star,  which  "was  good/7  asks  for  the  sun, 
so  the  artist  draws  that,  too.  Rendered  in  acrylic-splattered  lay- 
ered tissue,  each  creation  asks  for  another  until  the  aging  artist 
has  painted  trees,  people,  animals,  insects,  and  flowers.  At  last, 
the  moon  asks  for  a  star.  Having  come  full  circle,  the  old  artist 
and  his  star  transcend  the  night  sky 

6310  Clement,  Claude.  The  Man  Who  Lit  the  Stars.  Illustrated  by 
John  Howe.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-14741-9.  32p.  6-10 
(est.). 

"He  was  a  man  with  no  belongings,  no  family,  no  hearth  to 
welcome  him  home,  a  vagabond  from  nowhere  with  no  destina- 
tion." Yet  the  stranger's  mission  was  worthy.  When  confronted 
by  hulking,  dice-throwing  woodcutters,  the  vagabond  explains, 
"I  polish  the  stars."  Intrigued,  perhaps  half-believing,  a  home- 
less ragged  child  watches  the  starlighter  adjust  his  long  ladder 
and  begin  the  climb.  From  this  allegorical  tale  with  its  silky, 
Rennaisance-era  paintings  comes  fresh  perspective  on  the 
streaking  comets  of  a  clear  night  sky. 

6.311  Green,  Susan.  Self-Portrait  with  Wings.  Little,  Brown,  1989. 
ISBN  0-316-32677-1.  206p.  10-12  (est.). 

Jennifer  Rosen,  almost  twelve,  loves  to  ice  skate,  but  her  twirls 
and  leaps  and  arabesques  never  quite  match  those  of  the  natural 
athlete  Penelope,  nor  even  those  of  the  other  girls  at  the  rink.  To 
skate  to  adulation,  Jennifer  imagines  she  needs  the  lift  of  wings. 
In  a  self-portrait  she  sketches  the  wings  that  she  needs,  and, 
miraculously,  the  wings  appear.  As  in  Mail-Order  Wings  by  Bea- 
trice Gormley,  the  wings  cause  both  Jennifer  and  her  friend 
Angela  some  embarrassments,  some  duplicity,  and  some  grand 
adventure. 

6.312  Heller,  Nicholas.  A  Troll  Story,  Illustrated  by  Nicholas  Heller. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08971-2.  24p.  3-7  (est.). 

Lewis  can  turn  himself  into  a  troll  whenever  he  wants.  Of 
course,  his  family  would  never  approve,  so  he  only  turns  him- 
self into  a  troll  late  at  night.  Nicholas  Heller's  whimsical,  light- 
hearted  story  allows  readers  and  listeners  to  try  on  another 
personality.  Flat,  bold  patterns  are  achieved  with  bright  water- 
color  paints  and  black  ink  against  stark  white  backgrounds, 


330 


A.  The  Trolley  to  Yesterday  by  John  Bellairs  (see  6.292).  B.  June  29,  1999  by  David 
Wiesner  (see  6.328).  C.  7770  Tub  People  by  Pam  Conrad;  illustrated  by  Richard 
Egielski  (see  6.316). 


331 

BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


A.  Trouble  with  Trolls  by  Jan  Brett  (see  6.317).  B.  The  Dark-Thirty:  Southern  Tales 
of  the  Supernatural  by  Patricia  C.  McKissack;  illustrated  by  Brian  Pinkney  (see  6.283). 
C.  The  Rainbabies  by  Laura  Krauss  Melmed;  illustrated  by  Jim  LaMarche  (see  6.323). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 

332 


Unique  Beings 


279 


adding  childlike  simplicity  in  art  to  the  appealing  humor  of  the 
story. 

6313  Kehret,  Peg.  Sisters,  Long  Ago.  Cobblehill  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-525-65021-0. 149p.  10  and  up. 

Willow  Paige  nearly  drowns  on  her  thirteenth  birthday.  Her 
near-death  experience  reveals  a  past  life  in  ancient  Egypt  as  well 
as  special  powers.  As  she  struggles  to  understand  these  revela- 
tions, she  tries  to  use  her  powers  to  help  heal  her  sister,  Sarah, 
who  suffers  from  leukemia.  Although  the  loving  energy  that 
Willow  feels  cannot  save  her  sister,  she  comes  to  understand  the 
importance  of  love,  joy,  and  kindness  in  her  own  life. 

6314  Rawlins,  Donna.  Digging  to  China*  Illustrated  by  Donna  Rawl- 
ins. Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08414-0.  32p.  4-7. 

Young  Alexis  learns  a  secret  from  her  elderly  neighbor  Marj, 
who  has  learned  the  secret  from  her  mother:  if  you  dig  deep 
enough  into  the  earth,  you  will  find  yourself  in  China.  Marj  is 
sure  that  China  is  an  exotic  place,  but  feels  that  she  is  too  old  to 
go.  So  Alexis  digs  the  hole  alone  to  bring  Marj  a  birthday  sur- 
prise. Donna  Rawlins  illustrates  her  friendship  story  with 
warmly  colored  flat  drawings  bordered  like  well-framed  photo- 
graphs. A  realistic  counterpart  is  How  to  Dig  a  Hole  to  the  Other 
Side  of  the  World  by  Faith  McNulty. 

6315  Woodruff,  Elvira.  The  Wing  Shop.  Illustrated  by  Stephen  Gam- 
mell.  Holiday  House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0825-6.  32p.  6-10  (est). 

Matthew's  new  house  doesn't  suit  him  as  well  as  the  one  back 
on  Main  Street.  If  only  he  could  fly,  he  would  go  back.  A  pigeon 
leads  Matthew  to  Featherman's  Wing  Shop,  where  wings  of  all 
sizes,  shapes,  and  colors  can  be  taken  for  test  flights.  After  some 
faulty  starts,  Matthew  glides  over  his  old  house  to  discover 
changes.  Stephen  Gammell's  feathery  tones  and  billowy  clouds 
lend  just  the  right  imaginative  flair  to  the  flight  and  comfort  to 
the  realization  that  home  is  wherever  you  live. 

Make-Believe  Characters 

6.316  Barker,  Cicely  Mary.  The  Fairy  Necklaces.  Illustrated  by  Cicely 
Mary  Barker.  Frederick  Warne,  1991.  ISBN  0-7232-4000-0.  62p. 
All  ages. 

The  delicate  touch  of  Cicely  Mary  Barker's  watercolor  illustra- 
tions, most  often  seen  in  her  once-popular  "Flower  Fairies" 


333 


280 


Fantasy 


books,  sends  readers  back  to  a  time  when  fairies  and  elves  used 
their  magic  to  ease  the  burdens  of  poor  children.  In  this  tale, 
young  Jenny,  a  poor  country  girl,  wishes  for  a  necklace  for  each 
day  of  the  year.  Much  to  her  surprise,  the  fairies  oblige.  Now  it's 
up  to  Jenny  and  her  family  to  use  her  newfound  riches  wisely 
This  small  reprint  of  Barker's  1946  tale  has  been  faithfully  and 
elegantly  produced. 

6.317  Brett,  Jan.  Trouble  with  Trolls.  Illustrated  by  Jan  Brett.  G.  P. 
Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22336-3.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 

The  trouble  with  trolls  all  begins  when  fearless  Treva  decides  to 
visit  her  cousin  across  Mount  Baldy.  With  her  dog  Tuffi,  she  sets 
off,  leaving  her  chalet  far  below.  Meantime,  underground,  frol- 
icking trolls  make  preparations  for  a  dog  of  their  own,  gathering 
collar  and  water  bowl  and  making  a  basket  bed.  At  each  turn  in 
her  path,  Treva  must  rely  on  her  quick  wits  to  meet  challenges 
from  these  dognapping  trolls.  As  usual,  the  details  in  Jan  Brett's 
paintings  make  re-viewing  a  mandate. 

6.318  Conrad,  Pam.  The  Tub  People.  Illustrated  by  Richard  Egielski. 
Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-021341-X.  29p.  2-8. 

For  all  children  who  have  stared  with  a  combination  of  wonder 
and  terror  at  their  disappearing  bathwater  and  the  swirling 
drain,  this  story  may  introduce  a  little  comfort.  Tub  Child,  one 
of  a  family  of  wooden  tub  toys,  is  pulled  down  the  drain  and 
must  be  rescued  by  a  "big  people"  plumber.  Richard  Egielski 
manages  to  impart  a  static  life  to  the  rigid  figures  and  a  feeling 
of  peaceful  resolution. 

6.319  Dahl,  Roald.  The  Minpins.  Illustrated  by  Patrick  Benson.  Viking 
Penguin,  1991.  ISBN  0-670-84168-4.  42p.  3-8. 

Bored  little  Billy  disobeys  his  mother's  warnings  and  ventures 
beyond  the  garden  gate  to  explore  the  allegorical  Forest  of  Sin. 
Chased  by  a  terrible,  smoke-blowing,  fire-breathing  Cruncher, 
Billy  escapes  by  climbing  a  tall  tree  where  he  discovers  the 
Lilliputian-like  Minpins.  The  giant  Billy  devises  a  clever  plan  to 
save  the  Minpins  and  himself.  Published  posthumously,  the 
story  reflects  Roald  Dahl's  glee  in  providing  delicious  scaries  for 
the  young  and  exquisite  language  for  reading  aloud.  The  illus- 
trations contrast  size  and  power  and  offer  magic  in  perfect 
strokes. 

6.320  Hutchins,  Pat.  Silly  Billy!  Illustrated  by  Pat  Hutchins.  Greenwil- 
low  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10818-0.  32p.  3-6  (est.). 


334 


Unique  Beings 


281 


A  green  monster  named  Hazel  has  a  typical  problem:  her  little 
brother  Billy  constantly  disrupts  her  toys  and  games.  "SILLY 
BILLY!  You've  spoiled  my  game!"  shouts  Hazel  each  time.  Fi- 
nally, Hazel  decides  to  sleep  in  the  toy  box,  which  Billy  naturally 

wants  to  do,  too  Familiar  subject  matter,  repetitive  text,  and 

lively  watercolor  illustrations  of  lime  green  monsters  in  orange 
vests  and  purple  dresses  make  this  a  book  which  promises  to 
join  its  companions,  The  Very  Worst  Monster  and  Where's  My 
Baby?,  as  a  favorite  for  young  children. 

6.321  Kehret,  Peg.  Horror  at  the  Haunted  House.  Cobblehill  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-525-65106-3. 132p.  8  and  up  (est). 

Near  Halloween,  Ellen  Streater  and  her  brother  Corey  act  in  a 
"haunted  house"  production  to  support  the  renovation  of  the 
Clayton  mansion.  Ellen,  always  sensitive  to  the  vibrations  of 
others,  is  visited  by  the  ghost  of  Lydia  Clayton,  former  mistress 
of  the  mansion.  The  ghost  wants  Ellen's  help  in  protecting  her 
Wedgwood  china  collection,  but  Ellen  does  not  understand  why 
the  china  is  in  need  of  protection.  When  Ellen  decides  to  inves- 
tigate, she  exposes  herself  both  to  danger  and  to  a  crime. 

6.322  Le  Guin,  Ursula  K.  Fish  Soup.  Illustrated  by  Patrick  Wynne. 
Atheneum,  1992.  ISBN  0-689-31733-6.  32p.  6-9  (est.). 

The  Thinking  Man  of  Moha  and  the  Writing  Woman  of  Maho  are 
best  friends,  although  completely  different.  When  one  day  the 
Thinking  Man  suggests  that  they  need  a  child  to  run  messages 
between  them,  the  result  is  a  magical  tale  of  expectations  too 
great  and  too  small,  as  well  as  a  parable  on  parenting  and  friend- 
ships. Patrick  Wynne's  detailed  pen-and-ink  illustrations  are 
done  on  creamy  paper,  inhabited  by  flying  mice  and  fish  and 
revealing  the  eccentricities  of  opposite  characteristics  in  friends. 

6.323  Melmed,  Laura  Krauss.  The  Rainbabies.  Illustrated  by  Jim  La- 
Marche.  Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688- 
10756-7.  32p.  6  and  up. 

The  luminous  surrealistic  illustrations  on  front  and  back  covers 
will  draw  readers  into  this  magical  tale  of  an  old  couple  who 
have  everything  in  life  except  the  one  thing  that  they  want 
most — a  child.  Adventures  abound  after  a  magic  moon  shower 
delivers  twelve  tiny  moonbabies.  With  a  happy  ending  and  folk- 
tale style,  this  story  will  be  asked  for  again  and  again. 

6.324  Nones,  Eric  Jon.  Wendell.  Illustrated  by  Eric  Jon  Nones.  Farrar, 
Straus  and  Giroux,  1989.  ISBN  0-374-38266-2. 32p.  4-8  (est.). 


335 


282 


Fantasy 


Wendell  is  a  cat  who  shares  his  house  with  his  owners  and  a 
troop  of  gnomic  mischief-makers.  Only  Wendell  can  see  the  tiny 
gnomes  so  he  gets  blamed  for  all  their  deeds — from  cracked 
plates  to  missing  eyeglasses.  Even  when  he  is  put  outdoors,  he 
is  blamed  for  all  that  goes  wrong.  Fortunately,  Wendell  is  a  good 
mouser  so  he  redeems  himself  and  sends  the  gnomes  packing. 
The  fun  of  being  "in"  on  the  invisible  trouble-makers  and  Wen- 
dell's innocence  will  appeal  to  anyone  ever  falsely  accused.  Il- 
lustrations depict  muted  1950s~style  home  furnishings  and  char- 
acters spread  edge  to  edge.  Only  the  Muppet-like  gnomes  and 
Wendell  are  vivid. 

6325  Peck,  Sylvia.  Seal  Child.  Illustrated  by  Robert  Andrew  Parker. 
Morrow  Junior  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08682-9.  200p.  8-12. 

Molly  is  fascinated  by  the  seals  on  Ambrose  Island  when  her 
family  takes  a  winter  vacation  to  their  Maine  cottage.  Although 
her  father  is  a  zoologist,  it  is  Ruby,  an  elderly,  full-time  island 
resident,  who  teaches  Molly  about  seals.  After  Molly  has  a 
deeply  moving  experience  looking  into  the  eyes  of  an  orphaned 
seal  pup,  Ruby  introduces  her  to  Meara,  a  pale,  odd  girl  who 
suddenly  and  mysteriously  appears  on  the  island.  The  story  is 
inspired  by  the  legends  of  selkies,  seals  in  human  form. 

6.326  Steig,  William.  Shrek!  Illustrated  by  William  Steig.  Farrar,  Straus 
and  Giroux/Michael  di  Capua  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-36877-5. 
28p.  5-10. 

Unabashedly  proving  that  beauty  is  indeed  in  the  eye  of  the 
beholder,  Shrek  the  monster,  with  his  fumes,  lice,  repulsive  man- 
ners, and  occasional  nasty  temper,  pursues  his  true  love,  Apple 
Streudel,  "the  most  stunningly  ugly  princess  on  the  surface  of 
the  planet."  Sprinkled  with  rhyme  and  elevated  with  William 
Steig's  lofty  language,  the  tale  will  appeal  more  to  middle  grad- 
ers and  may  even  send  them  scrambling  for  dictionaries.  Water- 
color  and  ink  illustrations  are  reminiscent  of  Steig's  Sylvester  and 
the  Magic  Pebble. 

6.327  Teague,  Mark.  Moog-Moog,  Space  Barber.  Illustrated  by  Mark 
Teague.  Scholastic  Hardcover  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-590-43332-6. 
32p.  6-9. 

Elmo  gets  the  most  embarrassing,  terrible  haircut — it  is  so  bad 
that  he  and  his  cat,  Leon,  travel  to  the  wondrous  outer-space 
barber,  Moog-Moog,  to  have  his  hair  fixed.  The  next  day  at 
school  it  is  comforting  for  Elmo  to  see  his  friend  Buford  also 


ERIC 


336 


Unique  Beings 


283 


wearing  a  baseball  hat  to  cover  his  haircut  (and  for  the  same 
reason).  Amicable  space  monsters  and  exhilarating  full-color 
illustrations  round  out  the  story. 

6328   Wiesner,  David.  June  29,  1999.  Illustrated  by  David  Wiesner. 
Clarion  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-59762-5.  32p.  6-12  (est). 

Holly  Ever's  science  experiment  is  extraordinary  indeed  for  a 
child  of  her  age  in  1999.  To  measure  the  effect  of  the  ionosphere 
on  plant  growth,  Holly  uses  weather  balloons  to  launch  her 
seedling  cups.  Not  since  Judith  Barrett's  Cloudy  with  a  Chance  of 
Meatballs  has  such  giant  food  fallen  from  the  sky.  But  are  these 
vegetables  really  Holly's  experiment  gone  awry?  The  fantasy  is 
enhanced  by  the  realism  of  the  landing  sites,  the  perspective 
shifts,  and  the  incredulity  of  the  observers — both  earthbound 
and  extraterrestrial. 


ERLC 


337 


Fine  Arts 


Art  is  universal. 
The  barriers  of 
language, 
time, 

and  culture 

crumble  in  a  moment  of  looking. 

Jan  Greenberg  and 
Sandra  Jordan 
The  Painters  Eye: 
Learning  to  Look  at 
Contemporary  American  Art 


333 


286 


7  Fine  Arts 


Performing  Arts 

7.1  Fonteyn,  Margot,  reteller.  Swan  Lake,  Illustrated  by  Trina  Schart 
Hyman.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-15-200600-1.  32p.  All  ages.  Fiction. 

Margot  Fonteyn  retells  the  story  of  Tchaikovsky's  classic  ballet 
as  a  fairy  tale.  Prince  Siegfried's  love  for  the  swan  queen,  Odette, 
promises  to  break  the  spell  that  keeps  her  imprisoned  as  a  bird. 
But  tricked  by  the  wizard,  Siegfried  pledges  his  true  love  to  the 
disguised  Odile,  the  wizard's  daughter,  and  dooms  his  true  love 
through  his  innocent  act  of  betrayal.  Despairing,  Siegfried  fol- 
lows Odette  in  death.  Trina  Schart  Hyman's  acrylic  and  pastel 
paintings,  edged  with  thin  ink  lines,  are  alternately  romantic, 
threatening,  and  moon-splashed. 

7.2  Greaves,  Margaret,  reteller.  The  Magic  Flute:  The  Story  of 
Mozart's  Opera.  Illustrated  by  Francesca  Crespi.  Henry  Holt, 
1989.  ISBN  0-8050-0887-X.  32p.  5-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

The  story  of  Prince  Tamino  and  his  rescue  of  the  beautiful  Prin- 
cess Pamina  is  retold  with  rounded,  childlike  figures  in  Oriental 
costumes,  and  set  against  stage  flats  or,  alternately,  against  plain 
white  pages,  each  bordered  and  illuminated.  The  action  of 
Mozart's  last  opera  follows  both  Tamino  and  his  magic  flute,  as 
well  as  the  bird  catcher,  Papageno,  with  his  magic  bells.  Scenes 
are  posed  to  represent  their  drama,  while  Papageno's  cavorting 
provides  relief. 

73  Haskins,  James.  Black  Dance  in  America:  A  History  through  Its 
People-  Thomas  Y.  Crowell,  1990.  ISBN  0-690-04659-6.  232p.  12 
and  up.  Nonfiction. 

From  jazz  dancing  to  break  dancing,  many  of  the  dances  of 
today  descended  from  African  dances  that  have  been  performed 
for  hundreds  of  years.  This  exploration  of  the  evolution  of  black 
dance  in  America  includes  insightful  stories  of  the  lives  of  some 
of  America's  most  famous  African  American  dancers,  such  as 
Bill  "Bojangles"  Robinson  and  Michael  Jackson.  Filled  with  fas- 
cinating black-and-white  photographs  of  African  American 
dancers  at  work,  this  book  offers  a  unique  perspective  on  the 


ERJ.C 


c. 


A.  The  Day  the  Goose  Got  Loose  by  Reeve  Lindbergh;  illustrated  by  Steven  Kellogg 
(see  6.87).  B.  The  Frog  Prince  Continued  story  by  Jon  Scieszka;  illustrations  by 
Steve  Johnson  (see  6.187).  C.  Little  Penguin's  Tale  by  Audrey  Wood  (see  6.161). 


ERIC 


BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE  ' 


iiuusrrarions  bythc  onions 


I  SPY 


—Ah  Alphabet  In  Art— 

Devised  &  selected  by  Lucy  Mickletbwait 


B. 


POEM- 


^  to  Begin  \XrriUn„ 


"tgfioetr 


HvraCobnLm 


wgston 


A.  Pish,  Posh,  said  Hieronymus  Bosch  by  Nancy  Willard;  illustrated  by  Diane  Dillon 
and  Leo  Dillon  (see  7.1 8).  B.  /  Spy:  An  Alphabet  in  Art  devised  and  selected  by  Lucy 
Micklethwait  (see  7.14).  C.  Aida  told  by  Leontyne  Price;  illustrated  by  Leo  Dillon  and 
Diane  Dillon  (see  7.5).  D.  Poem-Makir,^:  Ways  to  Begin  Writing  Poetry  by  Myra  Cohn 
Livingston  (see  10.110). 


341 


eESrcoPVAVAIMBLE 


Performing  Arts 


287 


roots  of  modern  dance.  Coretta  Scott  King  Honor  Book  (Writing), 
1991. 

7.4  Isadora,  Rachel,  adapter.  Swan  Lake.  Illustrated  by  Rachel  Isa- 
dora. G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1991.  ISBN  0-399-21730-4.  32p.  6-12 
(est.).  Fiction. 

Rachel  Isadora's  adaptation  of  the  transformation  tale  that  is 
portrayed  in  Tchaikovsky's  classical  ballet  about  the  prince  who 
falls  in  love  with  the  swan  queen  sets  light-bathed  ballerinas 
against  watercolor-washed  backdrops.  Impressionistic  scenes 
vary  from  murky,  swirling  night  skies  to  airy  onion-dome 
scenes.  The  illustrations  beg  for  the  music.  Children  may  also 
enjoy  comparing  Isadora's  dancers  with  those  created  by  Chris 
Van  Allsburg  for  Mark  Helprin's  version  of  Swan  Lake  or  with 
Trina  Schart  Hyman's  illustrations  for  Margot  Fonteyn's  version. 

7.5  Price,  Leontyne,  reteller.  Aida.  Illustrated  by  Leo  and  Diane 
Dillon.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich /Gulliver  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-15-200405-X.  32p.  8  and  up  (est.).  Fiction. 

When  her  homeland  is  invaded,  Princess  Aida  of  Ethiopia  is 
captured  and  enslaved  to  the  Egyptian  Princess  Amneris.  When 
Aida  falls  in  love  with  Radames,  a  captain  in  Egypt's  great  army, 
she  must  choose  between  her  love  for  country  and  her  Egyptian 
captain.  In  this  retelling  by  soprano  Leontyne  Price,  Verdi's 
tragic  opera  is  brought  to  life  with  rich  prose  and  magnificent 
artwork.  The  Dillons'  exquisite  marbleized  paintings,  enriched 
with  Egyptian  architecture  and  gold-sculptured  borders,  help  to 
dramatize  the  conflicts  of  courage  and  honor.  ALA  Notable  Chil- 
dren's Books,  1991;  Coretta  Scott  King  Award  (Illustration),  1991. 

7.6  San  Souci,  Robert,  reteller.  The  Firebird.  Illustrated  by  Kris 
Waldherr.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0800-9.  32p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

Robert  San  Souci  retells  the  tale  of  Prince  Ivan's  love  for  the 
beautiful  Princess  Elena  and  his  efforts  to  save  her  from  her 
captor,  an  evil  wizard.  Using  a  magical  talisman — a  feather  from 
a  grateful  Firebird  whom  Prince  Ivan  has  set  free — the  prince 
and  princess  undertake  a  series  of  trials  to  bring  about  the  wiz- 
ard's demise.  Oil  paintings,  applied  over  golden  acrylic,  offer 
stylized  medieval  landscapes  and  castle  scenes  in  this  adapta- 
tion of  Stravinsky's  ballet. 


342 


288 


Fine  Arts 


7.7  Verdy,  Violette.  Of  Swans,  Sugarplums  and  Satin  Slippers:  Bal- 
let Stories  for  Children.  Illustrated  by  Marcia  Brown.  Scholastic 
Hardcover  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-590-43484-5.  80p.  7-11.  Fiction. 

Violette  Verdy  a  principal  ballerina  for  the  New  York  City  Ballet 
between  1958  and  1976,  tells  the  stories  of  six  ballets,  The  Firebird, 
Coppelia,  Swan  Lake,  The  Nutcracker,  Giselle,  and  Sleeping  Beauty. 
Each  story  begins  with  background  information  on  the  ballet, 
including  Verdy's  response  to  her  own  role  in  the  ballet.  Some  of 
Marcia  Brown's  full-page  paintings  of  the  sets  are  painted  in  a 
folk-art  style,  bright  and  flat;  however,  the  Wilis  of  Giselle  and 
the  Sugar  Plum  Fairy  are  diaphanous  images. 

7.8  Werner,  Vivian,  reteller.  Petrouchka:  The  Story  of  the  Ballet. 
Illustrated  by  John  Collier.  Viking  Penguin /Bry on  Preiss  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-670-83607-9.  32p.  8  and  up  (est.).  Fiction. 

Vivian  Werner  gently  tells  the  story  of  Stravinsky's  ballet  about 
Petrouchka,  the  clown-puppet  with  a  heart,  who  yearns  for  his 
freedom  from  the  Old  Magician  so  that  he  can  both  dance  freely 
and  love  the  beautiful  Ballerina.  Like  Tomi  dePaola's  Clown  of 
God,  Petrouchka  is  transformed  in  the  final  tragic  scene,  freed  at 
last  to  dance  and  to  catch  snowflakes  on  his  tongue.  John  Col- 
lier's pastel  and  gouache  illustrations  forebode  tragedy,  even 
when  the  text  describes  festivity  and  color. 

Visual  Arts 

7.9  Cummings,  Pat,  compiler  and  editor.  Talking  with  Artists:  Con- 
versations with  Victoria  Chess,  Pat  Cummings,  Leo  and  Diane 
Dillon,  Richard  Egielski,  Lois  Ehlert,  Lisa  Campbell  Ernst, 
Tom  Feelings,  Steven  Kellogg,  Jerry  Pinkney,  Amy  Schwartz, 
Lane  Smith,  Chris  Van  Allsburg,  and  David  Wiesner.  Bradbury 
Press,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-724245-5. 96p.  9  and  up.  Nonfiction. 

Preceding  "conversations''  with  fourteen  prominent,  contempo- 
rary American  illustrators  of  books  for  children  is  a  page  ad- 
dressed "Dear  Reader/'  intended  to  enlighten  and  inspire  bud- 
ding artists.  Each  artist  profile  features  the  artist's  signature, 
photographs  of  the  artist  as  child  and  adult,  an  autobiographical 
sketch,  answers  to  eight  standard  questions  frequently  asked  by 
children,  and  full-color  reproductions  of  sample  artwork.  Con- 
cluding is  a  glossary  and  a  booklist  composed  of  the  artists'  five 
favorite  books  that  they  have  illustrated.  Boston  Globe-Horn  Book 
Nonfiction  Award,  1992. 


343 


Visual  Arts 


289 


7.10  Day,  David.  Aska's  Animals*  Illustrated  by  Warabe  Aska.  Dou- 
bleday  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-385-25315-X.  32p. 
All  ages.  Nonfiction. 

Imagining  the  beginnings  of  animals  from  around  the  world — 
kangaroo,  polar  bear,  musk  ox,  camel — Canadian  artist  Warabe 
Aska  created  fourteen  oil  paintings  as  intriguing  to  adult  as  to 
child.  Each  is  large,  brilliantly  colored,  and  unique  for  its  realis- 
tic depiction  of  groups  of  animals  which,  through  subtle  grada- 
tions, come  to  blend  seamlessly  into  the  landscape.  For  example, 
lifelike  deer  that  were  once  "tree  spirits"  bound  in  a  marshy 
foreground,  and  appear  as  a  forest  of  antlers  in  the  background. 
David  Day's  interpretive  poems  keep  readers  in  the  spell. 

7.11  Garza,  Carmen  Lomas,  as  told  to  Harriet  Rohmer  (translated  by 
Rosalma  Zubizarreta).  Family  Pictures/Cuadros  de  familia.  Il- 
lustrated by  Carmen  Lomas  Garza.  Children's  Book  Press,  1990. 
ISBN  0-89239-050-6. 32p.  4-8  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

Carmen  Lomas  Garza  is  a  folk  artist  who  painted  more  than  a 
dozen  pictures  of  her  memories  of  growing  up  in  a  Texas  border 
town.  She  was  then  interviewed  to  create  the  text  which  appears 
first  in  English,  then  in  Spanish.  Oils,  acrylics,  gouache,  and 
paper  cutouts  are  her  media  for  depicting  a  trip  to  the  fair, 
harvesting  oranges,  hitting  a  pinata  at  a  birthday  party,  making 
tamales,  and  other  important  scenes  of  childhood.  ALA  Notable 
Children's  Books,  1990. 

7.12  Greenberg,  Jan,  and  Sandra  Jordan.  The  Painter's  Eye:  Learning 
to  Look  at  Contemporary  American  Art.  Delacorte  Press,  1991. 
ISBN  0-385-30319-X.  96p.  10  and  up.  Nonfiction. 

"The  Painter's  Eye  provides  the  necessary  tools  for  young  readers 
to  begin  a  lifetime  appreciation  of  paintings  and  the  work  that 
painters  do— as  well  as  the  magic  they  create."  It  fully  achieves 
those  objectives  through  conversations  with  the  artists  them- 
selves, reproductions  of  postwar  American  paintings,  photo- 
graphs of  the  artists  at  work,  interviews  and  quotes,  an  art 
glossary,  museum  lists,  a  bibliography,  an  index,  and  a  readable, 
informative  text. 

7.13  Lattimore,  Deborah  Nourse.  The  Sailor  Who  Captured  the  Sea: 
A  Story  of  the  Book  of  Kells.  Illustrated  by  Deborah  Nourse 
Lattimore.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-023711-2.  30p.  7-10. 
Fiction. 


344 


290 


Fine  Arts 


Three  Irish  brothers  find  out,  in  turn,  that  circumstances  call 
forth  their  hidden  creativity.  In  the  end,  their  creative  struggle 
saves  their  monastery  home.  This  fictive  account  of  the  making 
of  the  magnificent  Book  of  Kells  personalizes  distant  historical 
achievements;  its  theme  concerns  the  individual's  struggle  to 
find  fulfilling  work.  The  compelling  watercolor  illustrations  are 
lightly  washed  to  simulate  the  look  of  ancient  parchment,  and 
each  page  is  bordered  with  intricate  designs  reminiscent  of 
manuscripts  sumptuously  illustrated  by  monks  of  old.  Notable 
1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

7.14  Micklethwait,  Lucy  I  Spy:  An  Alphabet  in  Art.  Greenwillow 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-116779-5.  64p.  All  ages.  Nonfiction. 

In  this  alphabet  "I  Spy"  game,  Lucy  Micklethwait  presents 
twenty-six  well-known  paintings  and  invites  their  close  inspec- 
tion. On  one  page,  simple  text  announces:  "I  spy  /  with  my  little 
eye  /  something  beginning  with  [a  letter  name]";  on  the  facing 
page  is  a  beautifully  reproduced  print.  Finding  a  "B"  object  is  as 
simple  as  finding  the  ball  in  Henri  Rousseau's  Football  Players. 
Among  the  other  artists  whose  works  are  represented  are  Ver- 
meer,  Miro,  Renoir,  Chagall,  Seurat,  Matisse,  Goya,  Steen, 
Boticelli,  and  Picasso. 

7.15  National  Gallery  of  Canada  and  Anne  Newlands.  Meet  Edgar 
Degas.  J.  B.  Lippincott,  1989.  ISBN  0-397-32369-7.  30p.  6  and  up 
(est.).  Nonfiction. 

Letters,  notebooks,  and  other  archival  records  make  possible  a 
first-person  narrative  in  which  Edgar  Degas  leads  readers  on  a 
tour  through  a  gallery  of  his  paintings,  stopping  before  each  to 
describe  what  it  represents,  his  reasons  for  choosing  the  subject, 
and  the  technique  that  he  has  employed.  Beautifully  reproduced 
on  quality  paper,  the  paintings  make  a  delightful  introduction  to 
Degas.  Throughout  the  book  the  artist's  times,  attitudes,  abili- 
ties, and  interests  are  revealed. 

7.16  Peppin,  Anthea.  Nature  in  Art.  People  in  Art.  Places  in  Art. 
Williams,  Helen.  Stories  in  Art.  Millbrook  Press,  1991-92.  48p. 
7-12.  Nonfiction. 

Four  companion  volumes  on  people,  places,  nature,  and  stories 
in  the  visual  arts  reach  over  time  and  place  to  spell  out  how 
primitive  and  studied  techniques  combine  with  creativity  to 
capture  the  magic  of  art.  Not  only  does  the  large-format,  full- 
color,  profusely  illustrated  design  of  the  Millbrook  Arts  Library 


ERIC 


Visual  Arts 


291 


introduce  artists  throughout  history,  but  the  specific  questions 
and  instructions  help  readers  to  think  about  art  and  to  become 
involved  in  artistic  experiences. 

7.17  Roalf,  Peggy.  Families:  Looking  at  Paintings.  Horses:  Looking 
at  Paintings.  Landscapes:  Looking  at  Paintings.  Seascapes: 
Looking  at  Paintings.  Hyperion  Books  for  Children,  1992.  48p. 
8-12.  Nonfiction. 

Created  to  "inspire  young  readers  to  observe  their  world  and  to 
use  their  imaginations  to  see  like  a  painter/'  these  four  paper- 
bound  volumes  in  the  Jacques  Lowe  Visual  Arts  Projects  series, 
complete  with  glossary  and  index,  demonstrate  that  great  artists 
have  viewed  the  same  subject  in  varied  ways.  Double-page 
spreads  feature  an  individual  painting,  with  a  color  photograph 
on  the  right  and  text  discussing  period,  artist,  and  artistic  tech- 
nique on  the  left. 

7.18  Willard,  Nancy.  Pish,  Posh,  Said  Hieronymus  Bosch.  Illustrated 
by  the  Dillons.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich,  1991.  ISBN  0-15- 
262210-1.  32p.  All  ages  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  elegant,  whimsical,  and  accessible  verse,  Nancy  Willard  tells 
of  a  housekeeper  working  for  the  famous  Flemish  painter  Hi- 
eronymus Bosch.  But  the  bizarre  creatures  of  Bosch's  paint- 
ings— including  pickle-winged  fish,  three-legged  thistles,  and 
human  drainpipes — give  her  no  rest.  Magnificent  illustrations 
by  Leo,  Diane,  and  Lee  Dillon  include  full-color  paintings  and 
monochrome  line  drawings  in  imitative  homage  to  the  classical 
painter.  Readers  of  Willard's  other  books — such  as  A  Visit  to 
William  Blake's  Inn — as  well  as  new  readers  will  be  thrilled  with 
this  masterpiece. 

7.19  Yenawine,  Philip.  Color.  Lines.  Shapes.  Stories.  Museum  of 
Modern  Art  and  Delacorte  Press,  1991.  22p.  4-8.  Nonfiction. 

The  Art  Books  for  Children  series  presents  basic  artistic  concepts 
and  vocabulary  to  young  children  through  the  use  of  full-color 
reproductions  of  works  from  the  collections  of  the  Museum  of 
Modern  Art  in  New  York.  Questions  on  each  page  invite  readers 
to  look  closely  at  works  of  art.  Each  book  ends  with  a  two-page 
synopsis  of  the  art  presented,  including  the  artist,  the  title,  the 
media  used,  and  a  brief  description. 


34f> 


Historical  Fiction 


The  man  without  a  past  is  fiction;  even  willful  ignorance  cannot  erase 
our  history.  Only  in  eternal  night  will  man  be  shadowless,  and  the 

past  not  follow  the  present  into  the  future  Knowledge  of  the 

past — of  history— gives  perspective  to  our  world. 

Erik  Christian  Haugaard,  The  Rider  and  His  Horse 


347 


294 


8  Historical  Fiction 


Prehistoric  Times 

8.1  Nolan,  Dennis.  Wolf  Child.  Illustrated  by  Dennis  Nolan. 
Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-768141-6.  40p.  7-10  (est.). 

Nine-year-old  Teo  lived  18,000  years  ago  when  humans  first 
used  animals  for  companions.  Though  ill  and  weak,  the  boy 
experiences  love  through  the  friendship  of  an  orphaned  wolf 
cub  and  pride  through  his  talent,  learned  as  an  apprentice,  of 
crafting  stone  tools.  Photorealistic  watercolor  paintings  are  re- 
markable in  their  detail  and  feeling.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade 
Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

Medieval  Times 

8.2  Dana,  Barbara.  Young  Joan.  HarperCollins/Charlotte  Zolotow 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-021423-6.  371p.  10-13  (est.). 

Born  in  France  during  the  Hundred  Years'  War,  young  Joan  of 
Arc  lives  a  simple  life,  surrounded  by  her  loving  family  But  she 
soon  discovers  that  her  future  involves  the  fulfillment  of  an  old 
prophecy  that  tells  of  a  young  maiden  who  saves  France. 
Guided  by  the  voices  of  saints  and  strengthened  by  her  faith  in 
God,  Joan  faces  danger  and  eventual  death  in  her  struggle  to 
save  her  country  in  its  battle  with  England.  This  fascinating 
novel  describes  how  a  French  heroine  grows  to  understand  and 
fulfill  her  destiny. 

Fifteenth  and  Sixteenth  Centuries 

8.3  Conrad,  Pam.  Pedro's  Journal:  A  Voyage  with  Christopher  Co- 
lumbus, August  3, 1492-February  14, 1493.  Illustrated  by  Peter 
Koeppen.  Boyds  Mills  Press/Caroline  House,  1991.  ISBN  1- 
878093-17-7.  84p.  7-10  (est.). 

Pedro  de  Salcedo  was  a  cabin  boy  on  the  Santa  Maria,  not  be- 
cause he  liked  the  sea  or  because  he  had  nautical  skills,  but 
because  he  could  read  and  write.  At  the  captain's  behest,  Pedro 
kept  a  journal  with  dated  entries  which  included  not  only  de- 
scriptions of  the  events  during  Columbus's  first  trans- Atlantic 
voyage  but  also  sketches  of  the  sights.  Pam  Conrad's  storytelling 


er|c 


348 


Fifteenth  and  Sixteenth  Centuries 


295 


and  Peter  Koeppen's  black-and-white  line  drawings  are  based 
on  the  best  guesses  of  historians  about  events  and  sights  on  the 
journey. 

8.4  Dorris,  Michael.  Morning  Girl.  Hyperion  Books  for  Children, 
1992.  ISBN  1-56282-285-3. 74p.  8  and  up. 

In  alternating  chapters  and  from  differing  perspectives,  twelve- 
year-old  Morning  Girl,  who  loves  the  day,  and  her  younger 
brother,  Star  Boy,  who  loves  the  night,  share  imagery-filled  inci- 
dents from  everyday  Taino  life.  The  year  is  1492.  Crises  like  a 
tropical  storm  and  their  mother's  miscarriage  are  surmounted. 
All  is  well  on  their  Caribbean  island  until  the  closing  pages 
when  Morning  Girl  goes  for  a  swim  and  encounters  a  canoeful 
of  'Visitors/'  The  book  ends  with  a  disturbing  passage  from 
Columbus's  diary.  Scott  O'Dell  Award  for  Historical  Fiction,  1993, 

8.5  Foreman,  Michael,  and  Richard  Seaver.  The  Boy  Who  Sailed 
with  Columbus.  Illustrated  by  Michael  Foreman.  Little, 
Brown/Arcade,  1992  .  ISBN  1-55970-178-1.  71p.  8-13  (est). 

The  log  of  Christopher  Columbus  documents  the  wreck  of  one 
of  his  ships  on  Christmas  Day,  1492,  when  a  ship's  boy,  left  in 
charge,  fell  asleep.  In  this  fictionalized  picture  book  in  impres- 
sionistic watercolor,  the  full  story  of  Leif,  the  ship's  boy,  is  spun 
out — from  his  signing  on  through  the  historic  voyage  to  the  days 
and  years  after  the  voyage.  Left  behind  by  Columbus,  Leif  is 
captured  by  a  native  tribe  and  apprenticed  to  the  tribal  medicine 
man.  Years  later,  fully  acculturated  and  a  grandfather,  he  once 
again  sees  European  sailors,  and  in  a  telling  gesture,  he  packs  up 
his  family  and  moves  westward. 

8.6  Locker,  Thomas.  The  Land  of  Gray  Wolf.  Illustrated  by  Thomas 
Locker.  Dial  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037-0937-4.  32p.  All  ages. 

Thomas  Locker  illustrates  this  account  of  contact  between  Euro- 
peans and  Eastern  Native  Americans  with  oil  paintings  in  a 
semi-primitive,  sweeping  style  that  evokes  the  luminous,  open 
spaces  of  unsettled  North  America.  Running  Deer,  an  Indian 
boy,  is  approaching  adulthood  at  a  time  when  his  tribe's  very 
existence  is  threatened  by  the  coming  of  the  whites.  In  a  straight- 
forward style,  the  narrative  presents  the  various  problems  that 
tribal  Americans  faced  and  leaves  the  reader  with  a  mixed  hope 
for  a  return  to  this  natural  way  of  life.  Notable  1991  Children's 
Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 


349 


296 


Historical  Fiction 


8.7  Smith,  Barry.  The  First  Voyage  of  Christopher  Columbus,  1492. 
Illustrated  by  Barry  Smith.  Viking  Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670- 
84051-3.  30p.  4-8  (est.). 

A  young  sailor  in  need  of  a  job  signs  on,  unknowingly,  with 
Christopher  Columbus.  Simple  text  tells  the  sailor's  version  of 
the  voyage  and  safe  return.  In  addition,  map  details  on  each 
page  allow  readers  to  locate  the  ships'  positions  en  route,  while 
a  fold-out  map  at  the  back  of  the  book  tracks  the  entire  voyage. 
Bordered  watercolors  give  a  sense  of  the  action  and  attitudes, 
including  strident  gray  waves  and  both  Columbus  and  his  sailor 
with  upside-down  smiles. 

8.8  Stolz,  Mary.  Bartholomew  Fair.  Greenwillow  Books/Beech  Tree 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-11501-2. 160p.  11  and  up  (est). 

Mary  Stolz  takes  readers  along  to  the  "clamor  and  clatter  and 
color  and  confusion"  of  London's  Bartholomew  Fair  in  1597. 
Action  follows  six  characters'  ventures  to  the  fair — two  school- 
boys of  opposite  social  standing,  a  maligned  apprentice,  a 
wealthy  cloth  merchant,  a  vegetable  washer  from  the  queen's 
kitchens,  and  Queen  Elizabeth  herself.  Each  brings  expectations, 
all  come  together  in  logical  ways,  and  each  leaves  with  some 
satisfaction.  Stolz's  text  is  beautifully  crafted  yet  challenging, 
with  terms  and  speech  reflective  of  the  historical  period. 

8.9  Ventura,  Piero.  1492:  The  Year  of  the  New  World.  Illustrated  by 
Piero  Ventura.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22332-0. 
93p.  All  ages. 

Piero  Ventura  provides  "an  imaginary  journey  through  the 
Europe  of  1492"  and  a  chance  to  sail  with  Columbus  himself. 
The  time-frame  is  given  social  perspective  by  an  imaginary  citi- 
zen of  each  old-world  country,  while  detailed  sketches  and  maps 
help  to  interpret  the  history  and  geography  of  the  regions.  Read- 
ers are  also  introduced  to  the  civilizations  of  the  New  World — 
the  Tainos,  Aztecs,  Maya,  Incas,  and  Buffalo  Hunters.  Succinct 
concluding  sections  address  "Europe  After  Columbus"  and  the 
effect  of  the  voyages  on  Native  Americans. 

8.10  Yolen,  Jane.  Encounter.  Illustrated  by  David  Shannon.  Harcourt 
Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-225962-7.  32p.  6-12. 

A  threatening  dream  of  three  great-winged  birds  with  voices  like 
thunder  disturbs  the  sleep  of  a  child  of  the  Taino  tribe  on  the 
island  of  San  Salvador.  From  his  wary  perspective,  the  boy  tells 
in  cadence-like  speech  of  the  arrival  of  "three  great  sailing  ca- 


Seventeenth  and  Eighteenth  Centuries 


297 


noes"  of  Christopher  Cohimbus:  "We  did  not  know  them  as 
human  beings,  for  they  hid  their  bodies  in  colors,  like  parrots." 
Despite  the  child's  warnings,  the  tribe  offers  welcome,  feasts, 
and  gifts,  and  in  return  receives  beads,  bells,  and  extinction. 
Acrylic  paintings,  jungle-lush  and  eloquent,  are  based  on  writ- 
ten descriptions. 

Seventeenth  and  Eighteenth  Centuries 

United  States 

8.11  Cooney,  Barbara.  Island  Boy.  Illustrated  by  Barbara  Cooney. 
Viking  Kestrel,  1988.  ISBN  0-670-81749-X.  32p.  4^8  (est.). 

Matthais's  pa  built  the  first  house  on  Tibbets  Island,  and  for  the 
rest  of  his  long  life,  Matthais  would  find  himself  coming  back  to 
that  island  again  and  again.  This  charming  tale  of  a  child's 
growth  into  a  father  (and  a  grandfather)  is  enhanced  by  colorful 
paintings  in  the  tradition  of  old-world  artists,  paintings  that 
reflect  a  time  when  life  in  New  England  was  dedicated  to  family, 
community,  and  the  land.  Spanning  Matthais's  entire  life,  this 
book  recalls  a  forgotten  way  of  life.  Boston  Globe-Horn  Book 
Honor  Book,  1989. 

8.12  Fleischman,  Paul.  Saturnalia.  HarperKeypoint/Charlotte  Zolo- 
tow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-021913-0. 112p.  10-12  (est.). 

In  1681,  the  working  populace  of  Boston  is  composed  of  masters 
and  servants,  journeymen  and  apprentices,  shopkeepers  and 
tithingmen.  Paul  Fleischman  weaves  their  lives  together 
through  the  story  of  William,  a  fourteen-year-old  Narragansett 
Indian  who  has  been  apprenticed  for  six  years  to  kindly  Mr. 
Currie,  the  printer,  after  his  tribe  was  slaughtered  by  the  Eng- 
lish. Although  he  has  come  to  accept  his  new  family,  William 
does  not  repress  his  longing  for  the  old.  Each  night,  he  slips 
through  Boston's  streets,  playing  his  bone  flute,  desperately 
searching  for  his  twin  brother  and  his  past.  Boston  Globe-Horn 
Book  Honor  Book,  1990. 

8.13  Harness,  Cheryl.  Three  Young  Pilgrims.  Illustrated  by  Cheryl 
Harness.  Bradbury  Press,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-74643-2. 32p.  5-10. 

Cheryl  Harness  tells  the  fictionalized  tale  of  the  Allerton  family 
and  their  children,  Mary,  Remember,  and  Bartholomew,  whose 
travels  and  travails  were  representative  of  other  Mayflower  Pil- 
grims who  sailed  for  a  new  land.  Although  an  author's  note 


351 


298 


Historical  Fiction 


denies  that  the  book  is  intended  as  a  scholarly  work,  the  water- 
color,  gouache,  and  pencil  illustrations  inform  through  labeled 
maps,  cutaways,  time-lines,  and  both  panoramic  and  detailed 
views  of  the  family's  struggles,  leading  to  the  first  Thanksgiving. 

8.14  Hudson,  Jan.  Dawn  Rider.  Philomel  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399- 
22178-6. 170p.  10  and  up. 

In  syntax  echoing  the  spirit  of  the  Blackfoot,  Jan  Hudson  tells  the 
story  of  sixteen-year-old  Kit  Fox,  who  questions  the  values  and 
traditions  of  her  tribe,  but  who  must  nevertheless  adhere  to 
them.  Women  are  not  to  hunt,  yet  Kit  yearns  to  develop  those 
skills.  Only  men  may  ride  horses,  yet  Kit,  with  the  help  of  her 
cousin  Found  Arrow,  tames  a  wild  stallion.  These  new  abilities 
are  tested  when  Kit  must  save  her  Blackfoot  tribe  from  a  raid  by 
their  traditional  enemy,  the  Snakes. 

8.15  Keehn,  Sally  M.  I  Am  Regina.  Philomel  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-399- 
21797-5.  240p.  10  and  up. 

Regina,  a  ten-year-old  Pennsylvania  girl,  is  kidnapped  by  Na- 
tive Americans  in  1755  and  is  forced  to  live  as  a  member  of  their 
tribe.  Based  on  a  true  story,  the  novel  realistically  portrays  both 
the  cruelty  and  compassion  that  Regina  experiences  during  her 
nine  years  of  captivity.  When  the  French  and  Indian  War  ceases 
and  Regina  is  ultimately  reunited  with  her  mother,  this  mature, 
indomitable  young  woman  empathizes  with  the  victims  of  both 
sides  of  the  war. 

8.16  Luhrmann,  Winifred  Bruce.  Only  Brave  Tomorrows.  Houghton 
Mifflin,  1989.  ISBN  0-395-47983-5. 190p.  10  and  up. 

Leaving  her  comfortable  life  in  England  behind,  Faith  Ralston 
comes  to  Massachusetts  with  her  father  to  make  a  new  home  in 
the  colonies.  When  she  is  left  alone  after  surviving  an  Indian 
massacre,  Faith's  struggles  lead  to  a  discovery  of  her  own 
strengths  and  her  future.  Set  during  King  Philip's  War  in  the  late 
1600s,  this  poignant  story  chronicles  a  young  girl's  efforts  to  find 
and  establish  her  own  place  in  the  world. 

8.17  Rinaldi,  Ann.  A  Break  with  Charity:  A  Story  about  the  Salem 
Witch  Trials.  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1992. 
ISBN  0-15-200353-3.  256p.  10  and  up. 

Told  in  flashback,  Ann  Rinaldi's  historically  accurate  novel  re- 
counts the  hysteria  and  terror  surrounding  the  Salem  witch  tri- 
als of  1692.  Fourteen-year-old  Susanna  English  learns  that  ring- 


352 


Seventeenth  and  Eighteenth  Centuries 


299 


leader  Ann  Putnam  is  faking  her  "bewitched"  state.  But  if 
Susanna  reveals  Putnam's  dissembling,  she  fears  that  her  own 
family  will  assuredly  be  accused  of  witchcraft  and  condemned 
to  death.  Ultimately,  the  young  teen's  honesty  and  courage  are 
rewarded. 

8.18  Turner,  Ann.  Katie's  Trunk-  Illustrated  by  Ron  Himler.  Macmil- 
lan,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-789512-2.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

Katie's  Trunk  is  based  on  a  true  incident  in  the  life  of  one  of  the 
author's  ancestors  at  the  beginning  of  the  American  Revolution. 
Young  Katie  and  her  Tory  family  flee  to  the  woods  when  a  group 
of  colonists  threatens  their  home.  At  the  last  minute,  though, 
Katie  boldly  returns  to  protect  their  property.  Realizing  the  futil- 
ity of  her  resistance,  she  climbs  into  a  trunk  filled  with  clothing, 
and  there  discovers  that  goodness  exists  even  in  conflict.  Water- 
color  paintings  set  graceful  period  scenes. 

World 

8-19  Garfield,  Leon.  Young  Nick  and  Jubilee,  Illustrated  by  Ted  Le- 
win.  Delacorte  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-385-29777-7. 135p.  10  and  up 
(est.). 

Leon  Garfield,  award-winning  British  author  of  juvenile  histori- 
cal fiction,  once  again  sets  his  tale  in  eighteenth-century  London. 
Ten-year-old  Nick  and  his  younger  sister,  orphaned  and  desti- 
tute, hope  to  attend  the  city's  charity  school.  Needing  a  "father" 
to  sponsor  them,  they  persuade  Mr.  Owen,  bachelor  and  pick- 
pocket extraordinaire,  to  perform  the  role.  Thus  begin  the  trio's 
adventures  as  a  family.  Ted  Lewin's  black-and-white  illustra- 
tions provide  readers  with  additional  information  about  English 
life  in  the  1700s. 

8.20  O'Dell,  Scott.  My  Name  Is  Not  Angelica.  Dell/Yearling  Books, 
1990.  ISBN  0-440-40379-0. 130p.  8-12. 

In  Scott  O'Dell's  tragic  last  novel,  sixteen-year-old  Raisha  and 
her  betrothed,  Konje,  an  African  tribal  chief,  are  captured  and 
sold  into  slavery  by  members  of  a  neighboring  village.  Descrip- 
tive, fast-paced  prose  follows  their  arduous  voyage  on  a  stifling 
slave  ship  to  the  West  Indies  of  1733.  On  St.  Johns,  Konje  escapes, 
becoming  the  leader  of  a  band  of  runaway  slaves  who  commu- 
nicate with  talking  drums  to  plan  revolt.  Beautiful  Raisha,  called 
Angelica  by  her  planter-owner,  knows  her  fate  still  lies  with 
Konje. 


ERLC 


353 


300 


Historical  Fiction 


Nineteenth  Century 

United  States 

8.21  Avi.  The  Man  Who  Was  Poe.  Orchard  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531- 
08433-7. 208p.  11  and  up. 

When  Edmund  and  his  sister  are  seemingly  abandoned  in  a 
strange  hotel  room  in  nineteenth-century  Rhode  Island,  Ed- 
mund must  finally  disobey  his  aunt  and  leave  to  get  food.  But 
he  returns  to  find  that  his  sister  has  disappeared!  This  ghostly 
tale  relates  Edmund's  search  to  unravel  the  mystery  of  his  fam- 
ily's disappearance,  aided  by  the  reluctantly  helpful  Auguste 
EHipin  (a.k.a.  Edgar  Allan  Poe).  Since  fragments  of  the  real  Poe's 
personality  and  tragic  life  are  interwoven  into  the  plot,  the  book 
would  enhance  a  literature  unit  on  mysteries. 

8.22  Beatty,  Patricia.  Sarah  and  Me  and  the  Lady  from  the  Sea. 
Morrow  Junior  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-688-08045-6.  182p.  9-12 
(est). 

The  Flood  of  1894  bankrupts  twelve-year-old  Marcella  Abbott's 
family.  They  are  forced  to  sell  their  Portland,  Oregon,  home  and 
to  live  year-round  in  their  summer  home  on  the  coast  of  Wash- 
ington. Their  pampered  and  privileged  world  is  gone,  and 
Marcy  has  trouble  adjusting  to  a  new  lifestyle.  Through  a  shared 
loss  and  a  mysterious  woman,  Marcy  becomes  friends  with 
Sarah  Kimball,  whom  Patricia  Beatty's  readers  first  met  in  The 
Nickel-Plated  Beauty.  Marcy  and  Sarah  share  presents,  confi- 
dences, and  the  discovery  of  the  identity  of  the  lady  from  the 
sea — a  shipwrecked  Russian.  Beatty  offers  another  lively  charac- 
terization in  this  suspenseful  tale. 

8.23  Beatty,  Patricia.  Who  Comes  with  Cannons?  Morrow  Junior 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-11028-2. 186p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Orphaned  Tabitha  Ruth  (Truth)  moves  from  Indiana  to  live  with 
her  Quaker  relatives  in  North  Carolina.  At  the  dawn  of  the  Civil 
War,  Truth  becomes  part  of  her  aunt  and  uncle's  Underground 
Railroad  station,  sending  slaves  northward.  Shy  and  uncertain 
of  her  place  within  her  new  family,  Truth  gains  courage  as  story 
events  unfold.  Threats  to  her  pacifist  family  from  slaveholders 
and  from  the  encroaching  battlefront  require  courage.  She  must 
even  petition  Mrs.  Lincoln  to  gain  her  cousin's  freedom  from  a 
Yankee  prison. 


c. 


A.  Morning  Girl  by  Michael  Dorris  (see  8.4).  B.  Young  Joan  by  Barbara  Dana  (see 
8.2).  C.  Encounter  by  Jane  Yolen;  illustrated  by  David  Shannon  (see  8.10). 


ERIC 


355 

3  WIIVAV  AdOO  1S38 


A.  Three  Young  Pilgrims  by  Cheryl  Harness  (see  8.13).  B.  Katie's  Trunk  by  Ann 
Turner;  illustrated  by  Ron  Himler  (see  8.1 8).  C.  Grasshopper Summerby  Ann  Turner 
(see  8.43).   D.  Mirette  on  the  High  Wire  by  Emily  Arnold  McCuily  (see  8.52). 


i  cST  COPT  AVAILABLE  m 


Nineteenth  Century 


301 


8.24  Beatty,  Patricia,  and  Phillip  Robbins.  Eben  Tyne,  Powder- 
monkey.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08884-8. 227p. 
9-13  (est.). 

Eben  Tyne,  almost  fourteen,  is  separated  from  family  and  friends 
when  he  is  selected  to  be  a  powdermonkey  (the  boy  who  scur- 
ries to  the  ship's  hold  and  back  to  refill  the  powder  supply  for 
the  cannons)  on  the  crew  of  the  Merrimack,  renamed  the  Virginia 
by  the  Confederates  during  the  Civil  War.  Through  the  ship's 
preparation  and  then  a  furious,  smoking,  clanging  battle,  Eben 
learns  about  loyalty  and  strength  of  purpose.  The  historical 
novel  is  so  rampant  with  detail  that  diagrams  and  maps  will  be 
a  necessary  supplement. 

8.25  Conrad,  Pam.  My  Daniel.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06- 
021314-0. 137p.  10  and  up. 

Julia  Creath  Summerwaite  sits  at  last  in  the  natural  history  mu- 
seum looking  at  the  dinosaur  bones  that  her  brother  found  long 
ago  when  they  were  children.  The  story  that  she  begins  to  tell 
her  grandchildren  is  of  the  harshness  of  her  Nebraska  child- 
hood, and  how  young  Daniel  Creath  discovered  the  bones  in  the 
river  and  lost  his  life  trying  to  protect  his  find  from  dinosaur 
grave  robbers.  The  plot  moves  between  the  present  day  and  the 
memories  of  her  brother's  sacrifice.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade 
Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

8.26  Fleischman,  Sid.  Jim  Ugly.  Illustrated  by  Jos.  A.  Smith.  Green- 
willow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-10886-5. 144p.  8  and  up. 

Jim  Ugly  is  a  very  loyal  but  very  ornery  dog  who  is  part  mongrel 
and  part  wolf.  He  belongs  to  an  actor  in  the  days  of  the  Califor- 
nia gold  rush,  and  the  owner's  possession  of  forty  pounds  of 
diamonds  gets  him  "buried."  But  is  he  really  dead?  His  son, 
twelve-year-old  Jake,  and  an  irascible  bounty  hunter  think  not. 
Their  race  to  find  him,  with  Jim  Ugly's  sense  of  smell  as  Jake's 
only  guide,  takes  the  pair  on  a  journey  from  Nevada  to  Califor- 
nia and  introduces  a  troupe  of  characters  that  enlivens  the  route. 

8.27  Harvey,  Brett.  My  Prairie  Christmas.  Illustrated  by  Deborah 
Kogan  Ray  Holiday  House,  1990.  ISBN  0-8234-0827-2.  29p.  5S. 

This  is  the  Plaisted  family's  first  Christmas  season  on  the  prairie, 
away  from  their  beloved  Maine.  When  Christmas  day  arrives, 
Papa,  caught  in  a  blizzard,  still  has  not  returned  home.  But 
Mama,  in  true  pioneer  fashion,  helps  the  children  keep  their 
hopes  and  Christmas  spirit  alive.  Papa  finally  arrives,  bearing  a 


357 


302 


Historical  Fiction 


"goodie-filled"  barrel  from  Maine.  Earth-tone  sketches  capture 
the  times  and  spirit  of  frontier  America  and  help  to  set  the  tone 
of  a  heartwarming  story  of  family  and  the  true  meaning  of 
Christmas.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

8.28  Holland,  Isabelle.  The  Journey  Home.  Scholastic  Hardcover 
Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-590-43110-2. 192p.  £-12. 

When  their  mother  dies,  sisters  Maggie  and  Annie  are  sent  west 
on  the  orphan  train  to  be  adopted  by  a  pioneer  family.  Taken  in 
by  the  Russells,  the  two  girls  struggle  to  make  a  new  life,  over- 
coming religious  prejudice,  illiteracy,  and  the  fear  of  losing  one 
another.  Set  in  the  late  1800s,  this  story  of  two  Irish  Catholic 
sisters'  journey  to  find  a  new  home  captures  the  spirit  of  new 
beginnings. 

8.29  Hoobler,  Dorothy,  Thomas  Hoobler,  and  Carey-Greenberg  Asso- 
ciates. A  Promise  at  the  Alamo:  The  Story  of  a  Texas  Girl. 
Illustrated  by  Jennifer  Hewitson.  Silver  Burdett  Press,  1992. 
ISBN  0-382-24147-9.  64p.  9-12. 

As  Santa  Anna's  troops  gather  outside  the  walls  of  the  Alamo, 
Maria  and  her  family  prepare  to  defend  the  newly  forming 
Republic  of  Texas.  Set  in  1836,  this  story  of  a  girl's  courage  and 
determination  to  keep  a  promise  brings  to  life  the  heroic  battle 
of  the  Alamo,  This  book  both  recounts  an  important  event  and 
celebrates  the  Hispanic  culture. 

8.30  Hooks,  William  H.  The  Ballad  of  Belle  Dorcas.  Illustrated  by 
Brian  Pinkney.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-394- 
84645-1.  32p.  6-10  (est). 

In  this  conjure  tale  from  North  Carolina,  the  beautiful  Belle 
Dorcas  gives  up  her  freedom  to  marry  her  true  love,  the  slave 
Joshua.  When  the  master  forces  them  to  be  apart,  Belle  seeks  a 
powerful  spell  from  Granny  Lizard,  the  conjurer.  Brian  Pink- 
ney's  colorful,  etching-like  illustrations  highlight  this  haunting 
love  story. 

8.31  Karr,  Kathleen.  It  Ain't  Always  Easy.  Farrar,  Straus  and  Giroux, 
1990.  ISBN  0-374-33645-8. 229p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Plucky  orphans,  eleven-year-old  Jack  and  eight-year-old  Mandy, 
travel  from  New  York  City  to  the  Pennsylvania  countryside  in 
1882,  looking  for  love  and  a  family.  Eventually  they  find  both, 
with  help  from  Miss  Blackman  of  the  Children's  Aid  Society  and 


358 


Nineteenth  Century 


303 


a  burly  Nebraska  rancher  named  Redbeard.  With  crisp  dialogue 
and  effective  characterization,  Kathleen  Karr  has  produced  an 
engrossing  story  of  survival  in  a  society  which  neglects  and  even 
abuses  its  homeless  children,  reminiscent  of  (but  superior  to)  the 
"rags-to-respectability"  novels  of  Horatio  Alger,  Jr. 

832  Kimmel,  Eric  A.  Four  Dollars  and  Fifty  Cents.  Illustrated  by 
Glen  Rounds.  Holiday  House,  1990.  ISBN  0-8234-0817-5.  32p. 
6-10  (est). 

Here's  a  tale  for  reading  aloud  both  for  its  cowboy  lingo  and  its 
surprise  ending.  Although  "it's  a  terrible  thing  to  call  a  cowboy 
a  deadbeat, ...  in  Shorty  Long's  case  it  was  true."  Shorty  owed 
Widow  Macrae  a  walloping  four  dollars  and  fifty  cents,  and  she 
was  determined  to  collect — even  if  she  had  to  "lay  him  out 
flatter  'n  the  bottom  of  a  skillet."  To  escape  his  creditor,  Shorty, 
fakes  his  death,  and  the  widow  kindly  offers  to  bury  him.  Line- 
and-crayon  drawings  are  trail  dust-spewing  images  of  an  un- 
kempt West. 

833  Levin,  Betty.  Brother  Moose.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-688-09266-7.  210p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Nell  and  Louisa,  two  orphan  girls  being  delivered  to  separate 
families  in  Canada  in  the  late  1800s,  have  their  plans  disrupted. 
First  Nell's  prospective  family  suddenly  leaves  for  Maine  with- 
out her.  Then  Nell  rescues  Louisa  from  the  abusive  home  in 
which  she's  been  placed.  Together  they  head  for  Maine  to  find 
Nell's  new  family.  With  Indian  Joe  and  his  grandson,  the  girls 
encounter  blizzards,  illness,  a  train  wreck,  and  a  friendly  moose 
before  reaching  their  new  home. 

8.34  Lyon,  George  Ella.  Cecil's  Story.  Illustrated  by  Peter 
Catalanotto.  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08512-0.  32p.  4-8 
(est.). 

With  great  poignancy,  a  child's  concerns  and  imaginings  merge 
during  the  Civil  War:  "If  your  papa  went  off  to  war,  /  he  might 
get  hurt  /  and  your  mama  might  go  to  fetch  him."  As  he  stays 
with  the  neighbors,  waiting,  helping,  hiding  tears,  time  passes, 
beautifully  illustrated  across  one  spread  by  the  development 
and  hatching  of  a  chick.  The  scene  shifts  to  the  campfires  at  the 
front  and  the  child's  imagining  what  life  would  be  like  "if . . . 
papa  should  not  come  home."  Muted  colors  allow  the  merger  of 
fears  and  hopes. 


359 


304 


Historical  Fiction 


835  Lyons,  Mary  E.  Letters  from  a  Slave  Girl:  The  Story  of  Harriet 
Jacobs.  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-684-19446-5. 146p. 
10-13. 

In  a  fictionalized  account  told  entirely  through  letters  "written" 
by  Harriet  Jacobs  (1813-97),  an  African  American  child  born  into 
slavery,  Mary  Lyons  portrays  a  life  of  courage,  hope,  and  great 
injustice.  As  a  twelve-year-old,  Harriet  writes  to  her  dead  Mama, 
describing  her  loneliness,  expressing  her  grief,  and  confessing 
the  sexual  harassment  that  she  is  experiencing.  As  an  adult,  she 
chooses  the  life  of  a  runaway,  spending  seven  years  in  an  attic 
crawlspace,  separated  from  her  two  children.  Although  the  con- 
tent of  the  book  is  heartrending,  Harriet's  saucy  spirit  shines 
through. 

836  Meyer,  Carolyn.  Where  the  Broken  Heart  Still  Beats:  The  Story 
of  Cynthia  Ann  Parker  Harcourt  Brace  Jovanovich/Gulliver 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-200639-7. 192p.  8-12. 

When  Cynthia  Ann  Parker  (18277-1864)  was  "rescued"  from  her 
Comanche  captors,  the  Texas  legislature  voted  her  a  state  hero. 
But  "Sinty  Ann"  yearned  to  return  to  her  Comanche  husband 
and  two  sons,  and  she  struggled  throughout  her  captivity  by  her 
pioneer  relatives  to  pass  her  Indian  ways  on  to  her  young 
daughter.  In  finely  wrought  chapters  that  alternately  tell  the 
story  from  the  points  of  view  of  Cynthia  Ann  and  her  cousin 
Lucy,  the  cultural  conflict  between  Native  Americans  and  pio- 
neers is  honestly  and  evenly  discussed. 

837  Myers,  Walter  Dean.  The  Righteous  Revenge  of  Artemis  Bon- 
ner. HarperCollins,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-020846-5. 140p.  10  and  up. 

With  rolling  good  humor  masquerading  in  the  cadences  of  for- 
mal speech,  Artemis  Bonner,  a  fifteen-year-old  African  American 
boy,  writes  his  journal  of  planned  revenge  against  Catfish 
Grimes:  Catfish,  it  seems,  shot  dead  Artemis's  uncle,  Ugly  Ned, 
in  the  streets  of  Tombstone.  As  Catfish  and  his  unladylike  com- 
panion, Miss  Lucy  Featherdip,  move  from  site  to  site  in  search 
of  Uncle  Ugly's  stowed  fortune,  Artemis  must  skirmish  repeat- 
edly with  his  nemesis,  dealing  with  such  woes  as  cactus  needles, 
ant  beds,  and  hungry  bears — "all  for  that  treasure." 

838  Paterson,  Katherine.  Lyddie.  Lodestar  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525- 
67338-5. 182p.  9  and  up  (est.). 

Set  in  New  England  in  the  mid  1840s,  this  novel  depicts  the  life 
of  Lyddie  Worthen,  a  destitute  Vermont  farm  girl  who  must 


360 


Nineteenth  Century 


305 


leave  her  home  and  support  herself  as  a  factory  worker  in  Low- 
ell, Massachusetts.  In  the  mill,  she  endures  illness  from  exhaus- 
tion, unsanitary  conditions,  low  pay,  sexual  advances  from  her 
manager,  and  isolation  from  her  family.  Like  other  young  female 
protagonists  in  Katherine  Paterson's  award-winning  novels, 
Lyddie  not  only  survives  but  actually  improves  her  lot  in  life 
through  her  resourcefulness,  industry,  and  indomitable  courage. 
Notable  1991  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies; 
ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1992. 

8.39  Reeder,  Carolyn.  Shades  of  Gray.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02- 
775810-9. 152p.  10-12  (est). 

Orphaned  by  the  Civil  War  and  its  aftermath,  twelve-year-old 
Will  Page  is  forced  to  live  with  his  uncle's  family.  Because  Uncle 
Jed  refused  to  fight  the  Yankees,  Will  considers  him  a  traitor.  But 
as  Will  works  alongside  his  uncle  on  the  farm,  he  learns  to 
appreciate  both  the  older  man's  strengths  and  the  many  faces  of 
loss.  Topics,  themes,  and  style  of  this  book  easily  blend  into  an 
intermediate  curriculum.  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1990; 
Scott  O'Dell  Award  for  Historical  Fiction,  1990;  Virginia  Library 
Association  Children's  Book  Award. 

8.40  Rounds,  Glen.  Cowboys.  Illustrated  by  Glen  Rounds.  Holiday 
House,  1991.  ISBN  0-8234-0867-1. 32p.  3-7  (est). 

When  a  rancher  hires  a  cowboy  to  ride  the  range,  the  work  day 
is  long  and  hard.  Glen  Rounds's  brief  text  and  scratchy  illustra- 
tions take  the  cowboy  from  sunup  to  sundown  in  a  kind  of 
"bunkhouse  to  bunkhouse"  saga  that  demonstrates  saddling 
and  breaking  a  horse,  looking  for  strays,  rescuing  steers,  meet- 
ing snakes  and  storms  head  on,  and  even  conquering  a  stam- 
pede. Line  and  color  work  together  for  lanky,  scruffy  cowboy 
images. 

8.41  Sanders,  Scott  Russell.  Aurora  Means  Dawn.  Illustrated  by  Jill 
Kastner.  Bradbury  Press,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-778270-0.  30p.  6-9. 

This  picture-book  account  of  early  pioneer  life  in  Ohio  is  based 
on  fact,  but  it  is  embellished  to  help  young  readers  imagine  the 
difficult  lives  of  American  settlers.  In  this  story,  the  Sheldons 
travel  from  Connecticut  to  Ohio  in  1800  to  join  the  settlement  of 
Aurora,  only  to  realize  that  they  are  the  first  settlers  in  the 
community.  Watercolor  paintings  are  accurately  detailed,  giving 
life  to  the  print  and  suggesting  strongly  the  beauty  of  this  chal- 
lenging new  land.  A  short  afterword  explains  the  factual  basis  in 


361 


306 


Historical  Fiction 


this  story  of  a  real  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Sheldon  and  their  seven  chil- 
dren. Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

SA2  Sanders,  Scott  Russell.  Warm  as  Wool*  Illustrated  by  Helen 
Cogancherry.  Bradbury  Press,  1992.  ISBN  0-02-778139-9.  32p. 
6-10  (est.). 

In  an  author's  note,  Scott  Russell  Sanders  writes  that  "Children 
enter  the  past . . .  not  through  names  and  dates,  but  through  the 
feelings  of  those  who  lived  in  the  past."  Drawing  from  a  nine- 
teenth-century record  book,  he  re-creates  the  story  of  the  Ward 
family,  focusing  particularly  on  Betsy  Ward,  the  first  pioneer  to 
own  sheep  in  Randolph  Township,  Ohio.  Because  of  her  chil- 
dren's desperate  need  for  warm  wool  clothes,  Betsy  purchased 
the  sheep  in  1805  with  saved  coins.  Watercolor  and  pencil  illus- 
trations inform  readers  of  time  and  place  and  convey  the  Wards' 
determination. 

8.43  Turner,  Ann.  Grasshopper  Summer*  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0- 
02-789511-4. 166p.  9-12  (est.). 

Eleven-year-old  Sam  White  and  his  family  move  from  bucolic 
Kentucky  to  the  raw  southern  Dakota  Territory  of  1874.  The 
journey  itself  is  challenging,  and  the  land  that  they  settle  is  vast 
and  harsh.  Coupled  with  the  external  tension  of  the  landscape  is 
Sam's  struggle  to  adjust,  as  compared  with  his  younger  brother 
Billy's  natural  optimism.  After  their  sod  house  is  built,  crops  are 
planted,  only  to  be  destroyed  by  a  terrifying  grasshopper 
plague.  Determined  to  persevere,  the  family  remains  on  the 
land.  Ann  Turner's  dialogue-filled  saga  of  a  pioneer  family  that 
triumphs  would  make  for  a  good  read-aloud.  Notable  1989  CM- 
dren's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

8.44  Van  Leeuwen,  Jean.  Going  West  Illustrated  by  Thomas  B.  Allen. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-1028-3.  32p. 
5-9. 

Illustrated  with  earth-tone  chalks  on  roughly  textured  brown 
paper,  the  story  of  a  pioneer  family's  westward  journey  and 
settlement  is  told  through  the  eyes  of  seven-year-old  Hannah. 
Hannah's  voice  is  both  childlike  and  lyrical:  "Here  is  what  was 
in  our  wagon . . . ";  "Rebecca  caught  a  cold.  At  night  she 
coughed  and  coughed.  Mama  looked  worried,  but  still  we  rode 
on.  Going  West."  Brutal  weather,  deprivation,  and  isolation  are 
evident,  as  are  steadfastness,  ingenuity,  and  hope. 


er|c 


362 


Nineteenth  Century 


307 


8.45  Wisler,  G.  Clifton.  Piper's  Ferry:  A  Tale  of  the  Texas  Revolution* 
Lodestar  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-525-67303-2. 144p.  10  and  up. 

Leaving  his  home  in  New  Orleans,  young  Tim  Piper  heads  to 
Texas  to  help  his  uncle  run  a  ferry  across  the  Brazos  River.  As 
Tim  tries  to  find  his  place  in  this  new  land,  he  builds  strong 
friendships  and  faces  danger  and  personal  conflict.  Told  through 
the  eyes  and  voice  of  Tim,  this  historically  based  novel,  rich  with 
the  characters  and  events  of  the  Texas  revolution,  tells  a  story  of 
a  young  teen's  struggle  to  become  a  man. 

8.46  Wisler,  G.  Clifton.  Red  Cap-  Lodestar  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525- 
67337-7.  160p.  10-13  (est.). 

Set  during  the  Civil  War  and  based  on  a  real  boy's  exploits,  this 
novel  portrays  thirteen-year-old  Ransom  Powell  as  he  copes 
with  his  duties  as  a  drummer  boy  in  the  Union  army.  Then 
Ransom  is  captured  and  sent  to  the  notorious  Andersonville 
prison  camp.  Ultimately,  the  young  boy's  wit,  stoicism,  and 
bravery  make  him  a  hero  to  his  fellow  prisoners  and  allow  him 
to  escape  to  the  North. 

World 

8.47  Avi.  The  True  Confessions  of  Charlotte  Doyle.  Avon/Flare 
Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-380-71475-2.  232p.  10  and  up. 

"Not  every  thirteen-year-old  girl  is  accused  of  murder,  brought 
to  trial,  and  found  guilty. . . .  For  my  part  I  intend  to  tell  the  truth 
as  I  lived  it."  So  begins  the  unexpectedly  terrifying  tale  told  by 
Charlotte  Doyle,  the  only  female  passenger  aboard  the  Seahawk 
on  a  Liverpool-to-Providence  voyage  with  vicious  sailors  and  a 
tyrannical  captain  during  the  summer  of  1832.  Readers  willing 
to  tear  themselves  away  from  rapidly  unfolding  action  will  ap- 
preciate an  appendix  naming  ship  locations  and  equipment  and 
explaining  ship's  time.  ALA  Notable  Book,  1990;  Boston  Globe- 
Horn  Book  Fiction  Award,  1991;  Newbery  Honor  Book,  1991. 

8.48  Crofford,  Emily.  Born  in  the  Year  of  Courage*  Carolrhoda 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-87614-679-5. 160p.  10  and  up. 

Manjiro,  a  fifteen-year-old  Japanese  fisherman  living  in  the  mid 
nineteenth  century,  becomes  shipwrecked  and  stranded  on  a 
deserted  island.  Based  on  actual  events,  the  story  describes  Man- 
jiro's  rescue  by  American  whalers,  his  subsequent  training  at  sea 
and  education  in  the  United  States,  and  his  great  success  as  a 
courageous,  talented  navigator.  Since  at  that  time  Japan's  policy 


363 


308 


Historical  Fiction 


of  isolationism  meant  virtually  no  trade  with  Western  countries, 
Manjiro  became  a  key  negotiator  in  opening  up  trade  relations 
between  the  United  States  and  Japan  in  the  1850s. 

8.49  Hautzig,  Esther  Riches,  Illustrated  by  Donna  Diamond.  Harper- 
Collins/Charlotte Zolotow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-022260-3. 
43p.  8  and  up  (est.). 

Successful,  hard-working  shop  owners  Samuel  and  Chaya- 
Rivka  grow  old  and  desire  a  more  restful  life.  Wanting  most  of 
all  to  find  a  way  to  please  the  Almighty,  Samuel  seeks  guidance 
from  a  wise  rabbi.  In  following  his  advice,  the  couple  learns  that 
the  giving  of  oneself  can  be  more  important  than  the  giving  of 
material  things.  Black-and-white  drawings  capture  devotion 
and  humility. 

8.50  Hudson,  Jan.  Sweetgrass.  Philomel  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-399- 
21721-5. 157p.  8-12. 

This  is  a  well-researched  novel  about  Sweetgrass,  a  fifteen-year- 
old  Blackfoot  Indian  girl  living  on  the  prairies  of  Alberta  in 
western  Canada  in  the  nineteenth  century.  Told  in  first  person,  it 
chronicles  the  daily  life,  dreams,  and  courage  of  Sweetgrass  as 
she  experiences  awakening  emotions  of  love  and  battles  a  dev- 
astating smallpox  epidemic  which  threatens  to  annihilate  her 
tribe.  Through  a  suspenseful  plot  and  abundant  dialogue,  the 
book  subtly  but  skillfully  educates  the  young  reader  in  the  ways 
of  the  Blackfoot.  Canada  Council  Children's  Literature  Prize;  CLA 
Book  of  the  Year  for  Children;  ALA  Booklist  Children's  Editors' 
Choices,  1989;  ALA  Notable  Children's  Books,  1990. 

8.51  Lutzeier,  Elizabeth.  The  Coldest  Winter.  Holiday  House,  1991. 
ISBN  0-8234-0899-X.  153p.  10  and  up. 

In  this  fictional  account  of  the  Irish  Potato  Famine  of  the  1840s, 
Eamonn  and  his  family  are  evicted  from  their  farm  in  the  dead 
of  winter  by  British  troops  because  their  landlord  wants  more 
pasture  land.  They  walk  to  a  city  in  search  of  work  and  famine 
relief,  then  begin  to  die  of  starvation  and  yellow  fever.  Author 
Elizabeth  Lutzeier  does  an  exceptional  job  of  dramatizing  the 
political  and  economic  dynamics  of  social  disintegration. 

8.52  McCully,  Emily  Arnold.  Mirette  on  the  High  Wire.  Illustrated 
by  Emily  Arnold  McCully.  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
399-22130-1.  32p.  4-8. 


364 


Twentieth  Century 


309 


In  1890s  Paris,  the  best  place  to  stay  if  you  are  an  acrobat,  juggler, 
or  mime  is  at  the  widow  Gateau's  boardinghouse.  There,  guests 
receive  superb  treatment  from  the  widow  and  her  daughter, 
Mirette.  One  retiring  guest,  though,  fascinates  Mirette  above  all 
others,  and  she  begs  the  high-wire  artist,  the  Great  Bellini,  for 
instruction.  Mirette's  determination  both  to  learn  tightrope 
walking  and  to  help  the  Great  Bellini,  who  has  become  fearful  of 
the  wire,  is  charmingly  interpreted  through  Emily  Arnold 
McCully's  watercolors.  Caldecott  Medal,  1993. 

Twentieth  Century 

United  States:  Early  in  the  Century 

8.53  Allen,  Thomas  B.  On  Granddadd/s  Farm.  Illustrated  by 
Thomas  B.  Allen.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-394-99613-5.  32p.  4-7  (est.). 

While  Granddaddy  works  as  a  train  brakeman  on  the  Nashville 
to  Montgomery  run  four  days  a  week,  three  cousins  help 
Granny  run  the  farm.  The  children  water  the  plants,  tend  the 
animals,  haul  coal  and  water  from  the  well,  as  well  as  ride  the 
mule  and  play  in  the  haystacks.  Soft,  textured  pastels  depict 
pastoral  scenes  from  a  1930s  Tennes^e  farm, 

8.54  Cooney,  Barbara.  Hattie  and  the  Wild  Waves:  A  Story  from 
Brooklyn.  Illustrated  by  Barbara  Cooney  Viking  Penguin,  1990. 
ISBN  0-670-83056-9. 40p.  3^8. 

Growing  up  in  Brooklyn  at  the  turn  of  the  century,  Hattie, 
daughter  of  German  immigrants,  enjoys  sketching  river  boats 
and  ocean  waves.  As  the  years  go  by  and  Hattie's  brother  and 
sister  make  their  way  in  the  world,  her  family  worries  about 
what  will  become  of  their  youngest  daughter.  But  Hattie  knows 
her  own  mind  and,  with  the  help  of  a  fortune-teller,  finally 
realizes  her  dream  of  becoming  an  artist.  Barbara  Cooney's 
primitive-style  illustrations,  painted  with  acrylics  and  accented 
with  pencils,  help  to  capture  the  story  of  an  American  era  that 
was  spirited  with  independence  and  strength  of  family 

8.55  Corcoran,  Barbara.  The  Private  War  of  Lillian  Adams. 
Atheneum/Jean  Karl  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-31443-4. 166p.  9- 
12. 

It's  1917,  World  War  I  is  raging,  and  Lillian's  family  has  just 
moved  to  a  small  New  England  town.  The  fifth  grader,  eager  to 


ERIC 


310 


Historical  Fiction 


be  noticed  and  make  friends,  convinces  her  classmates  that  their 
town  is  harboring  a  spy.  In  the  end,  Lillian  learns  that  rumors 
can  be  a  dangerous  thing. 

8*56  Cross,  Verda.  Great-Grandma  Tells  of  Threshing  Day.  Illus- 
trated by  Gail  Owens.  Albert  Whitman,  1992.  ISBN  0-8075-3042- 
5. 38p.  6-11. 

"Threshing  day  is  the  best  day  of  the  year. ...  I'll  remember  it  all 
the  days  of  my  life  And  I  did  just  that  "At  age  seventy- 
eight,  Verda  Cross,  a.k.a.  Great-Grandma,  transports  us  to  a  June 
day  in  the  early  1900s  and  reminisces  about  the  winter  wheat 
harvest  on  a  Missouri  farm.  Through  her  words  and  through 
Gail  Owens's  masterful  pastel  illustrations,  we  are  reminded  of 
the  sense  of  community,  of  pitching  in  to  accomplish  a  task,  so 
commonplace  in  an  earlier  day. 

8.57  Fleischman,  Paul.  Shadow  Play.  Illustrated  by  Eric  Beddows. 
Harper  and  Row/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-06- 
021865-7.  34p.  4-8. 

At  a  county  fair  in  the  early  1900s,  the  silhouetted  "LeGrand 
Family"  introduces  the  shadow  puppet  play  of  "Beauty  and  the 
Beast."  As  the  play  progresses,  the  bull  Stupendo  from  a  neigh- 
boring tent  crashes  the  stage  and  terrorizes  the  LeGrands.  At 
last,  Stupendo  is  tamed  by  the  gentle,  youngest  LeGrand.  When 
the  audience  is  invited  backstage,  they  are  amazed  to  discover 
that  the  shadows,  including  the  bull,  were  all  made  by  a  master 
puppeteer,  echoing  the  moral  of  the  fairy  tale  itself:  "Appear- 
ances are  as  thin  and  deceptive — as  shadows." 

8.58  Gregory,  Kristiana.  Earthquake  at  Dawn.  Harcourt  Brace 
Jovanovich/Gulliver  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-200446-7.  187p.  10 


In  a  fictionalized  account,  two  young  women,  photographer 
Edith  Irvine  and  her  assistant,  witness  the  San  Francisco  earth- 
quake of  1906.  In  the  aftermath,  the  pair  becomes  involved  with 
a  family  of  Irish  immigrants,  meets  Jack  London,  and,  against 
the  wishes  of  civic  leaders,  manages  to  photograph  the  dimen- 
sions of  the  disaster.  This  is  first-rate  historical  fiction,  and  it 
would  have  been  a  real  treat  to  have  the  text  accompanied  by 
surviving  photographs  by  the  real  Edith  Irvine. 

8.59     Houston,  Gloria.  Littlejim.  Illustrated  by  Thomas  B.  Allen.  Phi- 
lomel Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-22222-0. 172p.  8-12. 


and  up. 


Twentieth  Century 


311 


Living  in  rural  North  Carolina  in  the  early  1900s,  twelve-year- 
old  Littlejim  Houston  is  happy  being  the  best  student  in  his 
class.  But  Papa  thinks  that  Littlejim  is  wasting  time  on  "book 
learning"  and  should  instead  be  learning  to  live  off  the  land. 
Through  a  newspaper's  essay  contest,  Littlejim  struggles  with 
his  need  to  become  a  scholar  and  his  desire  to  please  his  father, 
and  in  the  process  he  proves  what  it  means  to  be  a  man.  Full- 
page  black-line  sketches  illustrate  this  sensitive  story  of  a  fa- 
ther's acceptance  and  a  young  boy's  coming  of  age  in  Ap- 
palachia.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

8.60  Leighton,  Maxinne  Rhea.  An  Ellis  Island  Christmas.  Illustrated 
by  Dennis  Nolan.  Viking  Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670-83182-4. 
32p.  3-8. 

Six-year-old  Krysia  and  her  family  leave  Poland  to  join  Papa  in 
America.  Although  sad  to  leave  behind  friends  and  her  doll, 
Yola,  Krysia  is  excited  about  the  reunion.  Arriving  in  the  forbid- 
ding immigration  hall  on  Christmas  Eve,  Mama  retrieves  Yola 
from  a  wicker  basket  to  ease  the  strangeness  that  surrounds 
Krysia.  The  story  is  told  in  detailed  retrospect,  with  paintings 
adding  a  chimerical  quality  to  remembered  scenes  from  the 
Polish  village  to  Ellis  Island. 

8.61  Leonard,  Laura.  Saving  Damaris.  Atheneum/Jean  Karl  Books, 
1989.  ISBN  0-689-31553-8. 198p.  8-12. 

Through  an  engaging  diary,  twelve-year-old  Abby  tells  how  she, 
her  brother  Joel,  and  her  sister  Damaris  struggle  to  hold  their 
family  together  after  the  sudden  death  of  their  mother.  It  is  early 
twentieth-century  America,  and  sixteen-year-old  Damaris  goes 
to  work  at  Mr.  Buttchenbacher's  emporium.  Abby  and  Joel  try 
to  prevent  their  beautiful  sister  from  trying  to  aid  the  family  by 
accepting  marriage  to  the  wealthy  but  ill-tempered  widower. 
The  wedding  seems  unstoppable  until  the  children  discover  that 
there  is  no  room  for  them  in  Mr.  B's  plans. 

8.62  McDonald,  Megan.  The  Great  Pumpkin  Switch.  Illustrated  by 
Ted  Lewin.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1992.  ISBN 
0-531-08600-3.  32p.  4-7. 

"Sit  close  now,  and  Til  tell  you/'  In  a  chair  by  a  window,  a 
grandfather  begins  a  tale  about  a  time  when  he  and  his  friend 
Otto  were  boys,  and  Grandpa's  sister,  Rosie,  had  grown  Big 
Max — the  biggest  pumpkin  ever — for  her  Sunflower  Girls 


367 


312 


Historical  Fiction 


patches.  But  the  boys  inadvertently  cut  the  pumpkin  vine,  and 
Big  Max  rolled,  bounced,  and  smashed  into  the  street  below.  Ted 
Lewin's  knicker-clad  characters  with  their  Radio  Flyer  create 
nostalgia  for  a  time  past. 

8.63  Precek,  Katharine  Wilson.  Penny  in  the  Road.  Illustrated  by 
Patricia  Cullen-Clark.  Macmillan,  1989.  ISBN  0-02-774970-3. 32p. 
4-8. 

A  sense  of  wonder  and  respect  permeate  Katharine  Wilson  Pre- 
cek's  story  that  a  grandfather  tells  of  himself  as  a  country  boy  in 
1913  who,  after  finding  a  1793  penny,  imagines  what  life  must 
have  been  like  for  the  boy  who  dropped  it.  In  the  present,  the 
grandchildren  can  imagine  the  boyhood  of  the  grandfather  who 
wondered.  Patricia  Cullen-Clark's  soft  pastel  illustrations  add  to 
the  sense  of  a  gently  faded  past  which  lingers. 

8.64  Shefelman,  Janice.  A  Peddler's  Dream.  Illustrated  by  Tom  She- 
felman.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-60904-6.  32p.  6-10 
(est). 

A  Lebanese  immigrant  pursues  his  dream  of  becoming  a  mer- 
chant in  the  New  World.  The  realistic  historical  tale,  set  at  the 
turn  of  the  century,  tells  of  the  hopes,  frustrations,  and  eventual 
successes  of  Soloman  Joseph  Azar  in  his  climb  from  peddler  to 
clerk  to  partner  and,  finally,  to  owner  of  the  clothing  store  of  his 
dreams.  The  author-illustrator  team  capture  both  the  feeling  and 
setting  of  the  Old  World,  as  well  as  the  fictionalized  American 
town  of  Arcadia. 

8.65  Wallace,  Bill.  Buffalo  Gal.  Holiday  House,  1992.  ISBN  0-8234- 
0943-0. 185p.  11  and  up  (est.). 

In  this  romantic  adventure  story  set  in  1904,  the  Guthridge 
women  participate  in  efforts  to  save  the  buffalo  from  extinction. 
Amanda  Guthridge  and  her  mother  travel  to  Oklahoma  and 
then  Texas  to  help  round  up  a  herd  of  buffalo  that  will  be  sent  to 
safety  on  a  ranch.  During  the  trip's  adventures,  Amanda  meets 
David  Talltree,  a  Native  American  soldier  who  escorts  them  on 
their  journey.  At  first,  Amanda  and  David  have  little  use  for  each 
other,  but  their  slowly  developing  respect  turns  to  love. 

8.66  Wyman,  Andrea.  Red  Sky  at  Morning.  Holiday  House,  1991. 
ISBN  0-8234-0903-1.  225p.  10  and  up. 

While  her  father  seeks  a  new  farm  in  Oregon,  Callie  is  left  alone 
in  Indiana  with  her  Grandfather  Opa  to  tend  the  farm  and  Cal- 


368 


Twentieth  Century 


313 


lie's  sick  mother.  Friendships,  love,  and  the  simple  pleasures  of 
early  twentieth-century  prairie  life  enable  Callie  and  Opa  to 
endure  the  disease  and  death  that  strike  her  family  and  town 
during  her  father's  absence.  An  enriching  novel  to  accompany  a 
history  unit,  this  book  would  also  make  a  captivating  read- 
aloud. 

8.67  Yep,  Laurence.  The  Star  Fisher.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991. 
ISBN  0-688-09365-5. 160p.  8  and  up. 

Loosely  based  on  Laurence  Yep's  own  family  background,  this 
novel  examines  the  struggles  and  triumphs  of  a  Chinese  Ameri- 
can family  moving  from  Ohio  to  West  Virginia  in  the  1920s.  The 
protagonist,  fifteen-year-old  Joan  Lee,  is  dismayed  by  the  preju- 
dice that  her  family  encounters  from  several  townspeople  when 
her  father  tries  to  establish  a  laundry  business.  Aided  by  ancient 
Miss  Lucy  and  her  friend  Bernice,  Joan  Lee  and  her  mother's 
delicious  apple  pies  ultimately  win  over  the  hearts  of  their 
small-town  neighbors. 

United  States:  World  War  I  and  Next  Two  Decades 

8.68  Green,  Connie  Jordan.  Emmy.  Margaret  K.  McElderry  Books, 
1992.  ISBN  0-689-50556-6. 152p.  10-13  (est.). 

Nothing  has  been  the  same  since  Emmy's  father  was  disabled  in 
the  mine  accident.  Pa  has  become  reclusive;  for  Emmy,  there  is 
never-ending  work  to  be  done  and  no  time  for  herself.  Nonethe- 
less, the  family  is  determined  to  overcome  the  odds  and  stay 
together.  Then  Emmy's  brother  is  in  a  mining  accident,  and  even 
this  resolve  appears  threatened.  But  the  strength  of  family  ties 
proves  strong  enough  to  hold  the  family  together  and  to  bring 
back  the  Pa  that  everyone  loves. 

8.69  Morris,  Linda  Lowe.  Morning  Milking.  Illustrated  by  David 
DeRan.  Picture  Book  Studio,  1991.  ISBN  0-88708-173-8.  34p.  6-8 
(est). 

This  account  of  a  farm  girl  helping  her  father  with  milking  the 
cows,  though  simple,  is  entrancing  and  profound.  The  water- 
color  illustrations  are  warm  and  serene,  rendering  farm  life  with 
loving  care.  The  text,  plain  in  language  and  rich  in  detail,  reso- 
nates with  the  love  between  parent  and  child,  the  human  yearn- 
ing to  freeze  happiness  in  time,  the  beauty  of  land  and  animals, 
and  the  power  of  storytelling. 


ERIC 


369 


314 


Historical  Fiction 


8.70  Skurzynski,  Gloria.  Good-bye,  Billy  Radish.  Bradbury  Press, 
1992.  ISBN  0-02-782921-9. 138p.  10  and  up. 

Against  the  backdrop  of  the  United  States  entering  World  War  I, 
two  young  boys  entering  adolescence  develop  a  deep  friend- 
ship. The  characters  of  Hank  Kerner,  an  "all- American"  boy  who 
aspires  to  be  a  doctor,  and  Bazyli  Radichevych,  a  Ukrainian 
immigrant  who  accepts  his  destiny  as  a  steel  worker  in  the  small 
Pennsylvania  town,  are  complex  and  appealing.  Within  the  con- 
text of  several  focal  incidents,  the  characters  face  career  deci- 
sions, crises  of  personal  and  cultural  identity,  and  death.  Black- 
and-white  photos  illuminate  the  era. 

United  States:  World  War  II  and  Later 

8.71  Avi.  "Who  Was  That  Masked  Man,  Anyway?"  Orchard 
Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-531-08607-0.  176p. 
9  and  up. 

Franklin  D.  Wattleson  and  Mario  Calvino  are  next-door  neigh- 
bors and  best  friends,  even  though  Frankie's  radio  adventure 
shows — the  Green  Hornet,  the  Lone  Ranger,  the  Shadow — spill 
into  his  ordinary  1945  life  and  out  through  his  imaginary  per- 
sona, Chet  Barker  (with  his  faithful  sidekick,  Skipper  O'Malley). 
Meanwhile,  Frankie's  brother  Tom,  wounded  in  the  war,  is  un- 
communicative; Miss  Gomez  isn't  happy  with  Frankie's  school 
behavior;  and  the  roomer,  Dr.  Smerdlow,  just  could  be  a  spy.  Told 
entirely  in  dialogue,  Avi's  story  and  its  characters  are  great  fun. 

8.72  Cormier,  Robert.  Other  Bells  for  Us  to  Ring.  Illustrated  by  De- 
borah Kogan  Ray.  Delacorte  Press,  1990.  ISBN  0-385-30245-2. 
136p. 9-12. 

Just  prior  to  the  outbreak  of  World  War  II,  eleven-year-old  Darcy 
Webster  has  at  last  found  a  friend  in  the  irrepressible  Kathleen 
Mary  O'Hara.  With  her  flaming  orange  hair,  an  adventurous 
soul,  and  a  firm  religious  faith,  Kathleen  Mary's  spirit  lifts 
Darcy's  own,  even  through  Kathleen  Mary  must  deal  with  an 
abusive  father.  But  then  the  war  begins,  Darcy's  father  is 
shipped  overseas,  and  her  precious  friend  disappears.  Darcy  is 
left  to  consider  the  place  of  miracles  in  her  life — and  how  prom- 
ises are  almost  always  kept. 

8.73  Dillon,  Eilis.  Children  of  Bach.  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1992. 
ISBN  0-684-19440-6. 164p.  10  and  up  (est). 


370 


NO 
/TAR 

NIGHT/ 


K  AT H  ERIN  E  PATERS 


T//Cs/    ,  T; 


■M  K( ".MX  VI 


A.  Lydd/e  by  Katherine  Paterson  (see  8.38).  B.  Shadow  Play  by  Paul  Fleischman; 
illustrated  by  Eric  Beddows  (see  8.57).  C.  777©  Star  Fisher  by  Laurence  Yep  (see 
8.67).  D.  No  Star  Nights  by  Anna  Egan  Smucker;  Illustrated  by  Steve  Johnson  (see 
8.84). 


371 

BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


A. 


B. 


372 

BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


Twentieth  Century 


315 


All  of  Pali's  family  are  Jewish  musicians  living  in  Hungary  dur- 
ing World  War  II.  He  comes  home  one  day  to  find  that  his 
parents  have  been  taken  by  the  Nazis  controlling  their  city. 
Smuggled  in  a  van,  Pali,  his  two  siblings,  his  aunt,  a  neighbor, 
and  a  friend  embark  on  a  dangerous  journey  to  Italy  to  escape 
their  parents7  fate.  Along  the  way,  the  troupe  receives  the  help  of 
strangers  and  overcomes  their  sorrows  with  the  power  of  music. 

8.74  Hahn,  Mary  Downing.  Stepping  on  the  Cracks.  Clarion  Books, 

1991.  ISBN  0-395-58507-4. 216p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

Eleven-year-old  Margaret,  the  narrator,  and  Elizabeth  are  best 
friends.  They  are  preoccupied  with  World  War  n,  each  having  a 
brother  in  the  military.  But  they  have  also  had  a  war  since  kin- 
dergarten with  the  sixth-grade  bully,  mean  Gordy  Smith.  In  the 
process  of  getting  even  for  his  misdeeds,  they  discover  that  in  a 
hut  in  the  woods  Gordy  is  hiding  an  army  deserter — his  own 
brother  Stuart.  The  result  is  a  questioning  of  their  attitudes  to- 
ward Gordy  and  toward  war,  but  never  their  status  as  best 
friends.  Scott  O'Dell  Award  for  Historical  Fiction,  1992. 

8.75  Hartling,  Peter  (translated  by  Elizabeth  D.  Crawford).  Crutches. 
Lothrop,  Lee  and  Shepard  Books,  1988.  ISBN  0-688-07991-1. 
163p.  9  and  up. 

In  the  harrowing  final  days  of  World  War  II,  Thomas  finds  him- 
self alone  in  Vienna,  his  last  hope  of  finding  a  living  relative 
dashed  in  the  rubble  of  his  aunt's  abandoned  home.  Then  comes 
hope  in  the  form  of  the  one-legged  man  who  calls  himself 
Crutches.  With  Crutches,  Thomas  believes  he  can  triumph  over 
the  tragedies  that  surround  him  and  find  his  missing  mother 
and  the  life  he  left  behind.  Mildred  L.  Batchelder  Award,  1989. 

8.76  Heide,  Florence  Parry,  and  Judith  Heide  Gilliland.  Sami  and  the 
Time  of  the  Troubles.  Illustrated  by  Ted  Lewin.  Clarion  Books, 

1992.  ISBN  0-395-55964-2. 32p.  8-12. 

Sami,  a  ten-year-old  Lebanese  boy,  ''lives  in  the  time  of  the 
troubles/'  a  time  of  gunfire  and  bombs  that  has  lasted  all  his  life. 
Bombed-out  Beruit  is  Sami's  playground.  When  fighting  occurs, 
Sami's  family  must  live  in  a  basement.  Even  so,  his  mother 
insists  that  there  be  things  of  beauty  to  remind  them  of  days 
before  the  troubles.  Through  his  grandfather's  stories,  Sami 
comes  to  understand  that  children  must  demand  peace.  Ted 
Lewin's  watercolors  reflect  the  light  play  and  shadows  of  streets 
and  cavern. 


373 


316 


Historical  Fiction 


8.77  Hest,  Amy.  Fancy  Aunt  Jess*  Illustrated  by  Amy  Schwartz.  Mor- 
row Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08097-9.  32p.  5-7  (est). 

Aunt  Jess  wears  spiky  high  heels,  dresses  oh-so-stylishly,  lives  in 
New  York  City,  and  is  single  at  a  time  when  being  single  makes 
the  butcher's  wife  grunt.  She'll  get  married,  she  says,  when  she 
meets  someone  special.  Amy  Schwartz's  paintings  set  a  1950s 
scene  for  a  Jewish  aunt  and  her  glamorous  lifestyle  as  viewed 
through  the  adoring  eyes  of  her  young  niece.  Then,  through  the 
efforts  of  two  look-aliKe  nieces,  Aunt  Jess  meets  Uncle  Harry  at 
Friday  services  and  there's  a  "special  wedding." 

8*78  Houston,  Gloria.  But  No  Candy.  Illustrated  by  Lloyd  Bloom. 
Philomel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22142-5.  32p.  4  and  up. 

Afternoons  were  the  favorite  part  of  Lee's  day.  With  a  chocolate 
bar  from  the  candy  counter  in  her  daddy's  store,  she  escaped  to 
her  special  tree,  where  she  slowly  peeled  the  paper,  savored  each 
nibble,  and  made  the  chocolate  last  as  long  as  possible.  But  when 
war  came,  there  was  no  more  chocolate.  Despite  all  the  sacri- 
fices, and  even  while  missing  Uncle  Ted,  Lee  desperately  missed 
chocolate.  At  war's  end,  with  Uncle  Ted  safely  home,  favorite 
things  taste  different,  and  little  girls  know  when  they  have 
grown. 

8.79  Kinsey-Warnock,  Natalie.  The  Canada  Geese  Quilt  Illustrated 
by  Leslie  W.  Bowman.  Cobblehill  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-525-65004- 
0.  60p.  9  and  up. 

Spring  always  brings  the  geese  back  to  Vermont,  but  this  spring 
brings  changes  to  ten-year-old  Ariel's  life  as  well:  her  mother 
announces  that  she  is  expecting  another  baby,  and  her  grand- 
mother suffers  a  stroke.  Ariel  now  faces  uncertainty  and  must 
learn  to  give  of  herself.  Later,  a  special  quilt  from  her  grand- 
mother helps  Ariel  to  feel  safe  and  secure  once  again.  Black-and- 
white  sketches  illustrate  this  touching  story  of  family  and  per- 
sonal growth  set  in  the  1940s.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books 
in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

8.80  Levitin,  Sonia.  Silver  Days.  Atheneum,  1989.  ISBN  0-689-31563- 
5. 186p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

This  sequel  to  Journey  to  America  continues  the  Piatt  family's 
story  of  escape  from  Nazi  Germany  to  freedom  in  the  United 
States.  Told  through  the  eyes  of  fifteen-year-old  Lisa  Piatt,  the 
novel  describes  the  hardships  that  Jewish  immigrants  encoun- 
tered in  the  early  1940s  as  they  struggled  with  the  English  lan- 


ERIC 


374 


Twentieth  Century 


317 


guage,  American  customs,  and  financial  constraints.  Readers 
will  also  enjoy  the  poignant  portrayal  of  family  love,  sibling 
relationships,  and  a  young  girl's  dream  to  dance.  Notable  1989 
Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

8.81  Nelson,  Theresa.  And  One  for  AIL  Orchard  Books/Richard 
Jackson  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-531-08404-3. 182p.  11  and  up  (est.). 

Theresa  Nelson's  award-winning  novel  poignantly  examines 
young  Geraldine's  loving  relationships  with  her  older  brother 
Wing  and  his  best  friend,  Sam,  during  the  years  1966-68.  Wing, 
a  good  athlete  but  poor  student,  drops  out  of  high  school  to  fight 
in  Vietnam.  In  contrast,  Sam  becomes  a  conscientious  objector 
and  peace  activist.  Ultimately,  Geraldine  realizes  that  patriotism 
can  take  many  different  forms.  Realistic  characterizations  ana 
sensitive  depictions  of  conflicting  viewpoints  make  this  a  touch- 
ing story.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

8.82  Paulsen,  Gary.  The  Cookcamp.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson 
Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08527-9. 128p.  10-12. 

In  1944,  a  five-year-old  boy  living  in  Chicago  is  sent  by  his 
mother  to  join  his  Norwegian  grandmother  in  northern  Minne- 
sota. His  grandmother  is  a  camp  cook  for  a  road-construction 
crew,  and  the  men  with  whom  she  works  fill  the  boy's  summer 
days  with  good  food,  ample  love,  and  helpful  lessons  about  life. 
Lacking  in  fast-paced  plot  action,  the  novel  nevertheless  offers 
simple,  straightforward  prose,  making  the  book  a  quick  read. 

8.83  Ray,  Deborah  Kogan.  My  Daddy  Was  a  Soldier:  A  World  War  II 
Story.  Dlustrated  by  Deborah  Kogan  Ray.  Holiday  House,  1990. 
ISBN  0-8234-0795-0. 37p.  8-12  (est.). 

In  1943,  eight-year-old  Jeannie's  father  leaves  to  fight  in  World 
War  II.  "You'll  always  be  with  me,  Jeannie-O"  are  his  last  words 
as  he  departs  for  army  camp.  This  is  the  story  of  victory  gardens, 
scrap  drives,  food  rations,  Betty  Grable  hairdos,  and  families  left 
behind.  Through  the  shaded  grays  of  pencil  drawings  and  un- 
adorned text,  both  children  and  adults  will  better  understand 
the  universality  of  feelings  that  accompany  separation.  Notable 
1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies. 

8.84  Smucker,  Anna  Egan.  No  Star  Nights.  Illustrated  by  Steve 
Johnson.  Alfred  A.  Knopf/Borzoi  Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-394- 
99925-8. 38p.  7-10  (est.). 


375 


318 


Historical  Fiction 


With  great  clarity  and  glowing  color,  the  beauty  and  grit  of 
ordinary  daily  life  in  a  West  Virginia  steel-mill  town  are  cap- 
tured in  Steve  Johnson's  paintings — family  dinner,  a  baseball 
game,  and  millworkers  against  rust-colored  skies  and  billowing 
stacks.  In  a  text  that  reflects  memories  of  the  author's  childhood, 
young  readers  will  experience  the  powerful  mood  of  1950s 
America.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies;  IRA  Children's  Book  Award,  1990. 

8.85  Taylor,  Mildred  D.  Mississippi  Bridge.  Illustrated  by  Max 
Ginsburg.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0427-5.  64p.  8-12. 

During  a  heavy  rainstorm  in  1930s  rural  Mississippi,  an 
astonished  Jeremy  Simms — white,  ten  years  old,  and  a  neighbor 
of  the  Logan  family — watches  a  bus  driver  order  black  passen- 
gers off  the  bus  to  make  room  for  white  riders.  Just  outside  of 
town  the  bus  crosses  a  raging  creek  at  high  speed,  smashes 
through  the  railing  of  the  old  bridge,  and  tumbles  into  the  water. 
Jeremy  joins  others  in  an  attempt  to  rescue  survivors,  but  there 
are  none.  Black-and-white  pencil  drawings  heighten  the  drama 
of  another  Mildred  Taylor  retelling  of  tales  from  her  father's 
boyhood.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of  Social 
Studies. 

8.86  Taylor,  Mildred.  The  Road  to  Memphis.  Dial  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-8037-0340-6.  288p.  12  and  up. 

Mildred  Taylor's  story  of  the  Logan  family  of  rural  Mississippi 
continues  in  this  novel  about  three  harrowing  days  in  December 
1941.  Cassie,  now  sixteen,  describes  an  action-packed  road  trip 
to  Memphis  incited  by  an  African  American  friend  who  is  flee- 
ing white  tormentors  after  an  altercation.  Prejudice,  death,  a 
touch  of  romance,  and  reconciliation  all  take  center  stage  in  this 
high  drama.  Notable  1990  Children's  Trade  Books  in  the  Field  of 
Social  Studies;  Coretta  Scott  King  Award  (Writing),  1991. 

8.87  Yolen,  Jane.  Letting  Swift  Rn  ?r  Go.  Illustrated  by  Barbara 
Cooney.  Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-9689-4.  32p.  6-10  (est.). 

Accompanied  by  Barbara  Cooney's  primitive  watercolor, 
gouache,  and  pencil  illustrations,  Jane  Yolen's  poignant  story 
tells  of  the  flooding  of  the  Swift  River  Valley  of  western  Massa- 
chusetts to  create  the  Quabbin  Reservoir.  As  recalled  by  Sally 
Jane,  a  child  of  six  when  the  changes  began,  trout  fishing,  grave- 
yard picnics,  and  sugaring  time  were  exchanged  for  "a  long, 


9 

ERLC 


Twentieth  Century 


319 


gray  wilderness"  of  concrete.  Boston's  "thirst''  meant  relocation 
of  graves,  deforestation,  and  demolition  of  houses.  Visiting  the 
beautiful  waterway  as  an  adult,  Sally  remembers  and  lets  go. 

World:  World  War  I  and  Next  Two  Decades 

8.88  Hesse,  Karen.  Letters  from  Rifka.  Henry  Holt,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
8050-1964-2. 148p.  11  and  up. 

It  is  1919  when  twelve-year-old  Rifka  and  her  family  flee  the 
oppression  against  Jews  in  Russia.  They  are  bound  for  America, 
where  Rifka  imagines  that  she  will  be  safe  from  the  Russian 
soldiers  she  so  fears.  Carrying  only  her  treasured  volume  of 
poetry  by  Alexander  Pushkin,  Rifka  begins  an  odyssey  that  will 
take  her  from  the  Polish  border  to  Ellis  Island,  an  odyssey  of 
hope  and  courage  detailed  in  her  letters  to  Tovah,  a  cousin 
whom  she  has  left  behind.  IRA  Children's  Book  Award,  1993, 

World:  World  War  II  and  Later 

8.89  Hill,  Susan.  The  Glass  Angels.  Illustrated  by  Valerie  Littlewood. 
Candlewick  Press,  1991.  ISBN  1-56402-111-4. 92p.  9  and  up  (est.). 

In  post-World  War  II  London,  Tillie  lives  with  her  widowed 
mother,  who  barely  makes  ends  meet  through  her  sewing.  Near 
Christmas,  Tillie's  mother  becomes  ill,  and  the  wedding  dress 
that  she  has  been  making  is  ruined  when  the  ceiling  collapses. 
Tillie  must  take  charge,  learning  that  the  meaning  of  Christmas 
is  often  revealed  unexpectedly  by  a  gift  of  glass  angels  or  the 
help  of  friends.  Valerie  Littlewood's  illustrations,  including  both 
ink  drawings  and  color  paintings,  make  this  a  beautifully 
crafted  book. 

8.90  Kordon,  Klaus  (translated  by  Elizabeth  D.  Crawford).  Brothers 
Like  Friends.  Philomel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22137-9.  206p. 
10  and  up. 

Seven-year-old  Frank  idolizes  Burkie,  his  fourteen-year-old  half- 
brother,  and  shares  his  distress  when  their  widowed  mother 
marries  a  lazy  bully.  Set  in  1950s  East  Germany,  the  daily  hard- 
ships aggravate  the  family  situation.  All  Frank's  happiness  rests 
in  Burkie's  friendship  and  sharing  his  success  on  the  soccer 
team.  When  a  secret  confession,  seemingly  about  a  soccer  injury, 
leads  to  Burkie's  death,  Frank  senses  his  own  responsibility,  and 
his  shattered  life  is  hard  to  put  together.  German  Youth  Literature 
Award,  Runner-uv. 


ERIC 


377 


320 


Historical  Fiction 


8.91  Laird,  Christa.  Shadow  of  the  Wall.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990. 
ISBN  0-688-09336-1. 192p.  12  and  up. 

Misha  lives  with  his  sisters  in  an  orphanage  in  the  Warsaw 
ghetto  in  1942  and  begs  for  food  for  their  widowed  mother. 
Christa  Laird  writes  with  calculated  restraint  about  the  depriva- 
tion, the  terror,  and  the  bravery  of  thirteen-year-old  Misha  and 
the  thousands  like  him  who  lost  their  childhoods  or  lives  during 
the  war.  Central  to  this  novel  is  one  of  Poland's  true  heroes  of 
the  war,  Dr.  Janusz  Korczak. 

8.92  Lingard,  Joan.  Between  Two  Worlds.  Lodestar  Books,  1991. 
ISBN  0-525-67360-1. 186p.  12  and  up. 

This  sequel  to  Tug  of  War  continues  the  saga  of  the  Petersons,  a 
family  of  Latvian  refugees  who  immigrate  to  Toronto  after 
World  War  II.  Their  story  is  told  through  the  family's  teenage 
daughter,  Astra.  Through  hard  work,  the  family  struggles  to 
make  a  new  life  in  the  postwar  world.  Joan  Lingard  simplifies 
and  romanticizes  the  trials  of  immigrant  life,  uniting  all  her 
subplots  with  multiple  happy  endings.  Late  1940s  popular  cul- 
ture is  well  represented,  however,  as  are  the  anachronisms  of  the 
Cold  War. 

8.93  Lowry,  Lois.  Number  the  Stars.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1989.  ISBN 
0-395-51060-0. 137p.  10  and  up  (est.). 

"Halie\"  The  first  encounter  that  Danish  Annemarie  and  her 
Jewish  friend  Ellen  have  with  German  soldiers  is  while  racing 
each  other  home  from  school.  As  the  Nazis  attempt  to  "relocate" 
all  Jews  from  Copenhagen  in  1943,  Annemarie's  family  "adopts" 
Ellen  as  their  daughter  and  through  a  clever  scheme  attempts  to 
help  her  family  to  safety.  As  the  plot  builds  to  an  exciting  climax, 
Annemarie  displays  the  extraordinary  courage  which  became 
common  in  wartime  Europe.  Notable  1989  Children's  Trade  Books 
in  the  Field  of  Social  Studies;  Newbery  Medal,  1990. 

8.94  Morpurgo,  Michael.  Waiting  for  Anya.  Viking  Penguin,  1991. 
ISBN  0-670-83735-0. 172p.  10  and  up. 

Set  in  the  French  village  of  Lescun  during  World  War  II,  the 
novel  recounts  the  daring  exploits  of  twelve-year-old  Jo  as  he 
and  his  adult  friend  Benjamin  plan  the  escape  of  twelve  Jewish 
children  into  adjacent  Spain.  With  the  help  of  the  village  priest 
and  a  sympathetic  German  soldier,  eleven  of  the  children  suc- 
ceed. Although  Benjamin,  who  also  is  Jewish,  and  one  girl  are 
captured  and  eventually  die  at  Auschwitz,  the  story  nonetheless 


er|c 


378 


Twentieth  Century 


321 


offers  a  generally  optimistic  ending:  Anya,  the  daughter  for 
whom  Benjamin  was  waiting,  rather  than  fleeing  to  safety  in 
Spain  himself,  arrives  safely  in  Lescun  at  the  end  of  the  war.  ALA 
Best  Books  for  Young  Adults,  1992. 

8.95  Orlev,  Uri  (translated  by  Hillel  Halkin).  The  Man  from  the 
Other  Side.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1991.  ISBN  0-395-53808-4.  186p. 
10  and  up. 

Fourteen-year-old  Marek  and  his  stepfather  wade  through  the 
Warsaw  sewers  to  bring  food  to  Jews  beseiged  in  the  ghetto 
during  World  War  II.  Marek  takes  further  risks  by  hiding  Pan 
Jozek,  a  young  man  who  has  escaped  from  the  ghetto.  The  two 
young  men  return  to  fight  in  the  horrifying  uprising,  and  the 
story  culminates  with  Marek's  escape.  This  extraordinarily  mov- 
ing book,  an  actual  account  translated  from  Hebrew,  is  written 
in  a  dispassionate  tone  that  intensifies  the  emotional  reality. 
Mildred  L.  Batchelder  Award,  1992. 


:RLC 


379 


Language  and  Reading 


Language  is  at  the  center  of  human  existence.  Without  language  there 
is  no  human  society,  no  medicine,  no  politics,  no  war.  It  is  at  the  root 
of  our  existence.  Our  language  permits  us  to  think,  to  understand 

complicated  things,  the  nuances  of  our  existence  [W]riters  assist 

children  in  learning  how  to  manipulate  language. 

James  Collier,  "Profile:  James  and  Christopher 
Collier — More  Than  Just  a  Good  Read,"  Language  Arts 


ERIC 


380 


9  Language  and  Reading 


Easy-Reading  Books 

9.1  Ahlberg,  Allan.  The  Black  Cat.  Dinosaur  Dreams.  Mystery 
Tour.  The  Pet  Shop.  Illustrated  by  Andre  Amstutz.  Greenwillow 
Books,  1990.  32p.  4-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

The  Funnybones  Easy  Reading  series  cleverly  follows  the  ad- 
ventures of  a  big  skeleton,  a  little  skeleton,  and  a  dog  skeleton, 
who  make  up  the  trio  called  Funnybones.  The  three  skeletons 
sled  in  the  snow,  are  chased  by  dinosaurs  in  their  dreams,  un- 
cover several  mysteries  by  shining  a  light  on  some  suspicious 
objects,  and  swap  a  parrot  for  a  hippopotamus. 

9.2  Anholt,  Catherine.  Good  Days,  Bad  Days.  Illustrated  by  Cath- 
erine Anholt  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1990.  ISBN  0-399-22283-9. 26p. 
2-6  (est.).  Fiction. 

With  minimal  text,  Catherine  Anholt  celebrates  ordinary  family 
activities  through  her  lively  illustrations,  tracing  the  days — 
good,  bad,  sunny,  sad,  snpwy,  fun— of  a  family's  life  together. 
Illustrations  show  a  family  at  play  on  "healthy  days/'  but  Mom 
ironing  and  Dad  vacuuming  on  "home  days."  The  color-patch 
pen-and-ink  drawings  filled  in  with  bright  watercolors  are  true 
to  children's  days,  and  are  sure  to  stimulate  comparisons. 

9.3  Barton,  Byron.  Bones,  Bones,  Dinosaur  Bones.  Illustrated  by 
Byron  Barton.  Thomas  Y.  Crowell,  1990.  ISBN  0-690-04827-0. 
32p.  3-6  (est.).  Fiction. 

Six  small  paleontologists,  painted  with  bold  lines  and  crayon- 
box  colors,  set  out  to  look  for  the  bones  of  dinosaurs.  Young 
dinosaur  lovers  will  be  able  to  read  almost  instantly  the  minimal 
text,  cued  by  full-page  pictures:  "We  find  them,"  reads  one  page; 
"We  dig  them  up,"  reads  the  next.  From  discovery  to  shipment 
to  the  National  History  Museum,  the  steps  are  clear.  Best  of  all 
is  the  reassembly.  A  "dry  bones"  rhythm  follows  attachment  of 
claw  bones  to  foot  bones  to  leg  bones,  and  so  on.  Outstanding 
Science  Trade  Books,  1990. 

9.4  Barton,  Byron.  Dinosaurs,  Dinosaurs.  Illustrated  by  Byron  Bar- 
ton. Thomas  Y  Crowell,  1989.  ISBN  0-690-04768-1.  31p.  3-6.  Fic- 
tion. 


Easy-Reading  Books 


325 


"A  long  time  ago  there  were  dinosaurs!"  Through  simple  text 
and  brightly  colored  illustrations,  Byron  Barton  takes  young 
children  on  a  short  tour  through  prehistoric  times  when  dino- 
saurs big  and  small,  horned  and  spiked,  fierce  and  scared, 
roamed  the  earth. 

9.5  Florian,  Douglas.  At  the  Zoo.  Illustrated  by  Douglas  Florian. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09629-8.  32p.  3-5  (est.). 
Fiction. 

Only  two  words  of  text  appear  on  each  double-page  spread  of 
this  rhythmic  text  recounting  animals  and  activities  at  the  zoo, 
such  as  "Zoo  guide"  on  one,  "Camel  ride"  on  another.  Large, 
simple  drawings  are  flatly  childlike,  achieved  with  colored  pen- 
cil and  strong  sepia  outlines. 

9.6  Ginsburg,  Mirra.  Asleep,  Asleep.  Illustrated  by  Nancy  Tafuri. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09154-7.  24p.  2-6  (est.). 
Fiction. 

The  author/illustrator  team  of  Mirra  Ginsburg  and  Nancy 
Tafuri,  inspired  by  a  verse  by  A.  Vvedensky,  produce  a  gentle 
lullaby  text  that  rhythmically  asks  if  nature's  creatures  are 
asleep.  The  answer  for  each  simple  question  (such  as  "And  the 
bees?")  is  always  the  same:  "Asleep."  At  last,  the  cuddled  child 
is  told:  "Only  you  and  the  wind  are  awake."  Bordered  art  picks 
up  the  quiet  nighttime  colors  of  nature  at  rest. 

9.7  Guy,  Ginger  Foglesong.  Black  Crow,  Black  Crow.  Illustrated  by 
Nancy  Winslow  Parker.  Greenwillow  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688- 
08957-7.  24p.  4  and  up.  Fiction. 

In  the  spirit  of  Bill  Martin's  Brown  Bear,  Brown  Bear,  Wlwt  Did  You 
See?,  this  book  uses  rhythmic  language  to  tell  the  story  of  a  busy 
mother  crow  who  wakes,  feeds,  and  plays  with  her  children, 
until  finally,  back  in  their  nest  at  the  end  of  a  busy  day,  she  sings 
her  brood  to  sleep.  Flat,  oversized  images  in  pastel  colors,  bold 
type,  and  repetitive  text  combine  to  create  a  readable  and  useful 
book  for  young  children. 

9.8  Hoban,  Julia.  Buzby.  Illustrated  by  John  Himmelman.  Harper 
and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-022398-7.  64p.  S-8(est).  Fiction. 

Buzby  the  cat  is  grown,  and  he's  ready  to  get  a  job.  He  has  all 
the  right  qualifications — he's  a  good  mouser,  he's  clean,  and  he's 
polite.  When  he  gets  work  as  a  hotel  busboy,  he  finds  himself 
doing  all  the  wrong  things.  But  as  Buzby  and  the  others  dis- 


ERIC 


382 


326  Language  and  Reading 


cover,  he  is  good  at  making  the  guests  feel  at  home,  and  so  he  is 
given  the  appropriate  job  of  hotel  cat.  Ink  and  watercolor  illus- 
trations complement  this  I  Can  Read  Book  about  a  cat  who  finds 
his  place  in  tire  world. 

9.9  King,  Bob.  Sitting  on  the  Farm*  Illustrated  by  Bill  Slavin.  Or- 
chard Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08585-6.  32p.  3-6.  Fiction. 

"Sitting  on  the  farm,  happy  as  can  be,  /  I  had  a  little  bug  on  my 
knee."  To  get  rid  of  the  bug,  the  farm  child  invites  a  frog  to  lunch. 
But  when  the  frog  arrives,  it's  "MUNCH!  MUNCH!  MUNCH!" 
on  the  lunch.  So  the  girl  invites  a  snake  to  get  rid  of  the  frog.  The 
predictable  story  line  with  accumulating  lunch  guests  can  be 
sung  in  repetitive  verse.  Words  and  music  appear  at  the  end  of 
the  book. 

9.10  LeTord,  Bijou.  A  Brown  Cow.  Illustrated  by  Bijou  LeTord.  Little. 
Brown,  1989.  ISBN  0-316-52166-3.  29p.  4-7  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  simple,  warm  text,  a  little  girl  describes  the  "little  brown  cow 
with  no  spots  on  her  back  that  lives  in  my  backyard."  When  they 
are  inside  the  house,  the  child  and  her  cat  admire  the  cow  from 
a  window,  which  is,  in  turn,  framed  by  the  artist  in  an  ink  and 
watercolor  border.  In  childlike,  minimalist  style,  the  art  matches 
the  winsome  language:  "I  know  she  likes  trees  and  the  sky.  I  see 
her  look  up  and  moo,  moo/' 

9.11  Lewis,  Thomas  P.  Frida's  Office  Day.  Illustrated  by  Doug  Cush- 
man.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN  0-06-023844-5.  64p.  5-8  (est.). 
Fiction. 

Frida  Cat  looks  forward  to  a  day  with  her  father  at  his  office. 
After  the  train  ride  to  the  city,  Frida  takes  phone  messages, 
delivers  mail,  and  enjoys  using  the  copy  machine  at  the  office  of 
Flying  Cat  Airline,  Lunch  and  a  movie  complete  a  special  day. 
This  I  Can  Read  Book  features  large  print  and  bright  pictures. 

9.12  Marshall,  James.  Fox  Outfoxed.  Illustrated  by  James  Marshall. 
Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0-8037-1037-2.  48p. 
6-8  (est).  Fiction. 

In  three  chapter-length  stories,  Fox  is  outfoxed  by  his  own  foi- 
bles. First,  he  convinces  little  sister  Louise  to  provide  some  extra 
engine  power  for  his  vehicle  so  that  he  can  win  the  Big  Race. 
Next,  Fox  is  tricked  out  of  his  ten  favorite  comic  books  by  foxy 
Lulu.  Finally,  Louise  turns  the  tables  when  Fox  and  his  friends 
park  her  on  a  bench  so  that  they  can  trick-or-treat  without  her. 


er|c 


383 


Easy-Reading  Books 


327 


Fox  is  perfectly  smug,  perplexed,  and  discombobulated  as  the 
funny  situations  shift  in  this  Easy-to-Read  Book. 

9.13  Marshall,  James.  Rats  on  the  Roof,  and  Other  Stories.  Illus- 
trated by  James  Marshall.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991. 
ISBN  0-8037-0835-1.  79p.  6-10.  Fiction. 

The  animal  characters  in  these  seven  fable-like  tales  for  young 
readers  reflect  both  James  Marshall's  droll  humor  at  its  best  and 
sufficient  cleverness  to  wiggle  out  of  various  scrapes.  Mrs. 
Goose  manages  not  to  be  Christmas  dinner  for  a  couple  of 
wolves  passing  themselves  off  as  canaries.  Two  sheep  who  can- 
not read  warning  signs  nearly  end  up  in  a  wolf's  pot,  but  even- 
tually bore  the  wolf  to  sleep  with  their  bland  conversation. 
Black-and-white  drawings  offer  perplexed,  and  sometimes 
thwarted,  characters. 

9.14  Oxenbury,  Helen.  Pippo  Gets  Lost  Tom  and  Pippo  and  the 
Dog.  Tom  and  Pippo  in  the  Snow.  Tom  and  Pippo  Make  a 
Friend.  Illustrated  by  Helen  Oxenbury.  Macmillan/Aladdin 
Books,  1989.  lip.  3-5.  Fiction. 

Tom  and  his  toy  monkey  Pippo  go  sledding,  make  a  new  friend, 
get  separated,  and  play  with  a  dog  in  four  of  twelve  brief  adven- 
tures written  by  Helen  Oxenbury,  a  well-known  writer  of  books 
for  the  very  young.  Pippo  Books  have  a  simple,  clear  text,  sturdy 
pages,  and  reassuring  black-and-white  and  watercolor  illustra- 
tions. 

9.15  Paterson,  Katherine.  The  Smallest  Cow  in  the  World.  Illustrated 
by  Jane  Clark  Brown.  HarperCollins,  1991.  ISBN  0-06-024691-X. 
64p.  5-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

Marvin's  favorite  cow  at  Brock's  Dairy  Farm,  where  his  dad 
works,  is  Rosie.  To  Marvin,  she  is  the  most  wonderful  cow  in  the 
world.  But  when  Mr.  Brock  sells  his  farm  and  Rosie,  Marvin's 
family  must  move.  Marvin  is  heartbroken.  To  cope,  he  creates  an 
imaginary  tiny  Rosie  who  does  naughty  things  in  the  family. 
Marvin's  parents  are  models  of  understanding,  and  his  sister 
helps  to  reassure  as  well.  A  child's  feelings  of  frustration  and 
separation  reach  across  the  format  of  this  I  Can  Read  Book. 

9.16  Rose,  Agatha.  Hide  and  Seek  in  the  Yellow  House.  Illustrated 
by  Kate  Spohn.  Viking  Penguin,  1992.  ISBN  0-670-84383-0.  26p. 
4-8  (est).  Fiction. 


3S4 


328 


Language  and  Reading 


"In  the  yellow  house,  Mother  Cat  is  searching  for  her  kitten. . . ." 
As  the  kitten  plays  a  game  of  hide-and-seek,  young  listeners  will 
play  along.  Because  the  text  is  so  simple  and  the  art  so  inviting, 
young  listeners  will  soon  become  young  "readers"  with  this  one. 
The  repetitive  text  commands  engagement:  "Now  he  isn't 
there!"  Kate  Spohn's  brush  gives  stylized  texture  and  pattern  to 
walls  and  rugs  in  the  yellow  house. 

9.17  Stadler,  John.  Cat  Is  Back  at  Bat  Illustrated  by  John  Stadler. 
Dutton  Children's  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-525-44762-8.  30p.  3-7. 
Fiction. 

Fourteen  verses  about  unusual  animal  behaviors  give  readers  an 
opportunity  to  learn  about  rhythm  and  rhyme,  as  well  as  a 
chance  to  use  their  imaginations.  Sentences  such  as  "A  goat  in  a 
coat  sails  a  boat"  and  "A  big  pig  wears  a  wig"  are  illustrated 
with  watercolor  and  ink  drawings  that  take  the  plight  of  each 
animal  as  seriously  as  possible.  After  reading  this  book,  children 
will  want  to  write  and  illustrate  their  own  silly  sentences. 

9.18  Van  Leeuwen,  Jean.  Oliver  Pig  at  School.  Illustrated  by  Ann 
Schweninger.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1990.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0813-0.  48p.  4-8.  Fiction. 

Whimsically  depicted  in  colored  pencil  and  watercolor  washes 
in  this  Easty-to-Read  Book,  Oliver  Pig  puts  up  a  brave  front  as 
he  says  good-bye  to  his  toys  and  his  parents  and  heads  for 
school.  School  itself  is  a  bit  scary,  though  manageable — until 
mischief-maker  Bernard  gets  Oliver  into  trouble.  But  the  two 
pigs  end  up  friends,  and  when  Oliver  returns  home  from  his  first 
day  at  school,  he  reports  happily  to  his  family  that  "school  is 
fun." 

9.19  Weiss,  Nicki.  Dog,  Boy,  Cap,  Skate.  Sun,  Sand,  Sea,  Sail.  Illus- 
trated by  Nicki  Weiss.  Greenwillow  Books,  1989.  32p.  2-6  (est.). 
Fiction. 

Two  books  by  Nicki  Weiss  demonstrate  how  much  story  can  be 
conveyed  with  so  few  words.  Across  each  spread,  only  four 
words  march,  each  matched  with  the  object  or  action  directly 
above  it.  As  a  child  and  his  dog  prepare  to  go  outdoors,  Mom 
hands  over  the  cap  and  skates.  The  text?  "Dog  /  Boy  /  Cap  / 
Skate."  The  next  page  rhymes  with  the  first,  thus  a  family's  day 
at  the  beach  means  "Sun  /  Sand  /  Sea  /  Sail"  as  well  as  "Um- 
brella /  Towel  /  Shovel  /  Pail." 


ERiC 


385 


Jokes,  Riddles,  and  Puns 


329 


9.20  Wiseman,  B.  Morris  and  Boris  at  the  Circus.  Illustrated  by  B. 
Wiseman.  Harper  and  Row/Harper  Trophy  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-06-444143-1.  64p.  4rS.  Fiction. 

Morris  and  Boris,  entertaining  and  goofy  as  ever,  approach  the 
circus  in  their  own  predictable  styles.  Morris,  the  eternally  opti- 
mistic moose,  is  ready  to  accept  every  challenge  in  the  ring. 
Boris  the  bear  is  more  cautious.  When  Boris  explains  that  the 
circus  tent  is  called  the  Big  Top,  Morris  cheerfully  surmises  that 
the  elephant's  rear  must  be  the  Big  Bottom.  Even  the  caged  lions 
chuckle  at  Morris  as  the  action  skips  from  page  to  page  in  this  I 
Can  Read  Book. 

9.21  Ziefert,  Harriet.  Who  Can  Boo  the  Loudest?  Illustrated  by 
Claire  Schumacher.  Harper  and  Row,  1990.  ISBN  0-06-026899-9. 
32p.  3-6  (est.).  Fiction. 

When  two  ghosts  meet  in  the  moonlight,  they  disagree  over  who 
can  boo  louder.  To  settle  the  matter,  they  engage  in  a  booing 
contest,  agreeing  that  the  winner  will  be  the  ghost  who  can  scare 
the  moon.  Even  though  both  ghosts  huff  and  puff  and  shake 
their  sheets,  neither  can  scare  the  moon  by  itself.  Perhaps  if  they 
worked  together?  Cartoon  illustrations  provide  simple  accom- 
paniment for  an  easy-to-read,  repetitive  text. 

Jokes,  Riddles,  and  Puns 

9.22  Beisner,  Monika.  Catch  That  Cat!  A  Picture  Book  of  Rhymes 
and  Puzzles.  Illustrated  by  Monika  Beisner.  Farrar,  Straus  and 
Giroux,  1990.  ISBN  0-374-31226-5.  28p.  4-8  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

Hidden  calicoes,  vain  tabbies,  and  mysterious  Siamese  frolic  on 
the  pages  of  this  collection  of  cat  verses,  riddles,  games,  and 
puzzles.  Jewel-toned  paintings  with  the  feel  of  tapestries  add  to 
the  complexity  and  detail  of  a  book  that  will  invite  a  variety  of 
responses  from  cat  fanciers  of  all  ages. 

9.23  Bierhorst,  John,  editor.  Lightning  inside  You,  and  Other  Native 
American  Riddles.  Illustrated  by  Louise  Brierley.  William  Mor- 
row, 1992.  ISBN  0-688-09582-8. 104p.  6  and  up  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

"Riddling,  like  fever,  is  contagious."  Native  Americans  caught 
riddling  fever  long  ago,  but  not  until  now  have  their  riddles 
been  gathered  and  widely  circulated.  Many  of  the  riddles  have 
several  possible  answers,  but  only  one  Native  American  one, 
thus  these  puzzles  indirectly  provide  a  glimpse  into  Native 


3S6 


330 


Language  and  Reading 


American  culture.  The  location  and  tribal  origin  of  each  riddle  is 
meticulously  attributed,  supplemented  by  instructive  beginning 
notes  and  endnotes.  Black-and-white  pastel  drawings  are  sprin- 
kled throughout. 

9.24  Calmenson,  Stephanie.  What  Am  I?  Very  First  Riddles.  Illus- 
trated by  Karen  Gundersheimer.  Harper  and  Row,  1989.  ISBN 
0-06-020998-4.  32p.  4-7.  Nonfiction. 

Here  are  riddles  for  children  who  are  just  beginning  riddling — 
puzzles  that  don't  depend  upon  wordplay  or  pun — as  well  as  a 
book  for  emerging  readers.  Each  rhyming  riddle  appears  on  a 
page  of  its  own,  sprinkled  with  small  children  offering  clues, 
and  ends  with  a  boldfaced  question:  "What  Am  I?"  'Tm  sweet 
and  cold,  so  take  a  lick.  But  watch  me  melt  if  you're  not  quick!" 
Turn  the  page  for  a  full-color  picture  answer  with  the  word 
beneath. 

9.25  Gomi,  Taro.  Who  Ate  It?  Who  Hid  It?  Illustrated  by  Taro  Gomi. 
Millbrook  Press,  1991.  22p.  2-6  (est.)  Fiction. 

In  a  pair  of  simple,  riddle  picture  books,  children  search  the 
artwork  to  answer  Who  ate  it?  or  Who  hid  it?  At  first  glance,  it 
seems  almost  impossible  for  readers  of  the  first  book  to  know 
which  of  four  innocent-appearing  Holsteins  ate  the  fried  eggs. 
At  second  glance,  young  children  will  discover  the  yellow  yolks 
in  the  middle  of  one  Holstein's  white  markings.  Readers  of  the 
second  book  will  need  to  rely  on  picture  play  to  determine 
which  giraffe  hid  the  birthday  candles.  There  they  are,  looking 
like  a  pair  of  giraffe  horns!  Other  familiar  objects  are  camou- 
flaged in  the  artwork  in  this  simple,  riddle  picture  book. 

9.26  Gordon,  Jeffie  Ross.  Hide  and  Shriek:  Riddles  about  Ghosts 
and  Goblins.  Walton,  Rick,  and  Ann  Walton.  Ho  Ho  Ho!  Rid- 
dles about  Santa  Claus.  Illustrated  by  Susan  Slattery  Burke. 
Lerner,  1991.  32p.  6-10.  Nonfiction. 

Know  what  goes,  "Ho,  ho,  ho  OOPS"?  It's  Santa  Claus  falling 
out  of  his  sled.  Know  how  the  reindeer  can  tell  that  Santa  has 
fallen  out?  "They  feel  a  rein  drop."  Could  you  have  guessed  that 
"Elves"  Presley  is  Santa's  favorite  singer?  Santa  Claus  groaners 
fill  Ho,  Ho,  Ho!,  while  Hide  and  Shriek  maintains  the  pattern,  but 
changes  the  source  for  the  puns:  "Who  is  the  most  famous 
French  skeleton?"  "Napoleon  Bone-aparte,"  of  course.  Susan 
Slattery  Burke's  two-color  illustrations  keep  the  spirits  light  in 
these  You  Must  Be  Joking  Riddle  Books. 


387 


A.  Black  and  White  by  David  Macaulay  (see  9.45).  B.  Bones,  Bones,  Dinosaur 
Bones  by  Byron  Barton  (see  9.3).  C.  Baby-O  by  Nancy  White  Carlstrom;  illustrated 
by  Sugie  Stevenson  (see  9.36). 


ERIC 


388 

BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


A.  Asleep,  Asleep  by  Mirra  Ginsburg;  illustrated  by  Nancy  Tafuri  (see  9.6). 

B.  Lightning  inside  You  and  Other  Native  American  Riddles  edited  by  John  Biertiorst; 
illustrated  by  Louise  Brieriey  (see  9.23).  C.  We're  Going  on  a  Bear  Hunt  by  Michael 
Rosen;  illustrated  by  Helen  Oxenbury  (see  9.50). 

BEST  COPY  AVAILABLE 


3S3 


Jokes,  Riddles,  and  Puns 


331 


9.27  Hall,  Katy,  and  Lisa  Eisenberg.  Spacey  Riddles.  Illustrated  by 
Simms  Taback.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1992.  ISBN  0- 
8037-0815-7.  48p.  4-8.  Nonfiction. 

What  is  the  astronaut's  favorite  meal?  Launch!  Why  couldn't  the 
astronaut  land  on  the  moon?  Because  it  was  already  full!  Here 
are  forty-two  riddles  with  space  as  their  theme  in  an  easy-to- 
read  format.  Clues  are  generous  (and  humorously  misleading) 
in  these  full-color  illustrations  of  space  travelers,  heavenly  bod- 
ies, and  aliens. 

9.28  Koontz,  Robin  Michal.  I  See  Something  You  Don't  See:  A  Rid- 
dle-me  Picture  Book.  Illustrated  by  Robin  Michal  Koontz.  Cob- 
blehill  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-525-65077-6.  32p.  4-8  (est.).  Nonfic- 
tion. 

Clues  to  thirteen  rhyming  "riddle-me-rees"  can  be  found  in  the 
pictures  that  accompany  the  riddles.  From  morning  wake-up  to 
tuck-in  time,  two  smiling  children  participate  in  ordinary  family 
events  that  become  the  fodder  for  riddle  clues.  For  example, 
toothbrushing  time:  "When  you  look  at  my  face  it's  easy  to  see, 
you're  looking  at  you  when  you're  looking  at  me."  The  accom- 
panying illustration  shows  the  children  looking  in  a  mirror.  Line 
drawings  done  in  sunny  pastel  shades  make  the  answers  achiev- 
able by  the  youngest  children. 

9.29  Livingston,  Myra  Cohn.  My  Head  Is  Red,  and  Other  Riddle 
Rhymes.  Illustrated  by  Tere  LoPrete.  Holiday  House,  1990.  ISBN 
0-8234-0806-X.  32p.  6-9.  Nonfiction. 

"My  head  is  red.  My  back  is  white.  You'll  find  me  near  the 
candlelight.  But  once  I  make  a  shining  flame,  I  never,  ever  look 
the  same."  Turn  the  pages  upside  down  to  discover  the  answers 
to  this  and  twenty-six  other  rhyming,  readable  riddles.  Bold 
abstract  illustrations  give  visual  clues  to  the  shapes  and  the 
colors  of  the  answer. 

9.30  Maestro,  Giulio.  Riddle  Roundup:  A  Wild  Bunch  to  Beef  Up 
Your  Word  Power.  Illustrated  by  Giulio  Maestro.  Clarion  Books, 
1989.  ISBN  0-89919-508-3.  64p.  7-10  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

"Why  did  the  runner  put  a  net  over  her  head?  She  wanted  to 
catch  her  breath."  "What  happened  when  the  pink  flower  grew? 
The  rose  rose  rose."  The  sixty-two  riddles  in  this  collection  are 
based  on  different  kinds  of  wordplay,  including  puns,  homo- 
nyms, and  homographs.  Each  riddle  is  separated  from  its  an- 
swer by  a  full-page,  two-color  illustration. 


390 


332 


Language  and  Reading 


9.31  Marzollo,  Jean.  I  Spy:  A  Book  of  Picture  Riddles.  Photographs 
by  Walter  Wick.  Scholastic/Cartwheel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-590- 
45087-5. 32p.  2-7  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

Thirteen  double-page  picture  riddles  are  created  by  pairing 
boldly  colored  photographs  of  collections  of  related  objects — 
such  as  beach  items  or  old  toys — with  a  rhyming  text,  which 
begins  with  the  words  "I  spy  . . . "  and  then  names  items  to  be 
located.  For  example,  the  riddle  in  the  nature  collection  begins: 
"I  spy  an  arrowhead,  a  little  white  goose,  /  A  horse's  shadow,  a 
snake  on  the  loose. ..."  The  author  closes  with  "Extra  Credit 
Riddles'7  and  an  invitation  for  children  to  write  their  own  pic- 
ture riddles. 

9.32  Nims,  Bonnie  Larkin.  Where  Is  the  Bear  at  School?  Illustrated 
by  Madelaine  Gill.  Albert  Whitman,  1989.  ISBN  0-8075-8935-7. 
24p.  2-6.  Fiction. 

At  school,  children  are  busy  hanging  up  their  coats,  listening  to 
a  story,  painting  pictures,  and  playing  on  the  playground.  But 
within  the  bustle  of  classroom  activity,  there's  a  teddy  bear  loose. 
Readers  are  invited  through  rhyming  text  and  repetitive  refrain 
to  find  the  bear  hiding  on  each  page:  "But  I  am  looking  for  a 
bear.  Can  you  show  me — where  is  the  bear?"  No  matter  where 
bear  hides,  he  does  what  the  children  do.  The  watercolor  paint- 
ings are  of  multicultural  children  thoroughly  engaged  with 
school. 


933  Stevenson,  James.  Quick!  Turn  the  Page!  Illustrated  by  James 
Stevenson.  Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09309-4.  32p. 
4-7  (est.).  Fiction. 

Here's  an  innovative  way  in  which  readers  can  help  characters 
out  of  scrapes  just  by  turning  the  page.  If  Sarah  is  sick  of  winter, 
turn  the  page  and  give  her  spring.  If  Arthur  can't  get  to  the 
movies  until  his  room  is  cleaned,  turn  the  page  and  it's  clean  as 
a  bean.  But  if  you  ignore  the  warning  and  turn  the  last  page,  it's 
''the  end."  As  always,  young  readers  will  find  James  Stevenson's 
illustrations  and  text  simple  and  appealing. 

9.34  Yektai,  Niki.  What's  Silly?  Illustrated  by  Susannah  Ryan.  Clar- 
ion Books,  1989.  ISBN  0-89919-746-9.  32p.  2-8  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  a  book  suited  for  interaction  with  the  youngest  of  listeners, 
the  children's  task  is  always  the  same:  find  what's  silly  in  the 
pictures.  Cartoon-like  illustrations  provide  the  kind  of  silliness 
that  makes  three-  and  four-year-old  children  scream  with  de- 


er|c 


391 


Language  Play 


333 


light:  Mother  lathers  up  to  shave  her  face.  Daughter  wears  her 
skirt  on  her  head,  then  swings  from  an  upside-down  tree. 
There's  even  a  toilet  in  the  living  room.  No  bother,  though,  if  the 
answer  eludes — just  turn  the  page  to  set  everything  right. 

Language  Play 

9.35  Baer,  Gene.  Thump,  Thump,  Rat-a-Tat-Tat  Illustrated  by  Lois 
Ehlert.  Harper  and  Row/Charlotte  Zolotow  Books,  1989.  ISBN 
0-06-020362-5.  30p.  2-7.  Fiction. 

On  the  opening  spread,  the  marching  band  unloads  from  the  bus 
with  the  rat-a-tat-tat  of  snare  drums,  the  thump,  thump  of  bass 
drums,  and  the  warmup  sounds  of  chirping  horns.  Marching 
boldly  toward  the  reader,  band  and  text  enlarge  to  fill  the  pages. 
Flags,  plumes,  "piping  flutes/'  and  "flashing  brass"  are  vibrant 
cut-paper  against  Lois  Ehlert's  bold  background  colors.  Text  and 
art  are  perfect  complements:  the  rhythmic  cadence  of  the  ono- 
matopoeic text  thunders  past  and  then  fades. 

9.36  Carlstrom,  Nancy  White.  Baby-O.  Illustrated  by  Sugie  Steven- 
son. Little,  Brown,  1992.  ISBN  0-316-12851-1. 32p.  3-6  (est.).  Fic- 
tion. 

All  the  generations  of  an  island  family  (from  Baby-O  to  Granny- 
O)  board  a  jitney  to  take  their  wares  to  market.  Festive  Carib- 
bean colors  are  a  perfect  match  for  the  cadence  of  the  text,  its 
singsong  rhythms  punctuated  by  onomatopoeic  refrains.  As 
Baby-O  chases  the  chickens  in  the  garden  patch,  "Sing  a  song  of 
Baby-O,  /  Sing  it  soft,  now,  sing  it  slow.  /  Chucka  Chucka." 
Mama-O's  cloth  goes  "Wusha  Wusha"  in  the  big  tin  tub,  and 
Papa-O's  fishnets  "dippa  dippa"  off  the  sandy  shores. 

9.37  Catalanotto,  Peter.  Mr.  Mumble.  Illustrated  by  Peter 
Catalanotto.  Orchard  Books/Richard  Jackson  Books,  1990.  ISBN 
0-531-08480-9.  32p.  4-7.  Fiction. 

Mr.  Mumble  wakes  up  with  a  cough  one  Saturday  morning,  and 
as  he  sets  out  on  a  shopping  trip,  he  discovers  how  much  a  little 
cough  can  interfere  with  a  person's  routine.  At  the  bakery  he 
asks  for  a  dozen  bagels;  what  he  gets  is  a  dozing  beagle.  At  the 
fruit  stand,  a  request  for  a  pound  of  pears  gets  Mr.  Mumble  a 
panda  bear.  And  a  mention  to  the  tailor  of  a  light  tan  coat  lands 
Mr.  Mumble  a  white  goat.  Peter  Catalanotto's  book  is  chock-full 
of  wonderful  language  play. 


392 


334 


Language  and  Reading 


9.38  Cauley,  Lorinda  Bryan.  Clap  Your  Hands.  Illustrated  by  Lorinda 
Bryan  Cauley  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22118-2. 
32p.  3-6.  Fiction. 

"Reach  for  the  sky,  wiggle  your  toes.  Stick  out  your  tongue  and 
touch  your  nose."  Smiling  animals  and  children  in  a  frenzy  of 
activity  spill  across  double-page  spreads  in  this  spirited  book  for 
which  participation  is  a  must.  Colorful  illustrations  capture  the 
happy  expressions  of  the  playmates  as  they  jump  and  twirl  and 
finally  wave  "Bye-bye!" 

9.39  Falwell,  Cathryn.  Clowning  Around.  Illustrated  by  Cathryn  Fal- 
well.  Orchard  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-531-08552-X.  32p.  3-6.  Fic- 
tion. 

A  red  and  white  polka-dot  clown  juggles  and  rearranges  over- 
size letters  against  stark  white  backgrounds  to  make  words  and 
fun  for  the  youngest  readers.  As  he  pushes,  pulls,  reshapes,  and 
moves  letters  and  their  parts,  the  art  magically  follows,  taking 
shape  and  then  transforming  to  match  the  print.  Beginners  may 
want  to  try  juggling  and  "clowning  around"  on  paper  with  some 
letters  of  their  own. 

9.40  Florian,  Douglas.  A  Beach  Day.  Illustrated  by  Douglas  Florian. 
Greenwillow  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-09105-9.  32p.  3  and  up. 
Fiction. 

"Feet  splash  /  Waves  crash  /  Kites  sail  /  Sand  pail."  With  rhym- 
ing, minimalist  text,  a  family's  day  at  the  beach  is  revealed 
through  gestural  bold  line  drawings  in  crayon,  colored  pencils, 
and  watercolors  in  sunny  hues  of  yellow  and  gold.  When  the 
day  draws  to  a  close,  the  foursome  enjoys  a  shimmering  fire- 
works display.  The  last  page  lists  and  illustrates  several  shells 
that  can  be  found  on  coastal  beaches. 

9.41  Fox,  Mem.  Shoes  from  Grandpa.  Illustrated  by  Patricia  Mullins. 
Orchard  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-531-08448-5. 32p.  3-6  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  cumulative  fashion,  Jessie  is  clothed  by  all  the  members  of  her 
family.  First,  Grandpa  gets  shoes  for  Jessie.  Then  Dad  decides, 
"I'll  buy  you  some  socks  from  the  local  shops,  /  to  go  with  the 
shoes  from  Grandpa."  Next,  it's  Mom  who  buys  Jessie  a  skirt 
"that  won't  show  the  dirt,  /  to  go  with  the  socks  from  the  local 
shops/'  and  on  and  on  until  Jessie  asks  politely  for  just  "some 
jeans."  Torn  paper  and  fabric  scraps  give  the  large-scale  illustra- 
tions pleasing  textures. 


39.3 


Language  Play 


335 


9.42  Gordon,  Jeffie  Ross.  Six  Sleepy  Sheep.  Illustrated  by  John 
O'Brien.  Caroline  House,  1991.  ISBN  1-878093-06-1.  32p.  2-6. 
Fiction. 

In  a  curly  iron  bed,  six  sleepy  sheep  slumber  on  six  soft  pil- 
lows— until  one  sheep  snores  and  the  whole  crew  is  awake.  In 
alliterative  prose,  the  sleepy  sheep  try  to  regain  repose  through 
slurping  celery  soup,  telling  spooky  stories,  singing  silly  songs, 
and  sipping  simmered  milk  until,  one  by  one,  they  snooze.  At 

last,  when  all  six  are  asleep,  one  snores  Sheep  made  curly 

and  textured  with  fine  pen  lines  are  distinguishable  by  human 
accoutrements — necktie,  eyeglasses,  slippers,  or  a  nightcap. 

9.43  Heller,  Ruth.  Merry-Go-Round:  A  Book  about  Nouns.  Illus- 
trated by  Ruth  Heller.  Grorset  and  Dunlap,  1990.  ISBN  0-448- 
40085-5.  46p,  6  and  up.  Nonfiction. 

Ruth  Heller  adds  another  title  to  her  series  on  language  in  this 
rhyming,  color-rich  tribute  to  nouns.  Opening  with  every 
schoolchild's  definition,  "Nouns  name  a  person,  place  or  thing/' 
the  artist  wraps  a  green-scaled,  fuschia-tongued  dragon  around 
birches,  through  which  a  determined  maiden  trots,  and  the  text 
labels:  "a  damsel,  a  forest,  a  dragon, ...  a  king."  Children  meet 
nouns  common  and  proper,  abstract  and  concrete,  compound 
and  collective/  singular  and  plural,  all  accompanied  by  dramatic 
designs. 

9.44  Hilton,  Nette.  Prince  Lachlan.  Illustrated  by  Ann  James.  Or- 
chard Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-531-08463-9.  32p.  3-6  (est.).  Fiction. 

In  kilt  and  a  jaunty  tam-o'-shanter,  Prince  Lachlan  announces  his 
comings  and  goings  about  the  castle  with  sounds  like  "smash/7 
"crash,"  and  "thud."  "Prince  Lachlan  is  home,"  his  mother  un- 
derstates. "I  know,"  sighs  his  laconic  father,  the  king.  Nothing  in 
the  castle  is  quite  safe  from  the  Prince's  energy.  But  this  irritation 
becomes  an  asset  when  the  Great  One  threatens  the  kingdom — 
and  Prince  Lachlan  sets  off  to  "see  about  that."  Repetitive 
phrases  and  onomatopoeia  add  to  the  appeal. 

9.45  Macaulay,  David.  Black  and  White.  Illustrated  by  David  Macau- 
lay.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1990.  ISBN  0-395-552151-3.  32p.  All  ages 
(est.).  Fiction. 

Not  without  warning,  readers  are  faced  with  double-page 
spreads  divided  into  four  seemingly  dissimilar  segments.  How 
do  they  proceed?  Once  through  the  book  in  conventional  fash- 
ion? Four  times  through,  reading  corresponding  quadrants?  Or 


394 


336 


Language  and  Reading 


should  readers  visit  and  revisit,  each  time  shuffling  and  reshuf- 
fling these  elements:  a  boy  returning  by  train  to  his  parents,  a 
row  of  newspaper-reading  commuters,  a  pair  of  wacky  parents, 
and  a  herd  of  Holstein  cows.  David  Macaulay  leaves  it  to  readers 
to  decide  if  he  has  written  four  stories  or  one.  Caldecott  Medal 
1991. 

9.46  MacCarthy,  Patricia.  Herds  of  Words.  Illustrated  by  Patricia 
MacCarthy.  Dial  Books  for  Young  Readers,  1991.  ISBN  0-8037- 
0892-0.  32p.  3-6.  Nonfiction. 

In  batik  paintings  on  silk,  groups  and  families  of  "things"  are 
gathered  into  scenes  and  labeled  with  their  collective  nouns. 
Near  a  bright  blue  watering  hole,  a  stand  of  flamingos,  a  bask  of 
crocodiles,  and  a  clutch  of  eggs  share  a  habitat;  under  a  galaxy  of 
stars,  a  coven  of  witches  stirs  the  brew,  while  a  parliament  of  owls 
keeps  watch.  Such  unusual  nomenclature  as  a  wedge  of  swans,  a 
leap  of  leopards,  and  an  exaltation  of  larks  fills  the  pages. 

9.47  McMillan,  Bruce.  One  Sun:  A  Book  of  Terse  Verse.  Play  Day:  A 
Book  of  Terse  Verse.  Photographs  by  Bruce  McMillan.  Holiday 
House,  1990.  32p.  4-6  (est.).  Nonfiction. 

Terse  verse  is  an  adjective-noun  combination  that  rhymes.  Bruce 
McMillan's  two  books  of  terse  verse  are  inspired  by  the  seashore 
and  backyard,  with  full-page  color  photographs  of  such  verses 
as  "sand  hand,"  "wet  pet,"  "fun  run,"  and  "fat  bat."  Warm  skin 
shades  of  photogenic  children  and  royal  blues  and  brilliant 
greens  of  sky  water,  and  grass  are  set  opposite  the  boldly  out- 
lined words.  In  classrooms  in  which  teachers  cover  the  words, 
children  use  the  book  as  puzzles  to  be  solved.  Best  fest! 

9.48  Merriam,  Eve.  Fighting  Words.  Illustrated  by  David  Small.  Mor- 
row Junior  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-688-09677-8.  32p.  5  and  up. 
Fiction. 

In  her  author's  note,  Eve  Merriam  acknowledges  that  all  the 
fighting  words  in  her  book  "live  happily,  harmoniously  together 
in  the  Oxford  English  Dictionary  and  in  Webster's  Unabridged/' 
Within  the  story,  the  fighting  words  are  hurled  and  blasted  and 
growled  and  howled  between  two  friends,  who  admire  each 
other  so  much  that  it  calls  for  a  fight.  Fighting  words  appear  in 
giant  type  (Lummox,  Ignoramus,  Ninny,  Lout)  while  the  children 
clamor  over  and  through  their  remarkably  undersized  world  to 
be  friends  again. 


er|c  395 


Language  Play 


337 


9.49  Most,  Bernard.  Zoodles.  Illustrated  by  Bernard  Most.  Harcourt 
Brace  Jovanovich,  1992.  ISBN  0-15-299969-8.  32p.  3-8.  Nonfic- 
tion. 

"What  do  you  call  a  kangaroo  that  wakes  you  up  every  day?" 
Answer:  "A  kangarooster!"  In  this  animal  riddle  book,  Bernard 
Most  creates  name-blended  imaginary  beasts.  Unlike  other 
imaginary  animal  books,  however,  Most  doesn't  produce  a  new 
body  design  merging  the  two  animals.  Instead,  he  lets  each 
animal  retain  its  recognizable  shape  and  form  on  the  answer 
page.  As  with  the  author /illustrator's  dinosaur  books,  these 
animal  drawings  are  large,  simple,  and  cheerful. 

9.50  Rosen,  Michael,  reteller.  We're  Going  on  a  Bear  Hunt.  Illus- 
trated by  Helen  Oxenbury.  Margaret  K.  McElderry  Books,  1989. 
ISBN  0-689-50476-4.  32p.  4-S.  Fiction. 

On  expansive  pages,  alternately  black-and-white  and  color,  a 
father  and  four  children  set  forth  on  the  traditional  bear  hunt, 
complete  with  its  predictable  challenges  of  long  grass,  deep 
river,  oozy  mud,  and  dark  forest — all  of  which  must  be  negoti- 
ated: "We  can't  go  over  it.  /  We  can't  go  under  it.  /  Oh,  no!  / 
We've  got  to  go  through  it!"  Most  fun  of  all  are  the  full-color 
sound  pages,  on  which  "splash  splosh"  the  river,  "squelch 
squerch"  the  mud,  and  "swishy  swashy"  the  grass.  Boston  Globe- 
Horn  Book  Honor  Book,  1990. 

9.51  Shaw,  Nancy  Sheep  in  a  Shop.  Illustrated  by  Margot  Apple. 
Houghton  Mifflin,  1991.  ISBN  0-395-53681-2. 32p.  2-5.  Fiction. 

It's  a  rollicking  shopping  trip  wilh  five  comical  sheep.  The  goal: 
to  find  the  perfect  birthday  present  for  a  friend.  These  enthusi- 
astic customers  try  on  jackets,  play  with  rackets,  fly  planes,  try 
trains,  and  dismantle  a  display  of  beach  balls  along  the  way. 
Rhyming  text  and  colored-pencil  drawings  that  offer  just  the 
right  sheepish  expressions  are  a  perfect  combination  for  a  suc- 
cessful read.  Nancy  Shaw's  Sheep  in  a  Jeep  and  Sheep  on  a  Ship  add 
more  sheep  adventures. 

9.52  Shaw,  Nancy.  Sheep  on  a  Ship.  Illustrated  by  Margot  Apple. 
Houghton  Mifflin,  1989.  ISBN  0-395-48160-0. 26p.  2-6  (est.).  Fic- 
tion. 

The  silly  sheep  from  Nancy  Shaw's  Sheep  in  a  Jeep  and  Sheep  in  a 
Shop  are  having  another  tongue-tripping  adventure.  This  time, 
in  rhyming  text,  they  are  pirates  on  a  deep-sea  trip.  When  a 
storm  arises,  they  are  comically  unprepared:  "Waves  slosh. 


ERLC 


396 


338 


Language  and  Reading 


Sheep  slip.  Decks  tip.  Sheep  slide.  Sheep  trip.  Sheep  collide." 
Colored  pencil  drawings  add  action  to  the  storm  and  mild  des- 
peration to  their  sheep-overboard  faces. 

9.53  Shaw,  Nancy.  Sheep  Out  to  Eat-  Illustrated  by  Margot  Apple. 
Houghton  Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-61128-8.  32p.  4-8  (est.). 

Dining  out  for  tea  is  a  disaster  for  the  sheep  whose  rhyming 
adventures  have  populated  Sheep  in  a  Jeep  and  Sheep  in  a  Shop. 
This  time,  they  can't  read  the  menus,  so  they  neither  know  what 
to  order  nor  how  to  eat  it.  They  add  sugar,  salt,  and  mustard  to 
their  lovdy  spinach  custard.  Adding  pepper  to  their  teacakes  is 
even  worse.  Sneezes  turn  the  teashop  upside  down.  Ejected, 
they  find  the  lawn  is  just  what  sheep  need  to  munch  for  lunch. 

9.54  Steig,  Jeanne.  Alpha  Beta  Chowder.  Illustrated  by  William  Steig. 
HarperCollins,  1992.  ISBN  0-06-205007-9.  32p.  4-10  (est.).  Fic- 
tion. 

A  collaboration  of  Steigs  has  cooked  up  an  alphabet  chowder  of 
twenty-six  rhymes  and  seasoned  them  with  spirited,  witty  char- 
acters. For  the  letter  H,  there  is  the  "Heebie-jeebies,"  which  is 
what  a  harpy  with  the  hiccups  hurls  upon  the  hag  who  hexes 
her.  In  alliterative  verse  with  the  bite  of  Ogden  Nash  or  the  sting 
of  Roald  Dahl,  Jeanne  Steig  succeeds  with  such  unexpected  sub- 
jects as  "Ken,  the  killer  kangaroo,"  and  Daphne,  who  dresses 
divinely. 

9.55  Ziefert,  Harriet.  Parade.  Illustrated  by  Saul  Mandel.  Ban- 
tam/Little Rooster  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-553-05862-2.  32p.  2-6 
(est.).  Fiction. 

"A  parade!  A  parade!  I  know  a  parade  by  the  sound  of  the  drum, 
A-rum-a-tee-tum!  A-rum-a-tee-tum!"  In  rhythmic,  easy-to-read 
text  that  evokes  a  cadence,  Harriet  Ziefert  describes  a  circus 
parade  as  it  marches  jauntily  down  the  street,  accompanied  by 
clowns  and  elephants,  jugglers  and  twirlers,  and  popcorn  and 
candy  Saul  Mandel's  loose,  cartoon-like  drawings  complement 
the  action-packed  event. 


397 


Poetry 


"J,"  says  the  poem  matter-of-factly, 
"J  am  a  cloud, 
lama  tree, 

lama  city, 
1  am  the  sea, 

lama  golden 
mystery." 

But,  adds  the  poem  silently, 

I  cannot  speak  until  you  come. 

Reader,  come,  come  with  me. 

Eve  Merriam,  It  Doesn't  Always 
Have  to  Rhyme 


340 


10  Poetry 


Anthologies 

10.1  Bennett,  Jill,  compiler.  The  Animal  Fair,  Illustrated  by  Susie 
Jenkin-Pearce.  Viking  Penguin,  1990.  ISBN  0-670-82691-X.  32p. 

This  collection  of  twenty-two  rhymes  in  celebration  of  animals 
includes  works  by  Aileen  Fisher,  Langston  Hughes,  and  Eleanor 
Farjeon,  as  well  as  humorous  verse  by  anonymous  poets,  such 
as  the  title  poem, " Animal  Fair."  Watercolor  and  ink  combine  on 
generously  spaced  page  layouts  to  achieve  a  whimsy  that  sits 
lightly  with  the  verse. 

10.2  Big  Bear's  Treasury:  A  Children's  Anthology.  Candlewick 
Press,  1992.  ISBN  1-56402-113-0. 80p.  4-8  (est). 

Dozens  of  poems  and  very  short  stories  to  match  every  mood  are 
woven  together  with  excerpts  from  well-known  fairy  tales  and 
nonsense  rhymes  in  this  second  volume  of  Big  Bear's  favorites. 
The  anthology  is  enriched  by  the  inclusion  of  original  illustra- 
tions and  features  works  by  Anthony  Browne,  Charlotte  Voake, 
Helen  Oxenbury,  and  Jan  Ormerod.  The  pages  take  only  minutes 
to  read  aloud,  but  are  distinctive  and  sufficiently  illustrated  for 
the  youngest  to  find  and  "read"  alone. 

10.3  Booth,  David,  compiler.  Voices  on  the  Wind:  Poems  for  All 
Seasons.  Illustrated  by  Mich&e  Lemieux.  Morrow  Junior  Books, 
1990.  ISBN  0-688-09555-0. 48p.  All  ages. 

Poems  from  favorite  poets  celebrating  the  sights  and  sounds  of 
the  seasons  are  combined  with  artistic  impressions  of  the  poems' 
moods.  Included  are  Mary  Ann  Hoberman's  "Spiders,"  Robert 
Louis  Stevenson's  "Autumn  Fires,"  Beatrix  Potter's  "Fishes 
Come  Bite!"  and  William  Blake's  "The  Lamb." 

10.4  Bruchac,  Joseph,  and  Jonathan  London.  Thirteen  Moons  on  Tur- 
tle's Back:  A  Native  American  Year  of  Moons.  Illustrated  by 
Thomas  Locker.  Philomel  Books,  1992.  ISBN  0-399-22141-7.  28p. 
All  ages. 

Many  North  American  Indian  tribes  used  the  scales  of  the  tur- 
tle's shell  to  represent  the  "months"  of  the  year.  From  traditions 
of  the  Sioux,  Lakota,  and  Cherokee,  to  name  a  few,  this  collection 


er|c 


3.93 


Anthologies 


341 


of  seasonal  poems  represents  an  anthology  of  native  beliefs. 
Each  "moon"  includes  both  a  legend  and  a  dramatic,  brilliantly 
hued  oil  painting.  Together,  they  provide  a  unique  orientation  to 
time,  the  Earth,  and  humanity's  role  within  each. 

10.5  Cameo  Cats.  Illustrated  by  Isabelle  Brent.  Little,  Brown,  1992. 
ISBN  0-316-10836-7.  22p.  6  and  up  (est.). 

This  ornate  anthology  features  bordered  mosaics  in  royal  colors 
and  snippets  from  literature  celebrating  felines.  Contributors 
range  from  Edward  Lear  to  Chaucer  to  Mother  Goose.  The 
cameo  portraits  represent  cats  of  various  types  and  in  varying 
poses.  "Even  the  smallest  of  the  felines  is  a  masterpiece,"  said 
Da  Vinci,  and  this  tiny  jewel  of  a  book  demonstrates  that  mas- 
tery. 

10.6  Cassedy,  Sylvia,  and  Kunihiro  Suetake,  translators.  Red  Drag- 
onfly on  My  Shoulder.  Illustrated  by  Molly  Bang.  HarperCol- 
lins, 1992.  ISBN  0-06-022625-0.  32p.  6-10  (est). 

Turn  the  collection  sideways  to  read,  scroll-like,  these  thirteen 
haiku,  the  ancient  Japanese  form  of  poetry.  The  translations  offer 
inspired  images,  but  Molly  Bang's  clever  and  playful  collages 
demand  close  attention  as  well.  Throughout,  she  uses  common 
materials — from  a  yam  to  a  crab  leg — in  inspired  ways.  Jet-black 
crickets  constructed  of  safety  pins,  screws,  wires,  and  hairpins 
climb  blades  of  grass  toward  a  golden  cricket  to  accompany  the 
lines  "Above  the  chorus,  /  listen!  A  single  cricket  /  shakes  a 
golden  bell." 

10.7  Cole,  Joanna,  and  Stephanie  Calmenson,  compilers.  The  Eentsy, 
Weentsy  Spider:  Fingerplays  and  Action  Rhymes.  Illustrated 
by  Alan  Tiegreen.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1991.  ISBN  0-688- 
09439-2. 64p.  3  and  up. 

This  cheery  collection  of  action  rhymes  brings  together  some  of 
the  most  popular  rhymes  ("This  Old  Man,"  "I'm  a  Little  Tea- 
pot") as  well  as  less  familiar  pieces.  "How-to"  illustrations  dem- 
onstrate how  to  act  out  the  rhymes,  gesture  by  gesture.  An  index 
to  first  lines,  bibliography,  and  some  musical  arrangements  are 
also  included. 

10.8  Cole,  Joanna,  and  Stephanie  Calmenson,  compilers.  Miss  Mary 
Mack,  and  Other  Children's  Street  Rhymes.  Illustrated  by  Alan 
Tiegreen.  Morrow  Junior  Books,  1990.  ISBN  0-688-08330-7.  64p. 
7  and  up. 


4,0 


342 


Poetry 


Joanna  Cole  and  Stephanie  Calmenson  have  collected  five  chap- 
ters of  rhymes  for  street  games  and  jumping  rope — not  the 
rhymes  read  to  kids  in  school  or  at  home,  but  those  that  children 
experience  while  playing  independently  Topical  chapters  in- 
clude "Hand-Clapping/'  "Ball-Bouncing/'  and  "Teases  and 
Comebacks/'  with  introductory  paragraphs  instructing  readers 
on  hand-clapping  and  ball-bouncing  techniques.  The  compilers 
go  to  the  line  in  this  collection  and  include  street  rhymes  to 
which  some  parents  might  object,  but  which  kids  often  chant 
among  themselves. 

10.9  Cole,  William,  compiler.  A  Zooful  of  Animals.  Illustrated  by 
Lynn  Munsinger.  Houghton  Mifflin,  1992.  ISBN  0-395-52278-1. 
88p.  4-9. 

A  trip